1992 Swinburne Higher Education Handbook

Please note
The text in this file has been automatically extracted and may contain
minor errors. For the original version please consult the paper copy
held in the Swinburne Library.

1992 Calendar
January
1
2
New Year's Day
Swinburne re-opens
13 VCE (HSC) results
Australia Day
a
FFbrua%T semester 1 begins
SCT apprentice classes begin
10 SCT all other classes begin
SIT enrolment period begins for Round 1
offers through VTAC
SIT teaching begins: Engineering (alternate
entry only)
17 SIT teaching begins: Graphic Design
and Engineering (final year only)
20 SIT enrolment period begins for Round 2
offers through VTAC
24 SIT teaching begins: Applied Science, Arts,
Business and Engineering (years I-IV)
March
9 Labour Day
31 SIT last day for withdrawal from a first semester
subject, unit or course without penalty of failure'
SIT Census date for HECS (semester 1)
SIT and SCT last day for applications for refund
of General Service Fee
April
8 SCT last day for subject variations to enrolment
for semester 1
10 SIT Applied Science, Business classes end for
Easter break
SCT classes end for Easter break
15 SIT Arts, Engineering, Design classes end for
Easter break
23 SIT Arts, Engineering, Design classes resume
after the Easter break
25 Anzac Day
27 SCT classes resume after the Easter break
29 SIT Graduation ceremony
May
20 SIT Graduation ceremony
31 SIT last day for application for awards for
students completing courses in semester 1, 1991
SIT Swinburne Institute of Technology
SCT: Swinburne College of TAFE
HECS: Higher Education Contribution Scheme
Students should be aware that some faculties have an earlier
deadline for addition of new subjects. Students should consult
their faculty office.
June
8 Queen's Birthday
12 SIT Business semester 1 examination period
begins
15 SCT semester 1 examination period begins
SIT semester 1 examination period begins:
Applied Science, Arts and Engineeering
18 SCT certificate and award presentation
ceremony
26 SIT and SCT semester 1 examination period
ends
SCT semester 1 classes cease
July
3 SCT Apprentice classes end for semester 1
6 SIT int&-semester break begins
13 SIT Design classes resume for semester 2
20 SIT and SCT classes resume for semester 2
(except SIT Design)
August
31 SCT last day for subject variations to enrolments
for semester 2
SIT last day for withdrawal of a second
semester subject, unit or course without penalty
of failure*
SIT Census date for HECS (semester 2)
September
18 SIT classes end for mid-semester break
24 Show Day
25 SIT last day for application for awards for
students completing courses in December 1992
28 SCT classes end for mid-semester break
SIT Arts and Design classes resume after midsemester
break
October
5 SCT and SIT Applied Science. Business and
Engineering classes resume after mid-semester
break
14 SIT Graduation ceremony
November
3 Melbourne Cup Day
6 SIT Business semester 2 examination period
begins
9 SIT semester 2 examination period begins:
Applied Science, Arts and Engineering
20 SIT semester 2 examination ends
23 SCT semester 2 examination period begins
30 SCT last day for application for awards for
students completing courses in December 1992
December
4 SCT semester 2 examination period ends
17 SCT semester 2 ends
24 Swinburne closes for Christmas break

Swinburne
Handbook '92

The information given in this Handbook is intended as a guide
for persons seeking admission to Swinburne Institute of Technology
or Swinburne College of TAFE and shall not be deemed
to constitute a contract on the terms thereof between Swinburne
Institute of Technology or Swinburne College of TAFE
and a student or any thirdparty. Both divisions reserve the right
to cancel, suspend or modify in any way the mattets contained
in this document.
In 1982, the Freedom of Information Act was passed by the
Parliament of Victoria. The Act, which applies to Swinburne
and other tertiary institutions, came into effect on 5 July 1983.
The Act gives (with certain exemptions), legally enforceable
rights of access to information. It is the policy of Swinburne
to conform with the spirit and intention of the Act in the disclosure
to the public of any information they may seek. Enquiries
should be made to the Registrar; Swinburne Limited.
Equality of educational opportunity is Swinburne policy.
There is a total ban on smoking in all Swinburne buildings and
vehicles from January 1 1991
Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
and
Swinburne College of TAFE
John Street, Hawthorn 3122
Australia
PO. Box 218, Hawthorn 3122
Telephone. (03) 819 8911
Telex: Swinbn AA37769
Facs~mile: (03j 819 5454
Divisions of Swinburne Ltd
ISSN 05-1964
Typeset by Rogans Typesetllng Serv~ces, Pty Ltd Marybarough Vncloroa
Prlnted In Avslral8a by 4ustrallan Prml Group Maryborough V~ctor#a

sections
general information
swinburne
institute of technology
applied science
arts
business
engineering
school of design
film and television school

Introduction ...........................................................
Swinburne Council ................................................
Directorate .............................................................
Offlce of the Principal Director ............................
Swinburne Institute of Technology ......................
Swinburne College of TAFE .................................
Swinburne Services ..............................................
Corporate Division ................................................
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark ..........................
Swinburne Services
Library ...................................................................
Student Services
-Advising Centre for Women .................................
-Careers ...............................................................
-Counselling .........................................................
-Health .................................................................
-Housing...............................................................
-Employment........................................................
-Students with a disability .....................................
-Student loans ......................................................
-Student assistance schemes ...............................
Concession tickets ................................................
Postgraduate awards ............................................
Access Education Department .............................
Advising Centre for Women at Swinbume ...........
Catering Department .............................................
Central Technical Workshops ...............................
Chaplaincy .............................................................
Child-care Centre ..................................................
Computer Centre ...................................................
Education Unit
.......................................................
Equal Opportunity Office ......................................
Overseas Student Unit ..........................................
Publicity and Information Unit ..............................
Information Technology Sewices .........................
Student Parking ....................................................
Swinburne Press ...................................................
Swinburne Student Bookshop ..............................
Student activities
Student Union .......................................................
-Clubs and societies .............................................
-Personal accident insurance scheme ..................
-Contact/lnformation Desk ....................................
-Readin room ......................................................
-Radio 8tation ......................................................
-Legal Advisor ......................................................
-Student publications ............................................
-Ethel Hall ............................................................
-Union Cafe ..........................................................
-Swinburne Tool Library .......................................
--Education. Welfare and Research Unit ................
Sports Association ................................................

Swinburne
Swinburne was established in 1908 under the name of 'Eastern
Suburbs Technical College'. The first students were enrolled
in 1909, when classes were begun in carpentry, plumbing
and blacksmithing. The institution grew and prospered.
Soon afterwards, a boys junior technical school and the first
girls technical school in Victoria, were established.
In 1913 the institution changed its name to Swinburne Technical
College to commemorate the Hon. George Swinburne,
a former mayor of Hawthorn and a member of the Parliament
of Victoria, who was largely responsible for the initial establishment
of the college.
In 1965 Swinburne affiliated with the Victoria Institute of
Colleges which was established in that year by an Act of the
Parliament of Victoria to 'foster the development and improvement
of tertiary education in technical, agriculture, commercial
and other fields of learning (including the liberal arts and the
humanitites) in institutions other than in the universities of
Victoria'.
The range of courses and the various levels at which they
were offered grew to such an extent that in 1969, the boys
and girls technical schools were taken over by the Victorian
Education Department while the college remained as an autonomous
institution.
An extensive re-organisation of advanced education took
place in Victoria in the period 1976-78 culminating in the passing
of the Victorian Post-Secondary Education Act. Under
the Act the Victoria lnstitute of Colleges was dissolved and
the Victorian Post-Secondary Education Commission established.
Under the new arrangements, Swinburne Council was
given power to grant bachelor degrees. The first of these were
awarded at a conferring ceremony held on Thursday 21 May
1981 at the Camberwell Civic Centre.
To facilitate operations, teaching is carried out within two divisions,
under the control of one council. They are:
Swinburne lnstitute of Technology - a tertiary institution and
a member of the Unified National System offering courses
for professional qualifications (diploma and degree of
Bachelor) and graduate qualifications (diploma and degrees
of Master and PhD). Enrolments in 1991 were 4,387 full-time
and 3,546 part-time students.
Swinburne College of Technical and Further Education - a
technical and further education college, offering courses at
middle and para-professional level, covering Associate
Diploma, Advanced Certificate, apprenticeship, VCE and
access programs. A number of specialist courses-are provided
also. for industrv and the communitv. Enrolments in 1991 were
1,067 full-time and 3,682 part-time students.
Hawthorn Cam~us
The campus at ~awthorn covers an area of approximately
four hectares. ap~roximatelv 7 km from the City of Melbourne.
It is close to ~lenferrie railway station, is well served by other
means of public transport and is in close proximity to
parklands.
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark
In 1992' Swinburne will commence undergraduate programs
and some postgraduate studies at its Eastern Campus at
Mooroolbark, offering the same excellence of academic
programs as already established at the Hawthorn Campus.
The opening of the new Eastern Campus will provide a small
friendly environment, easily accessible and directly serving
the tertiary educational needs of the outer eastern metropolitan
region with all the amenities of a modern tertiary
institution in a natural bushland setting.
Subject to final planning approval.
Coat of Arms
The coat of arms conferred on Swinburne by the College of
Arms on 25 June 1969 is based on the coat of arms of the
Swinburne family.
At a period during the 12th-13th century, when the northern
counties of England were ruled by the Scots, a knight of
France came to the aid of Queen Margaret of Scotland. She
rewarded him with a grant of land in what is now Northumberland,
on the banks of the Swin Burn, a small river that flows
into the North Tyne, where he built a castle. He became known
as William Swinburn(e) and soon the county reverted to the
crown of England.
The Swinburne family coat of arms in medieval times was
silver with three boars' heads in triangular formation. In the
17th century, during the wars between the Stuart Kings and
the Parliament of England, the Swinburnes fought for the
royalists. After the restoration of Charles II in 1660, the head
of the family was created a baronet for his services. The crest
became a baronet's coronet, with the boar's head rising from
it and the coat of arms, divided horizontally red and silver,
was charged three cinquefoils counter-charged.
Swinburne holds a unique place among educational
institutions in Australia in the link that persists between it and
the founder and his family. The conferring of a modification
of the family's coat of arms preserves and strengthens that
link.
The arms: the basic colours of red and white, and the cinquefoils
charged on the shield, commemorate the arms of the
Swinburne family. The omission of the third cinquefoil which
appears in the family coat and the addition of the Bordure
and the Mullets (Stars) are what are known heraldically as
'differences', which may often serve to indicate an association
with another armigerous body or family. The four Mullets in
Cross symbolise the Southern Cross.
The crest: the demi-Boar and the cinquefoil perpetuate the
Swinburne connection; the book is symbolic of learning.
The motto: the College of Arms' translation of the motto is:
Achievement through learning.

General lnformation
Swinburne Council
Membership as at 12 August 1991
General Information
Appointees of the Governor-in-Council
C.M. Burnup, BA(SIT), DipEd(LaT)
J.J. Eastwood, BA(Hons), DipEd(Melb) (Vice-President)
J.P. Hall, BE(Elec)(Melb), FAlM
J.D.W. Martin, BArch, GradDipT&RP
M.A. Puglisi, LLB(Melb), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) Supreme
Court
B. Van Ernst BA, BEd(Mon), MEd(LaT), TPTC, MACE
Nominee of the Minister for Education
M.A. Johns, BBus(SIT), MCom(Melb), AASA, CPA
Members elected by the Council of Swinburne
T.W. Brown, FCA
T.P. Bruce, LLB(Melb)
T.P. Coman, DipAppChem(STC), FRACl (President)
J.M. Harrison, CBE, AM, FAlM
A. Polis, BA, DipEd(Melb)
J. Short
H.S. Wragge, AM, MEngSc, BEE, FTS, FIEAust, FlREE
Member ex officio
Professor J.G. Wallace, MA, MEd(Glas), PhD(Brist), FASSA
(Director and Chief Executive Officer)
Member elected by Academic Board
F.X. Walsh, BA(Melb), BEd(Mon)
Member elected by Board of Studies
G.A. Harrison, DipMechEng(CIT), BSc(Melb),
llTC(VicePresident)
Member elected by academic staff, SIT
G.C.J. Morieson, BA(Mon), DipSocStud(Melb),
GradDipEd(Haw)
Member elected by academic staff, SCT
K.E. Matthiesson, BA(Hons), DipEd
Members elected by general staff
N.H. Nilsen
I.A. Douglas, BA(Ntcle), MSc(Strath)
Member elected by students, SCT
G.A. Brownlee
Member elected by students, SIT
E.M. Abram, BA(SIT)
Council Secretariat
Secretary
F.G. Bannon, BCom(Melb), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM, LCA
Executive Officer
A.J. Miles, BSc(Melb), BEd(Mon)
Directorate
Director, Swinburne Institute of Technology and
Swinburne College of TAFE
Professor J.G. Wallace, MA, MEd(Glas), PhD(Brist),
FASSA
Associate Director
F.G. Bannon, BCom(Melb), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM, LCA
Director, Swinburne College of TAFE
G.A. Harrison (Acting), DipMechEng(CIT), BSc(Melb), TTTC
Office of the Director
Pmject Officer
S.J. Krul, BA(Hons)(Massey), MAITEA

Swinburne Institute of Technology
Director
Professor J.G. Wallace, MA, MEd(Glas), PhD(Brist), FASSA
Faculty of Applied Science
Dean of Faculty
Professor J.G. McLean, BVSc(Syd), HDA(Hons), PhD(Melb)
Head, Department of A plied Chemistry
I.K. Jones, BAgrSc. Dipk, PhD(Melb), FRACI
Head, Department of Computer Science
Associate Professor D.D. Grant, MSc(Melb), PhD(Reading),
MACM, MIEEE
Acting Head, Department of Mathematics
J.R. lacono, BA, MEc(Mon), TPTC
Head, Department of Physics
Professor R.B. Silberstein, BSc(Hons)(Mon), PhD(Melb),
MAIP, MIBME, MACPSM
Faculty of Arts
Dean of Faculty
Professor L.A. Kilmartin, BA(Qld), MA(ANU), PhD(LaT),
MAPsS
Chair, Department of Humanities
R.L. Love, BSc(Qld), CHPS(Cantab), MA, PhD(Melb)
Head, Department of Psychology
K.J. Heskin, BA(Hons Queens), MA(Dub), PhD(Dunelm),
CPsychol, AFBPsS, ~ P S S
Chalr, Department of Social and Political Studies
RJ. Lwe, BA(Hons). MA(LaT). PhD(ANU)
Faculty of Business
Dean of Faculty
M.C. Frazer, BSc(Hons)(Mon), GradDipEdTert(DD\AE),
MAdmin(Mon), PhD(Camb), AIMM, MAIP, MACE
Acting Head, Department of Accounting
W.C. Nash, BCom, DipEd(Melb), MBA(CranlT)
Head, Department of Information Systems
D.G. Adams, BCom(Melb), MAdmin(Mon), TSTC
Head, Department of Economics
J.B. Wielgosz, BCom(Hons), MA, DipEd(Melb)
Acting Head, Department of Law
J.B. Wielgosz, BCom(Hons), MA, DipEd(Melb)
Head, Department of Marketing and
Organisation Behaviour
Associate Professor C. Christodoulou, BAgSc(Melb), MSc,
MAdmin, PhD(Mon)
Faculty of Engineering
Dean of Faculty
Professor L.M. Gillin, BMetE, MEngSc, MEd(Melb),
PhD(Cantab , ASMB(Ball't), FIEAust, FAIM, MACE, AAIP,
MAIMME. dAIM
De uty Dean (Administration)
N. %rbas, BE(Hons)(WAust), MEngSc, MEd(Melb), MIEEE,
FlEAust
School of Clvil Engineering and Building
Associate Dean
R.B. Sandie, BCE, MEngSc(Melb), FIEAust, MASCE, MACE
School of Electrical Engineering
Associate Dean
B.A. Neyland, BEE(Melb), DipEd(FTC), ME(Melb), Tn%, MIE
Aust
School of Innovation and Enterprise
Director
Professor L.M. Gillin, BMetE, MEngSc, MEd(Melb),
PhWCantab), ASMB(Ball't), FIEAust, FAIM, MACE, AAIP,
MAIMME, MAIM
School of Mechanical and Manufacturing Englneerlng
Associate Dean
W.G. Tea ue, DipMechEng(CIT), BCornm, BE(Mech),
MEng~c(&elb)
School of Design
Head of School
D.G. Murray, BA(Graphics Design)(SIT), lTTC
Film and Television School*
Head of School
J. Sabine, BA(ANU)
Manager Academic Programs (Eastern Campus
Associate Professor B.C. McDonald. BCorn. D~pEc/(Melb),
.FA%, CPA
*The Film and Television School will become part of the
Victorian College of the Arts as from 1 January. 1992.
Swinburne College of TAFE
Director, Swinburne Ltd.
Professor J.G. Wallace
Acting Director, Swinburne Colle e of TAFE
G.A. Harrison, DipMechEng(CIT), #~c(~elb), mC
Assistant Director, Swinburne College of TAFE
Vacant
Head, Business Studies Division
R.W. Conn, BBus(SIT), DipEd(Mon), AASA, CPA
Head, Finance and Information Technolog Department
M.J. Joyce, BBus(SIT), DipEd(Haw), AASA. PA
Head, Marketing and Administration Department
I.M. Walker, BCom(Melb), DipEd(MSC), MA(lllinois, USA)
Manager, Centre for Business Development and Training
J. Torbiner, BEd(BusStuds)(MSC). .. ,
AIM. AIMM. AITD
Acting Head, ~"~ineerin~ and Industrial Science Division
R. Fallu, BSc, DipEd(Mon)
Head, Electrical and Electronics Techndo y Department
AG. Hampton, TechCert(Eledronics). B~d(Beakin)
Acting Head, lndustrial Sciences Department
J. Schulze, DipAppChem(RMIT), DipEd(Haw), ARACl
Head, Mechanical and Manufacturing Technology
De~artment
~.hnnan, CEng(IME, Ireland), DipEng(NavalArch)(RMIT),
BEng(Mech)(RMIT), DipEd(Haw)
~ana~er, Centre for En ineering Technology
L.J. McLaughlan, TlrlC, 8iplT(Haw)
Manager, National Scientific Instrumentation Training
Centre
J. Hall, BSc(Hons), PhD(LaT), ARACl
Acting Head, Further Education and Community Services
Division
R.M. Carmichael, BA(Mon), BEd(LaT)
Head, General and Community Studies Department
G. Arnott, BEc, BEd(Mon), GradDipBusAdmin(S1T)
Head, Access Education Department
J.R. Learmont, BA(Hons), MEd(Mon), . .
MACE
Manager, workplace skills Unit
S. Naylor, TPTC, TSpTC
Senior Curriculum Development Officer
R.M. Carmichael, BA(Mon), BEd(LaT)
Manager, Computer Services Unit
M. Waterhouse, BEc, DipEdUas)
Swinburne services
Computer-based Developments and Information Systems
Mana er, Computer Centre
Ma 8unkefll BEc(Adel)
Education Unit
Head
6. Hawkins, BA(NewEng), MEd(Melb), MACE

Library and lnformation Technology Services
Swinburne Librarian
PC. Simmenauer, BA(Melb), DipLib(NSW), AALlA
Head, lnformation Technology Services
K. Anderson, MA(Brad), BSc(Melb), DipEE, MIEAust, MACE,
mc
Corporate Division
Director
Professor J.G. Wallace, MA(Glas), MEd(Glas), PhD(Brist),
FASSA
Associate Director
F.G. Bannon, BCom(Melb), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM, LCA
Buildings, Grounds and Services
Manager
S. Blackburn (Acting)
Maintenance Officer
Vacant
Management Services Officer
D. Sharp
Central Technical Workshops
Manager
G. Nettleship, CEng, MlMarE
Catering Department
Manager
Vacant
Council Secretariat
Executive Officer
A.J. Miles, BSc(Melb), BEd(Mon)
Equal Opportunity Officer
M. Jones, CertEd(Wales), BEd(VicC), MEdThesis (Mon)
Finance Department
Manager
J. Vander Pal, DipAccy(PTC), BBus(SIT), AASA, CPA, RCA
Systems Accountant
J.F. Rayner, BSc(Melb), DipEd(Melb)
Divisional Accountant, SCT
P Wilkins, BBus(VicC), GradDipAIS(CIT), AASA
Divisional Accountant, SIT
P Hotchin, BA(Deakin), GradDipBusAdmin(SIT), AASA, CPA
Freedom of lnformation Officer
S.P. Jervis, BA(Adel)
Human Resources Department
Manager
PD. Mudd, BE(NSW), AFAlM
Safety Co-ordinator
A. Skotnicki, BAppSc(FIT), GradDiplndHygne(Deakin)
Planning and lnformation Systems
Manager
R.D. Sharma, BSc(Tas), DipEd(Tas), GradDipOpsRes(RM1T)
MEdAdmin(New Eng), PhD
Institutional Promotion and Development
Manager
Vacant
Publicity and lnformation Unit
Head
N. Manning
Swinburne Press
Manager
A.D. McNaughton
Registrar's Department
Registrar
G.L. Williamson, BSc(Adel), GradDipAppSc(S1T)
Assistant Registrar (Applied Science)
M.M. Hickey, BA(Deak)
Assistant Registrar (Arts)
H.M. Ralston, BCom(Melb)
5
General lnformatlon
Assistant Registrar (Business)
M. Conway, BA(Griffith), MAITEA
Assistant Registrar (Engineering)
A.L. Dews, BBus(SIT), ARMIT
Assistant Registrar (Services)
L. Scheuch-Evans, BS in Foriegn Service (G'town)
Assistant Registrar (Student Administration)
P.E. Kocak, BEc(LaT)
Security Department
Chief Security Officer
N. Burge
Swinburne Student Services
Manager
Z. Burgess, BA(Mon), MEd(Couns)(LaT),
GradDipEdPsych(Mon), MAprelim(Melb), MAPsS. VAFT, AIM
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark
Contact Associate Professor B.C. McDonald, Manager
Academic Programs, on 728 2477 or general enquiries
819 8444.
Situated on the site of the former MDA Grammar School in
Edinburgh Rd., Mooroolbark, the new Swinburne Eastern
Campus will provide courses in the Business, Applied
Science, Arts and Engineering Faculties. The proposed
courses are the Bachelor of Business in Accounting,
Marketing and Economics/Marketing and the Bachelor of
Applied Science in Mathematics and Computer Science with
students undertaking the same programs as students at the
Hawthorn Campus. Arts majors proposed in the Bachelor of
Arts are Psychology and Media, offering subject links with
relevant Business areas. The Engineering Faculty proposes
to offer the common first year of its degree. Engineering will
also have a presence with some later year and graduate
studies in Electrical Engineering. This will establish a
complete and fully accredited tertiary environment by having
in place programs ranging from first year undergraduate to
Masters and PhD studies.
The first student intake at the campus is planned for 1992'
and is expected to total approximately 300 students across
the four faculties. Student numbers will grow to a maximum
of around 620 by 1994 and will remain at this level for the
forseeable future.
' Subject to final planning approval.
Swinburne Services
Library and lnformation Technology Services
Library
Swinburne Librarian (Acting)
PC. Simmenauer, BA(Melb), DipLib(NSW), AALlA
Administration
E. Turner, CertAppSocSc(LibTech), CompBusApplCert
Audiovisual
A. Davies. BA(Melb1. GradDiDLib(MCAE\
M. ~awkins, dert~~;~~oc~c(iib~ech) '
A. Steere, AssDipAppSocSc(LibTech)
Periodicals
B. Jones, BSocSc(Lib'ship)(RMIT)
C. Barnes, BA(UNE)
'H. Hazard, BA(Syd), DipLib(Mon)
Technical Services Librarian (Acting)
K. McGrath, BA(Mon), GradDipLib'ship(RMIT), AALlA
AcquisitionslCollection ~ana~ement
C.L. Ellson, BSocSc(Lib'ship)(RMIT),
GradDi~A~oScfkown Plannina1iRMIT1. AALlA
M. ~usiin: BA(MO~), ~ip~d(f&o;~), "
GradDipLib'ship(MCAE)
A. Copeland, BSocSc(RM1T)
L. Charles, AssocDipAppSocSc(LibTech)
A.D. Evans, CertAppSocSc(LibTech)

Cataloguing
J. Butera, BA(Urban Stud)(FIT), GradDip(Lib'ship)(BCAE)
J. Saul, BA(Lib'ship)(BBAE)
J. Meggyesy, CertAppSocSc(LibTech)
'K. Appituley, BEd(lnstTT&EdSci,Jakarta),
GradDip(PAdmin)(GradSch'IPAdmin,Jakarta),
GradDip(Lib'ship)(R1rinaCAE)
"M. Delahey, CertReg(RM1T)
Readers' Services (Acting)
B.J. Nichol, BSccSc(Lib'ship)(RMIT), BA(Melb), AALlA
Circulation
E.A. Carter, BSocSc(Lib'ship (RMIT)
L. Rutherford, AssocDipSoc 4 ~(LibTech)
Reader Education
6. Donkin, DipArts(SIT), GradDipEd(Hawthorn),
AALlA
Reference
J.M. Ager, BA(Melb), GradDipLiblship(CCAE)
Reference and reader education
C. Bertrand. CertA~~SocSci(LibTech)
B.A. camfield, BA~SIT), Assoc~i~~ibship(~~~T)
'C. Cody, BA(Lib'ship)(BCAE), MEnvS(Me1b)
+A. Muir, TC(W1gong), DipT(W1gong), BEd(Lib'ship)(Mon),
AALlA
F. O'Donnell, BA(Liblship)(BCAE)
^T. Olson, BA(Mon), GradDipLib'ship(RM1T)
G. Turnbull, BEd(LaT), GradDipLib'ship(RMIT),
GradDipTeach(BrisCAE), AssDipFineArts(QCA),
CertCommlll(QCA)
"R. Wallis, BA(Mon), GradDipLib'ship(RM1T)
S. Whelan, BA(LaT), GradDipLib'ship(MCAE)
M. Wilkinson, AssDipAppSocSc(LibTech)
Systems and Research
I.A. Douglas, BA(N'cle), MSc(Strath)
R. Higman, CertRadTVElecTech(RM1T)
Contract staff (full or part-time)
lnformation Technology Services
K. Anderson, MA(Brad), BSc(Melb), DipEE, MIEAust,
MACE, TTTC
R. Philp, ABC TechCert
G. Dudley, CertTech(AV)(RMIT)
M. Clarke
G. Hay
K. Salehi, BA(CIT), DipPSP(RM1T)
M. Pledger, BA(Liblship)(SAIT)
G. Thompson
T. Young, BAppSci(Phot)(RMIT)
N. Alwis, City & Guilds FullTechCert(Lond)
Bernard Hames Library
The major purpose of the library is to supplement and support
formal course instruction in the two teaching divisions of
Swinburne and to provide some opportunity for recreational
and general reading. All books, periodicals and other materials
in the collection are available for use in the library and most
may be borrowed.
In 1991 the collection comprised approximately 190,000 items.
2,900 periodical titles are received, including a wide range
of indexes and abstracts.
There is also a large collection of audiovisual materials
including videodiscs and computer software training
packages, video and audio tapes and art slides.
Library staff work in close association with teaching staff in
developing these resources, and in helping students by
introducing them to a large and diverse collection of literature
and a wide range of media on all subjects. Formal and informal
instruction is given to students on the use of the catalogue,
reference works and bibliographical aids. Reciprocal
borrowing facilities with other tertiary educational institutions
have been arranged to increase the resources available to
students and staff.
lnformation Technology Services
lnformation Technology Services is located in room BA309
of the Business and Arts Building, and is available for use
by all full-time and part-time staff of both divisions.
The services offered include the locatina. bookina and screening
of educational films; audio and video recordyng including
micro-teaching; 35mm slide and overhead projector transparency
making; general photographic assignments; high
speed audio duplicating, sound studio production and editing,
and production of computer-based learning resources.
Intending users of audio and video studio recording facilities
are advised to consult with the staff of lnforrnation Technology
Services well in advance of the recording date.
Slide projectors, overhead projectors, audio and videotape
recorderg equipment for projecting computer output and other
audiovisual equipment are available for short term loan.
Library rules for students
Persons entitled to use the library
The library is available for the use of all full-time and parttime
students and staff of Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
and Swinburne College of TAFE who accept the following
rules.
Members of the general public, including past students and
staff are welcome to read or use audiovisual facilities within
the library, provided that they too, accept the rules. They may
also borrow from the library on payment of a membership fee
to the Swinburne Library lnforrnation Service. The Swinburne
Librarian, or the senior staff member on the premises, may
refuse entry to the library to any person not registered as a
borrower.
Persons entitled to borrow from the library
Members of the Council of Swinburne.
Full-time and part-time staff members of Swinburne lnstitute
of Technology and Swinburne College of TAFE.
Full-time and part-time students of Swinburne lnstitute of
Technology and Swinburne College of TAFE.
Registered borrowers from other educational institutions with
which Swinburne has a reciprocal borrowing arrangement.
Registered members of the Swinburne Library lnformation
Service.
Such other persons or organisat~ons as the Swinburne Librarian
may from time to time approve as borrowers.
Hours of opening
Normal hours of opening for the library during semester are:
Monday to Thursday: - 8.45am to 10.00pm
Friday: 8.45am to 8.30pm
Note: Loans, reserve desks and photocopying facilities close
15 minutes before the library.
Saturdays: 12.00 noon to 5.00pm
From early March to the last Saturday in the end-of-year
examination period, except Easter Saturday and four
Saturdays in July.
Sundays: 1.00pm to 5.00pm
See notice board and bulletin board on the library's on-line
catalogue for starting dates each semester.
Public holidays
Anzac Day: 2.00pm to 8.30pm
Queen's Birthday: 8.45am to 8.30pm
Show Day: 2.00pm to 8.30pm
Cup Day: 8.45am to 8.30pm
Closed on all other public holidays.
Vacations and non-teaching periods
During these periods the library is open for a limited number
of hours. Check notice boards outside the Library entrance
for details or ring the Library Inquiry Desk on 819 8330.
Details of all variations from the normal hours will be posted
on notice boards in the library at appropriate times and
published in student and staff newsletters and will be

displayed on the bulletin board on the library's on-line
catalogue.
Student loans
Loans to students are available only on presentation of a
current Swinburne identity card and acceptance of the
following conditions:
General
All material borrowed must be recorded at appropriate issue
points before the patron enters the security gate to leave the
library. All material borrowed must be returned by the date
and time indicated. With the exception of audiovisual,
periodical and overdue items, items borrowed should normally
be returned through the chutes located outside the main
entrance. Audiovisual and periodical mater~al should be
returned to the appropriate return chute inside the library.
Overdue items should be returned to the overdues counter.
Borrowing periods
Books
The normal loan period for most books is a fortnight. This
period may be extended for a further fortnight provided
another user has not already placed the item on hold and
it is not overdue. Books on the open shelves which are in
moderately heavy demand are available for 3-day loan. They
may be borrowed at any time of the day but may not be
renewed. These loans must be returned half an hour before
the library closing time on the due date.
Audiovisual items
Videocassettes marked 'HOME LOAN' are available for twoday
loan. Most audiovisual material may be borrowed for
classroom use. Audiocassettes and art slides are available
for weekly loan. Language tapes are available for monthly
loan but are non-renewable.
Periodicals
Unbound periodicals, including annuals and irregular
publications but excluding display issues are available for
24-hour loan. This material may be borrowed after 9.00am
and must be returned before the library closes the following
day. Second copies of periodicals are available for one week
loan.
Counter reserve
Most material in this collection may be borrowed for a period
of two hours for use in the library. A small number of items
are available for overnight loan. This material may be
borrowed after 4.00pm (3.00pm on weekends) and should be
returned by 9.00am the next day, or is available for up to
24-hour loan after 4.00pq1 for part-time students.
Periodical reserve collection
Most material in this collection may be borrowed for use in
the library only. Some unbound popular magazines are also
housed in periodicals reserve, and may be borrowed as
specified in 4.2.3 above.
ltems not available for loan outside the library:
These include material in the reference collection
(distinguished by the location symbol 'R' in the call number),
rare books ('V'), and archive collections ('AR'), microfilms or
microfiche, and those materials marked 'Not for loan' or
Display'.
Bound periodicals, newspapers, indexes, abstracts and
government publications from the deposit collection may not
be borrowed.
Holds may be placed on books which are out on loan at the
inquiry section of the loans counter.
Fines. Loans are issued subject to the imposition of penalties
for late return as below. Fines will not increase once the item
has been returned.
Fortnightly, weekly and monthly loans - per item $0.50 per
day or part thereof overdue, to a maximum of $5.00,
suspension of borrowing privileges and withholding of
examination results.
ltems not returned by the date specified when recalled -
General Information
$10.00 per item, suspension of borrowing privileges and
withholding of examination results.
All short-term loans (7 days or less), excluding audiocassettes
- per item $1.25 per day or part thereof overdue to a
maximum of $5.00, suspension of borrowing privileges and
withholding of examination results.
Overnight loans - per item:
First day: $0.50 per hour late, to a maximum of $5.00 per item,
suspension of borrowing privileges and withholding of
examination results.
Loans from reserve collections
(Within the library building) per item: $0.50 per hour late, to
a maximum of $5.00, suspension of borrowing privileges and
withholding of examination results.
Reciprocal borrowing applications
Authorisations for reciprocal borrowing will not be issued to
students who have accrued $30.00 or more in fines during
the ~revious twelve months.
Inter-library loans
Students otherwise eligible for inter-library loans but who have
exceeded the fine limit (see 4.5.5) will also have inter-library
requests refused.
Lost or damaged library material
If an item is lost or damaged the loss or damage must be
reported immediately to the overdues section. The borrower
shall be responsible for the replacement cost plus a
processing charge or the cost of repair.
Identity cards
Cards are not transferable. A currrent Swinburne identity card
must be produced when borrowing, otherwise service will be
ref used.
Lost ID cards may be replaced at Student Administration for
a fee of $5.00.
Photocopying
Users must abide by the relevant provisions of the Copyright
Act.
Rules for general conduct
Eating is not permitted in areas of the library open to the
public.
Drinking, except from the drinking fountains, is not permitted
in areas of the library open to the public.
Playing games is not permitted in the library.
Smoking is not permitted in the library.
It is a condition of entry to the library that bags and cases
may be inspected on leaving.
An atmosphere of quiet must be maintained in the library so
that it is at all times a place conducive to independent study
and.quiet reading. Quiet study conversation areas are located
on levels 2 and 3 and in conversation rooms. Complete silence
must be observed on levels 1 and 4 and the stair lobbies on
levels 3 and 4.
Any person who, in the opinion of a library staff member and
the Librarian-in-Charge, repeatedly fails to observe any of the
above rules, or who engages in anti-social behaviour or
damages library property in any way, must produce their ID
card and give their name on request.
Offenders will be responsible for all damage caused, and will
be subject to disciplinary action which may include exclusion
from the library, suspension of borrowing privileges, and
withholding of examination results.
If a student is dissatisfied with any punitive action taken by
the library they may have the issue reviewed in accordance
with Swinburne's official Grievance Procedures (see
Swinburne handbooks).
Power to alter rules
One or more of the rules may be changed from time to time
by the Director, on the recommendation of the Swinburne
Librarian.

At the discretion of the Swinburne Librarian one or more of
the rules may, under special circumstances, be temporarily
suspended.
Any change to or suspension of any rule shall be reported
at the earliest opportunity to the Director and to the library
and ITS Committee.
Student Services
Manager
2. Burgess, BA(Mon), MEd(Couns)(LaT),
GradDioEdPsvchlMonash). MAorelimlMelbl. MAPsS.
Administrative Officer
M. Manel, BSc(Stirl), BEd(Couns)(LaT)
Advising Centre for Women
(For further information see page 10)
Student Counselling staff
Hand -
J. Shopland, BSc(Melb), GDipEdCouns(RMIT),
GradDi~HumanServicesResearch(Phillip). . .. EdD(UMass),
MAPS$ VAFT
Student Counsellors
B. Jenkins, BEd(MCAE), GDipApPsych(Couns)(SIT)
R. Kelly, BA(Melb), DipEd(Mon), MA(Linguistics)(Lanc),
MA(Couns)(Auck)
R. McDonald, BA(Melb), DipEdPsych(Mon), MAPsS
C. McLeod, BBehSc(Hons)(LaT), DipEd(LaT), MAPsS
Receptionist
J. Ralph
Housing, Part-time Employment and Financial Advice
B. Graham, BAppSc(Pharm)(TCAE)
Careers Services Staff
Head
R. Ware, BA(LaT), GDipEd(MSC), PostGDipCareers
NicColl)
careers Counsellor
R.C. Waite, BA, GDipEd(Flinders), GDipEdCouns(Sai)
Schools Liaison Officer
L.E. Baron, BA(RMIT), DipEd(LaT)
Careers Information Officer
K. Weedon, BA(Ballarat), GradDipApSc in Prof.
Psych(Bal1arat)
Employment Program Officer
S. Davis
Student Health Service staff
Head
J. Fischer, RN, RM(Vic)(UK), RN(USA)
Medical Director
S. Clarke, MB. BS(Lond)
Sister
A. Hart. RN(Vic)
Administrative Assistant
J. Wright
Swinburne Student Services
The following services are available to all students:
Careers - course information
graduate employment
schools liaison program
counselling
Counselling - psychological
educational
financial
Health
Housing
Part-time employment
Manager's Office
Location: BA206
Tel.: 819 8423
Student Counselling
Location: room 206, level 2, Business and Arts Building
Telephone: 819 8025
The Student Counselling Service is available to students, staff,
former students, parents and partners of students. The service
is free and strictly confidential.
Counsellors help in areas such as loneliness, adjustment to
life at Swinburne, subject choice, deferment, choosing a
course, examination anxiety, exclusion, vocational choice,
studvina oart-time. leave of absence. academic difficulties.
con6ernabout others, study problems; marital and
counselling, relationships, disabilities, sexuality, family, financial
problems, career planning and decisions, and student
allowances. Our service offers thousands of consultations
each year. No problem is considered too small.
The Student Counselling Service endeavours to develop and
support procedures which will increase the general welfare
of students and enhance their education at Swinburne. To this
end, the service seeks representation at relevant levels
throughout Swinburne. When appropriate, counsellors act as
advocates for students within Swinburne, and with relevant
external organisations such as the Department of Social Security
and the Commonwealth Department of Education and
Training.
The Counselling Service is open from 9.00am to 5.00pm on
Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Friday and from 9.00am to
8.00pm on Wednesday. The service operates on both a fixed
appointment and 'drop-in' basis.
Careers Services
Location: Room EW108 Conference Centre (opposite
Glenferrie Train Station)
Telephone: 819 852118023
The Careers Service is available to Swinburne students,
prospective students, graduates and staff. The service is free
and offers comprehensive career, course and employment
information and counselling.
The Careers Library is maintained with up-to-date information
about courses from TAFE to postgraduate levels, careers
news, and one graduate employment. Students can receive
assistance in processing and understanding the information
available.
Careers Counselling is available for all those requiring
professional assistance in exploring the many issues involved
in career and course planning. Demand for this service is high
so it is necessary for an appointment to be made.
Graduate placement and student employment advice is also
available for students and graduates seeking full-time
employment. Services include vacation employment,
employer visits, campus interview programs, assistance with
job applications, interview techniques and resumes. These
are offered individually or in group workshops. An employment
register is also maintained for the use of students and
graduates.
The Schools Liaison Program is an integral part of the service
and facilitates communication between secondary schools
and Swinburne. Through this program prospective students
are asked to explore the educational opportunities available
at Swinburne.
Careers Services is open throughout the year from 9.00 a.m.
to 5.00pm Monday to Friday.
Student Health
Location: laneway behind library between John and William
Street
Telephone: 819 8483 & 819 8703
The service is available to all students. It is free and strictly
confidential. The service is available to staff for emergency
treatment only.
The service offers to all students the opportunity to seek help

General hformatlon
and answers to their problems in a confidential and non- Student loans
judgemental atmosphere; and to Promote a positive and confident
attitude towards their health maintenance. We offer
With approval of the Loans Fund Committee, financial
assistance may be obtained for full-time *,dents from the
emergency treatment, general first-aid, medical consultation following loan funds:
by appointment, nursing and medical counselling on such
issues as contraception, sexually transmitted diseases, sports Help for Students Loan Fund
injuries, nutrition, immunizations, health insurance advice. Special Assistance for Students Program
Classes in cardio pulmonary resuscitation and first-aid are Student Aid Fund
also offered as well as eye tests and hearing tests ROfary Swinburne Fund
(audiograms) and referral information (e.g. physiotherapy, Emergency, short term loans are available to full and partdental
care and local doctors).
time students from the student union aid fund.
The service is open during teaching time, Monday to Friday: Enquiries should be made to Student Finance.
M5am - 5.00pm. Telephone: 819 8882.
Doctor by appointment - 4 hours daily.
Nurses available for consultation 9.00am-5.00pm.
Dependent Spouse Allowance
If you qualify for living allowance at the independent rate and
Student housing, part-time employment and financial you have a spouse and child who are dependent on you, you
advice
may receive an additional allowance of up to $121.60 a week
Location: BA206, level 2, Business and Arts Building.
($6341 a year).
Telephone: 819 8882
The allowance is also payable for a dependent de facto
The housing service provides addresses of a wide range of
spouse if there is a natural or adopted child of the relationship.
accommodation, including full board, single rooms, houses,
flats and hostels. Many students also use the service to find
Some students are eligible for a fares allowance.
other students to share accommodation. Advice on living away There is an education supplement of $30.00 p.w. ($1,560) for
from home, and the legal and financial problems associated certain groups of pensioners and beneficiaries (normal
with renting is also available to all Swinburne students. AUSTUDY requirements must also be met).
Assistance is also provided for students seeking part-time,
and casual employment. This service includes advice on Health Care Card
techniques of obtaining part-time work, and information on Students who qualify for AUSTUDY may also be eligible for
specific vacancies. Students are notified of available work via a Health Care Card from the Department of Social Security.
the part-time employment notice-board.
The major benefit of this card is access to low cost
pharmaceutical prescriptions. You can obtain more
The office is open from 9.00am 5.00pm Monday to information about the Health Care Card bv contactina vour
Students with a disabilitv
Students with a disability aie encouraged to first advise their
department. They may also wish to make contact with the
Student Counselling Service. The counsellors can advise or
act as advocates on specific study needs, career planning,
examination arrangements, access to buildings, use of lifts,
telephones and parking facilities, etc. Responding to the
various needs of students is a continually developing process.
It is important, therefore, that you make your particular needs
known. Swinburne is a participant in the State and Federal
Governments' equal opportunity program.
The Student Counselling Service is located in room 206 on
level 2, Business and Arts Building.
Telephone: 819 8025
Student assistance schemes
AUSTUDY
The Commonwealth Government provides financial assistance
for students aged 16 and over engaged in full-time
secondary or tertiary study. To be eligible, students must meet
certain requirements regarding previous study, income, other
awards held, etc.
As from 1 January 1991 the following weekly benefits were
available. These will be adjusted in 1992.
How much is the maximum AUSTUDV living allowance?
local DSS office.
-.
Child Care Assistance for Sole Parents
Assistance is available to sole parents without access to a
Commonwealth subsidised child care place. A student in this
situation will be required to meet the first $15 per week for
one child and the first $17 per week for twoor more children.
The remaining cost of a place up to a fee of $100 per week
will be met by the Government.
Information about child care places that attract this assistance
is available from AUSTUDY Offices.
Aboriginal Secondary Assistance Scheme
(ABSTUDV)
k r students of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander descent
undertaking an approved full-time or part-time tertiary course,
or undertaking full-time secondary schooling, or who are 14
years of age on 1 January 1991 and go to primary school.
This scheme if administered by DEET.
'Houng Homeless Allowance
This scheme was introduced by the Commonwealth Government
on 1 July 1986 for full-time secondary or tertiary students
or people receiving a Social Security benefit. Ask at Student
Services for more information.
Family Allowance Su plement
Students who are eligible b a living allowance and who have
a dependent child may receive Family Allowance Supplement
(FAS) from the Department of Social Security.
Rate
Weekly maximum
16-17 years 18 and over Special
Standard 62.05 74.55 88.40
Away 102.40 113.25 134.30
Independent: single 102.40 113.25 134.30
married without child(ren) 102.40 113.25 121.60
married with child(ren) 121.60 121.60 121.60
(159.75 for
sole parents)

FAS will be paid to eligible clients at the maximum rate, free
of any income test and in addition to family allowance. It IS
not taxable.
The amount you receive depends on how many children you
get family allowance for, and whether you rent accommodation
privately.
You can find out more details and how to apply from your local
DSS office.
For further information
About any of the schemes mentioned contact Student
Finance, BA206, Business and Arts Building.
Telephone: 819 8882.
Concession tickets
Concession tickets are available for travel to and from Swinburne
on public transport.
Students who wish to purchase these tickets should go to the
Student Administration Office to complete the necessary
forms.
Only full-time students are eligible for fare concessions.
Students must present their student card when applying for
a concession form. Australian Airlines and Ansett Airlines
concessions are available from The Contact Centre, Student
Union or from STA Travel Agencies.
Full-time students are also eligible for an international student
card. Available from The Contact Centre, Student Union.
Scholarships and Awards
Scholarships are available in the areas of Minlng, Metallurgy,
Geoloav. Accountina. Mechanical, Chemical, Electrical
~n~in&;in~ and ~nviknmental Sciences. These scholarships
have a value of $5,000 per annum (1992). Further enquiries
should be made to Brian Roberts, Manager - Personnel
Services, Renison Goldfields Consolidated Ltd, Goldfield
House, 1 Alfred Street, Sydney, NSW 2000.
There are a number of scholarships and awards for which
Swinburne students may be eligible. Enquiries about these
awards should be directed to the Registrar or relevant faculty,
division or department.
Postgraduate awards
Commonwealth postgraduate awards assist people studying
full-time for Masters degrees. Contact the Office of Research
and Graduate Studies, room AD204, telephone 819 8238.
Access Education Department
Head
J. Learmont, BA(Hons), MEd(Mon), MACE, 819 8816
Compensatory Education
Individual assistance in English and mathematics is available
to students of all courses at Swinburne. The need for tuition
may be related to a student's problems with a mathematics
andlor English subject. Alternatively, difficulties in English or
mathematics may affect a student's progress in a range of
subjects of their particular course of study. Particular attention
is given to the provision of English tuition to TAFE and SIT
students from non-English speaking backgrounds.
Tuition may be short-term to overcome a specific difficulty or
arranged on a weekly basis over a longer period of time.
Community Access Programs
Staff at the Centre are also responsible for providing access
to any members of the community who wish to improve their
English andlor mathematics skills.
Consequently, a variety of courses in mathematics and
English are available at a range of different skill levels from
1:l tuition to small group classes. In addition, courses are
provided with appropriate mathematics and English content
to cater for students interested in sitting an entrance examination
in nursing, the police force or the fire brigade.
The Centre operates from the houses located at 42 and 44
William Street. Understanding staff are available to discuss
people's problems in English andlor mathematics and followup
with appropriate tuition.
Advising Centre for Women at Swinburne
The Advising Centre for Women has a two-fold purpose:
1) to provide careers and course advice for women interested
in pursuing studies in Business, Engineering and Applied
Science.
2) to provide a support service for women studying in the
above areas.
For more information please contact:
The Advising Centre for Women
463 Burwood Road, Hawthorn 3122
Ph.: 819 8633
Catering Department
The Cafeteria is located above the Ethel Swinburne Hall
(shown as building no. 10 on campus map on inside back
cover of this Handbook). Entrances are from the corner of
John Street and Burwood Road, from level 3 of the South
Engineering Building and level 3 of the new Union Building.
The Cafeteria provides a range of hot food including casseroles,
sandwiches, cakes, fruit, home-made soup and vegetarian
lines. We also have a range of fruit juices, yoghurt and
hot drinks.
The Department also operates a Coffee Shop in the SCT area.
Hot and cold drinks and food are available.
The Staff Dining Room is located on level 3 of the South
Engineering Building, Room no. SE318.
Mooroolbark Campus
Amenities building
Range of hot food including casseroles, sandwiches, cakes,
fruit, hot and cold drinks.
Central Technical Workshops
Manager
G. Nettleship, CEng, MIMarE, 819 8326
The technical workshop manufactures teaching aids and prepares
experimental work for staff and students (in consultation
with lecturers).
Equipment available includes lathes, milling machines, sheet
metal, welding facilities including aluminium and stainless
steel.
The instrument workshop repairs and maintains instrumentation
in the electronic, mechanical, electrical, and to a minor
degree, optical fields. Some manufacturing for student projects
in consultation with lecturers, is also undertaken.
Chaplaincy
Location: 473 Burwood Rd., room 201, alongside the Student
Health Centre
Telephone: 819 8489
Hours: Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday 9.00am-5.00pm
David Rathgen is the Chaplain at Swinburne, and although
an ordained Anglican priest, he is available to all students
(and staff) regardless of their religious affiliation (or lack of it).
David can arrange weddings, especially for those who find
the traditional church setting difficult, or who have had a
previous marriage. David will also arrange to celebrate a

aby's birth (a 'christening'), an engagement, or assist with
bereavement, grief and funerals (if necessary).
As a pastor, he is able to support those in any need, or who
wish to work through the basic issues of life, and who wish
to find a purpose or sense of direction. David will help you
clarify whatever is happening in your life and where God might
be at work in it.
David is interested in clarifying the religious and spiritual
aspects of daily living and their impact upon social issues.
New students are particularly invited to call in and introduce
themselves. David is in contact with all denominations in the
Hawthorn area, and is able to supply information about them
upon request.
Visiting Chaplains
For specific religious denominations, visiting chaplains are
available, e.g.: Catholic, Jewish, Lutheran.
Overseas students may also contact visiting chaplains of their
own language groups: Korean, Japanese, Chinese,
Indonesian, etc.
Child-care Centre
Cosrdinator
S. Kelly, 819 8519
A cooperative was formed in 1975 to provide child-care
facilities at Swinburne for parents in need of this service.
The primary objective of the Centre is to meet the needs of
the children by providing a secure and happy atmosphere
combined with experiences which will foster their development.
The aims of the Centre revolve around encouraging
a beneficial contact that will produce an understanding of the
needs of the individual child and their family.
The Centre's two houses can cater for up to thirty-five children
at one time with six caring staff. The children are not separated
into age groups but form one large, if rather noisy, family. A
combination of structured and free choice experiences have
created a warm, relaxed program. The children are encouraged
to go at their own pace, to develop their own style, to
find their own solutions and enjoy their own creativity.
The Centre caters for children up to five years of age, not only
from Swinburne parents, but other members of the community.
A sliding scale of fees has been adopted.
Early application for use of this service is advised as there
is a waiting list in existence.
Computer Centre
Manager
M. Plunkett, BEc(Ade1)
Enquiries
S. Allan
Telephone: 819 8509
~he'swinburne Computer Centre provides computing and
data ormessing facilities for teaching, - research and administratibe
applic&ons.
In 1990 the Computer Centre will have two processors
available to students who require access to Swinburne's
central computing facilities. These machines will be located
in the Computer Centre's main computer room.
(a) IBM 3090n20E
The largest of these systems is the IBM 3090 Model 120E.
The 3090 represents a closer association with the mainstream
requirements of the computing industry. This
association is reflected in the curriculum of the new
Bachelor of lnformation Technology degree and Swinburne's
association with IBM which sees Swinburne staff
members involved with IBM in the presentation of training
programs to industry.
General Information
The 3090 is configured with 32 Mb main memory, 16
channels, 15 giga bytes of disc storage and a communication
subsystem to support asynchronous and synchronous
terminals, local area and wide area networks and
several remote user sites. Local terminal facilities are
distributed through the Applied Science, Art, Arts,
Business and Engineering faculties and the TAFE college.
Users have access to a range of programming languages
(including COBOL, FORTRAN, PASCAL, RPG, APL, C,
Modula 2, BASIC and Assembler) and software packages
(including SPSS, SIR, SAS, IMSL, NASTRAN, CADAM
and CATIA). Data base products available on the 3090n20
are CICSIDB2; support for artificial intelligence
applications is provided by IBM's Expert System
Environment (ESE) and the operating systems available
include MVSIXA.
Swinburne has entered an arrangement with McCormack
and Dodge which has resulted in that company's financial
software being included in Swinburne's undergraduate
accounting programs. Along with our arrangements with
IBM (Aust) Limited this is further evidence of commitment
to the provision of industry standard computing facilities
for our students.
(b) UNlX
The UNlX operating system is supported at the Swinburne
Computer Centre on an Encore Multimax 310. The parallel
architecture of the Encore will facilitate low cost upgrades
which in turn will ensure our ability to expand the configuration,
at a reasonable cost, in line with the growth in
demand for UNlX resources.
(c) Network
The Computer Centre also administers an extensive LAN
among other communication facilities. The LAN currrently
joins all Computer Centre facilities as well as most of
those from other departments using a fibre optic
backbone.
PC facilities are also on this LAN and the Computer
Centre administers a large Banyan Vines PC network to
which all Computer Centre PC facilities are joined. There
is a wide range of DOS software available as well as
access to other computing facilities via the network, using
TCPllP protocols.
The Computer Centre is also responsible for the development,
maintenance and production of a number of systems used
by the non-teaching sector of the Institute. The major applications
are Student Administration, General Ledger and the
Library circulation and cataloguing systems. Basic maintenance
of the Institute's terminal network is also administered
by staff of the Computer Centre.
Most of a student's computing requirements can be satisfied
by using a PC connected to either the UNlX or IBM systems
and the different teaching departments maintain their own
internal booking procedures to allow access to those
terminals.
Assistance to students is provided through a duty programmer
service for those problems that cannot be solved by the teaching
staff. In addition, seminars are conducted specifically to
ensure that teaching staff and students use the computing
facilities in an efficient and co-ordinated manner. The
Computer Centre produces a publication 'User News' several
times throughout the academic year. Designed to assist and
acquaint users in the application of Swinburne's hardware
and software facilities 'User News' is commended to all
students.
Students may, on application to the Centre, be allocated an
account and budget for computer facility usage. The allocation
controls disc space, input, output and central processor
facilities and is determined according to the requirements of
the student's course.
The accounts are allocated only for the direct requirements
of a student's course of study. Any student who uses the
facilities for game playing or matters not associated with a

course, or who interferes with other users through manipulation
of passwords or files, can expect, at minimum, immediate
suspension of their usage rights to Swinburne computing
facilities as well as any other penalties which may be determined
from time to time.
Education Unit
Head, Education Unit
B. Hawkins, BA(New Eng), MEd(Melb), MACE, 819 8384
The function of the Education Unit is to assist the teaching1
learning departments throughout the lnstitute by keeping them
informed of developments in education and related disciplines
through seminars, workshops and a newsletter; by working
with staff who are developing and introducing new methods
and courses; by channelling funds to staff who need to be
relieved temporarily, of teaching duties or who require special
equipment or other arrangements in order to introduce new
methods of technology; and by providing facilities for research
into specific educational topics.
Equal Opportunity Office
Equal Opportunity Officer
Location: 463 Burwood Road
It is the policy of Swinburne to provide an educational
environment of equal opportunity for all.
Discrimination on the grounds of sex, race, marital status,
impairments, religious or political beliefs, sexual preference,
and being a parent, childless and de facto spouse is
forbidden.
Admissions to courses and assessment of student
performances will be conducted according to merit only.
Swinburne is committed to providing an environment free from
sexual harassment as well as pursuing a policy of affirmative
action.
For further advice or assistance please contact Mary Jones,
Equal Opportunity Officer on 819 8855.
Overseas Student Unit
Manager
I.A. McCormick, BCom(Melb), MAdmin(Mon), FASA, CPA
Overseas Student Advisors
Catherine Chu, BA(Mon)
Ida Lee, BA(Mon)
Molly Liu
Sonia Lee
Secretary
Doreen Pun, DipComm(HKBC)
Location
473 Burwood Road, Hawthorn 819 8151
The Overseas Student Unit is responsible for the recruitment
and welfare of overseas students studying at Swinburne. All
applications from non residents of Australia wishing to study
at Swinburne should be lodged with the Unit.
Students are met at Melbourne airport, attend special
orientation classes and are enrolled through the Unit.
The co-ordination of the on-going welfare of overseas students
is also the responsibility of the Unit.
Publicity and lnformation Unit
Head
N. Manning, 819 8847
Handbook and Course Brochures
H. Hayes, DipArts(Media), DipEd, 819 8548
General Enquiries
R. Boschen
E. O'Brien, 819 8444
The role of the Publicity and lnformation Unit is to publicise,
both internally and externally, the activities of the Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology and College of TAFE. The specific
functions of the unit include the provision, production and
distribution of information relating to Swinburne courses, staff
and campus activities. This is achieved through media liaison
and advertising, specific course brochures and external
publications such as Swinburne news, the Annual Swinburne
handbooks, an internal staff newsletter and the staffing and
resourcing of the Enquiries Office.
One of the unit's highest priorities is to actively promote Swinburne's
public profile and the quality and range of education
offered. To this end, the unit plays a major role in the coordination
and organisation of exhibitions which includes
Swinburne's annual Open Day.
Hire of Swinburne facilities
Outside groups wishing to use Swinburne facilities should
contact the P.I.U. to discuss their requirements. Swinburne
lecture theatres and classrooms may be booked for use by
outside organisations.
Swinburne Conference Centre
The Swinburne Conference Centre is located at the northwest
end of the campus. It is a pleasantly situated centre, ideal
for small conferences, seminars and training courses. It comprises
a large seminar room, one smaller discussion room
and a dining room, all available for outside hire. Enquiries
about the facilitites available or booking of the centre should
be directed to the office staff, 819 8172.
Student parking
Enquiries
Buildings, Grounds and Services, 819 8243 or 819 8760
Limited off-street car parking facilities are provided for
students, part-time and full-time. No charge is made.
Conditions of use
Use of these facilities IS strictly at the car owner's risk and
is subject to:
- a current Swinburne parking permit or sticker valid for
the car park in question being clearly displayed on the
windscreen;
- availability of space in the car park;
- the car being within a marked parking bay;
and
- the driver's observance of directions given by any of Swinburne's
Parking or Security Officers.
Parking permits
Available free of charge from Buildings, Grounds and
Services. Student ID card is required.
Part-time students
Evening and other part-time students may not leave cars in
Swinburne car parks during the day while they attend work.
Short course students
Students require a parking permit issued by the office organising
the course. Availability of space is not assured.
Hours of access
The main car parks are opened at 7.45am and close at
10.00pm.
Infringement of parking rules
Failure to comply with parking regulations could incur a
Parking lnfringement Notice of up to $40. Under the Road
Safety Act 1986, the fines are enforceable in court.

Those who abuse the system are also liable to have their parking
privileges withdrawn and the parking permits for their cars
revoked.
Students with disabilities
Consideration is given to the provision of resewed spaces
for students with physical disabilities.
Enquiries should be directed to Student Administration.
Motorcycles and bicycles
Convenient parking for motorcycles is available in John Street,
while the Business and Arts Building and Applied Science
Building car parks offer undercover racks for bicycles.
Location of car parks
On-campus parking areas are indicated on the map on the
inside back cover of this Handbook. In addition, the staff car
parks in Wakefield Street (except for marked resewed bays)
and Paterson Street may be used by students after 5.00pm
only.
Additional parking areas which can be used are located immediately
behind the Hawthorn Football Ground, accessible from
Linda Crescent (off Glenferrie Road). Only 7 minutes walk
from Swinburne, that area offers ample parking.
Swinburne Press
Manager
D. McNaughton, 819 8123
The publications department was established in 1952 with
a staff of three and one duplicating machine. Over the years
this department has developed into the Swinburne Press with
a staff of 12 and a full offset printing capacity.
The Press is primarily designed to give a fast print service
geared to meet requirements for the production of class notes,
students material and various types of administrative stationery.
The major requirement is for single colour work but in
addition the Press has a limited line colour production
capacity. . .
In support of its printing element the Press operates a small
binderv to collate, staple and trim publications and a computer
typesetting service. '
Swinburne Press is registered under the Business NamesAct
1962 and is a recognised printing and publishing house.
Swinburne Student Bookshop Co-operative
Limited
Manager
R. Wilkens, 819 8225
General enquiries: 819 4406
History
The Co-operative began trading in February 1978, its objective
being to provide an efficient and convenient service to
the Swinburne community.
The Bookshop was set up as a Co-operative structure to raise
working capital via the sale of shares and also to ensure that
the control of the operation remained with the members who
use the Co-operative. The Co-operative's profits remain with
the organisation to ensure its continued growth and viability.
No external beneficiaries exist.
Membership
For the Co-operative to continue to operate successfully it
must have members. By members buying shares and patronising
the bookshop they are in turn ensuring the Bookshop
has an inflow of share capital for growth and the patronage
ensures its viability.
General Information
In return the Co-operative provides a convenient and efficient
service on campus. Members are also entitled to attend and
vote at all A.G.M.'s and are also eligible to be elected a Board
member of the Co-operative as per the society's rules.
To become a member of the Co-op you simply fill in a share
application form and pay $5.00 for 5 x $1 .OO shares. You will
then be issued with a membership card which should be presented
when making a purchase at the Co-op to receive your
discount.
How to make the best use of the services offered by
our .. bookshop .
amll~arlse yourself with the many services offered by your
bookshop. Here is a convenient list for your information.
We sell:
- Text and references, novels, and general interest books.
- Secondhand books.
- Full range of stationery supplies.
- Full range of office supplies.
- Gifts, cards, wrapping paper and novelties.
- Audio and video cassettes.
- Film and film processing.
- Graphic and artist supplies.
- Calculators and accessories.
- Binding service for presentation of assignments etc.
- You are also able to sell your used and unwanted books
through the bookshop.
We suggest that if you are intending to purchase a required
text or reference, that you do so at the beginning of each
semester. If you cannot afford to purchase it immediately, have
it put aside. This will help to alert us to any possible shortages
early in the semester. Top up orders can then be placed where
necessary to ensure the book arrives in a time to be of use
for that semester.
If you find the book is unavailable ask the staff when it will
arrive and place a personal order at the information counter
to secure a copy when supplies become available.
Co-operative hours
Hours of opening
Normal hours of opening for the bookshop during terms and
semesters are:
Monday to Thursday inclusive 8.30am to 7.30pm
Friday
8.30am to 5.00pm
Public holidays
Closed
During vacations
Mid-semester, term and semester breaks:
Monday to Friday - 9.00am to 5.00pm with a lunch break
between 12-1.00pm
Christmas vacation:
Closed mid-December to early February
Services
The bookshop offers a variety of sewices to students and staff
and is receptive to any new ideas.
Further information, rules and regulations can be sought from
the Registered Office of the Co-operative, situated in the Union
Building, John Street, Hawthorn.

Student activities
Student Union - what is it?
The Student Union is a legal expression of the Student body
identified with Swinburne. The primary function and focus of
the organisation is to represent the members in the common
context of their relationship with Swinburne and the Union
- as students, and in their education. The second focus of
the Union is to provide services, for the members within the
framework of effectiveness, convenience and need.
The Union in representing the members operates within the
realms of the consumer advocate and lobbyist. Successful
outcomes on behalf of membership has been dependent on
good student representation and a core of professional and
staff working together and developing policy, and precedent
through careful implementation. Policy developed and
decisions implemented are mindful of past and future
membership. lncorporation has breathed life in perpetuity, into
this organisation and has become increasingly effective by
the year in servicing the membership.
Membership and its aims
The Student Union is an incorporated association under the
Victorian Government's Association lncorporation Act 1981.
Under this Act the Student Union is a legal entity and membership
to the Union is automatic on receipt of the general service
fee. The purposes for which the Union is established are:
(1) to advance the social, educational and general welfare
of the student body of Swinburne and to provide services
for the student body;
(2) to represent and safeguard the students in matters affecting
their interests and privileges and to afford a recognised
means of communication between the students and
the authorities of Swinburne Ltd and other educational
bodies;
(3) to promote, encourage and co-ordinate the activities of
student committees and societies;
(4) to promote and foster a corporate spirit amongst the
student body;
(5) to strive for wider recognition and greater appreciation
of the standard of all academic awards of Swinburne Ltd.
The 1991 Executive of the Union consisted of:
President
Esther Abram
Vice-president
Geoff Brownlee
Activities Director Vacant
Education Director Lisa Ferguson
Media Director
Marilyn Gunta
Finance Director Jeremy Edwards
The role of the Executive is to control and manage the
business and affairs of the Union. The meetings of the
Executive occurs at least once a month from February to
November and is open to all members.
The affairs of the Union fall principally into the following areas:
education and welfare, services, social activities, and media.
These areas are governed by management committees,
whose responsibility it is to develop policies of the Union in
the areas of their activity. The management committees
consist of: the relevant Executive member as Chairperson,
two to three members from the Union Executive, two to four
persons elected from the student body. The Executive at the
monthly meeting receives and considers the policy submitted
by the management committees.
In March or April of each year the Executive calls an Annual
General Meeting to present the preceeding years audited
financial statement. In October or November of each year the
Executive convenes a Budget Meeting. At this meeting the
proposed Budget for the next financial year is presented by
the Executive to the student body for their approval. Further,
the Executive reports on the activities of the Union for the
period since the preceding Budget Meeting.
All student members are eligible to stand and vote in elections
and all have the same rights in respect to the Union and thus
are entitled to use the services provided by it.
Orientation Week
Orientation occurs during the first week of academic classes.
During orientation a diversity of entertainment is provided to
encourage students to become involved and participate in the
campus activities. Orientation week provides the opportunity
for students to familiarise themselves with services and to
establish friendships with other new and returning students.
A program of activities for the week is available prior to the
commencement of Orientation.
Club and Societies
For further information about activities functions call the
Activities Officer on 819 8520.
The Activities Officer is responsible for co-ordinating and
assisting the student based clubs and societies on campus.
Those active in 1991 included:
ACES (Association of Civil Engineering Students)
ASPS (Assocation of Swinburne Psychology Students)
Baha 'i Faith
B1T.P.C. (Bachelor of Information Technology PClub)
B.F.C. (Blood Film Club of Swinburne)
Christian Association
Croatian Club
Explorers Club
Greek Club
Italian Club
. Korean .-.--. Club -.--
Morantha Christian Fellowship
MEKS (Mechanical Engineering - Klub of Swinburne)
Mental '~ealth Club -
Photographic Society
Students for Christ
SAM (Swinburne Association of Marketing)
SCABS (Swinburne Chemical and Biology Students)
SIS (Swinburne Islamic Society)
SOSA (Swinburne Overseas Students Association)
Swinburne Campus Chapter of Engineers
SWINJSS (Swinburne Jewish Students Society)
SPACE (Swinburne Production Chemical Engineers)
SYE (Swinburne Young Engineers)
Vietnamese Society
Wargaming and Role-Playing Society
Womens Support Network
For further information on clubs and societies (e.g. how to
start a club, applying for affiliation and financial support from
the Union etc.) see the Activities officer.
Union van
The Student Union provides a Toyota Hiace (12 seater) van
for use by clubs and societies for their functions if required.
Bookings can only be made at the Contact Desk.
Personal Accident Insurance Scheme
All students enrolled in both Swinburne Institute and
Swinburne College of TAFE who have paid their union fees
are automatically covered by accident insurance.
This insurance scheme covers accidents, 24 hours a day. For
further details, please contact the Accountant in the Union
Office.
Union Office
This is situated on the 4th level of the Union Building. Various
services are provided here including room bookings, Legal
Advisor bookings, insurance claims, facsimile and general
information. Union personnel that are located in the Union
Office include the President, Secretary, Manager and
Accountant.
Telephone numbers: 819 2156/2656/2966/8520/8553.
Union Staff
The following are a list of staff.
Union President
Secretary
Education Co-ordinator
Student Advocacy and Campaigns Officer
Education Research Officer
Activities Officer

Word Processing Officer
Contact Co-Ordinator
Media Co-ordinator
Accountant
Catering Co-ordinator
Manager
Contact/lnformation Desk
The Contactllnformation Desk is the 'nerve centre' of the Student
Union for information on Union services, activities and
coming events - in effect a directory of all Union services.
Students will find a 'Friendly Contact Worker' who will provide
assistance on how to survive at Swinburne. The desk also
has listings of various off-campus groups which you may wish
to become involved with.
The Desk operates as the ticket sales point for Union activities,
and sells t-shirts, windcheaters, and other Union memorabilia.
The Australian Buvina Advisorv Service (ABAS) is available
at no charge to stbdents. hisserv vice guarantees that the
price you have been quoted is in fact an unbeatable offer. So
if you are considering buying a camera, television, stereo,
etc., see us. Feel free to drop in anytime if you need help,
direction, or for any enquiries. The Contact/lnformation Desk
operates Monday to Thursday from 9.00am to 6.00pm. Friday
fmm 9M)am to 4.00pm. and is located in the Student Services
Centre (opposite Ethel Hall in John Street).
Reading Room/Photocopying Service
The room is designed for quiet reading and discussion, in
a non-smoking environment. Newspapers, magazines and
information on various groups, issues and organisations are
located in this area. Also located adjacent to the lounge are
seven photocopiers. These copiers are cheaper than the
library - only ten cents and seven cents respectively per copy
(A3 or A4). The Reading Room is open Monday to Thursday
from 9.00am to 8.00pm and Friday 9.00am to 4.00pm. It is
located in the Student Services Centre.
Tool Library
The Tool Library is located in the Student Contact Centre, telephone
819 8291. As the library is a non-profit organisation,
its hire rates are very reasonable. All equipment hire requires
a deposit and studentlstaff ID. Deposits can be waived for
studentslstaff if current ID is left in lieu of deposit. Library
catalogues are available from the Contactllnformation Desk,
Tool Library and the Union Office.
Equipment available includes: lawn mowers, engine tune-up
kit, arc welder, brush-cutters, wallpaper remover, auto tools,
orbital sanders, percussion drills, belt sanders, barbeques,
PA system, tents and rucksacks.
The Tool Library is open:
Monday 9.00am - 6.00pm
Tuesday 1.00pm - 6.00 pm
Wednesday 1.00pm - 6.00pm
Thursday 1.00pm - 6.00pm
Friday 9.00am - 6.00pm
Equipment may be borrowed and returned only during the
above hours.
The Greenhouse Coffee Lounge
Situated on the third level of the Union Building, this is acomfortable
and popular lounge which serves tea, cappucinos,
iced coffee, fresh fruit juices, and quality cakes and pastries.
Ideal for those who only want a 'cuppa' without queing in the
cafeterias with the noisy lunch and dinner crowds. Seats 100.
Union cafe
The 'Caf' provides an extensive range of foodstuffs including
hot and cold drinks, sandwiches, salads, cakes and pastries,
hot take-away food and confectionery. With prices designed
for student pockets, and home of the famous 'Budget Meal',
the Union Caf is conveniently located on the ground floor of
the Union Building (next to the Bookshop).
General Information
Ethel Hall
Clubs and societies can use the hall for their functions. Bookings
must be made at least two weeks in advance. All bookings
must be made on prescribed forms available from the
Student Union Office.
Radio station
3SSR - Swinburne Student Radio.
Location: fourth level of the Union Building.
The Radio Station is run by a committee which consists of:
Programme Director
Publicity and Promotions Director
Station Manager
Technical Officer
3SSR provides students with a variety of music and other programs
which are broadcast70 a number of outlets. Students
are involved in various activities at the station including production
of 'on air' programs (DJ'ing), and the general running,
management and organisation of station activities.
Facilities at 3SSR include a comprehensive record library, cartridge
production facilities, an 'on air' broadcast studio, and
various related equipment including an eight-channel mixing
desk, a four-track reel to reel, a half-track mastering reel to
reel and an assortment of microphones and leads.
Anyone interested in becoming involved in any 3SSR activities
should contact the station's supervisional staff in the radio
station offices located on the fourth level of the Union Building.
Legal Advisor
The Student Union provides a free legal service for full and
part-time students. The solicitor is available every Tuesday
during the academic year, between 2.15pm and 6.15pm.
Appointments must be made at the Union Office, on 819 8520.
Education, Welfare and Research Department
All matters pertaining to the quality of education and the sociopolitical
welfare of students on campus are handled by this
department. The Union employs a Co-ordinator (on a full-time
basis) who oversees the activities of this department. The Coordinator
is available for consultation on any facet of the
department and can be contacted at the Union Office, 4th
floor of the Union Building. There are three sections within
this department:
Student Appeals and Advocacy Unit
This is designed to assist students who believe that they have
been subject to any discrimination or injustice, including
courselassessment, teacher relationship, enrolment process,
or whatever. The unit can also help prepare students, who
are called to appear before the Progress Review Committee
or an Exclusion Board, on the best manner in which to present
their case.
Students seeking assistance can discuss their concerns, in
total confidence, with the Student Advocacy and Liaison
Officer, or the Union President. Both are located in the 4th
floor of the Union Building.
Education and Welfare Research Unit
This evaluates Student Services and also conducts the Course
Evaluation Survey. The latter helps assess the quality of
education that students are receiving in various subjects. The
subjects covered depend entirely on those Course convenors
who allow the Union to enter their classes and distribute the
questionnaires. The information collected is processed, and
the results are published in booklet form. The results are also
forwarded to convenors and Heads of departments for further
analysis and comment.
The Union employs an Education Research Officer to undertake
this program. This person is situated in the Education
Unit.
Campaigns and Pressure Group Co-ordination Centre
The Union undertakes actions against those organisationsl
institutions (e.g. the Government) which implement policies
seen as deleterious to the welfare of students. To meet the
organisational requirements of such campaigns, students volunteer
their time, and the Education, Welfare and Research

Committee assist these students in regard to rallies, marches,
lobbying, etc. Examples of such actions are: Anti-Tuition Fees,
Anti-Education Tax, Travel Concession for all Tertiary Students,
and Stop the Closure of the TAFE College.
All students interested in participating in social action to
achieve beneficial change and progress can attend the Management
Committee meetings by contacting the Union Desk
(Union Office), or by ringing same on 819 2966.
Student publications
The Student Union publishes one weekly newspaper called
"The Swine". "The Swine", published on Thursday, covers
broader news and entertainment. It provides a forum for
students to present and discuss their views on all matters.
This publication is produced by the Student Union Media
Office. Contributions by students including graphics, cartoons
and articles are welcomed. If you want to learn how its done,
contact the Student Union Media Director or come to the
Office. The Student Union also produces a free diary and Year
planner which are available from the Contact Desk and at
re-enrolment.
Club printing
Clubs and societies can have their publicity material printed
by the Student Union Media Office at minimal cost.
Campus Typing
Campus Typing is a quick efficient typing service available
to help you complete your assignments and gain the best
possible results.
We will word process your assignments, job applications,
resume, letters and thesus, all printed out on a high quality
Apple Laser Printer.
Student Computer Centre
Desperately seeking computers
Now there is a solution, students will have access to an ergonomically
designed Computer Centre, consisting of 24 brand
new computers and access to popular software packages,
such as Microsoft Word 4, Database Ill, Lotus 123, as well
as your own software packages.
For further information contact Andrea at Campus Typing, 4th
floor S.U. Building or telephone 819 2966 or 8553.
The winnin edge can be yours
Campus Binf
Campus Bind perfectly bound documents are the hard
wearing, functional, simple and cost effective way to present
your valuable assignments, computer printouts, manuals and
reports of all kinds.
For excellent presentation, Campus Bind will give your assignments
the professional edge.
Covers are A4, white, clear pastic with cardboard backing.
Available at Campus Typing, 4th floor Union Building for a
mere $2.00.
Tax Return Lodgement Advisor
Prior to the period when Tax returns have to be completed
for lodgement, the Union organise aTax Accountant who has
a specialist knowledge regarding students, to give seminars
free of cost to full and part-time students. Special one-to-one
sessions are held at a small cost for those who need extra
advice.
Sports Association
Executive Officer
A. Clarke, BAppSci(FIT), DipEd(Haw), 819 8018
Physical EducationlRecreation Officer
D. Shanahan, BAppSci(F1T)
Administrative Assistant
K. O'Donnell
Swinburne Sports Association is located in the Sports Centre
in John Street, central to the Institute and TAFE areas of the
campus.
The Association is run by students and aims to meet the sporting
and recreational pursuits of all students and staff. All currently
enrolled students are members of the Association.
Sports Centre facilities include four glass backed squash
courts, a well equipped weight training area, locker, shower
and change facilities, multi-purpose clubs and aerobics room,
fitness appraisal and meetings room. The Sports Store and
ReceptionIAdministration Office areas are also located in the
Centre.
Currently, over twenty sports clubs exist at the Association,
all of which are run by students. Members are encouraged
to involve themselves in the clubs of their choice.
The Sports Association employs three full-time staff to oversee
the day to day administration of the centre. The qualified
Physical Education Officer offers members advice on weight
training and health as well as conducting fitness appraisals.
The Recreation Officer ensures a wide variety of recreation
activities that are not offered by any of the existing sports
clubs.
Clubs and Recreations offered to members include: Aerobics,
Athletics, Badminton, Bowling, Car, Circuit training, Cycling,
Football, Golf, Hanggliding, Hockey, Horseriding, Indoor
cricket, Indoor soccer. Meditation, Motorcvcle. Netball. Nordic
ski~ng, Orienteering, Sailboarding, SCUBA diving, Skydiving.
Snowski, Soccer, Squash, Surfing, Tai Chi, Tae K&n do, Tang
Soo Do, Tennis, Volleyball and Waterskiing.
Swinburne competes in many intercampus sports and recreation
events throughout the year. Affiliation with Victorian and
Australian college sports associations create a calendar of
over twenty events that give ample opportunity for students
to compete for Swinburne.
Further information on the Swinburne Sports Association's
facilities, clubs, services and recreations are available from
their information Handbook, available free of charge at the
Sports Centre.

Senior staff ............................................................
Academic Board ....................................................
Counres offered and abbreviated titles .................
Entrance requirements
-Undergraduate.....................................................
-Postgraduate .......................................................
Application procedure
-Undergraduate.....................................................
-Postgraduate .......................................................
Student Administration Office ..............................
Academic statements ............................................
Awards ...................................................................
Enrolment regulations
-Conditions ...........................................................
-Fees ....................................................................
-Confirmation ........................................................
-Amendments .......................................................
-Leave of absence ................................................
-identity cards .......................................................
Assessment regulations ........................................
-Examinations .......................................................

Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
Director
Professor J.G. Wallace, MA, MEd(Glas), PhD(Brist), FASSA
Faculty of Applied Science
Dean of Faculty
Professor J.G. McLean, BVSc(Syd), HDA(Hons), PhD(Melb)
Head, Department of Applied Chemistry
1.K. Jones, BAgrSc, DipEd. PhD(Melb), FRACl
Head, Department of Computer Science
Associate Professor D.D. Grant, MSc(Melb), PhD(Reading),
MACM, MIEEE
Acting Head, Department of Mathematics
J.R. lacono, BA, MEc(Mon), TPTC
Head, Department of Physics
Professor R.B. Silberstein, BSc(Hons)(Mon), PhD(Mzlb),
MAIP, MIBME, MACPSM
Faculty of Arts
Dean - of - Facultv
Professor L.A. Ri~martin, BA(Qld), MA(ANU), PhD(LaT),
MAPsS
Chair, Department of Humanities
R.L. Love, BSc(Qld), CHPS(Canlab), MA, PhD(Melb) . .
Head, ~e~artment of ~ s~cholo~~'
K.J. Heskin, BA(Hons)(Queens), MA(Dub), PhD(Dunelm),
CPsychol, AFBPsS, MAPsS
Chair, Department of Social and Political Studies
PJ. Love, BA(Hons), MA(LaT), PhD(ANU)
Faculty of Business
Dean of Faculty
M.C. Frazer, BSc(Hons)(Mon), GradDipEdTert(DDIAE),
MAdmin(Mon), PhD(Camb), AIMM, MAIP, MACE
Acting Head, Department of Accounting
W.C. Nash, BCom, DipEd(Melb), MBA(CranlT)
Head, Department of Information Systems
D.G. Adams, BCom(Melb), MAdmin(Mon), TSTC
Head, Department of Economics
J.B. Wielgosz, BCom(Hons), MA, DipEd(Me1b)
Acting Head, Department of Law
J.B. Wielgosz, BCom(Hons), MA, DipEd(Melb)
Head, Department of Marketing and Organisation
Behaviour
Associate Professor C. Christodoulou, BAgSc(Melb), MSc,
MAdmin,PhD(Mon)
Faculty of Engineering
Dean of Faculty
Professor L.M. Gillin, BMetE, MEngSc, MEd(Melb).
PhD(Cantab), ASMB(Balllt), FIEAust, FAIM, MACE, AAIP,
MAIMME, MAIM
Deputy Dean (Administration)
N. Zorbas, BE(Hons)(WAust), MEd, MEngSc(Melb), MIEEE,
Fl EAust
School of Civil Engineering and Building
Associate Dean
R.B. Sandie, BCE, MEngSc(Melb), FIEAust, MASCE, MACE
School of Electrical Engineering
Associate Dean
B.A. Neyland, BEE(Melb), DipEd(FTC), ME(Melb), TTTC,
MlEAust
School of Innovation and Enterprise
Director
Professor L.M. Gillin, BMetE, MEd, MEngSc(Melb),
PhD(Cantab), ASMB(Balllt), FIEAust, FAIM, MACE, AAIP,
MAIMME, MAlAA
School of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering
Associate Dean
W.G. Teague, DipMechEng(C1T). BComm, BE(Mech).
MEngSc(Melb)
School of Design
Head of School
D.G. Murray, BA(Graphic Design)(SIT), llTC
Film and Television School*
Head of School
J. Sabine, BA(ANU)
Manager, Academic Programs (Eastern Campus)
Associate Professor B.C. McDonald, BCom, DipEd(Melb).
FASA, CPA
The Film and Television School will become part of the
Victorian College of the Arts as from 1 January, 1992.
Composition of Academic Board
Members ex-officio
President of Council
Director
President, Student Union
Deans (4)
Head, School of Design
Head, Film and Television School
Manager, Academic Programs (Eastern Campus)
Elected Members
3 members of the academic staff of the Faculty of Applied
Science elected by those staff.
3 members of the academic staff of the Faculty of Arts elected
by those staff.
3 members of the academic staff of the Faculty of Business
elected by those staff.
3 members of the academic staff of the Faculty of Engineering
elected by those staff.
1 member of the academic staff of the School of Design
elected by those staff.
1 member of the academic staff of the Film and Television
School elected by those staff.
10 members of the academic staff of Swinburne Institute of
Technology elected by and from those staff.
6 members drawn from and elected by the general staff of
Swinburne Institute of Technology, and the general staff of
the Corporate Division.
6 members elected by and from the enrolled students of Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology.
Total membership 46

Courses offered
Undergraduate
Degrees
Courses leading to degree qualifications are offered in a wide
range of fields. The degrees and specialist areas in which
Swinburne students may graduate are:
Bachelor of Ap lied Science (BAppSc)
Computer Aided &emistry
Computer Aided Biochemistry
Medical Biophysics and lnstrumentation
Computer Science
Environmental Health
Computing
lnstrumentation
Mathematics and Computer Science
PsychologyIPsychophysiology
Bachelor of Arts (BA)
Asian Studies
Australian Studies
Economics
Film and Television*
Graphic Design
Historical and Philosophical Studies
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Literature
Media Studies
Political Studies (can include Australian studies)
Psychology
Psychology and Psychophysiology
Sociology
Bachelor of Arts (honours) (BAhons)#
Four strands are available:
cultural studies
languages
~SyChOlOgy
- social science
* From 1 January 1992, this course will be administered by
the Victorian College of the Arts.
Bachelor of Business (BBus)
Accounting
Computing
Economics-Marketing
Marketing
Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts (BBusBA)
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Bachelor of Engineering (BEng)*
Civil Engineering
Communication and Electronic
Computer Systems Engineering
Electrical Power and Control
Manufacturing (Production)
Manufacturing (Chemical)
Mechanical Engineering
In certain circumstances this degree may be combined with
the Graduate Diploma in Management.
Bachelor of lnformation Technology (BlnfTech)
Swinburne Institute
Diploma of Art (DipArt)
Graphic Design
Diploma of Building Surveying (DipBldSurv)
# Subject to accreditation.
Fbstgraduate
Graduate diplomas
The lnstitute offers courses leading to the following graduate
diploma awards:
Accounting
Air-conditioning
GradDipAcc
GradDipAircond
Applied Colloid Science GradDipAppSc
Applied Psychology
GradDipAppPsych
Biomedical Instrumentation GradDipAppSc
Business Administration GradDipBusAdmin
Business lnformation Technology GradDipBuslnffech
CADICAM
GradDipCADICAM
Chemical Engineering
GradDipChemEng
Civil Engineering Construction GradDipConstr
Computer Integrated Manufacture GradDipClM
Computer Science
GradDipAppSc
Computer Systems Engineering GradDipCompSysEng
Corporate Finance
GradDipCorpFin
Entrepreneurship and Innovation GradDipEnt&lnnov
Equal Opportunity
Administration
GradDipEqual
Opportunity
Administration
Film and Television
GradDipArt(F&TV)*
Industrial Chemistry
GradDipAppSc
Industrial Microbiology
GradDipAppSc
Japanese
GradDipJapanese
Japanese for Professionals GradDipJapanese(Pr0f)
Maintenance Engineering GradDipMaint
Management
GradDipMgt
Management Systems
GradDipMgSys
Manufacturing Technology GradDipManTech
Market Forecasting
GradDipMKtForc
Organisation Behaviour GradDipOrgBeh
Risk Management
GradDipRiskMgt
Scientific Instrumentation GradDipAppSc
Social Statistics
GradDipAppSc
Urban Research and Planning GradDipUrbResPol
* From 1 January 1992, this course will be administered by
the Victorian College of the Arts.
Graduate Certificates
Business Administration GCertBusAdmin
E~DIov~~ . . Relations
GCertEmpRels
Not all these courses will be offered for new stldents in 1992.
Degree of Master
By coursework:
Master of Applied Science
(Applied Colloid Science)
Master of Applied Science
(Biomedical Instrumentation)
Master of Applied Science
(Information Technology)
Master of Arts in
Counselling Psychology
Master of Business
MAppSc
MAppSc
M AppSc
Bachelor of Technology (BTech)' (Information Technology) MBus
Building Surveying
Master of Business
Fire Technology Administration M BA
Studies may be undertaken in various areas offered by the Master Of Business
departments with the Faculty of Engineering.
(Organisation Behaviour) MBus
Master of Engineering
Diplomas
Courses leading to diploma qualifications are available in the
(Computer integrated
Manufacture) MEng
following areas:
Master
(Information
of Engineering
Technology) MEng
MA

Master of Enterprise Innovation MEntlnnov
Master of Technology (Computer
Integrated Manufacture) MTech
Master of Technology
(Construction)
MTech(Const)
By research and thesis, and publication: can be
undertaken in those areas shown under Bachelor degrees
above.
Enquiries should be made to the Registrar.
Degree of PhD
By research and thesis.
Enquiries should be made to the Registrar
Entrance requirements and application
procedure
Undergraduate
Entrance requirements
The general criter~on for consideration for entry to a Swinburne
course is Swinburne's assessment of an applicant's ability
to complete a chosen course.
1. To satisfy the general entrance requirements and to be
considered for admission to the first year of a degree or
diploma course a student must have satisfied one of the
following:
1.1 Completed successfully a Year 12 course of study
accredited by the Victorian Curriculum and Assessment
Board (VCAB), or completed a course deemed
equivalent by VCAB;
1.2 Satisfied the requirements of an approved Victorian
Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation Program)
at a Victorian technical school or TAFE college;
1.3 Obtained, prior to 1979, grades of D or higher in at
least four subjects at the Higher School Certificate
examination or satisfied the requirements of Victorian
adult matriculation;
1.4 Gained a qualification deemed by the Institute to be
the equivalent of any of the above.
2. In addition to meeting the general requirements above,
applicants must also satisfy any prerequisite or special
requirements specified by the faculty conducting the
course and listed in the Swinburne Handbook.
3. Each faculty may specify criteria for special entry schemes,
covering applicants who may not hold the necessary
formal entry qualifications but who in the course selection
officer's view have the motivation and potential to successfully
complete the course concerned.
Application procedure
Full-time
First year
Applications for entry to full-time study at the first year level,
except for the special provisions noted below, must be made
through the Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre (VTAC), 40
Park Street, South Melbourne, 3205.
Applications must be made on the appropriate VTAC form:
Form N
For students studying VCE in 1991. Copies of the form are
made available through the schools and colleges concerned.
Students should consult the VTAC publication, Guide to
Courses in Colleges and Universities.
Form E
For all other applicants. Copies of the form, and the Guide
to Courses in Colleges and Universities in which it is enclosed,
are obtainable from VTAC.
Special entry
Applications for all courses, except full-time Arts, must be
made to the Admissions Officer on a Swinburne application
form. Application for full-time study in Arts should be made
through VTAC.
Full-time
Second year and higher
Applications for Applied Science, Art and Engineering should
be made direct to Swinburne. Forms can be obtained from
the Admissions Officer, 819 8386.
Closing dates for full-time places in second and higher years
are:
Applied Science
Art - Graphic Design
Engineering
17 January 1992
27 September 1991
17 January 1992
Applications for Arts and Business should be made to VTAC,
40 Park Street, South Melbourne, 3205.
Part-time
Part-time courses are offered in all faculties except Art.
All applications for part-time courses must be made direct
to Swinburne. Forms are obtained from the Admissions Officer,
819 8386.
Closing dates for part-time places are:
Applied Science 17 January 1992
Arts 17 January 1992
Business 10 January 1992
Engineering 17 January 1992
The special provisions for rnature-age entry set out above
apply for entry to first year part-time courses. Applications
for part-time places should be forwarded to the Admissions
Officer by the dates stipulated.
Deferred entry
Students who are offered a place in first year for 1992 may
apply for a deferment until 1993. Applications must be addressed
to the Registrar, and must be made at the time an offer
is received.
Students who have been granted deferment will be informed
in writing by the faculty concerned.
Postgraduate
Entrance requirements
Applicants for admission to postgraduate courses normally
are expected to have completed a degree or diploma.
The specific requirements vary from course to course: some
areopen to those with any tertiary qualifications, others may
require a qualification in a specific discipline or range of
disciplines.
Provision is made for admission of applicants who have qualifications
other than or less than the normal requirements outlined
above but whose employment positions or experience
indicates an ability to benefit from the course.
Requirements for specified courses are set out in the relevant
faculty sections.
Application procedure
All applications for enrolment in postgraduate courses other
than Masters degree by research and by publication or PhD
must be made to the Admissions Officer from whom application
forms are available, 819 8386.
Applications for admission to postgraduate courses should
be received by:
Applied Science
Computer Science 22 November 1991
Social Statistics 22 November 1991
All other courses 17 January 1992

Swinburne Institute
Arts'
Students nearing completion of their courses
Applied Psychology 22 November 1991
Japanese
17 J~~~~~~ 1992 Students nearing completion of their courses may obtain a
Urban Research and Policy 17 J~~~~~~ 1992 statement indicating all results to date and those subjects
Equal Opportunity Administration 22 November 1991 required to complete their courses. Fee $15.00
Japanese for Professionals 17 January 1992 Any student who has been involved in a change of syllabus
Master of Counselling Psychology 29 November 1991 (e.g. frsm the 1974 syllabus to the 1974 syllabus revised 1978,
Business
or to the 1979 syllabus, etc.) and who has not previously
All courses 10 January 1992 except GradDip Business obtained a statement, would be wise to do so before starting
Information Technology 11 November 1991 the final semester.
Engineering 17 January 1992
'Late a~~lications
. . will be considered if laces are available. Awards
All applications for enrolments in courses leading to the application^ for degree and diploma
degree of Master research Or publication Or Doctor Of
Philosophy should be addressed to the Registrar.
Students eligible to be admitted to a degree or to be awarded
a diploma, graduate diploma or certificate are required to
copies of the Statutes for the degree of Master by research apply for the award on the form prescribed. Forms are availand
by p ub l ication and PhD are set Out On p a g es 31 36. able from and must be lodaed at the Student Administration
Office, Administration Buiibing.
Student Administration Office
Applications for all awards close on 31 May (for students com-
The Student Administration Office provides information for
p l e ti ng their courses at the end of first semester) or 30 sepstudents
on admissions, enrolment and examinations regula- tember (for students their courses in ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ b ~
tions and procedures. Other functions include the processing, of the year in which the student anticipates completion of the
maintenance and storage of students' academic records and academic work for the award,
~ersonal details.
A more detailed description of the various enrolment and
examinations regulations and procedures is outlined below.
Location and office hours
The Student Administration Office is located in Room AD109,
Administration Building (AD), John Street, opposite the Business
and Arts Building (BA) and the Library. (See map inside
back cover.)
Office hours are as follows:
During teaching weeks
8.30am - 6.30pm Monday to Thursday
8.30am - 5.00pm Friday
During non-teaching weeks
9.00am - 5.00pm Monday to Friday
Note: The Office is closed on public holidays.
Academic statements
1. Students in SIT receive automatically the following records
of their academic progress:
(a) result certificates are posted to each student at the
end of each semester;
(b) a consolidated statement of all subjects so far attempted
is printed on the student's re-enrolment form. (The
student keeps a receipted copy of this form when
re-enrolling.).
2. Other statements are available, on request, at the fees
shown:
(a) List of all results
'There is a surcharge of $5.00 if results
are prior to 1971 as a manual search is
then required
$10.00'
Enrolment regulations
Definitions
In this section:
Enrolment includes 're-enrolment'.
Enrolment form includes 're-enrolment form'.
Subject means any area of study which is part of a course
leading to an award and which has a title and code number
in the subject register maintained by the Student Administration
section of the Registrar's Department; the singular
includes the plural.
Awarding department means the department or, where
courses are organised on a faculty basis (Applied Science,
Arts and Business) the faculty responsible for the particular
course; 'head of awarding department' has a similar meaning
and includes the dean 07 the faculty where appropriate and
the nominee of the head of the awarding department or dean.
Deferred entry means an intending first-year student defers
enrolment for up to one year on receipt of an offer of a place.
Leave of absence means the suspension of enrolment during
a course for a specified period at the discretion of the appropriate
faculty board on the basis that the enrolment will be
resumed at the end of the period.
Amendment to enrolment means the addition, deletion or
changing of subject enrolments in a student's course of study.
~bandonment means discontinuation of enrolment without for-
mal notification. Abandons has a similar meaning, unless the
contrary intention is expressed.
Conditions of enrolment
Enrolment at Swinburne lnstitute of Technology is conditional
(b) A list of'all results and a statement
upon:
indicating completion of course $15.00 the information which is supplied by the applicant to the
lnstitute upon which an offer of a place in a course is based,
(c) A list of all results plus a list of those
remaining to be passed for the completion
being accurate;
of the course $15.00 the approval of the head of the awarding department (or
hislher nominee) of the subjects concerned;
(d) A special letter indicating some matter
requested by the student $10.00 the completion of the requisite enrolment and statistical
information forms required by the Institute;
(e) A statement certifying enrolment at
Swinburne at date of certificate NO charge the undertaking of the student to abide by,the regulations
procedures and standards of conduct of Sw~nburne lnstitute
Reports
of Technology and to grant to the Registrar the authority
A detailed report of (final) examination $40.00 to provide appropriate authorities who have permitted a par-
Access t~ examination scripts and marks for each question ticular student to enrol at the Institute, details of that
is available on request and without fee.
person's academic progress as may be required as a condition
of approval by that department or authority;
Enquiries regarding marks or access to scripts should be
made directly to the appropriate department or faculty office. the Payment of the prescribed general service fee;
2 1

the lodging of a Payment Options form in regard to the
Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) and, if
appropriate, making an "up front" payment.
the lodging of all documents required by the Registrar at
the Cashier's Office or the Student Administration Office
as appropriate to the procedure being followed.
Single subject (non-credit) enrolments
Under the conditions set out below, it is possible to study
single subjects offered by the lnstitute without enrolling in a
full degree or diploma course.
Single subjects studied in this way can not subsequently be
credited towards a degree or diploma at Swinburne.
The minimum fee per semester for single subject (non-credit)
enrolments in 1992 will be at the rate per weekly contact hour
as set by the faculty, plus the appropriate General Service Fee.
The offering of places in single subjects is at the discretion
of the faculty concerned and can be done only after full credit
students have been accommodated. Thus offers may be as
late as the first week of teaching.
An application form is available from the faculty concerned
or the Admissions Officer.
General Service Fee*
All enrolling students are required to pay a general service
fee. At the time of printing, fees for 1992 had not been determined.
As a guide, the fee for 1991 was:
Full-time students
$1 62 .OO
Part-time students $ 76.00
Students studying in the $ 90.00
cooperative mode
Note: All students enrolling at Swinburne for the first time will
be required to pay an additional $20.00 towards the Student
Union Capital Reserve Fund.
For all lnstitute purposes a part-time student is one enrolled
for subjects which require a total class, tutorial andlor laboratory
contact time of less than 75% of the full-time course
load.
Students studying under the cooperative format are considered
to be full-time students. They qualify for the special
rate only in those years which include work experience. These
are:
Applied Science degree 2nd and 3rd years
Art (Graphic Design) degree 3rd year
Civil, Electrical and Electronic,
Manufacturing and Mechanical
Engineering degrees 3rd and 4th years
The General Sewice Fee has 2 components:
(1) Student Union
(2) Sports Association
Late enrolment fees
Students who do not attend for enrolment (including any
required review of second semester subjects) on the date and
at the time specified by their faculty or awarding department,
will be required to pay a late fee of $20.00 (where re-enrolment
is completed before the commencement of the following
semester's teaching); or $40.00 (where re-enrolment is completed
after the commencement of teaching for the semester).
Additional fees
A part-time student who adds any subject to those for which
he or she was enrolled and thereby increases the number
of contact hours involved in his or her course to more than
75% of the full-time course load, will be required to pay the
difference between the part-time and the full-time general
service fee.
Higher Education Contribution Scheme
The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (sometimes referred
to as the graduate tax) came into effect on 1 January 1989.
Unless exempt from the provisions of the Scheme all students
enrolled in Swinburne Institute of Technology have to make
a contribution to the cost of their studies. In 1991 the annual
charge was $1,993.00 for a full-time student (or $996.50 for
each full-time semester).
Part-time students pay a contribution in proportion to their
full-time load.
Students have the option of:
(i) Making a contribution 'up front' in a lump sum (thereby
attracting a 15% discount), or
(ii) Paying the contribution on a deferred basis through the
taxation system, or
(iii) Making one partial payment 'up front' (minimum $100.00)
and having the balance collected via the taxation system.
Partial payments will not attract a discount. If permission
is given to make more than one partial payment a handling
fee may be charged.
Students have an opportunity each semester of changing their
options.
Students exempt from the Scheme include:
those who have paid fees to Swinburne for a postgraduate
course in accordance with Commonwealth guidelines;
those enrolled in a non-award course;
those fully sponsored under a foreign aid program;
full-fee paying overseas students;
students otherwise subject to Overseas Student Charge
arrangements;
holders of a HECS postgraduate scholarship.
All exempt students must lodge a Payment Options form by
completing the exemption declaration section on the form.
Proof of exemption will be required.
Further details about the Scheme are available from the
Student Administration Office.
Refund of fees
Later VTAC offer
A student who has enrolled as a result of an offer made
through the Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre (VTAC) and
who receives a later offer from WAC for a higher course preference,
may receive a refund of all fees paid if notice of the
withdrawal and application for the refund is lodged at the
Student Administration Office, Administration Building, prior
to 31 March 1992.
No later VTAC offer
A student who withdraws and does not receive a higher preference
offer from VTAC may receive a refund of fees. less a
$5.00 service charge, if notice of the withdrawal is lodged at
the Student Administration Office, Administration Building,
prior to 31 March 1992 for semester 1 and 31 August 1992
for semester 2.
No refunds of fees will be made where a student withdraws
from study after 31 March 1992 for semester 1 and 31 August
1992 for semester 2.
No refunds of fees will be made under any of the provisions
set out above unless the student returns to the Student
Administration with the notice of withdrawal, his or her 1992
student identity card. A copy of the student's enrolment receipt
must also be attached for any refund applications. No refunds
can be processed without a copy of the receipt.
HECS refunds
HECS refunds will be made to upfront payees where a student
withdraws from the course on, or before 31 March for semester
1 and 31 August for semester 2. Students who require a refund
must apply to the Assistant Registrar, Student Administration.
A copy of the receipt must be provided.

Postgraduate fees refunds
Refer HECS refunds.
Confirmation of lnstitute records
The lnstitute recognises that errors can be made in the transcription
of enrolment details from original copies of enrolment
forms to the computer-held files. It is also realised that such
errors can cause a great deal of inconvenience to students
(and staff) if not detected.
Students are therefore asked to check the record of each semester's
enrolment.
To assist in the checking process, a computer-printed statement
of enrolment will be posted to each student approximately
four weeks after the commencement of each semester.
Students who do not check the statements, or who do not
by the due date notify the Student Administration Office of
any errors existing in the records will be required to pay a
substantial fee for each amendment to be made.
Amendments to enrolments
Withdrawing from subjects
A student may withdraw from a subject or unit without penalty
of failure up to the dates shown below:
(a) for subjects concluding at the end of the first semester
31 March 1992 or
(b) for subjects concluding at the end of the second semester
31 August 1992.
A withdrawal made after the dates set out above will result
in a fail being recorded on the student's academic record (the
symbol NWD - failure because of late withdrawal - will
appear).
A student who believes that the failing result NWD should
not be recorded must obtain the specific approval of the dean
of the faculty concerned, and the Registrar. Circumstances
supporting the application must be set out on the Amendment
to Enrolment form on which the approval for the withdrawal
is sought. A late fee of $5.00 per subject may be imposed.
If, as a consequence of withdrawing from a subject or subjects,
a student changes from full-time to part-time status, a refund
of a portion of the general service fee will be made only if
the withdrawal is made prior to 31 March 1992 for semester
1, or for semester 2, prior to 31 August 1992.
HECS liability
Students who withdraw from subjects or total enrolment after
31 March 1992 for subjects concluding at the end of the first
semester or after 31 August 1992 for subjects concluding at
the end of the second semester will still incur a HECS liability
for that semester.
Students who withdraw from a full year subject after 31 May
1992 will still incur a HECS liability for semester 1. Students
who withdraw from a full year subject after 31 August 1992
will incur a HECS liability for two semesters.
Adding subjects
No subject may be added to a student's enrolment without
the approval of both the teaching and the awarding departments.
Students should be aware that some faculties have
restrictions on the period during which subjects can be added.
Notwithstanding any faculty rules, after 31 March 1992 (for
subjects concluding at the end of the first semester) or 31
August 1992 (for subjects concluding at the end of the second
semester) an amendment will be permitted only where special
circumstances exist and the approval of the dean of the faculty
concerned and the Registrar has been given. A fee of $10.00
per subject will be charged. Students not enrolled in a subject
during examination period must seek approval of the faculty
concerned. A fee of $50.00 per subject added will be charged.
Students should note that the addition of subjects may result
in a chanae from part-time to full-time status. In such circumstances
The amendment will only be recorded when an
S winburne lnstitute
amount of money being the difference between the part-time
and full-time general service fee paid has been paid. It is the
responsibility of students to ensure that they are aware of any
additional fees required and to arrange for their payment at
the Cashier's Office.
Leave of absence
Students who have enrolled in a course and who wish to apply
for a period of leave of absence may do so in writing addressed
to the Registrar. The application should clearly indicate
the circumstances on which the request is based and the
length of time for which leave is sought.
Each application is considered within the faculty concerned
under any specific faculty rules relating to leave of absence.
Students who have been granted leave of absence will be
notified in writing by the faculty concerned. Enrolment for all
subjects for the duration of the leave will be cancelled.
Students who have been granted leave of absence will be
eligible for a refund of their 1992 General Service Fee only
if their application is received prior to 31 March 1992 for
semester 1 or 31 August 1992 for semester 2. Students must
also attach copy of their enrolment receipt with their application.
Refunds cannot be processed without a copy of the
receipt.
Amendments to personal details
A student who changes his or her name, address or place
of employment should complete an Amendment to Personal
Details form which is available from the Student Administration
Office.
Students recording a change of name will be required to
produce legal documentary evidence (e.g. marriage certificate,
statutory declaration, deed poll certificate) in addition to completing
an Amendment to Personal Details form.
Identity cards
When on campus, all enrolled students are required to carry,
and to produce on request of a member of staff, the photographic
identity card issued to them.
The card, which has a maximum life of four years, must be
presented for updatelvalidation for the forthcoming year on
re-enrolment.
The card includes the authorisation for borrowing from the
Swinburne Library.
A student who loses an identity card should notify the library
as soon as the loss is detected. Cardholders are, under library
rules, responsible for any transaction made on the card up
to the time of notification of the loss. A replacement card will
be issued for a fee of $10.00.
No refund of the general service fee will be made unless the
identity card is returned to Student Administration with the
notice withdrawal from a course.
Assessment Regulations*
Preamble
The aims of these regulations are to safeguard academic
standards, to ensure that assessment relates to the objectives
and content of the courses taught, to enable students to have
reasonable redress in cases where they may feel that an
injustice has been done, and to ensure the prompt approval
and accurate documentation of all results.
The Academic Board believes that a variety of forms of assessment
should be accepted for courses at Swinburne lnstitute
of Technology to enable faculties to select those they consider
most appropriate to each course. No attempt has been made
herein to specify appropriate procedures for the facilitation
of learning, the evaluation of course content, or determining
course objectives, methods of instruction and assessment as
these matters are the prerogative of each faculty.

1. Definitions and interpretation
Assessment categories
The range of results which may be issued for a subject.
Award
Includes the degrees of Master and Bachelor, and the
awards of Graduate Diploma, Diploma and Associate
Diploma awarded by the Swinburne Council to persons
who have completed a course of study at Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology.
Awarding department
The department of Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
which has the overall responsibility for a particular Swinburne
award and includes a 'faculty' where that responsibility
is taken at the faculty level.
Head of awarding department
The person responsible for the academic leadership and
administration of the awardina de~artment. In the case
of an award being within the;esponsibility of a faculty
rather than department it means the dean of that faculty.
Awarding faculty board
The faculty board responsible for making recommendations
to the Swinburne Council for the grant of a particular
award.
Chief Examiner
The Chief Examiner is the Director of Swinburne. Responsibilities
of Chief Examiner are, for the time being,
delegated to the deans of the awarding faculties.
Course
A set of subjects the completion of which leads to the
student being eligible for the grant of an award by the
Swinburne Council.
Convener
The person designated to convene meetings of the particular
subject panel established under section 4 of these
regulations.
Examination
The formal testing of all students enrolled in a subject
during a period specified by the Academic Board for the
purpose of examination subject to the control of the Registrar
through his designated officer and for which a
result must be produced, published and recorded on the
student's record.
' At time of printing, the assessment regulations are under
review by the Institute's Academic Board. A copy of the revised
assessment regulations will be available at re-enrolment in
December and at enrolment in February.
Examinations notice-board
A public notice-board on the Swinburne campus designated
by the Registrar for the purpose.
Examinations Officer
The member of staff of the Registrar's Department who
is responsible for the day-to-day administration of
examinations.
Faculty board
Includes any properly constituted sub-committee of a
faculty board authorised to approve results for a subject.
Head of teaching department
The person who holds the position of head or chair of
the department at Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
which is responsible for the teaching of a particular
subject.
Irregularity
An irregularity is the unauthorised use or attempted use
by or for any student of any means to gain an unfair
advantage in any examination, test, assignment, essay
or other work, the marks for which form part of the final
assessment. It includes taking actions contrary to the
instructions for such examination or work; taking into an
examination any material with the intention of using it
to obtain an advantage.
Student
A person who is enrolled in any subject or subjects
offered by Swinburne lnstitute of Technology whether
formally enrolled for a course or not.
Subject
A course of study by whatever name known (including
'unit') within a particular discipline which is recorded in
a register of subjects maintained by the Registrar. A
subject has a unique code number and a title and is
recorded in the register as being taught for a number
of weeks (duration).
Subject panel
A panel of members of the academic staff of Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology established under section 4 of
these regulations.
Student Administration Office
Room AD109 in the Administration Building.
Teaching department
The department of Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
which has the responsibility for the teaching of a particular
subject.
Teaching faculty board
The board of the faculty within which the department
responsible for the teaching of a particular subject is
located.
2. The objectives of assessment
These regulations shall, in any question of interpretation,
be read subject to the following objectives:
2.1 For the purpose of these regulations the main functions
of assessment are:
2.1.1 the facilitation of learning which includes
such matters as:
(a) helping to establish learning situations
appropriate to the needs, abilities and
potentialities of the individual student;
(b) enabling the diagnosis and alleviation of
specific learning difficulties;
(c) motivating and directing learning experiences;
(d) developing and maintaining skills and
abilities.
One of the most effective ways of facilitating
learning is to provide the student with 'feedback',
that is, to let the student know, as soon
as possible after they are discerned, any
specific errors, misunderstandings and shortcomings,
and then to assist in overcoming
them.
2.1.2 the certification of the level of achievement
which students have reached in subjects
and/or courses at Swinburne lnstitute of
Technology;
2.1.3 assistance with the evaluation and review of
course content and objectives;
2.1.4 assistance with the evaluation and review of
methods of instruction.
2.2 Although these regulations concentrate chiefly on
the certification aspect of assessment, the Academic
Board considers that the other functions of assessment
stated in section 2.1 above are of even greater
importance in the educative process.
3. Forms of assessment
3.1 Without limiting the generality hereof, assessment
of students enrolled in a subject may be undertaken
in any of the following, or any combination of the
following:
3.1.1 examination at the conclusion of the duration
of the subject;

Swinburne Institute
3.1.2 formal or informal tests conducted at any time
from the commencement of the subject to the
end of the examination period designated
under these regulations;
3.1.3 assignment, project work, field work, essay,
report or such other activities as the subject
panel shall see fit.
4. Subject panels
4.1 For each subject for which a result is required there
shall be a subject panel (hereafter called the panel)
comprising at least two members of the academic
staff of Swinburne lnstitute of Technology.
4.2 The panel shall be appointed by the head of the
teaching department not later than the end of the
second week of the semester in which teaching of
the subject commences for that particular year.
4.3 The panel shall be reported to the teaching and
awarding faculty boards for noting, in the case of
subjects commencing in the first semester, no later
than the April meeting of the Faculty Boards and,
in the case of subjects commencing in the second
semester, no later than the August meeting of the
Faculty Boards.
4.4 The dean of the awarding faculty or head of the
awarding department, where such faculty or department
is not also the teaching faculty or department,
may nominate one person to be a member of a panel
for courses for which he or she is responsible.
4.5 The panel shall, subject to these regulations:
4.5.1 After consultation with the head of the teaching
department:
4.5.1.1 determine, prior to the issue of the
first test or assignment or test for the
subject of the year, the form or forms
of assessment to be used;
4.5.1.2 determine the assessment categories
to be used for the particular year.
4.5.2 Ensure that each panel member and each
person teaching the subject is familiar with
the content and objectives of the subject.
4.5.3 Determine the minimum standards which a
student must reach or specific work which a
student must complete in order to be notified
to a faculty board as a passing candidate in
the subject.
4.5.4 Ensure that all students enrolled in the subject
are informed of the procedures for
assessment including minimum attendance
requirements and allocation of marks for the
subject, prior to the issue of the first assignment
or test for the subject for the year.
4.5.5 Be satisfied as to assessment solutions or
statements prepared by or for the convener
under section 4.6.6 prior to the issue of the
particular assignment or test.
4.5.6 Determine whether electronic calculators may
be used in an examination or test and, if so,
the level of sophistication of the calculators
which may be used and whether or not the
room supervisors shall indicate on a candidate's
examination script that a calculator has
been used.
4.6 The convener of the subject panel shall, subject to
these regulations:
4.6.1 Ensure that the Registrar is notified, in
writing, of the form of assessment to be used
for the subject and semester.
4.6.2 Ensure that the Registrar is notified, at least
one week prior to the commencement of the
examination period for the semester, of any
subject for which passlnot pass results only
are required.
4.6.3 Ensure that assessment for the subject is
conducted.
4.6.4 Allocate and supervise the drafting of examination
papers and assignments as required
by the subject panel.
4.6.5 Ensure that all examination and test papers
for the subject are error-free prior to their
issue to candidates.
4.6.6 Be empowered to require written solutions to
assessable materials, or a statement of minimum
qualities acceptable for assessment
purposes from the teaching staff responsible
for writing or otherwise determining a part of
the assessment.
4.6.7 Be present, or a nominee shall be present,
in each examination room at the beginning
of each examination in the subject to:
4.6.7.1 answer any questions which may
arise regarding the subject matter of
the examination;
4.6.7.2 check each electronic calculator in
the possession of a candidate to
ensure that such instrument does not
exceed the level of sophistication
approved by the subject panel.
4.6.8 Ensure that examination scripts and assignments
are promptly marked and the results
are accurately recorded.
4.6.9 Ensure that a review of the examination script
is conducted for any candidate for whom an
application for special consideration has
been lodged.
4.6.10 Ensure that a review of the examination script
is conducted for any candidate whose initial
result is a fail or on the borderline between
assessment categories.
4.6.11 In the event of the subject panel being unable
to reach agreement in respect of any of the
matters listed under section 4.5, in consultation
with the head of department, resolve the
issue in question.
5. Candidature
5.1 Candidature for assessment is established by the
recording of an approved enrolment in the appropriate
subject($ (i.e., no separate application is
required to sit for an examination). No result can be
given in a subject for which the student is not formally
enrolled.
5.2 A student who withdraws from a subject within nine
weeks of the commencement of the examination
period of the semester in which the final assessment
takes place shall be deemed to have failed that subject
unless special permission has been given by
the dean of the awarding faculty and the result shall
be recorded as "Not Pass because of late withdrawal"
(NWD).
No student may withdraw from a subject after the
commencement of the examination period in which
final assessment takes place.
5.3 The teaching faculty board may specify minimum
requirements for attendance at classes, lectures,
tutorials, and practical sessions in order for a student
to be eligible for a passing grade in a subject.

5.4 It is the responsibility of a student to become familiar
with the subject attendance requirements and methods
of assessment adopted for each subject undertaken;
enquiries should be directed to the convener
of the appropriate subject panel.
5.5 Students requiring extra time
Subject conveners may make special arrangements
for students with temporary or permanent disabilities.
Applications for such arrangement (including
extra writing time) should be made to the Examinations
Officer. If possible, such applications should
be made before the date set down for the notification
of timetable changes.
6. Examination
6.1 Examination period
The Academic Board shall, on the advice of the Registrar,
designate a period of time in each semester
during which period any and all examinations shall
be held.
6.2 Timetables
6.2.1 Approximately half-way through each semester
a provisional timetable for examinations
to be held during the semester's examination
period will be posted on the examinations
notice-board. It is the responsibility of students
to note their examination times and
report immediately any clashes to the Examinations
Officer.
6.2.2 The final examination timetable will be posted
on the examinations notice-board approximately
two weeks prior to the beginning of the
examinations. It is the responsibility of students
to note dates and times of examinations.
6.2.3 No information on examination timetables
may be given over the telephone by a
member of the Swinburne staff.
6.3 Conduct of examinations
Unless otherwise stated on the examination timetable,
the following arrangements will apply:
(a) candidates for morning examinations will begin
writing at 9.15am. A period of reading time prior
to 9.15am may be allowed. The examination
timetable will show the period of reading time.
(b) candidates for afternoon examinations will
begin writing at 1.45pm. A period of reading
time prior to 1.45pm may be allowed. The
examination timetable will show the period of
reading time.
In (a) and (b) above the examination will be deemed
to have commenced at the time candidates began
writing.
Except for the completion of any identification
materials as may be required by the Examination
Supervisor, no writing or marking of examination
material shall be permitted during a period of reading
time.
Electronic calculators may not be used during reading
time.
Students will not be permitted to enter the examination
room after 30 minutes have elapsed from the
commencement of the examination, and will not be
permitted to leave during the first 30 minutes nor
during the last 15 minutes of the examination.
At the end of the examination students are required
to remain seated until the room supervisor has collected
all scripts and lnstitute material.
Unless expressly prohibited by the subject panel,
electronic calculators may be used. Such calculators
must be battery operated.
Students are required to provide their own
calculators, and drawing instruments. Students will
not be permitted to borrow or lend any equipment
or material during an examination.
6.4 Examination discipline
When an apparent irregularity is observed in an
examination room, the student will be informed
immediately by the supervisor but will be permitted
to finish the examination paper. The Examinations
Officer will immediately report the circumstances to
the Chief Examiner, the subject convener, and the
heads of the appropriate teaching and awarding
departments.
At the conclusion of the examination the Chief Examiner
will decide whether or not there has been an
irregularity. If it is the decision of the Chief Examiner
that there has been an irregularity, a meeting of the
following persons will be convened:
(a) the student concerned;
(b) the subject convener;
(c) and the heads of the awarding and teaching
departments;
to decide whether any penalty shall be imposed
upon the student. The maximum penalty for cheating
or other examination irregularity is that the
student be permanently excluded from further study
at the lnstitute and if any penalty is imposed the
student shall be notified in writing.
A student shall have the right of appeal as to the
finding of the Chief Examiner andlor the penalty to
a committee appointed for the purpose by the
Director.
The Appeals Committee shall consist of five
persons, of whom:
(a) one shall be the nominee of the Chief Examiner;
(b) one shall be a student of the lnstitute nominated
by the President of the Student Union;
(c) one shall be the convener of the subject or his
nominee;
(d) two shall be nominated from the academic staff
of the Institute;
provided that no member of the Appeals Committee
shall have been a party to the original investigation.
Results
7.1 Result categories
7.1.1 The following assessment categories only
may be used to record a student's performance
in a subject:
High distinction (HD)
Distinction (D)
Credit
(C)
Pass
(P)
Not pass (N)
Not pass - (NWD)
late withdrawal Not pass because of late
Not pass -
no attempt
withdrawal
(NA)
Not pass - did not present
any work for assessment
either by examination
or by other form of
assessment or both.
7.1.2 Where it is not appropriate for results in a subject
to be issued through the full range of
categories authorised by these regulations,
two categories only shall be used:
Pass
(PI
(N)
Not pass
If this provision is used a statement shall be
included in the published results to the effect
that only one category of satisfactory achievement
was awarded in the subject concerned.

Swinburne Institute
7.1.3 The following notations are applicable in
special circumstances:
Special exam (SPX)
Deferred (DEF)
Continuing (CON)
Exempt
(EXMI
7.1.4 In courses in engineering and applied
science for which block passing schemes
have been approved by the Academic Board
;he following results only may be used for
Faculty Result' subjects:
Pass
(P) where all individual
subjects have been passed;
Faculty pass (FP) where one or more
subjects have been
failed but the student is
permitted to proceed to
the next stage without
being required to repeat
the subject or subjects
failed;
Not pass (N) where one or more
subjects have been
failed and the student is
required to repeat all or
some of the subjects undertaken
in the stage for
which the faculty result
of 'Not pass' was obtained.
7.2 Processing results
7.2.1 The convener shall submit the following to
the head of the teaching department:
7.2.1.1 The results recommended for each
student enrolled for the subject;
7.2.1.2 Such statistics as are required by the
head of department and faculty
board:
7.2.1.3 A signed subject report in a form
approved by the awarding faculty
board, including:
(a) certification that these regulations
have been carried out;
(b) statement of the assessment procedure
followed;
(c) copies of all examinations, tests
and assignments;
(d) where appropriate, copies of solutions
or statements of minimum
qualities; and
(e) an appraisal of the subject as a
whole.
7.2.2 Before recommending the results to the
awarding faculty board the head of department
shall ensure that a review has been carried
out of the work of all candidates who are
recommended as having failed a subject, or
whose results are borderline to an assessment
category.
7.2.3 The head of department shall recommend to
the awarding faculty board results of all enrolled
students for approval.
7.2.4 After faculty board has approved the results,
the head of department shall arrange for the
entry, by the convener, of the results on the
official result sheets; for the transcription to
be checked and for the official result sheets
to be delivered to the Student Administration
Office.
7.3 Deferred results
7.3.1 A deferred result may be granted only by the
faculty board and then only when special circumstances
justify the grant of an extension
of time for the completion of work prescribed
for the subject before a student's result in that
subject is finalised.
7.3.2 When a deferred result has been granted, the
result must be finalised in readiness for notification
to the awarding faculty board by a date
to be fixed by the board, not later than two
months after the date of publication of the
deferment. The student and the subject convener
shall be advised of the date and conditions
set for the finalisation of the result.
7.3.3 Any extension of the period of deferment
must have the prior approval of the dean of
the awarding faculty who shall fix an alternative
date by which the student must have
completed the requirements of the subject.
Details of the extension granted and the
reasons for it shall be notified to the next
meeting of the faculty board.
7.3.4 As soon as the final result has been determined,
the subject convener shall submit an
Alteration to Result form, via the head of
department, to the dean for onward transmission
to the faculty board.
7.3.5 The Student Administration Office shall notify
the dean of the awarding faculty of any deferred
result which has not been finalised within
two months of the date of publication of the
deferment. The faculty board must deal with
the matter at its next meeting.
7.4 Continuing notation
The notation 'continuing' may be used:
(a) in those subjects in which enrolment will normally
extend for more than one year;
(b) in cases where a result is determined on sub-
. ,
mission of a report or thesis; and
(c) in cases where a student may be required to
extend his or her enrolment in a subject for
longer than the normal duration of the subject
without a failing result being recorded for the
earlier period of enrolment.
The notation 'continuing' will appear on the official
examination result certificate issued to students, with
a note that, in the normal course of events, re-enrolment
in the next semester will be required and that
no final result will be issued until the end of that
semester.
7.5 Publication and withholding certification
7.5.1 Except by resolution of the awarding faculty
board and provided in section 7.5.6, results
of assessments in a subject shall be published
within two weeks of the end of the
examination period nearest to the conclusion
of the subject. In the case of a faculty board
resolving to publish results after the normal
publication period the Academic Board shall
be advised of the proposed publication date
and the reasons for the later publication.
7.5.2 The Student Administration Office is the only
official source for the publication and certification
of results.
7.5.3 Official publication of results shall be by their
display in a pre-designed place on the Institute
campus on the date or dates announced
by the Registrar for the release of that particular
semester's or year's results.
7.5.4 No results will be given over the telephone.

7.5.5 A certificate of results for the particular semester
will be produced and made available
to every enrolled student.
7.5.6 No certification of current or past academic
results will be produced or made available to
any student or previously enrolled student or
to any other person on behalf of a student or
previously enrolled student of the lnstitute
who has failed to return outstanding materials
borrowed from the Swinburne Library or who
has failed to pay any fine or imposition relating
thereto, or who has any other outstanding
commitment to the Institute, after notice to
that effect had been posted by the Registrar
to the student at the address most recently
recorded in the Institute records for the particular
student.
7.6 Reports
Any student may, on application to the Student
Administration Office within 30 days of the publication
of the result of assessment for a subject, and
after payment of the fee prescribed, obtain a detailed
report by the examiner on any material formally
assessed.
Fees for such reports shall be determined from time
to time by the Director.
(Access to examination scripts and marks for each
question will be available on request and without fee.
Enquiries regarding marks or access to scripts should
be made directly to the appropriate department or
faculty office.)
7.7 Alteration to results
Any alteration to an examination result (whether
finalising a deferred result or altering a published
result) which is submitted within two months of publication
of the original result, may be approved by
the dean of the awarding faculty as chair of the
faculty board. An Alteration to Result form shall then
be forwarded, via the Secretary, to the Faculty Board,
to the Student Administration Office. The Secretary
shall record the details of the alteration and the
reasons for it on the agenda of the next faculty board
meeting. The faculty board will receive the
alterations for noting. The Student Administration
Office will take action on the dean's signature.
Where an alteration to examination result, other than
finalisinq a result for which an extension of tlrne to
complete has been granted under section 7.3.3 or
Application under this clause must be lodged
at the Student Administration Office not later
than midday on the seventh working day after
the day of the publication of the results of the
subject in the final semester.
8.2 Special examinations granted in accordance with
section 8.1 must be notified to faculty board at its
first meeting after the granting of the special
examinations and the student and subject convener
advised.
8.3 When a special examination has been granted the
result must be finalised in readiness for notification
to the awarding faculty board by a date fixed by the
faculty board, but no later than two months after the
date of publication of the original result.
8.4 Any extension of that period must have the prior
approval of the dean of the awarding faculty who
shall fix an alternative date by which the special
examination must be finalised. Details of the extension
granted shall be notified to the next meeting
of the faculty board.
8.5 The subject convener must submit the result of the
special examination to the head of department in
time for it to be approved by the dean of the awarding
faculty before the due date. The dean shall notify
the result to the Student Administration Office and
the faculty board.
8.6 The Student Administration Office shall notify the
dean of the awarding faculty of any results which
are outstanding for more than two months from the
date of publication of the original results. The faculty
board must deal with the matter at its next meeting.
9. Retention of assessed work
The head of department shall arrange for the retention
of all examination scripts for a period of three calendar
months after the publication of results. The head of
department shall arrange for the storage of copies of a
representative sample of all assessed material (including
examination scripts) for all subjects taught by the department
for a period of at least 24 months after the publication
of results.
10. Special consideration
A student whose work during the academic year or
whose performance in an exammalion or other assessment
has been affected by illness or other serlous cause
may apply in writing to the Registrar for special consider-
8.4, is submitted more than two months after publica- ation by the subject panel concerned.
tion of the original results, the alteration must be An application for special consideration must be accomapproved
by the awarding faculty board before the panied by appropriate evidence such as a medical cer-
Alteration to Result form is forwarded to the Student tificate, a letter from a student counsellor, etc.
Administration Office.
A~olication should be lodaed at the Student Administra-
8. Special examinations ti& office not later than midday on the third working
day after the conclusion of the day of the examination.
8.1 A special examination may be granted by the Chief Where no examination is held, application must be made
Examiner:
before the end of the first week of the examination period.
8.1.1 Where a student is absent from the whole or No application will be considered after the publication
part of an examination due to illness or other of results.
misadventure.
Application under this clause, accompanied 11. Appeal
by evidence of inability to attend, must be Any student or group of students has the right of appeal
lodged at the Student Administration Office to the head of the appropriate teaching department about
not later than midday of the third working day any aspect of the assessment procedure in any subject.
after the day of the examination; or
Such appeal shall be lodged within sixty days of publica-
8.1.2 Where a student has obtained a pass cate- tion of the results in that subject, unless otherwise agreed
gory in all subjects except one for an under- by the Chief Examiner.
graduate qualifications and has presented for
and failed that subject in the final semester,
or where a student has failed, in hislher
penultimate semester, a subject which was
not again available in the final semester.

General grievance procedure for students
1. Policy
1.1 ~winburne Council adopted an Equal Opportunity
Policv in 1984. The ~olicv affirms commitment to
the p;inciples of equal opportunity with regard to
employees of, and applicants for employment
within Swinburne, and to students admitted to,
and prospective students of Swinburne.
1.2 The policy and its successive amendments
stipulate that there shall be no discrimination on
the grounds of sex, marital status, disability, race,
religious or political beliefs, age, sexual preference,
or being a parent, childless or a defacto
spouse.
2. Definition of terms used in grievance
procedure
2.1 Grievance: a complaint presented by an individual,
or a group, based on the opinion that they
are, or have been, receiving treatment that differs
from the treatment received by other individuals
or groups.
2.2 Discrimination:
a) Direct Discrimination -any decision or action
which specifically excludes a person or group
of people from a benefit or opportunity, or
significantly reduces their chances of obtaining
it, because a personal characteristic irrelevant
to the situation is applied as a barrier.
b) Indirect Discrimination - attitudes and
assumptions which are incorporated into rules,
policies and practices, that appear to be
neutral or to treat everyone equally, but may
in fact disadvantage one group.
2.3 Status or Private Life: The Victorian Equal Opportunity
Act 1984 stipulates that no person shall
experience discrimination on the grounds of that
person's status or private life. 'Status' refers to a
person's sex, marital status, race, impairment,
being a parent, childless or a defacto spouse.
'Private Life' refers to the holding or not holding
of any lawful religious or political beliefs and
engaging or refusing to engage in any lawful
religious or political activities. The Act applies to
education and employment.
2.4 Complainant: person who lodges a grievance.
2.5 Respondent: person who it is alleged undertook
the behaviour which resulted in the grievance.
2.6 Grievance Procedure: a prescribed set of actions
to be followed when a grievance is presented.
3. Behaviours or actions which give
rise to a grievance
3.1 A grievance arises when a student cannot obtain
redress through normal channels for what helshe
considers to be unfair or different treatment. Such
treatment may occur in course assessment, or in
classroom behaviour and interactions.
3.2 A grievance may include behaviour outlawed by
the Victorian Equal Opportunity Act, the Federal
Racial Discrimination Act or the Federal Sex Discrimination
Act, such as discrimination on the
basis of sex or marital status, or racial
harassment.
A separate grievance procedure exists to handle
cases relating to sexual harassment.
Swinburne Institute
4. Resolving a grievance
- -
Informal procedure
In the first instance, the student should discuss
the complaint where relevant, with the lecturer
(SIT), member of teaching staff (SCT) or member
of administrative staff in an attempt to resolve the
complaint.
If the grievance cannot be resolved in this way,
the student may then raise the matter with the
Head of Department.
Where a student has a complaint against a
member of staff who is also the Head of Department,
or in a case where the student feels that
to approach the Head of Department is not appropriate,
the student may take hislher complaint to
the Dean or Head of Division. The Dean or Head
of Division will carry out the role otherwise
assigned to the Head of Department, in these
grievance procedures.
The Head of Department will discuss the
complaint with the student and advise the student
where documentation describing the grievance
procedure is available.
If the student's preference is for internal resolution
of the complaint, the Head of Department will take
a written record of the complaint on a pro forma
grievance form.
It will contain:
a) the name of the complainant;
b) the name of the person(s) against whom the
complaint is made;
c) the date the complaint is made;
d) the date@) the behaviour resulting in the
grievance took place;
e) a brief description of the nature of the
complaint;
f) a summary of follow-up actions taken.
The complainant will read and sign the grievance
form as being a true record, after making any
appropriate alterations.
No written record shall be taken or any further
action initiated, if the complainant is not willing
to name the respondent or does not permit the
Head of Department to enter into a conciliation
process with the respondent.
In cases where complaints are made by a class
(two or more students) concerning academic or
teaching staff, the complainants will not be named
and the Head of Department may proceed with
conciliating and resolving the complaint.
With the agreement of the complainant, the Head
of Department will then attempt to resolve the
grievance with the member of staff named in the
complaint through informal discussion and
conciliation.
nciliation and resolution
The Head of Department will meet informally with
the respondent for the purposes of:
a) outlining the grievance and naming the
complainant (except as covered by Clause
A 7).
b) ;:king a written record of the respondent's
reply to the complaint, which is signed and
considered a true record:
c) attempting to reach an agreement with the
respondent that is acceptable to the
complainant;
d) attempting to ensure that there are no reprisals
taken against a student who has made a complaint
in good faith;

e) outlining the requirements of State and
Federal Government anti-discrimination legislation
or Swinburne Council policy, where
relevant;
f) advising the respondent that another staff
member will be nominated to re-assess the
student's written work in complaints relating
to course assessment.
5.2 If the grievance is successfully resolved to the
satisfaction of the complainant the informal
procedure will cease at this point.
5.3 The written record of the informal complaint will
be retained for a period of 12 months in a confidential
file in the office of the Head of
Department.
6. Re-assessment of submitted work or
examination paper
6.1 If the complaint concerns assessment of written
work which includes assignments, reports or
exam papers, the Head of Department may after
discussing the complaint with the staff member
named as the respondent, nominate another staff
member to re-assess the student's work.
6.2 In the case where the respondent is also the Head
of Department, the Dean or Head of Division,
acting as the student's contact person may
nominate a member of staff from another
discioline or a member of staff from the same
discipline in another institution to undertake a reassessment
of the student's work.
7. Follow-up actions
7.1 The Head of Department will meet with the
student each semester for a period of 12 months
following successful resolution of the complaint,
to ensure that retaliatory actions were not taken
against the student by virtue of the complaint.
7.2 The Head of Department will ensure wherever
practically possible, that work presented by the
complainant will be marked independently for the
perid of one year, following successful resolution
of the complaint.
7.3 Where the student is subjected to retaliation
helshe may approach the Head of Department or
Head of Division or Dean where appropriate and
an investigation will be instituted.
7.4 Where a member of staff is found to have
retaliated against the student, disciplinary procedures
will be instituted.
Such disciplinary action may be taken against the
member of staff complained of in the original
complaint or any other member of staff undertaking
retaliatory action.
8. Formal procedure
8.1 If a grievance cannot be successfully conciliated
by the Head of Department to the satisfaction of
the complainant, the complainant may instruct the
Head of Department to proceed with a formal
complaint.
8.2 All formal complaints will be presented to the
Appeals Committee.
8.3 The Appeals Committee will comprise:
a) the Director's nominee from within the
Directorate, who shall act as the Chair;
b) a representative of either the TTUV, SASO, or
VCUSA, depending upon the constituency of
the respondent; and
c) a representative of the Student Union.
8.4 The written reports, compiled by the Head of
Department and signed by the complainant and
the respondent will be forwarded by the Head of
Department to the Chair of the Appeals
Committee.
8.5 The complainant or the respondent may submit
any other written material to the Committee in
support of their case. Any additional evidence so
provided, should first be submitted to the other
party or parties named in the complaint.
8.6 The Chair of the Appeals Committee will advise
the Equal Opportunity Officer if the grievance
includes allegations of behaviour outlawed under
State or Federal Government anti-discrimination
legislation or Council Policy on Equal Opportunity.
9. Investigation of complaint
9.1 The Appeals Committee will investigate the
grievance in the following manner:
a) the Committee will meet within seven work~ng
days of the date the formal complaint is made
and consider all written documentation
including the written statements of the
complainant and respondent and the written
statements of witnesses;
b) the Committee may call the complainant or
the respondent to attend the meeting to
explain any aspect of their written statement.
If the complainant is required to appear before
the Appeals Committee helshe may be
accompanied by hislher Head of Department.
If the respondent is required to attend helshe
may be accompanied by hislher staff
association or union representative.
The complainant and respondent would not
normally appear before the Appeals Committee
at the same time;
c) the Committee may call any witnesses who
have submitted written statements concerning
the grievance to appear before the Appeals
Committee;
d) if the complaint contains allegations of
behaviour outlawed by Federal or State
Government anti-discrimination legislation or
Council Policy on Equal Opportunity, the
Equal Opportunity Officer will attend the
Appeals Committee meeting and advise the
Committee accordingly. The Equal Opportunity
Officer will not have voting rights.
9.2 Following deliberations the Committee will make
appropriate recommendations. Committee
decisions will be achieved through concensus or
agreement reached between all members.
9.3 The Committee will forward its written recommendation
to the Director together with
documentation of the grievance.
Actions which may be taken are limited to:
a) not upholding the case;
b) upholding the case and stating that the following
be considered, where relevant:
- reparation be made to the complainant for
any loss of academic credit or achievement
suffered as a consequence of the
behaviour
- re-admitting a student who has been
excluded from a course
- directing the respondent to undertake
appropriate staff development programs
- reprimanding the respondent
- ensuring that the complainant is not
subjected to retaliatory action by virtue of
the complaint

c) in the case where a grievance which concerned
discrimination against a student on the
grounds of status or private life being upheld,
the following action may also be recommended:
- suggesting that the respondent undertake
counselling.
9.4 All grievances shall have undergone the process
of a formal resolution within a period of three
months of the receipt by the Chair of the Appeals
Committee of the formal written complaint.
9.5 The complainant and the respondent will be
advised in writing by the Chair of the Appeals
Committee of the decision made within seven
days of submission of the Appeals Committee's
recommendation to the Director.
10. Appeals
10.1 Either party shall have the right of appeal. The
appeal should be submitted in writing to the
Director within seven days of the receipt of the
Committee's decision. The appellant shall be
entitled to present new evidence or to re-argue
hislher case.
10.2 The finding of such an appeal shall be
communicated to the appellant within fourteen
days of the appeal being lodged.
11. Complaints of discrimination - external
procedures
11.1 In the case of a grievance being concerned with
allegations of discrimination against the
complainant on the grounds of that person's
status or private life, the complainant has the right
to present a complaint to the appropriate external
authority.
11.2 Where internal grievance procedures are being
followed, the complainant may wish to refer the
matter to the appropriate external authority at any
stage of the process, and in particular:
a) when no further action is taken;
b) when helshe may wish to appeal against the
Committee's decision.
11.3 Where the matter is taken up with the external
authority, the internal grievance procedure shall
cease to apply in the case.
11.4 The appropriate external authority in the case of
discrimination complaints is the Office of the
Commissioner for Equal Opportunity in Victoria.
12. Confidentiality
12.1 Confidentiality will be strictly observed throughout
the conciliation and resolution process.
Information and records related to complaints will
be considered exempt documents under Freedom
of Information legislation.
13. Record keeping and storage
13.1 The written record of the complaint will be
retained for a period of 12 months in a confidential
manner.
13.2 Where all appeal mechanisms are exhausted or
where the complaint is not sustained, written
documentation of the case will be destroyed.
13.3 The Equal Opportunity Officer shall have access
to statistical information concerning discrimination
related complaints.
Swinburne lnstitute
14. Conflict of interest
14.1 If the Head of Department feels that to undertake
conciliation of a complaint would place himlherself
in the situation of a conflict of interest, the
Head of Department will direct the student to take
the grievance to the Dean or the Head of Division.
14.2 A complainant may at any stage of the informal
procedure seek the assistance of the Dean or
Head of Division if helshe believes a conflict of
interest exists or may arise as a result of the
complaint.
15. Resources
15.1 The complainant may at any stage of the
grievance procedure approach where relevant,
the following offices or persons for advice andlor
support:
a) Student Union;
b) Swinburne Student Services;
c) Equal Opportunity Office.
15.2 Members of staff so contacted are advised to
direct the complainant to hislher Head of
Department.
15.3 The respondent may approach the staff
association or union for advice and support.
Council Policy (as amended) December 1988.
Statute for the degree of Master
(by research)
1. Definitions
In this statute:
Committee means the Higher Degrees Committee of the
Academic Board;
Council means the Council of Swinburne Ltd;
lnstitute means Swinburne lnstitute of Technology;
Faculty Board means the sub-committee of the Institute's
Academic Board called the 'Faculty Board' (or any authorised
sub-committee thereof) which is responsible for
studies being undertaken in the area;
Head of Department means the person appointed Head
of Department or elected as Chair of Department responsible
for studies in the particular discipline.
2. Title of degree
The degree of Master may be awarded in a field of study
of any faculty of the Institute. Degrees shall be designated
as follows:
Master of Applied Science
MAppSc
Master of Arts
MA
Master of Business
MBus
Master of Engineering
MEng
3. Grading of degree
The degree of Master shall be awarded in one grade only.
4. Admission to candidature
4.1 Entry requirements
A person wishing to be admitted to candidature shall
have:
4.1.1 qualified, at a sufficiently meritorious standard,
for a degree of the lnstitute (in a field relevant
to the work proposed) or such other
degree as the Committee may deem equivalent
for this purpose; or
4.1.2 qualified for an award judged by the Committee
to be of relevant character and appropriate
standard; and have experience which the
Committee deems to be a suitable preparation
for the applicant's proposed field of study.

4.2 Application
No application for admission to candidature may be
approved by the Committee except with the support
of the faculty board.
4.3 Supervision and facilities
An applicant shall be admitted to candidature only
if the Committee is satisfied, on advice supplied by
the faculty board, that the proposed program is a
suitable study in the discipline or area concerned
and that adequate facilities and supervision are
available.
5. Program
The candidate shall carry out a program of research,
investigation or development involving the submission
of a major thesis embodying the results of that program
carried out during the period of candidature by the candidate,
in:
5.1 a department of the Institute, or
5.2 industrial, commercial, governmental, educational
or research organisations approved by the Committee,
or
5.3 a combination of 5.1 and 5.2.
In addition, a candidate may be required to undertake
other formal studies as approved by the Committee.
6. Duration
The candidate may undertake the program on a full-time
or part-time basis. Excluding any periods of intermission
as set out below, the duration of candidature shall be:
6.1 for a candidate whose degree under 4.1.1 or whose
award under 4.1.2 involved less than four years fulltime
study (or its part-time equivalent): not less than
21 months and not, under normal circumstances,
more than 36 months of full-time study;
6.2 for a candidate whose degree under 4.1.1 or whose
award under 4.1.2 involved not less than four years
full-time study (or its part-time equivalent): not less
than 15 months and not, under normal circumstances,
more than 36 months of full-time study;
6.3 where a student undertakes the masters degree program
(or any portion thereof), by part-time study: the
maximum time shall normally be not more than 72
months.
After taking advice from the supervisor(s) and the head
of department, the Committee may grant a period of
intermission of candidature on such conditions as the
Committee sees fit.
7. Supervision
For each candidate the Committee shall appoint, on the
recommendation of the faculty board, and on such terms
and conditions as the Committee determines, one or two
supervisors, one of whom shall be a member of the academic
staff of the Institute.
If the program is carried out within the Institute, at least
one supervisor shall be a member of the academic staff
of the department in which the program is conducted.
Where two supervisors are appointed one shall be designated
the Co-ordinating Supervisor. The Co-ordinating
Supervisor must be a member of the staff of the Institute.
The Co-ordinating Supervisor shall have overall responsibility
for the administrative conduct of programs.
If for any reason a supervisor is unable effectively to
supervise the candidate for a period exceeding three
months, the Committee shall, on the recommendation
of the faculty board, appoint a replacement supervisor.
8. Progress
At the expiry of twelve months from the date of admission
to candidature and at such other times as the Committee
may decide, the Committee requires a report on the progress
of each candidate. The report is prepared by the
supervisor (or, where there is more than one supervisor,
the Co-ordinating Supervisor). Prior to the preparation
of the report the supervisor (or Co-ordinating Supervisor)
will be required to interview the candidate. The candidate
will be given access to the report and will have the opportunity
to comment to the Committee on the supervisor's
assessment of progress.
Where the Committee is of opinion that a candidate's
progress is not, prima facie, of a satisfactory level, a
candidate may be required to show cause why candidature
should not be terminated.
Failure on the part of the candidate to demonstrate satisfactory
progress may result in the Committee terminating
candidature.
9. Thesis
9.1 Three copies of the thesis shall be submitted to the
Committee. At least two of the copies must be
bound.
9.2 The thesis must be typed 1M spaced, in English,
on A4 size paper, and conform to any other specifications
prescribed by the Committee.
9.3 Repealed.
9.4 One copy of the thesis shall, if passed by the Committee,
be lodged in the Swinburne Library, one shall
be held by the department in which the work was
done, and one shall be returned to the candidate.
9.5 With the Committee's prior approval a candidate
may submit work other than in the form set out in
9.2 and 9.3.
10. Examination
The Committee shall appoint on the recommendation
of the faculty board, on such terms and conditions as
the Committee determines, at least two examiners in
respect of each candidate's thesis. The candidate's
supervisor shall not normally be appointed as an examiner.
At least one examiner shall be external to the
Institute.
The name of the examiners shall not, without the
approval of the Committee, be disclosed to the candidate.
Each examiner shall provide a report to the Committee
on the standard of the candidate's thesis and recommend
one of the following courses of action:
(a) that the thesis be passed;
(b) that the thesis be passed subject to the inclusion
of minor specified amendments;
(c) that the thesis be returned to the candidate for major
revision and re-submission within a specified period;
or
(d) that the thesis be failed.
Each examiner should indicate whether the report is to
be made available to the candidate in whole or in part.
11. Patents and registered designs
The patent rights or right to register a design for any
device, process, chemical or the like which has been
invented or developed by a candidate for the degree of
Master in the course of the program being undertaken
for the degree shall, unless otherwise determined by
Council on the advice of the Committee, be the property
of Swinburne Limited.

12. Confidentiality
In general the public should have access to the material
contained in a thesis once the degree has been awarded.
Where a program of research is carried out in or in
conjunction with the type of organisation referred to in
5.2 above, the candidate, in order to pursue such a
program, may be given access by that organisation to
restricted information which the candidate or the
organisation does not wish to disclose freely. In such
cases the Committee must receive, in writing, from the
organisation, notice of such materials and the reason
why, in its opinion, disclosure would be undesirable.
Where such material is involved and provided the Committee's
prior approval is obtained, the candidate may
submit a thesis in two volumes, one containing the general
thesis, the second containing only the restricted data
or information.
The Committee may restrict access to the second
volume for a specified period.
Where the thesis has only one volume, the Committee,
on receipt of a request in writing from the candidate and
supported by statement in writing from the Head of
Department, may order that, for a period of up to three
years from the date of that order, the copies of the thesis
forwarded to the Swinburne Library and the department
shall be made available only to researchers or readers
specifically authorised in writing by the Committee.
13. Copyright
Copyright in the thesis is the property of Swinburne
Limited. Those rights, or any part of them, may be
assigned by Council, on the advice of the Committee,
to the candidate.
14. Regulations
The Committee may make or amend regulations under
this statute regarding the admission to candidature,
reports on cand~dates during the period of candidature,
the examination of candidates and related matters.
15. Change in statute
This statute may be amended from time to time by
Council on the advice of the Academic Board acting on
the recommendation of the Committee. In the event of
an amendment being made subsequent to the beginning
of a student's candidature, that candidate may elect to
continue under the statute which was in effect at the time
candidature began.
Statute for the degree of Master
(by publication)
1. Definitions
1.1 General
Committee means the Higher Degrees Committee
of the Academic Board;
Council means the Council of Swinburne Ltd;
lnstitute means Swinburne lnstitute of Technology;
Faculty Board means the subcommittee of the Institute's
Academic Board called the 'Faculty Board' (or
any authorised sub-committee thereof) which is responsible
for studies being undertaken in the area;
Head of Department means the person appointed
Head of Department or elected Chair of Department
responsible for studies in the particular discipline.
Swinburne Institute
1.2 Publication
Publication is a major published paper, a collection
of papers or a monograph. A publication must be
based on original research, investigation or developmental
work carried out by the candidate in an industrial,
commercial, governmental, educational or
research organisation, or carried out as a member
of the staff of a college of advanced education provided
that the subject and nature of the research
work are accepted by the lnstitute as appropriate
for examination of the award of the degree of Master.
Title of degree
The degree of Master may be awarded in a field of study
of any faculty of the Institute. Degrees shall be
designated as follows:
Master of Applied Science MAppSc
Master of Arts
MA
Master of Business
MBus
Master of Engineering MEng
Grading of degree
The degree of Master shall be awarded in one grade only.
Admission to candidature
4.1 Admission requirements
A candidate for a degree of Master by publication
shall:
(a) have held for a minimum period of five years:
(i) a degree of the lnstitute or of any other institution
approved by the Committee for this
purpose; or
(ii) such other qualification or experience as
might be accepted as equivalent to (i) above.
(b) submit to the lnstitute a publication or publications.
4.2 Application
No application for admission to candidature may be
approved by the Committee except with the support
of the appropriate faculty board.
For the purpose of assessing an application, the lnstitute
shall require that any publication submitted in respect
of the application:
(a) has been the subject of critical independent examination;
(b) is available to the general public; and
(c) where it consists of several papers, relates to one
aspect of the same subject.
A report issued by an organisation shall not, without the
express consent of the organisation and the Institute,
be accepted as a publication for the purpose of this
statute.
In the event of joint publication, the applicant shall provide
the lnstitute with a written statement indicating the
extent and nature of the applicant's personal contribution
to the project. The applicant's statement should be countersigned
by the joint author(s) and supervisor (where
applicable), or a written statement should be provided
by the joint author(s) and supervisor (where applicable).
The publication submitted should represent work which
is considered by the appropriate faculty board to be the
equivalent of two years full-time study.
A candidate shall normally be required to present at least
one seminar to staff and students of the lnstitute on the
subject of publication.
A candidate may not submit for examination work previously
submitted for any previous academic qualification.

11. In the first instance three copies of the publication shall
be forwarded to the Registrar of the lnstitute who shall
request the Committee to assess whether the candidate
and the publication presented conforms to the guidelines
numbered above (2-10) and are worthy of examination
for the award of Masters degree by publication.
12. The publication submitted shall be in English; if the original
publication is in a language other than English, a
translation must be supplied.
13. If the publication is deemed worthy the Committee shall
instiaate the examination of the submission. The Dublicationlshall
be examined by two examiners app&nted in
the same manner as those for the degree of Master by
research. At least one of the examiners shall be external
to the Institute.
14. Each examiner shall be asked to give an opinion as to
whether the publication demonstrated:
(a) a thorough understanding of the relevant field of
study;
(b) a high level of competence;
(c) a discernable contribution in the field of study.
15. Each examiner shall assess the publication submitted
as either:
(a) pass, or
(b) fail.
Publications which have been deemed to have failed
may not be re-submitted.
16. If the examiners disagree, the Committee may appoint
a third examiner and a majority view will determine the
result; the candidate may be required to undertake an
oral examination.
17. One copy of the publication, if passed by the Committee,
shall be lodged in the Swinburne Library, and one shall
be held by the department whose field of interest is
closest to that of the candidate's work, and one shall be
returned to the candidate.
18. This statute may be amended from time to time by
Council on the advice of the Academic Board acting on
the recommendation of the Committee.
Statute for the degree of Doctor of
Philosophy
1. Definitions
In this statute:
Committee means the Higher Degrees Committee of the
Academic Board;
Council means the Council of Swinburne Ltd;
lnstitute means Swinburne lnstitute of Technology;
Faculty Board means the Sub-Committee of the lnstitute
of Academic Board called the 'Faculty Board' (or any
authorised sub-committee thereof) which is responsible
for studies being undertaken in the area;
Head of Department means the person appointed Head
of Department or elected as Chairman of Department
responsible for studies in the particular discipline.
2. Grading of degree
The degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall be awarded
in one grade only.
3. Admission to candidature
3.1 Entry requirements
A person wishing to be admitted to candidature shall
have:
3.1.1 qualified for the award of the degree of Master
of the lnstitute (in a field relevant to the work
proposed) or for the award of such other
degree as the Committee may deem equivalent
for this purpose; and shall have demonstrated
to the Committee's satisfaction a capacity
for research and investigational work in
the area of study proposed; or
3.1.2 qualified for an award judged by the Committee
to be of relevant character and appropriate
standard; and have experience which
fulfills the requirements set out in 3.1.1.
3.2 A candidate who is enrolled for the degree of Master
in the lnstitute may be permitted to transfer hislher
candidature to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
after the completion of not less than twelve months
(or its equivalent) of full-time researchlcoursework.
3.3 Application
No application for admission to candidature may be
approved by the Committee except with the support
of the faculty board.
3.4 Supervision and facilities
An applicant shall be admitted to candidature only
if the Committee is satisfied, on advice supplied by
the faculty board, that the proposed program is a
suitable study in the discipline or area concerned
and that adequate facilities and supervision are
available.
4. Program
4.1 The candidate shall carry out a program of research,
investigation or development involving the submission
of a major thesis embodying . - the results of that
program.
The program shall be one which will make a distinct
contribution to knowledge and in the execution of
it the candidate shall demonstrate a substantial
degree of originality.
4.2 In addition, a candidate may be required to undertake
other formal studies as approved by the
Committee.
4.3 The program may be carried out in:
4.3.1 a department of the Institute, or
4.3.2 an industrial, commercial, governmental,
educational or research -organisation
approved by the Committee, or
4.3.3 a'dombination of 4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
4.4 A candidate wishing to undertake other studies in
addition to any specified by the Committee under
4.2 must seek the approval of the Committee.
5. Duration
5.1 The candidate may undertake the program on a fulltime
or part-time basis. Excluding any periods of
intermission as set out below, the duration of candidature
normally shall be:
5.1.1 36 calendar months for a full-time candidate
from the date of commencement.
5.1.2 72 calendar months for a part-time candidate
from the date of commencement.
5.2 In the case of a transfer of candidature as set out
in 3.2 the Committee shall determine what period
of master's candidature shall count towards the candidate
for the degree of PhD.
5.3 Where a candidate is permitted to transfer between
full-time and part-time candidature the Committee
shall determine the duration of candidature.
5.4 A candidate may pursue the program on a part-time
basis only if the Committee is satisfied that the candidate
is able to devote sufficient time to the
program.

Swinburne Institute
5.5 Where an applicant has been accepted as a doctoral 10. Examination
candidate the applicant shall enrol in the Institute
The Committee shall appoint on the recommendation
and pay the appropriate fees and charges.
of the facultv board. on such terms and conditions as
6. Intermission
After taking advice from the supervisor(s) and the Head
of Department, the Committee may grant a period of
intermission of candidature on such conditions as the
Committee sees fit. The total period of intermissions
granted during candidature shall not exceed 12 months
unless the Committee deems the circumstances to be
excedional.
7. Supervision
For each candidate the Committee shall appoint, on the
recommendation of the faculty board, and on such terms
and conditions as the Committee determines, one or two
supervisors, one of whom shall be a full-time member
of the academic staff of the Institute.
If the program is carried out within the Institute, at least
one supervisor shall be a member of the academic staff
of the department in which the program is conducted.
Where two supervisors are appointed one shall be designated
the Co-ordinating Supervisor. The Co-ordinating
Supervisor must be a member of the staff of the Institute.
The Coordinating Supervisor shall have overall administrative
responsibility for the conduct of programs.
If for any reason a supervisor is unable effectively to
supervise the candidate for a period exceeding three
months, the Committee shall, on the recommendation
of the faculty board, appoint a replacement supervisor.
8. Progress
At the expiry of twelve months from the date of admission
to candidature and at such other times as the Committee
may decide, the Committee will request a report on the
progress of each candidate. The report is to be prepared
by the supervisor (or, where there is more than one
supervisor, the Co-ordinating Supervisor). Prior to the
preparation of the report the supervisor (or Co-ordinating
Supervisor) will be required to interview the candidate.
The candidate will be given access to the report and will
have the opportunity to comment to the Committee on
the supervisor's assessment of progress.
Where the Committee is of opinion that a candidate's
progress is not, prima facie, of a satisfactory level, a candidate
may be required to show cause why candidature
should not be terminated.
Failure on the part of the candidate to demonstrate satis- 11.
factory progress may result in the Committee terminating
candidature.
9. Thesis
9.1 Three copies of the thesis shall be submitted to the
Registrar. At least two of the copies must be bound.
9.2 The thesis must be typed 11/2 spaced, in English,
on A4 size paper, and conform to any other spec- 12.
ifications prescribed by the Committee.
9.3 One copy of the thesis shall, if passed by the Committee,
be lodged in the Swinburne Library, one shall
be held by the department in which the work was
done, and one shall be returned to the candidate.
9.4 With the Committee's prior approval a candidate
may submit work other than in the form set out in 9.2.
9.5 The thesis shall be accompanied by a certificate
from the Supervisor(s) stating that in their opinion
the thesis is ready for examination.
9.6 When submitting the thesis the candidate must sign
a declaration that the thesis has not previously been
submitted for a degree or similar award at another
institution.
the Committhe determines, at least two examiners in respect
of each candidate's thesis. The candidate's supervisor
shall not normally be appointed as an examiner.
At least one examiner shall be external to the Institute.
The names of the examiners shall not, without the
approval of the Committee, be disclosed to the candidate.
Each examiner shall provide a report to the Committee
on the standard of the candidate's thesis and recommend
one of the following courses of action:
(a) that the degree be awarded;
(b) that the degree be awarded subject to the inclusion
in the thesis of minor specified amendments;
(c) that the degree be awarded subject to the candidate
passing a written andlor oral examination in subjects
related to the thesis;
(d) that the thesis be returned to the candidate for major
revision and re-submission within a specified period;
(e) that an appropriate Masters degree be awarded;
(9 that the degree be not awarded.
Each examiner should indicate whether the report is to
be made available to the candidate in whole or in part.
In the case where an oral examination is requested by
an examiner, such examination shall be held in accordance
with procedures determined by the Committee.
In the case where the Committee, after considering the
reports of the examiners, decides that the degree be
awarded subject to the inclusion in the thesis of minor
specified amendments, such amendments shall be
made and submitted to the Registrar within three months
of the candidate being notified of the Committee's
decision.
In the case where the Committee, after considering the
reports of the examiners, decides that the thesis be
returned to the candidate for major revision, the revised
thesis must be submitted to the Registrar within twelve
months of the candidate being notified of the Committee's
decision; the thesis may be submitted only once
in its revised form and upon re-examination the examiners
may recommend only that the thesis be passed
or failed. Unless otherwise determined by the Committee
the revised thesis shall be examined by the same examiners
as performed the initial examination.
Patents and registered designs
The patent rights or right to register a design for any
device, process, chemical or the like which has been
invented or developed by a candidate in the course of
the program being undertaken for the degree shall,
unless otherwise determined by Council on the advice
of the Committee, be the property of Swinburne Limited.
Confidentiality
In general the public should have access to the material
contained in a doctoral thesis once the degree has been
awarded. Where a program of research is carried out
in or in conjunction with the type of organisation referred
to in 4.3.2 above, the candidate, in order to pursue such
a program, may be given access by that organisation
to restricted information which the candidate or the
organisation does not wish to disclose freely. In such
cases the Committee must receive, in writing, from the
organisation, notice of such materials and the reason
why, in its opinion, disclosure would be undesirable.
Where such material is involved and provided the Committee's
prior approval is obtained, the candidate may
submit a thesis in two volumes, one containing the general
thesis, the second containing only the restricted data
or information.

The Committee may restrict access to the second
volume for a specified period.
Where the thesis has only one volume, the Committee,
on receipt of a request in writing from the candidate and
supported by a statement in writing from the Head of
Department, may order that, for a per~od of up to three
years from the date of that order, the copies of the thesis
forwarded to the Swinburne Library and the department
shall be made available only to researchers or readers
specifically authorised in writing by the Committee.
13. Copyright
Copyright in the thesis is the property of Swinburne
Limited. Those rights, or any part of them, may be
assigned by Council, on the advice of the Committee,
to the candidate.
14. Regulations
The Committee may make or amend regulations under
this statute regarding the admission to candidature,
reports on candidates during the period of candidature,
the examination of candidates and related matters.
15. Change in statute
This statute may be amended from time to time by
Council on the advice of the Academic Board acting on
the recommendation of the Committee. In the event of
an amendment being made subsequent to the beginning
of a student's candidature, that candidate may elect to
continue under the statute which was in effect at the time
candidature began.
Swinburne Centres
Centre for Applied Colloid and BioColloid
Science
Co-ordinator
Prof. D.E. Mainwaring, Department of Chemistry, 819 8576
The Centre was established in 1980 for the development of
applied research and contract research in applied colloid
science. It provides an opportunity through research
sponsorship and other collaboration for companies or
organisations to make use of sophisticated equipment and
applied research skills for the investigation of problems within
this field. The base area of expertise in Colloid Science has
been broadened to include some Biochemistry. Major areas
of applied research now include integrated projects combining
diverse skills such as wastewater treatment (utilising
adsorbing colloid flotation) for the removal of toxic heavy
metals, anions and organics to Biological techniques of
cellular degradation for the complete treatment of toxic
organics. Combined with more traditional areas of Colloid
Science such as coal pelletisation and surface structure, these
and other multidiscipline projects provide an avenue for the
teaching of Colloid Science at an advanced (postgraduate)
level and has resulted in the training of a large number of
postgraduate students.
The Centre also promotes the teaching of Colloid Science
at all levels - undergraduate and postgraduate, course-work
and research only degrees. It also acts as a contact point for
visiting members of staff from other academic institutions,
companies or government authorities, both local and
overseas. Visitors often give lectures and discuss research
activities which proves advantageous to the quality of teaching
at both undergraduate and postgraduate (particularly coursework
postgraduate) levels as an integral part of their training.
Some of the work undertaken inevitably involves the
development of equipment or processes which may be
patented, covered under secrecy agreement or be available
for publication in the international literature.
Swinburne Centre for Applied Neurosciences
Director
Prof. R.B. Silberstein, Department of Physics, 819 8273
The Swinburne Centre for Applied Neurosciences was established
in 1985.
Its primary purpose is to facilitate research into the relationship
between human behavioural states and measured brain activity.
The Centre also undertakes contract research in areas
consistent with its primary purpose.
At this stage, the Centre is engaged in research into:
(a) brain electrical activity and schizophrenia;
(b) cortical evoked potentials and recovery from brain
damage;
(c) cortical evoked activity and the objective assessment of
selective attention;
(d) ageing and brain electrical activity;
(e) effects of emotional state on brain electrical activity;
(f) monitoring of awareness and anaesthetic depth using
visual evoked potentials.
Other aims of the Centre include:
To assist in the teaching of the neurosciences in undergraduate
and postgraduate Swinburne programs.
To offer a facility enabling individuals to pursue postgraduate
studies in the neurosciences.
To promote the availability and commercial development
of intellectual property originating within the Centre.

Centre for Biomedical Instrumentation
Director
Dr. D. Murphy, Department of Physics, 819 8834
The Centre was established in 1989 to provide a focus for
research and consulting activities related to instrumentation
for medical and physiological use. The Centre draws on the
strengths in instrumentation and biophysics within the
Department of Physics.
At present research activities include magnetoencephalography,
impedance tomography computers in the intensive
care environment, detection of driver fatigue,
eiectromyography applied to muscle fibre characterisation,
effects of electromagnetic fields on tissue, optical-fibre
plethysmography, Doppler ultrasound signal processing, etc.
Other aims of the Centre include:
To offer a facility enabling individuals to pursue
postgraduate studies in biomedical instrumentation.
To offer short courses sewing the needs of medical and
health personnel and the biomedical instrumentation
industry.
To assist in the teaching of biomedical instrumentation in
undergraduate and postgraduate Swinburne programs.
To provide a contact point for visitors from other institutions
or companies to undertake collaborative projects.
To promote the availability and commercial development
of intellectual property originating within one centre.
Centre for Computer lntegrated
Manufacture (CIM Centre)
Director
Associate Professor W. Thompson, School of Manufacturing
and Mechanical Engineering, 819 845919372
Administration Officer Ms. H. Evans 819 8600. Fax: 819 8264
Established in 1985 under the Key Centres of Teaching and
Research Program funded by the Commonwealth Tertiary
Education Commission, the Centre aims to provide a focus
for teaching and research in Computer lntegrated Manufacturing
(CIM).
Funding has been provided to establish a Computer lntegrated
manufacturing facility to be used for high level teaching and
research at Swinburne; for industrial research and consulting
and for training of academics from other institutes.
The Centre has a group of staff available to assist in industrial
development projects in CIM and advanced manufacturing.
Industrial prototyping can also be done.
Centre for Computing Productivity lnstitute
Director
F'. Kindler
Faculty of Business, 819 8883
The mission of the Computing Productivity lnstitute is to:
Provide a data base of information on available computing
productivity methods and tools for use with the whole spectrum
of computing systems.
Provide a data base of information on the vendors and users
of productivity tools, identifying opportunities for Australian
software houses to distribute andlor build products where
gaps exist.
Provide and maintain an environment to evaluate and demonstrate
productivity tools and techniques.
Conduct ongoing research into use and misuse of these
methods and tools.
Provide on-campus and in-house courses to raise awareness
and facilitate the correct use of the productivity
methods and tools.
Provide consulting in the selection, installation and use of
productivity tools.
37
Swinburne Institute
Design Centre
Manager
Keith McEwan, 819 8216
This is a unit which provides equivalent Industry Based
Learning professional design practice for postgraduate
students to qualify for a conversion to the award of Bachelor
of Arts degree, working on professional commercial projects
for industry and governments and selected non-commercial
projects for community groups.
The Centre, which is fund generating, operates under the
management of a lecturer who is assisted by other staff on
a project needs basis.
Energy Systems Engineering Centre
Director
Professor J.H. Perrv
School of ~echanical and Manufacturing Engineering,
819 8458
Established in 1989, the Centre aims to provide a focus for
research and teaching in every related matter for the power,
mineral and chemical process industries.
In meeting its obligations, the centre is developing two major
thrusts:
development and application of numerical models such as
manufacturing process models, finite element and finite
difference models of thermo-fluid and material deformation
processes and analytical models; and
develooment of 'leadina edae' ohvsical modellina
diagnoktic tools. In this ares the centre is committed to the
continuing development of its IaserIDoppler velocimeter as
a non-intrusive technique for two-phase flow measurement
and flow born particle sizing.
Centre for Housing and Planning
Director
Professor L.A. Kilmartin, 819 8146
Enquiries: 819 8825, 819 8837
The Centre was established in 1991 in order to undertake
independent research and education in the fields of housing
and ~lannina. The obiectives of the Centre are: to undertake
research on 6ousing and strategic planning issues with a view
to improving the effectiveness and affordability of the public
and private housing sectors and urban development; to
develop a housing information system to improve decision
making in the public and private housing sectors and to enable
more effective policy development and marketing; to develop
an export education program targeted at third world countries;
to provide a mechanism to bring together public and private
sector decision makers in order to allow information
exchanges and debate in a 'neutral' setting; to develop a
'clearing house' for housing and strategic planning information
research; to provide a focus for state and national co-operation
and liaison around housing issues; to develop links with other
higher education institutes and evolve a co-ordinated
approach to the provision of housing information and teaching.
Centre for Industrial Democracy
Chair
John Morieson, Department of Social and Political Studies,
819 8540
The Centre was established in 1982 to provide an advisory
and referral sewice to manufacturers, government departments
and unions who intend to incorporate aspects of industrial
democracy and employee participation.
Consulting, the writing of occasional papers, organising workshops
and seminars, preparation of videotaped and printed
training materials are all part of the Centre's work.

Laboratory for Concurrent Computing
Systems
Director
Professor G.K. Egan
School of Electrical Engineering, 819 816718516
Charter
The Laboratory for Concurrent Computing Systems was
established in 1990 to foster research into concurrent
computing systems, including supercomputers, and their
applications.
The Laboratory's charter is to:
- maintain high quality research into computational models
and architectures a~~licable to ~arallel and
supercomputing systems; and through 'this research
maintain strong links with other major international
research groups;
- establish, maintain and contribute to a directory of parallel
programming tools and algorithms;
- jdentify applkations which would benefit from the results
of its research and the research of others. with articular
emphasis on applications of national or commercial
importance;
- develop selected applications which are within the
capacity of the Laboratory, and where appropriate seek
partners for their further development and transfer to
industry or government bodies;
- provide educational programs for industry and
government;
- provide a direct consulting service to industry and
government on specific applications or issues.
The Laboratory has collaborative links with major research
groups including Lawrence Livermore Laboratories, the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, the Australian Bureau
of Meteorology Research Centre and the CSIRO, and has
industry support from Cray Research and IBM.
Centre for Marketing Strategy
Director
L. Zimmerman, Department of Marketing and Organisation
Behaviour, 819 8074
The establishment of the Marketing Strategy Centre has been
a major initiative of the Faculty of Business. The Centre will
provide a focal point between the business and government
sectors and the Marketing discipline at Swinburne.
The Centre aims to help Australian business and industry in
their decision-making concerning domestic as well as international
business. It Cffers a range of consultancy, marketing
research, strategic research and management development
services. Through its activities the Centre will facilitate the
introduction and implementation of cooperative education.
The Centre will continue to present the already well-patronised
portfolio of short courses in Marketina. . . Services Marketina "
and Strategic Management.
Media and Telecommunications Centre
The Media and Telecommunications Centre, established in
1988, is based in the Media Studies subject area in the Faculty
of Arts. Its role is to initiate educational programs that will foster
closer co-operative connections with industry and the wider
community. The activities it has undertaken include:
- in 1989, the establishment of the Commercial Radio
Course to provide training for those planning a career in
commercial radio
- in conjunction with Media Studies course work in the BA
program, the production of Swinburne publications such
as Staff News and Open Day information kits, publication
of local community newsletters
- the presentation of short courses on a variety of mediarelated
subjects (such as, media regulation, techniques
of radio production, media in the classroom, media awareness)
and desktop publishing skills
- a publishing program of dossiers and monographs on film,
television and general media subjects
- research cons"ltancies on telecommunications and
media in the Pacific, Asia and Australia.
National Korean Studies Centre
Executive Director
Adrian Buzo, 819 8608
The National Korean Studies Centre was established with
Commonwealth Government funding in 1990 as a joint venture
of Swinburne, La Trobe University, Monash University and the
University of Melbourne. The mission of the centre is:
- to develop and expand teaching, research and associated
activities in Korean Studies, including language, culture,
politics, law, business, education and other relevant
disciplines
- to enhance the Australian community's knowledge and
understanding of Korea
- to support Australia's economic and other national
development strateaies -
Building on existing teaching programs conducted in
consortium member institutions, the Centre:
- fosters the design and delivery of vocationally and
culturally relevant Korean Studies courses in all sectors
of the Australian education system
- fosters and undertakes high quality comparative regional
research relevant to Korean Studies and to Australia-Korea
relations
- promotes greater awareness and mutual awareness of all
aspects of the Australia-Korea business and trade
relationship
- promotes greater awareness of Australia in Korea.

Centre for Psychological Services
Chair
R.H. Cook, Department of Psychology, 819 8105 or 819 8653
The Centre for Psychological Services provides several major
services to the wider community. These include
psychotherapeutic programs, educational and training
services and research consultancy, all of which are offered
on a fee for service basis.
The Centre is staffed by experienced psychologists associated
with the Psychology Department, and enhances the teaching
resources of the Department by providing a facility for the professional
training and education of graduate students.
Initially the Centre has developed special services in:
Marriage and relationship counselling
Family therapy
Infertility counselling
Lifestyle management
Treatment of anxiety
Management of children and adolescents
The Centre accepts referrals from a wide range of other professionals
and from both private and government sponsored
agencies.
It is located at 16 Park St., Hawthorn.
Science Education Centre
Chair
Professor J.G. McLean, Dean, Faculty of Applied Science
Co-ordinator
Peter Lees, 819 8503
The Science Education Centre operates as part of the Faculty
of Applied Science to promote interest in science and
technology. The major activities of the Science Education
Centre are:
Operation of the Swinburne Travelling Science Show -
a science stimulus program which visits primary and
secondary schools throughout Victoria. A separate program
for the wider community and professional events is also
available.
Provision of support for the Swinburne Travelling Science
Show to teachers in the form of technical information,
seminars and in-service training.
Taxation Research and Advisory Centre
Director
Denis Vinen, Department of Accounting, 819 8077
The Taxation Research and Advisory Centre was formed firstly,
in response to the community's need for easy access to advice
on a progressively complex and difficult area and secondly,
the college's growing awareness that its valuable resources
should be made more readily available to the community.
Sewices Offered
- Research for tax planning
- Computer programs for problem solving, simulation
studies and cash flow analysis
- Research for contesting tax assessments
- Advice on interpreting income tax legislation and tax
rulings
- Assistance in compliance with income taxation
department administrative requirements
- Research for preparing academic papers
- Library searches
Swinburne Institute
Facilities
- Extensive computer hardware and software
- Excellent library including 500 volumes on taxation, video
and audio tapes and facilities for computerised literature
searches
- Experienced and qualified staff with legal, accounting,
economic and computing backgrounds.
Using the Centre
The Centre runs on a fee for service basis and as a matter
of policy wishes its resources to be used extensively by the
community. The range of services offered should appeal to:
- Small and large businesses with specific problems
- Accountants or lawyers who wish to offer their clients an
extended service
- Entrepreneurs
- Investors
- Salary earners
- Retirees
The Science Shop
Manager
Kerrie Mullins Gunst, 819 8705
The Science Shop promotes public access to science, engineering
and technology through activities which include a free
information service, project management and science sales.
The Science Shop provides a means for individuals, community
groups and small businesses to seek answers to
scientific, engineering and technical questions arising from
their daily lives, and for scientists and engineers to work on
projects of interest and value to the community.
In addition The Science Shop publishes and disseminates
information on the scientific and technical backgrounds to
issues of concern to the community including the small business
sector. Training consultancy services are among the
special Corporate Services offered to scientific and technical
organisations.
A range of projects and seminars are organised, designed
to promote communication between scientists and the community.
Fun science gifts, educational toys, kits and
publications are all available for sale at The Science Shop.
The Science Shop was established in 1988 as a joint initiative
of Swinburne with the Commission for the Future. It is seen
as a national pilot project which will lay the foundations for
other such centres throughout Australia.
Centre for Urban and Social Research
Chair
T. Burke, Department of Social and Political Studies, 819 8109
Enquiries: 819 8825, 819 8837
The Centre for Urban and Social Research was formed in
1986 by amalgamation of the Centre for Urban Studies and
the Centre for Applied Behavioural Studies. The activities of
the Centre range from consultancy research through short
courses and seminars to community development and liaison.
Members of the Centre have researched and written
numerous major consultancy reports for both public and
private sector clients and have considerable research and
policy development skills in the areas of survey research,
housing, youth studies, ethnicity, social indicators, urban data
bases and demographic forecasting and analysis. The Centre
has excellent support facilities including a computer assisted
telephone survey system.

Centre for Women's Studies
Chair
T. Castleman, Department of Social and Political Studies,
819 8466
The Centre for Women's Studies is composed of members
drawn from all divisions of Swinburne who have a wide range
of expertise relevant to gender and the status of women.
The activities of the Centre include:
Presenting short courses on topics which concern women
and gender issues (e.g., feminist theory, Equal Opportunity
Implementation, women and education). Such courses are
open to the general public.
Carrying out research projects which investigate aspects
of the status of women and social policy relevant to the
special needs of women.
Compiling educational materials relating to women's
studies for use in teaching courses on sex and gender as
well as for inclusion in existing courses.
Preparation of occasional papers.

Academic staff ....................................................
Courses offered ...................................................
Higher degrees . Master of Applied Science .....
Professional recognition ......................................
Career potential ..................................................
Entrance requirements ........................................
Assessment .........................................................
Cooperative education .........................................
Prizes .................................................................
Undergraduate courses
Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science
-- Computer-aided Chemistry ............................. 49
-- Computer-aided Biochemistry ........................ 50
-- Double major Computer Science ................... 52
-- Computing and Instrumentation ..................... 51
-- Environmental Health ..................................... 53
-- Mathematics/Computer Science ..................... 51
-- Medical Biophysics and Instrumentation ......... 50
-- Psychology and Psychophysiology" ................ 52
Bachelor of Information Technology ............... 53
Postgraduate courses
Graduate Diploma of Applied Science ............
-- Biomedical Instrumentation ............................
. Computer Science .........................................
-- Industrial Chemistry .......................................
Graduate Diploma in Applied Colloid Science .
.......... Graduate ~iboma in lridustrial Microbiologv ...
Graduate ~ibloma in Operations ~esearch:: ....
Graduate Diploma in Social Statistics .............
Master of A- plied Science
-- Applied folloid Science (by coursework) ........
-- by research ....................................................
Master of Information Technology ....................
Doctor of Philosophy .........................................
. by research ....................................................
..............................................
Subject details
General information ......................................
Swinburne Institute information .....................

Faculty of Applied Science
Dean
Professor J.G. McLean, BVSc(Syd), HDA(Hons), PhD(Melb)
Sub-Dean (Students)
E.P. Hausler, MSc(Oxon), DipEE, TlTC
Assistant Registrar (Applied Science)
M.M. Hickey, BA(Hons)(Deak), MAITEA
Administrative Officers
C.A. Ball. BAiBen). MAITEA
,. - r--,
J. ~avie;,,' ~~(~ons)(~elb , MA~TEA
H. Giannakis, DipT(Vic). dradDipEdAdmin(H1E). MAITEA
E.A.R. Livings, BSc(Hons)(LaT), MAITEA
Department of Applied Chemistry
Head
I.K. Jones, BAgrSc, DipEd(Melb), PhD, FRACI
Professor
D.E. Mainwaring, BSc(Hons), DIC(Lon), PhD, FlEAust
Principal Lecturers
R. Laslett, MSc(Adel), DipEd(Melb), FRACI
I.G. McWilliam, AO,DSc(Mon), . . CChem, FRACI, MASlA
Senior Lecturers
W.L. Baker, BSc(Hons)(WAust), PhC(Syd), FRACI, llTC
I.C. Bowater, BSc(Hons), DipEd(Melb), PhD(Mon), ARACl
R.F. Cross, BSc(Hons)(Melb), DipEd(Mon), PhD, ARACl
J.M.P. FitzGerald, BSc(Hons), PhD(Mon), PhC(Syd), AASM,
ARA
?H.'Randle, BEd(Melb), MSc(LaT), PhD(Salford), ARACI,
MRSC, MACA, MAlMF
M.J. Scarlett, BSc, DipEd(Melb), PhD, ARACl
Lecturers
P. Barton, BSc(Hons), DipEd, PhD(LaT)
M. Cleaver-Wilkinson. DipAppSc(SIT), MAlEH
R. Crawford, MAppSc(SIT)
J.V. Fecondo, MSc(Melb), ARACl
I.H. Harding, BSc(Hons)(Melb), PhD, ARACl
G. Lonergan, BSc(Hons)(WAust)
R.G. Morris, DipPHI(RMIT), MAlEH
M. Natarajan, MSc(Madr), PhD(Mon)
J. O'Connor, MScWat), MEd(Mon), ARMIT, ARACl
A. Panow, BAppSc(SIT)
M.E. Redwood, BSc(Hons)(WOnt), PhD
G.G. Rose, BSc(Hons)(Melb), PhD, ARACl
M.G. Wong, BSc(Hons)(Mon), PhD
Co-ordinator of Environmental Health Programs
J.W. Davis, DipPH(RMIT), GradDipHealthEd(LaT), FAlEH
Manager, National Scientific Instrumentation Training
Centre
J. Hall, BSc(Hons)(LaT), PhD, ARACl
Department of Computer Science
Associate Professor and Head
D.D. Grant, MSc, PhD(Reading), MACM, MIEEE
Principal Lecturers
G.A.K. Hunt, BA(Melb), DipAppChern(SIT), MBCS, MACS,
MACM
Y.K. Leung, BA(Open), BSc(Aston), MSc(Heriot-Watt),
MBA(Mon), CEng, MIEE, MIEEE, MACS
R. Smith, BSc(Hons)(Melb), GradDipCornpStud(CCAE),
PhD(Melb), MAIP, MASOR
Senior Lecturers
W.J. Cosshall, BSc(Deak), GradDipEng(SIT), MACM, MIEEE
M.J. Creek, BAppSc(SIT), BSc(Hons)(Melb), DipEd(Melb),
PhD(Melb)
I. Foley, BSc(Hons)(Melb), PhD(Melb), MACS, MACM
R. Jagielski, MSc(Kharkov), PhD(Kiev), MIEEE, MACM,
MCSA, MAlS
A.B. Oppenheirn, BSc(Melb), MACS
P.J. Robb, BA(Melb), BSc(Hons)(LaT), MSc(LaT),
TSTC(MCAE), MACS
Lecturers
R.K. Allen, BSc(Hons)(Tas), PhD(Tas), MACS
K. Bluff, BSc(Hons), DipEd(Mon), GradDipComp(Deak)
PhD(Deak)
E. Chang, BSc(Beijing), MSc(LaT), MACS
B.I. Donaldson, BAppSc(SIT), MCM
M.S. Harriss, BSc(Eng)(Hons)(Lond), ACGI
S. Howard, BSc(CLP), MSc(Lond), MBCS, MBPhyS,
MEraS
P. ~;ndal, BSc(Hons)(Punjab), MSc(York), MACS
K. Mouzakis, BScEd(Melb), GradDipAppScCompSc(SIT),
MAIP
R.J. Sadus, BSc(Hons)(Melb), PhD(Melb)
A. Tsironis, BAppSc(CompTech)(FIT)
R.B. Watson, BSc(Melb), MSc(Melb), GradDipOpRes(CCAE),
PhD(ANU), MASOR
R. West, BAppSc(SIT), MACS
S. Yip, BSc(McGill), MSc(Melb), GradDiplnfSystDes(RMIT),
DipCompStud(LaT), MACS
Computer Systems Officers
G. Collins, BAppSc(RMIT), GradDip(AutCart)(RMIT),
BAppSc(Cart)(RM IT)
G. Rao, MSc(Tech)(Ku, MTech(llTD))
D.- Tran, BAppSc(SIT)

Department of Mathematics
Acting Head
J.R. lacono, BA(Mon), MEc, TPTC
Associate Professors
A.K. Easton, MSc(Flin), DipT(ATC), PhD, FlMA
P.L. Jones, BSc(Melb), DipEd(Mon), PhD(Mon)
Principal Lecturer
PA. Evans, MSc, DipEd(Melb), MASOR
Senior Lecturers
C.R. Barlina. MScfLan. Di~EdfHaw)
S.R. ~lark

Professional recognition
The courses leading to degrees in applied science with a
double major in computer-aided applied chemistry or
computer-aided biochemistry are recognised by the Royal
Australian Chemical Institute.
The courses leading to a degree and including the major in
computing are recognised by the Australian Computer Society
as satisfying the academic requirements for membership.
The courses leading to a degree and including the major in
mathematics are recognised by the Australian Society of
Operations Research as satisfying the academic requirements
for membership.
The course leading to a degree and including majors in
medical biophysics and instrumentation is recognised by the
Australian lnstitute of Physics and the Australian Association
of Physical Scientists in Medicine as satisfying the academic
requirements for membership.
The courses leading to the degree in Applied Science (Envimnmental
Health) are recognised by the Health Department of
Victoria and the Australian Institute of Environmental Health.
Career potential
The applied science courses at Swinburne cover a very wide
range of career opportunities. Brief descriptions of the areas
of application of the courses are as follows:
Computer-aided Chemistry
As well as being proficient in laboratory chemistry, the modern
chemist requires a working knowledge of computers.
Using their knowledge of chemical principles and their application
to industrial problems such graduates take up positions
with private and public companies or with government and
semi-government organisations such as CSIRO. Initially
graduates usually work in laboratories associated with
manufacturing (industrial and agricultural chemicals, textiles,
explosives, fertilizers, detergents, plastics, dyes, paints,
pharmaceuticals, etc.) or in the processing of food, coal, oil,
gas, minerals, etc.
Further opportunities exist in research, development, technical
services, sales, government organisations concerned
with health and environment and administration.
Computer-aided Biochemistry
Biochemistry is the study of the chemistry of living matter
based on principles of organic, physical and analytical
chemistry. As well as understanding biology, and working with
biochemicals and biochemical instrumentation, the modern
biochemist has to make extensive use of computers.
Computers are used to control instrumentation in
investigations ranging from alcohol levels in blood to vitamin
concentrations in food. Computers are also used to control
industrial processes such as fermentations and food
processing.
Graduate biochemists are employed in a wide variety of
industries - the manufacture of vaccines and
pharmaceuticals, preparation of food products, beverages and
stock-feeds and the preparation of biochemicals for
agriculture. Graduates are also employed in hospital
laboratories and private pathology laboratories, as well as in
medical and veterinary research institutions. Emerging
employment opportunities exist in biotechnologies such as
waste treatment and the manufacture of specialised
biochemicals.
Medical Biophysics
Medical Biophysics is the study of human physiological processes
together with the instrumentation used to monitor and
control thgm.
Graduates may take up careers in industry or as hospital
scientists or technologists.
In industry there are opportunities for graduates to take up
development and consultancy positions in organisations
serving the medical and biological professions. The
manufacture of biomedical instrumentation is a growing area
of employment opportunity.
In hospitals their duties may involve biomedical research.
routine clinical measurement responsibility, the development
of specialised electronic equipment and the maintenance of
equipment already in operation. They are employed in most
hospital departments including cardiology, neurology, thoracic
medicine, physical sciences, anaesthesiology and medical
electronics.
Computing
The advent of electronic computers has created a whole new
range of employment opportunities, and a knowledge of
computers and their uses is becoming increasingly necessary
for graduates in the physical and biological sciences.
Graduates will be employed in various areas depending on
the combination of major studies chosen. For example, a
student who had majored in computing and instrumentation
could be concerned with special purpose control computers
for the control of real-time processes such as power
generation, steel processing or the manufacture of chemical
materials. A computer-aided chemistry graduate could be
interested in the simulation of complex chemical processes
while a mathematics and computer science graduate would
be well trained to tackle the solution of the usually intractable
problems found in applied mathematics.
Scientific Instrumentation
The study of instrumentation provides students with a sound
basis in measurement and instrumentation principles and
their use in the development of instrumentation systems for
various areas of applied science and technology.
The course includes studies of both computer-based and noncomputer-based
instruments, used in isolation or as systems,
and their applications to imaging, nuclear, optical and general
scientific and industrial laboratories. Emphasis is on electronic
techniques, analogue and digital signal processing and on
the basic interfacing - of transducers with micro~rocessors and
computers.
This field of study is unique to Swinburne and is an appropriate
major to be combined with either medical biophysics or
computing.
Mathematics
Mathematics is the foundation and language of science and
technology. Increasingly it is also playing a key role in
business and the social sciences such as sociology,
psychology and medical research. Mathematical solutions to
problems are becoming much more available with the advent
of modern computers.
The main thrust of this course is Operations Research which
is the application of scientific methodology to solving the
problems of industry, commerce and government. 'OR' is
supported by the study of applied statistics which deals with
the collection and interpretation of data, and by the study of
traditional mathematics itself. A feature of the course is the
pre-professional consulting experience obtained by working
on real practical projects.
The mathematics major sequence provides valuable experience
for potential operations researchers, management
scientists, project leaders, statisticians, economic analysts,
quality control scientists, systems analysts, computer scientists
and teachers.

Environmental Health
This course is the only recognised training for environmental
health officers in Victoria.
The majority of environmental health officers are employed
by local government authorities and by the State Health
Department, but many work with statutory authorities such
as the Environment Protection Authority and the Dandenong
Valley Authority. Opportunities also exist in other state and
federal departments and in the non-government sector.
Environmental health officers can thus be involved in varied
duties such as infectious disease control and immunisation,
enforcement of health standards in food shops, restaurants,
hotels, etc., food quality surveillance, the control of domestic
waste disposal, industrial hygiene, poisons control and
pollution control.
Opportunities also exist in industry, particularly the food
industrv. where environmental health officers assist with
quality gontrol work and in complying with health and pollution
laws. The number of these opportunities is increasing.
Some environmental health graduates are self-employed as
consultants.
lnformation Technology
The degree course in information technology commenced in
1988 as part of a three-year National Pilot Co-operative
Education Program in Information Systems.
The course equips graduates to meet the shortage of professionals
in the application of information technology within
business and industry. The grounding in both lnformation
Technology technical areas and in managerial skills prepares
them for future roles in the management of industry and
commerce.
It is expected that graduates will initially obtain employment
in information systems and information technology areas in
industry and commerce and later move into more general
management positions.
Entrance requirements
Bachelor of Applied Science courses
Standard entry to thefirst year of the degree course requires
satisfactow comoletion of a Year 12 course of studv in a Victorian
sec6ndaG school, or its equivalent.
Computer-aided Chemistry, Computer-aided
Biochemistry
Year 12
Prerequisite Group 1 subjects: Chemistry and a branch of
~atheinatics.
VCE prerequisites: Units 3 and 4 of chemistry and 6 units
of VCE mathematics.
Associate Diploma
Applicants who have completed an Associate Diploma in
Applied Science (Laboratory Technology) in appropriate
subjects may undertake a bridging program and be admitted
at second year level.
Special Entry
There will be a special entry scheme for up to fifteen students
lacking year twelve chemistry. Students entering under this
scheme must have passed year twelve Biology and
Mathematics. Such students will not be required to undertake
SC108 Biology but will undertake a special program
whereby the normal chemistry program of five hours per week
in semester one is augmented by extra chemistry tuition. Such
students would come 'on stream' at the beginning of semester
two.
Faculty of Applied Science
Medical Biophysics and lnstrumentation
Year 12
Prerequisite Group 1 subjects: Physics and a branch of Mathematics.
Recommended additional Group 1 subject:
Chemistry. Students who have taken accredited Group 2
subjects are considered for admission.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation
Pmgram)
Students who have satisfactorily completed subjects equivalent
to the above are considered.
Special Entry
There will be a special entry scheme for up to fifteen students
lacking year twelve physics. Students entering this scheme
must have passed year twelve Biology (or a similar subject)
and Mathematics. Such students will not be required to
undertake SC108 Biology, but will undertake a special
program. The normal physics program of five hours per week
in semester one is replaced with a program of nine hours.
Computing and lnstrumentation
Year 12
Prerequisite Group 1 subjects: A branch of Mathematics.
Highly recommended Group 1 subject: Physics. Students who
have taken accredited Group 2 subjects are considered for
admission.
Special Entry
A number of places will be offered to students who do not
have a pass in Physics. These students will undertake a
special first year program.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation
Pmgram)
Students who have satisfactorily completed subjects equivalent
to the above are considered.
Computer Science
Year 12
Prerequisite Group 1 subjects: A branch of Mathematics.
For specific entrance requirements to study combinations
of majors other than those above, please contact the
Assistant Registrar on 819 8481.
Environmental Health
Year 12
Preference will be given to applicants who have completed
Year 12 Mathematics and Chemistry.
Victorian Certificate of Education
From 1993 applicants will be considered if they have 6 units
of VCE mathematics and at least one of chemistry, physics
and biology. Bonus points will be awarded for chemistry.
Students who have satisfactorily completed subjects
equivalent to the above are considered.
Swinburne College of TAFE students who have satisfactorily
completed a ScienceIEngineering course are guaranteed
entry to the first year.
Note: The course is the statutory training course for
environmental health officers in Victoria.
Mathematics and Computer Science
Victorian Certificate of Education
At least six units of Mathematics, with Units 3 and 4 chosen
from Space and Number, Reasoning and Data, Change and
Approximations, Extensions (Change and Approximations).
Approximations).

Bachelor of Information Technology
Year 12
Prerequisite Group 1 subject: a branch of Mathematics.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation
Program)
Students who have satisfactorily completed a course equivalent
to the above are considered.
Applicants may also be required to attend an interview andlor
undertake an aptitude test.
Psychology and Psychophysiology
Applicants will have obtained the VCE or equivalent including
2 mathematics units and 2 science units at the higher - level.
Special Entry
A limited number of places is available for mature age entry
students who have satisfactorily completed a course
equivalent to the above.
Graduate Diploma of Applied Science
For this qualification students undertake a program of study
in one of the following areas:
Amlied Colloid Science
~bin~utationa~ Mathematics *subject to accreditation
Biomedical Instrumentation
Computer Science
lndustrial Chemistry
lndustrial ~icrobiolbgy
Operations Research
- Social Statistics
Entry to Computer Science, Biomedical Instrumentation,
lndustrial Chemistry, Operations Research and Social
Statistics is open to applicants with a first tertiary qualification
in medicine, biological sciences, engineering and social
science (for Social Statistics). An applicant whose position
or experience indicates an ability to succeed in the course
may be accepted with other qualifications or with less than
the usual entry qualifications.
Entry to Applied Colloid Science is open to applicants with
a first tertiarv aualification in enaineerina or science. An
applicant whoseexperience in chemistry isconsidered to be
inadequate is required to undertake a course in physical
chemistry prior to admission.
Entry to lndustrial Microbiology is open to applicants with a
first tertiary qualification in science or engineering. An
applicant whose position or experience indicates an ability
to succeed in the course may be accepted with other
qualifications or with less than the usual entry qualifications.
Master of Applied Science (Applied Colloid
Science)
Entry is open to all students who have successfully completed
the Graduate Diploma in Applied Colloid Science, or obtained
high honours in'an undergraduate science course with major
studies in Colloid Science.
Equivalent experience will be considered.
Master of Applied Science (Biomedical
Instrumentation)
Entrance requirements are specified as the Graduate Diploma
of Applied Science (Biomedical Instrumentation).
For progression from the Graduate Diploma Applied Science
to the Masters course, students would normally be expected
to have attained an average of at least distinction in four of
the Graduate Diploma advanced subjects. Direct entry into
the Masters course is open to suitable applicants with a
Swinburne degree with distinction in Medical Biophysics and
lnstrumentation or have an honours degree (or equivalent)
in a relevant area.
Master of Applied Science (Information
Technology)
Entrance requirements are specified as the Graduate Diploma
in Computer Science.
For progression from the Graduate Diploma in Computer
Science to the third year of the Master of Applied Science
course, students would normally be expected to have attained
Credit in SK712 and an average of at least Credit throughout
their Graduate Diploma in Computer Science studies.
Students with an honours degree in Computer Science may
be granted advanced standing by exemption from appropriate
subjects.
Provision is also made for transfer of subject credits to and
from other co-operating institutions in Melbourne for approved
equivalent course content.
Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Entry is open to applicants who have qualified for the award
of the degree of Master of the Institute (in a field relevant to
the work proposed) or the equivalent of the foregoing.
Applicants shall have demonstrated to the Higher Degrees
Committee of the Academic Board a capacity for research
and investigational work in the area of study proposed.
Special entry
Special provision is made whereby applicants may be
accepted to the first year of the undergraduate courses with
less than the normal entry requirements.
The scheme is not available to applicants who are less than
23 years of age or who have within the last three years failed
an+ formal entry assessment. Selection is based on the relevance
of the applicants' employment and on their educational
background, particularly in the appropriate prerequisite
subjects. Applicants may be required to undertake a special
entry test or to attend an interview.
Applicants under the special entry scheme should include
in their applications a complete record of their educational
background from their final secondary year. They should also
include a statement of their work experience.
Normally the number of special entry scheme admissions will
not exceed 10% of any new intake in any year.
Admission with advanced standing
Certain subjects passed at another institute, or at a university
may provide advanced standing in the above courses.
All applications for subject exemptions should be submitted
to the Assistant Registrar on the appropriate form at the time
of initial enrolment in the course. Each application is considered
by the appropriate departments in consultation with the
Applied Science Faculty Board.
Exemptions are granted by the Faculty Board and applicants
are informed by letter of the Board's decisions. Until this letter
is received, applicants should not assume the approval of any
application for exemption.
DiplomaIDegree Transfer
Holders of recent associate diplomas in chemistry or
biochemistry may apply, preferably before 1 November, for
admission to the Bachelor of Applied Science degree program
in Computer Aided Chemistry or Biochemistry. Applications
and level of entry are considered individually by the Head of
the Department of Chemistry in consultation with the Applied
Science Faculty Board.
Holders of the Associate Diploma of Applied Science in
Laboratory Technology from Swinburne College of TAFE who
have studied an appropriate choice of subjects and
undertaken a suitable bridging program will be allowed direct
entry into the second year of the Bachelor of Applied Science
degree program in Computer Aided Chemistry or
Biochemistry.

Application for admission
Application should be made on the appropriate form, obtained
from and lodged as follows:
- Full-time first year of all undergraduate courses: Victorian
Tertiary Admissions Centre
- ~art-time all years of all courses (including Graduate Diplomas):
Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
- Full-time later years of all undergraduate courses:
Swinburne lnstitute of Technology
- Special entry - all courses: Swinburne lnstitute of
Technology
Laboratory material requirements
Students studying chemistry are expected to provide
laboratory coats, safety spectacles, practical notebooks, and
minor equipment such as spatulas.
Other laboratory equipment and a locker are provided for
student use on payment of a deposit of $25.00. Lockers are
allocated by the Chemistry Laboratory Manager to whom
application for a locker must be made at the time of enrolment.
Laboratory and practical work requirements
In all appropriate subjects a student must perform satisfactorily
in practical or laboratory work in order to gain a pass. Each
enrolled student must either com~lete adeauatelv the laboratory
work relevent to the current' year, or obtain-reapproval
for work previously completed at Swinburne or elsewhere.
Students seeking such reapproval should consult the lecturer
in charge of the subject.
Mentor scheme
Each first-year undergraduate student, whether part-time or
full-time is allocated to a particular member of staff who is
known as the student's mentor. These mentors are responsible
for guidance on student difficulties, courses, exemptions and
re-enrolments.
Re-enrolment
Re-enrolling students who require advice about their courses
should consult their mentors. If an old syllabus is being
followed, changes may be necessary either to complete the
old syllabus or to effect the change to a new syllabus. Students
who are in doubt about their courses should consult their
mentors before attempting to re-enrol.
Assessment of student performance
regulations
Student ~erformance is assessed bv various methods, e.q.
formal examinations, tests held during the semester, projezt
work, assignments and laboratory reports. A statement of the
workload requirements and the assessment program for each
subject is given to all students early in each semester.
It is expected that students will attend all lectures, classes,
demonstrations. tutorials and ~ractical sessions. In addition,
sat~sfactory performance in 'carrying out the tasks and
prescr~bed work in all subjects is required. Failure to comply
with these requirements may lead to disqualification or
presenting at examinations. Students so disqualified will
usually be notified in writing by the Faculty of Applied Science,
but the Faculty is not bound to give such notification.
Assessment of student performance is carried out in accordance
with the Assessment Regulations set out in the Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology section of the Handbook. In
addition, the Faculty of Applied Science operates, under the
following regulations, a scheme of passing by years.
Faculty of Applied Science
1. Passing by years
1.1 General
1.1.1 Eligibility
The Applied Science Faculty Board operates a
scheme of passing by years. The scheme
applies to students enrolled for all subjects of
a standard full-time or cooperative undergraduate
course of study except that students repeating
any subject and students undertaking the
final semester of a course are not eligible.
All other students are required to pass on a
subject-by-subject basis.
1.1.2 Release of results
Results for Subjects of the first year of the
degree courses are released at the end of the
second semester. All other subjects are released
on completion of the subject. Eligible first year
full-time students are assessed on the whole
year's work at the end of the second semester.
All other eligible students are assessed on one
semester's work at the end of that semester.
Work experience and similar subjects are not
part of the scheme.
1.2 The Faculty Result
1.2.1 Categories
An eligible student enrols for a Faculty
Result and is assessed on the whole of the
semester's (or year's) work and this
assessment is issued as a Faculty Result
in one of the following categories:
P Pass: where the student passes all subjects.
FP Faculty Pass: where the student fails one
or more subjects but is considered by the
Board to merit an overall pass (see clause
1.3). Such students are not required to
repeat the failed subject(s).
N Not Pass: where the student fails one or
more subjects and is considered by the
Board not to merit an overall pass (see
clause 2). Such students are required to
repeat the failed subject(s).
The achievement of a Faculty Pass does not
alter results in individual subjects but removes
the necessity to repeat subjects not passed in
the group considered.
1.3 The Faculty Pass formula
1.3.1 Assessment categories
In submitting results, the teaching department
should report the assessment of student
performance in each subject by an aggregate
score and assessment category, as set out
below:
Assessment category Aggregate score
H D >85
D 75 - 84
C 65 - 74
P 60 - 64
P* 50 - 59
N* 40 - 49
N

Where n', is the number of hours per week in
the i m subject and x', is the aggregate score in
the iIh subject.
1.3.3 Deliberative Faculty Pass
The Board may award a Faculty Pass to a
student whose subject assessment contains not
more than two N results and which satisfies the
formula in clause 1.3.2, but this is done only in
exceptional circumstances, and then only if the
progression of the student through the course
can be facilitated without adversely affecting
academic standards.
1.3.4 Exceptions
Notwithstanding clause 1.3.2, a student whose
academic record in the course contains a
previous Faculty Pass shall not be awarded an
automatic Faculty Pass.
1.4 Supplementary assessment
At the discretion of the Board a scheme of restricted
supplementary assessment operates for students who
have failed to satisfy the examiners in one or two
subjects. In these cases consideration of a student's
Faculty Result is deferred until the results of the
supplementary assessments are available.
Students will be advised if they are required to
undertake supplementary assessment when they reenrol
in December. This assessment and the Faculty
Result must be finalised before progression to later
years.
It is the responsibility of the student to ensure they
enrol and complete the requirements of the
supplementary assessment.
2. Student performance
2.1 Unsatisfactory performance
A student's performance shall be deemed to be unsatisfactory
if a Faculty Result of N is published or, if not
eligible for a Faculty Result, the student fails in any
subject(s).
A student whose performance is unsatisfactory will be
required to repeat the subject(s) failed at the first
opportunity and will not be permitted to enrol in any
other subject(s) unless with the specific agreement
of the Courses Committee which will only act on the
specific recommendation of the Head(s) of the
teaching department(s).
2.2 Exclusion
If in any semester (or year in the case of first year fulltime
and all part-time students) a student fails all
subjects or fails any subject(s) being repeated, then
that student will be excluded from further study in the
Faculty.
In addition, a student who passes only one or two
subjects, may be excluded.
Excluded students will be permitted to appeal to the
Courses Committee. The appeal may be either by a
submission in writing, or by an appearance before the
Committee in which case the student must give written
notification of the intention to appear. At least five
working days' notice will be given of the closing date
for submissions or notifications to reach the Assistant
Registrar.
If the student makes no appeal to the Committee by
the due date or if the Committee after considering an
appeal does not rescind the exclusion, the student will
not be permitted to undertake further study in the
Faculty without making formal application for
readmission and no application will be considered until
a period of two years has elapsed.
3. Assessment Irregularity
Cheating and plagiarism, that is the action or practice of
taking and using one's own, the thoughts, writings or other
work of someone else with the intent to deceive, constitutes
an irregularity as described under Examination Description
of the Swinburne Assessment Re~ulations. Such an action
is a major infringement of the lnsstute's academic values.
It is essential that students understand that plagiarism or
cheating shall be considered to have occurred if:
a computer program substantially written by someone
else (either another student, a previous student or the
author of a publication) is presented as the student's own
work;
paragraphs, and even sentences in essays which are
written by someone else are not enclosed in quotation
marks, and accompanied by full reference to source;
work of someone else is paraphrased, and is not
appropriately attributed and referenced.
4. Interpretation
Nothing in these regulations shall be interpreted as contravening
the Assessment Regulations of the Academic
Board.
Cooperative education
In the Applied Science Faculty, the Bachelor of Applied
Science courses are undertaken as programs of cooperative
education.
Undergraduate courses offered as four year programs in the
Facultv of A~~lied Science are run in the coo~erative format
and include't'hree years of academic study pius one year of
paid industry based learning. The industry based learning
is an integral part of the academic program and makes up
part of the final assessment.
In these programs students learn in both academic and work
settin~s, and these two Dhases of learnina are related to one
anotherin a planned manner. ~winburneythe employer and
the student collaborate to provide a complete professional
education.
Students benefit educationally as they are provicied with
practical experience in solving real problems under authentic
conditions using the theoretical concepts learned in the
classroom. They are given an appreciation of the structure
and purpose of the various organisations concerned, enabling
them to make more realistic decisions regarding the area
of the profession in which they wish to become involved. Two
main models exist. Under the 'traditional' model which has
operated at Swinburne since 1963, students are paid a salary
during their period in industry. A new model, operating since
1988, utilises scholarships. Under this model, students are
not paid any salary during their periods of Industry Based
Learning.
Employers of cooperative students benefit by obtaining a
reliable and continuing source of personnel and by establishing
a direct liaison with Swinburne. Contact with cooperative
students assists employers in choosing the best graduates
and reducing the cost of recruiting and training new professional
staff.
The students are visited regularly by academic staff during
their industrial semesters. Some students have the opportunity
to obtain work ex~erience overseas. In such cases. academic
staff from local educat~onal institutions visit the students at
their places of work. Programs of exchange with the following -
institutions have been of particular value to students:
University of Surrey, England
University of Victoria, Canada
Drexel University, USA
Northeastern University, USA
FachHochschule fur Technik, Mannheim, West Germany

Students without permanent resident status should be aware
that industry based learning is not available for certain
courses. In the other courses, it is subject to the availability
of industrial places and the achievement of a suitable level
of English language skills by the student.
While the Faculty will assist students in finding an industrial
placement, it is frequently impossible to find local employment
for students without permanent resident status because
priority is given to Australian citizens and permanent residents.
Students without permanent resident status are advised to
seek placement in their home country. The Faculty will provide
information on academic institutions capable of providing
supervision of industrial placement in the home country.
Faculty of Applied Science
Prizes and Scholarships
Eric Bode Prize
A bronze plaque and a cash prize donated by Dr E.H. Bode,
are awarded by the Applied Science Faculty Board to the best
student in the final year of the degree courses in applied
science.
Faculty of Applied Science
Part-time students must undertake at least eight hours of class
time per week.
A limited number of part-time places will be offered in
undergraduate courses. Intending applicants should note
there are no separate evening classes and attendance will
be required during the day. Details of part-time programs are
available from the Assistant Registrar (Applied Science) and
from the heads of the teaching departments.
Part-time courses also include two semesters of relevant work
experience. The lnstitute does not arrange for work experience
for part-time students.
1. 2051 Double major in Computer-aided
Chemistry
This course provides a thorough basis for a career as a professional,
industrial or research chemist. It also makes the
chemist proficient in modern computer technology building
on essential industrial experience.
Full-time course
(1990 syllabus)
Food Science Prize
Hours
Awarded by the Joint Working Group of the Victorian Divisions Semester 1
week
SC154 Chemistry 5
of the Australian lnstitute of Environmental Health, Australian SC108 Biology 4
lnstitute of Food Science and Technology, and the Council SKI90 Computer Science 5
of Food Technology Associations to the best student in the SM108 Mathematical Methods 5
food science subjects of the Bachelor of Applied Science SP106 Physics or
SP108 Physics 5
(Environmental Health).
SCl55' Chemistry 7
Hancock Prize Semester 2
SC254 Chemistry 12
A prize awarded to the best student completing the Course ~ ~ 2 0 8 Biology 6
leading to the award of the masters degree or the Graduate SM214 Mathematics 4
SP220 Instrumental Science 2 2
Diploma in Applied Colloid Science.
Semester 3
T.G.O. Jordan Memorial Prize SC370 Chemistry 6
SC390 Computers in Chemistry
3
A prize donated by the Australian lnstitute of Environmental ~ ~ 3 Applied ~ memistry
3
4
Health (Victorian Division) to the environmental health student SC360 Practical Chemistry 7
with the highest overall result in the final year of the course. SP320 lnst~umental Science 3 3
Semester 4
Course details
Bachelor of Applied Science
SC470 Chemistry 5
SC490 Computers in Chemistry 3
SC414 Industrial Problem Solving 2
SC430 Scientific Communication 4 1
SC453 Applied Chemistry 2
To qualify for a degree, a student must complete Success- ~ ~ 4 6 0 practical Chemistry 6
fully one of the following courses: SP420 Instrumental Science 4 3
1. double major in computer-aided chemistry; Semester 5
2. computer-aided biochemistry; SC508 Industry Based Learning
3. medical biophysics combined with instrumentation; Semester 6
4. computing combined with instrumentation; SC608 Industry Based Learning
5. mathematics combined with computer science;
6. double major in computer science;
Semester 7
SC570 Chemistry 6
7. environmental health;
SC590 Computers in Chemistry
3
8. psychology and psychophysiology.
SC708 Scientific Communication 1
The structures of courses 1 to 7 are described below. Courses SC553 Applied Chemistry combining the single major computer-aided chemistry with SC560 Practical Chemistry
7
instrumentation, computing or mathematics are also offered Semester 8
on an individual basis, subject in each case to the approval SC670 Chemistry 4
of the Faculty Board. SC690 Computers in Chemistry 3
* A co-major is offered by the Faculty of Applied Science and g:g:f:E &~,"~~~~$,"~
4
1
Faculty of Arts. SC653 Process Chemistry 5
As the courses are being reaccredited for 1991 some SC660 Practical Chemistry 7
alterations may be made to subject codes and contact hours. SC155 Chemistry is only available to students admitted
Up to date listings of subjects and hours will be made available under the special entry scheme for students lacking Year 12
to students on enrolment and re-enrolment.
chemistry but having Year 12 biology. Such students do not
undertake SC108 Biology.
Part-time courses
ICI is a major supporter of this course, providing funds for
Some courses may be available for part-time study structured the purchase of molecular graphics equipment as well as
in such a way as to enable completion in six or more years. being a continuing supporter of our cooperative program.
49

2. 2052 Computer-aided Biochemistry
The course in computer-aided biochemistry involves a study
of the structure and function of the chemical systems of living
organisms and application of this knowledge to many industrial
fields such as clinical, pharmaceutical and food chemistry.
The course provides a sound background in theory and
application of analytical and preparative biochemical techniques.
Computing subjects are ancillary but provide awareness
and proficiency in modern computer technology and its
applications to biochemistry. All aspects of the course are
reinforced by paid industrial experience.
Full-time course
(1990 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
SC154 Chemistry 5
SC108 Biology 4
SKI90 Computer Science 5
SM108 Mathematical Methods 5
SP106 Physics or, 5
SP107 Physics 5
SCl55' Chemistry 7
Semester 2
SC254 Chemistry 12
SC208 Biology 6
SM214 Mathematics 4
SP220 Instrumental Science 2
Semester 3
SC370 Chemistry 6
SC380 Practical Chemistry 4
SC390 Computers in Chemistry 3
SC362 Biochemistry 2
SC318 Microbiology 4
SC365 Practical Biochemistry 4
Semester 4
SC470 Chemistry 5
SC480 Practical Chemistry 4
SC490 Computers in Chemistry 3
SC414 Industrial Problem Solving 2
SC430 Scientific Communication 1
SC462 Biochemistry 2
SC418 Microbiology 3
SC465 Practical Biochemistry 3
Semester 5
SC508 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 6
SC608 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 7
SC570 Chemistry 6
SC580 Practical Chemistry 3
SC590 Computers in Chemistry 3
SC708 Scientific Communication 1
SC562 Analytical Biochemistry 3
SC565 Practical Biochemistry 6
SC504 Human Biochemistry 2
Semester 8
SC670 Chemistry
SC680 Practical chemist^
SC690 Computers in hei in is try 3
BS619 Business & Management 4
SC808 Scient~fic Communicat~on 1
SC662 Analytical Biochemistry 2
SC604 Biotechnology 3
SC665 Practical Biochemistry 4
SCl55 Chemistry is only available to students admitted under
the special entry scheme for students lacking Year 12
chemistry but having Year 12 biology. Such students do not
undertake SC108 Biology.
ICI is a major supporter of this course. It provided funds for
the purchase of molecular graphics equipment as well as
continuing support for the cooperative program.
3. 2061 Medical Biophysics and
lnstrumentation
(2054 Biophysicsllnstrumental
Science as per semesters 5, 6, 7
and 8)
This combination is unique to Swinburne and is designed to
produce research and development staff for hospitals and
industry. The course offers the student a firm grounding in
instrumentation and life sciences. Medical biophysics has a
clinical orientation and consists of two parallel streams, human
physiology and biophysical instrumentation.
lnstrumentation provides a sound foundation in instrumentation
principles and considers the design and use of both
single instruments and multi-instrument systems.
Full-time course
(1990 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
SC154 Chemistry
5
SC108 Biology
4
SKI90 Computer Science
5
SM108 Mathematical Methods
5
SP106 Physics,
5
SP107 Physics
5
Semester 2
SC255 Chemistry
4
SM215 Mathematical Methods
4
SP210 Introduction to lnstrumentation 4
SP209 Physics 2
6
AB215 Complementary Studies
2
SP224 Introductory Biophysics
4
Semester 3
SP309 Physics 3
SM315 Mathematical Methods
SP310 Analoaue and O~tical
TechGques '
SP330 Digital Fundamentals
SP324 Biophysical Systems A
SP325 Biophysical Systems B
Semester 4
SM415 Mathematical Methods
SP401 Experimental Techniques
SP409 Physics 4
SP410 Analogue Devices and
Applications
SP430 lnterfacina and Nuclear
Techniques
SP424 Clinical Monitoring A
SP425 Clinical Monitoring B
Semester 5
SA209 Work Experience
Semester 6
SA309 Work Experience
Semester 7
SP501 Signals and Systems 4
AB513 Brain & Behaviour 2
SP509 Physics 5 2
SP510 Scientific Instrumentation A 4
SP530 Scientific Instrumentation B 4
SP524 Neurosciences A 4
SP525 Applied Biophysics A 4
Semester 8
SC601 Chemical lnstrumentation
SP602 Special Project
SP610 lnstrumentation Systems A
SP630 lnstrumentation Systems B
SP624 Neurosciences B
SP625 Applied Biophysics B
SP626 Applied Neurosciences
SP609 Physics 6
' Changes to the syllabus may occur in 1991.
available on enrolment.
4
4
4
4
2
2
Details of subjects

4. 2056 Computing and lnstrumentation
The computing major involves the study of algorithms used
in the solution of mathematical, engineering and business
problems, and the implementation of these in a suitable
algorithmic or business-oriented language. The work is
supplemented during the latter years of the course by studies
in computer architecture and computer graphics.
The 'software' emphasis in computing is complemented by
the strong 'hardware' orientation of scientific instrumentation.
Areas of study in this major include nuclear and optical
instrumentation together with a strong emphasis on
information processing, digital and analogue electronics.
Full-time course
(1990 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
SQlOO Programming in Ada 4
SQ107 lntroduction to Computer
Science 3
SM1200 Mathematics 1 4
SP1210 Introd. to Scientific Instrum. 1 4
SP1200 Physics 1 5
Semester 2
SQlOO Programming in Ada 4
SQ205 Information Analysis 4
SM1200 Mathematics 1 4
SP1210 Introd. to Scientific Instrum. 1 4
SP1200 Physics 1 5
Semester 3
SQ300 Data Structures and Algorithms
SQ302 UNlWC
SQ304 Software Engineering
SM3400 Mathematics 2
SP3400 Physics 2
SP3410 Analogue and Optical
Techniques
SP3430 Digital and Nuclear Techniques
Semester 4
SQ402 Operating Systems
SQ407 Data Communications
SQ417 Computer Architecture A
SM3400 Mathematics 2
SP3400 Physics 2
SP3410 Analogue and Optical
Techniques
SP3430 Digital and Nuclear Techniques
Semester 5
SP523 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 6
SP623 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 7
SQ508 Cornouter Graohics A
SQ500 Concurrent ~rbgramming 3
SP510 Scientific Instrumentation 3A 4
SP530 Scientific Instrumentation 38 4
SM519 Mathematical Methods 3
SP501 Signals and Systems 4
SX5aa Elective 1 3
Semester 8
SQ613
Computer Science Team
Project 3
SP601 Special Instrumentation 2
SP610 Instrumentation Systems A 4
SP630 Instrumentation Systems B 4
SX6aa Elective 2 3
SX6bb Elective 3 3
At least one of the three SX elective subjects must be chosen
from the Computer Science electives offered.
Students enrolled in 2056 prior to 1989 will undertake
alternative semesters 7 and 8, as follows.
Semester 7 (Alternative)
SK504 Computer Science 5 9
SM519 Mathematical Methods 3
SP501 Signals and Systems 4
SP510 Scientific Instrumentation A 4
SP530 Scientific Instrumentation B 4
Semester 8 (Alternative)
SQ613
Computer Science Team
Project 3
SK604 Computer Science 6 9
SP601 Stand-Alone Instrumentation 2
SP610 Instrumentation Systems A 4
SP630 Instrumentation Systems B 4
Faculty of Applied Science
5. 2059 Mathematics and Computer Science
The solution of many problems faced by business, industry
and government can be facilitated by the use of mathematical
and statistical models. The mathematics major concentrates
on the ooerations research aooroach to oroblems such as
inventoj control and resource planning or allocation. Since
many operations research and statistical studies result in, or
use, computer-based systems, this course is complemented
by the computer science major.
The computer science major involves the study of algorithms
used in the solution of mathematical, engineering and business
problems, and the implementation of these in a suitable
algorithmic or business-oriented language. The work is
supplemented during the latter years of the course by studies
in logic, programming techniques and systems science.
Full-time course
(1991 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
BS513 Business Studies/Accounting 3
SM126 Applied Statistics 1 3
SM127 Mathematics 1 5
SQlOO Programming in Ada 4
SQ107 lntroduction to Computer
Science 3
Semester 2
BS514 Business Studies/Economics 3
SM225 Ooerations Research 2 2
SM226 ~pplied Statistics 2
SM227 Mathematics 2
SQlOO Programming in Ada
SQ205 lnformation Analysis
Semester 3
BS517 Business Studies
SM325 Operations Research 3
SM326 Applied Statistics 3
SM327 Mathematics 3
50300 Data Structures and Algorith~
SQ302 UNlXlC
SQ304 Software Engineering A
Semester 4
SM404 Project Management A
SM425 Operations Research 4
SM426 Applied Statistics 4
SM427 Mathematics 4
SQ402 Operating Systems
SQ404 Systems Analysis
Semester 5
SM504 Project Management B
SM525 Operations Research 5
SM526 Applied Statistics 5
SQ305 Database
Computer Science Elective 1
One subject chosen from:
SQ306 Human Computer Interaction 3
SQ500 Concurrent Programming 3
SQ501 Functional Programming 3
SQ502 UNlX Systems Programming 3
SQ508 Computer Graphics A 3
SQ509 Artificial Intelligence A 3

~
Complementary Studies
One subject chosen from:
BS617 Computers and the Law 2
BS618 Management of Human
SM632
Resources
Social Change in the Modern
2
World 2
Semester 6
SM608 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 7
SM708 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 8
SM609 Mathematics Project 3
SM625 Operations Research 6 3
SM626 Applied Statistics 6 3
SQ407 Data Communication 3
SQ613 Computer Science Team
Project 3
Computer Science Elective 2
One subject chosen from:
SQ401 Logic Programming 3
SQ411 COBOL 3
SQ417 Computer Architecture A 3
SQ601 Translator Engineering 3
SQ604 Subject Oriented Programming 3
SO606 - ..-- Comoutina in the Human
context -
SQ608 Computer Graphics B
SQ609 Artificial lntelliaence B
SQ619 Expert systems 3
Changes to the syllabus may occur in 1992. Details available on
enrolment.
6. 2060 Computer Science
The course features a blend of the traditional core curriculum
of computer science together with studies in software engineering
which will equip graduates with the skills necessary to
participate in andlor manage teams of computing
professionals who are developing . - large - scale software
systems.
Studies in computer science concentrates on programming
skills in the language Ada and C, the study of algorithms, and
in the use of operating systems. Techniques of designing and
building systems of software are studied in software
engineering and software practice provides opportunity to
learn about group dynamics and the management of teams
working on projects. Software practice also provides extensive
practical experience of working in teams which are developing
large software systems for real clients.
Full-time course
(1991 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
BS514 Business Studies/Economics 3
SM127 Mathematics 1
5
SQlOO Programming in Ada
4
SQ103 Software Practice 1
6
SQ107 Introduction to Computer
Science
3
Semester 2
85513 Business Studies/Accounting 3
SM240 Mathematics 2
3
SQlOO Programming in Ada
4
SQ103 Software Practice 1
4
SQ205 Information Analysis
4
Semester 3
SQ300 Data Structures and Algorithms 3
SQ302 UNIXIC 3
SQ303 Software Practice 2 3
SQ304 Software Engineering 3
SQ305 Database 3
SQ306 Human-Computer Interaction 3
Semester 4
SQ303 Software Practice 2 6
SQ402 Operating Systems 3
SQ404 Systems Analysis and Design 3
SQ407 Data Communications 3
Elective 3
IBL Semester 1)
QQ523 lndustry Based Learning
(IBL Semester 2)
SQ623 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 5
SQ508 Computer Graphics A 3
SQ509 Artificial Intelligence A 3
SQ500 Concurrent Programming 3
Elective 3
Elective 3
SQ503 Software Practice 3 3
Semester 6
SQ604 Object-Oriented Programming 3
SQ606 Computing in the Human
Context 3
SQ417 Computer Architecture A 3
OR Elective 3
Elective 3
SQ503 Software Practice 3 6
Elective units available are:
Semester 1: SQ501 Functional Programming
SQ502 Unix Systems Programming
SQ517 Cornputer Architecture B
Semester 2: SQ401 Logic Programming
SQ411 COBOL
SQ417 Computer Architecture A
SQ601 Translator Engineering
SQ608 Computer Graphics B
SQ609 Artificial Intelligence B
SQ617 Computer Architecture C
SQ619 Expert Systems
NOTE: SQ417 Computer Architecture A MUST be taken either in
Semester 2. Year 2 or Semester 2. Year 4.
7. 2062 Psychology and Psychophysiology
This course may be undertaken within the Faculty of Applied
Science or the Faculty of Arts.
The course which is unique to Swinburne, aims to produce
graduates who are qualified to take up professional careers
in psychology. It will contribute towards qualification for
associate membership of the Australian Psychological Society
and will be a suitable introduction to occupations involving
aspects of clinical psychology, ergonomics, neuropsychology,
and research.
The special emphasis of the course are to develop technical
skills in the use of monitoring instrumentation specific to
recording biological signals related to behaviour, insight into
the biological basis of behaviour and to allow detailed study
of both normal and abnormal specific human
neurophysiological functions.
For details of Psychology subjects see under Department of
Psychology, Faculty of Arts.
Full-time course (Applied Science only)
Hours
Semester 1
week
AYl 00 Psychology
SC108 Biology
SP135 Monitorina Instrumentation
~ ~ 1 0 ~athemazcs
6
SC133 Chemistry
Semester 2
AYlOl Psychology
SP231 Monitoring Technology
SP232 Introductory Psychophysiology
SC208 Biology
SK290 Computing

Semester 3
AY200 Developmental Psychology
SP331
Neurohumoral Bases of
Psychophysiology 8
SM278 Design and Measurement 2A 4
Semester 4
AY201 Social Psychology 4
SP431 Psychophysiology of Perception 8
SM279 Design and Measurement 2B 4
Semester 5
AY311 Methods and Measures 2
AY312 The Psychology of Personality 3
SP527 Neurophysiology of the Normal
Brain 5
SP528 Applied Psychophysiology 5
Semester 6
AY313 Cognition and Human
Performance 3
AY314 Counselling and Interviewing 2
SP631 Neurophysiology of Mental
Disorders 5
SP632 Psychophysiology Project 5
8. H050 Environmental Health
This course is the statutory qualifying course for
environmental health officers in Victoria. It takes the form of
a four-year program of cooperative education in which
students attend the institute for a total of six semesters, and
gain practical work experience for two semesters. Swinburne
arranges the work experience for full-time students.
Full-time course
(1991 syllabus)
Hours
Semester 1
week
AB2100 Behavioural Studies and
Communication (1) 2
MP107 Engineering Drawing 2
SClOO Environmental Health 2
SC109 Biology
SC1500 Introductory Chemistry
SMl 10 Mathematical Methods
SP121 Physical Science 3
Semester 2
BD141 lntroductorv Law
SC252 Biological chemistry
SC209 Biology
SK2100 Com~uter Science
SM2100 ~pplied Statistics
SP221 Physical Science
Semester 3
A8310 Behavioural Studies and
Communication (2)
SA203 Building Standards
BS2530 Environmental Health Law
ME249 Environmental Engineering
SC3400 Food Processing and Analysis
SC349 Microbiology
Semester 4
882540 Legal Procedure and Evidence
SC451 Food Microbiology
SC467 Environmental Health
Practice (1) 5
SC468 Environmental Science
SC469 Epidemiology
Semesters 5 and 6
SA508 lndustry Based Learning
SA608 lndustry Based Learning
Semester 7
SC509 Research Skills 2
88447 Administrative Law 2
SC567 Environmental Health
Practice (2) 3
SC568 Applied Food Science and
Inspection 5
SC569 Urban Ecology 4
CE560 Environmental Engineering and
Planning 6
Semester 8
88428 Administration and Management 2
SP4190 Occupational Hygiene and
Safety 4
SC661 Environmental Analysis and
SC667
Control 4
Environmental Health
Practice (3) 2
SC609 Health Promotion 2
SC668 Research Proiect 8
1050 Bachelor of lnformation
Technology
Faculty of Applied Science
The course equips graduates to apply information technology
within business and industry and provides them with an
appropriate grounding in management education to prepare
them for future roles in management.
The course is offered only as a full-time program of three
years' duration. Students are actively engaged in the course
for an average of 44 weeks each year. There are eight
segments in the course - four semesters, two summer terms
and two twenty-week periods of industry based learning.
These provide a course which is essentially a four year course
completed in three years.
Swinburne awards a scholarship to each student admitted
to the course. Scholarship levels are expected to be an
average of $9,300.
Segment 1
IT101 Computer Fundamentals
IT102 Introduction to Programming
IT103 Business Applications and Systems 1
IT104 Management and Communications
Non-computing Elective
Segment 2
IT201 Decision Analysis
IT202 COBOL programming
IT203 Business Applications and Systems 2
IT204 tccounting 1
Non-computing Elective
Se ment 3 (Summer Term)
IT381 Systems Software 1
IT302 Organisation Behaviour
IT303 Data Base Management Systems 1
Segment 4
IT401 Industry Based Learning
20 weeks
Segments 5 and 6
10 units must be studied in these two consecutive segments.
They can be taken in any order that prerequisites allow, and
must include 4 core units, 4 chosen from the specialist units
on offer and 2 non-competing electives.
Core units t
IT501 Systems and lnformation Analysis 1
IT503 Data Base Management Systems 2
IT504 Data Communications 1
IT509 Software Engineering 1

Specialist units t
Introductory unit
At bast two of these must be taken from the subjects marked SP553 lntroduction to Instrumentation
with an asterisk. Electronics 4
IT502 Systems Software 2
Biomedical units
IT505 Knowledge Englneerlng
SP533 Biophysics of Exercise 4
IT506 Expert Systems"
SP537 Medical Imaging 4
IT507 Computer Graphlcs and lmaglng 1
IT601 Systems and lnformatlon Analysls 2'
lnstrumentation units
IT602 Systems Software 3'
SP542 Optical Instrumentation 4
IT603 Data Base Management Systems 3*
SP544 Nuclear Instrumentation 4
IT606 Artlflclal Intelligence'
IT607 Computer Graphlcs and lmaglng 2'
IT609 Software Eng~neerlng 2'
Segment 7
IT701 Industry Based Learning
20 weeks
Segment 8 (Summer Term)
IT801 Proiect
IT802 seminars and Project Management and Control
t All units w~ll not be offered each semester.
Postgraduate courses
Graduate Diploma of Applied Science
This qualification is awarded to students who have completed
one of several approved programs of subjects. Programs are
offered in Biomedical Instrumentation, Computer Science,
Scientific Instrumentation, lndustrial Chemistry, Operations
Research and Social Statistics.
Options are designed as two-year part-time courses offered
only in the evening and extending over four fourteen-week
semesters, except for lndustrial Chemistry which is a oneyear
full-time course, and Computer Science which is also
offered as a one-year full-time as well as a two-year part-time
course.
Not all subjects, nor all options are available in any one year,
student demand being taken into account in determining
which subjects or options will be offered.
2084 Biomedical lnstrumentation
(1983 syllabus)
This option is designed to serve the needs of graduates
working in the biomedical area. It offers training in instrumentation
and quantitative techniques together with the biomedical
applications of these techniques.
To qualify for the award a student must complete eight of the
subjects listed below of which one must be the Project Unit.
Each subject comprises fifty-six hours of class time (one
evening per week for one semester).
Enrolment in introductory subjects must be approved in each
case by the Head, Physics Department.
Hours
Introductory unit
week
SP555 lntroduction to Biophysical
Systems 4
Biomedical units
SP531 Biophysical Systems and
Techniaues 4
SP532 ~linlcal'~onltorin~ Techniques 4
SP534 Neurophys~ological Techniques 4
lnstrumentation units
SP541 Signal and Image Processing 4
SP545 lnstrument Interfacing and
Programming 4
SP547 Instrument Electronics 4
Project unit
SP535 Biomedical Project 4
The following subjects are available as alternatives for part of the
course if sufficient demand exists.
2088 Computer Science
(1989 syllabus)
This option is for graduates who require a specialised and
practical training in the related areas of computer programming
and software engineering and their applications to
information technology. The emphasis is on the acquisition
of systems development skills in the UNlX environment.
To qualify a student must complete the nine subjects listed
below. These form a one-year full-time program or a two year
part-time (evening) program. The full-time program normally
requires attendance for sixteen hours per week for two
semesters and the part-time program eight hours per week
for four semesters.
Subjects
SQ700
SO702
SQ703
SQ704
SQ705
SQ707
SQ709
SQ710
SQ717
Programming in C
Systems Programming
Software Development Project
(for two semesters)
Software Enaineerina - -
Database
Computer Systems
(for half a semester)
introduction to ~rtificial
Intelligence
(for half a semester)
Advanced C Programming
Data Communications
Hours
week
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
2
2081 Applied Colloid
Science
(1989 syllabus)
This course is for graduates with a background in chemistry
who have a professional interest in the application of colloid
science to industrial problems.
The program includes a variety of topics designed to cover
the reauirements of a wide ranae of industries. It com~rises.
in the first two semesters, a co~;~pulsory core of lectures and
associated practical work which acquaints the student with
the fundamental properties of colloids and interfaces, followed
in the next two semesters by a series of elective subjects from
which two are chosen.
The program is a two-year part-time course, the timetable
specifying eight hours per week (two evenings) for four
fourteen-week semesters.
Hours
Semester 1
week
SC530 Properties of Colloids 8
Semester 2
SC531 Colloid Experimental
Techniques
Semester 3
Elective Subject

Semester 4
Elective subject 8
*The elective subjects are chosen from the following list:
SC532 Emulsion Technology
SC533 Polymer Flocculation
SC534 Mineral Processing Chemistry
SC535 Detergency
SC536 Surface Coatings
SC537 Corrosion and Protection of
Metals
SC538 Adsorption of Aqueous
Pollutants
These subjects will not all be offered in any one year. Their
availability will be determined by student demand. The list
may be augmented to meet students' requirements.
2082 lndustrial Microbiology
(1989 syllabus)
This course is for graduates or diplomates in chemistry, biochemistry
or other life sciences, or engineering (though it is
not necessarily restricted to these fields), whose professional
activities require a practical knowledge of industrial
microbiology.
The course provides theoretical knowledge and applied
practical skills in all areas of microbiology, with particular
emphasis on applied microbiology, including such areas as
fermentation technology, growth kinetics, biotechnology,
genetic engineering and the identification and control of
microbes.
The areas of study are suitable for personnel engaged in production,
sales, services and management in industrial and
other fields. Special provision is made early in the course for
those students whose knowledge of biochemistry is minimal
or out-of-date.
The program is designed as a two-year part-time course, the
timetable specifying seven hours (two evenings) per week for
four fourteen-week semesters.
Semester 1
SC541 Microbiology
50542 Practical Work
Semester 2
SC543 Microbiology
SC544 Practical Work
Semester 3
SC545 Microbiology
SC546 Practical Work
Semester 4
SC547 Microbiology
SC548 Practical Work
2085 lndustrial Chemistry
(1988 syllabus)
Hours
week
3
4
This course is designed for graduates with a general background
in chemistry who wish to become experienced in its
application to industrial problems.
This course will be offered on the basis of one year of fulltime
study, covering a full twelve months. It will comprise 19
weeks of coursework related to industrial chemistry and 22
weeks of industry-based learning including paid-employment
experience in an appropriate industrial laboratory. The
program will include a small research project.
Graduates of the course will not only have gained a thorough
understandina of the specialist principles of industrial
chemistry, but-also exposure to such related issues as process
economics, industrial issues and governmental regulations.
16 points accumulated from the following subjects:
List of subjects
Semester 1
BS720 Chemistry and the Law
SC720 Applied Chemistry
Techniques
SC721 Properties of Colloids &
Interfaces
SC722 Food Chemistry
SC723 lndustrial Chemistry
SC724 Polymer Chemistry
SC725 Practical Chemistry
SC726 Advanced Biochemistry
SC727 Biochemical Techniques
SC728 lndustrial Biochemistry
SC729 lndustrial Microbiology
SC730 Microbiology
SC731 Practical Biochemistry
SK720 Computer Science
SC732 Practical Chemistry
Semester 2
SC709 Employment Experience
BS721 Business and
Management
2086 Social Statistics
(1989 syllabus)
Faculty of Applied Science
Max
points
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
4
4
4
Hours
weeks
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
4
5
4
The course is designed for graduates in the social sciences
who have a professional interest in improving their quantitative
and statistical skills. It is also suitable for graduates of other
disciplines who have a need to gain statistical skills particularly
in the area of computer based analysis and interpretation.
To qualify a student must complete the eight subjects listed
below. These form a two-year part-time (evening) program
which entails an involvement of eight hours per week.
Subject code
SM731 Introductory Methods
SM732 Survey Research Methods
SM733 Demographic Techniques
SM734 Computer Packages 1
SM735 Survey Sampling
SM736 Computer Packages 2
SM737 Multivariate Analysis
SM738 Major Project
2087 Operations Research
(1989 syllabus)
Hours
week
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
The course is aimed primarily at graduates with a quantitative
background, and aims to supplement the student's professional
education with a more specialised and practical training
of an applied type, which will enable them to pursue
careers in operations research.
The course is subdivided into units of four hours per week
(two hours of lectures, two hours of workshops) for one
semester.
The workshops will provide students with significant access
to the Institute's hardware and software, enabling hands-on
experience devoted to practical and research work. Two units
will normally be taken each semester.
' Course details over page.

Hours
Semester 1
week
SM721 Introduction to Ooerations
Research 4
SM722 Stochastic Methods in OR 1 4
Semester 2
~ ~ 7 2~athemat~cal
3 Programming 4
SM724 Stochast~c Methods in OR 2 4
Semester 3
SM725 Project Management 4
SM726 Operations Research in
Industry 1 4
Semester 4
SM727 Operations Research in
Industry 2 4
SM728 Major Project 4
2090 Master of Applied Science by
research
in areas of applied chemistry, biochemistry,
biophysics, instrumental science, computer
science and mathematics
Graduates at Bachelor's degree level who have shown a high
standard of academic achievement may be admitted to candidature
for the degree of Master of Applied Science.
To be assessed for this degree, a candidate must present a
major thesis based on original research, investigation or development
work carried out either at Swinburne or externally.
External work may be carried out at any approved industrial,
governmental, educational or research organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Master and application
forms are available from the Registrar's Office.
Z091
Master of Applied Science
(Applied Colloid Science) by
coursework
(1985 syllabus)
The aims of this course are to provide students with an
understanding of modern colloid science at an advanced level,
to develoo research caoabilities and to introduce the latest
technology to industry.'~he course builds on the Graduate
Diploma in Applied Colloid Science by providing a program
of lectures at an advanced level. Students are also required
to undertake a research project at their place of work. This
project is to be reported as a minor thesis.
The program is a two-year part-time course comprising two
hours of lectures per week plus a research project. The
research project is expected to be the equivalent of five hours
per week. Research may be undertaken at the place of
employment, with the Swinburne Colloid Laboratory or similar
institution.
A feature of this course is the contribution to the lecturing
program by leading researchers from academic and industrial
organisations within Australia.
The semester units have been structured so that students may
commence the course in February or July of any year.
Hours
Semester 1
week
SC710 Dispersion Forces and Thin
Films 2
SC714 Colloid Research Project 5
Semester 2
SC711 Electrical Double Layer,
Steric Stabilisation and Polymer
Theory 2
SC714 Colloid Research Project 5
Semester 3
SC715 Adsorotion and Waste
~reatment 2
SC714 Colloid Research Project 5
Semester 4
SC713 Colloid Interaction Theory 2
SC714 Colloid Research Project 5
2092 Master of Applied Science
(Information Technology)
(1989 syllabus)
The Master of Applied Science (Information Technology)
involves one year full-time or two years part-time study. Entry
is open to graduates with either an honours degree in
computer science or a graduate diploma in either computer
science or computer systems engineering.
This course is designed to provide a formal, structured program,
covering the main areas of Information Technology with
some flexibility to allow cross-disciplinary studies with the
other Swinburne Masters degree courses in Information
Technology and possibly to undertake special electives at
other associated institutions. Students are able to select a
course structure which provides a comprehensive study of
contemporary advances in Software Engineering. The course
is designed for those who aspire to management level or
senior technical positions in the computer industry, in
technical organisations with major computer-based products
or processes, or in management consulting with software
houses or management services organisations.
The full-time program normally requires attendances for
sixteen hours per week for two semesters and the part-time
program eight hours per week for four semesters.
The subjects of the (full-time) and first and second year (parttime)
are listed below. Students are required to complete four
elective units plus SK812 Project and Thesis.
Subject
Hourslweek
SK802 Expert Systems 4
SK803 Database Technology 4
SK805 Advanced Software Engineering 4
SK806 Machine Learning 4
SK807 System Analysis and Design
Methodologies 4
SK808 Human Computer Interaction 4
Additional units may be offered in some of the areas of:
- Software Engineering in the UNlX environment,
- Software Engineering using ADA and its Programming Support
Environments,
- Formal methods for Software Development,
- Embedded Systems and Concurrency
SK812
Project and Thesis
One Semester Full Time 16
Two Semesters Part Time 8
2093 Master of Applied Science
(Biomedical Instrumentation)
The Master of Applied Science (Biomedical Instrumentation)
involves three years of part-time or one-and-a-half years of
full-time study.
This course offers training in instrumentation and quantitative
techniques coupled with a study of the physiological
processes being monitored. It provides a detailed study of
the design, construction, operation and commercial
production of a wide range of biomedical and general
laboratory instrumentation.
The course also emohasises innovative techniaues of
instrumentation and the entrepreneurial skills require;-6; the
commercial development of these techniques in the national
interest.

Subject
Semester 1
Introductory
SP555 Introduction to Biophysical Systems 4
Advanced
SP531 Biophysical Systems and Techniques 4
Semester 2
SP532
SP547
Clinical Monitoring Techniques
Instrument Electronics
Semester 3
SP534 Neurophysiological Techniques
SP545 Instrument Programming and
Interfacing
Semester 4
SP541
SP537
Signal and Image Processing
Medical Imaging
Semester 5
SP538
SP539
Technology Transfer
Research Project
Semester 6
SP539 Research Project
ZOO1
Doctor of Philosophy
in A ~~lied Science by research in areas of
appii& chemistry, biochemistry, biophysics,
instrumental science, computer science and
mathematics
Graduates at Bachelors degree level who have shown a high
standard of academic achievement may be admitted to
candidature for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Applied
Science.
To be assessed for this degree, a candidate must present a
major thesis based on original research, investigation or
development work carried out either at Swinburne or
externally. External work may be carried out at any approved
industrial, governmental, educational or research
organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
by research and application forms are available from the
Registrar's Office.
Applied Science subject details
This section contains a brief description of the subjects which
comprise the Applied Science courses.
As the courses are being reaccredited some changes to the
subject details may occur after the Handbook has been
published. Details of changes will be available on enrolment.
Reading guides
Because of the frequency with which individual publications
become out-dated, and are susperseded, no textbooks and
references are listed in the subject details.
In most subjects a detailed reading guide will be issued during
the first week of classes and students are advised not to purchase
textbooks or reference books until the classes commence
unless they have previously consulted the lecturer in
charge of the subject.
Students wishing to carry out preliminary reading in a subject
should consult the lecturer in charge of that subject for
guidance.
Faculty of Applied Science
Subject details
Subject codes are listed in numerical order within the following
groups.
Code
SA
SC
SQ
SM
SP
AB
BS
CE
E A
EE
IT
ME
M P
Applied Science
Chemistry
Computer Studies
Mathematics
Physics
Liberal Studies
Business
Civil Engineering
Chemical Engineering
Electrical and Electronic Engineering
Information Technology
Mechanical Engineering
Manufacturing Engineering
SA203 Building Standards
Four hours per week for one semester
A second year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
lntroduction to the elements of construction with particular emphasis
on housing including timber-framed, brick veneer and cavity brick
dwellings. Examination of foundations, footings, internallexternal
claddings, framing and roof structures.
Water disposal theory with reference to vented, vented modified, single
stack, single stack modified systems. Standards of installation.
applications and inspection methods.
Consideration of various forms of construction practices related to
concrete, steel, timber and masonry.
Relevant provisions of building and plumbing legislation, codes and
standards.
Plan review technique.
SA508 Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of employment experience occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science (Environmental Health). Students are supervised by a
member of the academic staff, and are required to complete a
Competency Attainment Program.
SA608
Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of employment experience occurring as part of the
th~rd year of the course leading to the degree of Applied Science
(Environmental Health). Students are supervised by a member of the
academic staff and are required to complete a Competency Attainment
Program.
SC100 Environmental Health
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment and examination
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Historical background: a history of public health in Victoria and
the impact of environmental health on the prevention of spread of
infectious diseases.
Professional role: professional practice of the health surveyor in
1
overnment and industry. Concepts of environmental health.
dministration: the structure and role of State and Local Government
agencies involved in environmental health and pollution control.
A brief overview of appropriate legislation that the health surveyor is
required to admin~ster.
SC107 Biology
Four hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
For details see SC108 Biology.

SC108 Biology
Four hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry/biochemistry.
Basic microbiology: cell structure and function. Elements of microbial
world ranging from viruses, rickettsia, chlamydia, bacteria, blue-green
algae, algae, protozoa and fungi. Methods of growing, isolating and
handling micro-organisms. Microbes and pathogenicity.
Basic biochemistry and nutrition: composition of humans and foods.
Basic structures and functions of carbohydrates, proteins and fats. Role
of enzymes, coenzymes and cofactors in the body. Digestion of
polysaccharrides, proteins and fats. Glucose, protein and fat
metabolism. Dietary misconceptions. Vitamins and trace elements.
Energy metabolism. Food toxicity.
Genetics: Mendel's law. Mono and dihybrid crosses. Mitosis meiosis
and linkage of genes. Gene interactions and polygenic inheritance.
Aspects of human genetics. Karyotype analysis, pedigrees including
sex linkage. Inborn errors of metabolism. DNA-chemical nature and
Watson-Crick model. DNA replication. RNA species, genetic code and
protein synthesis. Evolution-lines of evidence. Darwin's theory. Genetic
basis of evolution. Hardy-Weinberg law. Populations variation, natural
selection and patterns of evolution. Modes of speciation. Punctuated
equilibria.
SC109 Biology
Four hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
For details, see SC108 Biology.
SC133 Chemistry
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major in Applied Science.
Atomic structure, shapes of molecules, chemical bonding.
Organic chemistry - amines, aromatic compounds, amino acids,
peptides, proteins, purines, pyrimidines.
Equilibria, kinetics, acid-base chemistry.
SC154 Chemistry
Five hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Quantitative aspects of chemical reactions.
Aciddbases - strong and weak, pH, solvolysis of ions, buffers
indicators.
Properties of chemical reactions: extent and equilibria; gaseous
equilibria; solution equilibria; kinetics; applications.
Energy from chemical reactions: heat energy - thermochemistry;
Hess's law; electrical energy - redox; galvanic cells; electrode potential;
Nernst equation; applications.
Chemistry of metals: general properties, distribution economic
importance and envimnmental problems; metallic bonding; heavy
metals in food and water; analysis of metals; corrosion and protection
of metals.
Practical chemistry: equilibria; kinetics; thermochemistry; redox;
chemistry of metals.
SC155 Chemistry
Seven hours per week for one semester.
A first year subject of the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry taken by students who have not
reached Year 12 chemistry standard.
Quantitative aspects of chemical reactions.
Aciddbases - strong and weak, pH, solvolysis of ions, buffers,
indicators.
Properties of chemical reactions: extent and equilibria; gaseous
equilibria; solution equilibria; kinetics; applications.
Energy from chemical reactions: heat energy - thermochemistry;
Hess's law; electrical energy - redox; galvanic cells; electrode
potential Nernst equation; applications.
Chemistry of metals: general properties, distribution economic
importance and envimnmental problems; metallic bonding; heavy
metals in food and water; analysis of metals; corrosion and protection
of metals.
Practical chemistry: equilibria; kinetics; thermochemistry; redox;
chemistry of metals.
SC208 Biology
Six hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer-aided
chemistrylbiochemistry.
The course introduces the cell as the basic biological unit, considers
tissues as aggregates of cells with specialised functions and then
proceeds to treat the following systems in some detail.
Cardiovascular system: properties of blood; anatomy and physiology
of the heart. Mechanical and electrical events of the cardiac cycle;
cardiac output. Regulation of heart rate and blood pressure,
haemostasis.
Respiratory system: anatomy of the respiratory system; gas exchange
and transport; control of respiration. The properties of haemoglobin.
Renal system and water balance: structure of the kidney and urinary
system. Basic renal processes. Regulation of extracellular volume and
osmolarity.
Digestive system: the arrangement and functions of the digestive
system.
Skeletal system: calcium regulation, structure of bone. Anatomy of the
skeleton.
Muscular system: types of muscle and their roles.
Immune systems: reticulo endothelial system. Inflammation,
phagocytosis; lymphocytes, cell-mediated immunity, antibody-
mediated immunity.
N~NOUS system: nerves and excitability; transmission, the synapse;
simple reflex arc. Overview of functions and structures in the central
nervous system.
Endocrine system: functions. Major glands, their products and
functions.
Reproductive system: anatomy, gaemtogenesis, contraception,
pregnancy.
Integration of body systems: responses to stresses such as exercise,
shock.
Practical work in the course includes use of the microscope in the
examination of cells and tissues, the testing of body parameters and
physiological functions. Extensive use is made of charts, biological
models and equipment as spirometers and microcomputers.
SC209 Biology
Six hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
For details see SC208 Biology.

SC252
Biological Chemistry
Five hours per week for one semestel
A first-year subject in the degree course in environmental health.
Organic chemistry: alkanes, alkenes, alkynes; benzene and
derivatives; alcohols, aldehydes, carboxylic acids; esters, ethers;
amines, amides; IUPAC nomenclature; polymers. Chemistry of living
cells: cellular homeostasis; major organic groupings in tissues;
biologically useful energy and ATP
Protein structure and function: relation to catalysis, transport, pumping.
Membrane structure and function; membrane potentials; impulse
transmission. Generation of ATP; glycolytic pathway; anaerobic ATP
generation; Krebs' cycle; fatty acid oxidation; electron transport;
oxidative phosphorylation. Practical work: illustrative of some of the
above topics.
SC254 Chemistry
Twelve hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Chemical bonding: Electronic structure of atoms: spectra, energy
levels, electronic configuration of elements, periodic table. Electronic
structure of molecules: arrays; covalent, ionic, polar, metallic bonds.
multiple bonds, resonance, shapes of molecules, molecular orbital
theory, hybridization.
Organic chemistry: alkenes and alkynes; benzene and other aromatic
compounds; alcohols; ethers; nitriles and amines; aldehydes and
ketones; carboxylic acids and their derivatives.
lnorganic chemistry: ionic bonding; intermolecular forces.
Analytical chemistry: precipitation equilibria; complex ion equilibria.
Physical chemistry: Thermodynamics: First law; thermo-chemistry;
second law; entropy; free energy and equilibria; kinetics.
Practical chemistry: Analytical; volumetric, gravimetric, instrumental,
project work; inorganic: synthesis, reactions; organic: techniques,
synthesis, reactions, characterisation of products; physical; bonding.
SC318 Microbiology
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Basic microbiology: general anatomy of the bacterial cell. Structure
and function of bacterial components. Bacterial nutrition and growth.
Types and composition of media for growth. Special growth techniques
- anaerobic, enrichment. Counting techniques. Sterilisation methods.
lmmunology baslc tenets of lmmunology to Include the mechanlsm
of oroductlon of antlbodles In response to antlaens Vacclnatlon and
immunisation.
Practical work will be conducted in conjuntion with the above topics.
SC349 Microbiology
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Basic microbiology: general anatomy of the bacterial cell. Structure
and function of bacterial components. Bacterial nutrition and growth.
Types and composition of media for growth. Special growth techniques
- anaerobic, enrichment.
Counting techniques as a method for measuring bacterial growth.
These will also include simple field techniques such as millipore
filtration and MPN counts.
Sterilisation methods: a wide range of physical and chemical methods
of sterilisation and disinfection will be taught. The methods will range
from heat and radiation methods which are suitable for laboratories
to chemicals and chlorine which are suitable for extensive waterways.
lmmunology baslc tenets of lmmunology to Include the mechanlsm
of D~O~UC~IO~ of antlbodles In response to antlaents - Vacclnatlon and
immunisation.
Faculty of Applied Science
SC353 Applied Chemistry
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Industrial energy sources: coal, oil, natural gas, shale and nuclear.
Production and use of synthesis gas. Coal conversion processes.
lnorganic reactions: a study of the major classes of inorganic reactions
and associated equilibria. Application of such reactions to the
separation and identification of common metal cations and anions in
multi-component solutions and commercial products. This component
of the course is done as practical work.
Kinetics of complex reactions: Consecutive, parallel and reversible firstorder
reactions; non-equal initial concentrations; enzyme kinetics; free
radical and chain reactions; the internal combustion engine and air
pollution; batch and flow reactions.
lntroduction to the chemical industry and chemical processing: fluid
flow; heat transfer; separation processes; pmcess analysers; process
control.
SC360 Practical Chemistry
Seven hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Quantitative analysis: manual titration, computer-controlled automatic
titration, colorimetry, atomic absorption, electrodeposition, GC, HPLC
and a project in quantitative atomic absorption.
Physical chemistry experiments in thermodynamics, phase equilibria,
kinetics and spectroscopy.
SC362 Biochemistry
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
lntroduction to biomolecules: monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides,
amino acids, polypeptides, structure of proteins, lipids,
nucleotides, enzymes, coenzymes, nucleic acids.
Enzyme kinetics: simple enzyme mechanisms, Michaelis-Menten kinetics,
inhibition.
Catabolic pathways: catabolic pathways for carbohydrate, lipid and
protein.
Biosynthesis of ATP.
SC365 Practical Biochemistry
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Laboratory exercises associated with the properties of biomolecules,
quantitative determination of biomolecules, isolation and preparation
of biomolecules, enzyme preparations and assays, enzyme kinetics.
Computer simulation will be used in conjunction with a laboratory
exercise in the teaching of enzyme kinetics.
SC370 Chemistry
Six hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Thermodynamics: formation; reaction; variations with temperature;
chemical potentials; available work.
Phase equilibria: one and two component systems, with emphasis on
practical applications.
Organic chemistry: ammaticity.
Chromatography: general principles; column chromatography, GC,
HPLC.
Analytical chemistry: sampling.
Spectroscopy: basic instrumentation; atomic and UVIvisible spectra.
Descriptive inorganic chemistry: chemistry of the main group elements.

SC380 Practical Chemistry
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Analytical techniques: volumetric analysis, analysis using an atomic
absor~tion ~Dectrometer, UVIvisible spectrometer, gas chromatograph
and high pe'rformance liquid chromatograph.
Physical experiments: thermodynamics and phase equilibria.
SC390 Computers in Chemistry
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chem-
1st~ and comouter-a~ded biochem~stw.
Computer jargon, external and Internal computer structure, operations
of hardware and software, b~nary and hexadecimal notation and ASCII
codes.
Disc and file operation using DOS. Use of function keys, EDLIN.
directories and DEBUG.
Spreadsheet and graphics packages, particularly Lotusl-2-3. Import
and export of files. Word processing using PC-write.
Screen display in text and graphics modes. Molecular Modelling using
Desk-Top Molecular Modeller.
SC414
Industrial Problem-Solving
Two hours per week for one sernester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Company organisation and communications: problem-solving,
example case study, chemical economics, chemistry case study,
decisions case study.
SC418 Microbiology
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Taxonomy and identification of the major groups of pathogenic bacteria
with particular reference to those organisms which are associated
with food poisoning (e.g. Staphylococci, Salmonella) or whose
pathogenic characteristics might be associated with ingestion of food
(e.g. causative agents of botulism or scarlet fever).
Bacterial toxins. Nature, structure and pathogenicity of major exo-,
endo- and enterotoxins produced by bacteria. Identification of toxins
and their relationship to food poisoning. Bacterial food poisoning outbreaks.
Food handling techniques. Methods of examination of food,
milk and water for the presence of pathogenic bacteria in food.
Preservation of food against microbial spoilage. The status of Victorian
standards in food analyses and maintenance of food quality.
SC430 Scientific Communication
One hour per week for one semester
Training and practice in the preparation of structured written reports,
using scientific theories, models andlor hypotheses as the subject
matter.
Literature review on a selected scientific topic. Preparation of a
curriculum vitae.
SC451 Food Microbiology
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Food Hygiene
Microbiological factors - micro-organics involved in food spoilage
(especially in relation to the dairy, meat, wine, canning and bottling
industries). Conditions that promote or inhibit food spoilage during food
handling and storage. Pathogenic micro-organisms commonly
transmitted via foods. Methods used to minimise unwanted microbial
growth.
lmportance of the cleaning and sanitising of plant and equipment.
Cleaning and sanitising techniques. Important types of cleaning and
sanitising chemicals and applications. Evaluation of sanitation of plant
and equipment (e.g. swabbing). lmportance of water chlorination, with
particular reference to can cooling water. Methods of chlorination.
Testing of chlorinated water.
Use of micro-organisms
Use of micro-organ~sms in the flavouring of foods.
Use of micro-organisms in the preserving of foods (e.g. yoghurt.
cheese, beer, wine).
Use of mlcro-organ~sms In the manufacture of foods (eg vlnegar,
alcohol~c beverages, cheese, sour cream, vltamlns, etc )
SC453
Applied Chemistry
Two hours per week for one sernester.
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Organophosphoruslsilicon chemistry. Basic NMR. Preparation,
reactions and reaction mechanisms of organophosphorus and silicon
compounds, using examples of industrial importance. An introduction
to basic proton NMR is also included.
Polymer chemistry: classification of polymers. Introduction to polymerisation
reactions, including industrial polymerisation processes.
Characteristic properties of polymers and their measurement, including
molecular weight determinations and crystallinity by X-ray
spectroscopy.
SC460 Practical Chemistry
Seven hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Organic techniques: volumetric analysis for saponification and
unsaturation equivalent, steam distillation, use of rotary evaporation,
recrystallisation, syntheses, identification and characterisation of
individual compounds and mixtures using chemical tests, physical
measurements, gas chromatography, infra-red spectrometer and
polarimeter, practical test.
SC462 Biochemistry
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Anabolic pathways: biosynthetic pathways leading to glucose,
glycogen, lipid, protein, DNA.
Regulation and control of metabolism: control mechanisms operating
at the level of the gene and at enzyme level. Examples will particularly
be drawn from fermentation pathways.
This subject will particularly use literature assignments in order to cover
the syllabus.
SC465 Practical Biochemistry
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Laboratory exercises include protein purification and analysis, and
experiments in metabolism and metabolic control.
Techniques used will include thin layer chromatography, gel filtration,
selective precipitation, ion exchange, gel electrophoresis.
spectrophotometric and enzymatic analysis of metabolites and the use
of the oxygen electrode.
SC467 Environmental Health Practice (1)
Five hours per week for one semester
A second year subject in the degree course in environmental health.
Domestic waste water management: the design, approval and
inspection of sewerage disposal methods in non-sewered areas. Septic
tanks and conversion methods. Transpiration, filtration and soil
adsorption.
Food establishment legislation and inspection methodology: for
example, food premises, eating houses, food factories and markets.
Licensed premises. Reports.
Food hygiene: vending and transport.
Business communication: communication needs of the workplace (e.g.
letter, report, memo preparation).

SC468 Environmental Science
Five hours per week for one semester
A second year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Meteorology: Atmospheric variables, measurement of humidity, air
pollution, atmospheric stability, inversion, plume behaviour, local
effects.
Water science: Purity, tolerable solutes, desirable solutes, standards,
analysis. Swimming pool chemistry.
Domestic chemistry: Chemistry in the household (detergents,
pesticides, renovating chemicals, motor chemicals, swimming pool
chemicals, proper handling and disposal of domestic chemicals).
SC469 Epidemiology
-.
Three hours per week for one semester
A second year subject in the degree course in environmental health.
Overview, nature and scope of epidemiology. Nature, transmission and
control of various diseases of public health importance including: exotic
diseases, sexually transmitted diseases, myco-bacterial and viral
infections, food-borne diseases, skin contact diseases, parasitic
infections and zoonotic diseases.
Immunology and immunisation procedures with particular reference
to Victorian requirements.
SC470
Chemistry
Five hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-alded
chemistry and computer-aided biochemistry.
Descriptive inorganic chemistry: selected compounds of main group
elements - thermodynamics of formation, chemistry.
Organic chemistry: acidity, basicity. Carbonions, application to
synthesis. Aromatic compounds.
Infra-red spectroscopy. Coordination chemistry: fundamentals.
SC480 Practical Chemistry
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Organic techniques: volumetric analysis for saponification and
unsaturation equ~valent, steam distillation, use of rotary evaporation,
recrystallisation, syntheses, identification and characterisation using
chemical tests, physical measurements, gas chromatograph, ~nfra-red
spectrometer and polarimeter, practical test.
SC490
Computers in Chemistry
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Statistical treatment of chemical data using spreadsheets: errors.
distributions, confidence limits, significance tests, lines and curves of
best fit, quality control charts.
Use of macros to automate spreadsheets. Exercises using the Acid-
Base package.
SC504
Human Biochemistry
Two hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochem~stry.
Control mechanisms operating in living organisms. Steroid and trophic
hormone effects. Their target tissues and activities at the enzyme and
nucleic acid levels. Also includes amplification of signals through
receptors, types of receptors and synthetic analogues modifying the
signals. Abnormal hormone patterns and their relationship to disease
processes. The role of chemical analysis in the treatment and
diagnosis of disease.
Clinical biochemistry.
Organisation of clinical laborator~es automation and quality control.
Computers in the clinical laboratory.
SC508
Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of employment experience occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science (Computer-Aided Chemistry and Computer-Aided
Biochemistry). Students are supervised by a member of the academic
staff and are required to submit a report to their employer and to their
supervisor.
SC509
Research Skills
Two hours per week for one semester
Faculty of Applied Science
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Students are introduced to research methods, both quantitative and
qualitative, in preparation for a major research project.
SC530 Properties of Colloids
E~ght hours per week in one semester
A core subject of the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Classification of colloidal systems and interfaces. Concept of surface
tenslon. Surface models and surface thermodynamics. Ttie properties
of C U N ~ surfaces. ~ Adsorption and orientallon at Interfaces. S~reading
of liquids. Wetting and contact angles. Origin of the electrical
double layer - potential determining ions, ionic adsorption. Description
of the electr~cal double layer. Electrokinetic phenomena - zeta
potential. Colloid stability - DLVO theory; steric stabilisation. Flocculation
kinetics.
Applications
Throughout this compulsory section, particularly during tutorials.
strong emphasis is upon applying the basic theory to practical
examples.
Practical work
The basic practical skills and techniques of colloid science are taught
here and are drawn from the following areas:
Cleaning techniques and surface preparation; the measurement of
surface and interfacial tension of pure liquids and liquid mixtures;
adsorption at the liquid-air interface - assessment of surface concentrations;
adsorption at the solid-liquid interface - determination
of adsorption isotherms, measurement of surface area; the properties
of insoluble monolayers; inorganic sols - preparation, crit~cal flocculation
concentration, protective action, heteroflocculation; the
properties and behaviour of macromolecules in aqueous solution.
SC531
Colloid Experimental Techniques
Eight hours per week in one semester
A core subject of the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Determination of surface area. Particle size techniques. Surface and
interfacial tension measurements. Electokinetic behaviour. Colloid
stability and flocculation rate. The use of potentiometric and conductimetric
titrations in surface studies. Surface spectroscopic techniques.
Light scattering behaviour in colloidal systems. Rheolog~cal
measurements.
Applications
Selected practical problems are dealt with in order to demonstrate the
relevance of the various techniques.
Practical work
Electrokinetic techn~ques - streaming potential, microelectrophoresis;
potentiometric and conductimetric techniques; measurement of flocculation
rate and colloidal stability; determination of parttcle slze;
surface spectroscopic studies, etc.
SC532
Emulsion Technology
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Basic properties and characteristics of emulsions. The theory of
emulsion stabil~ty - surface chemical factors, applicabil~ty of the DLVO
theory, the role of macromolecules as emulsion stabilisers, stabilisation
by finely divided solids, the properties of thin films.
Methods of making and break~ng emulsions. The HLB and PIT systems
of emulsifier selection. The behav~our of surfactants and polymeric
stabilisers. The design of steric and electrostat~c stabilisers. Microemulsions.
The properties, stability and rupture of foams.
Applications
Selected case studies are dealt with from the area of cosmetic emulsions,
food emulsions, bitumen emulsions, wax emulsions, etc.

Practical work
Basic methods of emulsion preparation; the identification of emulsion
type; particle size and viscosity of emulsions; assessment of stability;
the effect of emulsifier type on interfacial tension and on the
electrokinetic properties of emulsions; the design and preparation of
emulsions in a specific area (e.g. microemulsions, cosmetic
emulsions); foaming and antifoaming agents; minor project work.
SC533 Polymer Flocculation
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Types of flocculants - natural, synthetic, metal ions. Flocculants in
solution. Adsorption behaviour - bridging model, floc formation, floc
structure. Flocculation and electrical double layer theory. Steric stabilisation.
Selective flocculation. Sensitisation, protective action.
Applications
General principles of water treatment - selected case studies (e.g.
iron removal, removal of emulsified oils). Flocculation of clays, paint
pigments, etc.
Practical work
Assessment of stability; methods for screening flocculants; effect of
flocculant dosage, type and molecular weight on floc formation; the
co-operative effect of metal ions and polyelectrolytes; effect of pH on
flocculation; floc building; flocculation and filtrability; analytical
methods for determining low concentration of flocculants; minor project
work.
SC534 Mineral Processing Chemistry
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Minerals analysis - XRD, XRF, electron microprobe. Particle liberation
- crushing, grinding, classifying (brief coverage of these areas).
Mineral flotation - wetting, hydrophobicity. Activators, frothers, collectors
and depressants - solution properties, behaviour. Flotation
of sulphides - semiconductor properties of the mineral; action of collectors
and metal ions. Coal flotation. Flotation of silicates, oxides, etc.
Chemistry of mineral slurries. Flocculation of minerals - selective
flocculation, fine particle recovery, etc.
Applications
Selected experiments in mineral analysis; particle size analysis; interfacial
properties of minerals - zeta potential, surface charge; adsorption
of collectors; contact angle and bubble pick-up techniques; flotation
studies - Hallimond tube, Fuerstenau cell, Vacuum flotation
techn~ques; role of pH, Ehnd metal ion concentration in flotation;
selective flocculation; selected case studies; minor project work.
SC535 Detergency
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
The origin, manufacture, nature and use of detergents. The principal
types of detergents, the role of additives, etc. Detergent action -
adsorption at interfaces, wetlability and contact angles. Solution properties
of detergents - micelle formation, phase diagrams, solubilisation,
surface tension, etc. The differences in behaviour between
cationic, anionic and non-ionic detergents. Methods of analysis (e.g.
ranging from cloud point determlnation and two-phase titrations to
infra-red and NMR analysis). Detergent biodegradability (brief
treatment).
Applications
Detergent formulation for specific needs, e.g. softeners, conditioners,
emulsificat~on, etc. Particular case studies are dealt with here.
Practical work
The adsorption of detergents - degree of adsorption, effect on contact
angle; effect on zeta potent~al; solution properties of detergents -
surface tenslon, critical mlcelle concentration, phase diagrams; deterqent
analysls - titrations, instrumental analysis; experiments on sel-
&led problems are performed (e g removal of lanolin from wool, formulat~on
of halr shampoos, etc), mlnor project work
SC536 Surface Coatings
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
Purpose and type of coatings. Coating components. Surface physics
- colour, reflectivity. Specific coatlngs - non-convertible, convertible,
anodizing, thin films, etc. Pigment dispersability. Rheology. Preparation
of surfaces.
Applications
Selected case studies with a strong emphasis on tailoring a particular
coating for a specific surface.
Practical work,.
The structure of slllcone coatings and their correlation with wettability
and adhesive strength; formulation of a simple paint; rheology properties;
dispersion of pigments; preparation of resins; preparation and
characterisation of latices; characterisation of coated surfaces (e.g.
by electronmicroscope); minor project work.
SC537 Corrosion and Protection of Metals
Eight hours per week in one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
Principles
1. Equilibrium electrochemistry (brief treatment). Elementary aspects:
redox reactions; electrochemical cells; Nernst equation; conventions.
Thermodynamic effects: relationship between EQ and
equilibrium constant; effects of inert electrolytes, competing
reactions and pH; Pourbaix diagrams; limitations in the use of the
Nernst equation.
2. Electrochemical kinetics (electrical double layer theory assumed)
- charge transfer control of electrode reactions. Applications to
oxygen reduction, hydrogen evolution, dissolution of iron. Mass
transport control of electrode reactions. Mixed mass transport -
charge transfer control. Potentiostatlc and galvanostatic
determlnat~on of current-voltaae curves. Passiv~tv of metals and
related current-voltage curve:
3. Metal oxidation - non-protective and protective oxide layers.
Surface reactions and the metal oxideloxygen and metallmetal
oxide interfaces. The rate of growth of oxide layers. Tarnishing
reactions.
Applications
The complete corrosion cell. Corrosion current and factors affecting
it - applications to protection and inhibition. Corrosion by pure watek
Case studies drawn from the followina areas are dealt with: corrosion
by potable water and in the marine ehironment; corrosion in stream
condensers: cathodic orotection. sacrificial orotection: metallic
coatings; oxide protectio;l; inorganic and ~r~anic'~rotectlve coatings;
dezincification of brass; materials of construction in a chemical plant;
economic aspects in combating corrosion; minor project work.
Practical work
Measurement of equll~brlum cell potentials, galvanostatlc and potentlostatlc
techn~ques, practical experiments demonstrating ~nh~b~t~on, etc
SC538
Adsorption of Aqueous Pollutants
Eight hours per week in one semester
An electwe subject in the graduate diploma course in applied colloid
science.
An overview of forces involved in adsorption from solution. Examples
of uptake onto colloidal suspensions of toxic material such as heavy
metals, anions, organics and polymers. Industrial significance of
adsorption from solution and its implications for wastewater treatment.
Practical aspects of adsorption phenomena, including expermental
design.
Orientation of adsorbed polymers. Experimental methods of measuring
thickness of adsorbed laver. lmolicattons of adsorbed , oolvmer , to
particle stability.
An overview of wastewater treatment. The role of adsorption and other
colloidal phenomena in wastewater treatment.

SC541 Microbiology
Three hours of theory per week for one semester
A subject of semester one of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbiology.
introduction to microbiology; eukaryotic and prokaryotic microbes;
algae, protozoa, fungi, bacteria, cyanobacteria.
The viruses.
Microbial anatomy - introductory biochemistry of microbes.
Methods of microbiology.
Microbial growth and control of microbial growth, including sterilisation
and disinfection.
SC542 Practical Work
Four hours of practical work per week for one semester
A subject of semester one of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbiology.
The practical work complements the theory and develops the skills
of students in the handling of micro-organisms.
SC543 Microbiology
Three hours of theory per week for one semester
A subject of semester two of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbioloav. -.
ldentlficatlon of ~ndustr~ally ~mported m~cro-organisms; microbial
metabol~sm: fermentation technoloav: - . comouter . control of fermentations;
waste'treatment.
SC544
Practical Work
Four hours of practical work per week for one semester
A subject of semester two of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbioloqy. -.
The pract~cal work complements the theory and develops the students'
skills further In the techn~ques used by m~crob~ologists.
SC545 Microbiology
Three hours of theory per week for one semester
A subject of semester three of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbioloav. -.
Microbial genetics; mdecular biology; basic immunology and methods
of immunology; downstream processing; dairy technology.
SC546 Practical Work
Four hours of practical work per week for one semester
A subject of semester three of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbiology.
The practical work complements the theory and develops the students'
skills further in the techniques used by microbiologists.
SC547 Microbiology
Three hours of theory per week for one semester
A subject of semester four of the graduate diploma course in industrial
microbiology.
Industrial fermentations; biotechnology; food microbiology; microbial
toxins; infection and infectivity.
SC548 Practical Work
Four hours of practical work per week for one semester
A subject of semester four of the graduate diploma course in industrlal
microbiology.
The practical work complements the theory and develops skills further
in the techniques used by m~crobiologists.
Faculty of Applied Science
SC553 Applied Chemistry
Seven hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Applied Organic Chemistry
Chemistry of natural products: Saccharides.
Organic synthesis: general principles. Reagents. Planning and design
of syntheses. Practical aspects and synthetic techniques. Industrial
versus academic syntheses. Syntheses sf commercially significant
natural products. Computer-aided syntheses.
immunological analysis: theoretical basis of immunological analysis
as applied to organic chemicals.
Photochemistry: free radicals; colour sensitisation and quenching;
optical pumping; photochemical reactions; industrial photochemistry.
Polymer Chemistry
Analysis and identification of polymers; differential thermal analysis;
gel permeation chromatography; polymer applications of infra-red and
NMR spectroscopy; pyrolysis gas chromatography.
Polymer coatings: applications of protective organic surface coatings;
nonconvertible and convertible surface coatings, their chemistry and
properties.
Surface and Electrochemistry
Surface and colloid chemistry: surface chemistry; origin of the electrical
double layer; potentials at interfaces; potential determining ions
and ionic adsorption; description of the electrical double layer; electrokinetic
phenomena; colloid stability.
Electrochemistry: electrodics - extension of the Butler-Volmer
equation to multistep electrode reactions: experimental methods -
potentiostatic and galvanostatic electrolysis: mass transport control
of electrode reactions - steady state and transient techniques.
Convective mass transport: design of industrial electrochemical cell.
Corrosion.
SC560 Practical Chemistry
Seven hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Selected experiments in electrochemistry and colloid chemistry.
Further analysis of the liquid mixture uslng a UVIvisible spectrometer,
broad-line NMR experiment.
Selected experiments in electrochemistry and surface chemistry.
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of an unknown liquid mixture
using distillation, chemical tests, physical measurements, an infra-red
spectrometer, an NMR spectrometer, a mass spectrometer and a gas
chromatograph.
SC562 Analytical Biochemistry
Three hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Separation techniques in biochemistry and purification strategies.
Techniques used in the analysis of biomolecules - structural analysis
of proteins. Computer simulation will be used in the teaching of this
unit.
Spectroscopy - biochemical applications.
SC565 Practical Biochemistry
Six hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Advanced experiments in protein synthesis and analysis. Cell
fractionation techniques. Extraction, purification and analysis of
enzymes. Physical techniques will include use of spectroscopy and
fluorescence spectroscopy, various forms of gel electrophoresis,
molecular weight determinations and use of the ultracentrifuge.
Computers will be used for simulation, data analysis and modelling
studies of structure-function relationships.

SC567 Environmental Health (2)
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Food law: a deta~led examination of the role and function of the
National Food Authority and appropriate committees. A study of the
Food Standards Code. The role of the Environmental Health Officer
in food inspection, sampling and seizure procedures.
Public buildings: health and safety, emergency lighting, fire prevention.
emergency exits.
Accommodation standards: Public and recreational housing.
SC568
Applied Food Science and Inspection
Five hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
A detailed study of the production of important food products, in
particular, those that are potentially hazardous or liable to spoilage.
For example:
- milk and other dairy fcods;
- meat products (including srrallgoods), poultry, fish;
frozen, dried, canned and artificially prese~ed foods;
- bread manufacture;
- fruit juices;
- fermented products.
SC569 Urban Ecology
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Basic ecology: components of ecosystems, definitions, pathways for
energy and materials in the biosphere, interactions among species,
nutrient cycles and balances.
IndustriallUrban ecology: impact of industries on global and local
environments, impacts of dense populatton (cities) on environments,
alr pollution, biological indicators of pollution, biological control of
pollution. Management and treatment of domestic and industrial waste.
Recycling. Assessment of environmental impact.
Current issues: acid rain, greenhouse effect, ozone depletion, power
generation and transmission.
SC570
Chemistry
Six hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Electrochemtstry: fundamentals.
Ltauid surfaces: surface chemistrv and thermodvnam~cs.
Instrumental techniques: the basic analyser. Nuclear magnetic resonance.
Mass spectroscopy. X-ray methods.
SC580 Practical Chemistry
Three hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject In the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Selected experiments in electrochemistry and surface chemistry.
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of an unknown liquid mixtrrre
using distillation, chemical tests, physical measurements, an infra-red
spectrometer, an NMR spectrometer, a mass spectrometer and a gas
chromatograph.
Selected experiments in electrochemistry and surface chemistry.
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of an unknown liquid mixture
using distillation, chemical tests, physical measurements, an infrared
spectrometer, an NMR spectrometer, a mass spectrometer and a gas
chromotograph.
SC590 Computers in Chemistry
Three hours per week in semester seven
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Toptcs w~ll be selected from the following list:
1. Laboratory data handling
2. Data bases
3. Communications
4. Laboratory automation
5. Smart programs
6. Chemometrics
7. Molecular modelling
SC604 Biotechnology
Three hours per week in semester e~ght
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
a) Microbial genetics and gene manipulation: structures, interrelationships
and functions of nucleic acids. Transcription and
translation and relationships to RNA and protein synthesis. Genetic
control mechanisms. Mutations, mutagenic agents and selection
of spontaneous and induced variants. Genetlc mechanisms
~nvolv~ng mlcro-organlsms Recomb~nant mechan~sms In bacter~al
mlcrob~al aenetlcs and ~nduslr~al fermentat~on processes A~~lted
recombin& DNA technology. Recombinat~on by protoplast flsion.
b) Fermentation technology, chem~cal requirements for growth an0
arowth k~net~cs Batch. fed-batch and conttnuous fermentat~ons
koreactors and their design criteria. Aerat~on and oxygen transfer.
Control of fermentation
c) Yeast technology: fermentations involving Saccharomyces
cerevisiae in the production of alcohol, wines and beers.
Descr~pt~ons to Include processing of startlng mater~al, methods
of lermentat~on. b~ochem~cal reactions and enzymes Var~at~on In
patterns and metabolism of enzymes in anaerobic and aerobtc
fermentatcons Pen~c~ll~n and cephalospor~n product~on as
exam~les of secondarv metabol~sm In Penicilllum chrysoqenum . -
and ~e~halosporium acremonium.
d) Enzyme technology.
Industrial enzymes. sources, methods of production and lndustrlal
uses of a ran'ge of selected enzymes. .
lmmobilised enzymes: cells, organelles and co-enzymes. Methods
of immobilisation. Typical supports. Spacer groups. Practical
applications of immobilised enzymes, cells and organelles In:
(a) dairy, detergent, food and leather industries;
(b) biochemical analysis;
(c) cl~nical and pharmaceutical Industries.
Protein engineering.
e) Waste treatment and disposal: sewage treatment. Primary
treatment - settling and sedimentation. Treatment of settled
sewage using activated sludges and biological filters. Methods and
rates of aeration of activated sludges. Reduction of BOD and
suspended solids. Factors involved in biological filters. Organisms
involved in sewaae treatment. Microbial metabolism and diqestion
especially nitrification and nitrogen reduction and pathways to
methane metabolism. Special problems associated wlth synthet~c
detergents. Hard and soft detergents and biodegradability. Fungal
degradation of toxic compounds.
f) Downstream processing: a qualitative considerat~on of the factors
and problems involved in translating laboratory findings into pilot
plant and finally production plant stages. Factors involved in scale-
UD to include environmental control factors. mixlna relationships.
power input, momentum factors, impeller speedsind volumeirlc
mass transfer coefficient. Scale-up based on non-geometric
similarity. Alteration of factors in optim~sing processes.
SC608 Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of employment experience occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science (Computer-Aided Chemistry and Computer-Aided
Biochemistry). Students are supervised by a member of the academic
staff and are required to submit a report to their employer and to thew
supervisor.
SC609 Health Promotion
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course In environmental health.
The course begins by reviewing key concepts and strategies in community
health: early identification, treatment, disease preventlon.
health promotion.
After considering stgnificant historical developments In the area of
health education, the following top~cs will be treated:
- social, cultural and psychological factors ~nvolved in health promotlon
and disease prevention behaviours;
- health education, opportunltles and responstb~ltt~es for
environmental health officers;
- health education strategies and techntques for env~ronmental
health officers;
- instructional techniques and communicat~on skills for health
education;
- needs assessment techn~ques;
- program evaluat~on strategies, performance indicators

SC653
Process Chemistry
Five hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Extraction of metals: free energy relationships applied to metal extraction;
thermodynamic basis of free energy relationships.
Pyrometallurgical processes for the extraction of metals from their ores.
Explanation of various aspects of these processes in terms of free
enerav -, relationshios.
Catalvsis and selected chemical processes: catalysts used in the largescal&~ndustr~al
product~on of organlc chem~cals, ~nclud~ng the k~net~cs
of heteroaeneous reactions The ~ndustr~al use of b~oloq~cal catalysts
- eitherh living cells or as extracted enzymes. lndustfial fermentations.
The concepts of organometallic chemistry to a level sufficient
to allow an understanding of the design, preparation and mechanisms
of such catalysts will be presented. Students will also work in groups,
and each group will prepare a talk and written report on a selected
catalytic process. A visit to a suitable industrial process will be
included.
Treatment of industrial wastes: control and treatment of industrial
waste. The Environmental Protection Act and its administration. Types,
source and effect of pollution with regard to natural ecosystems and
human health. Disposal of domestic and industrial wastes, including
microbiological bases: physicochemical and other methods. Hazardous
and intractable wastes.
SC660 Practical Chemistry
Seven hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Further analysis of the unknown solid using an infra-red spectrometer,
an NMR spectrometer and a UVIvisible spectrometer. Further analysis
using an infra-red data station. Project.
Analysis of an unknown solid using an X-ray diffractometer, analysis
of a food sample using an atomic absorption spectrometer with
electrothermal atomosation, experiments using an autoanalyser, a
high-pressure liquid chromatograph and an infra-red data station.
SC661
Environmental Analysis and Control
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in environmental health.
Sam~linq . - and analysis of air, water, solids.
Analysis revlew of analytical methods as applied to env~ronmental
analvies - techniaues based on seoaratcon - techn~aues based on
elecirochemical properties - techniques based on sp&ctrochemical
properties.
Use or process flow diagram.
Simple process calculations (stoichiometry, combustion, heat and
mass balances).
Disposal and dispersal of effluents - stack heights, etc.
Case studies on industries of interest.
SC662
Analytical Biochemistry
Two hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Radiosotope methods. lmmunochemistry and its applications in
chemical and biochemical analysis. Computer analysis in
biochemistry. Use of spectroscopy for biochemical analysis (e.g. NMR,
mass spec.).
SC665 Practical Biochemistry
Four hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Experiments involving immunological assays. Exercises in clinical
biochemistry.
Research Project.
SC667 Environmental Health Practice (3)
Two hours per week in one semester
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Aoolied oest control encompassing: principals of taxonomy, lifecycles
a;ld genbral character~stlcs of ~nsecl specles, legal aspects of conlrol.
pest specles detection and ~dent~f~cat~on, control measures and
techniques.
65
Faculty of Applied Science
SC668 Research Project
Eight hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Students undertake a research program on an environmental health
topic which can include science, engineering, law, administrative or
social issues.
SC670
Chemistry
Four hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Ion exchange and solvent extraction: principles and applications in
industrial, laboratory and biochemical situations.
Organic chemistry. steroechernistry. Carbocations. Heterocycl~cs.
Macromolecules. Current developments in appl~ed organlc chem~stry.
SC680 Practical Chemistry
Three hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided
biochemistry.
Analys~s of an unknown sol~d using an X-ray diffractometer, analysls
of a food samole usina an atomic absorotion soectrometer w~th electrothermal
atomisation, experiments using an autoanalyser, a high-pressure
liquid chromatograph and an infra-red data station.
SC690 Computers in Chemistry
Three hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
A continuation of topics from SC590:
1. Laboratory data handling
2. Data bases
3. Communications
4. Laboratory automation
5. Smart programs
6. Chememetrics
7. Molecular modelling
SC708 Scientific Communication 7
One hour per week in semester 7
Training and practice in the presentation of oral reports on industry
based learning and other scientific topics.
Special requirements of oral reporting, including the use of visual aids.
SC709
Employment Experience
A six-month period of industry-based learning in the graduate diploma
in industrial chemistry. Students are supe~ised by a member of the
academic staff and are required to submit a report to their employer
and to their supervisor.
SC710
Dispersion Forces and Thin Films
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject of the masters course in applied colloid science.
Dispersion forces
Interactions between atoms, leading to an overall generalisation for
macroscopic interactions; deficiencies of the classical microscopic
approach. Interaction energies calculated from dielectric and spectral
data; the triple film calculations; adsorbed layers. Applications of van
der Waals' theory to contact angles, wetting, spreading and adhesion.
Thin films
Significance of thin films. Stability - concept of disjoining pressure;
calculation of electrostatics, van der Waals: and steric components
of; evidence pertaining to short range hydration and hydrophobic
forces, based on experimental studies and statistical mechanical treatments
of fluids at interfaces. Instability and rupture of thin films. Application
to flotation, emulsions and the stability of froths and foams.

SC711 E.D.L., Steric and Polymer Theory
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject of the masters course in applied colloid science.
Electrical double layer the0
Review of Gouy-Chapman-~ternxrahame models including the
concept of inner and outer Helmholtz planes, using expertmentalevidence
from studies of the mercurv-solut~on interface. D~scussion of s~lver
iodide dispersions and the development of models appropriate to
oxides and polymer latices. Adsorption of small ions at interfaces.
Adsorption of simple surfactants at interfaces.
Steric stabilisation and polymer theory
Summary of the equilibrium the~omdynamicskf solutions of large
molecules and confiaurational statistics of polvmers. Adsorotion of
polymers at interfaces v - theory, experimental'methods for determining
thickness of adsorbed layer and segment dens~ty. Forces of steric
reoulsion. Analvsis of volume restriction and mixing models.
calculation of lnteractlon free energies. Design of copolymers and selectlon
..~. . of varlous structural ComDonents. A~~ll~atl~n to the dts~erslon
of pigments in various media and to polymer flocculation. '
SC713 Colloid Interaction Theory
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject of the masters course in applied colloid science.
lnteraction theory
Calculation of free energy of interaction for the cases of: constant
charge, constant potentid; charge regulat~on and hetero-coagulation.
various aeometrles will be discussed. Exoerimental evtdence deallnq
with the-dynamics of interacting double iayers. Kinetics of coagulac
ion and stability ratio.
Concentrated dispersions
Fundamental considerations: radial distribution function, (g(r)); relationship
between g(r) and S(Q); potential of mean force and link to g(r);
measurement of g(r) through the scattering of radiation and its angular
variation; determination of S(Q) using theoretical models, link between
S(Q) and osmotic compressibility; calculation of equilibrium thermodynamics
properties from g(r) by exact and approximate techrtiques.
Analysis of experimental systems - orderldisorder phenomena.
Scattering of electromagnetic radiation
Extension of the classical time average theor~es of light scattering to
photon correlation spectroscopy, small angle neutron scattering and
low angle X-ray diffraction. Concepts of scattering density parameter,
particle form factor P(Q) and structure factor S(Q). Application to concentrated
colloidal systems, e.g., microemulsions, latices and pigment
dispersions. (Note: Q is the scattering vector.)
SC714
Research Project
A subject of the masters course in applied colloid science.
A research project will be undertaken which results in a minor thesis.
This will be assessed by examiners external to the project and will
comprise 50% of the overall assessment for the course. Selection of
the project topic will follow detailed discussion between each candidate
and supervisor. The project will run for the duration of the course.
SC715
Adsorption and Waste Treatment
Two hours per week in one semester
A subject of the masters course in applied colloid science.
The role of electrostatic and solvation forces involved in adsorption
from solution. The concept of structure makers and structure breakers.
Examples of uptake onto colloidal suspensions of toxic material such
as heavy metals, anions, organics and polymers.
Forces involved in steric stabilisation and polymer flocculation.
lnteraction free energy, solvency and solution theory. Thermodynamics
of polymers in solution and adsorbed onto colloidal particles.
An overview of wastewater treatment. The role of adsorption and other
colloidal phenomena in wastewater treatment. Theory of clean-up
techniques, e.g. alum flocculation, biochemical treatment of waste,
cellular foam microbial degradation and adsorbing colloid flotation.
SC720
Applied Chemical Techniques
Four hours per week of lectures and assignment work.
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
A selection of topics from the following:
Chromatography: GC and HPLC.
Spectroscopy: IR, UVIvisible, atomic and NMR.
Mass spectrometry and X-ray methods.
Electrochemistry.
Liquid surfaces.
Chemical and automatic analysers.
Chemical data processing: software packages, data stations, laboratory
automation.
SC721
Properties of Colloids and Interfaces
Four hours per week of lectures/tutorials.
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Classification and scope of colloidal svstems and interfaces. The
properties of Curved surfaces. Concepts oi surface tension and surface
activitv. Absorotion and orientation at interfaces. Wettina and soread- '
ing of'liquids bn solids; concept of contact ang&
Origin of charge and electrical double layer on surfaces in aqueous
dispersions - potential determining ions, ionic adsorption.
Electrokinetic phenomena - zeta potential. Stability of colloidal
dispersions.
Throughout the lecture course, strong emphasis is given to applying
the basic concepts and principles to practical examples of the uses
of colloids.
SC722 Food Chemistry
Two hours per week of lecturesftutorials.
A subject in the graduate diploma in Industrial chemistry
Food processing
lntroduction to processes used in the food industries for the preparation
and processing of foods. Problems or potential problems associated
with those processes that have implications for community
health.
Food chemistry
Techniques used in the determination of the amounts of carbohydrate,
protein and lipid in foods. Determination of the amounts of micronutrients
in foods. Methods used for determining the water content of
foods. Determination of the calorie or joule contents of foods. Other
manual and instrumental techniques used in food analysis (e.g. determination
of sulphur dioxide, pesticide residues, etc.). Chemical
additives to food will be considered under the following headings:
chemical classes of food additives, historical aspects, permitted
compounds, reasons for use, function, advantages, disadvantages,
breakdown pathways, toxicity testing regulations controlling use.
Classes of chemical additives to be considered will include the
following: preservatives, antioxidants, flavouring compounds, colouring
compounds, sweetening agents, flavour enhancers, nutrients,
emulsifiers.
SC723 Industrial Chemistry
Four hours per week of lectures/tutorials/assignments.
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Introduction to chemical processing,,
Flow diagrams, fluid flow, heat transfer, equiltbrium constant, mass
balance, energy balance, separation processes, process analysis,
process control, example case study.
Treatment of industrial wastes
Control and treatment of industrial wastes. The Environmental
Protection Act and its administration. Types, source and effect of pollution
with regard to natural ecosystems and human health. Disposal
of domestic and industrial wastes, including microbiological bases:
physico-chemical and other methods. Hazardous and intractable
wastes.
Students will also work in groups and each group will prepare a talk
and written report on a selected process. A visit to a suitable industrial
process will be included.

SC724 Polymer Chemistry
Four hours per week of lectures/tutorials/practical work.
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Principles of macromolecular chemistry
Addition and condensation reactions. Copolymers. Characteristic properties
of polymers and their measurement.
Surface coatings
Applications of protective organic surface coatings; non-convertible
and convertible surface coatings, their chemistry and properties.
Practical polymer chemistry.
SC725
Practical Chemistry
Four hours per week of practical work
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
A selection of experiments and projects in the areas covered in the
following theory topics:
- applied chemistry techniques
- colloids
- food chemistry
SC726
Advanced Biochemistry
Two hours per week of lecturedtutorials
A subiect in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Control mechanlsms In llvlng organlsms A revlew of the mechanlsms
whlch ooerate at the whole oraanlsms level to control rnetabollc
functions. Includes steroid and 6ophic hormone effects, their target
tissues and activities at the enzyme and nucleic acid levels. Also
includes amplification of signals through receptors and synthetic
analogues which modify signals. Applications to clinical chemistry and
chemical pathology.
SC727 Biochemical Techniques
Three hours per week of lectures/tutorials
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Protein chemistry
Purification of proteins: precipitation and denaturation methods, criteria
for assessment of homogeneity. Methods of quantitating protein.
Determination of primary structure: amino acid analysis. Fragmentation
of polypeptides. Sulphydtyl groups - estimation, chemical modification
and assignment of disulphide bonds. Analysis of terminals.
Automated Edman sequencing. Solid phase synthesis of peptides,
protein engineering.
Determination of secondary and tertiary structure. Use of antibodies
and other chemical probes for determination of surface structure.
Techniaues of molecular biology
Overall sirategles used: relationship bGiween molecular biology and
orotein chemlst~. Phvslcal oro~erties of DNAIRNA. Purification of DNA
andk~~. ~ra~mentation of DNA - physical, chemical and enzymic
methods. Methods for separating DNAIRNA fragments. Fragment
elution methods including Southern and Northern blotting techniques.
Hybridisation of filters - probing with oligonucleotide and cDNA
probes. Labelling of probes and DNA. Oligonucleotide synthesis. Purification
of mRNA - affinity chromatography. cDNA synthesis.
Construction of genomic and cDNA libraries: vectors used, ligation
of DNA, linkers, screening methods - oligonucleotide/cDNA/antibody
probes. Cloning DNA into MI3 and dideoxy DNA sequence analysis,
Maxam-Gilbert DNA sequencing. Transfection methods. Expression
of cloned genes. Transgenic animal experiments and applications.
SC728
lndustrial Biochemistry
Two hours per week of lecturedtutorials
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry
This subject consists of two components. The first involves the use
of micro-organisms in industrial processes. It includes aerobic and
anaerobic fermentation patterns in microbial metabolism and looks
at the relationship of organlsms to transformation of steroids and other
molecules lncludlng penicillins. Penicillin blosynthesis is examined.
The second component examines aspects of microbial genetics and
blotechnology and covers areas such as mutations and mutagenesls,
recombinant DNA technoloav and strain selection In an lndustr~al
Faculty of Applied Science
SC729 Industrial Microbiology
Four hours per week of lectures and practical work
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Microbial growth and metabolism
Kinetics of microbial growth.
Measurement of microbial growth.
Fermentation dynamics.
Use of computers in control of fermenter operation.
Biochemistry of micro-organisms: metabolism - catabolic and
anabolic metabolism; DNA and protein synthesis.
Metabolic control.
Microbial genetics and biotechnology
Genetics of prokaryotic micro-organisms.
Genetics of eukaqotic micro-organisms.
Plasmids.
Viral genetics.
Lytic cycle and lysogenic cycle in viruses.
Mutations and mutagenesis.
Genetic engineering: recombinant DNA technology: principles, applications
and implications; containment requirements.
Microbial enzyme production. Uses in industry.
lmmobilised enzyme technology.
Microbiology of foods: food production, contamination, poisoning.
Wastewater treatment.
Micro-organisms and minerals recovery.
Micro-organisms and products of industrial importance.
SC730 Microbiology
Four hours per week of lectures and practical work
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Introduction to the characteristics of micro-organisms and methods
of studying them. Nutrition and nutritional categories. Microbial
anatomy and microbial growth. Control of microbial growth. Principles
of classification, identification and nomenclature of micro-organisms.
Methods for identification. Industrially significant micro-organisms.
SC731
Practical Biochemistry
Six hours per week of practical work
A subiect in the qraduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
The practical work covers a range of laboratory exercises and common
techniaues used In biochemical and chemical laboratones. These
techniques include estimation of disulphide and thiol groups in
proteins, fluorescence spectroscopy, affinity chromatography,
fractionation using ultracentrifugation, antibody labelling techniques,
gel electrophoresis and enzyme kinetics.
SC732
Practical Work
Four hours per week of practical work
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
A selection of experiments and projects relevant to the needs of
industry.
SC808 Scientific Communication 8
One hour per week in semester 8
Literature search and written report on current developments in organic
chemistry.
Obtaining and analysing experimental data.

SC1255 Chemistry SKI04 Computer Science 1A
This is a full year subject. Four hours per week first
semester and four hours Per week second s emester .
This is a first year subject of the degree course in medical biophysics
and instrumentation.
Semester One:
Baslc chemlcal concepts revlslon ol names, svmbols and electronic
configurations; chemical reactions.
Structure of elements and compounds: properties and nature of
metallic, ionic and covalent bonding.
Chemical periodicity.
Weak bonding interactions: dipole, hydrogen and Van der Waal's.
Stoichiometry: mass-mass; mass-volume; volume-volume and redox
calculations.
Thermochemistry; rates of chemical reactions.
Equilibria: acidlbase, redox, solubility, complexation, speciation.
Practical work: Chemical reactions, titrations, pH measurement.
Equilibria.
Semester Two:
Orqanic chemistry: alkanes, alkenes, alkynes; benzene and
denvatlves; alcohols, aldehydes, carboxylic acids; esters, ethers;
amlnes. am~des: IUPAC nomenclature: ~olvmers chemist^ of lwlnq
cells; cellular homeostatis; major orgaAc groupings in tissues
biologically useful energy and ATP
Protein structure and function: relation to catalysis, transport, pumping.
Membrane structure and function; membrane potentials; impulse
transmission. Generation of ATP; glycolytic pathway; anaerobic ATP
generation; Krebs' cycle; fatty acid oxidation; electron transport;
oxidation phosphorylation.
Practical work: illustrative of some of the abwe topics.
SC1500 Introductory Chemistry
Five hours per week for one semester
A first year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Basic chemical concepts: revision of names, symbols and electronic
configurations; chemical reactions.
Structure of elements and compounds: properties and nature of
metallic, ionic and cwalent bonding.
Chemical periodicity.
Weak bonding interactions: dipole, hydrogen and Van der Waal's.
Stoichiometry: mass-mass; mass-volume; volume-volume and redox
calculations.
Thermochemistry: rates of chemical reactions.
Equilibria: acidlbase, redox solubility, complexation, speciation.
Practical work: Chemical reactions, titrations, pH measurement.
Equilibria.
SC3400 Food Processing and Analysis
Four hours per week for one semester
A second year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Food processing: lntroduct~on to processes used in the food industries
for the oreoaratlon and orocesslna of foods. Problems or ootential
problenis associated with those processes that have implications for
community health.
Food chemistry: techniques used in the determination of the amounts
of carbohydrate, protein and lipid in foods. Determination of the
amounts of micronutrients in foods. Methods used for determining the
water content of foods. Determination of the calorie or joule contents
of foods. Other manual and instrumental techniques used in food
analysis (e.g. determination of sulphur dioxide, pesticide residues, etc.).
Chemical additives to food will be considered under the following
headings: chemical classes of food additives, historical aspects,
permitted compounds, reasons for use, function, advantages,
disadvantages, breakdown pathways, toxicity testing, regulations
controlling use.
Classes of chemical additives to be considered will include the
following: preservatives, antioxidants, flavouring compounds, colouring
compounds, sweetening agents, flavour enhancers, nutrients,
emulsifiers.
Pract~cal work: Experiments in food analysis - 2 hours per week.
Five hours per week for one semester
A fir~t-~ea~ subject of the degree course in computing.
computer organisation: hardware configuration; operating systems;
machine and assembly . lanquaqe - - proqramminq; - - systems . software.
Programming methodology and ADA spec~f~cat~ons, problem solvlng
toodown and bottom-uo methods seauence select~on and lteratlon
data types; procedural'abstraction; p;ogram style.
SKI05
Computer Science 1B
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer science and
mathematics and computer science.
The design of algorithms. lntroduction to formal languages. Grammars.
Finite state machines. Turing machines. Analysis of algorithms.
Computability. Correctness. lntroduction to translators and operating
systems.
SKI49 Software Practice 1
Six hours per week in semester one, followed by four
hours per week in semester two
A first year subject of the degree course in computer science.
This subject builds skills in team problem solving by studying the
following topics: the business environment; organisational structures
and systems; business communication; group dynamics; strategies
for group problem solving; software project conduct and
documentation; experience in small group projects.
SKI90 Computer Science 1 (Chemistry)
Five hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer-aided chemistry
and biochemistry and medical biophysics and instrumentation.
Programming in BASIC
A comprehensive study of a reasonably advanced version of BASIC
(example Turbo BASIC) including array and file handling. Problem
solving skills.
General Computer Technology
Computer concepts such as means of data representation,
assemblers, compilers, operating systems. Elementary computer
hardware.
SK204 Computer Science 2
Eight hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SKI04
A first-year subject of the degree course in computing.
Advanced Programming: dynamic data structures; packages; abstract
data types; generics; 110 models; exception handlinq.
lntroductlon to Database data structures for database appllcatcons.
relat~onal databases - normallsatlon. . SOL. . lntroductlon to database
design.
Format Specifications and Logic: set theory; propositional and
predicate calculus; use of mathematics to specify programs; the '2'
specification language.
SK210
Applied Computing Methods
Two hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Software tools: an introduction to the main software tools
encountered by environmental health spec~al~sts - lob command
languages, editors, word processors, spreadsheets, etc
Computer software: an introduction to the use of microsoft works.
illustrated by the use of case studies.
Computer hardware: an introduction to microlmini computer
hardware architecture including peripheral devices, communications,
sub-systems and current technology 110 systems (graphics, OCR).
SK290 Computing
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology major
In Applied Science.
lntroduction to the personal computer; introduction to programming
(e.g. BASIC or PASCAL).

SK341
Data Structures and Algorithms
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Data Structures and Algorithms: this unit pursues the goal of good
programming (correctness, flexibility, adaptability, portability, utility and
clarity) through the concepts of modularity and abstract data t)rpes.
Syllabus: common data structures, associated algorithms and
appllcatlons: stacks, queues, trees, blnary search trees, balancing;
heaps, sets; graphs; hash tables. Sortlng Algorithms. Flle organlsatlon.
SK342 UNIXIC
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science, and instrumentation and
computer science.
UNlX operating system: file management; special files, commands
and filters; electronic mail; pipes; aliases; history; structure of the
operating system; tools - lint, make, SCCS.
Shell Programming: the C shell; I10 indirection; pipes; history
mechanism; alias substitution; file name expansion; shell variables;
special characters; quoting; shell scripts; command line parameters;
foreach; if; shift; switch and while constructions; goto; break and
continue; expressions; use of shell variables; assignment; input and
output; environment; differences between Bourne and C shell.
C Programming: language overview; data types; operators; control of
flow; functions; pointers; pre-processor commands; structures and
unions; standard C libraries.
SK349 Software Practice 2
Six hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
This subject introduces techniques and strategies for the management
of medium to large scale software development projects. Students will
exercise these skills by working on several medium scale group
projects.
SK351
Systems Analysis
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Conventional structured systems analysis; Lancaster Soft Systems
Methodology.
SK352
Human-Computer Interface
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Human factors of interactive software; interactive devices: pointing
devices, speech recognition, digitisation and generation.
Theories, principles and guidelines of the human-computer interface;
presentation and navigation of information systems: data base systems
and map based diagrams; interactive design; testing and evaluation.
SK353
Data Base
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Database design concepts; relational, network, hierarchical and binary
models. Database languages, environment and administration.
SK441
Artificial Intelligence A
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the degree course in computer science.
Artificial Intelligence: a selection from the following topics: knowledge
representation, natural language processing, problem solving and
game playing: search, planning, goal manipulation. Rule-based
reasoning: production systems and expert systems. Knowledge processing
aspects of robotics: vision and other sensors, manipulation
and locomotion, reasoning about space, object interactions, time.
Mach~ne learning and self-modifying systems.
SK442
Artificial Intelligence Project
A second year subject of the degree course in computer science
(double major).
The completion of a project, generally related to the topics of SK441,
using the basic concepts of Al research.
SK451
Faculty of Applied Science
Software Engineering A - -
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computing and
instrumentation, maths and computer science, and computer science.
A study of the software life cycle; software development environments;
system and program design.
SK452
Commercial Systems
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Commercial systems: organisational information systems. Components
of corporate accounting systems.
Development of corporate accounting systems according to software
engineering principles.
SK453
COBOL Programming
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
maths and computer science.
COBOL: the use of COBOL language in the solution of typical commercial
problems: file update and report generation.
SK471
Computer Architecture A
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
This unit covers methods of computer design used to increase
performance, such as cache memory systems, bus organ~sation and
various CPU implementation methods. It includes an examination of
basic computer components available on the market.
SK504 Computer Science 5
Nine hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree courses in mathematics and
computer science and computing and instrumentation.
This subject is offered to students enrolled prior to 1989 and will consist
of a selection of units offered by the Computer Science Department.
SK541
Computer Organisation B -
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in computer science.
Computer Organisation 0: CPU components; CPU implementation;
interaction between the CPU and memory systems; Microcode programming;
Bus organisation.
SK542 Computer Graphics A
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree courses in computer science, maths
and computer science, computing and instrumentation.
Computer Graphics A: hardware for computer graphics; basic 2-13
graphics drawing; transformations; Data structures for graphics;
windowing and clipping.
SK543 Concurrent Programming
- -
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation.
A study of the logical problems of concurrency; mutual exclusion;
safety and liveness; mechanisms to control concurrency; semaphores;
monitors; shared memory and menage passing; the CSP model; concurrent
programming in Ada; concurrency in embedded systems.
SK549 Software Practice 3
Six hours per week in semester seven, followed by
nine hours per week in semester eight
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
This subject requires that students, working in large teams, undertake
a large scale software development project, preferably industrially
based. Software development, documentation and system evaluation
must be completed. The project will require students to exercise
advanced management and technical development skills.

SK551
Software Engineering B
Three hours per week for one semester
A th~rd-year subject of the degree course In mathemat~cs and computer
sclence and a fourthyear Subject of the degree course in computer
science.
Assessment is by tests and assignments.
This subject consists of lectures and tutorials studying software
Engineering principles and goals using Object Oriented techniques.
Object Oriented Software Construction: Object Oriented
methodologies for Programming, Systems Analysis and Systems
Design are investigated. In-depth examination is made to illustrate the
benefits of Object Oriented methods as applied to modern complex
software enaineerina - - tasks.
Eiffel Programm~ng: the E~ffel programming language and environment
IS explained; together w~th ~ts unlque benefits to Object Oriented Software
Construction.
SK552 Computing in the Human Context
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Computing in the Human Context: an exploration of social and organisational
issues and their relationship with the computing professional.
SK572 Computer Architecture B
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Computer Architecture B: a study is made of 32-bit micro-computer
based systems. It provides an in-depth examination of typical 32-bit
processors and examines the factors in designing systems using such
processors.
SK584 Translator Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Translator Engineering: an introduction to translation: introduction to
formal language theory, finite automata, lexical analysis, and the
parsing problem.
SK601
Trends in Computing
Thirty hours in one semester
Assessment is by tests and assignments
A fourth-year subject of the degree course for students majoring in
medical biophysics and instrumentation.
A study of some of the recent developments In the application of computer
science to the softwarelhardware interface. Topics will be
selected from the current literature and will include selections from
secure data communications and data encryption, software tools
supporting electronic circuit design such as silicon compilers, graphical
schematic data capture, circuit simulation, the programming of
programmable logic arrays and of parallel computers.
SK604 Computer Science 6
Nine hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree courses in mathematics and
computer science and computing and instrumentation.
Thls sublect is offered to students enrolled prior to 1989 and will conslst
of a select~on of unlts offered by the Computer Science Department.
SK641
Data Communications
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
An introduction to the terms and techniques used for computer-tocomputer
communication. Data link controls, physical aspects and
terminal based networks are covered. Distributed computer systems;
the electrical interference; local area networks; computer networks;
OSI - Open system Interconnect.
SK642
Artificial Intelligence B
Seven hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
A selection from: Connectionism and neural networks; knowledge
representation; natural language processing; problem solving and
game playing; search, planning, goal manipulation; rule-based
reasoning; production systems and expert systems; knowledge
processing aspects of robotics: vision and other sensors, manipulation
and locomotion, reasoning about space, object interactions, time;
machine learning and self-modifying systems.
SK643 Computer Graphics B
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
Computer Graphics B: baslc 3-D graphics drawing; projections; colour;
theory; lighting models; ray-tracing; radiosity; data representation;
animation.
SK671
Computer Architecture C
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computing and
~nstrumentation.
Computer Architecture C: A study is made of 32-bit micro-computer
based systems in this unit. It provides an in-depth examination of
typical 32-bit microprocessors and examines the factors in designing
systems using such processors.
SK673
Operating Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
This unit makes an in-depth study of one or more operating systems
such as UNIX. The objective is to investigate the structure of real
operating systems and the effect the structure has on programming
in the operating systems environment.
SK682
Systems Programming
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
This unit examines the software appropriate to systems programming
as distinguished from applications software such as operating system
commands, compilers, file management systems, security and user
management. Case studies are drawn from a particular operating
system such as UNIX where it is possible for students to access the
source code and alter parameters of the operating systems.
SK702
Selections from Computer Science
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
This unit introduces students to the current trends in computer science.
It is designed to be useful as a bridging unit or to allow more experienced
students to explore areas of computer science which they have
not covered in their undergraduate courses. Topics will be selected
from the following list:
1. Functional Programming
2. Artificial Intelligence
3. Computer Communications
4. Secure Data Exchange
5. Computer Architecture
SK704 Software Engineering
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A study of the problems confronting the software engineer in the
development of modern computer software:
- Software evolution models and lifecycles;
- Requirement Analysis;
Software Design;
- Implementation, testing and installation;
- Documentation standards;
- Workbench technologies.

SK705
Systems Programming
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
lntroduction to the C programming language and UNlX operating
system. Language overview, major control structures, data structures,
pre-processor commands, UNlX system interface and standard C
libraries. Low level 110 function calls, the stat structure and stat function
calls. Process control within UNIX. An overview of operating system.
Shell programming bascs, env~ronment ~nher~tance and the d~fferences
between the Bourne and Korn shells UNlX . Droarammlna - tools.
The role of the system administrator.
e.gI SCCS.
SK707
Imperative Programming
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A study of one or more programming languages and the related software
engineering practice. The selection of languages will include
Pascal, Modula-2, Ada or some other suitable language. Topics
covered include specification of problems, algorithm approaches and
program design methodologies, control of flow, data types and
structures, procedures and functions, packages, dynamic data
structures and file 110.
SK708
Database Design and
Implementation
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A study of database design methods, internal storage management,
mapping from the conceptual to the internal domain, query languages.
A study in depth of a number of current database management
systems for small to large scale applications will be made.
SK709 lntroduction to Artificial Intelligence
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
The course will consider the central problems in the field of artificial
intelligence and the concepts, tools and techniques used to solve
them. Topics will be chosen from the following list:
- programming for artificial intelligence - a language such as
PROLOG or LISP;
- knowledge representation;
solving problems by decomposition, search, etc.;
- control of the solving algorithms;
- logical inference.
SK710
Software Development Project
Fifty-six hours per semester for two semesters
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A series of lectures on software project management techniques will
be given. The student's major project will be started as early as
possible in the course and will be on an approved topic, preferably
industrially based. The pmject will be completed in semester four and
presented to the class and the assessment panel.
SK802
Expert Systems Programming
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the master of information technology.
Expert systems design. Construction of shells; available tools;
efficiency considerations.
SK803
Database Technology
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of Ine master of information technology. Semantic databases;
data models; E-R, RMn deductive databases, knowledge based
databases, discourse understanding, natural language semantics.
SK805
Faculty of Applied Science
Advanced Software Engineering
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the master of information technology.
A study of contemporary developments in software engineering.
Currently the emphasis is on object-oriented analysis, design and
programming methodologies.
SK806
Machine Learning
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the master of information technology.
An investigation of the symbolic and sub-symbolic (artiflc~al neural
nets) approaches to the production of sell-modilvina .-. svstems and
cognitive modelling.
SK807
System Analysis and Design
Methodology
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the master of information technology. The origins of
systems methodologies; systems paradigm-based approaches (SSM);
science paradigm-based approaches (SSADM); hybrid approaches
(Multiview); frame works for evaluating methodologies.
SK808
Human Computer Interaction
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the master of information technology.
Study of formal, cognitive and usability approaches to developing
effective human-computer interaction. Consideration is given to recent
advances in both the technology and methodology of HCI and its
theoretical underpinnings.
SK812
Project and Thesis
Two hundred and twenty-four hours over two semesters
A subject of the master of information technoloav. -,
Students will devote two semesters of the course to a major project
requiring the exerclse of advanced research and development sk~lls.
SM106 Mathematics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignment
A first-year subject in the degree course in psychology and
psychophysiology
Functions and graphs
Basic functions: polynomials of degree one (linear functions),
polynomials of degree two (quadratic functions), polynomials of degree
N z 2. Roots and factors of polynomials. Linear interpolation and
extrapolation. Fitting polynomials to data.
Functions for science: Exponential growth function, power series
representation of ex, approximations for small x. Index laws. Graph
of y = ex. Decay function. Hyperbolic functions. Fitting exponential
functions to data.
Trigonometric functions: Degrees and radius. Amplitude, period,
frequency, phase angle.
lnverse functions: composite functions. Logarithms. lnverse
tr~gonometric functions.
Other functions: the function f = Ilx. Limits and continuity, Quotients
of polynomials. Asymptotes.
Differentiation
Rates of change. Notation. Basic functions and their derivatives. Rules
of differentiation: Product rule, chain rule, quotient rule. Higher
derivatives. Stationary points: Maxima, minima, and points of inflexion.
Integration
Integrals as limits of sums. Evaluating integrals of basic functions.
Substitution methods. lntegration by parts.
First-order ordinary differential equations
Variables separable. Linear.
Matrices
Determinants. Inverses of matrices. Solution of simultaneous linear
equations.
Vectors
Components, addition, unit vector, position vectors. Scalar and vector
products.

Statistics
Mean and standard deviation. Linear regression in fitting functions
to data.
In this subject students learn to use a graphics calculator to solve
problems in functions, graphs, differentiation, matrices, vectors and
statistics.
Prescribed text:
Berry, J., Norcliffe, A. and Humble. S. lntroductorymathematics through
science applications. Melbourne: Cambr~dge University Press, 1989.
Prescribed calculators:
Texas Instruments Advanced Scientific TI-81 graphics calculator.
SM108 Mathematical Methods
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course In computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Vectors
Vectors in 2 and 3 dimensions. Dot and cross products of 2 vectors
in space and applications.
Numerical calculations
lntroduction to numerical methods. Errors and their propagation.
Numerical solution of equations by graphical and iterative methods.
Plane analytic geometry
Co-ordinate geometry in Cartesian co-ordinates; graphs of linear,
polynomial, rational and power functions and of conic sections.
Functions of one variable
Standard functions and their graphs. Finite and infinite limits;
continuity.
Calculus
Differentiation: geometric interpretation; derivatives of standard
functions; product, quotient and chain rules; implicit differentiation.
Applications of differentiation: graph sketching; related rates;
optimisation; differentials and approximations; Taylor polynomials;
L'Hopital's rule. Integration: definite and indefinite integrals and their
interpretations; integrals of standard functions; integration by
substitution and by parts; improper integrals systematic integration of
rational functions and of products of trigonometric functions. Numerical
integration. Applications of integration: areas, volumes, lengths of
curves and surface areas of surfaces of revolution; integrals of rates
of change.
SM110 Mathematical Methods
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Calculations
Reviews of basic mathematical operations; illustrations from
environmental and health applications. Use of electronic calculator.
Numerical methods
lntroduction to numerical methods: errors and their propagation,
including rounding errors and loss of significance. Solution of equations
in one variable; numerical solution of non-linear equations by
iterative methods (bisection, false position, secants, simple iteration,
Newton-Raphsonj.
Linear algebra
Matrices and matrix algebra; determinants and their evaluation.
Systems of linear equations: Gaussian elimination; matrix inversion;
procedures for numerical solution by direct or iterative methods.
Functions of one variable
Standard functions and their graphs. Transcendental functions: exponentlal,
logar~thmlc and naturgl logarithm functlons, trlgonometrlc and
Inverse trlaonometrlc functlons Curves deflned bv relations or
parametrically.
Calculus
Differentiation: geometric interpretation; derivatives of standard functions;
product, quotient and chain rules; implicit differentiation.
Appllcatlons of dlfferentlatlon graph sketching, uslng flrst and hlgher
order derlvatlves. related rated, ootlmlsatlon In flnlte closed Intervals
Integration: definite and indefinite integrals and their interpretations;
fundamental theorem; integrals of standard functions; integration by
substitution. Use of integral tables. Numerical integration (rectangle,
trapezium and Simpson's rules). Separable differential equations, with
or without initial values. Functions of several variables: partial derivatives;
maxima and minima.
SM126 Applied Statistics 1
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexaminat~on and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in mathematics in computer
science.
Data analysis
Numerical and graphical methods for summarising and presenting
data using various methods including frequency tables, stem-and-leaf
diagrams, box-and-whisker plots; measures of location and dispersion.
Measures of Association for two variables; correlation coefficients.
scatterplots.
lntroduction to probability
Definition and calculation of probabilities using the addition and
product rules; conditional probability, independent events. Random
variables and expected values.
Discrete probability distributions; uniform, geometric, binomial and
hypergeometric.
The MlNlTAB computer package will be used in this subject.
SM127 Mathematics 1
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexarnination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer science, and in
mathematics and computer science.
Numerical calculations
Simple calculations, including mathematics of finance (interest;
annuities, net present value; internal rate of return). lntroduction to
numerical methods. Errors and their propagation. Numerical solution
of equations by graphical and iterative methods.
Plane analytic geometry
Co-ordinate geometry in Cartesian co-ordinates; graphs of linear, polynomial,
rational and power functions and of conic sections.
Functions of one variable
Standard functions and their graphs. Finlte and infinite limits;
continuity.
Calculus
Differentiation: geometric interpretation; derivatives of standard functions;
product, quotient and chain rules; implicit differentiation.
Applications of differentiation: graph sketching; related rates;
optimisation; differentials and approximations; Taylor polynomials;
L'Hopital's rule.
Integration: definite and indefinite integrals and their interpretations;
integrals of standard functions; integration by substitution and by parts;
improper integrals; systematic in!agration of rational functions and of
products of trigonometric functions. Numerical integration.
Applications of integration: areas, volumes, lengths of curves and
surface areas of surfaces of revolution; integrals of rates of change.
SM214 Mathematical Methods
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SM108
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Linear algebra
Matrices, determinants and the solution of systems of linear equations.
First order differential equations
The solution of separable first order differential equations with
applications.
Functions of several variables
Partial differentiation; differentials and approximations; an introduction
to optimisation.
Descriptive statistics
Numerical and graphical methods for summarising and presenting
data. Cross-tabulation.
The MlNlTAB computer package is used in the statistical studies.
Probability
Probability and probability distributions such as binomial, Poisson and
normal.
Inferential statistics
Hypothesis tests and confidence intervals for means, proportions and
variances using the t, chi-square and F disributions

Regression and correlation
Scatterplots, the Pearson correlation coefficient, and linear least
squares regression for one predictor. Applications to analytical
chemistry.
SM225 Operations Research 2
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Methodolog
Development oroperations Research: inter-disciplinary team; in-house
OR teams; consultancy teams; methodology; role o! techniques;
application problems; problem formulation; model building; testing;
validating; design and data problems; implementation; OR literature;
OR societies.
lntroduction to linear programming
Formulation of linear orooramminq problems: qraphical solution of two
varlable problems. 'seis~tlv~t~ &ialysls, tr&sponat~on problems.
asslgnmenl problems Use of computer packages such as SASlOR
Inventory control
lnventory systems: economic order quantity; backorders; continuous
replenishment; quantity discount; safety stock under uncertainty.
Workshops
lntroduction to problem solving and mathematical modelling. Report
presentation: tabulation; graphical presentation of data.
SM226 Applied Statistics 2
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Applications of probability
Continuous orobab~l~lv dlstr~butlons. lncludlna exponentla1 and normal.
expected values of continuous random vazablks; applications.
Statistical inference
Drawing random samples from finite and infinite populations.
The sampling distributions t and chi-square: their use in hypothesis
testing and estimation of means, proportions and variance. Examples
of non-parametric hypothesis tests.
The MlNlTAB computer package will be used in this subject.
SM227 Mathematics 2
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Matrix algebra
Matrices and matrix algebra: determinants. Systems of linear
equations; Cramer's rule; Jordan and Gaussian elimination; matrix
inversion; procedures for numerical solution by direct and iterative
methods.
2D polar co-ordinates
Definitions: graphs of equations; transformation to and from Cartesian
co-ordinates; curve length and area.
Vectors and geometry
2D vectors: dot-product and resolution; parametric equations of 2D
curves; vector differentiation.
3D space: Cartesian and polar co-ordinates; simple surfaces and
curves in space.
3D vectors: dot and cross-products; vector equations of lines and
planes; parametric equations of 3D curves.
Functions of many variables
Graphs of surfaces as functions of two or three variables: partial differentiation
and applications; directional derivatives and gradients;
tangent planes to surfaces; differentials and approximations; optimisation
and applications.
Faculty of Applied Science
SM240 Applied Statistics and Linear
Algebra
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course In computer science.
Applied statistics
Topics to be chosen from:
Exploratory Data Analysis: numerical and graphical methods for
summarising and presenting data. Measures of association for two
variables using Pearson and Spearman correlation coefficients; scatterplots.
Straight line fits to data; residuals; outliners.
Probability: definition and calculation of probabilities using the addition
and product rules; conditional probability, independent events.
Applications: probability distributions including binomial, Poisson,
hypergeometric, exponential, normal; expected values of random
variables and applications.
Statistical inference: drawing random samples from finite and Infinite
populations. The sampling distributions t and chi-square; their uses,
the MlNlTAB computer package.
Linear Algebra:
Matrices and matrix algebra: determinants. Systems of linear
equations; Cramer's rule; Jordan and Gaussian elimination; matrix
inversion; procedures for numerical solution by direct and iterative
methods.
SM325 Operations Research 3
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment and examination
A second-year subject of the degree course In mathematics and
computer science.
Network analysis
Introduction; history; areas of application; network construction; event
time and activity time analysis - slacks and floats; cost analysis; monitoring
and control; resource allocation; alternative forms of networks;
problems of data collection; practical applications.
Simulation
General philosophy; model construction; generation of random variables;
validation of simulation output; sensitivity analysis; variance
reduction techniques; application of simulation to different models such
as queueing and inventory.
Forecasting
Role of forecasting in decision-making; forecasting techniques; selecting
the forecasting techniques; smoothing techniques; simple
moving average; exponential smoothing; higher forms of smoothing;
seasonal exponential smoothing; casual methods; forecasting with
adaptive filtering; decomposition method of time series forecast~ng.
SM326 Applied Statistics 3
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and
computer science.
Statistical inference
Hypothesis testing and estimation: type I and type II errors and the
power of an hypothesis test. The F distribution and applications. Contingency
tables and goodness-of-fit tests.
Regression and correlation
Linear regression for both linear and non-linear equations. Model
assumptions and how to check them. The method of least squares.
Parameter and prediction estimates, and confidence intervals for both.
Applications to scientific and economic data.
Correlation, including tests of significance.
The MlNlTAB package will be used in this subject.

SM327 Mathematics 3
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by
and assignments
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Ordinary differential equations
General and particular solutions. First order equations of separable
and linear types. Second order linear equations with constant
Case Studies
The students working in groups tackle an unstructured case study
related to a practical situation. The case studies used are drawn from
consulting activities conducted by Operations Researchers and have
been carefully modified for student use. An oral preliminary report on
each groups' progress towards a solution is expected. Before the end
of the semester both om1 and written reports on their proposed solution
are presented'
coefficients. Applications. Numerical methods of solution. SM426 Applied Statistics 4
Complex numbers
Definition and arithmetic; polar forms; solution of polynomial equations.
Linear algebra
Linear dependence of vectors; vector spaces, subspaces and bases;
inner product. Matrices: rank; equivalence; nullspace and range.
Square matrices: eigenvalues and eigenvectors; similarity of simple
matrices; real symmetric matrices; applications including quadratic
forms.
Combinatorial analysis
Systematic techniques of listing and of counting for arrangements,
selections, partitions, etc.
Sequences and series
Definition of a sequence; limits; types of divergent behaviour. Infinite
series: some simple testsof convergence; properties of power series.
Series solution of ordinary differential equations.
SM404 Project Management A
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by tests, assignments, oral presentations Some Of estimation
and participation in tutorial ,.lasses and project teams.
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and
computer science.
The analysis of variance
Revision of inference for two independent groups. The analysis of variance
for single-factor, completely randomised designs, randomised
blocks, and two-factor equally replicated designs. Non-parametric
methods ~ncluding Kruskal-Wallis, Fr~edman and Kendall's coefficient
of concordance.
Multiple linear regression
Review of linear regression with one predictor. The linear model with
several predictors. Assumptions for ordinary least squares. Methods
for checking the assumptions, including normal probability plots, resi.
dual plots, the lack-of-fit test and the ~urbin- ats son test for autocorrelation.
Outliers.
Variable selection techniques and model building. The use of dummy
variables. The problem of multicollinearity.
Point and interval estimators. Properties of estimators. lntroduction to
the method of maximum likelihood.
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and ~h~ MINITAB package be used in this subject.
computer science.
Applied researchiproject management SM427 Mathematics 4
Project characteristics: project stages; project management and the
project leader; responsibilities of the project leader; project planning;
determination of tasks; scheduling tasks; development of project plan;
monitoring and control of project; benefits of
when to use project management; senior management's
responsibilities, the project leader and the project team. Guest
speakers and management games may be used. Tutorial classes will
be based on experiential exercises in organisational behaviour.
Internal project
Students, working in groups of 3 or 4, will be required to undertake
a project for a member of staff. Each group will be totally responsible
for managing the project and for bringing it to a successful conclusion.
They will be expected to maintain team meeting notes, barcharts,
etc., and to provide each staff member with suitable progress reports.
In addition, they will be expected to obtain formal approval for the work
that they are undertaking from the appropriate staff member. In short,
they will be expected to manage the project along the lines of the topics
SM425 Operations Research 4
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment, oral presentation and
examination
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testdexamination and assignments
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and com-
Puter science.
Multidimensional space
Real ndimensional space: subspaces, hyperplanes and convex sets.
Inner product: resolution; distance between points; open, closed,
bounded sets; limits of sequences. Functions, limits and continuity.
~i~~~~ functions
Matrix form: geometry of linear transformations. Canonical forms, defi
n i teness , etc.
Non-linear analysis
Differentiability: Jacobian; change of basis. Real functions: Taylor
expansion; extreme points and Hessian. Implicit function theorem.
~ ~ i ~ ~ ? $ Use ~ of i substitution ~ $ and ~ inte- ~
grating factors. Existence of solutions: graphical interpretation; singular
~ ~ ~ ~
points and solutions. Higher order equations: reduction of order, linear
equations. Applications. Introduction to Laplace transforms; application
to solving differential equations.
Difference equations
Equations of first and second order: linear equations with constant
coefficients; applications; numerical techniques.
A second-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Linear programmin
SM504 Project Management B
Simplex method: Big, 3 method; two phase method; duality; dual
Two hours per week for one semester
simplex method; sensltlvity; revised simplex techniques; bounded var-
Assessment by tests, assignments, written and oral
iables; industrial applications. Use of computer packages such as
project reports, participation in tutorial classes and
SASIOR.
project teams
Classical optimi~ation
A third-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and com-
Types of mathematical programming (optimisation) problems: global puter science.
and local optimal values; types of solutions; non-linear optimisation.
unconstrained optimisation; constrained optimisation; method oi
Applied researchiproject management
Lagrange multipliers; Kuhn-Tucker theorem; numerical techniques;
Further topics in the theory and practice of project management: decsearch
gradients; Quasi-Newton; penalty functions; sensitivity analysis,
ision-making; types of decisions; how to make decisions.
Guest speakers from industry may be used. Tutorial classes are based
Markov chains and queueing theory
on further experiential exercises in organisational behaviour following
Definitions of stochastic processes, Markov chains: transition matrix; on from Project Management A.
steady state; absorbing chains; applications in decision-making.
Queueing theory: transient and steady state; general Markov model
introduction marketing
queueing mdels);
Students usually working in groups, prepare and present a marketing
formulae; single server; multiple
server; self service; limited capacity, limited population; general service
Strategy for a
player in a 'pecific market.
times; network of queueing systems; application of simulation in
queueing systems; practical applications; use of a computer package.
74

SM519 Mathematical Methods
Three hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SM3400 or SM3415
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Complex Analysis
Algebra and geometry of complex numbers, functions of a complex
variable, Cauchy-Riemann equations. Cauchy's integral and residue
theorems. Evaluation of real definite integrals.
Calculus of variations
Simple variational principles, Euler-Lagrange equation, with
applications.
Orthogonal functions
Properties and applications.
Stochastic processes
Review of probability, Markov chains. Poisson processes, branching
processes. Birth-death processes, Chapman-Kolmogorov equations.
Simple queueing processes. Steady state probabilities.
Prescribed text
Derrick, WR. Complex Analysis and Applications. 2nd edn, Belmont:
Wadsworth, 1984.
SM525 Operations Research 5
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination, assignment, oral
presentation and project reports.
A third-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Dynamic programming
lntroduction to dynamic optimisation: recursive algorithm;
computational procedures; forward and backward computations;
stochastic problems; final value problems; infinite horizon problems;
the problem of dimensionality; applications and case studies. Use of
computer packages such as PROPS.
Advanced forecasting
The BoxJenkins methodology, differencing of time series, sample
autocorrelation and sample partial autocorrelation (SAC and SPAC),
checking stationarity of time series using SAC and SPAC,
autoregressive models; moving average models; general ARMA
models, autoregressive integrated moving average models (ARIMA),
general ARIMA with seasonality, use of computer packages such as
SASIETS.
Financial modelling
General financial modelling: consolidations; financial statement
summaries; alternative decisions; capital investment techniques; multivarlate
statistics; discounted cash flow, linear programming, corporate
modellina. comDuter ao~roach. how models are acau~red, broad
quidelines ordevel6pment'; cost of development; preparing business
plans; factors costs depend on; cond~t~ons for successful development;
case studies. Use of comDuter . oackaaes - such as FORESIGHT,
LOTUS.
Industrial project
The students, working in groups and supervised by a staff member
who will act as a team leader, normally undertake a consultancy project
for organisations outside the institute (e.g. hospitals, industry, state
bodies, etc.). Each group is expected to present planned progress
reports on their project. At the conclusion of the project both oral and
written reports are given to the clients.
SM526 Applied Statistics 5
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A third-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Sampling methods for Sample Surveys
The basic designs for sample surveys: simple random sampling, stratified
sampling, systematic sampling and cluster sampling.
Estimators for means, totals and proportions; variance estimation. The
design effect; sample size determination; EPSEM samples. Practical
issues and methods: questionnaire design; pilot surveys; mail,
interviewer-based and telephone surveys.
lntroduction to multivariate methods
An informal introduction to sampling from multivariate populations. The
variancecovariance matrix, the multivariate normal distribution, multivariate
means, Hotelling's T2 statistic, the multivariate analysis of
variance. Wilk's lambda.
Faculty of Applied Science
SM608 Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of industry based learning occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science. Students are supervised by a member of the academic staff
and are required to submit a report to their employer and to their
supervisor.
SM609 Special Project
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by written and oral presentations
A fourth year subject of the degree course in mathematics and
computer science. Students work in groups on an industrial or research
based project.
SM625 Operations Research 6
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments, examination, oral
presentation and project reports
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and
computer science.
Inventory control
Probabilistic models; re-order point models with stochastic demand;
periodic review models with stochastic demand; single period models;
dvnamic inventorv models: simulation aooroach: MRP aDDr0ach: JIT
~rhentory system& computer packages, '~ndustr~al applidat~ons
Replacement theory
Hekvant cost In replacement models; cost equation; discounted cash
flow techniaues; replacement of items that fail, mortal~t~ curves; conditional
probability of failure; group replacement; cost of replacement;
minimisation of costs; network solutions; other models.
Scheduling
The job-shop-process; classification of scheduling problems;
measures for schedule evaluation; finite sequencing for a single
machine; flow-shop scheduling; general nlm job-shop problems;
applications; working with computer packages such as SASIOR.
Mathematical programming
Branch and bound algorithm; applications in integer programming;
other optimisation techniques such as separable and quadratic
programming and heuristics may be discussed; industrial applications;
use of computer packages.
Industrial project
The students, working in groups and Supe~ised by a staff member
who will act as team leader, normally undertake a consulting project
for organisations outside the institute (e.g. hospitals, industry, state
bodies, etc.). Each group is expected to present planned progress
reports on their project. At the conclusion of the project both oral and
written reports are given to the clients.
Seminars
Throughout the semester the students will be given the opportunity
to present semlnars and to partlclpate In sem~nars presented by practloners
from busmess and Industry
SM626 Applied Statistics 6
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science.
Sample Surveys
Ratio estimation, sampling unequal clusters, PPS sampling, cluster
homogeneity, weighting, non-sampling error.
Topics in Applied Statistics
A selection of two or three topics will be made from a range of current
statistical methods, such as statistical quality control, multivariate
methods, econometric methods and design and analysis of
experiments.
SM632 Social Change in the Modern World
Two hours per week
The course w~ll consider the rap~d nature of social change in modern
industrial societv. Attent~on will be aiven to the alterations which this
brings about ii patterns of cultu6, social structure and in social
behaviour.

SM708 lndustry Based Learning
A six-month period of industry based learning occurring as part of the
fourth year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science. Students are supervised by a member of the academic staff
and are required to submit a report to their employer and to their
supervisor.
SM721 Introduction to Operations Research
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 1 of the graduate diploma of appl~ed science
(operations research)
The subject will cover operations research methodology and the interdisciplinary
approach. In addition, the practical aspects of mathematical
modelling will be illustrated by guest lecturers, society meetings,
case studies from the literature and practical exercises. Examples will
be drawn from trad~tional operattons research techniques such as
simulation and mathematical information technology, as well as
modern developments in Information technology such as decislon
support systems and artificial intelligence.
SM722 Stochastic Methods in Operations
Research 1
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 1 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(operations research)
Probability: laws of probabllity; conditional probability; random
variables and the basic probability distributions (geometric, binomial,
poisson, negative exponential, normal); expected values.
Statistics: description data analysis and presentation using summary
statistics and graphical methods. The basic methods of Exploratory
Data Analysis will be emphasised. The baslc ideas of hypothesis
testing, including the sampling distributions t. Chi-square and F. Point
and interval estimation. The above will be applied to quality control,
simulatior~ and other OR techniques. Appropriate packages will be
lntroduced such as MINITAB, SAS, LOTUS and Harvard Presentation
Graphics.
SM723 Mathematical Programming
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 2 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(operations research)
L~near and integer programming: the simplex method and its variations,
sens~tivity analysis, transportation and assignment methods,
cuttlng plane techniques, branch and bound methods.
Dynamic programming: introduction to dynamic optimisation of determlnistic
and stochastic models, recurrence relationships.
Mathematical optimisation: the non-linear programming, problem,
brush-Kuhn-Tucker theorem, sensitivity analysis. Selected zero, first
and second order numerical techniques and the use of appropriate
software; applications in engineering and economics.
Appropriate computer packages such as SASlOR will be used to assist
in the analysis of realistic problems.
SM724 Stochastic Methods in Operations
Research 2
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 2 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(ooerations research)
Des~gn and analysls of experiments. an ~nlroduct~on to the bas~c
of ex~er~mental des~an ~nclud~na - factorlal des~ans w~th Interact~on. the
anal;sis of variance':
Statistical modelling: univariate and multivariate linear models using
regression analysis; step-wlse methods; the problems and pitfalls of
using regression analysis in practice.
Sample surveys: basic methods of survey design including stratified
sampl~ng and cluster sampling, questionnaire design, survey and
census methods.
Computer packages such as Minitab, SAS and SIWCENSUS will be
used throughout the subject to apply the techniques to realistic OR
appl~catlons.
SM725 Project Management
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 3 of the graduate diploma of appl~ed science
(operations research)
The activities involved in the management of projects: preparation of
proposals and reports; pre-feaslbillty and feasibility studies; forward
planning, deta~led planning; project control, reporting; elements of
organisational theory and behaviour. Operations Research techniques
such as critical path method and project evaluat~on and review
techniques will be introduced. Computer packages such as SASIOR,
NETCODE and Harvard Project Manager may be used.
Students will commence work on their major industr~al project by preparing
proposals, pre-feasibility and feasibility studies. In thls section
students will work in small groups under the limited supervision of a
member of staff. Additional projects may be used for practice at other
aspects of project management.
SM726 Operations Research in lndustry 1
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 3 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(operations research)
Forecasting: an introduction to the philosophy of multi-line forecasting;
the AIBIC analvsis of oroduct lines: classical decom~osltlon and
exponential smoothing as applied tostock movements. the aggregation
of product data; the selection of forecasting packages to meet
the objectives of stock management.
lnventory models: Economic Order Quantity; inventory models under
uncertainty; purchasing models; techniques applicable to a manufacturing
environment, such as MRP and Just In Time; computerised
inventory models will be discussed and some packages may be
lntroduced.
Distribution: Travelling Salesman problem; warehouse location; vehicle
fleet composttion. Inventory ramifications.
SM727 Operations Research in lndustry 2
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 4 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(operations research
Scheduling: the job-shop process; measures for schedule evaluation;
flow-shop scheduling; general nlm job-shop problem.
Replacement theory: replacement of items that deteriorate;
preventative maintenance policies; group replacement policies; life
curves; conditional probab~lity of failure.
Production planning: development of a production plan using sales
forecasts; evaluating resource requirements and resource availabilities;
the impact of inventory; cost minimisation.
Computer packages will be used where possible, for example In
computer simulationlvisual interactive modelling.
SM728 Major Project
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of semester 4 of the graduate diploma of applied science
(operations research)
Students, working in groups under the limited supervision of a member
of staff, will undertake a consultancy project for an industr~al client.
Each group is expected to present progress reports on its project. At
the conclusion of the semester both oral and written reports will be
given to the client.
Ideas
SM731 introductory Methods
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate d~ploma of appl~ed sclence (soc~al statlst~cs)
Thls subject prov~destudents w~th the bas~c statlstlcal, quant~tattve
and computer skllls to prov~de them w~th a sound foundat~on for the
remalnlng subjects In the course
SM732 Survey Research Methods
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate d~ploma of appl~ed sclence (soc~al statlstlcs)
The alm of thls subject IS to prov~de an overvlew of the methodologies
used In survey research It w~ll Include toplcs chosen from sampllng
methods, data collection methods, lntervlewlng techn~ques
questlonnatre des~gn, data processing and soc~alnd~cators

SM733 Demographic Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (social statistics)
This course has been designed to introduce students to the methods
of measuring demographic processes, and to develop an awareness
of the implications of demographics in the business and social environment.
The subject will introduce students to the sources of demographic
data, examine methods for measuring fertility, mortality and
migration, and examine methods for obtaining population estimates
and projections. A feature of this course will be the accessing of census
data uslng compact disk technology.
SM734 Computer Packages 1
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (social statistics)
This subject aims to develop students' competence in the use of
computer systems in order to use statistical, data-base and graphics
packages. Packages included will be chosen from SPSS/PC+, LOTUS
123, MINITAB and other relevant packages.
SM735 Survey Sampling
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (social statistics)
This subject aims to introduce the theory and practice of sampling
methods for social surveys. It will include probability and nonprobability
sampling methods, estimation methods and methods for
handling non-response.
SM736 Computer Packages 2
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (social statistics).
This subject aims to extend the work done in Computer Packages 1.
Particular emphasis will be placed on the SAS system and dBASE.
Graphics packages may be discussed.
SM737 Multivariate Analysis
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the graudate diploma of applied science (social statistics)
Thls subject alms to prov~de students w~th a non-mathemat~cal Introduct~on
to a number of multlvar~ate stat~stlcal methods and the11
applications.
SM738 Applied Project
Four hours per week for one semester
A subiect of the graduate diploma of applied science (social statistics).
Thls subject takes students through all stages of a research project
At the comolet~on of the orolect. students will awe - a . oresentatlon describing
the' project and ihe'results.
SM1200 Mathematical Methods
Four hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Vectors
Vectors in 2 and 3 dimensions. Dot and cross products of 2 vectors
in space and applications.
Numerical calculations
lntroduction to numerical methods. Errors and their propagation.
Numerical solution of equations by graphical and iterative methods.
Plane analytic geometry
Co-ordinate geometry in Cartesian co-ordinates; graphs of linear,
polynomial, rational and power functions and of conic sections.
Functions of one variable
Standard functions and their graphs. Finite and infinite limits;
continuity.
Calculus
Differentiation: geometric interpretation; derivatives of standard
functions; product, quotient and chain rules; implicit differentiation.
Applications of differentiation: graph sketching; related rates;
optimisation; differentials and approximations; Taylor polynomials;
CHopital's rule.
Faculty of Applied Science
lntegratlon defln~te and lndefln~te ~ntegrals and the~r Interpretatlons.
lntearals of standard funct~ons. lntearatlon bv subst~tut~on and by parts.
imi;oper integrals; systematic integration of rational functionsand of
products of trigonometric functions. Numerical integration.
Applications of integration: areas, volumes, lengths of curves and
surface areas of surfaces of revolution; integrals of rates of change.
2D polar co-ordinates
Definitions: Graphs of equations; transformation to and from Cartesian
co-ordinates.
Complex numbers
Definition and arithmetic: polar form; de Moivre's theorem and
exponential notation.
Ordinary differential equations
General and oartlcular solut~ons Flrst order eauatlons of separable.
linear and homogeneous types. Second order'linear equations with
constant coefficients. Applications. Numerical methods of solution.
Vector functions
Calculus of vector functions of one variable with application to
displacement, veloc~ty and accelerat~on and to mechanics Equat~ons
to llnes and olanes. arad~ent - of a scalar flela, d~rect~onal derlvatlve
Functions of many variables
Part~al differentiation and applications: differentials and
approximations; optimisation and applications (including least squares)
with first and second derivative tests.
Data presentation and analysis
Frequency distributions: tabulation; graphical presentation; measures
of central tendency and of dispersion; measures of association.
Probability
Definitions and concepts of probability: calculation using addition and
product-rules; conditional probability and independence.
Probability distributions: discrete variates, including binomial, Poisson
and hypergeometric distributions; continuous variates, including
normal distribution; mean and variance.
lntroduction to hypothesis tests and confidence intervals for means
and correlation coefficients using the t distribution.
SM1215 Mathematical Methods
Four hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by testslexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Vectors
Vectors in 2 and 3 dimensions. Dot and cross products of 2 vectors
in space and applications.
Numerical calculations
lntroduction to numerical methods. Errors and their propagation.
Numerical solution of equations by graphical and iterative methods.
Plane analytic geometry
Co-ordinate geometry in Cartesian co-ordinates; graphs of linear,
polynomial, rational and power functions and of conic sections.
Functions of one variable
Standard functions and their graphs. Finite and infinite limits;
continuity.
Calculus
Differentiation: geometric interpretation; derivatives of standard
functions; product quotient and chain rules; implicit differenttation.
Applications of differentiation: graph sketching; related rates;
optimisation; differentials and approximations; Taylor polynomials;
CHopital's rule.
Integration: definite and indefinite integrals and their interpretations;
integrals of standard functions; integration by substitution and by parts;
improper integrals; systematic integration of rational functions and of
oroducts of trigonometric - functions. Numerical intearation. -
Applications of integration: areas, volumes, lengths of curves and
surface areas of surfaces of revolution; integrals of rates of change.
2D polar co-ordinates
Definitions: Graphs of equations; transformation to and from Cartesian
co-ordinates.
Complex numbers
Definition and arithmetic: polar form; de Moivre's theorem and
exponential notation.
Ordinary differential equations
General and particular solutions. First order equations of separable,
linear and homogeneous types. Second order linear equations with
constant coefficients. Applications. Numerical methods of solution.

Vector functions
Calculus of vector functions of one variable with application to
displacement, velocity and acceleration and to mechanics. Equations
to lines and planes, gradient of a scalar field, directional derivative.
Functions of many variables
Partial differentiation and applications: differentials and
approximations; optimisation and applications (including least squares)
with first and second derivative tests.
Data presentation and analysis
~requ6nc~ dlstrlbutlons tabulatlon, graphical presentatlon, measures
of central tendency and of dlspers~on, measures of assoclatlon
Probability
Definitions and concepts of probability: calculation using addition and
product-rules; conditional probability and independence.
Probability distributions: discrete variates, including binomial, Poisson
and hypergeometric distributions; continuous variates, including
normal distribution; mean and variance.
lntroduction to hypothesis tests and confidence intervals for means
and correlation coefficients using the t distribution.
SM2100 Applied Statistics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by testdexamination and assignments
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
lntroduction to health statistics: morbidity and mortality, vital statistics,
standardisation, life tables.
Probability: concepts and basic formulas. Probability distributions:
discrete. includinq binomial and Poisson; continuous, including normal.
sampling distribitions of mean, variance and proportion. -
Estimation of means, variances and proportions from single samples.
Tests of hypotheses in means, variances and proportions; comparisons
of two groups and of several groups (analysis of vartance). lntroduct~on
to experimental destgn Chl-squared tests on goodness of flt.
Correlation and regression. Selected non-parametric methods.
lntroduction to epidemiology: types of study; measures of risk and of
association
SM3400 Mathematical Methods
Three hours per week for one year
Assessment by testdexaminations and assignments
Prerequisite: SM1200 or SM1215
A second-year subject of the degree course in instrumentation
and computer science
Linear algebra and vectors
Matrices and matrix algebra. Systems of linear equations: Guassian
elimination; procedures for numerical solution by direct or iterative
methods, (Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel), transformation matrices.
Real analysis
Partial differenttation, chain rule, approximations. Application to
maximum and minimum problems constrained optima and Lagrange
multipliers. Change of variable. Multiple integrals. Applications of
single, double and triple integrals. Jacobians. Surface integrals. Fourier
series of general periodic functions. Laplace transforms. Use of tables.
Partial differential equations, solution via separation of variables
(Fourier series).
Vector analysis
Basic vector manipulation including calculus of vector functions. Space
curves, Serret-Frenet formulas. Special emphasis on gradient of a
scalar field, directional derivative, divergence and curl of a vector field.
Line, surface and volume integrals. Field theory.
Complex analysis
Algebra and geometry of complex numbers. Functions of a complex
variable. Elementary functions such as polynomial, exponential,
trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithm and power. Differentiability and
Cauchy-Reimann equations. Harmonic functions. Contour integration,
Cauchy integral and residue theorems. Evaluation of definite integrals.
Conformal mapping and applications.
Random processes
Review of probability, Markov chains, Poisson processes, birth-death
processes. Chapman-Kolmogorov equations. Steady state
probabilities. Simple queueing processes.
Modern algebra with applications
Groups, rings fields (including Galois fields). Vector spaces,
polynomials with binaly coefficients. Linear block codes, parity check
matrices and standard arrays. Cyclic codes, generator polynomials.
Hamming codes.
Prescribed text:
Semesters 1 and 2
Boas. M.L. Mathematical methods in physical sciences. 2nd edn,
Brisbane: Wiley, 1983.
Semester 2 only
Hill. R.A. First course in coding theory. Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1990.
SM3415 Mathematical Methods
Three hours per week for one year
Assessment by tests/examinations and assignments
Prerequisite: SM1200 or SM1215
A second-year subject of the degree course in instrumentation
and computer science
Linear algebra and vectors
Matrices and matrix algebra. Systems of linear equations: Guassian
elimination; procedures for numerical solution by direct or iterative
methods, (Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel), transformation matrices.
Real analysis
Partial differentiation, chain rule, approximations. Application to
maximum and minimum problems constrained optima and Lagrange
multipliers. Change of variable. Multiple integrals. Applications of
single, double and triple integrals. Jacobians. Surface integrals. Fourier
series of general periodic functions. Laplace transforms. Use of tables.
Partial differential equations, solution via separation of variables
(Fourier series).
Vector analysis
Basic vector manipulation including calculus of vector functions. Space
curves, Serret-Frenet formulas. Special emphasis on gradient of a
scalar field, directional derivative, divergence and curl of a vector field.
Line, surface and volume integrals. Field theory.
Complex analysis
Algebra and geometry of complex numbers. Functions of a complex
variable. Elementary functions such as polynomial, exponential,
trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithm and power. Differentiability and
Cauchy-Reimann equations. Harmonic functions. Contour integration,
Cauchy integral and residue theorems. Evaluation of definite integrals.
Conformal mapping and applications.
Random processes
Review of probability, Markov chains. Poisson processes, birth-death
processes, Chapman-Kolmogorov equations. Steady state
probabilities. Simple queueing processes.
Modern algebra with applications
Groups, rlngs fields (including Galois fields). Vector spaces,
polynomials with binary coefficients. Linear block codes, parity check
matrices and standard arrays. Cyclic codes, generator polynomials.
Hamming codes.
Prescribed text:
Semesters 1 and 2
Boas, M.L. Mathematical methods in physical sciences. 2nd edn,
Brisbane: Wiley, 1983.
Semester 2 only
Hill, R.A. First course in coding theory. Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1990.
SP106 Physics
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A first-year subject of the degree courses in applied science except
environmental health.
Motion and forces: relativistic kinematics and dynamics, rotational
kinematics and dynamics, gravitation.
Thermal physics: thermometry, conduction, radiation, gas laws, kinetic
theory, thermodynamics.
Optical systems: optical instruments, optics of human vision, polarized
light, birefringence, optical communications, fibre optics.
Atomic and nuclear physics: photoelectric effect, photon-electron
interactions, De Broglie waves, forces between nucleons, nuclear
binding energies, radioactive decay, nuclear reactions.
DC circuits: electrical quantities and circuits, capacitance.

SP107
Physics
Nine hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A f~rst-year subject of the degree course In med~cal b~ophys~cs and
lnstrumentat~on and comDutlnq and lnstrumentatlon taken by students
who have not reached year 72 Physics standard.
Motion and forces: relativistic kinematics and dynamics, rotational
kinematics and dynamics, gravitation.
Thermal physics: therometry, conduction, radiation, gas laws, kinetic
theory, thermodynamics.
Optical systems: optical instruments, optics of human vision, polarized
light, birefringence, optical communications, fibre optics.
Atomic and nuclear physics, photoelectric effect, photonelectron interactions,
De Broglie waves, forces between nucleons, nuclear binding
energies, radioactive decay, nuclear reactions.
DC circuits: electrical quantities and circuits, capacitance.
SP108
Physics
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry taken by students who have not
reached Year 12 physics standard.
Forces and Energy: kinematics, linear and circular dynamics,
gravitation, kinetic theory, heat, basic thermodynamics.
Modern Physics: atomic structure, radioactivity, quantum theory,
special relativity.
Electricity and Magnetism: magnetic and electric fields, Coulomb's
Law, electromagnetic induction - Lenz and Faraday laws, cathode
ray tube, potentiometer, basic circuits.
Light and waves: reflection, refraction, interference, electro-magnetic
waves.
SP121
Physical Science
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and examination
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Matter
Liquids - density, pressure, evaporation, buoyancy, surface tension,
capilarity. Bernoulli's principle, viscosity. Gases - ideal gas,
temperature, kinetic theory, speed distribution, expansion of solids.
Heat - calorimetry, Heat transmission. Solids - elasticity, Hooke's
Law, elastic moduli.
Electricity and Magnetism: charge, Coulomb's Law, electric field.
potential difference, current, Ohms Law, E.M.F.. resistance.
capacitance, magnets and magnetic fields, magnetic effects of
currents, D.C. meters, electromagnetic induction, Faraday's Law,
transformers.
Acoustics: S.H.M., damped and forced vibrations, wave motion, energy
in waves, standing waves, sound, beats, shock waves, intensity, sound
levels, human ear, dBA scale, introduction to noise.
SP135
Monitoring Instrumentation
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major in Applied Science.
Introduction to Electricity. DC Voltage, current, resistance, batteries,
voltmeters, ammeters, AC and power supplies, Cathode Ray
Oscilloscope.
Introductory Optics. Thin lenses, focal length, imaging, magnification,
the eye, glasses. Use of opthalmoscope.
Biological Transducers. Strain gauge, Infrared transmission,
microphone, loud speaker. Examples: measuring muscle strain, blood
flow etc.
SP206
Faculty of Applied Science
Instrumental Science
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work and examination
An opt~onal f~rst-year subject of the degree course In computer-a~ded
chem~strv and com~uter-alded b~ochem~strv
An introduction to the principles of measurement and instrumentation.
An introduction to analogue systems: circuits based on the semi-conductor
diode and the ideal operation amplifier.
SP209 Physics 2
SIX hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A first-year subject of the degree courses for students majoring in
medical biophysics and instrumentation.
Vibrations and waves: elastic moduli, waves in solids and fluids,
standing waves, sound characteristics, intensity of sound. Doppler
effect, physics of hearing, acoustics.
Electricity and magnetism: electric fields, Gauss' Law, electric
potential, energy density of the electric field, magnetic fields, Biot-
Savart Law, Ampere's Law, inductance, AC circuits, displacement
current.
Atom~c and nuclear physics alpha particle scattering. Bohr theory,
Paull exclusion Drlncl~le. al~ha, beta and aamma - decav of reactions.
detectors, acceieratois. '
SP220 Instrumental Science 2
Two hours per week for semester two
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Topics studied will include:
- further DC circuits;
- AC circuits;
- further optics - lenses, interference, diffraction etc.
SP221
Physics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work and examination
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Radiation:
electromagnetic spectrum - introductory physics of microwaves,
U.V. and electromagnetic radiation.
atomic structure - H spectrum, H atom, X-rays, thermionic and
photo-electric emission.
nuclear structure - binding energy, radioactivity, nuclear reaction
and nuclear-radiation, tracer techniques, radiation measurements.
Dangers of radiation.
Optics and images: mirrors, lenses, optical instruments, light, intensity
and luminous flux.
Lasers: basic principles and application to measurement of flow rate
and particle density.
Transducers: mechanical and electrical devices with applications.
SP222 Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of work experience occurring as part of the second
year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied Science
(Medical Biophysics and Instrumentation). Students are supervised
by a member of the academic staff and are required to submit a report
to their employer and to their supervisor.
SP231
Monitoring Technology
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major in Applied Science.
Wave Theory: Standing waves, transmission, Doppler shift, ultrasound.
Amplification, filtering, differential amplifying (black box concept only).
The Electrode as a transducer: capacitance, resistance, impedance,
biological s~gnal properties.
Mensuration: Wheatstone bridge, chart recorders, frequency counter.
Other transducers: blood flow, pressure, temperature (differential for
bio-feedback use), position, movement, timing.

SP232 Introductory Psychophysiology
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SC108 Biology or equivalent
Assessment by examination and assignments
A first-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
Excitable cells, origin of electrical signals.
Basic measurement and instrumentation in monitoring physiological
responses in psychology: electrodes, amplifiers, transducers,
recorders, oscilloscopes, computers, calibration, interpretation.
Ne~e-mu~cle interactions: measurement/monitoring of EMG, ENG,
nerve conduction velocity.
Cardiorespiratory system: ECG, heart rate, blood pressure, blood flow,
monitoring breathing.
Autonomic Nervous system: GSR, EGG, skin temperature;
measurement of stress. The lie detector.
Biofeedback: theory, techniques, applications.
SP309 Physics 3
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination
Structure and properties of matter.
Classical mechanics: Newton's Laws, the two body problem, orbital
mechanics, vibrations, normal modes, resonance, rigid body dynamics,
angular momentum, inertial tensor, Euler's equations, Lagrangian
formulation of classical mechanics, introduction to statistical
mechanics.
Quantum mechanics: stastical interpretation, Schroedinger's equation
- basic solutions, operators, eigenfunctions and eigenvalues,
Uncertainty principle, radiation-selection rules, many body quantum
mechanics, Pauli exclusion principle, lasers and holography.
SP310
Analogue and Optical Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP210
Assessment by examination, laboratory tests and
laboratory reports
A second-year subject for students majoring in instrumentation.
AC circuits. Response of R, L and C components in isolation and
combination. Transformers. The ideal operational amplifier and circuits
based on it. The gain and phase shift of a real operational amplifier.
Stability. An introduction to bipolar transistor. The emitter follower. The
effects of negative feedback.
Properties and applications of lasers: sources and detection of optical
radiation; electro, magneto and accousto-optical effects and their
applications; fibre-optic sensors, types and properties of optical fibres,
intensity, phase and frequency modulation in optical fibre sensors.
SP320 Instrumental Science 3
Three hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP220
Assessment by examination and laboratory reports
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Topics studied will include:
- basic analogue electronics using diodes and operational amplifiers
but no other discrete devices;
- basic digital circuits - combinational logic, flip flops and their
uses.
SP324
Biophysical Systems A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP1224
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports.
A second-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Electrode processes: half cell potentials, charge transfer overpotential,
diffusion overpotential, impedance, microelectrodes, recording
arrangements.
Membrane phenomena: Fick's laws, Nernst and Donnan equilibrium,
osmosis, Goldman equation, Ussing flux ratio equation, 'pore' hypothesis,
electrical properties, transport mechanisms.
The action potential: the voltage clamp and the Hodgkin Huxley
equations, strength-duration curves, neurophathies.
Svnaptic transmission: quanta1 nature of transmitter release, electrophys~olog~cal,
electron mlcroscoplc and b~ochemlcal ev~dence, calclum
actlvallon. acetvlchollne recedor. excltatlon and lnh~b~t~on In the central
nervous syster;l, prelpost syhapiic inh~bition, second messenger activation,
trophic and tropic effects, classes of neurotransmitter, pathologies
of synaptic transmission.
Autonomic nervous system: structure and function, sympathetic and
parasympathet~c d~vcs~ons, adrenerg~c and chollneiglc, synapses.
muscarlnlc. aloha and beta receptors and thelr blockade. . . Durlneralc -
nerve, co-transmission.
Functional anatomy of the CNS, somatosensory, aud~tory, vlsual and
motor systems.
SP325
Biophysical Systems B
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP1224
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports.
A second-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Muscle ultrastructure, exc~tat~on-contract~on coupling, slldlng fllament
theorv lenath tenslon relatconsh~ps. Hlll eauatlon, metabol~c aspects.
E-C cou6ing in smooth muscle, pathophysiology of muscle,
electromyography.
The heart: cardiac cycle, mechanical and electrical events. Starling's
law and Noble's model, mechanical properties of cardiac muscle.
Pulsatile pressure and flow in arteries, wave propagation in arteries,
blood rheology, atherosclerosis, Starling's hypothesis of the capillary
system, mass transport, flow in collapsible tubes, blood flow in particular
organs, Guyton's model.
SP333
Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of work experience occurring as part of the third
year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied Science
(Medical Biophysics and Instrumentation). Students are supervised
by a member of the academic staff, and are required to submit a report
to their employer and to their supervisor.
SP356
Physics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by laboratory reports and examination
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Quantum physics
Black-body radiation, photo-electric effect. De Broglie's hypothesis,
Uncertainty principle.
Schrodinger's equation - expectation values, operators, eigen values
and eigen functions. Applications from potential discontinuities, barrier
penetration, particle in a box, harmonic oscillator, particle decay.
Quantum theory of H atom by solution of Schrodinger's equation.
Angular momentum; probability density and orbitals.
Nuclear physics
Basic nuclear properties.
Structure and models.
Radioactivity and nuclear reactions.

SP401
Experimental Techniques
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and examinations.
A second-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Earthing and shielding: reduction of noise and interference.
Electrical safety: Australian Standards for biomedical circuits.
Treatment of biophysical data: biological statistics and data presentation,
use of personal computers in biomedical practice, ~'tility
packages physiological data acquisition and signal processing
packages. Applications of mathematical models of physiological
systems to experimental work, numerical methods in biophysics.
Nuclear studies: radiation safety, dosimetry, radiopharmaceuticals in
clinical practice.
SP409 Physics 4
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination
A second-year subject of the degree course for students majoring in
instrumentation.
Nuclear physics
Nuclear models - liquid drop model. Fermi gas model, shell model,
collective model. Nuclear decay and nuclear reactions.
Electromagnetism
Maxwell's equations: continuity equation, scalar and vector potentials,
macroscopic fields, polarization, magnetisation, constitutive relations.
Maxwell's equations in 'macroscopic form': dielectrics, conductors,
boundary conditions, electromagnetic waves in conducting and
non-conducting media, reflection and transmission, cavities and
waveguides, sources of radiation.
Optics
Wave theory of light, scalar wave approximation, Kirchoff diffraction
integral. Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffraction patterns. Absorption,
scattering and dispersion of light. Electromagnetic waves. Selected
topics from modern optics.
Solid state physics
Sommerfeld theory of electronic behaviour in crystals. Kronig-Penny
model, band theory, PN junctions.
SP410
Analogue Devices and Applications
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP310
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports
A second-vear - - - ~ subiect for students maiorina , - in instrumentation
The common emitter and differential amplifiers. Transistors as
switches. Regulators. Non-linear feedback elements.
An introduction to ihe field effect transistor. Common source and drain
amplifiers. Other semiconductor devices.
Power supplies, stability of feedback circuits. Other semiconductor
devices.
SP420 Instrumental Science 4
Three hours per week for semester four
Prerequisite, SP320
Assessment by examination and laboratory reports
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided
chemistry.
Topics studied will include:
- digital to analogue and analogue to digital converters;
- the organisation of a computer, especially inputloutput;
- hardware and software aspects of parallel interfacing;
- hardware and software aspects of serial interfacing;
- hardware and software aspects of analogue interfacing.
SP424
Faculty of Applied Science
Clinical Monitoring A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP324 or SP325
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports.
A second-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Cardiac monitoring and pathologies.
The ECG: genesis of myocardial field, lead systems, vectorcardiography,
ECG changes in disease; effects of heart position, arrhythmias
and conduction defects, pacemakers and defibrillators.
Mon~torlng pressure and flow Swan-Ganz catheters, ultrasonic and
electromaanet~c flowmeters. non-lnvaslve technlaues. cardlac output
by dye anitherma1 dilution, electrical impedance method, phono- and
echo-cardiography.
Neurophys~olog~cal monltorlng on-golng braln electrical actlvlty, visual,
aud~tory and somatosensory evoked responses, the ERG. EOG
Intensive care instrumentation: design philosophies, data processing
and management; ambulatory monitoring and telemetry. Cardiopulmonary
bypass, requirements and design.
SP425
Clinical Monitoring B
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP324 or SP325
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports.
A second-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Respiratory system: structure and function, lung volumes and dead
space, diffusion, blood flow; ventilationlperfusion ratio inequality; gas
transport, Bohr and Haldane effects, acidlbase status, respiratory
mechanics, control of respiration.
Lung function testing and lung diseases, obstruction, restriction:
flowlvolume curves, diffusion capacity, compliance, body plethysmography,
response to exercise, small airway assessment,
ventilationlperfusion ratio.
Renal vasculature: the juxtaglomerular apparatus, kidney function
tests. countercurrent multiplication, control of kidnev function, renal
pathophysiology, the artifical kidney.
Monitoring the birth process: maternal, foetal and neo-natal monitoring;
uterine activity, foetal heart rate. Apgar scoring; neo-natal circulatory
and respiratory changes.
Anaesthesia: agents and their administration; monitoring; physiological
effects of anaesthesia, mathematical modelling.
SP430
Interfacing and Nuclear Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP330
Assessment by examination, laboratory reports
and laboratory tests
A second-year subject for students majoring in instrumentation.
Analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion. Sample and
hold. Serial communications. Interrupts. Direct memory access. An
introduction to the IEEE 488 bus. An introduction to networking
instruments.
Nuclear transducers: radiation safety, radiation detectors, pulse height
analysis, spectrometry.
SP431
Psychophysiology of Perception
Eight hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SC108, SP232
Assessment by examination and assignments
A second-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
Introduction to recording techniques in human neurophysiology.
The bases of the EEG and evoked potentials.
Vision: the eye, peripheral mechanisms, central pathways and
processing.
AuditoryNestibular: the ear, mechanisms of sound/vibrat~on
transduction, s~gnalling balance, central pathways and processlllg
Somatosensory: reception mechanisms, peripheral and central
pathways, pain control.
Chemore~e~tion: taste and smell, . phvsioloav . -. and behavioural aspects.
Motor responses: central and peripheral control of movement.
intearat~on of sensation w~th motor resoonse: . . RT. . MT. . . oractical aspects
relared to skill learning, ergonomics.
8 1

SP501
Signals and Systems
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination
A fourth-year subject of the degree course for students majoring in
instrumentation.
Signals in time and frequency domains: measurement and interpretation
of spectra, applications of Fourier analysis.
Linear systems: time invariance, impulse response, system function,
causality, system testing, phase and amplitude responses and time
delays, filters.
Dlgltal processing: signal sampling and reconstruction, digltal spectral
analysis. DFT and FFT, dlgital filters, linear prediction and bandwidth
compression.
Noise: averages, signal estimation and detection.
Image processing: Fourier optics, holography and tomography.
Information theory and codes.
SP509 Physics 5
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work and examination
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Solid state physlcs: tunnel diodes. PN photodiodes, PIN photodiodes.
PN dlodes to detect orotons and aloha oarticles. PN diodes to detect
gamma radiation, s&erconductivity, suberconducting quantum interference
devices.
SP510
Scientific lnstrumentation A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP410
Assessment by examination assignments and laboratory
reports
A fourth-year subject of the degree courses for students majoring in
instrumentation.
Lectures on a series of topical aspects of scientific instrumentation.
A series of 3 hour experiments in a) networking computers and
instruments together; and b) principles and applications of optical
instruments. Experiments in networking computers and instruments
together to achieve instrumentation functions: optical instrumentation
and imagery.
SP523
Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of industry based learning occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science (Computing and Instrumentation). Students are supervised
by a member of the academic staff and are required to submit a report
to their employer and to their supervisor.
SP524 Neurosciences A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisites, SP324 and either SP424 or SP425
Assessment by examination, assignments and practical
work.
A fourth-year subject of the degree course for students majoring in
medical biophysics and instrumentation.
Neuro anatomy: spinal cord organisation, histological features, brainstem,
pathways, structures, hemispheres, subcortical structures, gross
and histological dissection.
Receptor functions: information theory, channel capacity, information
transmission, frequency coding, thresholds, receptive fields, generator
potential.
Biophysics of peripheral sensory systems: peripheral receptors, histology,
function, CNS connections, spinal cord mechanisms, spinal
afferent pathways - lemniscal and anterolateral, thalamic organisation
and projections, S1 and Sll somatosensory cortex, dysfunction,
testing - SEP
Pain, spinal and brainstem pathways, endogenous opiates, gating
theory, analgesia - TENS, electrical stimulation, pharmacological
interactions.
Psychophysics: scaling, assessment techniques, absolute and difference
thresholds, Weber function, just noticeable difference, Fechner
compression, signal detection, ROC curves.
Motor control: peripheral mechanisms, gamma loop, coactivation, stiff-
ness reaulation, servo mechanisms, motor cortex, motor potential,
control hrcuits to basal ganglla and cerebellum, spinal pathways, pathology,
skilled movement, learning, open and closed loop operation.
Applied Biophysics A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisites, SM315, SP325 and either SP424 or SP425
Assessment by examination and laboratory reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Physiological control systems: control theory, signal flow diagrams,
fundamental block reoresentations. . ooen-looo . . aain. -
Dynamic responses: Bode and Nyquist analysis, transfer function discovery
- examples of physiological investigations.
Cardiovascular system, mathematical models of the arterial system.
Respiratory, acidlbase and thermal control, modelling of peripheral
neuro muscular control.
Multicompartment systems and methods of analysis, models of membrane
systems.
Modelling of endocrine systems.
Volume conductor theory; application to EEG. Neurovolume
conductors, modelling models of brain electrical and magnetic activity.
Introduction to neural net modelling.
SP527
Neurophysiology of the normal brain
. - - -
Five hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP431
Assessment by examination and assignments
A third-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
Analysis of brain function: EEG, brain scans - NMR, PET etc.
Brain laterality: split brain effects, anatomical. pharmacological
electrophysiological differences.
Affective states: biology of normal function, hypothalamus, limbic
system, temporal and frontal lobes.
Speech and language: Broca's area, Wernicke's area, auditory and
visual processes, motor cortex, learning to speak, aphasias.
Memory: neuronal theories of consciousness, neuronal plasticity,
distributed memory system. Consciousness: theories of
consciousness, interaction with sleep states.
Sleep and dreaming: stages of sleep, desynchronisation of EEG
activity, functional models of sleep, sleep monitoring, sleep disorders.
SP528
Applied Psychophysiology
Five hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite. SP431
Assessment by examination and assignments
A third-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
~dvanced recording techniques: computer analysis, EEG, evoked
potentials, P300, semantic incongruity, Nao, CNV, other cognitive
potentials, Bereitshafts potential.
Psychophysics: thresholds, Weber-Fechner Law, Power Law,
magnitude estimationlproduction, methods of limitslconstant stimuli,
bias, sensitivity, signal detection theory, ROC curves, applications.
lnstrumentation in psycholog~cal practice: accuracy, validity, sensitivity,
testina - routines, habituation, checklist of manufacturer's s~ecifications.
Clinical aspects: clinical visits, viewing of recording tecniques in
practice, long and short term monitoring of psychological state.
SP530 Scientific lnstrumentation B
Sixty hours in one semester
Prerequisite, SP430
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in instrumentation.
An introduction to control theory: control system, modelling electrical
and mechanical systems, transfer functions, open and closed loop
systems, negative and positive feedback, root locus techniques.
Compensation techniques, series of open-ended experiments on
computer-based imaging.
Nuclear Instrumentation: semiconductor detectors, computer based
spectrometry, activation analysis and coincidence counting.

SP531
Biophysical Systems and
Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Continuous assessment by tests and assignments
An advanced subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science and of the masters course in
biomedical instrumentation.
Membrane biophysics: tracer dynamics. Applications of irreversible
thermodynamics. Active and passive transport mechanisms.
Membrane-based biosensors.
Biophysical techniques. Electron microscopy. Electron and proton
microbeam analysis. Diffraction studies of biological materials. Autoradiography.
Optical methods. NMR and ESR studies.
Physiological control mechanisms, mathematical models of physiological
systems.
SP532
Clinical Monitoring Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Continuous assessment by tests and assignments
An advanced subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science and of the Masters course in
Biomedical Instrumentation.
Physical and physiological principles in the use and development of
clinical monitoring systems including biological sensors and the
processing, dlsplay and storage of dai8. Mainemphasis is placed on
cardiovascular and resoiratorv monttorino. but novel technioues ' in
other areas of biomedical mdnitoring wilrbe covered.
SP533
Biophysics of Exercise
-.
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment and tests
An advanced subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science.
Theoretical basis of oxygen consumption measurement. Cardiac
output determination by rebreathing techniques. Clinical exercise
testing. Gas analysers and sampling system problems. Volume meters
and timing devices. Computer facilities. Ergometry and work and
power assessment. Clinical aspects.
SP534
Neurophysiological Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments
An advanced subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science and of the Masters course in
Biomedical Instrumentation.
Information processing within neural systems. Analysis of neural mass
field potentials. Clinical, cortical, subcortical, and EEGIscalp surface
recording techniques. Spontaneous activity analysis. Neuro-psychological
correlates. Evoked potentials. Time and frequency domain
analysis. Stimulus classification.
SP535 Project
Four hours per week for one semester
A compulsory subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science.
Tutorials in analogue and digital electronic application techniques.
The development, construction and commissioning of a biomedical
instrumentation system.
SP537
Medical Imaging
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and tests
An advanced subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of the
graduate diploma of applied science and of the Masters course in
Biomedical Instrumentation.
Interrogation methods: beamed radiation (visible, IR, Microwave, X-
ray, Ultrasound), internally deposited radiation (gamma rays, SPECT,
PETT), selective excitation (NMR). Physical qualities of tissue
measured by the interrogation.
lmage construction methods: real-time ultrasound, interactive and
filtered back-projection methods in tomography, algorithms and software
implementation.
lmage enhancement methods: colour coding, edge detection, noise
reduction, digital subtraction, entropy methods.
Interpretation of images: image quality and contrast, system MTFs,
ROC curves, information theory.
SP538
Technology Transfer
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments
Faculty of Applied Science
A subject in the masters course in biomedical instrumentation.
Aspects of developing innovative biomedical instrumentation systems
from prototype to production: market analysis, financial sponsorship,
case studies. In seminars, ideas for potential medical devices are
discussed in relation to production details and marketing strategies.
Students are required to produce a report of the feasibility of a
particular device, with production costs and sales projections.
SP539
Research Project
Four hours per week for three semesters
Assessment by dissertation
A subject in the masters course in biomedical instrumentation.
This subject gives the student the opportunity to apply subject matter
studies in other course subjects to instrumentation-related problems
in a specific field of interest. Where possible the projects are industrysponsored
and have relevance to the student's area of employment.
Cooperation between professionals in industry andlor health care and
supervising staff at Swinburne help develop the student's competence.
Each project requires a literature survey and theoretical andlor
experimental investigation. Results and conclusions presented in a
written dissertation and oral presentation.
SP541
Signal Processing
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments
A subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific instrumentation
options of the graduate diploma of applied science.
(1) Linear and non-linear systems, response functions, functionals,
Volterra and Wiener expansions, system kernels.
(2) Slgnals, spectra, mean square est~mation, orthogonality, principal
component analysis, probability, stationary and non-statlonary
stochastic processes. .
(3) Data, smoothing, windows, averages, filters, digital filters, recursive
filters, auto-correlation, cross-correlation.
(4) System estlmatlon, spectral analysis, correlation and coherence,
white noise methods. svstem kernel est~mation.
(5) Digital processing revLew of DFT, FFT, 2-transform, Hilbert
transform. ..
(6) lnformatlon theory codes and encodlng techniques, redundancy
and efflclencv. error correctton and detecting codes, slgnal transmission
mutial information; channel capacity; band limited signals.
noisy channels, signal detection
SP542
Optical Instrumentation
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and examination
A subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific
instrumentation options of the graduate diploma of applied science.
Incoherent and coherent light sources, types of lasers and their
applications. Detectors of optical radiation, modulation of light, interferometry,
lens design, fibre optics, Fourier transforms and imagery.
SP544
Nuclear lnstrumentation
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific instrumentation
options of the graduate diploma of applied science.
Detectors. Amplifiers. Analysers. Spectrometers. Shielding. Pulse
processing and shaping. Linear and logic pulse functions. Multichannel
pulse analysis. Energy and time resolution. Detector calibration.
Radioisotopic assay. Tracer applications. Activation analysis.
Whole body counters. Scanners. Scintillation cameras. Radiation
effects and exposure limits.

SP545
lnstrument Programming and
Interfacing
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, reports, assignments,
examination
A subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific instrumentation
options of ths graduate diploma of applied science.
Interfacing peripheral devices
Programming and interfacing techniques for microprocessor peripheral
support ICs - 110 ports, serial communications, graphics, direct
memory access controller.
Techniques for controlling instruments using standard bus modules.
General purpose instrumentation bus (IEEE 488)
Structure, functions of talkers, listeners and controllers, timing,
electrical characteristics. lnterfacina a controller chip set to an intelligent
instrument. Assembler progjamming, system programming.
Example of a programmable instrumentation system.
SP547
lnstrument Electronics
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and laboratory reports
A subject in the masters course in biomedical instrumentation.
Transducers. Operational Amplifiers. lnstrumentation amplifiers and
other devices. Reduction of noise and interference in instrumentation
systems. Power supplies.
SP551
lnstrumentation Principles and
Techniques
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by . . practical work, reports, assignments and
examination
An introductory subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific
instrumentation options of the graduate diploma of applied science.
Measurement principles
The role of measurement, the units of measurement, standards,
systematic and random errors particularly as applied to the traceability
of standards, limit of detection and resolution, sensitivity, noise,
analogue and digital readout - discussion of the above principles.
Transducers
Precise DC measurement - techniques, measurements, problems.
Floating and guarded measurement. Principles of transducer
operation. Transducers - AC or DC, active or passive, activator or
sensor. A selection from the above groupings to cover the broad range
of transducers available.
The interfacing of transducers - signal processing applications, transmitting
applications.
Instrumental practice
Theoretical and practical course based on:
(1) lnstrument components and mechanisms, e.g. servomotors, steppermotors,
galvanometers, electric components.
(2) Printed circuit board techniques, e.g. artwork, negative, manufacture,
drilling, soldering.
(3) Prototyping techniques, e.g. wire wrap, bread board.
SP552
lntroduction to Scientific
lnstrumentation
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, reports, assignments and
examination
An introductory subject of the biomedical instrumentation and scientific
instrumentation options of the graduate diploma of applied science.
Basic nuclear physics: basic nuclear properties, nomenclature, stable
and unstable nuclides, radiations, interaction with matter. Table of isotopes,
decay schemes.
Detectors: general survey, including Geiger, scintillation and solid state
detectors.
Instrumentation: NIM system, pre-amplifiers, main amplifiers, discriminators,
single channel analysers, counters, timers, ratemeters,
sweeps, recorders, multi-channel analysers.
Safety: hazards, precautions, sealed and unsealed sources,
monitoring.
Chemical/atomic instrumentation
Atomic structure, atomic weight and atomic number, Avogadro's
number, kinetic theory, solids, ionic lattices, molecules, molecular
welghts, electrochemcstry, dissociation, conductance, acids and bases.
cells, redox reactions, thermodynamics.
Optical instrumentation
Waves and particles, refractive index, reflection, lens and mirrors,
polarisation, diffraction, interference, prisms and gratings, interferometers,
sources of radiation, detectors.
SP553
lntroduction to lnstrumentation
Electronics
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work, reports and examination
An introductory subject of the blomedlcal lnstwmentation and scientific
Instrumentation optlons of the graduate diploma of applied science.
DC circuits. Ohms law. power dissipation. Kirchoff's laws. Thevenin's
theorem, Norton's theorem; AC circuits, sine waves, amplitude, phase,
ohasor reoresentation. comolex number reoresentation. caoacitance.
capacitive reactance,'induktance, inducthe reactance, impedance
calculations for simple RLC circuits.
Amplifiers, input impedance, output impedance. loads, operational
amplifiers, the ideal operational amplifier, the inverting configuration,
the non inverting amplifier, the differential amplifier.
Semiconductor devices and circuits, P and N type semiconductor, the
PN junction, the NPN transistor, the JFET.
Binary numbers decimal binary conversion, binary addition, binary
multiplication, hexadecimal numbers, 8421 BCD, alphanumeric codes,
error detection. Logic gates, Boolean algebra, Karnaugh maps. the
RS flip-flop, monostable and astable devices, RS and D latches, edgetriggering
and master-slave flip-flops.
SP555
lntroduction to Biophysical Systems
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments, practical work and
examination
An introductory subject of the biomedical instrumentation option of
the graduate diploma of applied science and the Masters course in
biomedical instrumentation for students with an inadequate
background in the biological aspects of biophysics.
Cell physiology, membranes and excitability, nerves and muscles.
Bioenergetics. Flow and pressure. Biological control systems.
SP601
Stand Alone lnstrumentation
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by reports
A final semester subjed for students majoring in computing and
instrumentation.
The Forth language and the design of time critical turn key instrument
systems. Implementing a program in Forth: incremental compilation,
stack maintenance, multiple vocabularies, special features of the
language. A design project will form the second part of this unit.
SP602
Special Project
Two hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite: Industry Based Learning SP333 or
equivalent
Assessment by reports
A fourth-year subject br students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
This project gives students training in carrying out a technical
investigation.
Students work individually, or in small groups, under staff supervision,
on a major investigation project chosen from some area of biomedical
instrumentation.
Projects are chosen by students, after consultation with staff, from a
list developed by staff. Projects are usually associated with departmental
research interests, or are proposed by w-operative employers,
but can be suggested by students. They are chosen to develop
students' technical knowledge, selfeducative skills and initiative, and
may be limited by available departmental resources.
Each project requires a literature survey, and a theoretical investigation.
Results, conclusions and recommendations are presented in a written
report, and an oral report may also be required.
Special lectures are given on the subjects of entrepreneurial skills and
technology transfer.

SP609 Physics 6
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by practical work and examination
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Selected topics of special interest to students of biophysics and
instrumental science. A selection will be made from the following
areas:
Spectroscopy; NMR, Mossbauer.
Applications of superconductivity: Josephson junctions, particle
accelerators.
Nuclear power: developments in fission and fusion reactors, magnetic
and inertial confinement.
Tomography: X-ray, NMR, positron emission.
Fibre optics: sensors, communication.
Electromagnetic interference and shielding.
Non linear dynamical systems.
SP610
lnstrumentation Systems A
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP510
Assessment by examination and laboratory reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in scientific instrumentation.
Major instrumentation project A.
SP623
Industry Based Learning
A six-month period of industry based learning occurring as part of the
third year of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Applied
Science (Computing and Instrumentation). Students are supervised
by a member of the academic staff and are required to submit a report
to their employer and to their supervisor. This program is normally
taken end-on from SP523.
SP624
Neurosciences B
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP524
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
The auditory system and the vestibular apparatus: acoustics of the
outer ear, sound transmission within the ear, peripheral organisation
of receptors and CNS pathways, peripheral mechanisms and neural
organisation of vestibular mechanisms, pathophysiology of auditorylvestibular
function, auditorylvestibular testing techniques, evoked
potentials, cortex, brainstem, ENG, auditory prostheses.
Chemical senses, olfaction and taste.
Vision: anatomy of theeye, optics of visual system, receptor function.
central pathways, central processing, electrical recording of ERG,
EOG, visual evoked response, intraocular pressure, recording, examination,
pathology, assessment, adaptation, acuity, perimetry, spatial
frequency.
EEG: origin, recording, interpretation, analysis.
Neurophysiological signal processing: basic concepts and
methodology.
Plasticity in the CNS.
Neuropharmacology.
Sleep and consciousness.
CNS disorders: epilepsy, dementia.
Faculty of Applied Science
SP625 Applied Biophysics 6
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP501
Assessment by examination, assignment and laboratory
reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Medical imaging: ultrasound, nuclear methods, X-ray, CT scan, NMR
(MRI), PET. Biological effects of radiation. Physical principles, image
reconstruction, image quality. Microwave imaging.
Physical therapy: TENS, ultrasound therapy, PEMFs, laser therapy.
Biomaterials: biocompatibility, implants in ofthopaedics and dentistry,
arterial prostheses, cell-substrate interactions.
Environmental biophysics: ergonomics, stress in the workplace,
overuse injury, effects of noise, electromagnetic radiation, etc. Effects
of heat and cold. Bioeffects of atmospheric pollutants.
SP626
Applied Neurosciences
Two hours per week in one semester
Prerequisite, SF524
Assessment by assignments, examination and practical
work
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in biophysics and instrumental
science.
Advanced signal processing: EEG, brain magnetic fields.
Neurometric analysis, P300, CNV, coherence analysis.
Neuronal modelling.
Cognitive processes.
Speech: laterality, learning, mechanics, interpretation, injury.
Memory.
Behavioural aspects of sleep and consciousness.
Affective status, emotion.
Disorders of higher cortical functions: depression, anxiety,
schizophrenia.
SP630
lnstrumentation Systems B
Four hours per week in one semester
Prerequisite, SP530
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports
A fourth-year subject for students majoring in scientific instrumentation.
Lectures in control theory and other selected subjects of importance
to instrumentation.
SP631
Neurophysiology of Mental Disorders
Five hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP527
Assessment by examination and assignment
A third-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
Disorders of affect: theories of depression, monoamines and
depression, mechanism of action of antidepressants, anxiety and
benzodiazapine - GABA interactions.
Schizophrenia: causation, abnormal metabolism - monoamine
systems, symptomology,~diagnosis, hemispherical laterisation, frontal
lobe dysfunct~on, lnvest~gative techniques.
Brain damage: causes, specific deficits, diagrosis.
Epilepsy: neurophysiological mechanisms, spread of foci, treatment
- surgery, drugs, biofeedback, rehabilitation.
Ageing effects on brain function: normal degeneration, cerebrovascular
disease, decreased sensorv stimulation, metabolic indicators.
Pathological degeneration: Parkinson's disease, neurolog~cal disorder
Alzheimer type, etc.

SP632
Psychophysiology Project
Five hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SP528
Assessment by report
A third-year subject for students completing the Psychophysiology
major.
This subject gives students the opportunity to apply techniques and
skills introduced in the Psychophysiology and Psychology courses in
an investigation into a topic of particular interest. Students may select
an appropriate topic of interest at an early stage of the third year of
the course, which can be adequately Supe~ised, investigated and
reported on within the above time constraints. The selected project
work may involve such activities as physiological and/or psychological
data collection, literature research, etc. or a combination of these.
Projects will usually be individual but may sometimes involve shared
aspects. Students will be expected to make a short verbal presentation
on their project topic and to submit a final written report.
SP1200 Physics
Five hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A first-year subject taken by students majoring in computing and
instrumentation.
Motion and forces: relativistic kinematics and dynamics, rotational
kinematics and dynamics, gravitation.
Electricity and Magnetism: electric fields, DC circuits, magnetic fields,
electromagnetism, AC circuits.
Atomic Physics: photoelectric effect, x-rays. Compton effect, photoelectron
interactions, Bohr model, de Broglie matter waves.
Nuclear Physics: binding energy, nuclear forces, radioactivity, alpha,
beta, gamma decay, nuclear reactions, radiation detectors.
Vibrations, Waves and Sound.
Optics: optical instruments, interference and diffraction, polarization,
optical communication.
Thermal physics: temperature and heat, gas laws and
thermodynamics.
SP1209 Physics
Five hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by practical work, assignments and
examination
A first-year subject taken by students majoring in medical biophysics
and instrumentation.
Motion and forces: relativistic kinematics and dynamics, rotational
kinematics and dynamics, gravitation.
Electricity and Magnetism: electric fields, DC circuits, magnetic fields,
electromagnetism. AC circuits.
Atomic Physics: photoelectric effect, x-rays, Compton effect, photonelectron
interactions, Bohr model, de Broglie matter waves.
Nuclear Physics: binding energy, nuclear forces, radioactivity, alpha,
beta, gamma decay, nuclear reactions, radiation detectors.
Vibrations, Waves and Sound.
Optics: optical instruments, interference and diffraction, polarization,
optical communication.
Thermal physics: temperature and heat, gas laws and
thermodynamics.
SP1210 Introduction to Instrumentation
Four hours per week for semester one and two, by
lectures, laboratory work and tutorials
Assessment by examination, workshop reports and
laboratory computer testing
A first-year subject for students majoring in instrbmentation.
An introduction to fundamentals of digital logic and applications.
Advanced digital circuits. Basic analog electronic concepts, basic
concepts of instrumentation and transducers. AC concepts and circuits,
Power supplies. Case studies in digital and analog electronics.
SP1224 Introductory Biophysics
Two hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by examination, assignments and laboratory
reports
A first-year subject for students majoring in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
Application of physics to clinical problems.
Biomechanics: anatomy of bones, joints, spinal cord, kinesiological
measurement.
Control systems: homeostasis, feedback in biological systems, specific
application to the endocrine and reproductive systems.
Bioenergetics: metabolic measurement, food and physical activity,
gastro-intestinal function.
SP3430 lnterfacing and Nuclear Techniques
Four hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite: SP1210
Assessment by examinations, laboratory reports and
laboratory tests
A second-year subject for students majoring in instrumentation.
An introduction to the hardware elements of a typical microprocessor
system. lnterfacing a digital signal. An introduction to programmable
support interface devices.
An introduction to the use of a computer languagefor interfacing
Program design, timing interrupts.
Analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion. Sample and
hold. Serial communications. Interrupts. Direct memory access. An
introduction to the IEEE 488 bus. An introduction to networking
instruments.
Nuclear transducers: radiation safety, radiation detecrores, pulse
height analysis, spectrometry.
SP4190 Occupational Hygiene and Safety
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A final year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Environmental hazards
Accident prevention. Work-related injuries including tenosynovitis, back
and muscle injuries. Relationship of physical defects to employee
safety. Stress in the workplace, measurement and alleviation.
Noise and vibration. Biophysics of sound. Measurement and bioeffects.
Hazard recognition, evaluation and control, audiometry.
Heat and ventilation. Measurement of dusts and fumes, bio-effects.
Body temperature refulation, effects of heat and cold.
. .
Radcation: ioncsing and Non-concsing (including ultra-violet, vcscble Icght.
cnfra-red. radio freauencv and lasers). ldentificatcon and bio-effects.
Hazard assessment andcontrol. '
Toxicology
Toxic substances: mechanisms of action and pathogenic effects
(carcinogenisis, mutagenisis, teratogenesis). Use of mamals and
submamalian systems in predicting and assesscng toxic effects in man.
Routes of ingestion of toxic substances including heavy metals,
benezene, PCB, solvents, organic chemicals, silica, asbestos.
allergens and pesticides.
Evaluation and control measures.
Safety technology
Machine safety. Hazard identification. Principlesof machine guarding.
Assessment of dangers and guarding arrangements. Boilers and
pressure vessels. Safety devices (valves, gauges, alarm systems). Safe
working practices.
Fire and explosion. Use of flammable and explosive substances. Risks
assessment. Fire precautions.
Chemical safety. Handling, chemical safety, hazard identification,
storage and transport of dangerous and toxic chemicals.
SQ100
Programming in Ada
Four hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
Programming methodology and ADA: specifications; problem solving;
top-down and bottomup methods; sequence selection and iteration;
data types; procedurdabstraction; program style.
Advanced Programming: dynamic data structures; packages; abstract;
data types; I10 models; exception handling.

SQ103 Software Practice 1
Six hours per week in semester one, followed by four
hours per week in semester two
A first-year subject of the degree course in computer science. This
subject builds skills in team problem solving by studying the following
topics: the business environment; organisational structures and
systems; business communication; group dynamics; strategies for
group problem solving; software project conduct and documentation;
experience in small group projects.
SQ107
lntroduction to Computer Science
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
History of computing machines. Functional components of a computer
system. Data transfer techniques. Operating systems. lntroduction to
DOS and the IBM PC Computer peripherals. Data communication
principles. Programming languages. Applications of computers.
SQ205 Information Analysis
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, SQlOO
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
lntroduction to Database: data structures for database appllcatlons:
relat~onal databases - normallsation: SOL; introduction to database
-
Format Specifications and Logic: set theory; propositional and
predicate calculus; use of mathematics to specify programs; the 'Z'
specification language.
SQ300 Data Structures and Algorithms
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
Data Structures and Algorithms: this unit pursues the goal of good
programming (correctness, flexibility, adaptability, portability, utility and
clarity) through the concepts of modular~ty and abstract data types.
Syllabus: common data structures, associated algorithms and
applications; stacks, queues, trees, binary search trees, balancing;
heaps, sets; graphs; hash tables. Sorting Algor~thms. Ada generics.
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science, and computing and
instrumentation.
UNlX operating system: file management; special files; commands
and filters; electronic mail; pipes; aliases; history; structure of the
operating system; tools - lint, make, SCCS.
Shell Programming: the C shell; 110 indirection; pipes; history
mechanism; alias substitution; file name expansion; shell variables;
special characters; quoting; shell scripts; command line parameters;
foreach; if; shift; switch and while constructions; goto; break and
continue; expressions; use of shell variables; assignment; input and
output; environment; differences between Bourne and C shell.
C Programming: language overview; data types; operators;
expressions; control of flow; input/output; functions; pointers; arrays;
structures and unions; standard C libraries; pre-processor commands.
SQ303 Software Practice 2
Three hours per week in semester three, followed by six
hours per week in semester four
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science.
This subject introduces techniques and strategies for the management
of medium to large scale software development projects. Students will
exercise these skills by working on several medium scale group
projects.
Faculty of Applied Science
SQ304 Software Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
A study of the software life cycle; project management; software
engineering psychology; system analysis; system design;
implementation; testing; software development environments.
SQ305 Database
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subjed of the degree course in computer science, a
third year subject of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science, a fourth year elective of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Database design concepts; relational, netwok, hierarchical and binary
models. Database languages, environment and administration.
SQ306 Human-Computer Interaction
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computer science, a
third-year elective of the degree course of mathematics and computer
science, a fourth-year elective of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Technology: usability of input/output devices and interaction styles.
Methodologies: Formal, cognitive and usability approaches to
developing appropriate human-computer interaction.
Theories: theoretical foundations of HCI.
SQ401 Logic Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year elective of the degree course in computer science, a
final year elective of the degree courses in mathematics and computer
science and computing and instrumentation.
A selection from the following topics: predicate logic, fundamentals
of logic programming, recursion, operator definitions, cuts and
negations, database manipulation, basic datastructures - lists, trees,
applications of basic programming.
SQ402 Operating Systems
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
This unit makes an in-depth study of a major operating system called
MINIX. MlNlX is an educational version of the well-known UNlX
operating system. The objective is to investigate the data-structures
and algorithms of real operating systems and the effect the structure
has on the programs and environment of the operating system. Issues
such as Multi-Tasking, Storage, Devices and Networking will be
covered. Students will also be provided with access to and
opportunities to modify MINIX.
SQ404 Systems Analysis and Design
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
mathematics and computer science, a final year elective of the degree
course in computing and instrumentation.
Conventional structured systems analysis; Lancaster Soft Systems
Methodology; structured systems design.
SQ407 Data Communications
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation, a final-year subject of the degree
course in mathematics and computer science.
An introduction to the fundamental concepts in modern computer-tocomputer
communications. Topics covered indude physical aspects
of data communications, data link control, terminal base networks,
communication protocols, distributed computer systems, local area
networks, public data nehwrks, Telecom Australia data communication
services, OSI - Open Systems Interconnection.

SQ411
COBOL Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year elective of the degree courses in computer science,
a final-year elective d the degree courses in maths and computer
science and computing and instrumentation.
COBOL: to introduce the COBOL language and its problem solution
domain.
Introduction to Strudured Programming: COBOL overview: File,
Record and Data Definition: File Processing: Modularity - Perform:
Arithmetic: Move. Editing, If: Validation, Testing, Debugging: Control
Groups: Tables: Strings. Subprograms: Sort.
SQ417
Computer Architecture A
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation, a second or final-year subject of the degree course
of computer science, a final-year elective of the degree course in
mathematics and com~uter science.
This unit introduces the concepts of computer architecture
fundamentals, including CPU organisation, insbuction, execution and
microprocessin More advanced architectures such as SIMD, MIMD,
ClSC and ~1~3'are also studied.
SQ500 Concurrent Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject d the degree course in computer science and
computing and instrumentation, a third-year elective of the degree
course of mathematics and computer science.
A study of the logical problems of concurrency; mutual exclusion;
safety and liveness; mechanisms to control concurrency; semaphores;
monitors; shared memory and message passing; the CSP model;
concurrent programming in Ada; concurrency in embedded systems.
SQ501
Functional Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation, a third-year subject of the degree
course in mathematics and computer science.
This subject examines developments in functional programming,
including programming methodology, theoretical foundations and
language implementation. A modern functional language such as
Miranda or Haskell will be used.
SQ502 Unix Systems Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective d the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation, a third year elective of the degree
course of mathematics and computer science.
This subject examines the software appropriate to systems
programming as distinguished from applications software such as
operating system commands, compilers, file management systems,
security and user management. Case studies are drawn from a
particular operating system such as UNlX where it is possible for
students to access the source code and alter parameters of the
operating system.
SQ503 Software Practice 3
Three hours per week in semester seven, followed by
six hours per week in semester eight
A final-year subject of the degree course in computer science. Th~s
subject requires that students, working in large teams, undertake a
large scale software development project, prefembly industrially based.
Software development, documentation and system evaluation must
be completed. The project will require students to exercise advanced
management and technical development skills.
SQ508 Computer Graphics A
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation, a third-year elective of the degree
course in mathematics and computer science.
Computer Graphics A: hardware for computer graphics; basic 2-D and
3-D graphics drawing; transformations; Data structures for graphics;
windowing and clipping.
SQ509 Artificial Intelligence A
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree course in computer science, a thirdyear
elective of the degree course in mathematics and computer
science, a final-year elective of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Artificial Intelligence: a selection from the following topics: knowledge
representation, natural language processing, problem solving and
game playing: search, planning, goal manipulation. Rule-based
reasoning: production systems and expert systems.
Knowledge processing aspects of robotics: vision and other sensors,
manipulation and locomotion, reasoning about space, object
interactions, time. Machine learning and self-modifying systems.
SQ517
Computer Architecture B
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computing and
instrumentation and computer science.
Computer Architecture B: a study is made of 32-bit micro-computer
based systems. It provides an in-depth examination of typical 32-bit
processors and examines the factors in designing systems using such
processors.
SQ601
Translator Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science.
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
Translator Engineering: an introduction to translation: introduction to
formal language theory, finite automata, lexical analysis, and the
parsing problem. Students design a compiler for a simple language.
SQ604 Object Oriented Programming
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree course in computer science, a finalyear
elective of the degree courses in mathematics and computer
science and computing and instrumentation.
This subject consists of lectures and tutorials studying Software
Engineering principles and goals using Object Oriented techniques.
Object Oriented Software Construction: Object Oriented
methodologies for Programming, Systems Analysis and Systems
Design are investigated. In-depth examination is made to illustrate the
benefits of Object Oriented methods as applied to modern complex
Software Engineering tasks.
SQ606 Computing in the Human Context
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree course in computer science, a finalyear
elective of the degree courses in mathematics and computer
science and computing and instrumentation.
Computing in the Human Context: an exploration of social and
organisational Issues and their relationship with the computing
professional.
SQ608 Computer Graphics B
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
Computer Graphics B: basic 3-D graphics rendering; projections;
colour; theory; lighting models; ray-tracing; radiosity; data
representation; animation.
SQ609 Artificial Intelligence B
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science,
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
A selection from: Connectionism and neural networks; knowledge
representation; natural language processing; problem solving and
game playing; search, planning, goal manipulation; rule-based
reasoning; production systems and expert systems; knowledge
processing aspects of robotics: vision and other sensors, manipulation
and locomotion, reasoning about space, object interactions, time;
machine learning and self-modifying systems

SQ613
Computer Science Team Project
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject of the degree courses in mathematics and
computer science and computing and instrumentation.
In this subject, students will apply the software engineering skills
scquired throughout the degree, to a substantial group software
development project. Student groups will choose from a range of
projects and they will then have to analyse the project's requirements,
design and then develop the system to the best of their ability in the
time available. Subject to the approval of the lecturer, students may
generate their own project.
SQ617
Computer Architecture C
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science and
computing and instrumentation.
Computer Architecture C: A study is made of parallel computer
systems. It provides an in-depth examination of typical parallel
computers and examines the factors in designing such systems.
SQ619
Expert Systems
Three hours per week tor one semester
Prerequisite: 50509
A final-year elective of the degree courses in computer science.
mathematics and computer science and computing and
instrumentation.
The unit covers the techniques and issues of knowledge.
SQ700
Programming in C
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A study of the programming language C and the related software
engineering practice. bpics covered include specification of problems,
algorithm approaches and program design methodologies, control of
flow, data types and structures, functions, and file 110.
SQ702
Systems Programming
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
lntroduction to the UNlX operating system. UNlX system interface and
standard C libraries. Low level I10 function calls the stat structure and
stat function calls. Process control within UNIX. Signals, lnterprocess
Communication, UNlX time and user information. An overview of
operating system. Shell programming basics, erwironment inheritance
and the difference betwen the Bourne and Korn shells. UNlX
programming tools, e.g. SCCS. The role of the system administrator.
SQ703
Software Development Project
Fifty-six hours per semester for two semesters
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A series of lectures on software project management techniques will
be given. The student's major project will be started as early as
possible in the course and will be on an approved topic, preferably
industrially based. The project will be completed in semester four and
presented to the class and the assessment panel.
SQ704
Software Engineering
Twenty-eight hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
A study of the problems confronting the software engineer in the
development of modern computer software:
- Software evolution models and lifecycles;
- Requirement Analysis;
- Software Design;
- Implementation, testing and installation;
- Documentation standards.
SQ705
Database
Fifty-six hours in one semester
Faculty of Applied Science
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
Solid understanding of the fundamentals of database design theory
and implementation techniques.
- Database Architecture
- Data Models
- Conceptual design
- Normalization
- E-R Modelling
- NlAM Method
- Internal design
- Database integrity, security
- Knowledge based systems
SQ707
Computer Systems
Twenty-eight hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
History of computing. Number systems base 2,3, 8, 10, 16. Computer
arithmetic including floating point. ASCII. EBCDIC codes with parity.
Boolean algebra: truth tables, Karnaugh maps to illustrate and stmplify
Boolean functions, simplification theorems. Circuit implementations
of functions including comparator, adders. CPU: ALU; registers,
control. Memory addressing, buses. Machine fetch-execute cycle. Edit.
compile, link, load of high level language programs. Assembly codes.
machine code. Decoding instructions. Addressing - immediate, direct,
indirect, register, indexing. Stacks, queues in compilation, execution.
Reverse Polish notation. Masking. Operating systems, including DOS.
SQ709
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
Twenty-eight hours in one semestel
A subject of the graduate diploma of applied science (computer
science).
The course will consider the central problems in the field of art~fic~al
intelligence and the concepts, tools and techniques used to solve
them. Topics will be chosen from the following list:
- programming for artific~al intelligence - a language such as
PROLOG or LISP;
- knowledge representation;
- logical inference;
- solving problems by decomposition, search, etc.;
- natural language processing.
SQ710
Advanced C Programming
Fifty-six hours in one semester
A subject of the graduate d~ploma of applied science (computer
science).
An in-depth study of C programming techniques, algorithms and
advanced data structures. Analyses of arrays, stacks, queues, and
binary trees are conducted. Efficiency and complexity issues are
examined. Sorting and searching methodologies are compared, also
overall decision making with regards to matching problems with
solution strategies. Overviews of system analysis and design are
conducted.
SQ717
Data Communications
Twenty-eight hours In one semester
A subject of the graduate d~ploma of applied science (computer
science).
An introduction to the fundamental concepts in computer-to-computer
communications. Topics covered include physical aspects of data
communications, data link control, terminal based networks,
communication protocols, distributed computer systems, local area
networks, public data networks, Telecom Australia data communication
services, OSI - Open Systems Interconnection.

AB200 Knowledge Thought and Computers
Three hours per week for one semester
An optional non-computing subject available to students of the
bachelor of information technology.
Objectives
The subject aims to develop skills in critical and creative thinking, and
to develop an understanding of the conceptual and ethical aspects
of advanced computer technology, including the ways in which
computers are transforming our conception of ourselves and our
relationship to the environment.
Syllabus
Reasoning and argument, philosophical logic, logic and language.
Traditional and contemporary theories of knowledge and their
relevance to knowledge engineering.
Mind and Machines: Computation as a model for thinking about
(human) thinking - and vice versa.
Ethical questions arising from the above.
Enquiries about this subject should be directed to the Head of the
Department of Liberal Studies.
AB310
Behavioural Studies and
Communication
Two hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
The course examines Australian society from the point of view of the
self, the primary group, the formal organisation and the institution.
It uses SOCIOLOGICAL concepts to examine the behaviour of people
in groups and society at large, and PSYCHOLOGICAL concepts to
examine personality and the way in which the individual initiates action
or responds to others.
These concepts provide the theoretical basis for an understanding of
the practical processes involved in industrial relations including negotiation,
conciliation, handling conflict and hostility at an organisational
level, etc.
AB513
Brain and Behaviour
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment is continuous
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in medical biophysics and
instrumentation.
A study of the philosophical and ethical implications of advances in
the neurosciences.
Topics include: a study of various theories about the nature of human
consciousness, and about the relationship between mind, brain and
behaviour.
AB2100 Behavioural Studies and
Communication
Two hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
The emphasis in this course will be on interpersonal
communicationlskills and stress management. Topics in
communication will include: non-verbal and verbal communication.
one-to-one communication skills, coping with conflict at an
interpersonal level, personality influences-in communication and
DSVC~O~OO~C~~ asDects of communication. To~ics in stress manaoement
wii incluze: principles of behavioural . psycholow, . -. relaxation, nutrition
and mental health.
BS141
Introductory Law
Two hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Sources of law, problems with the law, the tiers of Australian
Government: Commonwealth. State, Local Government. The
Parliamentary Process. Constitutional constraints affecting environmental
and public health legislation.
Delegated legislation:
(a) relevance to health surveyors,
(b) advantages and d~sadvantages.
. Ic) . revlewlna through - Parliament and the courts
The Australian court system, court personnel and tribunals with specialised
jurisdictions. The civil and criminal trial process.
Judges as a source of law - precedent and legal reasoning. Case
studies of particular relevance will be examined: negligence (consumer
protection); nuisance (environmental controls); and strict liability (hazardous
materials).
Judges as a source of law - the main judicial approaches to statutory
interpretation (plain meaning or policy), the context of words in
a statute, the audience, the purpose. Particular rules; meanings limited
to class or association, gaps in a statute, inconsistent provisions,
conflict with property rights, penal provisions.
BS428
Administration and Management
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Introduction to management techniques with particular references to
Government agencies. Study of the environmental health officer's role
within structured frameworks of Government agencies.
Consideration of financial and resource management with particular
reference to Government agencies.
Data processing, information management, use of statistics and other
administrative processes.
Ove~~ew of practcces and procedures necessary to support the
occupat~onalramework of environmental health otitcers
BS447 Administrative Law
Two hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
To consider efficient internal administrative procedures to ensure
against liability for negligent advice.
Regulatory controls - Commonwealth Impact Statements, State
Environment Effects Statements. Planning Effect Statements, Health
Impact Statements.
The role of the Ombudsman and Committees of Enquiry.
The Administrative Law Act and review by courts and tribunals of the
Administrative Process, the application of the rules of natural justice,
notice and fair hearing, the duty to give reasons, impartiality and bias.
Challenging decisions made:
(1) in excess of statutory powers.
(2) unreasonably, or
(3) for improper purpose or bad faith.
The Freedom of Information Act and its interpretation by the courts.
Changing the law, and involvement by environmental health officers
in changes to building controls, role and structure of local government,
and food laws.
BS510 Business Studies
Five hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in computing and
instrumentation.
Accounting
The business environment: financial statements (balance sheet and
profitlloss); analysls and interpretation; cash managementhash budgeting;
finance decisions.
Economics
Markets and efficient resource allocation: demand analysis; production
and cost analysis; an introduction to profit and pricing.
BS513
Business Studies
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer science, and
mathematics and computer science.
The purpose of this course is to provide students with a workable
knowledge of the accounting principles and concepts, with an
understanding of how accounting information is reported and used
in decision-making.
On completion of this subject the students should be able to:
Outline the major internal and external users of accounting
information.
Explain how accounting information may be used to assist in
making business decisions.
Be able to prepare accountinq - reports . - balance sheet. . and
.
Drofit
and loss s'taternents.
Prepare a bank reconciliation statement and understand its role in
cash control.
Prepare a cash budget and cash flow statement.
Select and use financial ratios to analyse the profitability and
financial stability of a business entity.
Text: Bell, A. (Editor). Introductory Accounting and Finance. Nelson,
1990.

BS514
Business Studies - Economics
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree courses in computer science, and
mathematics and computer science.
Provides an introduction to the techniques of economics (a social
science) used in analysing business behaviour and the business
environment within which students can expect to be employed.
Considers the relevance to management decision making of the
following topics: Markets and efficient resource allocation, demand
analysis, production and cost analysis, profit and pricing, industry
economics, Australian trade and protection issues.
BS517
Business Studies
Two hours per week for one semester
A second and third year subject of the degree course in mathematics
and computer science.
The general objective of the unit is to provide students with an
understanding of concepts and methods employed in accounting and
finance that assist management in decision making, planning and
control.
BS617
Computers and the Law
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by segment tests or some combination of
segment tests and assignments
An optional fourth-year subject for students majoring in computing.
An introduction to the legal system will be followed by a discussion
of selected aspects of industriallintellectual property law, tort, contract
and trade practices law relevant to the needs of future computer
professionals.
BS618
Management of Human Resources
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by tests and assignments
An optional fourth-year subject for students majoring in computing.
The objectives of the subject are to enable students to:
(a) understand the nature and importance of human resources as an
organisational asset;
(b) obtain a better understanding of themselves, their impact on other
people and the way other people influence their own behaviour;
(c) explore the implications of both work groups and informal groups
in organisations;
(d) consider the impact of alternative organisation designs on organisational
effectiveness:
and
(e) understand the role of managers and the Impact of alternative
manager~al style on organ~sat~onal effectiveness
BS619
Business and Management
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in computer-aided chemistry
and computer-aided biochemistry.
Buslness adm~n~strat~on, buslness communlcatlons and lndustr~al
relat~ons lndustr~al motlvatlon and lob satlsfactlon Leadershl~ In
The buslness envlronment - the effects of soc~al, legal, economic,
~olltlcal and technolw~cal - factors lndustr~alnnovatlon
Financial decision making - cost factors, sales forecasts, profitability,
potential return on investment and associated risks, capital investment
planning, Dudgeting.
The function of research and development in the chemical and
biochemical industries.
Safety and legal liability (towards oneself and others) in the chemical
and biochemical industries.
BS720
Faculty of Applied Science
Chemistry and the Law
Two hours per week of lecturesRutorials
A subject in the graduate diploma in industrial chemistry.
Law and administration
Principles of law, industrial tribunals and the courts. Court decisions
concerning industrial injury and compensation. Industrial relations law.
Industrial hygiene, occupational health and safety with relation to
chemistry. Status of regulations and codes-of-practice.
Control of chemical and industrial hazards
Regulations covering noise and vibration, heat, cold, dust, ventilation,
and ionising and non-ionising radiation in the chemical laboratory.
Factors involved in laboratory design. Australian standards. Problems
with flammable and explosive substances. Fire precautions.
Toxic chemicals and biochemicals and methods of
assessment of toxicity.
Evaluation and control measures for carcinogenesis, mutagenesis,
teratogenesis. Use of mammalian and sub-mammalian systems in
assessing toxic effects in man. TLV's and LD.,'s. Reoulations
relating t6the use of animals in research. ~egulatiori: concerning biochemical
research. Statutes of ethics committees. Chemicals in food
(natural and additives).
BS2530 Environmental Health Law
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Legislation relevant to the health surveyor in Local Government: the
Health Act, enabling legal provisions, e.g. nuisance, sanitary, infectious
disease, bi-laws, building, accommodation, incidental controls.
The Food Act - controls on food premises, preparation and sale of
food, etc. Warranties, third party procedure, defence of reasonable
precautions. Provisions with respect to prosecution.
Incidental powers and controls by virtue of the Local Government Act
will also be considered.
Legislation relevant to the health surveyor in State Government
Authorities.
Health Comm~ss~on -In add~t~on to the Health Act and the Food Act.
further relevant leo~slat~on w~th respect to druos - and health servlces
will be considerea.
Env~ronment Protect~on Author~ty (and agenc~es) Cons~derat~on of the
Envlronment Protect~on Act. State Envlronment Protect~on pollcles and
regulations thereunder.
Relevant judgements on the applicationlinterpretation of the legislation
will be studied.
BS2540 Legal Procedure and Evidence
Four hours per week for one semester
A second year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
The leqal process of prosecution - choosinq the appropriate court,
who may prosecute, the rule against ambiguous allegations, what must
be ~Decified in the information and summons. rules with respect to
serv/ce and proof of same. Time limits. ~djournment.
The civil and criminal trial process. Differences in trial procedures for
summary and indictable offences. Pleas, examination of witnesses,
powers of the court.
The rules of ev~dence. statutory and judlclal developments, the burden
and standards of proof. hearsav. documents. admissions. lmorooerlv
obtained evidende, competeni'and compellable witnesses, eipeit
witnesses, judicial notice and other relevant evidentiary issues will be
considered.
In the context of the mock trials, which will commence from the initial
interview of a complainant, particular problems relating to both
procedure and evidence, sampling and entry powers will be
considered.
Particular problems caused by the concept of legal personal~ty when
prosecutlno the corporate defendant and whether crlmlnal sanctions
are approGiate will be examined

CE560 Environmental Engineering and
Planning
Six hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
The hydrologic cycle. Rainfall measurement. Run-off processes. Flood
estimation.
lntroduction to drainage system design. Open channel flow. Water
quality standards, treatment processes for drinking water, swimming
pools and spa baths.
Soil classification systems including laboratory and field identification
and classification. Soil permeability and ground water flow.
Solid waste treatment and disposal. Recycling. Sewage treatment
processes. The decay cycle. Primary, secondary and tertiary treatment.
Sewage treatment plants. Lagoon systems.
lntroduction to land use planning with particular emphasis on the role
of the environmental health officer.
Structure and process of planning in Victoria including neighbourhood
and regional planning.
Planning scheme surveys including environmental impact
assessments.
IT101 Computer Fundamentals
Fourteen hours per week for five weeks
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
An understanding of the principles of operation of computer hardware
and software.
To study the way in which information is represented in computers.
To introduce the skills required to use both micro and mainframe
operating environments.
Syllabus
History of computing: early computing devices, dawn of the modern
computer, generations of computers.
lntroduction to computer architecture: CPU architectures, main
storage, machine language. Secondary storage: principles of operation
of magnetic tapes, disks, mass storage devices, bubble memory,
optical disks. InputlOutput devices. lntroduction to data
communications.
Data representation: data versus information, number systems, representation
of numbers and alphanumeric data, integer arithmetic.
lntroduction to operating systems: Data management, time sharing,
batch and on-line svstems.
Programming concepts: compilers, translaters, and assemblers.
Appropriate and inappropriate computer applications.
Programming environment: using micro and mainframe operating
systems; file management, utilities, editors, compilers, command procedures,
introduction to JCL.
IT102
lntroduction to Programming
Seven hours per week for ten weeks
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
To introduce students to commercial programming and to proven
programming styles and techniques by the use of the programming
language, C. This language contains the ingredients generally considered
to be essential to illustrate structured programming constructs
and. in addition, it is a language in current commercial use. The course
emphasises data processing, in that the language is used as a vehicle
by which to maintain data sets and produce reports from those data
--a-
SGW.
Students write the type of programs common in commercial installations
and the level of complexity is that of control 'break reporting' and
sequential file update. Students will also study the environment of
programming; i.e., program specification, testing and documentation.
Syllabus
Program Structure: sequence, selection, iteration.
Demonstration Program: program execution and simple modification.
Data Types: declaration, characters, strings, decimal, binary.
Flow of Control: DOWHILE. IF, SELECT, DO UNTIL, LEAVE, REPEAT,
GOT0 and labels.
Basic InputIOutput: stream 110, list directed 110, ON ENDFILE, SKIP,
LINE, PAGE.
String Processing: characterslstrings, string operators, concatenation,
INDEX, SUBSTR.
Arrays: declaration and reference, operations; searching, modifying,
sorting, modifying, merging; multi-dimensional arrays.
Procedures: declarationlcall, argument passing, procedures and
structured programming, locallglobal variables, scope.
Structures: declaration, assignment of values, structure 110.
Files: streamlrecord 110, file types; serial, index sequential, direct.
File Processing Techniques: serial processing; reporting, selection
reporting, control break, file update. Index sequential processing:
selection reporting.
IT103 Business Applications 81 Systems 1
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
The alms of this unit are to:
Introduce students to the component parts of common business
sytems such as Inventory, Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable.
Give students skills in using personal computers particularly in pro-
ductivity tools such as word processing, spreadsheets and . graphics. .
Examine the use of computers In accounting inlormat~on systems,
other transaction Drocesslna -. svstems and manaaement - information
systems.
Syllabus
lntroduction to: lnformation Svstems and Accountina: The role of
computers In lnformation systems. lntroductlon to-the personal
computer. word processlng. spreadsheets - LOTUS 123.
Svstem components: a system - identlflcatlon of components. Flles
chssification, recording; updating, documenting syst'ems.
". -
Accountina Svstems: lntearitv Accountina oackaae. inventorv.
accounts Gcehable, accou&s bayable
Reporting to Managerlal Declslon Makers. concepts of management
information systems and decision support systems.
Microcomputer systems: lntroduction to business support systems;
spreadsheets, dBase etc. Report generators.
Computer based data conversion: graphics. Business presentation
tools. Integrated packages.
Case study presentations.
IT104 Management and Communications
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
To provide students with:
(a) an understanding of the nature and importance of communication.
interpersonal skills and group development to organisational
management;
(b) to develop students' interpersonal skills and skills as team
members;
(c) to allow students to experiment with various techniques, theories
and approaches to communications and management through the
use of experiential teaching techniques;
(d) to prepare students to appreciate the context of work and their
own roles as organisation members;
(e) to provide a foundation for subsequent studies.
Syllabus
Communication, Perception, Transactional Analysis.
Interviewing skills.
Organisation culture: The Nature of groups, communicating in groups,
understanding groups, group presentations, group effectiveness, and
organisation research.
Oral presentations: report writing.
Assertiveness skills: negotiation skills.
Group project

-2
IT122 Mathematics
Four hours per week for one semester
An elective subject of the Bachelor of lnformation Technology course.
Syllabus
Methodology: the development of operations research, the scientific
approach to decision making problems, the art of model construction
and the science of model solution, data collection, implementation.
applications.
Linear programming: the formulation of linear programming problems,
graphical solution of two variable problems, the Simplex methods,
sensitivity analysis, transportation, trans-shipment, assignment, the
use of computer packages such as SASIOR.
Inventory control: inventory systems, economic order quantity, quantity
discounts, safety stock under uncertainty.
Network models: problem formulation, shortest path problems,
maximum flow prblems, the crital path method and PERT, maximum
spanning tree problems, relationships to linear programming and
transportation
IT201
Decision Analysis
Four hours per week for fifteen weeks
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
To familiarise students with a range of statistical, financial and
modelling methods commonly used in the decision support area. The
application of techniques to solve business problems and to present
the results using software packages such as LOTUS, MINITAB,
Haward Presentation Graphics etc. is emphasised.
Syllabus
Faculty of Applied Science
IT203 Business Applications & Systems 2
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT103 Business Applications and Systems 1
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
To train students to:
devel0D a simple business a~~lication
. . usinq - a micro-com~uter
package; '
specify the data inputs, file contents and information requirements
for common production systems such as Job Cost and Bill of
Materials;
specify data that needs to be used to integrate common business
applications and to be able to achieve this on the computer;
explain how systems are justified, developed, implemented and
maintained.
Syllabus
Data base Management concepts: File concepts, reporting tool (Dbase
1111 "',.
Systems Development Concepts: Packages v Bespoke, Systems life
cycle, Prototyping, Professional development v User development.
Internal controls: Developing effective internal controls and audit trails.
Justification and selection of Systems.
Production systems: Job Cost, Bill of Materials.
Systems implementation, operation and maintenance.
Types of application systems: Transaction - general purpose and
vertical market, Decision support and Expert systems - examination
of the necessary hardware, software and people resources required.
Data transportability: Micro-mainframe links, PC to PC links, Systems
Integration - including General Ledger, Integrated Software.
Case Study presentations. . .
An introduction to modelling concepts. IT204 Accounting 1
Basic statistical ~deas such as probability and the combination of
probabilities, probability distributions and their applications, statistical
measures ..-.- . (mean. variance). introductorv time serles analvsis. linear
regression: introduction to'simulation. '
Statistical applications through the use of sources of data, data collection
and manipulation with packages such as MINITAB.
Financial analysis: the concept of interest, present value methods, discounted
cash flow, internal rates of return.
Throughout the course analysis and graphical presentations by using
packages such as LOTUS is emphasised.
IT202
COBOL programming
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT102 lntroduction to Programming
A first-year subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Objectives
To train students to be able to:
read, understand, modify and debug COBOL programs;
design, write, test and document attractive well-structured
programs in COBOL;
describe the main features of 1985 ANSI COBOL.
Svllabus - . ----
C~BOL fundamentals: COBOL structure, syntax, examples, simple
vocabulary (PERFORM, MOVE. ACCEPT, DISPLAY, etc.).
Sequential files: Review file concepts, tapeldisk, file verbs.
Arithmetic: ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY, DIVIDE, COMPUTE.
Moves: Numeric, alphanumeric, group, MOVE CORRESPONDING.
Editing: Fixed insertion, floating insertion, replacement.
Reports: Layouts, headings, page control, page numbering.
Data validation: IFIELSE, nested IFs, sign &class tests, range & limit
tests, compound statements, 88 levels.
Control group reporting: DOWHILE v IF group processing, group totals.
group indication, group headings, summary reports.
Testing and debugging: Testing strategies, test data. TRACE. EXHIBIT.
Indexed files: Physical description of indexed files, VSAM v ISAM,
random v sequential access, EnvironmentlData division entries, verbs.
Data base: Definition, access, processing.
Tables: REDEFINES, review table concepts, 1-dimension tables,
PERFORM VARYING, binary search, SEARCH, SEARCH ALL.
Multiple file processing: Merges, mergelreplace, master file update,
master file maintenance update.
String processing: TRANSFORM, INSPECT, STRING, UNSTRING.
Sorts: Sort, merge, work file, key fields, SORT verb, input procedure,
output procedure.
Sub-programs: Program design & development, modular design,
cohesion, coupling.
COBOU85: New features, structure, conversion.
Four hours per week for fifteen weeks
A first-vear subiect of the bachelor of information technoloav course.
Objectives
To enable students to initiate, monitor and control a simple accounting
system for small business within its total environment by ensuring
that students are able to:
(i) Recognise, derive and communicate relevant financial information
for decision making.
(ii) Recognise those controls necessary to ensure accuracy of data
and security of assets in both manual and computerised
accounting environments.
Syllabus
lntroduction to Business lnformation Systems.
Accountina Svstems and Accountina ReDortS.
The Data -mliection and ~ecording-System.
Balance Sheet Presentation.
Specialised Journals and Subsidiary Ledgers
'OSting Journals to Ledgers.
General Ledgers: Operation and Purpose.
Accounts Receivable.
lntroduction to Cash Book Recording.
Bank Reconciliation Statements.
Final reports and Balance Day Adjustments.
IT222
Mathematics
Four hours per week for one semester
An elective subject of the Bachelor of lnformation Technology course.
Syllabus
Queueing theory, Markov chams and processes, matrix manipulations.
analytical geometry, variance reduction methods and simulation.
Forecasting, scheduling, maintenance and replacement theory.
advanced stock control and inventory

IT301 Systems Software 1
Twenty seven hours per week for three weeks
Prerequisite. successful completion of the segments one
and two.
A f~rst-year summer term subject of the bachelor of lnformatlon
technology course.
Objectives
To develop an understanding of the fundamental principles of operatino
svstems so as to oromote a more efficient use of the resources
p;Gv&d inthe comp;ting environment, and to prepare for more indepth
studies in later systems software units.
To emphasise aspects of operating systems that impact directly on
the user interface so as to increase the students immediate usefulness
in the first industrial placement.
Syllabus
Operating system principles: introduction, operating system services,
file systems, process scheduling, memory management, virtual
memorv. storaae svstem scheduling, deadlocks, job and task
-
Systems programming: system utilities, backup and recovery,
command procedures and JCL. package installation, security systems,
job entry subsystems. resource management.
IT302 Organisation Behaviour
Twenty-one hours per week for three wee~s
A first-year summer term subject of the bachelor of information
technology course.
Objectives
1. To give students an understanding of current issues, and research
in organisational behaviour and the conceptual and
methodological considerations which apply to this field of study.
2. To give students a better understanding of themselves, their impact
on other people, and the way other people influence thew own
behaviour.
3. To allow students to experience the satisfaction and difficulties
inherent in working groups, to improve their skills as team
members and team leaders. and to be able to explain the nature
of their experience in groups in terms of other theories.
4. To give students practice in interpreting and explaining complex
oraanisational behavioural situations in terms of current theories
ad concepts.
5. To prepare students to interpret and understand the behavioural
environment of their employing organisation and of their own role
within it
Syllabus
lnvestiaatina behaviour in organisations (Research); leadership, power
and inhence; organisational politics; organisational change; conflict
and consensus: .. -~ motivation: iob satisfaction; problem solving; decision
making; dynamics within Goups; dynamics between groups.
IT303 Data Base Management Systems 1
Twenty-seven hours per week for three weeks
Prerequisites, IT202 COBOL Programming
IT203 Business Applications and Systems 2
A first-year summer term subject of the bachelor of information
technology course.
Objectives
To enable students to learn how a DBMS is used in the development
of systems.
Syllabus
Introduction: what is a data base, the need for the data base, Data
Dictionaries.
Logical Design: data analysis, data modelling, normalization, design
toais.
Physical Design: data analysis, data modelling, normalization, design
-
tools.
Phvsical Data Oraanisation: hardware, data structures, access
meihods.
DBMS Models: relational, network, hierarchical.
Practical work involving the definition, loading and accessing of data
bases will be done on one relational and one non-relational system.
Current DBMS's: a comparative study of the major Data Base Management
Systems in current use. Particular emphasis will be placed on
systems that the student will encounter in their Industry Based
Learning segments.
IT322
Mathematics
An elective subject of the bachelor of information technology course.
Syllabus
Quality control concepts and applications to manufacture. Logistics.
Systems and location prblems.
Vehicle scheduling and control.
IT401 Industry Based Learning
Twenty weeks full-time project work in ~ndustry.
Prerequisite, satisfactory completion of the subjects of
the first three segments
A second-year segment of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To gain first hand experience of the operation of the information technology
environment, the work of data processing departments and the
workings of organisations.
To extend the learning of the preceding segments of the course, in
particular to gain experience of programming, systems software and
the information technology environment of business and industry.
To address issues which can better be learned from within the tndustrial
environment - such as user liaison and systems security.
Syllabus
Skde?!s .:=:!: ~~der the supervision of both the Industrial Sponsor
and the Student Manager.
Projects and Assignments and participation in the professional
activities of sponsors data processing and information technology
environments are assessed by Student Manager and lndustry
Supervisor.
Students are expected to gain experience in the following areas:
Programming, Systems Design, User Liaison, and Security and to be
closely involved with the application of at least two of the following:
Data Base Communications, User Support, and Systems Software.
IT422 Mathematics
Four hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, IT222 Mathematics
An elective subject of the Bachelor of lnformation Technology course.
Syllabus
Advanced forecasting, data acquisition through sample survey.
Manufacturing and business applications of probability theory: portfolio
problems, bidding problems, defective production.
IT501 Systems and lnformation Analysis 1
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisites, IT303 Data Base Management Systems 1
A second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
This unit provides students with the skills necessary to perform information
analvsis and data modellinq for detailed ap~lications
. . as well as
at the coiporate level.
Students make extensive use of appropriate software tools to help
them develop blueprints for subsequent computer implementation.
By the end of the unit students should be able to:
1. Develop a working prototype database in an SOL-type system for
a small application.
2. Prepare a logical system model for a small application, to be used
as a structured desian soecification.
3. Analvse corporate in6rmit1on requirementsand hence contribute
to the preparation of a Strateg~c Data Model for an organ~satlon
4 Select the ~nforrnat~on analvs~s amroach aooroDrlate to a oaillcular
situation from a range of 'modeliing techn'iques and to'ols.
Syllabus
Systems, Data and Models.
Data Analysis - user views of data; Data Dictionaries.
Detailed Data Modelling - integrating user views; relational data
model; implementation in SOL.
Structured Systems Analysis - Data Flow Diagrams; structured
design software; transforms.
New Systems Model - Modifying the DFD; Logical Access Models;
Data Base Action Diagrams; Implementation considerations; Controls.
Corporate lnformation Systems - Corporate Data Modelling; Data
Administration; Levels; Planning, control, operational; scope;
corporate, divisional, local.
Corporate Data Modelling Techniques.
Selecting the Modelling approach.

IT502 Systems Software 2
~ive hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT301 Systems Software 1
An optional second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To make an in-depth study of a mainframe operating system such as
MVS or VM. The architecture of the mainframe as well as the
assembler language 1s studied so as to examlne the inter-relationship
between svstems software and the cornouter's architecture. The role
of the sfitems programmer as disiinct from the applications
programmer is considered.
Syllabus
Assembler programming: Introductory concepts. instruction formats,
decimal instructions. data transfer and sequence control, edit
instructions, binary data and instructions, address modification and
arrays, bit and bye manipulations, inputloutput macros, subroutines
and linkages.
Systems programming: Testing and debugging with assembler languages.
style, documentation of systems software, problem determination
(dump reading), systems utilities, file systems (VSAMIAMS),
system generation, system maintenance, recovery and termination
management, security.
Computer architecture: CPU and ALU princlplesof operation, divisions
of storaae. addressina mechanisms, sloraae - boundaries, ooeration
and interfacing of inphloutput devices.
IT503 Data Base Management Systems 2
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite. IT303 Data Base Management Systems 1
A second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To build upon the concepts and techniques learned in IT303. Logical
Desian conceots exoanded bv a formal studv of relational theow and
norm>lisation enable students*to understand developments in thefield.
Implementation and physical design skills are enhanced by an
examination of the factors affecting performance.
Syllabus
Relational theorylnormalisation.
Design Methodologies.
Factors affecting performance.
Analysis of transactions and transaction volumes.
Data Base sizina.
Physical design-
Maintenance and creation of data bases.
IT504 Data Communications 1
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
A second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To amlllarlse the student with the basic concepts, terminology and
jargon of the area. Standards, as developed by the International Standards
Organisation (ISO) and IBM are emphasised to give the student
a sound basis for understanding the dramatic developments in this
area.
Syllabus
Introduction. Historical developments, Data transmission, !SO, Linklevel
orotocols. The electrical interface. RS-232, Terminal based
networks, Computer networks, IBM and Telecom.
Faculty of Applied Science
IT505 Knowledge Engineering
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
An optional second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To enable students to:
Explain what expert systems are, how they developed and who is using
them.
Discuss how expert systems differ from conventional software programs,
laboratory artificial intelligence programs in particular and
human beings who perform tasks expertly.
Explain the basic concepts of artificial intelligence and knowledge
engineering that affect design and implementation.
Analyse the architectural choices faced in building expert systems,
including specific design prescriptions for tasks of different kinds.
Examine the evolutionary process of knowledge acquisition needed
to put expertise into a machine.
Analyse the comparative strengths and weaknesses of existing knowledge
engineering tools by using different techniques on an 'identical'
problem.
Discuss the pitfalls and opportunities that arise from the important
need to evaluate artificial expertise.
Syllabus.
Role of artlflcial intelligence (Al) developments in business computing
- what is Al, who uses it and why, what it has produced so far, why
the business and industry world is interested in it.
Knowledge, engineering topics, problems of extracting expert knowledge,
iterative development of expert systems.
Categories of expert systems: evidence gathering, stepwise refinement,
stepwise assembly.
Knowledge representation: rule based, logic or example-based, framebased
representation in reasoning.
General levels of expert systems: assistant, colleague, expert. Process
of building an expert system - task definition, initial design, knowledge
extraction, technology transfer, use of expert system shells, evaluation
and selection of appropriate shells for specific problem types
Expert systems in use in financial services, finance and administration,
manufacturing, engineering, sales and marketing, data processing
and MIS, field service and education.
Hardware and data base implications of expert system applications.
including 5th generation hardware, management and social issues.
IT506 Expert Systems
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT505 Knowledge Engineering
An optional second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To enable students to:
select appropriate tools to apply to a commercial problem
from a range including object oriented languages (e.g.
LISP. PROLOG), micro-computer based expert system
shells (e.g. VP-Expert, Guru), mainframe based expert
system shells (e.g. IBM's ESE, Cullinet's Application
Expert), or Expert System Languages (e.g. ISR's XL);
. develop control strategies, explanations and user interfaces
via LISP, PROLOG and ISR's XL;
discuss strategies of supervising the development of
expert systems.
Syllabus
The ranae of tools available to build exoert svstems. These include
convent'hnal programming languages,'objedt oriented languages,
microcomputer and mainframe ihelis, and spec~allsed expert system
lanauaaes not classtbed as shells Th~sectlon also lnvolves evaluat~on
of

IT507 Computer Graphics and Imaging 1
Five hours per week for f~fteen weeks
Prerequisite, Mathematics IT222
An optional subject of the second-year of the bachelor of information
technology course.
Objectives
To introduce the fundamanetal concepts of computer graphics. The
emphasis is on the programming techniques that are tnvolved in
producing computer graphic images.
Syllabus
Introduction, definition of graphics, range of applications.
Graphics hardware, display devices, hardcopy, input devices.
Two dimensional graphics primitives. Two dimensional object transformations,
matrix representation, composite transformations.
Windowing and clipping. Object representatlon, display lists.
segmentation.
IT509 Software Engineering 1
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
A second-year subject of the bachelor of information technology
course.
Objectives
To develop an understanding of the bas~c problems which are
encountered in the development of computer software and the current
tools and techniques which are used by industry to overcome these
problems.
Students are expected to apply these studies to thelr own software
projects and to their knowledge to develop an ability to part~cipate as
a successful member of a software project team.
Syllabus
The software life cycle: An introduction to the concepts of requirements
definition, software specification, software design, programming practice,
testing and debugging, documentation and malntenance and the
user interface.
IT601 Systems and lnformation Analysis 2
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT501 Systems and lnforrnation Analys~s 1
An optional third year subject of the Bachelor of lnforrnation
Technology course.
Objectives
This unit will build on the technical knowledge gained in earlier units
and provide students with an understanding of the various ways in
which the total corporate computing environment can be des~gned to
meet corporate information needs and support corporate goals.
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
understand the way that managers think and work and the need for
computer systems to Improve thew effectiveness in decision making;
justify the need for careful analysis, r~sk assessment and control
procedures suitable for different systems development approaches;
describe the methodologies in use in organisations and to determine
the correct development approach for different systems;
understand the need for d~fferent approaches to computer systems
devel0Dment ro ensure that corDorate information needs are met an0
computing producttvity is maiimised.
Syllabus
lnformation Systems Theory - information needs of management,
impact of information systems on strategic corporate plans
Traditional Life Cycle development.
Fact finding.
Problems with traditional life cycle development.
User driven computing - elimination of the functtons of user and
analyst, user abilities, quality assurance, private systems; resource
requirements - hardware, software and support structures.
Prototyping - methodology and scope, varlatlons In roles, controls
framework.
Management issues - management of malntenance, risk assessment
and control revtew, securlty and privacy, human resource planning.
use and misuse of methodologies.
IT602 Systems Software 3
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite. IT301 Systerns Software 1
An optional subject of the Bachelor of lnformation Technology course.
Objectives
The aim of this untt IS to make an in-depth study of an operating system
such as PICK andlor UNlX which IS hardware independent.
The architecture of the operating system will be examined to discover
what features lead to its portability and what costs portability is
ach~eved. The h~gh level language, appropriate for the particular
operating system will be studied so as to examine the relationship between
systems software and the operating system's architecture.
Syllabus
Architecture: history, operattng system model, host dependent
features, methods of portability, device interfaces. File systems.
Command Isnguage: the user interface, functionality of the operating
system
Systems programmlng: an examination of the programming language
which directly accesses the operating system functions such as C for
UNlX or PICUlBASIC for PICK. Device drivers.
Systerns administratton: system generation, user control, security.
IT603 Data Base Management Systems 3
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
An optlonal thtrd year subject of the Bachelor of lnformatlon
Technology course
Syllabus
Thts unit completes the study of database management systems of
units DBMS 1 & 2 The topics studled In thls unlt are
- database recovery
- database tnteqrtty
- concurrency
- database security
- d~strtbuted databases
- spec~al purpose database machlnes
IT606
Artificial Intelligence
Ftve hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequtsite. IT505 Knowledge Engtneering
An opt~onal thtrd year subject of the Bachelor of lnforrnation
Technology courss.
Objectives
At the end of thls unit the student should be able to:
discuss knowledge representation via rules and frames, in a variety
of circumstances, other appropriate data structures and devise
appropriate search strategies;
discuss a number of reasoninglinferencing systems, their
advantages and drawbacks;
known the state-of-the-art research In vlslon systems, natural language
and self-learning systems.
Syllabus
Knowledge acqu~sitton, based upon the Buchanan model of identificatlon,
conceptual~sation, formalisation, im~lementation and testing. -
Advanced knowledge representatlon, lncludlng frames, semantlc nets.
rules, rulelframe combtnat~ons, structured object representatlon.
Explanations, using extsting expert systems such as XPLAIN.
Current research areas In Artifical Intelligence with particular reference
to '5th Generation'. These include vision, digital image processing,
natural language, pattern tnatchtng, d~alogue phenomena, self-learning,
learning from example

IT607 Computer Graphics and Imaging 2
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, IT507 Computer Imaging and Graphics 1
An optional third year subject of the Bachelor of lnformation
Technology course.
Objectives
This unit builds on the work already done in Computer Graphics and
Imaging 1, by extending the study into three dimensional graphics work
and by providing an in-depth examination of advanced application
areas, such as computer animation, CAD and Computer Imaging.
Syllabus
Three dimensional graphics primatives, co-ordinate systems.
Object representation, solids, surfaces, fractal surfaces.
Object transformations in three dimensions.
Projections for 3D viewing.
Object rendering, hidden line and surface methods, ray tracing,
shading.
User interface design.
IT609 Software Engineering 2
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Prerequisite, Software Engineering 1
An optional third year subject of the Bachelor of lnformation
Technology course.
Objectives
This unit aims to develop in more detail some of the basic notions
of software life cycle as studied in Software Engineering 1.
A greater emphasis will be placed upon the formal methods available
to software engineers and their use in large software projects. Students
should be able to apply their understanding to the development of
modern software systems and become fully participating members of
software project teams.
Syllabus
Software Configuration Management, Software Quality Management,
Software Desiqn Methods, Software Engineering Economics and
Systems ~nal6is.
IT701 lndustry Based Learning 2
Twenty weeks full-time project wqrk in industry
Prerequisite: satisfactory completion of the subjects of
the first six segments of the course
Objectives
To gain first hand experience of the operation of the information
technology environment, the work of data processing departments and
the workings of organisations.
To extend the learning of the preceding segments of the course, in
particular the specialist studies undertaken.
To address issues which can better be learned from within the industrial
envlronment and to galn an understanding of the relatlonshlp between
the ~nformat~on technoloav envlronment to the total orqanlsat-
Syllabus
Students will work as members of the data processing and information
technology environments to which they are assigned. Students
will work under the supervision of both an Industrial Manager and a
Student Manager.
Students will be expected to extend on their academic studies and
galn further experience In the general areas of Programmlng, Systems
Deslan < . User
- - ~
Llalson and Securltv. and to be closely lnvolved wlth the
application of at lea3 four of the following in their two periods of
Industry Based Learning; Data Base, Communications. User Support,
Systems Software, 4GL's, Expert Systems.
Faculty of Applied Science
IT801 Project
Five hours per week for fifteen weeks
Perequisite, satisfactory completion of segments one to
seven
A subject of the final summer semester of the course.
Objectives
To integrate studies in analysis, design, programming and project
implementation. To allow students to pursue specialist studies in
greater depth, to allow students to appreciate practical project ~mplementation
in a controlled academic envlronment; and to continue the
relationship with an industrial sponsor.
Syllabus
The project will be a small group based activity conducted in liaison
with industrial sponsors.
The actual projects wlll be declded during the period of the second
industrial placement. It IS expected that the project will be a commercial
mainframe application
IT802 Seminars and Project Management
and Control
Ten hours per week for nine weeks
Prerequisite, satisfactory completion of Segments one
to seven.
A subject of the final summer semester of the course.
Objectives
To provide students with a capstone series building on and rounding
out the studies of the course.
To present the latest developments and trends in the data processing
industry.
To discuss in a more formal environment issues surrounding commercial
and industrial information technoloav environments to ensure
that experience of the industry based learsng period are understood
within the broader context of the industry.
To discuss in more depth matters which may have been only peripherally
treated in earlier studies.
Syllabus
Students will attend a series of seminars, ranging from a half day to
a several week sequence, covering selected topics such as:
Consultancy and training, Leadership, Industrial Relations, User
Liaison Strategies, Computers and the Law, Security controls and
audit, Technology and Innovation, Technology and Society, Current
Issues in Systems Management.
ME249 Environmental Engineering
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Part A: Mechanical engineering plant
Principles and standards to be met by heating, ventilating, lighting,
air-conditioning, refrigeration, steam and high pressure hot water planb
- tests on boiler plants such as the Ringleman, 02, CO and CO
tests. Recognition and analysls of problems, reports and recommendations,
maintenance of records.
Part 8: Vibration/acoustics
Theory and practice of vibration and noise control applied to equipment
and plant including ventilation systems and food processing
plant. Codes of practice for noise emission and control.
Minimising the health risks associated with high levels of vibration and
noise.
MP107
Engineering Drawing
Two hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject of the degree course in environmental health.
Introduction to the technique of Engineering Drawing: equipment,
methods and standards.
Illustration of buildings, equipment, materials in drawn form including
concept of scaling.
Interpretation of symbols relative to the illustration of buildings,
equipment and materials.
Topics will include dwelling construction, ventilation systems, waste
disposal equipment, drains and pipeworks.

Academic staff ........................................................ 100 Subjects offered by other faculties ....................... 126
Courses offered ...................................................... 101 ...
Career opportunities ............................................... 101 Combined degree of Bachelor of Business1
Eligibility ................................................................. 101 Bachelor of Arts (Japanese)..............................
129
Applications ............................................................ 101 (Italian) ................................... 130
Deferred entry ......................................................... 102 (Korean)..................................
130
Exemptions ............................................................. 102 .
Course requirements ............................................... 103 General information .............................................. 1
-Major strands ...................................................... 103 . -Amendment to enrolment ..................................... 103 Swinburne Institute information ........................... 17
-Leave of absence ................................................ 104
-Withdrawal...........................................................
104
-Subject selection ................................................. 104
-Assessment ......................................................... 104
Scholarships and Prizes ......................................... 105
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark ............................. 105
Departments in the Faculty of Arts .......................... 105
Media Studies ....................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Italian ..................................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Japanese ............................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Psychology .........................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Political Studies .................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Sociology ...........................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Interdisciplinary studies
Asian Studies .....................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Australian Studies ..............................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Intmduction to Language ..................................
-Interdisciplinary subject .......................................
Bachelor of Business/Bacheior of Arts (Japanese)
Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts (Italian) ...
Bachelor of BuslneaslBachelor of Arts orean an)..
bstgraduate carrses
Graduate Diploma in Applied Psychology ............
-Subject details .....................................................
Graduate Diploma in Equal Opportunity
Administration ....................................................
Graduate Diploma in Japanese .............................
-Subject details .....................................................
Graduate Diploma in Japanese for Professionals
Graduate Diploma in Uhan Research
and Policy ...........................................................
-Subject details .....................................................
Master of Arts in Counselling Psychology ...........
Master of Arts (by research) .................................
Doctor of Phibsophy ............................................

Faculty of Arts
Dean
Professor L.A. Kilrnartin, BA(Q'ld), MA(ANU), PhD(LaT),
MAPsS
Associate Dean
F.X. Walsh, BA(Melb), BEd(Mon)
Sub-Deans
Students: G. Nichols, BA(Mon)
Research: T.G. Castleman, BA(Hons)(lND), PhD(Mon)
Assistant Registrar (Arts)
H.M. Ralston, BCorn(Melb)
Administrative Officer
G. Quirk
Laboratory Manager
A. Rice
Academic staff
Department of Humanities
Chair
R.L. Love, BSc(Q'ld), CHPS(Cantab), MA(Melb),
PhD(Melb)
Principal Lecturer
M. Harney, MA(Melb), DipEd(Melb), PhD(ANU),
GradDipArt(AppF&TV)(SIT)
Senior Lecturers
N. Fukushirna, MA(Mon), DipEd(Tok)
L.A. Hougaz, MA(Melb), DipEd
H. Kannegiesser, BA(Melb), MEd(Mon)
T. Machida, BA(Tok), MEd(LaT)
A. Skoutarides, BA(Hons), PhD(Mon)
Lecturers
J.J. Arnold. BA(Melbl. Di~EdfMelb). M.A.C.E.
D -. . Fai
DipEd(MCAE)
A.E. Gare, BA(Hons)(WA), PhD(Murd)
A. Hakeern, MA(Dacca and Cantab)
PJ. Healv. BA(HonsMNU1). MA(PennState). PhD(PennState)
\ ,
M.M. ~asini, ~~(~onsji~elb), DI~E~(L~T)
T. M~zuno, BA(Tokai), GradDipAppJap(Mon)
R. Park, BA(Kansai), MA(ANU)
G.H. Shin, BA(Hankuk), MA(ANU)
D. Tofts, BA(Hons)(LaT), PhD(Melb)
R. Warrnington, BA(Hons)(Mon), DipEd(Mon)
Department of Psychology
Head
K.J. Heskin, BA(Hons)(Queens), MA(Dub),
PhD(Dunelrn), C Psychol, AFBPsS, MAPsS
Principal Lecturer
J.P McLennan, MA(ANU), PhD(Mon), GradDip(Haw), MAPsS
Senior Lecturers
R.H. Cook, BSc(Hons)(Melb), MEd(Mon), MAPsS
G.H. Gotts. MSc(Cala). MAPsS
A.D. ~nowles, BA(H&S)(M~I~), PhD(Mon),
MEd(Mon), MAPsS
J.F. Wangernan, MA, BCcrn, BEd(Melb), MAPsS
Lecturers
G.W. Bates, BCorn. BA(Hons), MA(ClinPsych), PhD(Melb),
MAPsS. MABMA
A.J. Glock, BA(Hons)(Reading)
Y. Matsuda, PhD(Melb), MEd(Wash), BA(lowa), MAPA
P Reddy, BA(Swin), MA(Melb), MAPsS
J.M. Rice, BBSc(Hons), PhD(LaT), MAPsS
M.C. Van Geloven, Drs(Arnst), MAPsS
Department of Social and Political Studies
Chair
PJ. Love, BA(Hons)(LaT), MA(LaT). PhD(ANU)
Associate Professor
T.W. Burke, BEc(Hons)(Mon), MSocSc(Bi..n), MEc(Mon)
Principal Lecturers
T. Barr, BA(Adel), BEd(LaT), MA(SIT)
T.G. Castlernan, BA(Hons)(lnd), PhD(Mon)
Senior Lecturers
K. Betts. BAIHons). PhDfMon)
S. Lakha, BSC(HO~S)(HU~I), ~;ad~ip~rb~tuds(~ondon),
PhD(Mon)
D.Y. Mayer, BA, LI.B(Meib), MA(Mon), GradDipEd(Haw)
H. Molnar, DipBusStuds, BA(Media)(with Dist)(RMIT),
MA(UW-Madison)
G. Nichols, BA(Mon)
K.J. Rowlev. BA(Honsl(Melb)
A.Seitz, l%p~us~dmi~(~un/ch), BA(Hons)(Mon)
F.X. Walsh, BA(Melb), BEd(Mon)
Lecturers
J. Barbour, BSc(ElecEng)(SAust)
M. Gilding, BA(Hons)(ANU), PhD(Macquarie)
D. Hayward, BA(SIT), GradDipUrbSoc(S1T)
G.C.J. Morieson, BA(Mon), DipSocStud(Melb),
GradDipEd(Haw)
J. Mulvany, BA(Hons), DipEd, PhD(Mon)
T.P. Ryzn, BA(Hons), BEd(Mon)
K. Sands, BA(Hons)(Melb), MA(Mon)
J. Schrnid, BA(Hons)(Melb), MA(Melb)
P Taneja, BCom(Agra), MA(New Delhi), PhD(Griffith)
K. Vigo, BA(Melb)
D. Welch, BA(Melb)

Arts courses offered
Bachelor of Arts
Bachelor of Arts with Honours'
Bachelor of BusinesslBachelor of Arts
(Japanese)
Bachelor of BusinesslBachelor of Arts
(Italian)
Bachelor of BusinesslBachelor of Arts
(Korean)
NO84 Graduate Diploma in Applied Psychology
NO86 Graduate Diploma in Equal Opportunity
Administration
NO83 Graduate Diploma in Japanese
NO87 Graduate Diploma in Japanese for
Professionals
NO82 Graduate Diploma in Urban Research and
Policy
NO91 Master of Arts in Counselling Psychology
NO90 Master of Arts
NO01 Doctor of Philosophy
Undergraduate courses
NO50 Bachelor of Arts
Full-time
The Bachelor of Arts course requiresthree years of full-time
study, during which time twenty semester subjects or equivalent
in full-year subjects must be passed.
Part-time
Many students undertake their courses by part-time study.
This would usually take five years, but the time may vary
according to the study time available to the student.
Bachelor of Arts with Honours
Subject to accreditation, a fourth year honours program will
be introduced in 1992.
Career opportunities
The course is designed to foster individual student development,
to develop skills and encourage investigation and
enquiry which may be applied to a range of situations. Arts
students learn how to gather, synthesize and assess information,
how to conceptualise issues, and to express themselves
effectively both orally and in writing.
Students may select courses which would be of particular
value in following a career in such fields as: administration,
personnel, publishing, public relations, media or allied work,
and research services, or they may proceed to the degree
of Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy. Graduates, after
further study, may gain qualifications to become, for example,
psychologists, librarians, sociologists or teachers.
Eligibility
Applicants in the following categories will be considered for
admission to the Bachelor of Arts degree course.
Year 12 (Group 1 subjects)
Grade D or better in four Year 12 subjects, previously accredited
by the Victorian Curriculum and Assessment Board
(VCAB) including English. (Passes may be accumulated over
more than one year.)
Selection of applicants of this type will be determined on the
basis of their approved Anderson score. A faculty quota for
this type of entry will be applied.
Faculty of Arts
Year 12 (Group 2 subiects)
- ,
~~~licanis will be considered by the Undergraduate Selection
Committee which will arrive at a subjective evaluation of each
candidate's likelihood of completing the course. The Undergraduate
Selection Committee will take into account an applicant's
educational background. A faculty quota for this type
of entry will be applied.
' subject to accreditation
Victorian Certificate of Education
(Tertiary Orientation Program)
Applicants who have ccmpleted a VCEVOP), including a pass
in English, will be considered for selection on the basis of
a computed Anderson-type score supplemented by any
written student reports from the technical or TAFE college concerned.
A faculty quota for this type of entry will be applied.
Mature-age entry
Persons 21 years and over, and who may lack formal educational
qualifications may apply. Applications will be considered
by the Undergraduate Selection Committee which will arrive
at a subjective evaluation of each applicant's likelihood of completing
the course. The Undergraduate Selection Committee
will take into account an applicant's stated educational background,
employment background, together with the written
reasons for wishing to undertake the Swinburne BA. A faculty
quota for this type of entry will be applied.
Special entry
Persons under 21 year; who have completed studies deemed
by the Institute to be the equivalent of Year 12 may apply.
Applications will be considered by the Undergraduate Selection
Committee which will arrive at a subjective evaluation of
each applicant's likelihood of completing the course. The
Undergraduate Selection Committee will take into account
an applicant's stated educational background together with
the written reasons for wishing to undertake the Swinburne
BA. A faculty quota for this type of entry will be applied.
Application procedure
Full-time first year - to Victorian Tertiary
Admissions Centre (VTAC)
Part-time all years - to Swinburne
Full-time later years - to VTAC
Full-time study
Applications for a full-time place in the Bachelor of Arts course
must be made through the Victorian Tertiary Admissions
Centre, 40 Park Street, South Melbourne 3205.
Prospective students should ascertain the relevant closing
dates for applications in September or early October of the
year preceding that in which they would like to commence
siudies.
Part-time study
Applications for a part-time place in the Bachelor of Arts
course must be made directly to the Admissions Officer, Swirlburne
Institute of Technology, PO Box 218, Hawthorn 3122,
on the Institute's application form. The application form is
available from the Pdmissions Office, or from the Arts Faculty
Office. When completing the application form, applicants
should:
(i) provide full information and documentary evidence of previous
study undertaken;
(ii) outline reasons for wanting to undertake the course;
(iii) indicate the subject areas likely to be of interest at this
stage.
The transfer of students from other faculties or from other institutions,
shall be at the discretion of the Sub-Dean (Students)
and shall be contingent upon the availability of places and
upon the applicant having a satisfactory study record.

Single subject study
It is possible to study a subject offered by the Arts Faculty
without enrolling in the BA degree.
An application form is required for this, and is available from
the Arts Faculty Office.
Such subjects may be credited subsequently towards a
Swinburne degree or diploma if approved by the Arts Faculty
Board. A substantial tuition fee is payable.
Entry for all eligibility categories is competitive. Applicants
may be asked to attend an interview in connection with their
application.
Deferred entry
Students who have been offered a place in the Bachelor of
Arts course for the first time may apply to defer their entry
to the course for up to one year. Applications should be made
in writing to the Registrar as soon as the offer of a place is
received.
When an application is approved, the student concerned will
be notified in writing by the Assistant Registrar.
Deferments will be valid for a maximum period of one year
and only for entry to the course for which the offer was made.
Deferment is not granted to students who have been offered
a place in postgraduate studies.
Exemptions
Students with certain recognised tertiary qualifications may
be granted exemptions after applying to the Arts Faculty
Board. In special cases, exemptions from named full-year
andlor semester subjects are allowed, but unspecified exemptions
may also be granted which provide for a reduction in
the total number of subjects to be studied. Students who have
been granted four or more exemptions must take all remaining
subjects within the Faculty of Arts.
Students who think they may be eligible should apply for
exemptions when they first enrol, presenting documentary
evidence of prior qualifications. Applications should be made
by completing the Exemptions form available from the Faculty
of Arts Office (BA915) or the Student Administration Office
and lodging it with the Assistant Registrar (Arts).
The exemptions . policy - of the Faculty of Arts is as follows:
1. preamble
The Arts Faculty Board, after considering applications from
students enrolled in the Faculty of Arts, may grant exemptions
in relation to the award of the Swinburne Bachelor
of Arts degree.
Notwithstanding any exemptions granted, students must
complete a full third year of study in each of two (2) majors
approved by the Arts Faculty Board plus any additional
subjects necessary to satisfy requirements for the Swinburne
Bachelor of Arts degree.
Applications for exemptions will normally be of two kinds:
those based upon incomplete qualifications and those
based upon completed qualifications.
The exemptions granted will be of two kinds: named and
general. Named exemptions will only be granted following
recommendations from the appropriate subject leader(s)
that the applicant has satisfied equivalent requirements
for a pass in the named Swinburne subject(s).
General exemptions may be used towards satisfaction of
the requirement that twenty semester subjects or equivalent
are needed for a BA degree. They cannot be used
as parts of a major sequence. For Arts-related studies (2.1)
general exemptions require the recommendation of the
appropriate subject leader(s) or Dean.
2. Applications on the basis of incomplete qualifications
Applicants possessing incomplete qualifications normally
fall into two categories: those with passes in Arts-related
studies (see para. 2.1) and those with passes in non-Arts
related studies (see para. 2.2). Students may apply for
exemptions under one category or theother, but not both.
2.1 Arts-related studies
Named or general exemptions may be granted by the
Arts Faculty Board for subjects successfully completed
elsewhere which are comparable with those
comprising the Swinburne Bachelor of Arts degree.
Exemptions will only be granted following recommendation
from the appropriate subject leader(s). The
maximum value of exemptions possible of this type
will be 14 semester subjects or equivalent.
Exemptions will not normally be awarded for subjects
passed more than ten (10) years prior to the date of
the applicant's admission to the Faculty of Arts.
2.2 NonArts related studies
The Arts Faculty Board may grant a general exemption
to the value of four (4) semester subjects or
equivalent to applicants who have successfully
completed one (1) year or more of full-time study (or
equivalent) at degree level in courses unrelated to an
Arts degree.
An applicant may seek to have included within the
four (4) semester subjects or equivalent of general
exemption credit for named exemptions from specific
subjects taught by the Arts Faculty, provided that the
studies on which the exemption claim is based were
completed less than ten (10) years prior to the date
of the applicant's admission io the' Faculty of Arts.
Such named exemptions will only be granted
following recommendations from the appropriate
subject leader(s) that the applicant has satisfied
equivalent requirements for a pass in the named
Swinburne subject(s).
3. Applicants with completed qualifications
It is possible for an applicant to be granted exemptions
in respect of only one completed qualification to a
maximum value of six (6) semester subjects or equivalent
towards the award of Swinburne Bachelor of Arts degree.
Such exemptions may be granted irrespective of the date
of award and whether or not the completed qualification
was taken in an Arts-related field.
The following are the entitlements for exemptions for
applicants with completed qualifications:
Category Completed Qualification Semester
subjects or
equivalent
(a) Bachelors degree of at least
three (3) years full-time tertiary
study (or equivalent).
6
(b) Diploma of at least three (3)
years full-time tertiary study 6
(or equivalent).
(c) Associate diploma of 2 years
full-time tertiary study (or 4
equivalent).
(d) Graduate qualifications of at
least one (1) year full-time
tertiary study (or equivalent).
2
The Arts Faculty Board may consider applications based
on qualifications not listed above and award exemptions
as it deems appropriate.
Within the total unit value for exemptions granted on the
basis of completed qualifications, an applicant may apply
for exemptions from specific subjects taught by the Faculty
of Arts, provided that the studies on which the exemption
claim is based were completed less than ten (10) years
prior to the date of the applicant's admission to the Faculty
of Arts. Such named exemptions will only be granted following
recommendations from the appropriate subject
leader(s) that the applicant has satisfied equivalent requirements
for a pass in the named Swinburne subject(s).

4. General
Application for Exemption Forms are available from the
Arts Facultv Office IBA915).
It is the responsibility of the applicant to complete the
Application for Exemption Form and attach the following
information:
(i) original transcripts (or notorised statement) showing
results for those subjects in respect of which
exemption is sought;
(ii) information concerning the content of the subjects
passed, e.g. handbook copy, course outlines or syllabuses,
etc.
Verified translations should accompany documents in
languages other than Engl~sh.
Applications received which do not provide appropriate
documentation will not be processed.
5. Subjects undertaken outside the Faculty in relation to
exemptions
Students who have been granted four or more exemptions
must take all remaining subjects within the Faculty of Arts.
Students with less than four exemptions may take some
subjects outside the Faculty but the total of these subjects
plus exemptions shall not exceed four.
6. Imdementation
~ll'applications for exemptions are considered by the
Exemotions Sub-committee. The Exemotions Subcommkee
comprises the Chairman of the'~rts Faculty
Board, (or nominee) and the Assistant Registrar (Arts).
~~~lications which are covered by the policy are presented
to the Arts Facultv Board as 'routine' applications with a
recommendation from the Exemptions Sub-committee for
approval. Applications which are nd covered by the policy
are presented to the Arts Faculty Board as 'non-routine'
applications and are accompanied by a recommendation
from the Exemptions Sub-committee for the Arts Faculty
Board's consideration.
Terminology
'Course'- refers to the total of selected subjects in a complete
diploma or degree.
'Subject area' - refers to the category under which specific
studies are grouped (e.g. psychology, literature).
'Semester subject' -refers to a single half-year unit of study.
'Full-year subject' - refers to a subject which extends over
two semesters in one academic year.
'Major'-within one subject area, a full-year of study at stages
two and three preceded by either a full-year or one or two
semester subjects at stage one.
Bachelor of Arts course requirements
To qualify for the award of the degree of Bachelor of Arts students
are required to:
(a) complete two of the following majors -
Historical and Philosophical Studies
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Literature
Media Studies
Political Studies
Psychol3gy
Sociology
Economics (A quota is applied to this subject.)
or
a double major in Political Studies.
A co-major in Psychology/Psychophysiology is available.
See details on page 117.
(b) gain passes:
in twenty semester subjects (or equivalent full-year
subjects) including a minimum of six semester subjects
or equivalent in each of stages 1, 2, and 3.
103
Faculty of Arts
Note:
Students in their first year, who do not take any language
studies, are strongly encouraged:
- if full-time, to select their eight semester subjects from at
least six different subject areas;
- if part-time, to select their four semester subjects from at
least three different subject areas.
Students should check the duration and semester subject
value of each subject, as set out under subject details in this
handbook.
Studies constituting major strands
In Italian, Japanese, Korean, psychology, sociology and
economics, majors must include a full year of study at stage
one as well as at higher stages. In other Arts subject areas,
Asian studies, Australian studies, media studies, historical and
philosophical studies, literature, and political studies, majors
may be constructed with one or two semester subjects at stage
one.
In special cases a sequence of studies may be selected from
two related subject areas to constitute a major. Before students
begin a mixed major, they must have the approval of the head
or chair of the relevant departments.
Full-time students
(a) A full-time student is usually required to enrol in eight
semester subjects at stage one and six semester subjects
at stages two and three. In special circumstances, permission
may be granted to vary this requirement on application
to the Sub-Dean (Students), Faculty of Arts.
(b) In each year of study full-time students are expected to
gain passes in at least six semester subjects in stage one,
and at least four in each of stages two and three.
Part-time students
(a) A part-time student is usually required to enrol in four
semester subjects in one year. Permission may be granted
to vary this requirement on application to the Sub-Dean
(Students), Faculty of Arts.
(b) A part-time student will be considered to have made satisfactory
progress if he or she has achieved passes in three
semester subjects in a given year.
Progress review
A student who has failed to meet the foregoing requirements
may be re-enrolled, with or without conditions. . onlv , after
discussion with the Progress Review Committee.
A student who has been recommended for exclusion from
the course may appeal in writing to the Convener of the
Progress Review Committee for special consideration.
A student who feels aggrieved by the decision of the Progress
Review Committee may appeal to the Dean of the Faculty.
Change of enrolment status
Students may change their enrolment status from part-time
to full-time, or vice versa, at the beginning of a semester.
Applications should be made to the Sub-Dean (Students),
Faculty of Arts.
Amendment to enrolment
Students may amend their subject selection by completing
an Amendment to Enrolment form which must then be
approved by the Sub-Dean (Students), Faculty of Arts.
Students will not be permitted to add or change subjects after
the second week of classes. The Sub-Dean (Students) may
permit late enrolment in exceptional circumstances.
To withdraw from a subject or subjects students must lodge
a completed Amendment to Enrolment form by the date
specified for each semester, or a fail result will be recorded.
For a subject which concludes at the end of the first semester
- not later than 31 March 1991. For a subject which concludes
at the end of the second semester - not later than 31 August
1991. (For further details see under the section headed
'~nrolment regulations'.)

Leave of absence from all study
Bachelor of Alts
Students who wish to apply for leave of absence from the
Bachelor of Arts degree course should complete an Amendment
to Enrolment form and submit it to the Assistant Registrar
(Arts). The application should clearly indicate the reasons for
the request and the length of time for which leave is sought.
For subjects which conclude at the end of first semester the
form should be lodged not later than 31 March 1991. For
subjects which conclude at the end of second semester -
not later than 31 Auaust 1991. Failure to make formal aoolication
before the spGcified date(s) will result in a fail being
recorded for those subjects in which the student is enrolled,
unless special permission to cancel the enrolment w~thout
penalty of fail has been given by the Sub-Dean (Students),
Faculty of Arts.
Leave of absence of more than two consecutive semesters will
not be approved.
A student who feels aggrieved by the decision concerning
a request for leave of absence may appeal to the Dean of
the Faculty.
Graduate Diploma
Usually, leave of absence is granted to graduate diploma
students only if one semester of their course has been
completed.
Withdrawal from all study
Students wishing to withdraw from all study must lodge a comoleted
Amendment to Enrolment form at the Facultv of Arts
office (BA915), or the Student Administration office, and
return their identity cards. (For further details see under the
section headed 'Enrolment regulations'.)
Reading guides
In most subjects, conveners will issue detailed reading guides
during the first week of classes. However, reading material
is listed under individual subject entries according to the
following definitions.
Preliminary reading - introductory material which students
are expected to read before the subject classes commence.
Textbooks - material essential to the subject, but students
are advised not to purchase any textbooks until classes have
met.
References - material referred to throughout the duration of
the subject. Students are not required to purchase references
and copies of the majority are available for borrowing from
the library.
Subject selection
The onus is on individual students (assisted by course
advisers when enrolling) to have completed by the end of their
stage three studies, a course which will entitle them to the
award of a degree of Bachelor of Arts.
Faculty of Arts subject details are listed, under departments,
in alphabetical order, by stages in the section which follows.
Provided that course requirements are observed, and provided
that places in classes are available, subjects may be selected
from the full range. Some subjects are offered at one stage
only and for that reason cannot form part of a major, e.g. A1102
Introduction to Japan - a Cultural Overview.
Subjects taught by departments in other faculties and tertiary
institutions may only be taken up to a maximum of 4 semester
subjects or equivalent. These subjects must have the apprwal
of the Sub-Dean IStudentsI and the head of the department
within which the 'subject is offered.
In special and exceptional circumstances, the Arts Faculty
Board may grant approval for more than four subjects to be
taken outside the Faculty.
The Board may also make an exception in the case of
languages and will consider applications from students who
wish to take a major in a language other than English at
another institution.
(For the purpose of this regulation the subjects SM278 and
SM279, Design and Measurement 2A and 28, and Economics
are regarded as subjects within the Faculty of Arts.)
When attending to enrol, students are issued with detailed
instructions to assist in planning a suitable course. All students
are required to complete enrolment forms (indicating their
subject selection for both semesters) and once apprwed, may
not amend their enrolment without the approval of the Sub-
Dean (Students), Faculty ~f Arts.
A student may not enrol for the third time in a subject which
she or he has failed twice (N or NA result).
Subject corequisites (double major students)
Corequisites for subjects (both semester subjects and full-year
subiects) are indicated in the details for the particular subject.
~hise cbrequisite subjects must either be completed before
students take subiects from staae three, or else studied concurrently
with thestage three subject. Any divergence from
this requirement must have the approval of the subject convener
concerned and the Sub-Dean (Students), Faculty of
Arts.
Subject prerequisites
Prerequisites for subjects (both semester subjects and fullyear
subjects) are indicated in the details for the particular
subject.
These prerequisites must be completed before students may
take subjects from stages two and three. Any divergence from
this requirement must have the apprwal of the subject convener
concerned and the Sub-Dean (Students), Faculty of
Arts.
Time allocations per week
Each semester subject runs for fourteen weeks. Stage one
and stage two subjects involve approximately three hours per
week of class attendance and stage three subjects, three to
four hours per week of class attendance. More class time is
usually required for those subject areas which incorporate
laboratory or workshop requirements, for example, Italian,
Japanese, Korean psychology and sociology.
Places In class
Students must ratify their places in a subject by attending
class in the first week of the semester or contacting the
convener of the subject before the end of the first week.
Otherwise, the place may be made available to another
student.
The names of the conveners are on the timetable and there
is a list at the Faculty Office. Attendance at classes for which
a student has not enrolled does not constitute a ground for
later enrolment in that subject.
Submission of assignments
Students should note that assignments will not be accepted
by facsimile (fax).
Assessment
The details of the methods of assessment for each subject
are issued by the lecturers in charge. Usually, a combination
of progressive assessment and examinations is employed.
Centres
Faculty of Arts academic staff are associated with the
following:
Centre for Industrial Democracy
Media and Telecommunications Centre
Centre for Psychological Services
Centre for Urban and Social Research
Centre for Housing and Planning
Centre for Women's Studies
(See pages 37, 38, 39 and 40 for details.)

Scholarships and Prizes
Study in Japan Scholarship
Awarded to assist students who are either postgraduate or
Stage 3 level, to study in Japan. Applications close in June.
Value: may include return air fare to Japan and tuition fees.
APS Prize in Psychology
Awarded by the Australian Psychological Society to the
student who has completed with overall distinction a fourth
year course in psychology at Swinburne. Value: $100.
The A.F.E. Tylee and the K. Kennewell Memorial
Prizes
These are awarded in the fields of social science, mathematics
and civil engineering.
The Profile Management Cansultants Prize
Awarded to the second or third year student whose research
project most convincingly demonstrates the ability to
undertake applied research using appropriate methodology
and techniques. Value: $500.
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark
Swinburne plans to commence offering university level Arts
Droarams on its Eastern Campus (Edinburgh Road, MooroolbarE)
from February 1992, subject to planning approval.
General enquiries about the Eastern Campus may be directed
to Associate Professor Bruce McDonald on 819 8144 (Hawthorn)
or 728 2477 (Eastern Campus). The programs to be
offered in the Bachelor of Arts degree will include Media
Studies, Psychology and other humanities/social science
subjects. Classes will be offered during the day only.
Further details about the Arts programs will be made available
through schools, the Swinburne Publicity & Information Unit
(819 8444) and the Faculty of Arts (819 8149). Separate
applications are required for the Hawthorn campus and the
Eastern campus.
Departments in the Faculty of Arts
Within the Faculty of Arts there are three departments, each
responsible for different subject areas. They are:
Department of Humanities
Historical and philosophical studies ............. page 106
Italian ........................................................... page 109
Japanese ..................................................... page 110
Korean ....................................................... page 112
Literature .................................................... page 114
Department of Psychology
Psychology ................................................. page 115
Department of Social and Political Studies
Media ...................... ................................. page 117
Political studies ............................................ page 121
Sociology .................................................... page 124
Each department has a head or chair and enquiries may be
directed to their secretaries.
UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE ALL SUBJECTS ARE
SEMESTER SUBJECTS.
Interdisciplinary Studies
The Faculty offers a Stage 1 subject which is not attached
to any particular department (AT116 Introduction to Language)
and interdisciplinary majors In Asian Stud~es and Australian
Studies.
Interdisciplinary Majors
Faculty of Arts
The Faculty of Arts offers two interdisciplinary majors, in Asian
Studies and Australian Studies.
Asian Studies
Asian Studies incorporates subjects from Political Studies and
Humanities. The major focuses on contemporary Asia, with
emphasis on political economy and international relations in
some subjects, and on the historical-cultural background in
others.
The subjects included in the major are listed below. In general,
students must complete one subject at stage one, two
semester subjects at stage two and three semester subjects
at stage three for a major. In the case of the Asian Studies
major, students must do at least one Political Studies subject
in stage one and one in stage two.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
AJ102 lntroduct~on to Japan - A Cultural Overview
AKlOl Background to Korean Society
AP104 Australla and Southeast Asla
APlll Modern Ch~na
AP113 Asla: Pollt~cs and Development
Stage 2
AK202 Contemporary Korean Society
AK203 Modern Korea
AP202 Europe, Capitalism and the Third World
AP204 Modern Japan
AP206 Politics of China A
Sta e 3
AP3%4 Japan in Asia
AP311 Politics of China B
AP312 Problems of Contemporary Southeast Asia
AP313 India: Uneven Development
Australian Studies
As an interdisciplinary major, Australian Studies allows
students to explore the contours of modern Australia by taking
a combination of three compulsory and choosing three
optional semester subjects from Historical and Philosophical
Studies, Literature, Media, Political Studies and Sociology.
A major consists of one semester subject at stage one, two
semester subjects at stage two and three semester subjects
at stage three.
The three compulsory subjects, which form a core sequence
in the major, are AP112 Australian Identities, AP207 Modern
Australia and AP314 Work in Australia. In this sequence
students examine several of the political, social, economic
and cultural influences which have shaped contemporary
Australian society.
To complete the six semester subjects which are necessary
for a major, students must choose three more semester
subjects from the options listed below. In choosing optional
subjects at level three, students must have completed the
prerequisites for those subjects at level two. For example,
students who wish to take AL302 Australian Literature - 19th
Century and AL303 Australian Literature - 20th Century for
their Australian Studies major must have completed AL202
Contemporary Australian writing. Similar conditions apply to
subjects offered by other disciplines.
Students may not double count subjects for two majors. For
example, AP207 cannot be counted for both the Australian
Studies and Political Studies majors. It can only be counted
for one.

Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
AP112
:Eg
AL202
AM204
AH202
AS200
AS204
Sta e3
AP3%
AL302
AL303
AM300
AH306
AH307
AP308
AS304
AS307
Australian Identities (compulsory)
Modern Australia (compulsory)
Contemporary Australian Writing
Media and Australian Society
Technology and Society
Social Change
Models of Sociological Analysis
Work in Australia (compulsory
Australian Literature - 19th &ntury
Australian Literature - 20th Century
Cinema Studies
Practical Ethics
Australian Sc~ence and Society
Seminar in Political Studies
Sociology of Minorities
Sociology and Social Policy
Interdisciplinary Studies
Interdisciplinary Stage 1 subject
AT116 lntroduction to Language - -
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
In this subject, basic linguistic concepts are introduced which are
necessary to the understanding of the mechanics of language. The
topics studied include sound systems d human speech, the
combination of sounds into words, the rulesfor combining words into
sentences, the study d meaning, the role of discourse, and language
usage within a social system.
Although most of the examples are taken from the English language,
their applicability to Japanese, Korean, Italian and other languages
is also explained. Students undertaking foreign language majors are
highly recommended to include this subject in their course. It is also
available to students not studying languages.
Textbook
Fmmkin, V. et al. An Introduction to Language. 2nd Australian edn,
Sydney: Holt. Rinehart and Winston, 1990
DEPARTMENT OF HUMANITIES
Historical and Philosophical Studies
The subjects offered by Historical and Philosophical Studies
draw on the traditional areas of philosophy, history of ideas,
and history and philosophy of science. They are designed for
Arts students and are intended to introduce them to some
of the important cultural and intellectual developments which
have shaped our society. In the historical subjects the main
emphases are those of the social historian and the historian
of ideas, whereas the philosophical subjects pursue a
conceptual approach to historical and contemporary issues.
No scientific or mathematical knowledge is presupposed in
these courses.
Students may take majors which are basically history and
philosophy of science or philosophy, or may choose a major
which combines appropriate subjects from each area.
Students are advised to examine carefully the prerequisites
for stage two and three subjects before planning their courses.
A major in Historical and Philosophical Studies comprises
one semester subject at stage one, two semester subjects at
stage two, three semester subjects at stage three.
Subjects offered
Code
lntroduction to Philosophy
AH101 History of Ideas
AH102 Theor~es of the Universe
AH103 Critical Thinking
:I% * Moral and Political Philosophy
AH2M Mind. Language and Thought
AH202 Technology and Society
AH203 Nature and Human Nature
AH204 Philosophy of Culture
:k!
Rationality
AH304 Philosophy of Science A
AH305 Philosophy of Science B
AH306 Practical Ethics
AH307 Australian Science and Society
AH308' Social Studies of Science
AH309 Special Topics in Philosophy
Not available to students who have previously passed AMOZ, Social
Studies of Science A.
Subject details
Stage one
AH100 lntroduction to Philosophy
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous and by examination
An introduction to the problems and methods d philosophy. An examination
of the ideas of some of the great philosophers of the past. Some
basic principles of handling language and conceptual analysis; the
application of such principles to specific problem areas such as:
knowledge and perception, truth and falsity, human nature, moral
judgements, oganisalion of society, God and religious belief.
Preliminary reading
Emmet, E. Learning to Philosophise. 2nd edn, Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1968
Textbooks
Please consult with lecturer before buying textbooks.

References
Katen, T.E. Doing Philosophy.
Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-
Hall, 1973
Perry, J. and Bratman, M. Introduction to Philosophy, New York: Oxford
University Press, 1986
Russell. B. The Problems of Philosophy. . . London: Oxford Universitv
Press, 1959
Shaffer. J.A. Realit)! Knowledge and Value. Nw York: Random House,
1a7i .",.
Solomon. R. The Big Questions. 3rd edn, San Diego: Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich Inc., 1990
Stumpf, S.E. Philosqdry: History and ProWms. 3rd edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1983
Westphal, F. The Activity d Philosophy Englewmd Cliffs, New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall, 1969
AH101 History of ldeas
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
This subject is an introduction to the history of ideas. By using a
particular intellectual focus or theme, it seeks to show how our
contemporary understanding of ourselves and our relationship to the
world have been shaped by important developments in the past.
Themes which serve as a focus for this course may include one or
more of the following: Darwin's theory of evolution: the concept of the
self (from Descarles to Freud); God and nature; knowledge and belief.
Textbooks
Please consult with lecturer before buying textbooks.
References
Bowler, P. Evolution, The History of an Idea. Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1984
Oldroyd, D. Danvinianlmpacts. Sydney: New South Wales University
Prnns 19Wl
AH102
Theories of the Universe
Semester subject
Three houm per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
ldeas about the world andour relationship to the universe. Within the
general framework of social history the main emphasis is on the interaction
of culture, civilisation, social change, and science.
Major topics include: ancient societies, religion and science, concepts
of the universe, theories and hypotheses.
Prelimina reading
Koestler, *.?!he Sleepvalkers: a history of mans changing vision of
the universe. Harmondsworth: Penguin. 1964
Textbook
Kuhn. T. The Copernican Revolution. Cambridge, Massachussets:
Haward University Press. 1957, Repr. 1973-74
References
Boas, M. The Scientific Renaissance. London: Fontana, 1970
Crombie, A. Augustine to Galileo. 2 vols, 2nd edn, Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1969
Ravetz, J. The Roots d Present Day Science Bucks: Open University
Press, 1971
Toulmin, S. and Goodfield, J. The Fabric of the Heavens. London:
Hutchinson, 1969
AH103
Critical Thinking
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment by examination and class exercises
The aim of this course is to help students develop critical reasoning
skills which they can apply both in the assessment of arguments
encountered in academic and everyday contexts and in the
construction of strong arguments in support of their own claims. A
variety of practical skills is taught., For example, how to: distinguish
claims from evidence; assess cla~ms on the basts of the evidence
presented; identify fallacies in argu,ments; ovnise material in logically
coherent palterns; evaluate 0bjeCtl0n~ to clalms made and to respond
to them in a sustained and objective manner. Such skills are basic
to the effective completion of academic assignments.
Faculty of Arts
Textbook
Please consult with lecturer before buying textbook.
References
Barry, V. and Rudinow, J. Invitation to Critical Thinking. London: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston. 1990
Govier, T. A Practical Study of Argument. 2nd edn. Belmont, CA:
Wadsworth, 1988
Stage two
AH200 Moral and Political Philosophy
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, one of AH100, AH101, AH102, AH103 or
approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous and by examination
Most responsible citizens feel the need to develop an understanding
of the moral and political problems inherent in the structure and
function of the modern state. This subject examines the history of
ethical and political thought to illustrate the ideas on which societies
are based. In the ligM of this historical perspective, recent debates
in moral and political philosophy are studied, especially the recent
crisis in values relating to the state and the environment.
Textbooks
Maclntyre, A. A Short History Of Ethics. London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul. 1967
Muechamp, D. Pbliticd Thinkers. South Melbourne: Macmillan, 1986
References
Habermas, J. The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity: Twelve
Lectues. Boston: M.I.T. Press, 1990
Hobbes, T.H. (ed.) Leviathan. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1968
Locke, J., et al. SocialCmtract, London, Oxford University Press, 1971
Plato. The Republic. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1974
Tucker. R. The Marx-Engels Reader: 2nd edn, New York: Norton, 1985
AH201 Mind, Language and Thought
Semester subiect
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, one of AH100, AH101, AH102, AH103 or
approved equivalent
dskssment' is continuous
This subject explores theories of culture, lanwage, and mind. Themes
studied will be chosen from the following list: languages, signs,
narratives, and discourses; theories of the labour process; theories
of mind; causation; free will; knowledge; meaning and truth; systems
of logic.
Preliminary reading
Lakoff, G. and Johnson, M. Metaphorn We Lie By. Chicago: University
Press, 1980
Textbooks
Please consult with lecturer before buying textbooks.
References
Black, M. The Labyrinth of Language. Harmondsworth: Pelican, 1972
Churchland, P.M. Matter and Consciousness. Rev. edn., Cambridge,
Mass.: Press, 1988
AH202 Technology and Society
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, one of AH100. AH101, AH102, AH103 or
approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
Society, culture, and resources: within the general framework of social
history this wune emphasises the interaction between technology and
social change from ancient to modern times. Politics, economics,
religion, values, traditions, social structures, education, relations with
neighbours, knowledge and skills, are factors which combine to
influence the course of human development. Also considered are the
moral dilemmas of industrial societies, including problems of pollution
and environment control.
Preliminary reading
Buchanan. R.A. History and Industrial Civilization. London: Macmillan,
1 m
or
Buchanan, R.A. Technology and Social Prowess. Oxford: Pergamon.
1965
Textbook
Mumford, L. The City in History. Harcourt &ace Jovanovich, 1968
References listed overleaf.

References
Basalla, G. The Evolution of Technology. Cambridge: C.U.P 1988
Dickson, D. Alternatie Technology. London: FontanaICollins, 1981
Harris, M. Cannibals and Kings. N.Y.: Random House, 1977
Mokyr, J. The Lever of Riches. New York: 0.U.P 1990
Mumford, L. The Myth of the Machine: Technics and Human
Development. London: Secker and Warburg, 1967
AH203 Nature and Human Nature
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, one of AH100. AHlOl, AH102. AH103 or
approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
The purpose of this course is to examine the ways in which biologlcai
theories of behaviour and heredity have influenced social thought. The
interrelationships between theories of human nature are explored In
terms of the bidh of the new science of psychology at the end of the
nineteenth centurv. Themes to be ex~lored include: the 'mis-measure
of man'; the origins of the naturelnuhure controversy; the rise of the
concept of culture in social science; the origins of industrial
psychology: biology and scientific Utopias; the concept of the savage;
behaviour and the perfectibility of man; scientific theories of race and
their impact; the image of the black Australian in European
anthropology; Sigmund Freud, his life and times.
Textbooks
Fancher, R. Pioneers dPsychology. 2nd edn, New York: Norton, 1990
Freud. S. Two Short Accounts of Psvchoanalvsis. Harmondsworth:
Penguin, Repr. 1972
Reference
Gould, S.J. The MIS-measure of Man. New York: Norton, 1981
AH204 Philosophy of Culture
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, one of AH100. AHlO1, AH102, AH103 or
approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This course is designed to provide students with the historical,
philosophical and theoretical background to current research In the
study of culture, to examine the assumptions underlying the major
theoretical developments and major schools of cultural studies and
thereby to show the relationships between the different dlmensions
of culture, to reveal the practical lmpl~catlons of such research, and
to cons~der what are the most Dromlslna l~nes of research for the future
The subject examines ~arxist, hermeneuticist, structuralist, poststructuralist
and symbolic lnteractlonlst approaches to culture, and the
conflicts between the prooonents of these different approaches
References
Alexander, J. and Seidman, S. eds. Culture and Society. Cambridge:
C.U.P, 1990
Austin-Broos. D.J. ed. Creating Culture, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1987
Bronner. S.E. and Kellner. D.M. eds. Critical Theorv and Societv: A
Reader ' ~ew York: Routledge, 1989
Dupre, L. Marx's Social Critque of Culture. New Haven: Yale University
Press, 1983
Lodge, D. Modern Criticism and Theory: A Reader London: New York,
Longman, 1988
Williams, R. Problems in Materialism and Culture. Selected essays.
London: Verso. 1980
AH301 Rationality
Semester subiect
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, AH100 and two of AH200, AH201, AH202
and AH203 with at least one of AH200 and AH201
Assessment is continuous
What IS rat~onal~ty? HWJ do we rat~onally lustty our knowledge, cla~ms.
and solut~ons to oroblems? Thls course exolores . a varletv . of auestlons .
posed by the pioblem of rationality.
Textbooks
Please consult with lecturer before buying textbooks.
References
Brown. H. Rationality. N.Y.: Routledge, 1990
Hollis, M. and Lukes, S. (eds.) Rationality and Relativism. Oxford:
Blackwell, 1982
Margolis, J. Pragmatism Without Foundations. Oxford: Blackwell, 1986
Wilson, B.R. Rationality. New edn. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1973
AH304 Philosophy of Science A
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two of AH200, AH201, AH202, AH203 or
approved equivalents
Assessment IS continuous
An introduct~on to some of the central topics in current and classical
philosophy of science and social science, e.g. What is science? What
constraints do social factors place on science and social science? How
do we develop our laws and theories? Are all events caused? What
is the function of paradigms? What is the role ofthe scientist and social
scientist In the development of knowledge? Among the authors whose
works will be considered are Hempel, Kuhn, Lakatos. Latour, Popper,
Ravetz. Zman
Preliminary reading
Theobald, D. An Introduct~on to Philosophy of Science. London:
Methuen. 1968
Text books
Please consult wlth lecturer before buying textbooks.
References
Kuhn, T. The Structureof Scientific Revolutions. 2nd edn. Chicago: Universitv
of Chlcaqo Press. 1970
Raveiz, J. ~cienrific Knowledge and its Social Problems. Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1973
Suppe, F. The Structure of Scientific Theories 2nd edn, Urbana: Univ.
of lllinols Press, 1977
AH305 Philosophy of Science B
Sen~ester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two of AH200, AH201, AH202. AH203 or
approved equivalents
Assessment is continuous
The lnstrumentalismlRealism debate. Can we have absolute knowledge
of the world? is there such a thing as 'truth' or is our knowledge
always tentatlve and open to revision? What effects have values.
attitudes, emotions and belief systems on the saentific enterprise, e.g.
biotechnology, IVF What are the consequences for the sciences and
social sciences? Among the authors whose works will be considered
are Dewey, Smart. Popper, Kuhn, Ravetz.
Preliminary reading
Frank, P ed. The Val~dation of Scientific Theories. New York: Collier
Books. 1961
Textbook .--.-- --. Kannegiesser, H. Knowledge and Science. South Melbourne:
Macmillan, 1977
References
Dewey, J. The Quest for Certainty. New York: G.P. Putnam's Sons, 1960
Kannegiesser, H Conception in the Test Tube. Melbourne: Macmillan.
IRRR
~ihn, T. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. 2nd edn, Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 1970
Lakatos, I. and Musgmve, A. eds. Criticism and the Growth of Knowledge.
International Coloquium Proceedings, 1965. London: Cambridge
University Press, 1970
Laudan, L. Progress andits Problems. Berkeley: University of California
Press. 1977
Popper, K. Conjectures and Refutations. 4th edn, London: Routledge
and Kegan Paul, 1972
Ravetz, J. Scientific Knmledge and its Social Problems. Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1973
Smart, J. Between Science and Philosophy. New York: Random House,
1968
AH306 Practical Ethics
Semester subject
Three hours pel week
Prerequisites, two of AH200, AH201, AH202, AH203, or
aooroved eauivalents
~ssessment' is continuous
In thissubject an attempt IS made to develop an understanding of the
process of moral decision making, with a view to improving the ability
of participants to form ethical judgements and to be tolerant of the
judgemenis Of Others.
Presently, the two main areas of discussion are the moral value of
hunian beings and environmental ethics. Further areas may be added
in future years.

Textbook
Rachels, J. The Elements of Moral Philosophy New York: McGraw Hill,
1986
References
DeMarco, J. and Fox, R. New Directions in Ethics New York: Routledge
and Kegan Paul, 1986
Elliot, R. and Gare, A. EnvironmentalPhilosophy Brlsbane: University
of Queensland Press, 1983
Kannegiesser, H. Conception in the Test Tube. Melbourne: MacMillan,
1QRR
Gntvre. A. A Short HisZ0~ of Ethics. London: Routledae - and Keaan -
P~~I. 1'96j
Maclntyre, A. After Virtue. London: Duckworth. 198,
Reaan. T. (ed) Matters of Life and Death. 2nd ed~t~on, New York:
AH307
Australian Science and Society
Semester subiect
~hree hours p'er week
Prerequls~tes: two of AH200, AH201. AH202, AH203 or
approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
Th~subject w~ll brlng perspect~ves from the hlstory, philosophy, and
soc~al stud~es of sclence lo bear on the theme of AustralIan sclence
and society. Topics cwered will range from Aboriginal conceptions
of nature, to colonial science with its cultural dependence on metropolitan
centres, to the triumph of molecular bidogy and immunology
and the rise of scientific internationalism and cultural independence.
The subject will also examine current issues in Australian science and
technology, science policy, and the public image of science.
References
Home, R.W. Australian Science in the Making. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press: Melbourne, 1988
Schedvin, C.B. Shaping Science and Industry: A History of Australia's
Cm~ncil -.- . for - Scientific - - Research. Svdnev: Allen and Unwin. 1987
Charlesworth, Farrall. Stokes and furnbill. Life Among the Scientists.
Oxford University Press: Melbourne, 1989
*AH308 Social Studies of Science
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two of AH200, AH201, AH202, AH203 or
an apprwed equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject will examine the contemporary debate on the soc~al construction
of scientific knowledqe. The extent to which science reflects
the culture In whlch ~t ~sset hasbeen the subject of much recent wrltlng
about sclence Some authors make the clam that sc~ent~f~c knowledge
ika~tonomous, and the proper objects of s.ociological inquiry are the
various social and institutional relationships which hold within the
community of scientists, both In the laboratory and in the wider world.
More recently, the claim has been made that social factors contribute
in a crucial way to the content of science itself, to the type of knowledge
that is produced. These claims will be investigated through case
studies on both historical and current issues.
References
Hill, S. The Tragedy of Technology Pluto Press: London, 1988
Winner, L. The Whale andthe Reactor Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1986
Not available to students who have previously passed AH302,
Social Studies of Science A.
AH309 Special Topics in Philosophy
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two of AH200, AH201, AH202, AH203 or
approved equivalents
Assessment is continuous
A series of advanced seminars on contemporary topics in philosophy
or an intensive study of a particular topic.
Topics may be chosenfrom a special area in philosophy, e.g. environmental
philosophy, social philosophy, philosophy of mind, or
philosophy of economlcs or may focus on a particular philosopher,
such as, Plato, Aristotle, Kant. Hegel, Nietzsche, Husserl, Russell or
Kripke.
Faculty of Arts
DEPARTMENT OF HUMANITIES cont.
ltalian
This course is designed to acquaint students with the ltalian
language, the native tongue of one of Australia's largest
immigrant groups. The broad aim is to enable students to communicate
with Italians, on both linguistic and socio-cultural
levels. The major study in ltalian therefore strongly emphasises
language acquisition, and progressively treats those
aspects of ltalian language, literature, history, geography,
economics, sociology, politics and culture appropriate to an
understanding of the modern nation and its inhabitants.
A degree major in ltalian cofisists of AAlOO at stage one,
followed by AA200 at stage two, then AM00 and AA302 at
stage three. Normally, AA300 is completed prior to, or concurrently
with, AA302.
Students undertaking a major in ltalian are also strongly
advised to enrol for AAl02 Understanding Italy.
Since language studies at Swinburne Institute of Technology
are designed for beginners, students with native proficiency
in a language taught at Swinburne Institute of Technology will
not normally be eligible to enrol in that language.
If a student requests exemption from any part of an ltalian
subject no credit will be granted unless the student has previously
completed studies which are part of a degree program
studied at a recognised institution.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
AAlOO ltalian 1
AA102 Understanding Italy
Stage 2
AA200 ltalian 2
Subject details
Stage one
AA100 ltalian 1
Full year subject - equivalent value 3 semester
subjects
Six hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is partly continuous, partly by examination
This is a practical introduction to the language; a basic grammatical
and conversational ability will be achieved. Use is made of language
laboratory facilities. The course also includes a general introduction
to the study of ltalian civilisation and the ltalian way of life.
Textbooks
Laizarino, G. Prego, An Iwitation to Italian. 3rd edn. New York: McGraw
Hill. 1990
Lazzarino, G.A. Workbook for Prego, An lnvitation to Italian. 3rd edn,
New York: McGraw Hill, 1990
Lazzarino, G.A. Language Laboratory Manual for Prego, An lnvitation
to Italian. 3rd edn. New York: McGraw Hill, 1990
Garzanti: II Nuovo Dizionario Inglese-ltaliano. Italiano-lnglese.
Vanni, 1984
References
Appropriate references will be given by the lecturers at the beginning
of the year.

AA102 Understanding ltaly
Semester subject
Three hours per week, evening only
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by essay and seminar presentation
The aim of the course is to explore some of those influences which
have shaped the development of ltaly into a modern industrial nation.
The course is designed
(a) To give students an appreciation of the ltalian way of life and
understanding of the people of ltaly today.
(b) To develop in the students an understanding of contemporary ltaly
by introducing them to recent historical, existing and changing
ltalian cultural values, social, political and economic issues.
Stage two
AA200 Italian 2
Full year subject - equivalent value 2 semester
subjects
Six hours per week
Prerequisite, AAlOO or approved equivalent
Assessment is partly continuous, partly by examination
The main objectives of this subject are:
To extend the knowledge of ltalian language and literature thus gaining
linguistic competence that will enable students to deal with a wide
range of topics in the written and spoken language.
Through a detailed critical analysis of contemporary literature, students
will be able to dewlop further their competence in grammar.
vocabulary and idioms.
Textbooks
Katis. M., Piccioli, M. and Savoca, C. Vocidalrltalia. Sydney: Pergamon
Press. 1983
Lauarino, G. Prego, An Iwitation to Italian. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw
Hill. 1990
karino, G. Wrkbook br Prego, An Invitation to Italian. 3rd edn, New
York: McGraw Hill, 1990
Lazzarino, G. A Language Laboratory Manual for Prego, An lnvitation
to Italian. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1990
Garzanti. I1 Nuwo Dizionario Inglese-ltaliano, Italiano-lnglese. Vanni,
1984
References
McCormick, C.A. Basic ltalian Grammar 2nd edn, Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire, 1974.
Stage three
Note:
In order to complete a major in Italian, students must take both ltalian
3A and ltalian 3C. Thetwo subjects may be taken concurrently or ltalian
3C may be taken after completion of Italian 3A.
AA300
ltalian 3A
Full year subject - equivalent value 2 semester
subjects
Six hours per week
Prerequisite, AA200 or approved equivalent
Assessment is partly continuous, partly by examination
The main objectives of ltalian 3A are:
To consolidate the student's language skills and to develop these
further through a study of appropriate literature and allied grammar;
to devel0~ their oral skills throuah conversation and discussion in
Itallan, to'develop In the student an understandinq of contemDorarv
ltaly through thestudy of ltalian history which covers the period from
the rise of Fascism to wesent dav Italv. wh~ch is comolemented bv
contemporary documents on day ltaly and appropriate films
and other media.
Textbooks
A novel to be advised.
Bregu-Hougaz. L. Opinioni Melbourne: C1.S. Educational, 1984
AA302
ltalian 3C
Full year subject - equivalent value 1
semester subject
Two hours per week
Prerequisite, AM00 (Italian 2 if the subject is being
studied concurrently with ltalian 3A)
Assessment is continuous
This subject is designed to make students aware of some of the main
areas of Italy's achievements and to develop in students an
understanding of the important economic, commercial, political, social
and cultural aspects of Italy's changing reality.
DEPARTMENT OF HUMANITIES cont.
Japanese
With the deepening of relations between Australia and Japan
on many levels, it is advisable that a study of Japanese
language, both spoken and written, be undertaken by a
greater number of Australians. Furthermore, it is important
that a knowledge and understanding of Japan is increased
in Australia. This course trains students to communicate
effectively in Japanese and it also provides the opportunity
to study Japanese culture, society and economy through the
language. The emphasis is on contemporary Japanese.
The subjects AJlOO or AJ103, AJ200, AJ300 and AJ301 form
a degree major in Japanese. AJ300 can be completed prior
to, or concurrently with AJ301.
Students intending to major in Japanese should enrol in the
first instance in AJlOO Japanese 1.
Students undertaking a major in Japanese are strongly
advised to enrol also for lntroduction to Japan - A Cultural
Overview and Communication in Japanese, which provide an
essential background to Japanese language and culture, in
the following order:
(i) AJ102 Introduction to Japan - A Cultural Overview which
is offered in second semester concurrently with AJ100,
Japanese 1;
(ii) AJ202 Communication in Japanese - which is offered
in first semester concurrently with AJ200, Japanese 2.
AJ102 lntroduction to Japan - A Cultural Overview is also
available to those not undertaking the full Japanese language
course.
AP204, Modern Japan, offered by the Social and Political
Studies Department is also highly recommended.
The language subjects offered in Japanese have been specifically
designed to introduce non-native speakers to the Japanese
language. These subjects will not meet the needs of native
speakers of Japanese. Students with native proficiency in a
language taught at Swinburne Institute of Technology will not
normally be eligible to enrol in that language.
All incoming students in Japanese will be assessed in terms
of their expertise in the language. Those students who show
a high level of competence in this regard may be encouraged
to study an alternative syllabus to that shown in this
Handbook.
If a student requests exemption from any part of a Japanese
subject no credit will be granted unless the student has previously
completed studies at a recognised institution.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
AJlM
AJ102
Japanese 1
Introduction to Japan - A Cultural Overview
AJ103 Advanced Japanese 1 (alternative to AJ100)
Sta e2
AJ2?0 Japanese 2
AJ202 Communication in Japanese
Stage 3
A1300 Japanese 3A
AJ301 Japanese 38
AJ302 Work Experience in Japan (Double degree students only)

Subject details
Stage one
AJlOO Japanese 1
Full year subject - equivalent value 3 semester
subjects
Eight hours per week daytime
or
Six hours per week evening
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
This is a subiect desianed to introduce students to the Jaoanese
language, andtraininn ti provided in lanquaqe patterns and qiammar.
wr~~ng;conversation,~I~stening and comprehkrkion. F~lms, Sdes and
a varletv of taoed materials are used extenslvelv throuahout the course.
As a fuither aid, taped cassettes of each lesson caz be purchased.
It is highly recommended that students enrolled in this subject also
enrol for AJ102 which is offered in second semester.
Textbooks
Machida, T. and Skoutarides, A. Nihongo, Reading and Writing. Vols.
1-5. Melbourne: Swinburne Press. 1988
~achida, T. and Skoutarides, A. ~ihongo, Dialogues -Aural Comprehension.
Hawthorn, Vic.: Swinburne Institute of Tech., 1985
Skoutarides, A. and Machida. T. Nihonoo. Grammar Notes. Vols. 1-4.
Hawthorn, Vic.: Swinburne Inst. of ~e

Stage three
AJ300 Japanese 3A
Full year subject - equivalent wlue 2 semester
subjects
Six hours per week
Prerequisite. AJ200 or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subiect continues svstematicallv to extend the students' use of
spoken and written ~apariese. The readin0 comoonent includes some
literature and a varietyof contemporary n6n-fict~on material. The aural
comDonent IS concenkated on sim~lified radio news broadcasts and
excerpts from video programs. ~he'conversation component extends
the range of situational dialogues and allows individualised conversational
practice on a wide variety of topics
Students whose Japanese 2 results are credit or above may choose
to study stage three in Japan, in which case they are still required to
complete the Swinbume stage three course work and to sit for the
final test at Swinburne. A scholarship scheme and a 'Work-inJapan'
scheme have been established to enable students to undertake th~s
alternative.
Textbooks
Fukushima, N. Japan and Australia. Melbourne: Swinburne Press,
1941
J$inese Centre. Reading and Writing Vds. 11-13. Melbourne:
Swinburne Press, 1991
Machida. T., Skoutarides, A. and Fukushima, N. Trip to Japan
Mackie. V. et al. (ed) Advanced Japanese Reader. Melbourne:
Swinburne Press, 1991
Situational Japanese. Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1985
Details about reading materials available from department.
References
Please consult with lecturers before buying these books.
Nelson, A.N. The Mo&rn Reader's Japanese-English Character Dictionary.
3rd edn, Rutland: Va., Tuttle, 1974
Japan Foundation. Basic Japanese-English Dictionary Tokyo: Bonjinsha.
1986
AJ301 Japanese 38
Full year subject - equivalent value 1 semester
subject
Two hours per week
Prerequisite, A1200 or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject consists of a two-hour class which deals with a number
of issues on contemporary Japan, in Japanese. Students read a variety
of unabridged newspaper articles which are complemented by
additional language exercises.
Textbooks
Machida, T. A Collection of Japanese Newspaper Articles 1987-1991.
Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1991
Dictionaries as for AJ300
AJ302
Work Experience in Japan
This elective subject is only available to students undertaking the
Double Degree Business/Arts (Japanese) course.
Prerequisites: Minimum 3 years of Double Degree BusinessIArts
(Japanese) studies induding satisfactory completion of Japanese 3A.
Objective: The objective of this elective subject is to provide students
with a 6 months' experience of living in Japan and working in a
Japanese company as a regular employee.
Preliminary Coursework: A series of preparabry lectures on Japanese
company structure, employer-employee relations and similar.
Assessment: Completion of the work-experience component; Report
(2.500-3.000 words). Assessment on ~asslfail basis.
Students who wish to take this subject should see the subject leader.
Korean
The course offers three years of systematic lan~age tralnlng to enable
students to communicate effectlvelv In modem sooken Korean. and
to read fluently a wide range of modern written inaterial in i ore an.
Supporting subjects provide the opportunity to supplement language
studies with courses on culture, society, economy and politics.
The subjects AK100, AK200, AK300 and ADO1 form a degree major
in Korean. Students intending to complete a major should enrol in the
first instance in AKlOO Korean 1.
Students undertaking a major In Korean are also strongly advlsed to
enrol for AKlOl Backaround to Contemoorarv Korean Socletv whlch
is offered in ~emest& 2. This course 'is also open to students not
undertaking the full Korean language sequence.
Since language studies at Swinburne lnstitute of Technology are
designed for beginners, students with native proficiency in a language
taught at Swinburne Institute of Technology will not normally be eligible
to enrol in that language.
All incoming students in Korean will be assessed in terms of their
expertise in the language. Those students who display a high level
of competence in this regard may be required to study an alternative
syllabus to that shown in this Handbook.
If a student requests exemption from any part of a Korean subject no
credit w~ll be wanted unless the student has orev~ouslv com~leted
studies whichare part of a degree program skdied at a recognised
institution.
Subjects offered
Stage 1
~ ~ 1 6 0 Korean 1
AKlOl Background to Contemporary Korean Society
Stage 2
AK200 Korean 2
AK202 Contemporary Korean Society
AK203 Modern Korea
Sta e 3
AK380 Korean 3A
AK301 Korean 38
Subject details
Stage 1
AKlOO Korean 1
Full year subject - equivalent value 3 semester
subjects
Eight hours per week daytime
or
six hours per week evening
Prerequisites nil
Assessment is continuous
The objective of the course will be to introducestudents to the Korean
language and to give them a secure command of its basic structures.
This will entail instruction in language patterns, grammar, reading,
writing, aural comprehension and socio-linguistics. A wide range of
audio-visual materials will be used, including language slides, cassette
tapes, realia, and video-cassettes. Audio cassettes of the course
material will be available to students for purchase or loan.
Students undertaking a major in Korean are also strongly advised to
enrol for AK102 Background to Contemporary Korean Society, which
is offered in Semester 2.
Textbooks
Buzo, A.F. and Shin, G.H. Learning Korean: New Directions 1 & 2
Buzo, A.F. Learning Korean: Hanja Book 1
AK101
Background to Contemporary Korean
Society
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, nil
Assessment is continuous
This subject will provide an introduction to premodern Korea of
particular relevance to the understanding of modern Korea society.
The course deals with the structure of politics and society of the
Chosen Period (1392-1910), with particular attention paid to
developments in Neo-Confucian thought during the period. The course
will use English language reference material.

References
Bartz, Patricia M. South Korea. Oxford: Clarendon, 1972
Clark. C.A. Relioions of Old Korea. Seoul. 1961
~ulbert, ~omer.- he Wssing of Korea. ~e&l: Yonsei University Press
Reprint. 1969
Lee, Ki-bak. A New History of Korea. Seoul: llchokak Press, 1984
McCune, Shannon. Views of the Geography of Korea. Seoul: Korean
Research Centre, 1981
Rutt, Richard and Kim Chong-un (trans). Virtuous Women: Three
Classic Korean Novels. Korean National Commission for UNESCO,
1974
Shaw, William. Legal Norms in a Confucian State. Berkeley: Inst. of
East Asian Studies, Uni. of California, Centre for Korean Studies, 1981
(Note: the above sources will be supplemented by a variety of specialist
journal articles.)
Stage two
AK200 Korean 2
Full year subject - equivalent value 2 semester
subjects
Eight hours per week daytime
or
Six hours per week evening
Prerequisite AKIOO or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
The objective of the course will be to extend the students' command
of modern Korean. This will entail further instruction in language
patterns, grammar, reading, writing, aural comprehension with
increasing emphasis on media Korean and on socio-linguistics. A wide
range of audio-visual materials will be used, including language slides,
cassette tapes, realia, and video-cassettes Audio cassettes of the
course material w~ll be ava~lable to students for purchase or loan. It
IS h~ahlv recommended that students enrolled in th~subiect also enrol
in ~k202 andlor AK203.
Textbooks
Buzo, A.F. Learning Korean: Hanja Book 2 (in preparation)
Shin, G.H. and Buzo, A.F. Learning Korean: New Directions 3 and 4
AK202 Contemporary Korean Society
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite nil, except in the caseof students taking an
Asian Studies major, who must have any stage one
political studies subject of equivalent
Assessment is continuous
Over the oast 100 vears of so. Korea has ~ a~sed throuah ~eri0ds of
soc~al upheaval a h fore~qn encroachmeit to ~ts preseEt ?.tatus as a
d~v~ded country Otten referred to as 'another Japan'. Korea nevertheless
retalns an anclent and h~ahlv ~nd~v~dual c~v~l~sat~on that IS understudied
and poorly understooz inthe West. This course will deal with
aspects of Korean society since 1876, including topics such as
intellectual history, the Japanese Colonial experience, religion in
modern Korean society, rural-urban migration, and women's issues.
References
Brandt, Vincent S.R. A Korean Village: Between Farm and Sea. Repr.
Waveland Press, 1990
Jones, L.P. et al. Government. Business and Entrepreneurship in
Economic Development: The Korean Case. Cambridge: Haward
University Press, 1980
Kim, K.S. and Roemer, M. Growth and Structural Transformation.
Cambridge: Haward University Press, 1979
Mason,.Edward, S. and Kim. Manh Je. The Economic and Social
Modern~sation of the Republic of Korea 1945-75 Cambridge: Haward
University Press, 1981
McGinn, N.E. et al. Education and Development in Korea. Cambridge:
Haward University Press, 1980
Mills, E.S. and Son, Byung-nak. Urbanization and Urban Problems.
Cambridge: Haward University Press, 1979
Repetto, R. el a1 Economic Development, Population Policy, and
Democratic Transition in the Republic Of Korea. Cambridge: Haward
University Press, 1981
(Note: the above sources will be supplemented by a varietyof specialist
journal articles.)
AK203 Modern Korea
Semester subject
Faculty of Arts
Three hours per week
Prerequk~te n~l, except In the case of students tak~ng an
As~an Studies maior. who must have anv - staqe - one
political studies sibject or equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject will include topics such as the legacy of the Japanese
colonial period (1910-40), a brief history of the Republic of Korea
(1947-present) and the Democratic People's Republic of Korea
(1948-present), Korean political practices and values, and the
formulation and execution of ROK economic policy. Scope will be
allowed for comparative work on Korean and Japanese political and
economic institutions, while special emphasis will be given to
implications for Australia-Korea relations.
References
Kim, C.I. Eugene, and Mortimore, Dorethea E. Korea's Response to
Japan: The Colonial kriod 1910-45. Western Michigan University.
Cumings, Bruce. The Origins of the Korean War: Liberation and the
Emergence of Sepamte Regimes 7945-42 Princeton: Princeton
University Press. 1981
Pak, Chi-young. Political Opposition in Korea, 1945-1960. Seoul: Seoul
National University Press, 1980
Scalapino, Robert A, and Lee, Chong-sik. Communism in Korea (farts
1 & 2). Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972
Henderson. Gregory. Korea: The Politics of the Vortex. Cambridge:
Haward University Press, 1978
Han, Sung-joo. The Failure of Democracy in South Korea. University
of California Press, 1974
Chang, Dal-joong. Economic Control and Political Authoritarianism.
Seoul: Sogang Universily Press. 1985
Stage three
AK300 Korean 3A
Full year subject - equivalent value 2 semester
subjects
Six hours per week
Prerequisite, AK200 or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject continues to extend students' command of modern Korean
in a varietv of spoken and written contexts. The lanquaqe will be taught
at both the written level, utilising a variety of coniemporary sources,
such as the electronic and orint media and at the more colloauial level.
where ~ndividual conversition practice on a wide range oi topics is
offered.
Textbooks
Shin, G.H. and Buzo, A.F. Learning Korean: New Directions 5 and 6
(in preparation)
Buzo, A.F. Learning Kbrean: Hanja Book 3 (in preparation)
AK301
Korean 3B
Full year subject - equivalent value 1
semester subject
Two hours per week
Prerequisite, AK200 or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject consists of a two-hour class which deals with a number
of contemporary issues in Korea, in Korean. Materials are drawn from
a variety of contemporary sources, and presented in such a way as
to permit complementaly language exercises
Textbook
Shin, G.H. (ed) Readings froom the Korean Pfess 7988-1991

DEPARTMENT OF HUMANITIES cont.
Literature
The literature major is designed to provide students with the
opportunity to consider literary works from a variety of
historical periods, ranging from the Renaissance to the
Twentieth Century, and to explore the implications of cultural
diversit in the liierary tradiiions of Australia, America and
oost-colbnial countries. In addition, the subiects offered are
designed to encourage students to think critidally about larger
concepts beyond individual literary texts, such as the
development of contemporary literary and critical theory, and
the ways in which literature, as a form of communication,
functions to give meaning to our experience and the world
we live in.
A literature major consists of one or both of Nineteenth and
Twentieth Century literature at stage one, followed by a
combination of any two of Contemporary Australian Writing,
Renaissance Literature, and Reading, Writing and Criticism
at stage two, and three of the following stage three subjects,
Nineteenth Century Australian Literature, Twentieth Century
Australian Literature, Cross-Cultural Perspectives and
Literature of the United States.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
ALlOO
ALlOl
Sta e2
AL.231
AL202
AL203
AL204
Sta e3
AL3?2
AL303
AL304
AL305
Twentieth Century Literature
Ninteenth Century Literature
Seventeenth and Eighteenth
Century Literature
Contemporary Australian Writing
Renaissance Literature
Reading. Writing and Criticism
Australian Literature - 19th Century
Australian Literature - 20th Century
Cross-cultural Perspectives
Literature of the United States
Subject details
Stage one
AL100 Twentieth Century Literature
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
This subject explores the impact of twentieth century innovation and
experimentation in the arts. The implicationsof contemporary thought
about language will be considered, particularly in relation to the
emergence of new critical methods. These have challenged
assumptions about what literature is, its relationship to society, and
how it should be interpreted.
References
Boyd, D. and Salusinszky, I. Newer Than New. Australian Society's
Plain Person's Guide to Literary Criticism. Australian Societv.
December 1989lJanuary 1990, p. i8
Eagleton, T. Literary Theory. An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell, 1983
AL101 Nineteenth Century Literature
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by . assignments - and examination
This subject surveys Romantic and post-Romantic writers of the nineteenth
and earlv twenCeth centurv. em~hasisina the artist's awareness
of, and increas~n~ d~wrcement'from', social>oncerns. The course
includes English and European fict~on and drama, and English poetry.
Preliminary reading
As for ALlOO
Stage two
AL201 Seventeenth and Eighteenth
Century Literature
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, ALlOO or AL101, or approved equivalent
Assessment is by assignments and examination
The relationship between literature and society in seventeenth and
early eighteenth century England with partiarlar emphasis on the
shorter poems of Milton; Restoration drama; the social values that are
exposed by the Augustans; the satirists, especially Swift and Pope,
as critics of their society.
Preliminary reading
Ford, B. (ed.) A Guide to English Literature Ilk From Donne to Marvell.
2nd edn, London: Cassell, 1966
Ford, B. (ed.) A Guide to English Literature I W Dtyden to Johnson. Rev.
edn, Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1982
Grierson. H.J.C. Cross Currents in English Brature of the Seventeenth
Century. Harmondsworth: Penguin. 1966
Tillyard, E.M. The Elizabethan Mdd Picture. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
1972
AL202 Contemporary Australian Writing
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: ALlOO or ALlOl or approved equivalent.
and AP112 for students majoring in Australian Studies
Assessment IS continuous
The subject introduces students to the various kinds of writing being
practised by contemporary authors. A diversity of forms will be
examined - poetry, fiction. drama, non-fiction (autobiography and biography),
as well as the contribution made to Australian literature by
authors for whom English is not the first language.
Reference
Eagleton. T. Literary Theoryc An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell. 1983
Hergenhan. L. (ed) The Penguin New Literary History of Australia.
Ringwood: Penguin, 1988
AL203 Renaissance Literature
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: ALlOO or AL101 or approved equivalent
Assessment is continuous
The principal aim of the subject is to introduce students to a range
of renaissance texts, literary and discursive, from the early sixteenth
to the early eighteenth centuries. Discussion will focus on how these
texts were produced in a context of change.
Recommended reading
Ong. W.J. Orality and Literacy. London: Methuen, 1982
Tillyard, E.M. The ElizabeU,an Mrld Picture. Harrnondsworth: Penguin,
1972
AL204
Reading, Writing and Criticism
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: ALlOO or ALlOl, or approved equivalent
Assessment is by essay, folio and participation in
seminars and workshops
This subject is an exploration of the relationship between various
theories and practices of writing. Combining modern literary and
critical theories, practical workshop writing, and the examination of
a broad range of literary models, it actively involves students in a
dynamic investigation of what writing is, how it is produced and how
it operates.
Recommended reading
Boyd. D. and Salusinsky, I. 'Newer Than New. Australian Society's
Plain Person's Guide to Literary Criticism'. Australian Society
December 1989lJanuary 1990, p. 18

Stage three
AL302 Australian Literature - 19th Century
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two stage two literature subjects or
approved equivalents
Assessment: essay, class paper and class contribution
The development of the novel and the short story In Australia during
the 19th centurv UD to the time of Federatm. Poetw duma the 19th
> . -
century.
Prelimina
Eaglemont,? Literary readink
T ry : An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell, 1983
Hergenhan, L. (ed.) The Fengoin New Literary History of Australia. Ringwood:
Penguin, 1988
Hughes, R. The Fatal Shore. N.Y.: Random House, 1988
AL303
Australian Literature - 20th Century
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two stage two literature subjects or
approved equivalents
Assessment: essay, class paper and examination; class
contribution
From Federation to the present day. Poetry, fiction and short stories.
In each module students will undertake a piece of original research
which need not necessarily be any one of the authors studied on the
course.
Prelimina reading
As for AL30y
AL304
Cross-cultural Perspectives
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two stage two literature subjects or
approved equivalents
Assessment: essay, class paper, examination, class
contribution
The subject seeks to explore, by a close analysis of significant texts
of cross-cultural encounters, the ways in which different cultures have
sought to explain and interpret each other by thinking about and interacting
with each other. It focuses on non-English writers from mainly
India, Africa and the Caribbean and their creative manipulation of the
English language to comment on their own traditions and history, or
to interpret the interaction between EasternlAfrican and Western
cultures and values.
AL305
Literature of the United States
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites: two stage two literature subjects or
approved equivalents
Assessment: essay, class paper, examination, class
contribution
This subject may not be taken by students who have
completed either AL300 or AL301.
This subject combines 19th and 20th century literary traditions. The
19th century concentrates on seminal literary movements and authors,
with part~cdar emphasls placed on significant connections between
literary works and the contemooraw intellectual climate and social
ethos: In the 20th century the emphasis is on developments and
continuities of earlier movements and initiatives, as well as important
changes marking the emergence of 'modern' literature.
Preliminary reading
Bond. M.N. 20th Century American Literature. U.S.A.: Arden Library,
1979
Buell, L. Literary Transcendentalism: Style and Vision in the American
Renaissance. Ithaca: Cwnell University Press, 1973
Cunliffe, M. The Literature of the United States. United Kingdom:
Harmondsworth: 4th edn, New York: Penguin, 1986
Mathiessen, F.O. American Renaissance. London: Oxford University
Press, 1977
Thorp, W. American Witing in the 20th Century U.S.A. Ann Arbor:
Michigan University Microfilms International, 1986
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
Psychology
Faculty of Arts
The undergraduate psychology program provides students
with a broad introduction to psychology in stages one and
two and for those majoring in psychology, stage three
emphasis is on vocational skills and knowledge relevant to
applied fields.
The stage one course in psychology introduces students to
a range of studies in psychology and statistical design and
analysis. Students intending to major in the subject are
required to take AYlOO Psychology 100 and AYlOl Psychology
101. Each of these subjects comprises lectures, practical work
and statistics.
In stage two, in addition to AY200 Developmental Psychology
and AY201 Social Psychology, it is required that SM278 Design
and Measurement 2A and SM 279 Design and Measurement
28 be taken by students wishing to major in psychology.
In stage three, subjects are offered in Personality, Methods
and Measures, Cognition and Human Performance and Counselling
and Interviewing.
It should be noted that the undergraduate psychology program
is sequential in nature; completion of the prescribed subjects
at one stage of the program is a prerequisite for study at the
next level. Thus a student must complete both stage one
psychology subjects before enrolling in any stage two psychology
subject, and must complete both stage two
psychology subjects before enrolling in any stage three
subject. Details of these prerequisite arrangements are shown
in entries for all psychology subjects.
A co-major in psychology and psychophysiology is taught
jointly by the Departments of Psychology and Physlcs. Places
on this program are strictly limited and entry to the program
is either via the Faculty of Arts leading to the award of a BA
degree or via the Faculty of Applied Science leading to the
award of a BAppSc degree.
Students should note that two stage three courses in
psychology are worth half a semester subject toward their
degree subject total. These courses are AY311 and AY314, all
other courses in psychology are worth one semester subject.
Many people take up a career related to psychology after completion
of a three-year program, but some choose to work as
psychologists. In order to be regarded as a professionallytrained
psychologist in Australia it is becoming increasingly
necessary to be eligible for membership of the Australian
Psychological Society (APsS). The minimum academic requirement
for associate membership of the APsS is completion
of an approved four-year program of psychological study.
The Swinburne Bachelor of Arts psychology major has APsS
approval as a sequence of three years' study and, to become
eligible for associate membership in the APsS, graduates must
then complete an approved fourth-year course. (A list of
approved courses is published in each volume of the APsS
journal Australian Psychologist.) The Swinburne Graduate
Diploma in Applied Psychology is an accredited fourth-year
course.
In addition the Department of Psychology offers a fifth and
sixth year coursework program leading to the award of a
Master of Arts degree in Counselling Psychology.
The Department also accepts a limited number of suitably
qualified applicants for the degree of Master of Arts and PhD
in Psychology by research and major thesis.

Subjects offered in the BA program
Code
Stage 1
AYlOO Psychology 100
AYlOl Psychology 101
Stage 2
AY200 Developmental Psychology
AY201 Social Rychology
SM278 Design and Measurement 2A
SM279 Design and Measurement 28
Stage 3
AY311 Methods and Measures
AY312 The Psychology of Personality
AY313 Cognition and Human Performance
AY314 Counselling and Interviewing
Subject details
Stage one
AY100 Psychology 100
Semester subject
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisite. nil
Assessment is based on essays, practical exercises
(including participation as a subject in research) and
examinations
AYlOO and AYlOl are designed to provide students with an introduction
to the content and method of psychology. Topics covered in the subject
include psychology as a science, comparatiw psychology, biological
foundations of behaviour, sensation, perception and consctousness
and experimental design and analysis.
Preliminary reading..
Students wishing to fam~l~arise themselves with concepts in psychology
could read any recent introductory psychobgy text available from
most regional libraries.
Textbook
Details will be provided in the first lecture in AY100.
AY101 Psychology 101
Semester subject
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisite, AYlOO
Assessment is based on essays, practical exercises
(including participation as a subject in research) and
examinations
This course centres on various aspects of cognition. Topics covered
include learning, memory, information processing, intelligence and
problem solving, motivation and emot!on. The design and analysis of
experimental studies again forms a major part of the teaching program.
Stage two
Note:
SM278 and SM279 must be taken by students wishing to major in
psychology.
For details of the subjects SM278, Design and Measurement 2A and
SM279. Design and Measurement 28, students should refer to the
section entitled 'Subjects offered by other faculties'.
AY200 Psychology 200
(Developmental psychology)
Semester subject
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisite, AYlOO and AYlOl
Corerequisite or prerequisite, SM278
Assessment is based on a report, an essay, and an
examination
Thls is a subject In developmental psychology, whlch emphasises the
earller oeriods of life at tlmes when the behav~our of Infants and
children is undergoing
- -
mpid development and maturation
Emphasis is on soc~al, emotional, cognitive and intellectual develop-
ment with a comorehenslve ex~eriential and exoer~mental Droaram
supporting the theoretical material. Students aie encouraged-and
expected to interact with children of various ages.
The teaching program consists of two lectures, apractical session and
a tutorial class.
Reference
Berk, L. Child Development. New York: Alwyn & Bacon. 1989
AY201 Psycholo y 201
(Social psychfogy)
Semester subject
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisite, AY100, AY101, SM278
Assessment is continuous
This subject involves the scientific study of the personal and situational
factors that affect individual social behaviwr. The aim is to introduce
students to the key conceptual and theoretical models in social psychology
and to develop scientific and personal skills.
The teaching program involves two lectures per week plus a tutorial
and practical session.
Reference
Baron, R.A. and Byrne, D. Social Psychology: Understanding Human
Interaction. 5th edn, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1987
Stage three
AY311 Methods and Measures
Semester subject - equivalent value of one half
semester subiect
Two hours pei week
Prerequisites, AY200, AY201, SM278, SM279
Assessment will involve four assianments
This subject is made up of two modules: (i) Anaylsis and Evaluation
of Psychological Research, and (ii) an Introduction to Psychometric
Techniques.
In the first module, emphasis will be given to developing an understanding
of the techniques, procedures and problem-solving strategies
used in psychology research. The aim of this module is to enhance
students' ability to competently and critically analyse and evaluate
research proposals, programs and reports.
In the second module, students will be involved with the practical
problems of psychometrics: test design, construction and validation.
The aim of this module is to help students to develop a greater
appreciation of the advantages, disadvantages, and limitation of the
uses of particular psychological tests.
Approximately the first hour of most of the two hour sessions will be
devoted to information input and the latter hour to laboratory exercises.
References
Aiken, L.R. Psychological Testing and Assessment. 6th edn, Boston:
Allyn and Bacon, 1988
Kline, P. A Handbook of Test Construction. London: Methuen, 1986
-

AY312
The Psychology of Personality
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, AY200, AY201, SM278, SM279
Assessment is based on an examination and a research
project and report
This course focuses on the behaviour and experience of the individual
as a whole person. Attention is given to contributions from other
specialised fields of psychology, especially development, social
interaction, learning, cognition, emotion. Theory and research from
these fields are considered specifically fmm the viewpoint of integrating
such contributions to increase our understanding of ourselves
and others as persons.
Four major perspectives on personality are examined: psychodynamic.
disoositional. coqnitivelbehaviouraI, phenomenoloqical. lssues such
as 'methods of personality assessment and research strategies are
examined. Selected contemporary issues are examined including:
conflict and defense; the self; self-regulation; purpose and meaning;
the effective personality.
Reference
Liebert, R.M. and Spiegler, M.D. Personality 5th edn, Chicago: Dorsey,
1987
AY313
Cognition and Human Performance
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, AY311
Assessment is based on project work and laboratory
exercises
This course examines the theories, mechanisms and processes
involved in cognitive functioning applied to memory, attention and
human performance. It will provide a basis for the understanding of
skill acquisition, of the effects of motivation and overload, and of
arousal levels, on performance. After a general introduction to theory,
the following topics will be examined: structure and function of memory,
attention and perceptual-motor performance, human skills. Selected
applications of these topics will be considered in areas such as occupational
psychology, sports psychology, decision-making, clinical
psychology.
References
Ashcroft, M.H. Human Memory and Cognition. Boston: Scott
Foresman, 1989
Matlin, M.W. Cognition. 2nd edn. New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston, 1989
AY314
Counselling and Interviewing
Semester subject - equivalent value of one half
semester subject
Two hours per week
Prerequisitie, AY312
Assessment is based on theory, examination and a
practical interviewing skills project
The nature of counselling and its relationship to guidance, psychotherapy
and other helping activities is considered.
The basic helping interview skills are introduced, drawing upon the
microcounselling model proposed by levy. Video-assisted practice
interviews form a major inclass activity. Models of counselling, such
as that proposed by Egan, are discussed.
The major theoretical perspectives in relation tocounselling are introduced:
experiential, psychodynamic, cognitivelbehavioural, family
systems.
lssues concerning the role of counsellors in society are considered.
References
Benjamin. A. The Helpinglnterview 4th edn. Baston: Houghton Miflin,
14R7
."".
NelsonJones, R. Practical Counselling Skills. London: Holt, Rinehart
and Winston, 1983
Co-Major in Psychology and
Psychophysiology
Students accepted into the co-major through the Faculty of Arts study
the major sequence of psychology subjects described above. In first
year students must take AYlOO and AYIOI. In second year students
must study AY200, AY201, SM278 and SM279, and in third year AY311,
AY312, AY313 and AY314.
The major in psychophysiology is taught by the Faculty of Applied
Science. Students should consult the Faculty of Applied Science
handbook for details of the psychophysiology subjects constituting this
major.
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL STUDIES
Media Studies
Faculty of Arts
The approach in Media Studies is essentially analytical and
critical, although students can acquire hands-on skills in publishing
and radio production during the later stages of the
course.
The course is arranged in two streams. The first stream, introduced
by AM102, is concerned with textual analysis, cultural
studies and critical theory, focusing mainly on film and TV.
After completing AM102, students taking this stream can
choose two semester subjects from AM203, AM204, AM205
and AM206. They may then choose three from AM300,
AM302, AM303, AM306, AM308 and AL303. The second
stream. introduced bv AM103. concentrates on the media as
a sociai institution, cdvering media ownership and regulation,
the history of broadcasting and the role of telecommunications
in contemporary society. After completing AM103, students
taking this stream can choose two semester units from
AM202, AM204, AM205 and AM206. They may then choose
three from AM302, AM303, AM306, AM307 and AM308.
Students wishing to select later year subjects from both
streams, rather than specialising in one, must complete both
level one prerequisites (AM102 and AM103). The hands-on
production subjects are available to students in both streams.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
AM102
AM103
Stage 2
AM202
AM203
AM204
AM205
AM206
Stage 3
AM300
AM302
AM303
AM306
AM307
AM308
Media & Meanings: An lntroduction
Broadcast Media: lssues & Accountability
The Fifth Estate: New Media
Popular Culture
Media and Australian Societv Society
Special lssues in Media
Making News - The Theory & Practice of Journalism
Cinema Studies
Radio Production & Criticism A
Radio Production & criticism B
Professional Attachment Program
Information Society: Promises & Policies
Local Press, Production & Politics
Subject details
Stage one
AM102 Media and Meanings: An
lntroduction
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
This subject introduces an analytical approach to media texts. Though
it will refer to print and radio forms, it will primarily concern itself with
film andlor television. Our interest in studying these texts is not so
much to establish their worth, or otherwise, as to draw attention to
the mechanics of our mrk as readers to the ways in which we produce
meaning; from (or are confused by) the texts, to the methods they
use in order to produce meanings, and to the values they embody
in their reoresentations.
The texts for study will be selected from fiction and documentary films,
television series, news and current affairs programs, music videos,
advertisements, variety and sports shows, and children's programs.
They will be examined within the context of narrative theory, with
particular attention being given to their visual aspects.
References
Bennett, W.L. News: The Politics of Illusion, New York: Longman. 1983
Bordwell, D. and Thompson, K. Film A@: An Intmduction, 3rd edn, New
York: McGraw Hill, 1990
Sobchack, T and Sobchack, W., An Introduction to Film, 2nd edition,
Boston: Little, Brown & Co. 1987
Fiske, J., Television Gulture, New York: Methuen, 1987

AM103 Broadcast Media: Issues and
References
Accountability
Fiske, J. Understanding Popular Culture, Boston, London: Unwin
. Hvman .,
...-. ., 1989 .---
Three hours per week
Hebdige, D. Subculture: the Meaning of Style, New edn. New York:
Prerequisites, nil
Routledge, 1990
Assessment is continuous
Angus. I. and Jhully, S. (eds.) Cultural Politics in Contemporary America,
This subject is an introduction to some of the major historical and
contemporary issues about broadcasting as a medium of mass
London: Routledae. 1989
Fiske, J. ~eading-the Pqoular; Boston, London: Unwin Hyman. 1989
communication, primarily in an Australian context. It examines the
political context of broadcasting institutions, public and private, and AM204 Media and Australian Society
their relationship with other social institutions. Key political, social and
Semester subject
ethical issues associated with broadcasting am canvassed, such as
Three hours per week
the ownershio and control of radio and television stations, the
Prerequisite: AM102 or AM103, and AP112 for students
regulatory cliinate, accountability in programming, relationships to
majoring in Australian Studies
audiences, and journalistic practices and ethics. Vexed issues, such
Assessment is continuous
as media freedom and reform, public participation in ownership and
programming, regulatory changes in broadcasting, and professional This subject considers the Australian media within the wider context
journalistic standards am discussed from a range of perspectives. of a cultural and political enquiry. We examine definitions of Australian
culture and the ways in which Australian media and media institutions
References
construct and foster these. We consider patterns of influence,
Armstrong, M.. Media Law in Australia, 2nd Edition. Melbourne: Oxford especially American and English, in the constitution and maintenance
University Press, 1988
of both media cultures and institutional frameworks. And we examine
Barr, T., The Electronic Estate, Penguin, Ringwood, 1985
issues pertinent to Australian media culture in the context of contemp-
Bonney, W. and Wilson, H., Australia's Commercial Media, Melbourne: orary Australian society, a context which includes increasing tend-
MacMillan, 1983
encies toward economic rationalization, multiwlturalism, concentration
Chadwick, P., Media Mates: Carving up Aostralia's Media, South of media ownership and uncertain public policy. Assessment will
Melbourne: MacMillan, 1989
involve both individual essays and group projects.
Inglis, K.S., This is the ABC. The Australian Broadcasting Commission.
1932-1983, Carlton: Melbourne University Press, 1983
References
Johnson, L., The Unseen Voice, Routledge, London, 1988
Australian Broadcasting Tribunal: The Price of Being Australian.
Williams, R., Televisbn Technology and Cultural Form, London: Svdnev: Australian Broadcasting Tribunal. 1988
Fontana. 1974
~ilen, R.C. (ed.) Channels of ~izcourse. iondon: Methuen, 1987
Barr, T. (ed.) Challenges and Change: Australian Information Society.
Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 1987
Stage two
AM202 The Fifth Estate: New Media
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, AM103 and AP112 for students majoring in
Australian Studies
Assessment is continuous
This subject examines the convergence of broadcasting and
telecommunications in the context of political, economic and social
Phillips, D. Ambivalent Allies. Ringwood: Penguin, 1988
AM205 Special Issues in the Media
The subject offered in 1991 will be Women and the Media
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, AM102 or AM103 and any stage two media
studies subject or equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject will investigate the major relationships between women
change associated with new media. New communications and the media today. The general framework of enauirv will com~rise
technologies, such as cable and pay televlslon, teletext and v~deotext, representation, audbnce reception and media consumption pradices.
vldmassette recorders. domestic and dlrect bmadcast satellites. and and emolovment. Students will be encouraaed to develoo a varietv
video disc are discussed in the context of changes to tradiional of skills in the exploration of issues pertaining70 women. These involv;
broadcasting systems. Notions such as technological determinism, both textual analysis, in particular the stay of representations of
media ~luralitv, information access and eauitv. are related to an alleaed women in media texts, and the examination of critical theory and
new informaiion revolution. The effecis bf new communications research exploring issues in representation, reception and employtechnologies
on content, diversity and social needs in Australia are ment. Two particular concerns here include the special needs and
canvassed. As well, the cultural implicationsof new choices of media, practices of women as audiences and media users. and the structures
made possible by technological change, are examined for special
groups, such as Aboriginal and Pacific communities.
and conditions affecting women's employment in the media, especially
given the current legislation governing equal opportunity.
References
References
Barr, T., Challenges and Change, Melbourne: Oxford University Press, Blonski, A. et al. (eds) Don't Shoot Darling: Wmen's Independent
1987
Mosco, V., The Pay-per-Society - Computersand Communications in
Filmakino in Australia. Richmond: Greenhouse. - - - - - - - 1987 . ~odlesk: T. (ed) studies in Entertainment: ~ritcai Approaches to Mass
the Information e, Norwood, N.J.: Ablex. 1989 Culture, Bloomington: Indiana University Press. 1986
Reinecke, I. anAchultz, J., The Phone Book, Ringwood: Penguin, Kuhn. A. Wmen's Pictules: FeminismandCinema, London: Routledge
1983
Wheelwright, E. and Buckley, K., (eds), Communications andthe Media
and Kegan Paul, 1982.
Johnson, L. The Unseen Voice: A Cultural Study of Early Australian
in Australia, Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1987 Radio, London: Routledge, 1988
Wicklein, J.. Electronic Nightmare, New York: Viking Press. 1981 Kaplan, E.A. Regarding Television: Critical Approaches - an anthology.
Greenwood, 1983
AM203 Popular Culture Fair Exposure, Canberra: Australian Government Printing Service, 1983
semester subject
Three hours per week
AM206 Making News - The Theory and
Prerequisites: AM102 and one stage 2 media subject
Practice of Journalism
Assessment is continuous
Semester subject
This subject will introduce students to the current trends and debates
Four hours per week
in contemporary culture and cultural analysis. It will investigate the
Prerequisites. AM102 or AM103 and any stage two media
diversity of images, meanings and practices which comprise popular
studies subject or equivalent
culture. Through analysis and discussion, attention will be drawn to
Assessment is continuous
~ ~ -
processes of change-and adaptation in the popular culture of the This subject takes both a theoretical and practical approach to the
1980s. The subject will also consider the commercial imperatives
of the media in ~ ~ ~ lt t is ~ divided ~ l into i ~ two . areas of study:
shaping popular culture and its multiple relations to political Processes
and to power relations. Major reference pointsin the subject will include
(i) a theoretical and critical view of the function and nature of the press
in ~ (two ~ hours ~ per week); ~ and (ii) ~ practical ~ lessons lin news i ~
post-modernism, feminism and analyses of late capitalism. Of
particular importance will be the consideration of cultural meanings writing (two hours per week)'
and practices in the current Australian context. Topics here include:
youth culture, pub culture, weddings, the beach, soap opera, women's
magazines and sport.

The first area of study offers an historical overview of the changing
role of the press and examines the socio-political, ideological and
economic influences which have shaped the modern newspaper
industry in Australia. Newspaper traditions in other countries - such
as the United States, the Soviet Union, Europe and South East Asia
- will be compared and different newspapers in Australia will be
examined for their similarities and differences. Key issues include
freedom of the press, the concentration of newspaper ownership, the
power of the press, the structure of news organisations, ethics, news
values, bias, media accountability, defamation, privacy, and
advertising.
The second area of study will focus on practical news writing and
production skills. Students will be encouraged to write and submit
stories for publication in community newspapers. Students will also
learn basic computer word processing and desktop publishing skills.
References
Bennett, L. News: Politics of Illusion, 2nd edn, New York: Longman,
1988
Edgar, I? The Politics of Press, South Melbourne, Sun Books, 1979
Roscho, B. Newsmaking, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 1975
Tiffen, R. The News From South-East Asia: the Sociology of Newsmaking,
Institute of Southeast Asian Studies, Singapore, 1978
- News and Pbwec Sydney, Allen & Unwin, 1989
Walker, M. hers of the Press: the Mrld's Great Newspapers, London,
Quartet Books, 1982
Avieson, J. Applied Journalism in Australia, Waurn Ponds, Deakin
University Press, 1983
- Avieson et al. (eds.) Journalism 1A: A Study Guide, Waurn Ponds,
Deakin University Press, 1980
Dunlevy, M. Interviewing Techniques for Newspapers, Waurn Ponds,
Deakin University Press, 1980
Evans. H. Editing andDesign: Book 7; Newsman's English. New edn.
London: Heinemanl, 1986-
Metzler, K. Newsgathering, New York. Prentice-Hall, 1979
Williamson, D. Feature Writing for Newspapers, New York, Hastings
House, 1975
Stage three
~ ~ 3 0Cinema 0 Studies
Semester subject
Four hours per week
Prerequisite, AM102 and any tw stage
two media studies subjects or equivalent
Assessment is continuous
The viewing material for this subject is a selection of films arranged
generically (e.g. the musical, or the horror film, or the western, or the
science-fiction film), thematically (the romantic drama, or the journey
film, or the domestic drama), or stylistically (the films noirs, or the
problems of realism, or 'to cut or not to cut?'). These films will provide
study samples for a pursuit of ideas introduced during the previous
two years of the course into a systematic analysis of film.
The emphasis is upon examining and developing various modes of
criticism within the context of film theorv. Attention is thus focused upon
structural~st and sem~dog~cal stud~es.-and the~r funct~on In relat~on to
the human~st d~scourse wh~ch dom~nates more trad~t~onal crlt~cal work
In th~s context. oart~cular auestlons to do wth the develop~nq study
of film w~ll be on the agenda for ongoing cons~derat~on: for the ways
. in . . which ... -.. . ideoloov -. IS inscribed Into the worksexamined (as well as into
the methods orkxamination), for various systems of representation,
for the usefulness of the work of the 'frame1by-frame heretics', for the
kinds of relationshi~s .-- constructed between a film and 11s vlewer, for
~
the lace of 'the aithor' in this process in relation to the formal and
thematic organisat~on of the works which bear hislher name, for the
usefulness of 'aenre' studies, for the funct~on of the 'star system', and
fkthe relationship between the film, the industry and the culture in
which they exist.
Assessment will be based upon essay presentation and class work.
References
Bordwell, D. and Thompson, K. Film Art: An Introduction. 2nd edn, New
York: Alfred A. Knopf, Inc. 1986
Cook, P (ed.) The Cinema Book: A Complete Guide To Understanding
The Movies. New York: Pantheon Books, 1985
Grant, B.K. (ed.) Film Genre Reade~ University of Texas Press, 1986
Rav, R.B. A Certain Tendency of the Hollywood Cinema, 1930-1980.
princeton University Press, 1985
Schatz. T. Hollywood Genres. New York: Random House, 1981
Wood, R. Hollywood From Vietnam To Reagan. New York: Columbia
Un~versity Press, 1986
Cine-Action, Cinema FBper.9, The Journal of PqDular Film and Television,
Screen, Wide Angle
Faculty of Arts
AM302 Radio Production and Criticism A
Semester subject
Four hours per week
Prerequisites, AM102 or AMlW and any two stage
two media studies subjects or equivalent
Assessment is continuous
This subject incorporates both radio production and criticism. It has
an extensive production content in which all techniques basic to prerecorded
and live radio broadcasting are covered, including recording
techniques, interviewing, scripting, narrating, editing and sound
mixing.
Interwoven with this production work is a theoretical investigation
where the medium is approached from a number of distinct but interrelated
perspectives. An attempt is made to discover those respects
in wh~ch radio product~on and broadcast~ng are relat~vely autonomous
from other media. alona w~th those features shared with other forms
of cultural production. This involves, for example, a study of the difference
between speaking and writ~ng, listening and reading as one step
toward establishina a framework for radio critiasm that IS not merelv
a simple re-directi6n of the methods developed historically through
the criticism of literature. Similarly, phenomena specific to the perception
and cognition of sound is identified, and through extensive listening
to sound, music and radio, a working vocabulary of sound analysis
is developed.
Critical work will focus on Melbourne radio, commercial, public and
government, which will be discussed from historical and contemporary
perspectives.
Textbook
Swinburne Radio Production Notes
References
Arnheim, R. Radio. New York: Da Capo, 1972
Brecht. B. Radio as a Means of Communication. Screen V20, Nos. 314
Crisell, A. Understandng Radio. London: Methuen, 1986
Enzensberger, H.M. Constituents of a Theoryof the Media in The Consciousness
Industry. New Jersey: Continuum Press, 1974
Foucault, M. The Archeology of Knowledge and the Discourse on
Language. London: Tavistock, 1972
Hicks, M. Radio on Radio. Swinburne, 1985 (Audio Tapes)
Hood, S. Brecht on Radio. Screen V20, Nos. 314
Johnson, L. The Unseen Voice. London: Routledge. 1988
Ong, W. Orality and Literacy. London: Methuen, 1982
AM303 Radio Production and Criticism B
Semester subject
Four hours per week
Prerequisites, AM102 or AM103 and AM302, and any two
stage two media studies subjects or equivalent
Assessment is continuous
In this subject, radio production skills are developed further and
applied to a wide range of radio forms. Students have the option of
working as part of a team producing a live weekly program on 3RRR
FM or learning techniques of feature documentary, montage and radio
drama production.
The role of radio within our culture is considered from two perspectives.
Firstly through an examination of the broad structural features of the
medium and the consequences of these for the democratic creation
and management of mass culture in our society. Secondly through
a structural analysis of the creation of meaning within radio, aiming
!o uncover the 'preferred reading' of social reality which is being
spoken' within the construction of mainstream radio broadcasts in Australia.
The analysis of form in radio continues with the study of 'hierarchies
of discourse' operating within radio documentaries, accompanied
by a consideration of the relationship between language and
power ~n-our society on the one hand, and the condit~ons imposed
uDon the Droduction of radio texts bv radio work Drocesses on the other
~iudents'are required to carry ouioriginal radio criticism using Melbourne
radio broadcasts as texts.
Textbook
Higgins, C.S. and Moss, PD. Sounds Real: Radio in Everyday Life. St.
Lucia: Queensland University Press, 1982
Swinburne Radio Production Notes
References
As for AM302

AM306 Professional Attachment Program
15 days
Equivalent value - 1 semester subject
Prerequisites, 5 media studies subjects
Assessment is continuous
This subject is available during semester 2 to a limited number of
students. Selection is made on the basis of the applicant's academic
excellence and overall commitment to previous course work. Those
selected will be attached, after consultation, to a varlety of media
oraanisations. There thev will be reauired to work under the direct~on
of?he supervising staff member. he program will be overseen by a
member of the Swinbume Media Studies staff.
AM307 information Society: Promises
and Policies
Semester subiect
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, AM103, AM202 and one other
staae two media studies subied or eauivalent
As&essment is continuous
This subject is an examination of media and communications in the
context of a po~t-ind~~trial or information society.
Key questions about rhe contemporary technological revolution are
addressed, such as who decides about new technologies, and how,
whose interests are served, how national policies are fashioned, and
whose information needs will be met by these technologies of
abundance. Crucial here is a variety of political, social and ethical
issues, includinq vexed territorv such as ownership and control of information
system< privalisation and de-regulation of broadcasting and
telecommunicat~ons. wroorate and communitv information svstems
and international inforniation transfer. Consherable emphksis is
placed on the methodology of Investlgatlon, analysls of reports and
oovernment Inaulrles. and the presentallon of data and lnformatlon
Students are encouraged to present their work in a form that will enable
it to be available to the community.
References
Barr, T. The Electronic Estate: New Communications Media and
Australia. Ringwood: Penguin Books, 1985
Barr. T. (ed). Challenges and Change: Australian lnformation Society.
Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 1987
Brand, S. The Media Lab. New York: Penguin Books, 1987
Forester, T. The lnformatim Technology Revolutim. Oxford: Basil Blackwell,
1985
Reinecke, 1. Connecting You . . . Bridging the Communications Gap.
Ringwood: Penguin Books 1985
Roszak, T. The Cult of Information. New York: Pantheon Books. 1986
AM308 Local Press, Production and
Politics
Semestec subiect
Four hours p6r week
Prerequisites, AM102 or AM103, AM206 and one other
staae two media studies subiect or eauivalent
~ssessment is continuous '
This subject examlnes the local press in Australia in both a theoretical
and practical wav. The four-hour unlt IS div~ded into two areas of studv:
(i) the tradition of local press in Australia and its reportage of local
government politics (two hours per week); and (ii) production of local
newspapers and newsletters (two hours per week).
The first area of study will focus on the development of the local press
in Australia, the creation of suburban and regional newspaper chains,
and the effects of new technology on the future of local press, and
the relationship between local press reporters and their sources of
news. Key issues include the nature of local gowrnment, balance, bias
obiectivitv, the commercial and political influences of local sources,
the organhion of the local newspaper office, defin~tions of local news.
Students will also be reauired to report on local aovernment issues
The second area of study will focus on practical exercises in the
production of local newspapers and newsletters. Students will also
develop basic desktop publishing skills.
-
References
Bonney, B. and Wilson, H. Australia's Commercial Media. Melbourne:
Macmillan, 1983
Janowitz, M. The Community Press in an Urban Setting. 2nd edn,
Chicago, Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1967
Kirkpatrick, R. Sworn to no Master: A History of the Provincial Press
in Queensland. Toowoomba: Darling Downs Institute Press. 1984
Murph , D The Silent Watchdog: The Press in Local Politics. London,
~age/(?onstable, 1976
Evans, H. Editing and Design, Vols. 1-5, 2nd edn, London: Heinemann,
1976
~ollstein, M. and Kurtz, L. (1981) Editing With Understanding: A Textbook
and Workbook. New York: Macmillan, 1981
Westley, B. News Editing. 3rd edn, New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1980

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL STUDIES cont.
Political Studies
Political studies is concentrated into two principal areas. Australia
and Asia. The subjects offered set the political and historical
dimensions of the societies studied in the broad economic
and social contexts.
Students may choose from a variety of subjects, but there are
three themes around which they may decide to concentrate
their studies. They are:
(a) the politics of modern industrial society with an emphasis
on Australian politics and society
e.g. AP100, AP101, AP112. AP200, AP201, AP207, AP303,
AP308, and AP314.
(b) social and political change in Asia
e.g. AP104, AP111, AP204, AP206. AP304, AP307, AP311
and AP312.
(c) political economy of capitalist development with examples
from Third World and industrialised societies e.g. AP113,
AP202 and AP313.
The political studies area allows a critical and evaluative view
of the whole structure of our society in the late twentieth
century. By focusing on Australian society and, at the same
time, providing a variety of perspectives on Asia, the subject
area defines our position in our own society more sharply and
conveys some understanding of our relationships with Asian
neighbours.
Students may take single semester subjects, a major, or a
double major in political studies.
A major consists of at least one semester subject at stage
one, at least two semester subjects at stage two and three
semester subjects at stage three.
A double major consists of at least two semester subjects at
stage one, at least four semester subjects at stage two and
six semester subjects at stage three.
In stage one students may enrol in one or more of the six
subjects offered, but two stage one political studies subjects
are required as prerequisites for four or more stage two
subjects.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
APlOO Australian Politics
APlOl Foundat~ons of Modern Politlcs
AP104 Australia and South-East Asia
AP111 Modern Ch~na
AP112 Australian Identities
AP113 Asia: Politics and Development
Stage 2
AP200 Advanced Australian Polltlcs
AP201 Polltical Sociology
AP202 Europe, Capitalism and the Third World
AP204 Modern Japan
AP206 Politics of China A
AP207 Modern Australia
Stage 3
AP300 Public Policy In Australla
AP303 Pol~tlcs of the USSR
~ ~ 3 0 4 Japan in Asla
AP308 Seminar in Political Studies
AP311 Polit~cs of Ch~na B
AP312 Problems of Contemporary South-East Asla
AP313 India: Uneven Development
AP314 Work in Australla
Subject details
Stage one
Faculty of Arts
APlOO Australian Politics
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by class work and essays
This subject is an introduction to Australian politics. To begin with the
subject covers the basic framework of gwernment. The following
topics are considered: the electoral system, the constitutional basis.
federalism and the Westminster system, parliament, cablnet and the
public service, the organisation of the main pditical parties, and the
role and future of minor political parties. These topics are taught at
a level which presumes no previous knowledge of Australian politics.
However, as the subject progresses students are Introduced to the
broader dlmens~ons of col~t~cs whlch Include the role of oressure
groups, their basis of suwort, in the electorate and in society at large.
and their bearing on Australian democracy.
Prelimina reading
Mayer, D.Y. Temocracy in Australia. Melbourne: Dellasta. 1991
or
Jaensch, D. Parliament, Parties and People. Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire, 1991
AP101 Foundations of Modern Politics
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by class work and essays
This course deals with the origin and development of the main force
shaping world politics since 1945 - namely the Cold War between
the US and the USSR. It deals with their erneraence as world Dowers.
the orlgln of the conflld In post-war European settlement, and follows
the develoomenl of US-Sov~et relat~ons from the Truman-Slal~n to the
~ea~an-~brbachev era Particular emphasls IS placed on the Impact
of the Cold War on Australla's strategic environment, the Asla-Pac~f~c
reglon, and toplcs Include the Korean, V~etnam and Afghanstan wars
Textbooks
La Feber, Walter, America, Russia and the Cold Mgr 5th edn, New York:
Knopf, 1985
References
Ambrose, S.E., Rise to Globalism: American Fbfeign Policy Since 1938.
5th edn, New York: Penguin, 1985
Halliday, F. The Making of the Second Cold Mr. 2nd edn, London:
Verso. 1986
Vadney. T.E. The Wodd Since 1945. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1988
AP104
Australia and South-East Asia
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by papers and tutorial participation
Australia's involvement with her neighbours in south-east Asia since
1945 is examined against the background of the crisis within and the
disputes between, the countries of the region. Topics considered
include studies of communist parties, communalism, political violence,
authoritarian and military rule; student activism in Indonesia, Malaysia.
Vietnam, Kampuchea; and Australia's relationships with south-east
Asla.
Reading guides are distributed.
APl11
Modern China
(This subject cannot be taken by students who have
passed AP205 History of Modem China)
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment 1s by papers and tutorial participation
This subject will focus on developing some understanding of Modern
China. The following themes will be investigated: peasant rebellion
and land reform. Sino-Western relationships, reform and
modernisation, institutional change, education and ideology. Issues
and problems centering on these themes will be critically examined
and discussed through the use of a variety of materials including
documents, memoirs, biographies and path-breaking works of modern
Sinologists. To an extent, it will then be possible to identify and
appreciate some of the distinctive features of contemporary China.
Textbooks l~sted overleaf

Textbooks
Bianco. L. Origins of the Chinese Revolution. Stanford, California:
Stanford University Press, 1971
Meisner, M. Mao's China and After: New York: The Free Press, 1986
AP112
Australian Identities
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by essays and tutorial participation
This is the first in a new sequence of Australian Studies subjects.
This subject examlnes four ways in which people identify themselves
as members of socletv. It beains bv looklna at nat~onal ~dentltv to see
how different ideas ohhat irmealis to bexustralian have deieloped
during the last one hundred years. It goes on to explore the role of
families in moulding gender identity. This is followed by a study of how
people have defined themselves in terms of the work they do and then
looks at the way cultural heritages have shaped ethnic identity. The
subject concludes with a discussion of the social movements that have
grown out of these collective identities.
Preliminary reading
White, R. Inventing Australia: Images and Identit)! 1688-1980.
Sydney: George Allen and Unwin. 1981
AP113
Asia: Politics and Development
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is by essays and tutorial participation
This subject examines the social and economic changes taking place
in contemporary Asia. The aim is to understand what is happening
in this region which is of immense importance to Australia. The
emergence of regional superpowers, growth in high-tech industries.
political instability and continuing poverty are continuing characteristics
of contemporary Asia. How did these occur? bpics include: politics
of aid, commercialisation of agriculture, the environment, industrialisation
and labour and the role of the state.
Textbook
Robison, R.. Hewison. K. and Higgot, R. (eds) Southeast Asia in the
7980s. The Politics of Economic Crisis, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1987
Stage two
AP200 Advanced Australian Politics
Not offered 1992
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, any stage one political studies subject or
approved equivalent. A background in Australian Politics
andlor social and political theory is desirable.
Assessment is continuous
In this subject an analysis of power structure in Australia is attempted.
There are four main sections:
Section 1
The Condition of the People. This section surveys distribution of
wealth, distribution of income, aspects of poverty, and social mobility.
Section 2
The Will of the People. This section analyses the social policy of the
Whitlam Government 1972-75, and the electorate's response.
Section 3
The Consciousness of the People. This section looks at theories of
hegemony and class consciousness in Australia.
Section 4
The Rule of the People? This section considers the question: who
rules?
Reading guides are distributed
AP201
Political Sociology
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, any stage one political studies subject or
an apprwed equivalent
Assessment is continuous
In thls subject, key aspects of the relationships between polltics and
societv are examined. It 1s an introduction to the theme of Dower and
its exercise. Its main obiective is to provide students with the basic
skills necessary to 1dentif5,and understand major forms of power, which
thev can ap~lv to their immed~ate environment or to the broader
dimensions of-society.
Topics to be considered include the historical background to political
sociology; classic views about the nature of human beings and society;
an analysis of the concepts of power, authority and influence, with
reference to Max Weber; the problem of locating power in modern
society and an examination of three theories of power and society,
namely Marxist, elitist and pluralist theories; the definition of
democracy and the debate about its various models.
Preliminary reading
Dowse. R.E. and Hughes, J.A. Political Sociology. London: John Wiley
and Sons, 1972, ch. 1
AP202
Europe, Capitalism and The Third
World
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, any stage one political studies subject or
approved equivalent but it is advisable to have taken
AP113
Assessment is by essays and tutorial participation
This subject relates the shaping of today's Third World to the
emergence of capitalism in Western Europe.
It examines the forces that have prcduced the uneven development
where some Darts of the world
~~~
are industrialised
~
and rich and other
park~still technically primitive and poor.
The broad themes of the subject are the social origins of capitalism
and the process of pmletarianisation, the Industrial Revolution.
European colonisation and the making of a wrld economy.
Preliminary reading
Hill, J. Reformation to Incbstrial Revolution. Harrnondsworth: Penguin,
1969
Textbook
Wolf. E. Europe and the People Without History. Berkeley: University
of California, 1982
AP204
Modern Japan
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, any stage one pditical studies subject or
an apprwed equivalent
Assessment is by tutorial participation and papers
Discussion centres around the problems of Japanese nationalism
reflected in the nature of Japan's modernisation, the consequences
of her emergence as a world power, her &feat, and re-emergence
as an economic power. An examination of the social configuration of
Japanese society will shed light on what are claimed to be the
characteristic features which distinguish contemporary Japan from
other industrialised societies, especially in politics, education, business
operations and employer-employee relations.
Preliminary Fadin
Storry, R. A H~story 07 Modern Japan. 2nd edn, Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1969
AP206
Politics of China A
(This subject cannot be taken by students who have
passed AP305 Comparative Politics: China A or AP309
Chinese klitics A)
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, one stage one political studies subject.
APlll Modern China is highly recommended.
Assessment is continuous
In 1949 the Chinese Communist Partv came to power after the defeat
of the Nat~onal~sts Thts subject lnvestlgates the development of new
Ch~na throuah an examlnatlon of the oolltlcal svstem. d~fferent models
for economk growth, education poiicies and mass campaigns. By
analys~ng the variety of theories, interpretations and commehtar~es,
a maior task will then be the attemot to explore the dimens~ons of some
of these changes from the time of ihe ~uliural Revolution to the present
day.
Textbooks
Gardner, J. Chinese Mitics and the Succession to Mao. London:
Macmillan, 1982
Townsend. J. and Wormack, 8. Politics in China. 3rd edn, Boston: Little
Brown, 1986
122

AP207
Modern Australia
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisite, any stage one political studies subject or
equivalent
Assessment is by essays and tutorial participation
This subject explores the patterns of change that have shaped
contemporary Australia. It starts by looking at the attempts to build
a fairer society at the turn of the century, and at the modern social
institutions which emerged from that process. It next considers the
impact of the Great War, of prosperity in the 1920s and depression
in the 1930s on the manner in which wealth and power were shared.
It then examines how the experience of those thirty years shaped the
grand plans to establish a more just and secure nation after the Second
World War. Through a survey of the long pcst-war boom, it analyses
the effects of Australia's relations with its mapr allies on domestic and
foreign policies. The subject concludes with a study of the ways in
which recent governments have tried to adapt national interests to a
rapidly changing world.
Preliminary reading
Macintyre, S. The Oxford History of Australia: ~014,1901-7942, The
Succeeding Age, Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 1986
Stage three
AP300 Public Policy in Australia
Not offered 1992
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites. APlOO or equivalent, two stage two political
studies subjects
Assessment is continuous
In this subject the decision and policymaking structures and
processes of the Australian Federal Government are examined. While
the focus is on the Federal Government, other institutions and actors
in the policy process will also, where necessary, be examined. This
could include State Government, business and labour organisations,
and other interest and pressure groups. The approach to the study
of the decision and policy-making process IS through a critical
evaluation of the performance and programs of the Hawke Labor
Government.
The ideology of the Hawke Government is considered and contrasted
with that of the previous Fraser Government as well as former Labor
governments. The role of Hawke as Prime Minister is looked at and
in particular, his consensus approach to the formation of economic
policy.
The role of the bureaucracy is discussed and the adequacy of the
st~ctural reforms embarked upon by the Labor Government evaluated.
Of central concern are the changes to the economic policy process
and institutions and the prices and incomes policy.
There are lectures and wwkshops dealing with selected areas of Labor
Government policy. Students are able to specialise in an area of
Government pollcy and are asked to submit a pollcy case study at
the end of the semester.
Reference
Hawker, G., Smith, R.F.I. and Weller, P Politics and Policy in Australia
St Lucia: University of Queensland Press, 1979
AP303 Politics of the USSR
(This subject cannot be taken by students who have
passed AP302 Comparative Pbl~t~cs The Sovlet Unlon)
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two political studies subjects
Assessment is continuous
AP304
Faculty of Arts
Japan in Asia
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two political studies subjects
Assessment is by seminar participation and papers
A study of Japan's involvement in south-east and east Asia since 1952.
Students will be expected to investigate Japan's relationship with one
state and to contribute to discussions of the implications and consequences
of Japan's policies in the region.
AP308
Seminar in Political Studies
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two political studies subjects
Assessment IS continuous
A series of advanced seminars on contemporary issues or an intensive
study of a specific topic in political studies.
The topics to be offered are specific illustrations of one or more of
the following broad themes within political studies: the politics of
modern industrial society, social and political change in Asia, and the
political economy of underdevelopment. These seminars ~nclude
considerations of the methodological questions involved.
In 1991 the subject will be devoted to the study of voting behaviour
in Australia, analysing the 1987 and 1990 elections in particular.
AP311
Politics of China B
(This subject cannot be taken by students who have
passed AP310 Chinese Politics B)
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two political studies subjects.
APlll Modern China andlor AP206 Politics of China A
are highly recommended. Students who have not passed
either of these subjects are advised to consult with the
Convener of the subject before enrolling.
Assessment is continuous
By means of detailed case studies in Chinese foreign policy, thls
subject aims to develop and explore ways of interpreting and
understanding the People's Republic of China's relationships with
other countries since 1949. On the basis of some appreciation of the
issues and problems in domestic politics, topics include China's
relations with other socialist countries, Maoist foreign policy, an examination
of the value of cultural and technological exchanges with
developed nations and Sino-Australian relations. Emphasis is also
placed on China's present 'open door' policies.
Reference
Yahuda. M. Towards the end of Isolationism: China's Foreign Policy after
Mao. London: MacMillan, 1983
AP312
Problems of Contemporary
South-East Asia
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two political studies subjects.
AP104 Australia and South-East Asia is highly
recommended
Assessment is based on class participation, a short seminar
and a final paper of 3,000 words
This subject provides an understanding of the problems of countries
in Australia's region, and the background from which many of
Australia's most recent immigrants have come. tl is intended to develop
students' capabilities for undertakinq research on the background of
contemporary Issues, and for slftlngfacts out d the confllcfing propaganda
and reoortaae. and ldentlfvlna ~0~~lblecourseS of actlon The
piesent focus is on-vietnam, ~ahb6di and Laos. The subject also
deals with the impact events in Indochina have had on Australia.
nnfnrnnmc "-'-""--"
Evans, G. and Rowley, K. Red Brotherhoodat MBr: Vietnam, Cambodia
and Laos since 1975. 2nd edn, New York: Verso, 1990
M, Laos: hlitics, Economics andsociety London:
The subiect introduces students to a comparative analysis of political
systems through a study of Soviet government and society. The
principal objective is to provide a framework forcomparing communist
political systems, but not to the exclusion of comparisons with western
political systems.
s ~
1986
~ ~ ~ - ~ ~ ~ ,
The approach is to view socialism as an alternative social and political
framework for modernisation and development to that provided by
~&esford, M. Vietnam: Politics, Economy and Society London: Pinter,
1988
western capitalism. The institutional framework is examined, together Vickery, M. Kampuchea: Politics, Economics and Society London:
with the economic and social transformation of the USSR, and the Pinter. 1986
problems encountered by 'developed socialism' in the USSR.
References
Lane, D. State and Politics in the USSR. Oxford: Blackwell, 1985
Schmidt-Haeuer, C. Gorbachev: The Path to fowr London: Pan Books,
1986

AP313
India - Uneven Development
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage hvo political studies subjects
Assessment is continuous
The course highlights the uneven character of development in India,
relating it to the economic-political structure of Indian society. It
explains why a country with an extensive and relatively advanced
industrial base also suffers widespread poverty. The course deals with
both the empirical and theoretical aspects of development in India.
Topics include: 'green revolution' and class formation, land reform,
agrarian relations, peasant conflict, industrialization, women in the
labour force, caste and social status, and population and family
planning.
Textbooks
Alavi, H. and Harriss, J. (eds) South Asia. London: Macmillan. 1989
Jeffrey, R. et al. Inda Rebellion To Republic. Selected Writings
1857-1990. New Delhi: Sterling, 1990
Lakha, S. Capitalism and Class in Colonial India: The Case of
Ahmedabad. New Ddhi: Sterling, 1988
Sterling
AP314 Work in Australia
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, any hvo stage two political studies
subjects, or equivalent. AP207 is recommended, but not
compulsory
Assessment is by essays and tutorial participation
This subject explores the social organisation of work in Australia since
1945. It begins with a survey of different approaches to the study of
work. It goes on to examine the changing circumstances in which
Australians have worked since the Second World War and looks at
some contemporary policy issues arising from those changes. It gives
particular attention to the processes which have led to structural
'inequalities' on the grounds of gender, ethnicity and age. The subject
concludes with a series of research and writing workshops where
students prepare individual essays on topics suggested by material
covered during the semester.
Preliminary reading
Probert, B. Working Life: Arguments About Mrk in Australian society
Melbourne: McPhee Gribble, 1989
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL STUDIES cont.
Sociology
The sociology course is designed to provide an understanding
of the social world in which we live and work. It deals with
the individual's place in society and the social processes and
institutions which shape individual and group behaviour and
attitudes. Developing an understanding of these issues is not
only intellectually rewarding but also important in a career
sense. The conceptual and research skills acquired through
the study of sociology are important in such employment areas
as personnel management, social research, policy analysis
and industrial relations.
In stage one Sociology, basic concepts of sociology are
explained by reference to the sociological analysis of
contemporary Australian society. This is a full-year study,
consisting of ASlOO Sociology 1A and AS101 Sociology 1B.
Students are required to take two stage two subjects to pursue
a major in sociology, and must include AS204 Models of
Sociological Analysis as one of these.
At stage three, students completing a major must take AS306
Methodology of Social Research plus two others of the six
subjects offered.
For those students intending to pursue a career in research
and policy analysis the Graduate Diploma in Urban Research
and Policy is offered.
Subjects offered
Code
Stage 1
ASlOO Sociology 1A
ASlOl Sociology 1 B
Staae 2
~ ~ 2 5 0 Social Change
AS204 Models of Sociological Analysis
AS205 Sociology of Deviance and Social Control
Sta e 3
AS380 Urban Sociology
AS302 Sociology of Organisations
AS303 Current Issues in Sociology
AS304 Sociolow of Minorities
AS306 ~ethodzo~~ of Social Research
AS307 Social Research and Policy
Subject details
Stage one
AS~OO Sociology IA
Semester subject
Three and a half hours Der week davtime
or
Three hours per week evening
Prerequisite, nil, but note that AS100 and ASlOl are
normally taken in the one year
Assessment consists of essays and examination
This subject is concerned with the social construction of human
behaviour and society. It begins by focusing upon individuals and
groups, examining how self-concepts, behaviour and ideas are socially
formed and how everyday interactions are negotiated
accomplishments.
The subject also deals with wider social structures and power
relationships which shape the dest~nies of individuals and groups. We
will discuss such issues as social class, gender, ethnicity and the state.
The subject includes consideration of the methods and theories
whereby sociologists produce knowledge about the social world.
Reference
Giddens, A. Sociology. Cambridge: Pollty Press, 1989

AS101
Sociology 1B
Semester subject
Four and a half hours per week daytime
or
Three hours per week evening
Prerequisite. ASlOO
Assessment consists of essays, exercises and
examination
This subject provides an introduction to sociological ways of thinking
about contemporary Australia. It looks at changes and controversies
In the modern famlly lndudlng marriage, dlvoee, ch~ldrearlng, youth
homelessness and v~olence In the famllv Other current Issues covered
include wealth and poverty, employment, the environment and the
global economy. The subject will also address the question of how
sociological theory makes sense of social change.
Reference
Giddens, A. Sociology. Cambridge: Polity Press, 1989
Stage two
AS200 Social Change
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites. ASlOO and ASlOl, and AP112 for students
majoring in Australian Studies
Assessment is continuous
Industrial and technological changes have been the defining features
of the developed societies over the past 150 years, accompanied by
the struggles over their control. Sociologist$ among other social
analysts, responded to these phenomena by providing a range of
explanations concerning the nature of human society. This subject concentrates
on just a few examples of important changes and they are
examined by reference to major sociological perspectives.
The emphasls of the subject is on techniloglcal c-hange and social
movements. Both are subiects which are dlscussed outs~de academlc
sociology and offer an opportunity to test the relevance of sociological
theory as a means of understanding pressing contemporary problems.
Topics covered include sociological theories of social change,
technological change. 19th century industry, late 20th century industry,
changes in domestic life, literary representations of change, the
women's movement and the conservation movement.
References
Frankel. B. The Post lndustrial Utopians. Cambridge: Polity Press, 1987
Pakulski. J. Social Movements: Politics of Moral Protest. Melbourne:
Longman Cheshire, 1991
Touraine, A. The Voiceand the Eye. Cambridge: University Press, 1981
AS204
Models of Sociological Analysis
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, ASlOO and ASlOl, and AP112 for students
majorlng In Austral~an Stud~es
Assessment conslsts of asslanments and a test
No application of sociological techniques can be productive without
an understandlng of the t)leoretlcal Issues whlch ~nform soc~olog~cal
exolanat~on In thls sub~ect an exarnlnatlon 1s undertaken of the most
influential social theories, their sources in 19th Century thought and
their present-day formulations. The works of Marx. Weber and Durkheim
and the 20th century writings which build on their ideas are
dlscussed. Feminist theory and the issue of 'cbss' are also covered.
Theories are examined for their core assumptions, ideological foundations
and approaches to knowledge. The discussions are designed
to enable students to link these theoretical debates to contemporary
social Issues and to practical strategies of social research.
References
Ritzer, G. Sociological Theory. 2nd edn, New York: Knopf, 1988
Thompson. K. and Tunstall, J. Sociological Perspectives. Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1971
Zeitlin, I. Ideology and the Development of Sociological Theory. 2nd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1981
AS205
Faculty of Arts
Sociology of Deviance and Social
Control
(This subject cannot be taken by students who have
passed AS202 Sociology of Deviance)
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, ASlOO and ASlOl
Assessment is continuous
The study of deviant behaviour and social control raises questions
about the nature of social order and the use of knowledge and power
by decision-makers and social control agents in ways that reinforce
the dominance of more powerful groups over the less powerful society.
This subject deals with persons and actions defined as socially
unacceptable and the attempts to control, reform or eliminate them.
In the first part of the course we will examine thecontributions a variety
ol soc~olog~cal perspedlves have made to our understandlng of dev~ant
behawour and the sooal resoonses 11 evokes In our socletv there are
three main forms of control: ihe criminal justice system, thk medical.
psychiatric, or therapeutic system and the welfare system and in the
second section of the course each of these three ways will be
examined. Finally we will identify the ways in which a sociological
approach can help lnbrm pollcy and practlce In a number of speclflc
soclal oroblem areas such as chlld abuse, corDorate crlme, domest~c
violence and AIDS.
References
Cohen. S. Visions of Social Control. Cambridge: Polic Press. 1985
Edwards, A. Regulation and Repression. Sydney: Allen Unwln, 1988
Liska, Allen E. Perspectives on Deviance. Englewood Cliffs. New
Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1981
Stage three
AS300 Urban Sociology
Semester subject
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three hours per week evening
Prerequisiles, two stage two socidogy subjects including
AS204
Assessment conslsts of tests, class exercises, and an
essay
This subject focuses on the relationsh~p between urban theory and
policy. A range of theoretical frameworks are used to provide an
understanding of research and policy around issues of housing, innerc~ty
redevelopment, suburban sprawl and spatlal segregation The role
of the state and 11s relatlonshl~ w~th the orlvate sector In urban development
is also examined.
Reference
Kilmartin. L. Thorns. D. and Burke. T. Social Theory and the Australian
City. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1985
AS302
Sociology of Organisations
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites two stage two socidogy subjects including
AS204
ksessment IS continuous
This subject combines elements of the studies commonly referred to
as organlsatlonal theory '~ndustr~al soc~ology' and sociology of work
It Includes the study of the varlous ways In whlch orqanlsatlons have
been identified and analysed and a consideration of t6e social contexts
in which thev ooerate. Oraanisat~onal structures are controversial because
they ebgage the ingrests of different social groups for a varlety
of reasons which are perceived by their proponents as ratlonal or
moral. Particular organisational forms are not merely more or less
efficient for the achievement of goals; they have a political and
therefore problematical content and it is important that both of these
main themes be emphasised. The major sections of the course are:
(a) major schools of organisation theory;
(b) bureaucracy and lndustr~al soclety.
(c) the contemooraw oressures for oraanlsat~onal chanae. lncludlna
. ,
case studies of democratic and participative orga$sations.
-
References
Burrell. G. and Morgan, G. Sociological Paradigms and Organizational
Analysis. London: Heinemann. 1979
Morgan, G. (ed) BeyondMethod Beverly Hllls: Sage Publications, 1983

AS303
Current lssues in Sociology
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two sociology subjects including
AS204
Assessment is continuous
The subject matter of AS303 changes on a year to year basis
depending on what issues are considered relevant and interesting to
students. Typical issues include environment, health and gender.
Irrespective of the issue, key concepts and theories drawn from
sociology will be used to inform students' understanding.
In 1992 the focus will be on the environment and population. The
course analyses the effects of different forms of social organisation
on the natural environment, concentrating on the degree to which
environmental stress is caused by population growth and the degree
to which it is caused by inappropriate use of resources.
References
Harris, M. Cultural Materialism. New York: Vintage Books, 1980
Brown. L. The State of he World 1991. New York: W. W. Norton
Day, L. and Rowland, R. (eds) How Many More Australians?
Melbourne: Longman Cheshire. 1988
AS304
Sociology of Minorities
Semester subject
Three hwrs per week
Prerequisites, two stage two sodology subjects including
AS204
Assessment consists of an exercise, an essay and a test
Minority groups pose some special problems of sociological
explanation. In this subject minority situations are studied as particular
instances of social inequality and this analysis is linked to general
sociological perspectives on social structure. Three types of minority
groups are considered. These are racial minorities, ethnic or cultural
minorities and sexual minorities. Australian examples of each of these
types include Aborigines, non English speaking immigrants and
women. Australian data are examined and comparisons drawn with
minority situations elsewhere, such as Britain, USA, New Zealand and
South Africa. Issues related to minority dynamics include education
and ideology, violence and coercion, policy initiatives for overcoming
discrimination and inequality and prospects for mutual accommodation
among disparate groups.
References
Brittan, A. and Maynard, M. Sexism, Racism and Oppression. Oxford:
Basil Blackwell. 1984
Jennett, C. and Stewart. R. Three Worlds of Inequality - Race, Class
and Gender: Melbourne: Macmillan. 1987, ,
Thompson, R. Theories of Ethnicity: A Cntrcal Appraisal. New York:
Greenwood Press. 1989
AS306
Methodology of Social Research
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two sociology subjects including
AS204
Assessment is continuous and usually based on one
class test and assignments, including a major project
This subject is designed to provide an understanding of the range of
methodologies that link sociological theory with social research
practices, and to provide the opportunity for practical experience in
research by using different methods and designs.
In thls subject, we examine the relationship between theory, research
design, explanation and policy. A range of examples from sociological
research is used to illustrate the theory-research relationship, and to
evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of differing approaches.
Consideration is given to methods of data gathering, data analysis and
presentation of results, using both quantitative and qualitative
strategies. Specific areas covered include social survey research,
sampling, secondary data analysis, content analysis and other
research strategies.
References
de Vaus, D.A. Surveys in Social Research. Sydney: Allen and Unwin,
1985
Judd, C.M., Smlth. E.R. and K~dder, L.H. Research Methods in Social
Relations. 6th edn, Fort Worth: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. 1991
AS307
Sociology and Social Policy
Semester subject
Three hours per week
Prerequisites, two stage two sociology subjects including
AS204
Assessment is continuous
This subject is designed to allow students to develop their understanding
of the relationship between sociological research, theory and
social policy.
The subject reviews the major theoretical and ideological approaches
to social policy and introduces students to some of the key processes
in policy making, e.g. problem identification, policy implernentatlon,
evaluation and monitoring.
Particular attention is given to sociology of health and illness and
human service delivery.
The subject is structured to allow for the possibility of students undertaking
either individual or group projects as part of their required
assessment.
References
Palmer, R. and Short, S. Health Care and Public Policy, an Australian
Analvsis. Melbourne: MacMillan. 1989
MIS~;~. R. The Welfare State in crisis. NRN York: St. Martins. 1984
Subjects offered by other faculties
Listed here are subjects taught by departments in other
faculties which may be taken by students enrolled in a
Bachelor of Arts course. Any Arts student wishing to take one
or more of these subjects must have the approval of both the
Faculty of Arts and the teaching department concerned as
enrolment in the subject may depend on the availability of
places andlor on certain prerequisites.
Course regulations specify that:
Students taking both majors within the Faculty may take
subjects taught outside the Faculty up to a maximum value
of four semester subjects or equivalent.
An exception may be made in the case of languages, allowing
students undertaking two years of a standard language
program to be awarded semester subject values totalling five
for two full years of language study.
(For the purposes of this regulation, the subjects SM278 and
SM279. Design and Measurement 2A and 28 are regarded
as subjects within the Faculty of Arts.)
Faculty of Applied Science
The following Applied Science subjects are available to Arts students:
SC173 Biology
Thirty hwrs of lectures
Thirty hours of prac. work
Assessment is 80% theory, 20% prac. work
A first year subject offered by the Department of Applied Chemistry
for students enrolled in the Bachelor of Arts program.
Basic microbiology: cell structure and function. Elements of microbial
world ranging from viruses, rickettsia, chlamydia, bacteria, blue-green
algae, protozoa and fungi. Methods of growing, isolating and handling
micro-organisms. Microbes and pathogenicity.
Basic biochemistry and nutrition: composition of humans and foods.
Basic structures and fundions of carbohydrates, proteins and fats. Role
of enzymes, coenzymes and cofactors in the body. Digestion of
polysaccharrides, proteins and fats. Glucose, protein and fat
metabolism. Dietary misconceptions, vitamins and trace elements.
Energy metabolism. Food toxicity.
Genetics: Mendel's laws. Mono and dihybrid crosses. Mitosis, meios~s
and linkage of genes. Gene interactions and polygenic Inheritance.
Aspects of human genetics. Karyotype analysis, pedigrees including
sex linkage. Inborn errors of metabolism. DNA-chemical nature and
Watson-Crick model. DNA replicat~on. RNA species, genetic code and
protein synthesis. Evolution-lines of evidence. Darwin's theorv. Genetic
bas6 of evolul~on Hardy-We~nberg law Populat~ons var~al~on, natural
selecllon and patterns ot evolut~on Modes of soeclallon Punctbaled
equilibria
126

SC174 Biology
Thirty hours of lectures
Thirty hours of prac. work
Assessment is 30 theory, 20% prac. work
A second semester subject offered for first year students enrolled in
the Bachelor of Arts program.
The course introduces the cell as the basic biological unit, considers
tissues as aggregates of cells with specialised functions and then
proceeds to treat the following systems in some detail.
Cardiovascular system: properties of blood; anatomy and physiology
of the heart. Mechanical and electrical events of the cardiac cycle;
cardiac output. Regulation of heart rate and blood pressure,
haemostasis.
Respiratory system: anatomy of the respiratory system; gas exchange
and transport; control of respiration. The properties of haemoglobin.
Renal system and water balance: structure of the kidney and urinary
system. Basic renal processes. Regulation of extracellular volume and
osmolarity.
Digestive system: the arrangement and functions of the digestive
system.
Skeletal system: calcium regulation, structure of bone. Anatomy of the
skeleton.
Muscular system: types of muscle and their roles. Mechanism of
contraction. Conduction of the heart.
Immune systems: reticulo endothelial system. Inflammation,
phagocytosis; lymphocytes, cell-mediated immunity, antibodymediated
immunity.
Nervous system: nerves and excitability; transmission, the synapse;
simple reflex arc. Overview of functions and structures in the central
nervous system.
Endocrine system: functions. Major glands, their products and
functions.
Reproductive system: anatomy, gametogenesis, contraception,
pregnancy.
Integration of body systems: responses to stresses such as exercise,
shock.
Practical work in the course includes use of the microscope in the
examination of cells and tissues, the testing of body paramenters and
physiological functions. Extensive use is made of charts, biological
models and some specialized equipment such as spirometers and
microcomputers.
SM278 Design and Measurement 2A
Four hours per week daytime
or
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisites, AY100 and AYlOl
Assessment IS contlnuous
A stage two, first-semester subject in research design and statistical
analysis is planned to complement concurrent and future studies in
psychology.
In this subject the emphasis is on understanding the methodology of
basic research design and how the associated statistical analysis can
provide answers to research questions. Students also receive instruction
in the use of the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS).
This computer package wll be used to analyse data both in thls course
and in second and third stage courses in psychology.
Topics to be studied include an introduction to computer based data
analysis, one and two-way factorial designs and the corresponding
analysis of variance.
Textbook
Norusis. M. SPSSJPC+ Studentware. Chicago, Illinois: SPSS Inc, 1988.
SM279 Design and Measurement 28
Four hours per week daytlme
nr -.
Three and a half hours per week evening
Prerequisite, SM278
Assessment IS continuous
A stage two, second-semester subject In research design and
statistical analysis that is designed to complement concurrent and
future studies in psychology.
In th~subject the toplcs Included In SM278 are extended and further
to~lcs In deslan and analvsls are considered The SPSS . packaqe - wlli
be used to perform the carious statistical analyses.
Topics to be studied include correlation and an introduction to multiple
regression, analysis of wvarrance, factor analysis and non-parametric
methods.
Faculty of Arts
Textbook
Norusis, M. SPSS lntroa(lctory Statistics Guide. Chicago, Illinois: SPSS
Inc, 1990
References
Child, D. The Essentials of Factor Analysis. London: Holt Rinehart and
Winston, 1970, Repr. 1976
Ferguson, G.A. Statistical Analysis in Psychdogy & Education. 5th edn,
New York: McGraw-Hill. 1981
Kerlinger, F.N. and Pedhazur. E.J. Multiple Regression in Behavioural
Research. 2nd edn, New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston. 1982
Roscoe. J.T. Fundamental Research for the Behavioural Sciences. 2nd
edn, New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston. 1975
Faculty of Business
The following Business subjects are available to Arts students:
Economics
Economics is offered as a major in the Bachelor of Arts course.
Arts students intending to take an economics major must discuss
their overall study program with a course adviser in the
Faculty of Arts to ensure that their study plans will satisfy the
requirements for a degree.
The Department of Economics offers a wide range of
subjects/units which may be taken individually, as a minor
strand over two years, or as a major strand over three years.
To complete Faculty of Arts requirements for a degree major
in economics the following subjects/units must be taken:
Stage 1 BE102 and ~E03
Stage 2 BE201 and BE202
or
One plus any other selected from: BE203, BE301,
BE302, BE303, BE304, BE305 or BE306.
Stage 3 Three additional semester subjects from the list
immediately above.
To complete an economics major as part of a
Bachelor of Arts degree students are required to
pass Economics 1A and IB, and five semester
subjects chosen from stages two and three as
specified above, giving a total required of seven
semester subjects.
It is important to note that Economics 1A and 1B are a prerequisite
for all other economics units offered by the Faculty
of Business and that every Arts student taking an economics
major must also complete either BE201 or BE202.
BE102 Economics 1A
Prerequisite: nil
This unit introduces students to microeconomic concepts and their
application within the framework of the Australian economic and
business envlronment. The course commences with an exammation
of the role of the contemporary market system In allocating resources
and dlstrlbutlna outout Thls IS followed bv an examlnat~on of the Ilrm's
production, costs and revenues In a variktv of market situations. The
significance of m~croemnomi concepts foiboth business and government
policy is emphasised throughout the unit.
Textbook
Waud, R.N. et al. Economics, Australian edn. Sydney: Harper & Row,
1989
References
Jackson, J. and McConnell. C.R. Economics, third edn. Sydney:
McGraw Hill. 1988
Terry, C. and~orde, K. Microeconomics: An Introduction for Australian
Students, second edn. Sydney: Prentlce Hall, 1988

BE103
Economics 1B
Prerequisite: BE102 Economics 1A
This unit introduces students to the way in which economists analyse
macroeconomic Droblems within the framework of the
~
Australian
- - ~ - -
economic and business environment. The course begins with a
detailed analysis of the determinants of the lewl and rate of change
of national output, employment, prices and the exchange rate.
Attention is then focussed on the role of flscal, monetary, prices and
incomes, balance of payments and exchange rate policies in achieving
economic goals.
Textbook
Waud, R.N. et al. Economics, Australian edn. Sydney: Harper & Row.
1989
References
Jackson, J. and McConnell, C.R. Economics, third edn. Sydney:
McGraw Hill, 1988
MacMillan, A. et al. Macroeconomics, The Australian Context. Sydney:
Prentice Hall, 1987
BE201
Managerial Economic Analysis
Prerequisites, BE102 and BE103, Economics 1A and 1B
Students who are contemplatrng malor studres ~n economrcs should
mclude thrs unrt and BE202 Industry and Gwernment m therr course
This unit shows how economic analysls can be used to assist business
decision-making. Case studies are used to illustrate the concepts
involved. The unit deals with these topics: demand analysis (including
empirical demand studies and forecasting); cost estimation and
forecasting; profit and alternative goals of firms.
References
Douglas, E.J. Managerial Economics; Theory, Practice and Problems.
3rd edn, London: Prentice-Hall International. 1987
Pappas. J.L. and Hirschey, M. Managerial Economics. 6th edn.
(International student edition), Chicago: Dryden Press. 1990
Peterson, H.C. and Lewis W.C. Managerial Economics. 2nd edn. New
York: MacMillan Publishing Co.
BE202 lndustry and Government
Prerequisites. BE102 and BE103, Economics 1A and 1B
Students who are contemplating malor studies in economics should
include this unit and BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis in their
courses.
The unit deals with the performance of industry in contemporary
economies with special reference to Australia and considers the role
of government in these economies.
Performance criteria, the nature of the modern corporation (including
transnational corporations) and specific approaches to industrial policy
and regulation are discussed.
Textbook
Terry, C., Jones, R. and Braddock, R. (eds.) Australian Microeconomic
Policies. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentlce-Hall, 1988
Reference
Caves, R., Ward, I., Williams, P and Wright. C. Australian Industry:
Structure, Conduct and Ferformance. 2nd edn. Sydney: Prentice Hall,
1987
BE203 Industrial Relations
Prerequisite. BE103 Economics 1B
This unit aims to equip students with an understanding of the
Australian industrial relations systems, wlth particular emphasls on
the Federal and Victorian jurisdictions.
As well as providing a theoretical framework within which the industrial
relations systems operate, the unit will address a range of
contemporary issues including current Federal and State legislative
provisions, labour market reforms, trade union issues and the role of
management in Industrial relations.
Topics to be studied within the unit include:
lndutrial confl~ct
the role of the parties - unions, employers, government
Federal and State arbltral systems
wage determination
management and industrial relations.
Specific references will be provided at the beginning of the unit,
however, the following references will provide useful preliminary
reading.
References
Deery. S. and Plowman, D. Australian Industrial Relations, 3rd edn,
Svdnev: McGraw-Hill. 1991
HIII. J:, Howard, W.A. and Lansbury, R. Industrral Relations: An
Australian Introductron. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1982
BE301
Public Finance
Prerequisite, BE101 Economics 1
This unit lnvolves an analysis of the economic rationale of goverrment
expenditure and revenue raising. It will cover the following topics:
(1) an introduction to the welfare economics and public choice
paradigms and their implications for public sector revenue and
expenditure;
(2) taxatlon analysis; criteria for evaluating taxes and Commonwealth
and State tax systems; analysis of personal and corporate income
tax, consumption and capltal galns and wealth tax, subs~d~es to
producers and consumers, taxes on the factors of D ~O~UC~IO~ an0
proposals for reform of the Australian tax system;
(3) techniques for evaluating government expenditure programs (with
particular emphasis on cost-benefit analysis).
References
Brown, C.V. and Jackson, P.M. Public Sector Economics. 3rd edn,
Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1986
Groenewegen, P Public Finance in Australia, Theory and Practice. 3rd
edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Musgrave, R.A. and Musgrave. PB. Public Finance: Theory and
Practice, 5th edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1989
BE302 Economic Research
Prerequisite, BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis
or BE202 Industry and Government
The lntentlon In thls unrt IS to broaden students' famlllarlty wlth the
nature and scope of research undertaken In economics and to Increase
students' ability to analyse and carry out economic research of a practical
nature.
Topics may include: methodology in economic research; data sources;
collection, analysis and presentation of data; selected topics In applied
economic research (economic model building, cost benefit analysis,
industry studies, aspects of industrial relations)
An integral part of this unit is a major research project. Students are
expected to conduct an investigation and write a report on their
research which will constitute a major proportion of the assessment
in this unit.
References
There is no single prescribed reference for this course, but extensive
use is made of current journal articles.
BE303 Monetary Economics
PrerequlsRe. BE102 Economlcs 1A and BE103
Economlcs 1B
Objectives
To prov~de students wlth
- an up-to-date vlew of AustralIan flnanclal markets In an
lnternatlonal context
- an appreclatlon of the nature and work~ngs of the AustralIan
monetary system and changes In thls system
Course outline
- Deregulated flnanclal markets - causes nature and impl~cat~ons
The Reserve Bank and ~ts pollcles In a deregulated market
- Monetary theory developments, ~ts appllcatlons and an evaluat~on
of current monetary policy
Text books
Moore, D F~nanc~al Instrtutrons and Markets, 2nd Edltlon Wamberal
Serend~p Publications, 1990
BE303 Monetary Economtcs Course Booklet
References
Bruce. R., McKern, B. and Pollard. I. Handbook of Australian Corporate
Finance, 3rd edn. Sydney: Butterworth, 1989
Juettner, D.J. and Valentine. T. (eds) The Econmics and Management
of F~nancial Institutions. Longman Cheshire, 1987
Lewis, M.K. and Wallace. R. (eds) Australra's Financial lnstitutrons and
Markets. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1985
Mlshkin, F The Economics of Money Banking and Financial Markets,
2nd edn. Scott Foresman and Co., 1989

BE304 lnternational Economics
Prerequisite, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This unit provides a study of international finance and trade with
special reference to Australia. Topics covered include:
Australia's External Position
- Balance of Payments - concepts, trends and outlook
- External Debt
Foreign Exchange Markets
Exchange rate determination
- Fixed versus floating exchange rate mechanisms
- Foreign exchange risk management
The lnternational Financial System
- Events since 1945
- lnternational financial centres
- Current outlook and problems
The Basis of lnternational Trade
- Gains from trade
- Explanations of trade patterns
- Australia's trade pattern
Trade Restrictions
- Argument for protection
- Costs of protection
- Policy instruments
Trade, Growth and Economic Development
- Regional Integration
GAlT
- Policies relating to trade and growth
Australia's Trade and Industry Policies
- Past approaches to industry assistance
- Current issues and problems
- Improving Australia's international competitiveness
References
Kreinin, M. lnternational Economics - A ,%/icy Approach, 6th edn.
New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991
Lindert, P.H. lnternational Economics, 9th edn. Homewood, Ill: Irwin,
1991
Manuell. G. Floating Down Under - Foreign Exchange in Australia.
Sydney: The Law Book Co. Ltd., 1986
BE305
Urban Economics
Prerequisite. BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 16
In this unit, students develop an analytical approach to appraising
urban problems and policies. While the emphasis is on economic
analysis, part of the course is devoted to discussing sociological and
town planning perspectives of urban problems. The unit covers the
following broad areas: urban location decisions, government and
private roles in urban development, housing, transport, and human
resources delivery.
References
Beed. C.S. Melbourne's Development and Planning. Melbourne:
Elewarra Press. 1981
Neutze, M. Australian Urban Policy. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1978
BE306
Economics of Social lssues
Prerequisites, BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis or
BE202 Industry and Government or BE204 Economic
Evaluation
This course examines both the uses and limitations of orthodox
economic theory in understanding many of the important social,
economic and political issues that are current in Australia today. In
so doing the course will further students' understanding of the roles
of both business and government in furthering society's . objectives. .
Issues considered will be drawn from the dlshbutlon of Income, wealth
and Dovertv. the ~ncldence of unemolovment. and the roles of Drlvate
entekprise and government in the piovkion of health-care, education.
transport, energy and environmental protedion.
The unit endeavours to teach students the theory and principles
needed to be able to analyse social issues from an economic
perspective.
Textbook
Because of the contemporary nature of the unit no textbook is set.
Comprehensive reference lists will be provided.
Faculty of Arts
Double Degree Bachelor of Business/
Bachelor of Arts (Japanese)
The double degree Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts (Japanese)
is of four years' duration and is designed to enable students to
complete the compulsory requirements for any d the Business degree
streams together with the full range of the available Japanese subjects
in order to qualify for the award of two degrees.
The four Business specialisations listed below are available for combination
with Japanese.
First year (common to all four Business degree streams)
BClOl Accounting 1A
or
BC102 Accounting 16
BC103 Accounting 1C
BE102 Economics 1A
BE103 Economics 1B
BHlOl Organisations and Management
EL101 Legal Environment of Business
BMlOl The Marketing Concept
BT102 lnformation Technology 1A
BT103 lnformation Technology 16
SM147 Quantitative Analysis A
or
SM148 Quantitative Analysis B
Students do not have to identify which major stream they intend to
study until enrolling for second year subjects
Accounting
(10 mandatory, 7 Japanese subjects and 1 further elective)
~ana~ement-~ccount~ng 1
Manaaement Accountina " 2
~ontrgct Law
Quantitative Management Techniques
Corporate Accounting
Law of Business Organisations
Taxation
Financial Management
Accounting Theory
Auditing
Computing (1987 revision)
(8 mandatory, 7 Japanese and 3 further electives)
lnformation Analysis
Commercial Programming
Data Base Management Systems
Data Communications
Systems Development Strategies
Systems Software
Industrial Project A and B
Economics - Marketing
(10 mandatory, 7 Japanese subjects and 1 further elective)
Managerial Economic Analysis
lndustry and Government
Economics Techniques for Business
Market Behaviour
Marketing Strategy
Marketing Research
Product Management
One third year Economics unit
Two further units from either Economics and/or Marketing
Marketing
(10 mandatory and 7 Japanese subjects and 1 further elective)
Market Behaviour
Marketing Strategy
Marketing Data Management
Management Accounting 1
Organisation Behaviour 1
Marketing Research
Product Management
Strategic Marketing Cases
yarketing and the Law
one elective unit which must be a third year Marketing unit.
Japanese (major sequence)
Japanese 1
Japanese 2
Japanese 3A
Japanese 38
Introduction to Japan
Communication in Japanese
Modern Japan
The elective subject(s) may be taken from either the Faculty of Arts
or Business.

Double Degree Bachelor of Business1
Bachelor of Arts (Italian)
The double degree Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts (Italian) is
of four years' duration and is designed to enable students to complete
the compulsory requirements for any of the Business degree streams
together with the full range of the available ltalian subjects in order
to qualify for the award of two degrees.
Details of the four Business specializations available for combination
with ltalian are as detailed under Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of
Arts (Japanese).
The subjects offered within the Arts Faculty are as follows:
ltalian 1
ltalian 2
ltalian 3A
ltalian 3C
ltalian Culture 1
ltalian Culture 2
Common Market Politics
ltalian Business Practice
The elective subject(s) may be taken from either the Faculty of Arts
or Business.
Double Degree Bachelor of BusinesslBachelor
of Arts (Korean)
Details of the four Busin&s special~sat~onsavailable for combination
wlth Korean are as detailed under Bachelor of Bus~nesslBachelor of
Arts (Japanese).
The subjects offered within the Arts Faculty are as follows:
Korean 1
Korean 2
Korean 3A
Korean 38
Background to Contem orary Korean Society
Contemporary Korean gociety
Modern Korea
The elective subject(s) may be taken from either the Faculty of Arts
or Business.
Postgraduate courses
~084 Graduate Diploma in Applied
Psychology
The course is offered as a one year full-time or two years parttime
program. It is designed for students who have completed
a first degree with a three-year major sequence of studies
in Psychdogy undertaken in a course (or courses) approved
for this DurDose by the Australian Psycholoaical Society. The
program is'intended to complete students' f6undation siudies
in psychology as a science and as a profession. The course
is designed to prepare students to enter the profession by
meeting the educational requirements for Associate
Membership of the Australian Psychological Society.
The course has the following objectives:
(a) to enable students to understand and apply the principles
of social science which underlie the discipline of
psychology;
(b) to enable students to acquire knowledge of the principles
of social and behavioural science research design and
analysis;
(c) to enable students to extend skills in formulating research
problems, gathering and analysing data, interpreting and
communicating research findings;
(d) to enable students to acquire advanced knowledge in
selected topic areas within psychology and applied
psychology, building upon and extending basic
undergraduate preparation;
(e) to provide students with an understanding of the nature
of psychology as a profession, the ethical, moral, legal
and social responsibilities of the psychologist, and the
role of the Australian Psychological Society;
(9 to prepare students for entry level work as psychologists-in-training
under supervision in occupational fields
such as applied social research, the human services, and
human resources.
Entrance requirements
Application for the Graduate Diploma is made on the Institute's
standard graduate studies application form. Applicants with
good undergraduate grades in psychology are interviewed by
the Graduate Dmloma Proaram Co-ordinator. The Co-ordinator
prepares an order-of-mek list for entry to the course. The
order-of-merit list is based primarily on the applicant's level
of performance in hislher undergraduate psychology course.
Where appropriate this is supplemented by taking into account
reports of academic and professional referees, applicant's
work background, and the stated reasons for wishing to
undertake the course.
In order to be accepted into the course, an applicant must:
1. (a) be qualified for the award of a degree at an Australian
university or college of advanced education;
and
(b) have completed a three-year major sequence of studies
in psychology in a course, or courses, approved by the
Australian Psychological Society,
or
2. have equivalent overseas qualifications.
In those cases where an applicant meets the requirement of
l(a) above, but does not meet the requirement I(b), he or she
may apply to complete all or part of the undergraduate psychology
program at Swinburne Institute of Technology in order
to become eligible to make application for entry to the Graduate
Diploma.
Course structure
The course offers 9 subjects which vary in their unit weighting.
This weighting reflects the work requirements of each subject
in the program. Students must complete 8 of these subjects.
This course structuring ensures that all students develop basic
competencies in research design and analysis and an understanding
of the ethical, moral, legal and social responsibilities
of psychologists engaged in social and applied research
and professional practice.
There is considerable scope for students to exercise their
preferences for particular topics in choosing amongst options
within subjects.
The subjects offered and their unit values are as follows:
'Course Units'
AY400 Applied Social Psychology 3
AY401 Research Design and Analysis 2
AY411 Counselling in the Human Services 4
AY413 Research Project and Thesis 6
AY414 Computer Use in Psychology 2
AY420
Assessim Persons and the
~nvironniknt 3
AY422 Ethics and Professional Issues 2
AY426 Special Applications: (Placement) OR 2
AY429 Personality and Social Development 2
3-unit options
- two of these must be completed
AY400 Applied Social Psychology 3
AY405 Small Group Processes 3
AY411 Counselling in the Human Services 3
The course can be completed in one year of full-time study
extending across two semesters. In first semester students
will be involved in 12 hours of class contact time per week.
In second semester students will be involved in 5 hours of
weekly class contact time and will also be consulting regularly
with an academicsupervisor about data analysis for the
research project and the writing of the thesis. Typically, time
wili also be spent undertaking a work placement during the
second semester.
The course can also be completed in two years of part-time
study extending over four semesters. Part-time students
usually have weekly class contact hours as follows:
Year
Hours
1 Semester 1 6
Semester 2 5
2 Semester 1 6
Semester 2 0

Students will also be involved in weekly consultation with an
academic supervisor about data analys~s for the research
project and the writing of the thesis.
Typically, time will also be spent undertaking a work
placement during the final semester.
Subject details
AY400 Applied Social Psychology
Lectures: 1 hour per week
Seminar: 2 hours per week
Assessment: Seminar presentation and
literature review
Theory, research and applications: social interdependence and
conflict; environmental psychology; health psychology; feminist social
psychology.
Research methodology and theory in applied social psychology.
Reference
Oskamp, S. AppliedSocial Psychology. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall, 1984
AY401 Research Design and Analysis
Lectures: 11/z hours per week
Seminar: 11/2 hours per week
Assessment: Class tests 100%
Submission of
satisfactory research
proposal
Principles of research design.
Development of a research proposal.
Social survey techniques.
Questionnaire construction.
Interviewing.
Experimental methods.
Principles of data analysis.
Reporting research.
References
Kerlinger, F. Foundations of Behavioral Research. 3rd edn. New York:
Holt Rinehart and Winston, 1985
Moser, C.A. and Kalton, G. Survey Methods in Social Investigation.
2nd Rev, edn, London: Gower, 1985
AY411
Counselling in the Human Services
Lectures: 1 hour per week
Laboratory: 2 hours per week
Prerequisite: AY405
Assessment: Theory examination 50%
Practical assignment 50%
Contemporary theory, research and practice in counselling psychology.
Models of training in counselling and interviewing.
Models of supervision in counselling psychology.
Counselling service delivery systems.
Evaluating and monitoring counselling service programs.
Contemporary theory and practice in small groop psychology; group
facilitation skills.
References
Egan, G. The Skilled Helpe~ 3rd edn, Monterey, California:
BrwksICole, 1990
Johnson, D.W. and Johnson, F.P. Joining Together: Group Theory and
Group Skills. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall,
1982
AY413
Research Project and Thesis
Independent research under supervision
Prerequisites: AY401 and AY414
Assessment: Submission of a minor
thesis (6,000-10p00
words), assessed by two
examiners
Each student is required to formulate individually an empirical research
question, design an appropriate study, cdlect and analyse data,
interpret these data in relation to the original research question, and
submit a report on the investigation in the form of a minor thesis.
Faculty of Arts
The research ~roiect may take any one of a number of forms: controlled
observations,case studks, fleld surveys, laboratory experiments, field
ex~eriments. secondarv analvsis of data sets. archlval research. The
individual &dent musfplan and carry out every phase of the project
from initial planning to final analysis, interpretation and reporting of
the data.
While flexibility in methodology is clearly required, given the diversity
of potential topics for investigation, the methodology and data analysis
procedures used must be (a) generally recognised within the field of
psychological research as sound and appropriate for the particular
question, and (b) correctly implemented in a systematic manner.
A member of the Psychology Department will be assigned to supervise
the research. Supervisor and student will be expected to meet
regularly for consultation according to a mutually agreed timetable.
The conduct of the research overall must conform in all respects to
the principles of research ethics stated in the Psychology Department's
Statement of Research Ethics.
References
Amerlcan Psycholog~cal Association. Publication Manual 3rd edn.
Washington D.C.: Amerlcan Psycholog~cal Ass.. 1984
Australian Psvcholoaical Socletv. Code of Professional Conduct.
Parkville, ~ic.: The .%ciety, 1986
Australian Psychological Society 21st Annual Report. Author, 1986
Swinburne Psychology Department. Graduate Diploma in Applied
Psychology Thesis Requirements. Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1987
Psvcholoav De~artment. Statement on Research Ethics. Melbourne:
AY414
Computer Use in Psychology
Lectures: 11/2 hours per week
Practical
Classes: 11/2 hours per week
Prerequisite1
Corequisite: AY401
Assessment: Class test on SPSS PC+
lntroduction to the IBM 3090 mainframe and TSO; lntroduction to the
IBM PC and MS-DOS.
Editing techniques: using EDIT on the IBM 3090 and the SPSS-PC+
REVIEW editor on the IBM PC.
Batch and interactive modes in SPSS
Principles of data analysis using SPSS
Data transformation an3 recoding in SPSS
Special applications
References
Norusis, M.J. The SPSS Guide to Data Analysis. Chicago: SPSS-lnc..
1987
AY420
Assessing Persons and
Environments
Lectures: 1 hour per week
Workshop1
demonstration: 1 hour per week
Assessment: Practical examination
100%
History of psychological measurement, significant developments,
present status and pattern of test usage.
The use of psychological tests: purchase and copyright; regulation
- Australian Psycholo ical Society Code of Conduct, Standards of
Practice, Guidelines on%e Use of Psychological Tests. American Psychological
Association standards.
Foundations of psychological measurement: reliability, validity, item
characteristics.
Constructing tests: generating items, formats, norms.
Using tests: general prinaples of test selection, administration, scoring,
interpretation, reporting and communication.
Using interviews and behavioural obse~ati0nS.
Assessment in particular applications: clinical, educational, vocational,
personality function, neurological and psychomotor, interpersonal
behaviour, environments. Computer administration, scoring and
interpretation.
References
Anastasi, A. Psychologcal Testing. 6th edn. New York: Macmillan, 1988
Groth-Marnat, G. Handbook of Psychological Assessment. 2nd edn,
New York: Wiley, 1990

AY422 Ethical and Professional Issues NO86 Graduate Diploma in Equal
Lectures: 1 hour per week
Seminaffilclass
exercises: 1 hour per week
Assessment: Required attendance and
participation in a minimum
of 75% of the class
meetings.
May include seminar presentation
and paper,
essay, andlor a class test.
Topics will be selected from the following:
Psychology as a profession: The Australian Psychological Society and
requirements for registration in the State of Victoria.
Confidentiality, report writing and supervision.
Philosophical and professional issues: morality and ethics:
professional problems
Psychology and the media.
Psychology and the law: mental health legislation, forensic psychology,
and the psychologist as expert witness.
References
Corey, G.. Schneider Corey M. and Callanan, P. lssues and Ethics in
the Helping Professions. 3rd edn, BrooksICole, 1988
Keith-Spiegel, P. and kocher, G.P. Ethics in Psychology: Professional
Standards and Cases New York: Random House, 1985
Nixon. M.C. (ed.) Issues in Psychological Practice. Melbourne:
Longman Cheshire, 1984
Opportunity Administration
This graduate diploma is offered as a one year full-time or
two years' part-time course. It has been designed to meet the
training and education needs associated with legislative and
social initiatives in equal opportunity and affirmative action.
The objectives of the course are:
(a) to develop an understanding of the principles and operation
of equal opportunity through exploration of key
issues and practical experiences;
(b) to increase understanding of organisations, including their
systems and operations;
(c) to provide participants with analysis of case studies and
to assist with the development and implementation of
similar initiatives within organisations which they choose
to study;
(d) to provide a range of skills that are necessary for successful
equal opportunity program administration:
researching, information gathering, change agent skills,
facilitating skills, developing personnel systems, networking,
decision-making, report writing and communication
skills;
(f) to the confidence and competence of equal
opportunity practitioners;
AY426 Special Application (g) to contribute to improvements in the quality of equal
Fieldwork placement
opportunity initiatives in the state.
Assessment: Satisfactory completion
Admission requirements
of the fieldwork program
Submission of a report on
Applicants should hold a degree or diploma from an approved
the assignments and
tertiary institution, but others having particularly relevant
activities
experience or qualifications will be encouraged to apply and
Students will be encouraged to undertake a period of approved will be considered for entry.
practical work in a Psychological Services Unit under the direct
Applicants' experience in the following areas will be taken
supervision of a professional psychologist. This work will normally
involve areas of applied psychology such as personnel selection, into account in selection of participants:
occupational health and safety, test construction and development, - Work with groups with special needs
counselling services, educational research. Students intending to - Personnel management
undertake such a program will be required to prepare a detailed - Industrial relations
proposal which must be jointly agreed upon by the supervising
Unions
psychologist and the member of the Psychology Department assigned - Equal Opportunity programs or related fields
to monitor the fieldwork placement. The program will involve assigned
reading, regular consultation between the student and the supervisor Per~~nal inte~iew~ may be conducted to ensure that the final
selection of participants is based on individual merit.
and the co-ordinator, the keeping of a work diary by the student, and
the submission of a report of 3.000 words on the placement and the
issues of practice highlighted by the placement.
Course structure
A minimum of 50 hours must be spent in the field.
The course consists of four compulsory semester subjects. The
subjects are as follows:
Reference AE4OO Principles of Equal Opportunity and the State
Australian Psychological Society. Standards d Professional Practice AE401 Data Usage and Evaluation
for Psychologists. Melbourne: Australian Psychological Society, 1985 AE402 Equal Opportunity and the Workplace
AY429
Personality and Social
Development
Lectures:
Seminaffi:
AE403
Equal Opportunity Implementation
Subject details
1 hour per week
AE400 Principles of Equal Opportunity
1 hour per week
Assessment: Theory research essay 50% and the State
(1,500-2,000 words) This subject explores the development ot principles and the basic
Class paper 50% concepts relating to equal opportunity and discrimination. The role
hi^ subject is a reading which requires students to examine
of legislation in achieving equal opportunity outcomes and the existing
contemporary issues of psychological theoly and practice concerning
requirements in Australia are
personality development and social behaviour. Topics covered may Other issues covered include:
include:
Basic concepts used to understand equal oppoftunity such as discrim-
Lifespan development models.
ination, target groups, race, gender, ethnicity, disability, harassment,
labour market segmentation.
Models of personality, and personality disturbance.
The role of government in international and local contexts.
Couples, marriage, the family.
The legal framework and the operation of laws governing equal
Psychology of women.
opportunity.
Life transitions and crises.
Gender in social life. AE401 Data Usage and Evaluation
Ageing.
This subject provides participants with training in skills needed to
Each student prepares a review paper suitable for publication in a anal~se and evaluate Staffing profiles for the purposes of equal oppormajor
psychological journal.
tunity administration. In addition to instruction in basic data compilation
and presentation, the following topics will be covered.
Individual supervision is provided by staff members.
Accessing existing data sources, determining new data sources within
Reference
the organization, organising a data base, qualitative and quant~tative
Peterson, C. Looking foward through the Lifespan. Sydney: Prentice research methods, data analysis, issues of confidentiality and ethics,
Hall. 1984
monitoring techniques and models of evaluation.
132

AE402
Equal Opportunity and the
Worblace
The skills and knowledge gained in thls subject will help participants
to understand ~OrkDla~e dvnamlcs and to aerate as effectlve equal
opbrtu& administrators. it will also raise issues of workplace organisation
as they affect employees in general and target groups in
particular. Topics covered include:
The structure and nature of organisations, formal and industrial
relations, personnel and administrative practices conditions of employment,
the special needs of target groups and the effects of organisational
change on various groups within the organisation.
AE403
Equal Opportunity Implementation
This subject has a strong practical orientation and is designed to assist
participants to formulate and implement an affirmative action program
in their place of employment. (For those rho are not currently
employed, placements with organisations will be sought). This subject
is done at the end of a student's course and draws on the concepts
and skills learned in subjects studied earlier. Emphasis is placed on
developing policies and procedures which will enhance equal opportunity
within a particular organisation. Partidpants will undertake individual
implementation projects under the supervision of staff which
will be complemented by discussions of the issues involved in implementation
programs.
NO83 Graduate Diploma in Japanese
The Graduate Diploma in Japanese is an intensive language
course based on an examination of Japanese current affairs.
It is designed to enable students to develop their language
skills through reading recent Japanese newspaper articles
and listenina to media broadcasts. Specific training is focused
on reading,aural comprehension and speaking:
The course has been planned so that students who have completed
a three-year undergraduate program in Japanese can
further their knowledge of the Japanese language and reach
a stage where they have linguistic competence to deal with
a wide variety of topics in the written and spoken language.
Development of competence in grammer, particularly the
understanding of long and complex sentence structures, and
the acquisition of a wider vocabula range, including a large
number of characters, is essential.xtudents become familiar
with a wide variety of journalistic and written styles found in
newspapers. Training in translation and precis writing, and
in the various styles and speech levels which characterise
modern spoken Japanese is also a part of the course.
Language development is focused on four major areas of
Japanese studies: social, cultural, business and political
Students consider:
(a) general problems and trends as they are analysed by
Japanese writers within the framework of the society as
a whole; and
(b) the validity of assertions and generalisations which are
made by Japanese, as well as by foreign writers.
Entrance requirements
Application for the Graduate Diploma is made on the Institute's
standard araduate studies application form.
~~~licants-must have adegreb&ith a major in Japanese language,
or equivalent, from a recognised university, college or
institute. All applicants are assessed by a selection committee
and in certain cases may be required to complete approp-
Faculty of Arts
Subjects on Japanese society and culture, and on business
and politics are offered in alternative years Reading materials
are available through the department. In all subjects students
are required to complete one research project and two tests
per semester.
The subjects offered at present are:
AJ400 Japanese Society A
AJ401 Japanese Society B
AJ402 Japanese Culture A
AJ403 Japanese Culture B
AJ404 Japanese Business and lndustry A
AJ405 Japanese Business and Industry B
AJ406 Japanese Politics A
AJ407 Japanese Politics B
Preliminary reading
Machida, T. A Collecbn of Japanese Newsaper Articles, 1987-1991.
Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1991
References
Masuda, K. (ed.) Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary 4th
edn. Tokyo: Kenkyusha, 1974
Kindaichi, K. (ed.) Shinmeika Kokugo Jiten. 2nd edn, Tokyo: Sanseido,
1979
Nelson, A. Modern Readers: Japanese English Character Dictionary.
Rev. edn. Tokyo: Tuttle, 1978
Spahn, M. Japanese Character Dictionary, Tokyo: Nichigai, 1989
Subject details
AJ400
Japanese Society A
This subject provides an introduction to problems which exist in
Japanese society. The topics cover family problems, old age and social
security, social problems relating to crime, suicide, gangster organisations,
youth violence; dietary life and common diseases; female
inequality, and theories on Japanese society. The program is based
mainly on newspaper items but some media broadcasts are included
and specialised lectures lead seminars on certain topics.
Students have the opportunity to deliver individual oral reports to improve
their spoken Japanese.
AJ401
Japanese Society B
Students extend their reading of topics introduced in Japanese Society
A and also develop their conversational skills in this subject.
AJ402
Japanese Culture A
In this subject topics covering various aspects of modern Japanese
culture studied, for example, Koreans in Japan, Japenese repatriates
from China, education, corruption, Japanese language, media, arts,
sport, Japanese abroad and international understanding.
AJ403
Japanese Culture B
This subject allows students to extend their reading of topics
introduced in Japanese Culture A and to develop their conversational
skills.
AJ404
Japanese Business and lndustry A
This subject covers topics related to business, for example,
employment and working conditions; advanced technology; structure
of industry; trade friction; automobile industry; Japan and world trade;
energy and tertiary industry.
Most of the material on which the program is based is selected from
newspapers but some media broadcasts are also included. Emphasls
1s on the acauisltlon of vocabulaw. characters and some ~ractice In
trans'ati0n and p recis writing.
Students have the opportunity to deliver individual oral reports to
improve their Woken Japanese.
riate units of the Bachelor of Arts degree course, or under- AJ405 Japanese Business and Industry
take a preliminary reading course before being accepted for
enrolment.
Additional reading which extends the topics introduced in Japanese
Business A is covered. Here the emphasis is placed on the
comorehension and active use of arammar - structures. - -~ Students also
develop their conversational skillsin this subject.
Course structure
The course may becompleted part-time in the evening over AJ406 Japanese Politics A
two years. It comprises eight semester subjects and each
involves four hours of class meetings per week. Usually,
students enrol for two subjects concurrently in each of the
four semesters but may in special circumstances, enrol for
only one subject per semester.
In this subject students are introduced to various aspects of the Japanese
political system through the reading of newspaper articles supplemented
by some media broadcasts. Topics include political parties
and elections, Japan-Australia relations, textbook controversy, defence,
anti-nuclear movements, administration, government interference, politicians
travelling abroad, environmental prdection and refugee policy.
133

AJ407
Japanese Politics B
This subject covers reading and conversation which extends to topics
introduced in Japanese Politics A.
NO87
Graduate Diploma in Japanese
for Professionals
The Graduate Diploma in Japanese for Professionals is an
intensive language course specifically designed to provide
graduates with no previous studies of Japanese with
vocational language skills and basic knowledge of the cultural,
social, political and economic aspects of contemporary Japan.
The course is planned so that graduates in Business, Law,
Medicine, Engineering, etc., who are working, or planning to
undertake employment, in an area requiring Japanese
language skills and knwledge of Japan, mn acquire the main
principles of the written and spoken language as well as
vocabulary and expressions pertinent to their professional
needs.
Entrance requirements
Application for the Graduate Diploma in Japanese for Professionals
is made on the Institute's standard graduate studies
application form.
Applicants must have a degree, and be employed, or have
prospects of employment Tn an area requiring Japanese
lanauaae skills and knowledae of the cultural. social. . . political
anti ec&tomic aspects of contemporary ~apan.
Course structure
The course entails two years of part-time study.
Language Component: 6 hours per week over 4 semesters.
Year 1
The language component in Year 1 includes basic grammar, situational
dialogues, aural comprehension and readinghvriting sections
which provide students with the basic knowledge of the mechanics
of the language.
Year 2
The language component at the second year level is divided into a
'core' segment of advance grammar which is taken together by all
students, and 'special purpose' modules which are studied by groups
of students with common professional language needs. The modules
concentrate on spoken and written language applicable to different
professional domains.
Supporting components: equivalent to 2 hours per week over 4
semesters.
The four supporting components include culture, society, politics and
economy.
These components tale the form of five 3 hour seminars per semester.
Subject details
AJ420
All students take this subject in first semester of first year. In addition
to an introduction to the basic features of Japanese grammar, reading,
speaking and writing covered in the language component a series of
seminars on Japanese culture and history are included in the
coursework. The language component is assessed by regular tests
and assignments and all students must present a seminar paper and
write a research essay for assessment of the culture and history
component.
AJ421
This subject is taken in the second semester of the first year. All
students will continue their study of basic Japanese grammar, reading,
speaking and writing. The language component is assessed by regular
tests and assignments. The non-language comDonent conslsts of
seminars on contemporary Japanese-sosety. .
The non-language component is assessed by a seminar paper and
an essay.
A5422
This subject is taken in the first semester of the second year. The
language component includes advanced grammar classes to be
studied by all students, and "special purpose" reading, writing and
conversation modules to be studied by groups of students with similar
professional language needs. The non-language component consists
of seminars on Japanese economy and business.
Assessment is based on tests and assignments for the language
component and on seminar paper and an essay for the background
studies component.
A5423
This subject is taken in the second semester of the second year.
Students will continue the study of 'special modules' in professional
groups, and all students will attend advanced grammar classes and
background seminars. The language component will be assessed by
regular tests and assignments and the background component will
be assessed by seminar paper and essay.
Assessment
Students are expected to complete regular tests and assignments for
the 'core' language components, andin essaylresearch ass~gnment
for each of the supporting components.
References
AJ420 and AJ421:
The following texts are required:
Machida, T. & Skoutalides, A. Nihongo: Reacfng and Writing. Vol. 1-5,
Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1988
Machida. T. & Skoutarides, A. Kaiwa (Cwemation). Melbourne:
Swinburne Press, 1989
Skoutarides, A. & Machida, T. Nihongo; Grammar Notes. Vol. 1-2,
Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1985
Skoutarides, A. & Peters, G. (eds) Dictionary, E-J, J-E, for Japanese
1. Melbourne: Swinburne Press, 1987
Tapes to accompany these texts are also available. Reading lists for
the background component are available from the Japanese Centre.
AJ422 and AJ423:
A detailed list of required texts, tapes and background reading lists
may be obtained from the Japanese Centre.
NO85 Graduate Diploma in Urban
Research & Policy
This course is designed to supplement students' general
education by providing them with the practical and conceptual
skills necessary to work more effectively or secure employment
in the fields of urban and social planning, urban
administration, community development and research. More
specifically the course is designed to provide knowledge of
and experience in:
(a) the analysis of Australian urban development and the
social and economic problems that derive from this
development;
(b) the formation and characteristics of national, state, and
metropolitan policies affecting the urban environment;
(c) the use of techniques and skills relevant to urban research
and planning, policy formulation and evaluation.
Entrance requirements
Application for the Graduate Diploma is made on the Institute's
graduate studies application form.
Applicants must hold a degree or diploma from an approved
tertiary institution, including major studies in at least one of
sociology, politics, economics, geography, planning or
contemporary history. Students with maiors in disci~line other
than those listed may also be considered.

Course structure
The course entails one year of full-time study or two years'
part-time study, involving six semester subjects and a research
report. Each subject usually involves three hours of class
meetings per week for one semester.
The following subjects will be offered in 1992:
AS400 Urban Social Theory
AS402 Urban Policy
AS403 Research Report
AS404 Advanced Urban Research
AS41 1 Urban Research
AS413 Applied Social Planning
AS465 Urban and Regional Economics
Each student is expected to complete a research report
relating to either policy issues or some aspects of urban policy
and planning or community development. Where possible,
research is developed in co-operation with government
departments, consultancy firms, community groups and
research institutes.
Subject details
AS400
Urban Social Theory
This subject is designed to introduce students to the major theoretical
perspectives used by social scientists to analyse urban development,
to examine the natureof the urbanisation process and related urban
problems, and to develop an understanding of the role of the State
in urban society.
AS402
Urban Policy
This subject is concerned with an examination of national, state, and
local policies that pertain to urban areas. (Xucial issues covered
include consideration of what constitutes urban problems and policies,
the significance of ideology to policy, formulating policy, putting ideas
into operation, evaluation and analysis of policy, and the significance
of political structure. Particular topics such as housing, land-use, infrastructure
will be used to exemplify issues, and experts in various policy
areas participate in the course.
AS403
Research Report
This subject provides students with the opportunity to gain research
experience by carrying out a research study under staff supervision
and presenting the results of the study in the form of a report. The
report is one of the major requirements of the graduate diploma
course.
AS404
Advanced Urban Research
This subject offers more intensive first-hand training in research
methods than that offered in AS41 1. Students undertake a group
research program which involves taking a research issue through from
conce~tion to cornoletion of a final reoort. The research Droaram wlll
involve students fn survey, design; data collection, interviewing,
coding, computing, and research analysis. For students undertaking
an empirical analysis in their research projects or for students seeking
employment as research officers, this subject provides necessary
additional training in urban research.
AS41 1
Urban Research
Th~ subject has three broad object~ves. tlrst, to Introduce students
to the ranae of sub~ect areas and methodoloa~es covered In contemporary
urban reseaich; secondly, to familiarise students with information
sources for Australian urban,research and methods of data acquisition:
and thirdlv. to develop a llmlted competence in basic research
techn~ques. ~h[s involves introductory statistical procedures relevant
. to urban - - - research. - - - useof Swinburne's comwter facilltles, and an lntroduction
to the sdftware packages for sodial research
AS41 3
Applied Social Planning
In this subject the role of the social scientist in the social planning
process is examined. While emphasizing the important role of the
social scientist in critically examining the values and assumptions
underpinning the planting process, this subject is predominantly skills
oriented. Particular attention is paid to the techniques of needs
surveys, evaluation, secondary data analysis, and social impact
analysis.
AS465
Faculty of Arts
Urban and Regional Economics
This subject is designed to introduce students to the principles of economic
analysis as they apply to the city. Particular attention is given
to techniques of economic analysis such as cost benefit analysis,
program budgeting, investment analysis and demand forecasting.
Topics to which these principles and techniques are applied include
housing, transport, and local government.
NO90 Master of Arts
The degree of Master (by research and thesis) may be under;
taken within the Faculty. Applications for masters
candidature may be made by persons whose first degree or
diploma has been completed to a sufficiently meritorious
standard or whose background and experience is considered
suitable. In the first instance, enquiries should be directed
to the Head or Chairman of the appropriate department.
NO01 Doctor of Philosophy
The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be undertaken by
su~tably qualified individuals in areas of study compatible with
the interests and expertise of staff.
NO91
Master of Arts in Counselling -
Psychology
This course is offered as a four year part-time evening
program. It is designed for students who have completed a
first degree and have completed a four year sequence of
studies in psychology. The course is intended to prepare
graduates for professional practice as counselling
psychologists.
The course has been granted provisional accreditation as a
Fifth or Sixth Year course in psychology by the Course
Development and Accreditation Committee of the Australian
Psychological Society.
Course objectives
Graduates of the course will be able to:
(a) assess the current level of psychosocial functioning of
individuals, groups, couples and families and formulate
appropriate helping interventions;
(b) provide counselling help to individuals, groups, couples
and families experiencing difficulties connected with
relationships, education, careers, work, marriage, parenting,
crises, and life-transitions;
(c) evaluate and monitor the quality of helping services
provided by a counselling services unit;
(d) provide consulting help to individuals, organisations and
community groups in relation to psychosocial
development and adaptation.
Entrance requirements
There is an intake of 20 students into the course every two
years. The next intake will be for the 1992 academic year.
In the event of course vacancies occurring, it may be possible
for individual students to be admitted to the program before
a scheduled intake. A plication for the course is made on
the form available Rom the Psychology Department.
Applicants with good results in their Fourth Year studies
andlor relevant human services work experience will be
interviewed by a selection panel and an order-of-merit for
entry will be prepared taking into account (a) academic
preparation, (b) previous work and training experience, (c)
academic and professional referees' reports.

In order to be accepted into the course, an applicant must
(a) be qualified for the award of a degree from an Australian
university or college of advanced education, and (b) have
completed a four-year sequence of studies in psychology in
a course, or courses, approved by the Australian Psychological
Society's Course Development and Accreditation
Committee (as published in the Society's Bulletin) OR hold
overseas qualifications recognised as equivalent for the
purpose of Associate Membership by the Australian Psychological
Society's Membership Committee.
Satisfactory Progress
Students' progress will be monitored by the Department's
Graduate Studies Committee. A student who is given an N
or NA grade for a unit twice may not be permitted to re-enrol
in the course. Students will be required to complete the
course in not more than six years.
Course structure
Counselling psychology is very diverse, with many particular
applications. The course has been organised in such a way
as to (a) teach generic skills and areas of knowledge which
apply across the various areas of counselling psychology
practice, and (b) examine selected areas of practice which
exemplify the delivery of counselling-related services to
persons with particular needs. There are three course
components: coursework (50%); supervised practical work
(25%); an empirical research project (25%).
The overall structure of the course will be as follows:
Year Semester Course Element
1 1 AY500 Human Services Research and
Evaluation
AY501 Development and Adaptation
2 AY502 Psychological Assessment
AY503 Research Colloquium
2 1 AY504 Counselling Theory and Skills
AY505 Counselling Psychology A:
Psychology of Work, Health Psychology
2 AY506 Counselling Applications
AY507 Counselling Psychology B:
Psychology of the Family, Educational
Counselling
1 AY600 Professional, Ethical & Leqal -
Issues
2 AY601 Group Counselling Skills
(1 & 2) AY602 Supervised Practicum
- lnternship A
4 2 AY603 Aspects of Professional Practice
(1 & 2) AY604 Supervised Practicum
- lnternship B
2 AY605 Submission of research project
report
Three of the coursework units comprise advanced study in
areas central to the practice of Counselling Psychology;
Development and Adaptation
Psychology of Work and Health Psychology
Psychology of Marriage and the Family, Educational
Counselling.
Five of the coursework units comprise professional skill
development training:
Human Services Research and Evaluation
Psychological Assessment
Counselling Theory and Skills
Counselling Applications
Group Counselling Skills
There is a coursework unit examining Professional and Ethical
Issues in Counselling Psychology Practice.
AY500 Human Services Research and
Evaluation
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Individual research assignment (100%)
This course will build upon knowledge and skills acquired during
undergraduate study In areas such as research deslgn and stat~st~cal
analvsls The alm will be to equlp qraduates to deslqn, conduct and
rePoit applications of p~~chological~esearch method6logies in human
services settings.
Review of foundation topics in research design and analysis.
Research design in field settings.
Measurement in human services research.
Qualitative research methodologies.
Action research and intervention.
Single-case methodologies.
Models of program evaluation.
Program evaluation methods.
Program monitoring and performance indicators.
Evaluation in practice.
Computer applications in human services research.
Computer data analysis - advanced procedures.
Reporting research.
References
Lawler, E.E., Mohran,A.M., Mohrman, S.A., Ledford, G.E. and Cummings,
T.G. (eds) (1985) Doing Research that is Useful for Theory and
Practice. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1985
Kerlinger, F. (1985) Foundations of Behaviouml Research. 3rd edn. New
York: Holt. Rinehard and Winston, 1986
Patton, M.Q. Qualitatiw Evaluation Methods 2nd edn, Newbury Park,
C.A.: Sage, 1990
AY501
Development and Adaptation
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Seminar paper 40%
Class test 60%
Aims
This course is designed to explore contemporary theory pertaining
to life-span development, adaptation to stress, and life transitions; and
to study a selected array of specific developmental transitions and life
crises together with related intervention strategies which help
individuals, families and groups to cope with such life-events.
Introduction to life span development theory: analysis of meta theories.
Theoretical models der~ed from the above rnetatheory, e.g. Havighurst,
Erikson, Piaget, Levinson, Neugarten and others.
The notion of life transitions and their links to the experience of stress
and coping.
Theoretical modes of stress and coping. with particular reference to
the transactional models of Lazarus and Cox.
An illustrative model for analysing human adaptation to life transitions:
Scholsberg.
Problems and issues in conceptualising and measuring development
and adaptation to life events.
Interaction strategies for coping with life crises and transitions.
Applications of the above theories and models to specific life events
including: burnout as experienced by selected groups (counsellors,
teachers. executives): identitv issues in adolescence and earlv
adulthood; maladapt'Ne adapiation strategies (drug and alcoholi
developmental problems confronting men and women in mldlife; retirement,
aging and senescence.
References
Lazarus, R.S. and Folkman, S. Stress Appraisaland Coping, New York:
Springer, 1984
Peterson, C. Looking Forward through the Life Span. 2nd edn, New
York: Prentice Hall, 1989
Schaie. W.K. Adult Develmment and Ageing. - - 2nd edn, Boston: Scott,
~oresman and Co., 1986'
AY502
Psychological Assessment
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Practical examination involving the use,
interpretation, and reporting of selected assessment
procedures (100%)
This subject builds upon knowledge of psychometrics gained from
undergraduate study and is intended to equip graduates with skills
in a selection of psychological assessment procedures.
A review of the foundations of psychological assessment: reliability,
validity.
Procedures for establishing and improving the reliability and validity
of assessment procedures.
The assessment interview and Psychodiagnostic Systems (eg.
DSM-Ill-R).

Cognitive and behaviwral assessment; Adaptive Behaviour scales.
Assessing occupational ilderests and references The Holland VPI and
SDS. the W.A.P.S.
Assessing abilities: including the use of WlSCR and WAIS-R.
Self-report and projective measures of persorrality functioning.
Conceptualising client and social system dynamics.
Reporting psychological assessments.
References
Tallent, A. Psychdogical Report Writing. New York: Prentice Hall. 1988
Bdlack, A.S. and Hersen. M. Behwioural Assessment. 3rd ed.. New
York: erga am on, 1988
Groth-Marnat, G. Handbook of Psychological Assessment. 2nd edn,
New York: Wiley. 1990
Merluui, W., Glass, CR. and Genst. M. Cognitive Assessment. NK
New York Uni. Press, 1966
AY503
Research Colloquium
Hours per week: 2
Assessment: Presentation of a research proposal (100oh)
This subject is designed to extend students' appreciation of
developments in research related to counselling psychology.
Components include:
Brief presentations by students in the program concerning their
pmposed individual research projects.
Presentations by Departmental stall and visiting researchers and
~ractitioners concernina - current research in the field.
Examination of selected examples of published research which
constitute exemplars of approaches to researching theoretical or
practice issues in counselling psychology.
References
myth, D.R. and Strong, SR. The Scientifc Study of Counselling and
Psychotherapy. American Psychdogist, 41, 4461-466, 1986
Heinemann, A.W. and Shontz, F.C. Methods of Studying Persons. The
Counselln Ps~hologist, 13, 111-125, 1985
Hill, C.E., tarter, J.A. and Farrell, M.K. A Case Study of the Process
and Outcome of Time-limited Counselling. Journal ot Counselling
Psphology. 30, 3-181983
AY504
Counselling Theory and Skills
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Practii examination involving the demon-
stration of an adeauate skill level in conductina - and
appraising a counselling inte~iew (100%)
This subject is intended first to consolidate students' counsellingrelated
knowledge and skills acquired during undergraduate study.
The second aim is to develop a high level of sk~ll in those helpintended
communication behaviours seen as fundamental to effective interpersonal
helping. The third alm is to develop a basic level of
competence in selected intervention techniques used frequently by
counselling psychologists.
The development of counselling and counselling psychology. Major
theoretical perspectives; cognitive-behavioural, psychodynamic.
experiential, systemic.
Developments in counsellor education: Carkhuff's IDETISHRT model;
Kagan's IPR; Ivey's microcounselling model; Stone's mgnitive
behavioural model, the work of Egan. The clientcounsellor relationship,
goals of helping.
Developin competence in counselling skills thrwgh microcounselling
skill-base! training.
Assessment, problem-conceptualisation, selected cognitivebehavioural
interventions.
References
Cormier, L.S. and Hackney, H. The PmtessionalCMlnselloc A Process
Guide to Helping. En ewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Corsini. R.J. Current%ychotherapies. 3rd edn, Itaska, II: Peacock,
1984
Egan. G. The Skilled Helper; 3rd ed. Monterey: BrookslCole. 1990
Strupp, H. and Binder, J. psycho the^ in a k w Key: A Guide lo Time-
Limited Dynamic Psydrotherapy: New York: Basic Books, 1984
hculty of Arts
AY505 Counselling Psychology A:
Psychology of Work and Health
Psychology
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Applied project 50%
Class Test 50%
Aims: This course is designed to develop an understanding of
counselling practice related to health, well-king and behaviour with
particular reference to the personlorgan~sation interface and
organisational settings. Specific topics will indude:
Psychology of Work
Organisational theory
Career choice, development and change
Vocatio~ial guidance and career counselling
Personnel selection, induction, training and socialisation
Leadership and supervis~on
Communication
Staff appraisal
Industrial relations, negotiations, change and conflict resolution
Health Psychology
Stress, Illness and Psychological Health; Slress and its management
Rehabilitation
Retrenchment, unemployment and retirement
Occupational health and safety
Health surveillance, occupational hygiene and safety practices
hessing and confronting potential hazards
Ergonomics and personlmachine interaction
Future developments
References
Cascio, W.F. Applied Psflhdogy in F'ersonnel Management, 3rd ed,
New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1987
Kasl, S.V. and Cooper, CL (eds) Stn,ss and Ha:
Issues in Research
MethodO(0dy. New York: Wiley. 1987
Kinf M. Stanley, G. and Burrows, G. Stress' Theory end Prectica
Sy ney: Harcourt Brace, Jovanovrch, 1987
Yost, E.B. and CorbisMey, M.A. Career Counselling: A Psychological
Approach. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1987
AY506
Counselling Applications
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Practical examination involving casestudies
(100%)
This subject follows an from Counselling Theory and Skills. It aims
to intmduce students, in a workshop con!&, to important topics in
counselling pdychology practice in preparation for students' Supervised
practica and subsequent independent pradice.
Application of counselling techniques to selected client-problems: e.g.
depression, anxiety, anger, interpersonal-skill deficits, decision-making.
crisis counselling, substance abuse, pwt-traumatic stress,
rehabilitat~on, marital and family conflict, child abuse.
Cross cultural issues in counselling.
Special issues in client assessment: level of risk of suicidal or violent
behaviour, physical illness; DSM3R.
Record-keeping and referral, uslng psychological tests in counselling.
Supervision: models of supervision. supervision skills.
Consultation.
References
Bellak. L. and Siegel, H. Handbook of Intensive Brief and Emergency
Lachmont. NY: C.P.S.. 1987
pggy%. (ed) Rehabilitation Counsellor Preparation and
Development. Springfield Ill: Thomas. 1986
Figley, C.R. Tmuma and its Wah: The Stu&,and Titment of Pbst-
traumatic Stress Disorder. New York: BrunerIMazel, 1986
Stohenberg, C.D. and Delworthy, U. Supervising CounseIIo~~ and
Therapists: A lop mental Approach. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
16R7
SZ, D.W. Counselling the Culhrrally Dihrent. 2nd edn, New York:
Wiley, 1990

AY507 Counselling Psychology B: AY601 Group Counselling Skills
Psvcholoclv of Marriage and the Hours per week: 3
~ainily, ~aucational Chnselling
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Seminar presentation 50%
Class Test 50%
Aims: The course 1s des~gned to:
(a) examine contemporary theory concerning the role and function
of the Australian family and its interaction within the wider society;
(b) introduce students to theory and strategies appropriate to the
provision of counselling psychology services within educational
settings; and
(c) encourage students to conduct self-initiated research into a
selection of topics related to the family and education.
Introduction to the study of the family. Definitions of family, variations
of family structure. The Australian family: demographics. Family
formation and family functions as they concern individuals, families
and society. Work and the family life-cycle.
Generational differences: changes in family structure and
expectations.
Sibling relationships within families.
Families in crisis: seoaration and divorce.
Assessment: Demonstration of an acceptable level of
skill in conducting group-based activities 100%
This subject is designed to provide students with the knowledge, skills,
and self-awareness necessary to use grouphased interventions. There
will be didactic input, experiential learning, - and . practice of skills with
feedback.
Applications of groups in counselling psychology practice, types of
groups.
Foundat~on concepts In group-work, structure, content. ptocess, roles
Theor~es of heloma-arouo funct~onlna
Interpersonal reiati&hip$ in groups, Goup leadership, eadership skill:
modelling, teaching process-commentary, managing hostility and
aggression. Interventions to promote learning, interventions to
enhance group processes: selected techniques in group-work: warm
ups, introductions, motivators, role-plays, de-briefing, sharing,
terminating.
Planning, managing, assessing and evaluating group-based learning
activities.
Selected group-work applications: trauma de-briefing, rehabilitation,
support, therapy, social-skills, personal growth.
. --.-.-..---
Families in crisis: child abuse and family violence.
R~f~ronc~s
Family
Families reformation: in cris~s: bereavement blended or step-families, and loss.
single parent families. Jacobs, Strategies E.E., and Harvill, skills. ~ R.L. and Masson. R.L. Group t Counselling:
~ ~ ~ 1988 ~ k ~ ~ l ~ ~ ~ l ~ ~ ,
The changing role of Parents; focus on the particular contributions Johnson, D.W. and Johnson, F.P Joining Together: Group Therapyand
~
of mothers and fathers. Two-career families. Return to study. Group Skills, 3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1987
Cross-cultural issues. Families from various ethnic origins, including yalom, 1. ~h~ ~h~~~ and practice of G~~~~ . evchotheraov. , ..
3rd edn,
aboriginal families.
New ~ork: Basic Bocks, 1988
Measurement ----. of familv interactions -
The influence of schwk m psychological development, with emphasis
AY602 First Supervised Practicum
on social cognitive development.
The problems of school failure or of poor ad' stment to school. (Internship A)
Special children at school: disability and earc intervention.
References
Burns, A,, Bottomley, G. and Jools, I? The Family in the Modern World.
Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1983
McCubbin, H.I. and Figley, C.R. Stress and the Family. Vol. 1. Coping
with Normative Transitions. New York: BrunerIMazel, 1983
Minuchin, P.P. and Shapiro, E.K. The school as a context for social
development. In pH. Mussen (ed.) Handbodcof Child Psychology. Vol.
4. New York: Wilev. 1983
Prerequisites: AY502. AY504, AY506
Semesters 1 and 2
Assessment: Students will be evaluated by the supervisor(~)
most directly associated with their work together
with the coordinator.
Performance will be reviewed mid-way through the
internship and an evaluation made at the end.
This first practicum is concerned primarily with helping students to
make the transition from the counselling laboratory to the counselling
practice setting.
AY600 Professional and Ethical Issues Induction: Initially, new students will monitor clients already being
Hours per week: 3
Assessment: Research essay 25%
practical examinafion based on casentl~dies
-.- -. -- . 750/0 -.-
This course is designed la ensure that students understand the ethical
and legal responsibilities of psychologists mrking in the human
services. ~ h study ~ of the ethical ~ standards ~ ~ of the h profession,
legal issues related to the practice of psychology, students will learn
about the process of ethical and professional decision making.
Topics covered will be chosen from: the Australian Psychological
Society; the APS Code; the Psychologist's Registration Act.
Psychology as a profession; professional negligence.
Confidentiality; ethical and professional issues in assessment; who
is the client?
Confidentiality; report writing; record-keeping; freedom of information,
Supervision; ethical and professional issues; psychologists and the
... marlin "".".
Values and ethics in psychotherapy.
Contemporary ethical issues: child abuse; legal and professional
issues; domestic violence; orofessional and leaal issues.
Professional competence and weakness; qualCy assurance.
Dual-role relationsh~ps and confl~cts of ~nterest; the public image of
psychology.
Mandatory counselling: ethical issues in a private practice; fee
charging.
Legal issues: guardianship; intellectual disability.
Mental health legislation; psychologists as expert witnesses; the family
court; the child witness.
Family law, Community Welfare Services.
References
Lakin. M. Ethical Issues in the Psvchothermies. Oxford: Oxford
university Press, 1988
Keith-Spiegel, I? and Koocher, G.P. (eds) Ethics in Psychology. New
York: Random House. 1985
Nixon. M. (ed) Issues in Psychological Practice Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire, 1984
Pryzwansky, W.B. and Wendt, R. Psychology as a Profession: Foundations
of Practice. Oxford: Pergamon Press. 1984
seen at the Swinburne Centre for Psychdogical Services. Where
appropriate, new students will observe sessions with clients (videotaped).
In addition, students will participate in the administration of
the Centre and in dealing with telephone enquiries to the Centre.
Case Work: Students will be allocated clients in accordance with their
Own existing levels of counselling skills and their professional skills
and their professional interests. A normal case-load would be 3 clients
Per Week. Students will be expected to see a mixture of child,
adolescent and adult dients and to gather experience in working with
groups and families as well as individuals. A supervisor will be
appointed for each client or family seen by the student and will meet
weekly with the student for supervision. The suprvisor will be an
Of the Centre'
Case Reporting: Students will meet once a month in a small group
supervision session to discuss their clients. Each student will be
required to present a report on a case for discussion by the group.
In addition, each student will write a comprehensive case summarv
after termination with each client.

AY603
Aspects of Professional Practice
Hours per week: 2
Assessment: Students will be required to have reached
a competent level of case reporting and to have attended
and participated effectively in discussion of cases.
The aim of the subiect is to consolidate the knowledge and skills
gamed by students durcng their supervised practica In order to assist
the transfer of this knowledae and skill to psvchol~~cal
. - - practice after
graduation.
The co-ordinator of the supervised practlcum (internship) program and
oractlsina ~svcholooists assoc~ated with the Swinburne Centre for
~s~chol~ikai~ervicks will present cases from their own work for discussion
by the group.
Case presentation: students will present their own cases for discussion
by the group.
Theoretical issues. as general issues of practice emerge from case
resenta at ion, further readlnq will be ass~gned and discussed. Likely
issues include:
- the role of psychiatric d~agnosis in counselling;
- post-traumatic stress disorder;
- the problem of client relapse;
- issues of counsellor burn-out;
- medical assessment, medication, consultation with
medical practitioners.
References
Baruth, L.G. and Huber, C.H. Counselling and Psychotherapy;
Theoretical Analyses and Skills Applications. Columbus: Merrill, 1985
American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and Statistical Manual
of Mental Disorders (DSM-Ill-R). Washington DC: Author, 1987
Figley, C.R. Trauma and Its Wake. New Ycfk: BrunerlMazel, 1985
Marlatt, A. and Gordon, R. Relapse Prevention. New York: Pergamon,
1985
AY604 Second Supervised Practicum -
Internship B
Prerequisite: AY602
Semesters 1 and 2
Assessment: Students will be evaluated by the supervlsor(s)
most d~rectly assoc~ated w~th the~r work together
w~th the cclordlnator Performance wlll be rev~ewed midway
through the internship and an evaluation made at
the end.
This second practicum is intended to broaden and consolidate
students' previous learning in the program and to provide students
with the opportunity to ad as a responsible professional within a counselling
setting.
Case Work: Students will be allocated to an external internship in one
or possibly lwo settings over the year. Allocation to an internship setting
will be guided both by the student's professional interests and the
objective of extending his or her existing skills Students will take on
counselling clients and participate as fully as possible in the activities
of the internship setting. The Psychology Department has links with
numerous practice settings in which experienced psychologists work,
including organisations such as the Vietnam Veterans Counselling
Service, the State Bank Staff Counselling Staff Service; University,
C.A.E.. and T.A.F.E. College Counselling Units; Moreland Hall Drug
and Alcohol Service; Doncare Community Counselling Services; and
the Marriage Guidance Council of Victoria.
Case Reports: Students will be required to have presented written
andlor verbal case reports about their clients to other professionals.
Organisational Project: In conjunction with their supervisors students
will participate in ar: assessment or review of some aspect of service
delivery or administration of the internship setting.
AY605
Faculty of Arts
Supervised Research Project and
Report
This task is designed to (a) enhance students' awareness of the
importance of a scientific research-base for counselling psychology,
(b) to consolidate students' practical understanding of research
methodology related to counselling psychology and (c) to contribute
to the research program of the Department.
Students will be assigned a supervisor in the first year of their enrolment.
At the end of this first year of enrolment each student must
submit a written, detailed research proposal.
At the end of the second year of enrolment students must subm~t a
4.000 word revlew of the relevant backaround l~terature Thls must be
in a form similar to that of a review artick appearing in one of the major
journals which publishes review articles related to topics in counselling
psychology (e.g. Journal of Counselling Psychology, Counsellor
Educat~on and Supervision, British Journal of Guidance and
Counselling).
At the end of the fourth year of enrolment each student must submit
a report on his or her research in the form of a 4-5,000 word article
In a form sultable for submlss~on to a nominated journal whlch
~ubllshes emolrlcal research related to counselllna DSVC~O~O~V
Thls
ieport must be accompanied by a Technical supdement cociaining
detailed results, raw data, and copies of measures used.
References
American Psychological Association Publication Manual. 3rd edn.
Washington, DC: The Association, 1984
Sternberg, R.J. The Psychologist's Companion: A Guide to Scientific
Writing. 2nd edn, Cambridge: British Psychological Society, 1988

Academic staff ........................................................ 142
Courses offered ...................................................... 143
Entrance re uirements ............................................ 143
Standards 01 progress ........................................... 148
Conditions of enmlrnent ....................................... 148
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark ............................. 143
Undergraduate courses
Bachelor of Business ............................................
-Accounting stream ...................................
.........
-Computing stream ...............................................
-f conomics-Marketing stream .............................
-Marketing stream .................................................
Mandatory units .....................................................
Elective units ..........................................................
Co-operative Education Program .............................
Professional Associations ........................................
Bachelor of BusinesslBachelor of Arts
(Italian)...................................................................
(Japanese) .............................................................
(Korean) .................................................................
Degree in Information Technology ........................
hstgraduate courses
Graduate Certificate in Business
Administration ......................................................
Graduate ...... Dialoma in Accountlna ..........................
~raduate ~i5loma
.....
.............
Graduate Diploma in Buslness Information
............................................................
..............
.........
......
in Business Administration 150
Graduate Diploma in Market Forecasting 151
Technolog 151
Graduate giplome in Corporate Finance 152
Graduate Diploma in Management Systems 152
Graduate Diploma in 0 anlsation Eehaviour 153
Master of Business by %un. Work md Minor
Thesis
-Information Technology ........................................ 155
-0rganisation Behaviour ....................................... 155
-Business Administration (MBA)............................
155
aster of Business by mdearch ...........................
Doctor of Philosophy by research ........................
Subject details .......................................................
General Information ..............................................
Prizes and Scholarships ......................................
Swinburne Institute Information ...........................

Faculty of Business
Dean
M.C. Frazer, BSc(Hons)(Mon), GradDipEdTert(DDIAE),
MAdrnin(Mon), PhD(Carnb), AIMM, MAIP, MACE
Director, MBA Program
R.M. Brown, BCorn(Melb), DipEd(Melb), MEd(Mon),
MPhil(Lough), FCIM, MACE, MlPMA
Faculty Associate
R. Sharrna, BSc, DipEd(Tas), GradDipOpsRes(RMIT),
MEdAdrnin, PhD(UNE)
Assistant Registrar (Business)
M. Conway, BA(Griffith), MAITEA
Administrative Officers
J. Berry
S. Kennedy
Academic staff
Department of Accounting
Head
W.C. Nash, BCorn, DipEd(Melb), MBA(CranlT)
Principal Lecturers
N.J. Allport, BCorn, MBA(Melb), BEd(Mon), AASA(Sen)
H.M. Paterson, Barn, DipEd(Melb), MEc, PhD(LaT), CPA
W.H. Platt, BCorn, DipEd(Melb), MAdrnin, MEnvSc(Mon),
CPA
Senior Lecturers
R.C. Donkin, DipMechEng(SIT), DipBus(DP)(SIT),
BBus(Acc)(VIC), MBA(Deakin), CPA, MACS
L. Kloot, BA(Melb), BBus(SIT), MCorn(Melb), AASA CPA
A. Richardson, BEc(Mon), GradDipEDP(CIT), MBA(Melb),
ACA . .-. .
B.W. Spurrell, BCorn, BA, DipEd(Melb), CPA
D.G. Vinen, BEc, MAdrnin, DipEd(Mon), ACA
J.D. Wells, BCorn(Qld), MAdrnin(Mon), FCPA, ACA
Lecturers
M. Barut, BBus, GradDipAcc(S1T)
A. Bell, BBus(SIT), ASA
M. Dunkley, BBus(CIT), DipEd(Melb), MBA(Mon), ASA
J.R. Gerrand. BEclMon). CPA
L. Marcello. -, BBUS(SIT) --.. "
C. ~arsh,
D~~BUS(ACC~(SIT), ACA
E. Sandercock, BA(WA), BBudSIT), CPA. ACA
I. Ternpone, BCorn,'Dip~d(~elb), CPA
K. Turpie, BEc(Hons)(LaT), CPA
Department of Marketing and Organisation
Behaviour
Associate Professor and Head
C. Christodoulou, BAgSc(Melb), MSc, MAdrnin,
PhD(Mon)
Principal Lecturer
J. Newton, MA(Leeds), BBus(CIT)
L.A. Zirnrnerrnan, BCom, MBA(Melb)
Senior Lecturers
B. Cargill, BA(Melb), MAPsS
G. Drurnmond, MA(Melb)
B. Evans, BAppSc(RMIT), MAdrnin(Mon), GradlMA
M. Enright, DipBusStuds(CIT), BA(Melb)
S. Long, BA(Hons)(Melb), TSTC, MEd, (Mon), PhD(Melb)
G. Watts, BCorn, MBA, DipEd(Melb),
GradDipAppSocPsych(S1T)
Lecturers
J.G. Batros, BSc, BA(Melb), TSTC
D. Ch'ng, BSc(Hons), MBus(Mon), DipAppChern(S1
P. DiVirgilio, BBus(CIT)
P. Jin, MlndPsych(Hangzhou)
A. Kochane, MA(S.G.PS.Warsaw), PhDpVroclaw)
B. Lasky, BBus(PublAdrnin)(RMIT),
GradDipPersAdrnin(Victoria), AIPMA, AlTD
H. Russell, BBus(RMIT), GradDipEd(Hawth0rn)
J. Shannon, BA(QW)
J. Stewart, BA, BEd, MEdStud(Mon), TPTC
K. Van Veenendaal, AssDipMktg, BBusMktg(CIT)
J. Westwood, BEco(ANU), MScTourisrnMktg(Surrey-UK)
Department of Information Systems
Head
D.G. Adarns, BCorn(Melb), MAdrnin(Mon), TSTC
Associate Professor
M.G. Nicholls, MEc, PhD(Mon), MACE
Principal Lecturers
J.A. James, DipMedRadiotherapy, GradDipDP(RM1T)
G.M. Leonard, BSc(Melb), MACS
G.A. Murphy, BCorn(Melb), CPA
W.D. Wilde, BCorn(Birrn), MSc(Melb), MACS
Senior Lecturers
N.L. Bailey, BSc(Leeds), GradDipEd(HIE), MACS
P.M. Kindler, DipBus, BAppSc(CIT), CPA, MACS
J.F. Pidgeon, BA, DipEd(Mon)
P.M. Simmons, BSc(Hons)(Sheff), MACS
J.A. Sykes, BE(Melb), DipEE(CIT), PhD(UNSW)
Lecturers
O.K. Burrneister, BAppSc(SIT), DipMin
B.A. Calway, GradDipMgtSyst(SIT), MBus(lT)(SIT)
A. Currie, BSc(Melb), DipEd(Vic), GradDipMgtSyst(S1T)
PJ. Eden, BSc(Hons)(Qld), MSc(Mon), GradDipCornp(Melb),
GradDipEd(AIE), MACM
I.B. Fantin, DipBS(EDP)(FIT), DipEd(HIE), BEd(Lat)
H.C. Fraser. BBuslSIn. GradDioDPlCln
E. ~indberg, BA~~;s~(EDP)(cI~,~G~~~D~~E~(HIAE),
MACS
K.M. Marles, BSc(Griffith)
G. Menon, BBus(SIT), MM(IT)(Mon)
J.L. Munro, BEc(Mon), GradDipBusAdrnin(SIT), MACS
J.M. Pitt. BA(Melb)
G. ~avalli, ~~c(~ons)(~elb), DipEd(Melb),
GradDipMathSc(Me1b)
PA. Sala, BBus(SIT)
S.R. Sicilia, BSc(Hons)(Mon)
M.S. Thurairasa, BA(SIU), MACS
M-C. TOO, BA(Mu), MSc(USC), MPA(USC),
GradDipSAD(Edin), MSSM, MACS
Department of Economics
Head
J.B. Wielgosz, BCorn(Hons), MA, DipEd(Melb)
Principal Lecturer
D.J. Thomas, BA(NSW), MA(Syd), PhD(Mon)
Senior Lecturers
P.G.L. Harkness, BAgEc(UNE), MAdrnin(Mon)
S. Holligan, BEc(Hons)(LaT)
D.J. Owens, BEc(Hons), MAdrnin(Mon)
R.N. Smith, BA(Hons), DipEd, DipContEd(UNE), MCorn(NSW)
GradDipBIT(S1T)
Xavier, BEc(Hons)(WAust), MA(Leic), MEc(Mon)
Lecturers
C. Barry, MEc(Mon)
M. Cohen. BEc. D~DE~LJNSW)
M. ~reebairn, BA~EC, D~~E~(UNE)
J. Gerstman, BA, BEd(Mon)
G. Messinis, BEc(LaT)
K. Ryan, BEc(Mon), CPA
L. Schulberg, BEc, DipEd(Mon)
J. Watkins, MEc, DipEd(Mon)
Department of Law
Head
J.B. Wielgosz, BCorn(Hons), MA, DipEd(Melb)
Principal Lecturers
B.R. Clarke, BEc, LLM(Mon), GradDipMkt(CIT), Barrister and
Solicitor (Vic) Supreme Court

Faculty of Business
I? Holland, BCom, LLB(Hons , D~pEd(Melb), MEnvSc(Mon), Special entry
Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) ti upreme Court
Applicants who have not completed a Year 12 qualification
Senior Lecturers
and who are 25 years of age or older are required to sit for
S. Kapnoullas, LLM, BA, DipEd(Melb), Barrister and Solicitor an aptitude test before they can be considered for admission.
(Vic) Supreme Court
Quota
Lecturers
Not all qualified applicants can be accepted because of the
S. Edmonds, LLB(Adel), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) Supreme limited number of available places.
Court
Applications
C. Holt, LLB(Melb), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic)
Full-time all years: to Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre
Supreme Court
Part-time all years: to Swinburne
f? Mclntosh, BJuris, LLB(Mon), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) Special entry: to Swinburne
Supreme Court
Transfer between Swinburne faculties:
C. Parkes, LLB(Tas), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) Supreme - Full-time: to Victorian Tertiary Admission Centre
Court
- Part-time: to Swinburne
P.J. Pascoe, LLM, BCom(Melb), DipEd, AASA, Barrister and Eastern Campus (Mooroolbark)
Solicitor (Vic) Supreme Court
Swinburne plans to offer tertiary courses on its Eastern
M. Psaltis, BA, LLM, DipEd(Melb), Barrister and Solicitor (Vie) Campus at Mooroolbark in 1992, subject to planning approval.
Supreme Court
Courses to be offered by the Faculty of Business are:
S. Wilson, BJuris, LLB(Mon), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic) Bachelor of Business (Accounting)
Supreme Court
Bachelor of Business (EconomicsIMarketing)
Bachelor of Business (Marketing)
Courses offered in the Faculty of Business
Length of course
Course title (minimum) Entrance Special comments
Full-time Part-time requirements
Bachelor of Business
Accounting 3 years 6 years Four subjects
- Computing 3 years 6 years (including English) It is advisable to have studied
- Economics-Marketing 3 years 6 years at VCE(HSC) mathematics to at least Year 11
- Marketing 3 years 6 years or equivalent level.
Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts - a four-year course is available for applicants wishing to complete any one of the
four Business degree courses combined with a major study in Japanese, Korean or Italian.
Bachelor of lnformation Technoloav - a three-vear dearee course tauaht in coniunction with the Facultv of A~~lied Science.
Graduate Diploma
- Accounting
- Business Administration
- Management Systems
- Organisation Behaviour
- Corporate Finance
- Business lnformation
Technology
- Market Forecasting
Graduate Certificate
- Business Administration
- Business lnformation
Technoloqv
Master of Business
- lnformation Technology
- Organisation BehaviGr
- Business Administration (MBA) ~,
- by research
Doctor of Philosophy (PhD)
1 year
-
2 years
2 years
2 years
2 years
2 years
2 years
2 years
1 year
An appropriate
tertiary degree
or diploma
For the Graduate
Diploma in Accounting,
applicants must have
a degree in that field. For the
other Graduate Diplomas
a limited number of places
are also available for
applicants with no formal
qualifications but considerable
work experience.
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS
Bachelor of Business Specialisations
The course leading to the award of Bachelor of Business offers
Entrance requirements
studies in
marketing Or
The normal entry requirements for the Bachelor of Business
economicslmarketing, and elective studies in accounting,
degree p ro g ram is successful completion Of the VCE Or economics, computing, human resource management, law,
equivalent, with a grade Of Or better in subjects
marketing, and quantitative methods. Key features of the major
including English. The subjects must have been taken in one
streams are described in the following section.
year, and it is recommended that applicants have studied
mathematics to at least Year 11 standard.
Other qualifications
Applicants must have a qualification deemed to be the
equivalent of the VCE by the Victorian Curriculum and
ksessment Board. Such qualifications may include interstate
and overseas qualifications and associate diploma studies
at a TAFE college.

A050 Accounting stream
This course comprises a major study in accounting, together
with the business-related areas of commercial computing, law,
marketing, management, economics and statistics. This diversity
of disciplines supporting the accounting content results
in the degree course providing an excellent base for either
a specialist career in accounting or a stepping stone to a management
career.
Students are exposed to contemporary business practices and
the concepts and technology supporting modern business
todav. In articular micro-computina . - facilities will be used in
appropriate accounting units.
Graduates in accounting are in heavy demand at present in
the accounting profession, industry, commerce and government.
The employment opportunities available cover many
diverse and challenging fields. Accountants in public practice
offer specialist services in such areas as taxation, auditing
and management. Accountants in industry, commerce and
government cover the complete range of services necessary
for the successful operation of business activity.
The analytical skills and the understanding of accounting
gained through the accounting degree, stand one in good
stead to pursue any one of a number of different career paths
in the business world in both the public and private sector.
Satisfactory completion of the course satisfies the educational
requirement to enable graduates to join the Australian Society
of Certified Practising Accountants (as an associate member)
andlor the Institute of Chartered Accountants (as a student
member). These are the two major professional accounting
bodies in Australia, membership of which is recognised worldwide.
Further advancement in these professional bodies is
dependent on successful completion of additional prescribed
programs (such as the Certified Practising Accountant (CPA)
Program of the Society or the Institute's professional year).
A051 Computing stream
In today's world, information technology has pervaded every
aspect of business organisations. Growth has been explosive
over the last five years, consequently demand for trained personnel
has increased dramatically. Swinburne's degree in
computing offers a means of entry into this exciting field.
To operate effectively in this modern business environment
requires a familiarity with the computing hardware and software
that is used to solve business problems. The course satisfies
this need through practical work which is an integral
part of every computing unit, and involves the use of micro,
mini and mainframe computers. Further practical work in the
development of computer systems is gained in an industrial
project in third year.
Graduates are employed in a variety of careers by a variety
of employers. A number of organisations, large companies
and banks for example, employ graduates on the normal
career path of programmer, systems analyst and manager.
In contrast, graduates employed by small firms can expect
a broad range of activities, and may find themselves programming,
analysing or designing systems as the situation
demands.
Suppliers of hardware and software require graduates to provide
support to their customers. A computer manufacturer
requires support for hardware and associated software supplied
to customers, whereas a chartered accounting firm will
require graduates to design, implement and support business
computing systems. Swinburne graduates have occupied all
of these positions, and have risen to highly paid managerial
jobs.
Completion of the course satisfies the educational requirements
for Level 1 membership of the Australian Computer
Society.
A052 Economics-Marketing stream
Understanding economic principles is a fundamental requirement
for a career in business. The economics-marketing
stream applies modern economic and marketing concepts
to analysis and decision-making in both the private and public
sectors. The course has been desianed for students intending
to pursue careers in a wide variety of areas. The economics
and marketing strands within the course complement each
other and provide graduates with a comprehensive and clear
understanding of the business environment.
Economics is a disciplined way of approaching important
social and business problems. It is used to investigate issues
such as industry and product demand, trade and exchange
rates, the money market and interest rates, industry performance
and the role of government policy.
Marketing involves the application of marketing principles in
order to maximise business performance. These principles
are examined in the context of a variety of industry structures,
goods and services. Marketing is an expanding area of
employment and one which is likely to continue to grow in
the future.
The choice available to students of two additional mandatory
units chosen from either the marketing or economic electives
available, provides an opportunity to further specialise in the
discipline of their career choice.
During the course students also undertake complementary
studies in disciplines such as accounting, law, computing and
organisational behaviour.
Employment prospects are excellent in a wide range of
challenging fields including:
marketing and marketing research including advertising
- economic analysis and research
- economic policy evaluation and financial analysis
administration in both public and private sectors
- management consulting
Teaching methods adopted in this course emphasise
individual and group projects, case studies and the opportunity
to work on relevant practical problems.
A053 Marketing stream
The Bachelor of Business (Marketing) is exciting and challenging.
It provides a strong conceptual background for wouldbe
entrants to the marketing profession.
Marketing students at Swinburne are trained to develop their
mental and business skills. They are educated:
- to be creative in capitalising on opportunities
- to use modern technology to reach business decisions
- to be specific in dealing with solutions
- to deal with international markets
- to understand the special aspects of services marketing
and high technology marketing
Marketers are expected to find new markets and serve existing
markets more effectively. They have control over such key
strategic issues as product development, pricing, distribution
arrangements, advertising, promotion, public relations and
sales.
The Marketing stream allows students to pursue specialist
marketing skills. Or, the structure makes it possible for
students to combine Marketing with other disciplines including
internationally oriented units.
Marketing graduates will go into any one of a wide variety of
positions.
These positions can be found in Product Management,
Marketing Research, Sales, Brand Management, Services
Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and International
Business, etc.
The scope of opportunities covers a wide variety of business
activities as well as Government positions.

Graduates are eligible for membership of the Australian
Marketing Research Society, the Marketing Association of
Australia and New Zealand and the Australian Marketing
Institute.
Bachelor of Business Structure
The degree course comprises 26 units. Ten units are
completed in the first or common year, and the remaining 16
units are comprised of mandatory and elective units in second
and third years. Students do not have to choose the major
stream they intend to study until the end of first year.
First Year (Common)
BClOl Accounting 1A or BC102 Accounting 1B
BC103 Accounting 1C
BE102 Economics 1A
BE103 Economics 1B
BHlOl Organisations and Management
BL101 Legal Environment of Business
BMIOI The Marketing Concept
BTl02 lnformation Technology 1A
EWl03 lnformation Technology 1B
SM147 Quantitative Analysis A or SM148 Quantitative Analysis 8
Second and Third %ars
Accounting
(10 mandatory, 6 elective)
BC206 Management Accounting 1
BC207 Management Accounting 2
BL202 Contract Law
BQ201 Quantitative Management Techniques
BC201 Corporate Accounting
BL202 Law of Business Organisations
BC306 Taxation
BC311 Financial Management 1
BC300 Accounting Theory
BC304 Auditing
Computing
(8 mandatory, 8 elective)
BT201 Information Analysis
Bl202 Commercial Programming
BT203 Data Base Management Systems
Bl204 Data Communications
BT301 Systems Development Strategies or
87307 Advanced Programming
BT302 Systems Software
Bl305I6 Industrial Project (2 units)
EconomicslMarketing
10 mandatory. 6 elective)
bE201 Managerial Economic Analysis
BE202 Industry and Government
BE205 Economic Techniques for Business
BM205 Market Behaviour
BM206 Marketing Strategy
BM203 Marketing Research
BM306 Product Management
One third year Economics unit
Two further units from either Economics or Marketing
Marketing
(10 mandatory, 6 elective)
BM205 Market Behaviour
BM206 Marketing Strategy
BQ205 Marketing Data Management
BC206 Management Accounting 1
BH201 Organisational Behaviour 1
BM203 Marketing Research
BM309 Product Management
BL203 Marketing and the Law
Two further third year Marketing units
Electives
Elective units may be taken from the full range of Business
units. Whiie not mandatory, it is highly recommended that
students taking the Accounting stream include BH201
Organisation Behaviour 1 and a further computing unit in their
electives.
Students may also take electives from the Faculty of Arts with
the following exceptions:
- no units with an AT prefix
not AP109 Society and Economics A
- not SM171 or SM172 Mathematics
Faculty of Business
- not units similar to those which have already been studied
elsewhere and have been the basis for exemptions
No more than two units from first year Arts subjects will be
credited towards the Bachelor of Business degree, except
AJlOO Japanese 1 which counts as three units.
Students wishing to study units from a faculty other than
Business or Arts must seek approval before enrolling.
Discipline Limits
No more than 12 units from one discipline can be studied for
credit towards the Bachelor of Business degree. The discipline
of each subject is identified by the first two characters of the
subject code:
BC Accounting
BE Economics
BT Computing
BL Law
BM Marketing
BH Human Resource Management
BWSM Quantative Methods
Prerequisites
Students must have passed prerequisites listed for each
subject. If the prerequisite listing states that students are
expected to have passed a nominated subject, it means that
students must have at least studied the nominated subjects
to obtain an understanding of key concepts.
Preclusions
Students may not count both BE205 Economic Techniques
for Business and BQ204 Marketing Data Analysis towards
their degree requirements.
Exemptions
A maximum of 12 exemptions for study completed at another
tertiary institution will be granted towards the Bachelor of
Business degree. Applications should be made at the time
of enrolment on an Applications for Exemptions form which
must be accompanied by a copy of previous academic records
and syllabus details for the subjects on which the exemptions
are claimed. Students must lodge the completed form and
documentary evidence at the Faculty Office (Level 9).
BACHELOR OF BUSINESSIBACHELOR OF
AFlTS DOUBLE DEGREE
The Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Arts double degree is
of four years duration and is designed to enable students to
complete the compulsory requirements for any Business
stream together with the full range of available Japanese,
Korean or ltalian units in order to qualify for the award of two
degrees.
Entrance Requirements
See section under Bachelor of Business above.
Degree Structure
Students must complete the first year of the Business degree
(10 units) and the mandatory units of the chosen
specialisation. The following language units are also studied
depending upon the language specialisation chosen:
Japanese
AllOO Japanese 1
A1200
A1300
Japanese 2
Japanese 3A
A1301
A1102
Japanese 3B
lnroduction to Japan
A1202 Communication in Ja~aflese
Modern Japan
A1302 Work Experience in Japan (elective)
ltalian
AAlOO ltalian 1
AA2W ltalian 2
AA3W
AA302
ltalian 3A
ltalian 3C
Common Market Politics
Italian Culture 1
ltalian Culture 2
ltalian Business Practice

Korean
AKlOO Korean 1
AKlOl Background to Contemporary Korean Society
AK200 Korean 2
AK202 Contemporaly Korean Society
AK203 Modern Korea
AK300 Korean 3A
AK301 Korean 3B
one further elective unit chosen from either Arts or Business (for
Accounting, Economics/Marketing, Marketing), and three further
electives for Computing.
BACHELOR OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
Manager: G.A. Murphy, BCom, CPA
This course if offered in conjunction with the Faculty of Applied
Science.
The course educates graduates to apply information
technology within business and industry and provides them
with an appropriate grounding in management education to
prepare them for future roles in management.
The course is offered only as a full-time program of three years
duration. Students are actively engaged in the course for an
average of 44 weeks each year. There are eight segments
in the course - four semesters, two summer terms and two
twenty-week periods of Industry Based Learning. These
provide a course which is essentially a four year course
completed in three years.
Swinburne awards a scholarship to each student admitted
to the course. Scholarship levels are expected to be an
average of $9,300.
Segment 1
IT101 Computer Fundamentals
IT102 Introduction to Programmin
IT103 Business Applications and gystems 1
IT104 Management and Communications
Non-computing Elective
'Segment 2
IT201 Decision Analysis
IT202 COBOL programming
IT203 Business Applications and Systems 2
IT204 Accounting 1
'Non-computing Elective
Segment 3 (Summer Term)
IT301 Systems Software 1
IT302 Organisation Behaviour
IT303 Data Base Management Systems 1
Segment 4
IT401 Industry Based Learning
20 weeks
Segments 5 and 6
10 units must be studied in these two consecutive segments.
They can be taken in any order that prerequisites allow, and
must include 4 core units, 4 chosen from the specialist units
on offer and 2 non-competing electives.
Core unitst
IT501 Systems and Information Analysis 1
IT503 Data Base Management Systerns 2
IT504 Data Communications 1
IT509 Software Engineeering 1
Specialist unitst
At least two of these must be taken from the subjects marked
with an asterisk.
IT502 Systems Software 2
IT505 Knowledge Engineering
IT506 Expert Systems'
IT507 Computer Graphics and Imaging 1
IT601 Systems and Information Analysis 2'
IT602 Systems Software 3'
IT603 Data Base Management Systems 3'
IT604 Data Communications 2'
IT606 Artificial Intelligence'
IT607 Computer Graphics and Imaging 2'
IT609 Software Engineering 2*
Segment 7
IT701 Industry Based Learning
20 weeks
Segment 8 (Summer Term)
IT801 Project
IT802 Seminars and Project Management and Control
t All units will not be offered each semester.
For detailed syllabus information see Faculty of Applied Science.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Enrolment above standard load
Students may not enrol for more than four subjects full-time
or two subjects part-time without permission from the Assistant
Registrar. Students seekina to do one extra unit will be
assessed on the basis of Their previous record; students
wishing to do two extra units must apply in writing to the Dean
for permission.
Amendments to enrolment
Students must finalise their enrolment by 31 March (first
semester) and 31 August (second semester). Subjects cannot
be added more than three weeks into a semester, and subjects
deleted after the census dates will have a fail result recorded.
An Amendment to Enrolment form must be completed for all
amendments.
Transfer between full-time and part-time study
Subject to fulfilling any conditions set by the Student Review
Committee, a student can transfer between full- and part-time
study at re-enrolment times without special permission.
Admission to examinations
Enrolment and satisfactory completion of prescribed
assignment work are usual prerequisites for admission to a
final examination.
Cancellation of enrolment
Students wishing to cancel their enrolment are encouraged
to first discuss this action with the Faculty Student Services
Manager or the Assistant Registrar.
Study at another institution for credit towards a
Swinburne award
Students wishing to study at another institution for credit
towards a Swinburne award must complete the application
form available from the Faculty Office (Level 9).
Noticeboards
lnformation for the benefit of all students is displayed on the
noticeboards on Levels 2 and 9 of the Business Arts Building,
and it is advisable to check these occasionally. General
enquiries should be directed to the Faculty Office (Level 9).
Textbooks .- - -- - -. -
Unless otherwise specified in subject outlines, students are
advised not to purchase textbooks or references until classes
commence. ~ooks to be purchased are indicated by an
asterisk' and further information will be given during the firs!
lecture or class.

COOPERATIVE EDUCATION IN THE
FACULTY OF BUSINESS
Manager
J.R.W. Gerrand, BEc, CPA
Administrative Officers: J. Newman, DipBus(Sec)
M. Stephens
Cooperative education (coop) offers students an opportunity
to combine study with practical on-the-job experience. Under
the program students spend the third year of their Bachelor
of Business course employed in the professional, business,
government or industry sectors on a paid full-time work
experience program.
The program is optional and only available to full-time students.
At the end of the coop year students resume their
studies at the Institute. To complete the Bachelor of Business,
including coop, takes a minimum of four years.
The program:
Students are invited during the second year of full-time study
to apply for entry into the program. Successful students, who
are selected on the basis of academic performance and attitude,
are then assisted by the Faculty to find employment.
Assistance is given in the form of information sessions with
employers, lectures on interview techniques and skills, and
general support in making sure that each participating student
is placed.
Coop students are assigned a member of the academic staff
to act as their mentor and to liaise between the employer and
the Faculty.
Students are required to successfully complete a detailed
report on their work experience year.
Whilst working, students are permitted to study one unit per
semester.
Benefits of the program to the students:
The coop year is a wonderful opportunity to combine theory
. .
and practice.
Coop gives students one year of practical experience, enabling
them to learn about the working environment, to
understand employers' expectations, ethics and relationships
with colleagues.
Coop gives students a head start to a successful future.
As they have already held a job, career decisions are made
easier and coop students have more to offer to prospective
employers.
There is a potential for coop students to have a job waiting
on graduation. Alternatively, part-time employment during
final year of study may become available with the coop
employer.
Students have financial freedom through the opportunity
to earn and save money.
Coop enables students to use work experience to choose
final year subjects.
Coop employers:
The following companies are associated with employing
business students:
ANZ Bank
Amcor Ltd
Arthur Andersen
Assco
Attorney General's Department
Australian Taxation Office
Australian National Line
BHP
BP Australia
Bowater Ltd
Bunge (Aust)
Cadbury Schweppes
Carlton & United Breweries
Coies Myer
Coopers & Lybrand
Dataplex
Department of Management & Budget
Faculty of Business
Department of Ind. Tech. and Res.
Duesburys
Ernst & Young
Gretton Watson
Hewlett Packard
IBM Australia
Kraft Foods
McLean Delmo
Marquand & Co
MMBW
Mobil Oil
National Australia Bank
Nelson Parkhill BDO
Partnership Pacific
KPMG Peat Marwick
Philip Morris
Siemens
Smith Read
State Bank
SEC
Stockdale Weir & Co
Telecom
Terracalls
William Buck
Professional Associations
To be eligible for membership of the various professional
associations, students must complete the following
requirements:
Australian Computer Society
Computing stream graduates are eligible for Level 1
membership of this society. Other graduates may qualify for
membership by choosing appropriate computing electives.
Australian Society of Certified Practising
Accountants
Accounting stream
Associate membership - the completion of the degree
requirements satisfy the educational requirements for
Associate Membership. Advancement to higher levels (CPA,
etc.) is dependent upon completion of further study and experience
requirements as specified by the ASCPA.
Computing stream
Computing stream students satisfy the educational requirements
for Associate membership by taking the mandatory
Computing units plus the mandatory Accounting units (and
BQ201, QMT - which is a prerequisite unit).
Advancement to hiaher levels is de~endent uDon com~letion
of further study aniexperience rehirements'as speciiied by
the ASCPA.
Institute of Chartered Accountants
Accounting stream
To be eligible for entry to the professional year of the Institute
of Chartered Accountants, graduates must have completed
all the mandatory Accounting stream units.
Computing stream
As for Associate membership of the Australian Society of
Certified Practising Accountants above.
Economics-Marketing stream
Mandatory units plus
Corporate Accounting
Management Accounting 1
Management Accounting 2
Contract Law
Law of Business Organisations
Financial Management
Accounting Theory
Auditing
Taxation

Australian Institute of Bankers
The Australian lnstitute of Bankers accepts the Bachelor of
Business degree as an approved degree for the purpose of
Affiliate Membership of the Institute. Affiliate membership is
a transitionary levei leading to Senior Associate status.-An
Affiliate member is required to undertake specialist banking
subjects to complete the educational requirements for Senior
Associate status.
Student membership of the Australian lnstitute of Bankers is
open to all full-time students undertaking the Bachelor of
Business degree.
Standards of progress
All students, both full- and part-time, are expected to maintain
a minimum academic standard in order to be allowed to
continue their studies.
The following criteria are those usually applied and unless
otherwise specified, these refer to students enrolled in all
business courses:
1 Full-time students
(a) Common year (normally 10 units of study)
(i) Students passing the equivalent of 7,8 or 9 units
may continue with their remaining common year
units and some second year units on a full-time
basis.
(ii) Students passing the equivalent of 5 or 6 units
may only enrol in the following calendar year for
the common year units not yet passed (even if
this means study in the part-time mode), and
must not enrol for second year units until all first
year units are passed. In order to qualify for return
to full-time study students studying in the parttime
mode must pass all of their part-time load
otherwise the part-time criteria listed (2) will apply.
(iii) Students passing the equivalent of 4 units or less
will be excluded unless they can show cause why
they should not be excluded from the faculty (see
4).
Note: Students with exemptions from common year
units will have these criteria applied on a prorata
basis.
(b) Second and third year (normally 8 units of study per
year)
(i) Students in later years must pass 4 units per year
to be allowed to continue on a full-time basis.
(ii) Progress will be reviewed at the end of each year
and students not satisfying the criteria will be
required to show cause why they should not be
excluded, or sent part-time as appropriate.
2 Part-time students
Students who do not pass 2 units for the year will be
required to show cause why they should not be excluded
from the faculty (see 4).
3 Completion of common year
Full- and part-time students may not enrol for second or
third year units unless they have completed or are concurrently
completing all outstanding common year units.
When a student is enrolled for both common year units
and second year units, the common year units must not
be dropped whilst retaining the later year units.
4 Requirement to show cause
Students who, under the set standards may be required
to change to part-time or show cause why they should not
be excluded from the faculty, may present a case (in
writing) to the Student Review Committee setting out the
relevant factors which have affected their performance in
the previous year and why the Standards of Progress
should not be applied in their case. In order to help
students, the letter advising non-compliance with Standards
of Progress will illustrate some of the guidelines used
by the Student Review Committee.
5 Student Review Committee
(a) Composition
(i) The Chair plus 2 members of the academic staff
nominated by Faculty Board.
(ii) At the request of the student being interviewed,
a student representative selected by the Chair
from the panel of student members on Faculty
Board may be added to the Committee, for
consideration of their case only.
(b) Procedure
(i) Students will be required to submit in writing full
details of their reasons for poor performance.
(ii) In addition, the Assistant Registrar will seek information
from relevant academic staff on the work
of students who have appealed.
(iii) A decision will be made on the information provided
by the student and relevant academic staff.
The Student Review Committee may consider it
appropriate to hold an interview with a student
who has appealed.
(iv) No student will be excluded from the faculty or
required to study part-time without first having the
opportunity to present a case in person to the Student
Review Committee.
6 Conditions of enro1ment:number of units
(a) Full-time
Usually full-time students will remain enrolled for 4
units per semester.
(b) Part-time
Usually part-time students will remain enrolled for two
units per semester.
Faculty of Business Scholarships
The Faculty has been fortunate in obtaining a large number
of scholarships and prizes for its students, mostly provided by
industry. These are to encourage and reward the academic
excellence that the Faculty at all times encourages.
The Sir Reginald Ansett
Memorial Scholarship
Awarded on interview,
financial need and academic
ability to a Business student
commencing full-time
studies.
T.W. Higgins Scholarship This scholarship will be
awarded on the basis of
need and academic
performance to a full-time
second or third year student
in the Faculty of Business.
Applications close in April.
The Bourne Griffithsl Awarded on interview to a
Swinburne Entrepreneurial student entering final year
Accountant Scholarship accounting.
The William Buck
Business Accounting
Scholarship
The Aspect Computing
Scholarship
The CRA Scholarships
Awarded for both academic
achievement and other
personal qualities to a
Business student who has
completed at least two years
of full-time study.
Awarded on interview to a
second year computing
student.
Awarded to the three third
year students who achieved
ihe highest aggregate results
in the five mandatory
accounting units in first and
second years.

The Swinburne
This scholarship will be
Association of Marketing awarded on the basis of
Scholarship (SAM need and academic
Scholarship)
performance to a full-time
2nd or 3rd year
EconomicslMarketing or
Marketing student in the
Faculty of Business.
Faculty of Business Prizes
Annual awards are made by the following donors:
The Arthur Andersen and The student with the best
Co. Prize
aggregate performance in
Financial Management and
Accounting Theory.
The Bill Hibble, Arthur
Andersen and Co. Prize
The Australian Chamber
of Manufactures Prize
The Australian Chamber
of Manufactures Prize
The best performance in a
Computing programming
unit.
The top student in
Industrial Relations
The top student in
Industry & Government
The Australian Computer The best student in final year
Society Prize
computing practical work.
(Not awarded to a BBus
student in 1992.)
The Australian lnstitute The best overall student
of Management Malcolm completing the Economics1
Moore Medal
Marketing degree stream.
The Australian Institute The best candidate
of Management Business completing the Graduate
Administration Prize Diploma Business
Administration selected for
entry without a first degree
or diploma.
The Australian Society of The best students in first,
Certified Practising second, and third year
Accountants Prizes accounting units.
The Australian Society of The best overall student
Corporate Treasurers' completing the Graduate
Prize
Diploma in Corporate Finance.
The Baker and McKenzie The best student in
Prize
Computers and the Law
The BP Australian Prize The best student in
Corporate Accounting
The John D. Brooke Prize The best student in
Budgeting
The William Buck and
Co. Prize
The Butterworths Books
Prizes
The Carlton and United
Breweries Limited Prize
The Chandler and
Macleod Consultants
Prize
The best student in the unit
Business Computing.
1. The best student in
Marketing and the Law.
2. The best student in
International Marketing and
the Law.
3. The best student in
Advanced Tax.
The Masters Org. Behaviour
student producing the best
performance in Research in
Organisation Behaviour.
The best performance in
Managing Human
Processes.
Faculty of Business
The Commonwealth Bank The best student in
Prize
Monetary Economics.
The Coopers and Lybrand The best student in
Prize Management Accounting 1
and Management Accounting
2.
The DMR Prizes
The best two students in
second year Systems
Design.
The Deloitte, Haskins and The best student in EDP
Sells Prize
Auditing.
The Economic Society of The best student with a
Australia Prize
major study in economics.
The EDP Auditors The best student in Auditing
Association Prize and post-first-year DP unit.
The IBM Prize
The best final year Bachelor
of Business student with
major studies in Marketing.
The ICI Prize
The best final year
computing student.
The lnstitute of Chartered 1. The student with the best
Accountants of Australia aggregate performance in
Prizes
Auditing, Taxation and
Accounting Theory.
2. The student with the best
aggregate performance in
the Graduate Diploma of
Accounting's Professional
Year modules.
The Integrity Prize The top student in
Accounting 1AIB.
The KPMG Peat Marwick
(incorporating Touche
Ross and Co.) Prize
The KPMG Peat Marwick
(incorporating Touche
Ross and Co.) Businessl
Japanese Prize
The Logica Prize
The best student in degree
Auditing.
The best second year
student in the Businessl
Japanese double degree.
The best performance in
Database Management
Systems.
The Mallesons Stephen The best student in Law of
Jaques Prize
Business Organisations
The Mobil Oil Aust Ltd The best written presentation
Prize in Marketing Management 2.
The Mobil Oil Aust Ltd The best overall student
Prize
completing the Graduate
Diploma in Organisation
Behaviour.
The National Australia The top student in
Bank Prize
Economic Research
The National Mutual Prize The best student in the
subject The Organisation.
The Price Waterhouse
Prize
The Rigby and Fielding
Prize
The Siemens Ltd Prize
Swinburne Graduate
Society of Business
Administration Prize
The best student in Financial
Accounting.
The best student in Legal
Environment of Business
The best student in Contract
Law.
Best overall student in the
Graduate Diploma in
Business Administration.

The Vic Roads Prize The best student in
Management and Leadership
in Organisations.
The following prize is presented by Swinburne lnstitute of
Technology:
The T.W. Higgins Prize The best graduating student
in the degree of Bachelor of
Business.
Graduate Diploma courses
A080 Graduate Diploma in Accounting
The Graduate Diploma in Accounting is offered by Swinburne
lnstitute of Technology in conjunction with the lnstitute of Chartered
Accountants in Australia. This course is designed to provide
candidates with an opportunity to pursue an advanced
course of study which incorporates the Professional Year technical
module requirements of the lnstitute of Chartered
Accountants.
Course objectives
This course offers candidates:
(1) an opportunity to study for professional year technical
modules in a structured learning environment;
(2) the chance to enhance their professional skills in both
the technical areas of accounting practice and related
fields which have assumed a position of greater importance
in recent years.
Entrance requirements
(1) Applicants must have an approved tertiary qualification
in business, commerce or economics including a major
study in accounting.
(2) Applicants must have at least one year's relevant work
experience and be in full-time employment with a chartered
accountant or firm of chartered accountants in public
practice and be enrolled for the ICAA Professional Year.
Course structure
The course consists of three mandatory double units as
follows:
BC554 Auditing and EDP'
BC555 Accounting'
BC556 Taxation'
and the mandatory unit:
BC557 Personal Financial Planning
These three units are the Swinburne equivalent of the lnstitute of
Chartered Accountants' Professional Year technical modules of
Accounting, Taxation and Audit and EDP
Exemptions
Students will be granted exemptions for a maximum of one
Professional Year unit previously passed.
Methods of study and assessment
Candidates will complete the same research projects, in-class
work and module examinations as required by the lnstitute
of Chartered Accountants. In addition to these requirements,
further sessions will be held to develop conceptual and
practical skills with the aim of enhancing candidates'
prospects of success in their Professional Year examinations.
Standards of progress
In order to continue in the course, candidates must maintain
a satisfactory standard of progress. A sub-committee shall
review results with the object of determining whether a satisfactory
standard of progress has been attained and whether
the candidate should be allowed to continue in the course.
lnstitute of Chartered Accountants in Australia
To satisfy the ICAA's Professional Year requirements
candidates must also complete the Institute's Professional
Practice module. This module will be conducted by the ICAA
and can only be attempted after all three technical modules
are passed.
A083 Graduate Diploma in Business
Administration
This program is offered for qualified executives or potential
executives, who have not undertaken significant studies in
the administrationlmanagement fields, but in the course of
their employment, feel the need for a broader knowledge of
this area.
The program gives candidates:
(1) a working knowledge of the factors affecting the task of
the manager and methods of analysing these factors. Particular
emphasis is on the needs of middle-management
in both private and public enterprise, to manage in a
changing - - environment;
(2) an opportunity to examine and practise problem-solving
and decision-makina in manaaement situations. which
should equip studenis in any type of business organisation
with the ability to develop logical and creative
approaches to their jobs.
After completion of the program, candidates will have
improved their analytical skills and their effectiveness in dealing
with managerial responsibilities. Moreover, participants
will have a broader outlook, extending beyond their immediate
specialist areas.
Entrance requirements
Entrance is open to graduates who hold a degree or diploma
or its eauivalent. The Droaram is available also to a restricted
numbe; of candidates whose position or experience in
employment is sufficient indication of their capacity to complete
the course.
Admission is determined by a selection committee. In addition
to academic achievements selection depends upon maturity,
work experience and executive potential. Accordingly, each
applicant is invited to attach to the application form a detailed
curriculum vitae.
It is expected that most people who gain direct entry to the
course should complete the qualification with two years of
part-time study, but, in order to continue in the course,
students must maintain a satisfactory standard of progress.
Course structure
First year
BC503 Introduction to Financial Manaaement
BE501 Economics
BH501 Administration of Organisational Systems
BMSOl Marketing Management 1
BQ50415 Quantitative Methods
Second year
BC604 Financial Structures and Policy
BH605 Managing Human Processes
BM601 Marketing Management 2
BM603 Business Policy
The program is an intensive two-year part-time course. All
units are compulsory. In the first year, candidates are
introduced to current thought in the areas of marketing,
economics, finance, organisational psychology and
quantitative methods. Candidates must complete all first year
units before commencing second year. Second year covers
the important areas of marketing strategy (local and
international), financial management, human relations and
organisational change. These aspects are viewed in the overall
light of the final unit, corporate strategy (business policy). Thus
the emphasis in the second year is on the effective application
of knowledge acquired in the first year.
As an integral part of the course, all students in second year,
attend a residential weekend early September.
Preclusions
Depending on previous training, candidates may be precluded
from some of the first year units and assigned alternative units
in their place.
-

Alternative units
Candidates who are precluded from more than one first-year
unit must choose, in consultation with the course convener,
an alternative post graduate unit.
Standards of progress
A sub-committee reviews the results of any candidate who
fails to reach a satisfactory standard of progress. The decision
rests with this committee as to whether the candidate is to
be allowed to continue the course.
Methods of study and instruction
More than one method of instruction is used, so active participation
is essential. Participants work in groups or syndicates
to encourage co-operative thought. In addition to classroom
time, formal syndicate studies are programmed for each week.
During these formal sessions ample opportunity arises for
questions and discussion centred about case studies or short
papers prepared by staff members for analysis.
The nature of the work schedule usually requires participants
to engage in further syndicate work of a less formal nature.
A residential weekend seminar is held in the second year of
the course.
Timetable
Sessions for both first and second year units have been organised
on a block system. All unit sessions will be offered on
Monday morning between 8.00am and 10.00am and between
10.30am and 12.30pm. In addition, special seminars and
subject seminars may be scheduled for one evening (normally
Wednesday) between 6.00 and 9.00.
A089 Graduate Diploma in Market
Forecasting
Course objectives
The Graduate Diploma in Market Forecasting is designed for
those people who wish to obtain the skills and techniques
necessary in order to:
be aware of when and where the need for forecasting exists
and where it fits in with respect to the planning process;
evaluate dominant market and environmental factors affecting
an organisation;
prepare short, medium and long-term forecasts where
appropriate;
effectively communicate the results of the forecasting process
and oversee their implementation.
Entrance requirements
Applicants must have a degree (or equivalent) in any discipline
from a recognised university or college (preferably entrants
will have a knowledge of basic economics and statistics).
Applicants must have at least two years relevant work experience
subsequent to initially graduating.
There are a limited number of places available for candidates
without tertiary qualifications, however, these candidates are
expected to have substantial relevant work experience.
Course structure
The emphasis throughout the course is on the practical
Second year
Semester 1
BQ604 Market Forecasting 2
BM604 Data Collection Methods and Applications
Semester 2
BQ605 Market Forecasting 3
BC612 Forecasting and the Planning Process
Faculty of Business
The course is designed for part-time study predominantly in
the evening.
Preclusions
Candidates may be precluded from attempting a unit in the
event that they have recently passed an equivalent unit elsewhere.
In such instances candidates may select an elective
unit after consultation with appropriate staff members.
Standards of progress
A sub-committee reviews the results of any candidate who
fails to reach a satisfactory standard of progress. The decision
rests with this committee as to whether the candidate is to
be allowed to continue the course.
A087 Graduate Diploma in Business
Information Technology
Course objectives
This course is designed as an entry level course for graduates
in any discipline who wish to utilize computing skills in their
existing profession or who may be contemplating a change
in career direction. No prior knowledge of computing will be
assumed.
The course aims to assist students whose career aspirations
are dependent on obtaining specific skills and knowledge of
computing as applied to business.
Specifically the course is aimed at giving students:
Practical skills in:
(i) common business software packages -
(ii) computer programming
(iii) structured analvsis
(ivj data base management systems
(v) data communication
(vi) expert system tools
Conceptual knowledge about:
(i) evaluating systems development tools
(ii) choosing appropriate methods of systems development
and appropriate processing facilities
(iii) solving problems associated with implementing computer
and office automation systems
(iv) the role of information technology in meeting an
organisation's business objectives.
Employment opportunities
The type of work that graduates may be involved in includes:
(i) liaising between user areas and the computer department
(business analyst)
(ii) analysing and designing information systems
programming
aspects of forecasting. The use of computers is a feature in (iv) evaluating software and hardware
almost every unit, and throughout the course participants will (1 co-ordinating computer
be introduced to a wide variety of specialist computer pack- (,i) administering a computer function an
ages to facilitate solution of forecasting and related problems. organisation
First year
(vii) marketing support for software and hardware suppliers
Semester 1
BE504 The Nature and Characteristics of Markets
(viii) education and training in information technology in
schools, the computer industry or the public sector.
BQ502 Database Sources and Methods
Course structure
Semester 2
The course consists of eight (8) semester units. Taken on a
BM502 Selecting and Influencing Markets part-time basis, the course will consist of two (2) units per
BQ506 Market Forecasting 1 semester for four semesters. Taken on a full-time basis, the
151

course will consist of four (4) units Per semester for two semesters.
For the final unit, students will select one from
Knowledge Based Systems, Systems Software, and Advanced
Programming.
The units are:
W504 lntroduction to lnformation Technology
BT506 lnformation Analysis
BT507 Computer Programming
BT508 Introduction to Business Computing
BT606 Data Base Management Strategies
BT607 Data Communication and Office Automation
BT608 Systems Development Strategies
BT609 Knowledge Based Systems
or
BT610 Industrial Project A
or
BT611 Systems Software
or
BT612 Advanced Programming
Each unit is conducted for four hours per week. In many units
part of this time will be taken up in computer laboratories.
Students will have access to laboratories outside normal class
times.
Entrance requirements
Entry is open to graduates who have a degree, diploma or
equivalent in any discipline from a recognised university or
other institution.
In addition, a small number of places are available to
applicants without tertiary qualifications but who have
substantial business experience.
Standards of progress
A sub-committee reviews the results of any candidate who
fails to reach a satisfactory standard of progress. The decision
rests with this committee as to whether the candidate is to
be allowed to continue the course.
Course structure
The course is organised into an eight-unit structure to be completed
over two years of part-time study at the rate of two units
per semester. In order to continue in the program, candidates
must maintain a satisfactory standard of progress.
Consistent with the course objectives of a broad coverage and
the integration of related disciplines, there are no elective units
offered.
First year
semester 1
80504 Corporate Financial Management 1
BE503 Financial Institutions and Markets
Semester 2
BC505 Corporate Financial Management 2
BL502 Legal Aspects of Finance
Second year
Semester 1
BC605 Investment Management
BE603 International Finance and Monetary Theory
Semester 2
80601 Financial Modellino
and either
90306 Current Developments in Corporate Finance
or
BC607
Research Project
.
Preclusions
Candidates may be precluded from attempting a unit in the
unlikely event that they have recently passed an equivalent
unit elsewhere. In such instances candidates may select an
elective unit after consultation with appropriate staff members.
Standards of pmgress
The following should be read in conjunction with paragraphs
4 and 5 of the undergraduate 'Standards of Progress' as a
provision applying to Graduate Diploma in Corporate Finance
students:
'At least one unit must be passed each semester until all
course work is completed, unless a deferment of study is
A086 Graduate Diploma in Corporate
Finance
sought and approved.'
This course is intended to further career prospects for people
who are presently employed in, or want to be employed in,
the area of corporate finance, but who have undertaken little A084 Graduate Diploma in Management
or no undergradute study in corporate finance.
Systems
These people may include, among others:
The Graduate Diploma in Management Systems involves two
(1) those with undergraduate accounting or business quali- years' part-time study. Classes are conducted in the evening.
fications in which only introductory finance courses were
available or chosen;
General objectives
(2) graduates from disciplines such as engineering, law, data This course is offered to people working in a data processing
processing or other related fields, who have moved, or environment who wish to pursue an advanced course of study
want to move, into financial management or corporate and improve their career opportunities.
finance positions.
After completing this course, candidates should be able to:
Course objectives
(1) develop their understanding of the application of man-
To provide participants with a broadly-based training in all agement systems methodology to the problems of commaior
as~ects of contem~orarv corporate finance.
merce, industry and government;
, .
To integrate the associated disciplines encompassed by (2) evaluate the changes and advances in the field of computhe
corporate finance function (e.g. economics, law, ting technology and use sound reasoning to determine
corporate strategy, quantitative methods) with the corporate the applicability of these developments;
finance core of the course.
(3) fully appreciate the effects of various proposed solutions;
To improve significantly, specific decision-making and man- Course structure
agement skills by emphasising the practical application of The course is in two parts, mandatory units and elective units.
theoretical concepts developed during the course.
The compulsory part of the course is concentrated on the
Entrance requirements
systems and management' side of data processing. The
The course is intended for graduates and diplomates who range of the investigation, analysis, design and development
have sufficient professional experience to benefit from it. of management systems will form a major part of the course.
Entrance is also available to a restricted number of mature-' Project and operation management is covered in depth to
age non-graduates or diplomates whose position or exper- ensure that students have a thorough understanding of how
ience is sufficient indication of their capacity to complete the systems can be developed and operated efficiently. The
course.
course stresses commercial applications with particular
emphasis on the involvement of the eventual users of these
systems in the process of their development.

The program is made up of eight units and candidates are
required to take these from two groups as follows:
Group 1
The following units are compulsory:
BT503 Software Engineering Strategies (2 units)
BT502 Current Issues in Systems Design
BT601 Systems Project Management
BT602 Information Systems Management
BT603 Management Systems
Group 2
Students must take an approved pair of units from this section:
BH604 Management, Organisation and People
BM602 Strategic Management
or
BC503 Introduction to Financial Management
BC604 Financial Structures and Policy
The Graduate Diploma in Management Systems forms the
first two years of the Master of Business (Info. Tech.). Candidates
wishing to proceed to the Master of Business (Info.
Tech.) should choose the elective pair:
BH604 Management Organisation and People
EM602 Strategic Management
Preclusions
It is not normal policy to grant preclusions, however, if students
have appropriate prior training, they may be allowed to choose
other approved units including BT605 Systems Development
Project (2 units).
Extension seminars
In addition to normal class contact each student is required
to attend up to six three-hour seminars each year of the
course. The aim of the seminar program is to present the latest
developments and trends in the data processing industry or
present specialised topics of particular interest to the
computer industry.
Suitable applicants
The intake into this course is usually:
(1) computing professionals progressing past the programmer
level into systems analysis and project management;
(2) systems analysis, consultants and some user department
re~resentatives who have had considerable exeerience
in'the development of management systems
Entrance requirements
Entry is open to graduates who have a degree, diploma or
equivalent from a recognised university or other institution.
Graduates from any discipline may apply but applicants are
expected to have work experience in a computing
environment.
The course is available also to a number of carefully selected
candidates without tertiary qualifications or who have substantial
computer experience. These comprise only a small
percentage of total enrolments.
An information seminar is conducted for short listed candidates
prior to entrance to the course. Interviews may be
required.
A085 Graduate Diploma in Organisation
Behaviour
This course is for managers who wish to extend their knowledge
of human behaviour within organisations. Most students
in this course aspire to, or occupy middle and senior management
positions in large or small organisations.
The object of the course is to give candidates:
(1) a knowledge of the human factors that affect the task of
management, together with a study of available methods
for an analysis of these factors;
Faculty of Business
(2) an opportunity to examine and to practise problem-solving
and decision-making when handling people in the organisational
context;
(3) a broadened outlook beyond their immediate area of
specialisation.
Course structure
The program is an intensive two-year, part-time course. The
units (all of which are compulsory) are listed below. The first
year introduces candidates to the areas of psychology and
interpersonal skills, together with a study of organisation
theory.
The second year deals with organisation culture, change, and
leadership. These aspects are examined and applied in the
overall pattern of organisational strategy.
Because of the integrated nature of the course, students are
required to complete all their first year studies before attempting
second year.
First vear
BH~O< The Soc~al Psychology of Organising
BH506 Group and Interpersonal Psychology
Both these units run for the whole academic year and have
a total class time commitment of 5 hours per week.
Second year
BH606
BH607
Culture and Conflict in Organisations
Leadership and Change in Organisations
Each unit runs for 4 hours per week. The first is conducted
in first semester only and the second in second semester.
Entrance requirements
Entry is open to university or other graduates who hold a
degree or diploma, or its equivalent. The program is also
available to a restricted number of candidates whose position
or experience is sufficient to undertake the course. Admission
is determined by a selection committee. In addition to academic
achievements, selection depends upon experience and
development potential. Accordingly, each applicant is asked
to attach to the application form a detailed curriculum vitae.
A letter of support from the employer is required at the
selection interview.
Progress during the course
In order to continue in the course, students must maintain
a satisfactory standard of progress, but it is expected that most
candidates will complete the course within two years of parttime
study.
Methods of learning
A wide variety of teaching methods is employed ranging from
structured lectures or discussion to unstructured experiential
type activities. Skills relating to work in groups are stressed
and these should be developed by active participation in
syndicates.
Professional institutes
Graduates of this course are eligible to apply to the Institute
of Personnel Management, Australia, for membership of this
professional society.
Timetable
First year units are taught concurrently over the whole year.
Second year units are taken successively on a semester basis.
The course is offered on either Wednesday or Friday between
8am and lpm. Special or syndicate sessions may be
scheduled where appropriate. A residential or seminar
program in addition to the usual 5 hours per week is
scheduled each year as an integral part of the course.
Note:
A considerable out-ofclass time commitment is a necessary
element in this learning experience.

A070 Graduate Certificate in Business
Administration
This program is a two semester course intended to provide
entry to management studies for managers with excellent
business experience. Special provision is made for nongraduate
entrants who are excluded from similar graduate
diploma programs through lack of an acceptable
undergraduate qualification.
Course objectives
At the completion of the course, it is expeded that candidates:
will have completed a business course containing a body
of knowledge and technology which is relevant to
immediate and potential business opportunities;
will have a recognised qualification which will assist them
in developing their careers in business, and;
will be equipped with suitable skills necessary to continue
with further postgraduate study in business administration.
As candidates will already be established in business careers,
it is exDeCted that the kev vocational outcomes will arise from
better 'current iob ~erfoimance as well as new o~oortunities
opening in ihe'broader fields of management and
administration within their current organisations.
Entrance requitements
In order to be accepted into this course, applicants must have:
a recognised undergraduate or postgraduate degree in a
discipline other than business and a minimum of four years
practical business experience, or;
at least six years practical business experience at middle
management level and a good track record as judged by
the selection panel.
Course structure
BC401 Accounting for Management
BH401 Managing People
BH402 Managing Organisations
BM401 Marketing Management
BT401 Business Software for PCs
This course is based on two, 16 week semesters. Classes are
conducted on Friday afternoons between 1.00pm and 3.15pm
and 3.45pm and 6.00pm.
In addition the course may be run 'in house' for organisations
where a significant number of students are available.
Progression to Graduate Diploma
Students who perform very well in the Graduate Certificate
may be eligible for entry into the Graduate Diploma in
Business Administration. However, success in the Graduate
Certificate does not guarantee entry to the Graduate Diploma.
Graduate Certificate students who are accepted into the
Graduate Diploma would normally gain exemptions in three
Graduate Diploma units, viz BC503 lntroduction to Financial
Management 1, BM501 Marketing Management and BH501
Administration of Organisational Systems.
Fees
The Graduate Certificate Business Administration is a fullfee
paying course.
A090 Research Degrees
(1) The Faculty provides opportunities for studies leading to
the Master of Business by research and major thesis and
to Doctor of Philosophy by research and major thesis.
Candidates interested in these major research degrees
should contact the Dean of the Faculty.
(2) Applicants must allow 2-3 months for a s;ccessful application
to be evaluated.
(3) Applicants wishing to apply for a postgraduate award must
therefore submit their application to the Institute by 31
October in order to have the candidature finalised by the
closing date for these awards.
A072
Graduate Certificate in Business
lnformation Technology
This course is equivalent to one semester of full-time study
or two semesters part-time. However it may be taken in a
variety of modes.
Course objectives
The course is designed to provide candidates with the basic
information technology skills necessary to support a
successful career in business.
The primary objectives of this course are:
to develop within candidates the basic information
technology skills necessary to support a successful career
in business;
to provide formal information technology education for
personnel involved in information systems but who lack a
broad perspective of information technology;
to develop candidates' analytical and creative skills in using
information technology for business planning, decision
making and opportunity analysis;
to widen the opportunities for access and participation in
the tertiary education system of those currently employed
in the business sector;
to provide a re-entry to tertiary study for graduates who,
for whatever reason, would benefit from a more supportive
learning environment;
to provide an entry to postgraduate study for those people
with excellent business experience but not formal
undergraduate qualifications and who, by virtue of their age,
experience, work responsibilities and other commitments,
are in practical terms excluded from undergraduate and
TAFE certificate courses; and
to prepare candidates for further postgraduate studies in
business information technology.
At the completion of the course, it is-expected that candidates:
will have completed a business course containing a body
of knowledge which is relevant to immediate and potential
opportunities;
will have a recognised qualification which will assist them
in developing their careers in business; and
will be equipped with suitable skills necessary to continue
with further postgraduate study in business information
technology.
Entrance requirements
In order to be accepted into this course, applicants hould have:
a recognised undergraduate or postgraduate degree in a
discipline other than computing;
andlor
at least five years significant and relevant industry
experience;
andlor
professional experience in a computing environment.
Course structure
BT402 Introduction to lnformation Technology
BT403 Business Computing
Plus two units from
BT404 Computer Programming
BT405 lnformation Systems Strategies
BT406 Data Base Design and Implementation
BT407 Technology and Change
In special circumstances, after consultation with course
authorities, students may study other approved units from
either the Graduate Diploma in Business lnformation
Technology or the Graduate Diploma in Management
Systems.

Masters Degrees by course work and
minor thesis
A091 Master of Business
(Organisation Behaviour)
This is a four year part-time degree by course work and minor
thesis. The first two years are the same as for the Graduate
Diploma in Organisation Behaviour; year three comprises a
further four units of course work and the final year is devoted
to the preparation, under supervision, of a minor thesis.
The objectives of the Masters degree are:
to extend the learning objectives of the Graduate Diploma
into further domains of organisation behaviour and
to develop the capacity of participants to conduct applied
research into behavioural issues in organisations.
Entrance requirements
Entry is open to those who have satisfied to an appropriate
standard the requirements of the Graduate Diploma in Organisation
Behaviour (or its equivalent).
Admission is determined by a selection committee and places
are limited. The potential for and interest in doing applied
research is an important selection criteria. Accordingly, each
applicant is asked to attach to the application form a detailed
curriculum vitae and a personal statement.
Course structure
Years One and Two
Graduate Diploma in Organisational Behaviour
Year Three
BH701 Career and Life Plannlng
BH702 Power and Politics in Organisations
BH703 Research in Organisation Behaviour
BH704 Current Issues in Organisation Behaviour
Year Four
BH801 Organisation Research Project
and Thesis (under supervision)
A092 Master of Business
(Information Technology)
The Master of Business (Information Technology) involves four
years part-time study.
Course objective
The aim of this course is to provide a formal, structured program,
covering the major areas of the broad field known as
lnformation Technology as applied to business, but with the
flexibility to allow cross-disciplinary studies within the Swinburne
course, i.e. Master of Applied Science (Info. Tech.) and
Master of Engineering (Info. Tech.) and, where appropriate,
special electives to be undertaken at other associated
institutions.
This course is intended for career students who aspire to management
level positions or in management consulting with
software houses or management sewice organisations.
During the course, students will develop:
- the high level capacity and independent analytical skills
necessary to assess the impact of lnformation Technology
on an organisation, the people in it and its implications
for commerce, industry and government;
- the capacity to understand the information technology
needs of an organisation, and the ability to manage its
selection, introduction and operation within the
organisation;
- an understanding of the technology of information processing
and its application in technical or management tasks.
In general, graduates will have enhanced skills in developing
and applying advanced Information Technology systems in
a wide range of industrial, commercial and public sector
applications.
Faculty of Business
Course structure
The Graduate Diploma in Management Systems forms the
first two years of the Master of Business (Info. Tech.). Candidates
in that course wishing to proceed to the Master of
Business (Info. Tech.) should choose the elective pair:
BH604 Management Organisation and People
BM602 Strategic Management
First Year and Second Years
Graduate Diploma in Management Systems
Third Year (Masters Course)
Semester 1
BQ701 Business Forecasting
BT702 Knowledge Based Systems
Semester 2
BQ702 Computer Aided Management
BH705 Management of Strategic Change
Fourth Year
BT801 Project and Thesis (4 units)
Admission requirements
Entrance requirements are as specified for the Graduate Diploma
in Management Systems.
For progression from the Graduate Diploma in Management
Systems to the third year of the Master of Business course,
students would normally be expected to have attained an averaae
of at least Credit throuahout their Graduate Di~loma in
~Ianagement Systems stu&es.
Students with honours degrees in Business or Computer
Science may be granted advanced standing by exemption
from appropriate subjects. Provision is also made for transfer
of subject credits to, and from, other co-operating institutions
in Melbourne for approved equivalent course content.
Master of Business Administration
This is a general management program which meets the
career needs of organisational leaders now and towards the
year 2000.
Participants in the program focus on responsibility and
success in a rapidly changing world, on the need to make
proper use of new technologies, on the need to export, and
on the skills of people management. In addition they will
develop an integrated knowledge of the practical applications
of the key business disciplines such as Financial
Management, Economics, Information Technology, Marketing
and Strategic Planning.
Graduates of this course will be equipped to move rapidly into
positions of responsible organisational leadership. They will
provide the professional management needed by all types
of organisations in this time of change.
Both senior managers and young executives in the early
stages of their careers will benefit from the course.
An Organisation Based Strategic Project
During the course it is necessary for participants to obtain
access and support from the management of a Melbourne
organisation, preferably medium to large, with the course
requirement to research and develop a strategic plan. Where
this is not possibleswinburne will assist in finding a suitable
organisation.
It is expected that organisations in which MBA candidates
carry out their projects will gain significant benefits from the
analysis of their problems and the development of strategic
solutions.
Choice
In the full-time MBA an elective unit makes it possible to
explore a chosen area in greater depth or to expand into new
areas. Together with the Strategic Project and the elective unit
this course offers the combination of a carefully designed
learning experience which will enhance performance in the
task of general management, and an opportunity for the

student to design part of the program to meet particular
individual needs.
The degree is taught in two modes:
1. A complete MBA course in one year full-time.
2. A conversion program for holders of the Swinburne
Graduate Diploma in Business Administration or its
equivalent (in standard and content). This program may
be completed in six months full-time or 12 to 18 months
part-time.
Course structure
Full-time MBA
Four days in residence
To get to know other course members and the teaching staff,
to clarify expectations about the course and its themes, to
establish working teams, and to consider the key behavioural
aspects of organisational life.
Also, BT703 Introduction to Business Software, a five day
computer skills program, is held prior to the start of the main
semester.
Term 1 (15 weeks)
BB810 Strategic project planning
(The project = 4 units and continues throughout the year)
BH706 Managing People and Organisations
BE701 Economics for Manaaement
6%1 Accounting for ~anagement
88802 Technology and Management
BM701 Marketing for Management
Term 2 (15 weeks)
88810 Strategic project (continues)
88701 Manaaement of Resources
BTm4 comp';ting for Management
88801 lnternational Business
88702 Management of ldeas
88803 Elective
Term 3 (10 weeks)
BB810 Strategic project (concludes)
88804 Management and Society
BM801 Business Planning and Policy
N.B. Applicants who have qualified for the Swinburne Graduate
Certificate in Business Administration may be credited with up to 3
units towards the full-time MBA.
Conversion to MBA from Graduate Diploma
Full-time
Term 1 (15 weeks)
88702 Management of ldeas
BT704 Computing for Management
88801 lnternational Business
BB810 Strategic project (Value 4 units. To be completed in six
months.)
Term 2 (10 weeks)
88804 Management and Society
88810 Strategic Project (Concludes)
Part-time
Term 1 (15 weeks)
BB810
Preparation for Strategic project which continues
throughout the year and up to 18 months (Value 4 units.)
88802 Technology and Management
Term 2 (15 weeks)
88702 Management of ldeas
88801 lnternational Business
88810 Project continues
Term 3 (10 weeks)
88804 Management and Society
BB810 Project continues
A further period of approximately six months.
BB810 Strategic project complet~on and report
Part-time participation in the MBA is only available by way
of this conversion program.
There may be variations to this course structure according
to the time of year the program is started and according
to the student's academic background.
Electives
As part of the one-year MBA, students are required to
complete an elective unit.
The program of electives will be designed for each candidate's
needs through consultation between the student and staff.
Entrance requirements
A degree, or its equivalent from a recognised institution, and
normally a minimum of three years appropriate work experience.
Admission is determined by a selection committee who will
take into account academic achievements, work history and
executive potential. Letters of recommendation from
employers and others who have specific knowledge of the
candidate's academic or managerial skills are helpful.
Methods of learning
Generally each unit requires classes or seminars totalling 30
hours plus individual work or assignments in small groups.
There are additional seminars when needed dealing with
topics which enhance the unit studies, e.g. research
methodology and planning methods, special guest speakers,
visits to companies.
In all aspects of the program the key themes of innovation,
technology and internationalism are integrated.
Fees
This intensive and innovative course is required to meet all
costs from the fee of $27,500 for the one year MBA (1992).
Of this, half is due on acceptance into the course, and the
remainder at the end of term 1.
For the conversion course for Graduate Diploma holders, the
fee is $11,500.
Business subject details
BC101 Accounting 1A
Prerequisite, nil
A basic introduction to accounting concepts, the processing of
accounting data and the preparation of financial reports.
The unit is divided into two segments.
The first segment covers the accounting function, bas~c terminology.
the accountlna eauatlon and the DreDaratlon of a balance sheet and
profit and lossstaiement from a si;llple ledger system. The accounting
system IS Introduced as a means of prowdlng lnformat~on for manaaement
control and declslon maklno. and for the ~re~aratlon of flnal
reports. The control of cash, bank &conciliations and balance day
adjustments are included. The second segment revises the system
using a commercial accounting package for micro computers.
Textbooks
Kloot. L. and Sandercock. E., Accounting. The Basis for Business
Decisions. Svdnev: McGraw-Hill Book Com~anv. . ,. 1991
Student ~akal, ~winburne. 1992
References
Hoggett, J. and Edwards, L., Accounting in Australia. 2nd edn.
Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons, 1990
Holmes. S., Hodgson. A. and Nevell, I?, Accounting Student's
Handbook. Sydney: Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1991
Martin, C.A. An Introduction to Accounting. 3rd edn, Sydney: McGraw-
Hill, 1990

BC102
Accounting 1B
Prerequisite, a result of 'C' or better in Year 12
Accounting or equivalent experience
The object is to provide an introductory unit in accounting methods
and techniaues for students with some orior knowledae of bookkeep-
.ng or accobnting. The course content /s as for BC~O'~ - see abo"e.
Textbooks and References
As for BC101.
BC103 Accounting 1C
Prerequisite. BClOl Accounting 1A or BC102
Accounting 1B
Accounting theory andpractice are examined in an historical cost
accounting system. This unit includes the following topics: revenue
and expenses; accounts receivable; cost of sales and inventory valuation;
assets and depreciation; liabilities and leases; accounting for
shareholders eauitv; performance evaluation; analysis and interpretation
and funds siatement and cash flow statements.
Textbooks
Kloot, L. and Sandercock. E., Accounting. The Basis for Business
Decisions. Sydney: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1991
Student Manual, Swinburne, 1992
References
Barton, A.D. The AnatomyofAccounting. 3rd edn, St. Locia: University
of Queensland Press, 1984
Harrison, J., Horrocks, J. and Newman, R. Accounting - A Direct
Approach. 4th edn, Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1986
Hoggett, J. and Edwards. L., Accounting in Australia. Brisbane: John
Wiley and Sons, 1990
Holmes, S., Hodgson, A. and Nevell, P, Accounting Student's
Handbook. Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1991
Ma, R. and Mathews, R. The Accounting Framework - A Contemporary
Emphasis. 2nd edn, Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1987
Martin. C.A. An Introduction to Accounting. 3rd edn, Sydney: McGraw-
Hill. 1990
BE102 Economics 1A
Prerequisite: Nil
This unit introduces students to microeconomic concepts and their
application within the framework of the Australian economic and
business environment. The course commences with an examination
of the role of the contemporary market system in allocating resources
and distributing output. This is followed by an examination of the firm's
production, costs and revenues in a variety of market situations. The
significance of microeconomic concepts for both business and
government policy is emphasised throughout the unit.
Textbook
Waud. R.N. et al. Economics, Australian edn, Sydney: Harper & Row,
1989
References
Jackson, J. and McConnell, C.R. Economics, 3rd edn, Sydney:
McGraw-Hill. 1988
Terry, C. and'forde, K. Microeconomics: An introduction for Australian
Students, 2nd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1988
BE103 Economics 1B
Prerequisite: BE102 Economics 1A
This unit introduces students to the way in which economists analyse
macroeconomic problems within the framework of the Australian
economic and business environment. The course begins with a
detailed analysis of the determinants of the level and rate of change
of national output, employment, prices and the exchange rate.
Attention is then focussed on the role of fiscal, monetary, prices and
incomes, balance of payments and exchange rate policies in achieving
economic goals.
Textbook
Waud. R.N. et al, Economics, Australian edn, Sydney: Harper & Row,
1989
References
Jackson. J. and McConnell, C.R. Economics, 3rd edn, Sydney:
McGraw-Hill, 1988
MacMillan, A. et al, Macroeconomics, The Australian Context, Sydney:
Prentice-Hall, 1987
Faculty of Business
BH101 Organisations and Management
Prerequisites, nil
The objectives of this unit are:
- to enable students to gain an understanding of the nature of organisations
and the role of management including open systems
theory and the management roles of planning, decision-making,
organising, leading staffing and controlling;
- to develop students' abilities to apply organisation theory to organisation
situations;
- to help students better appreciate the context of work and their
own roles as organisation members.
In addition to the theoretical material covered in lectures, tutorial exercises
are designed to enable students to apply concepts either to situations
within their own experience or to relevant business situations.
The importance of people in organisations is stressed in these
exercises.
Textbook
Schermerhorn, J.R. Management for Productivity. 3rd edn, New York:
Wiley, 1989
References
As advised in class
BL101
Legal Environment of Business
This unit introduces students to our legal system. The general objectives
are:
- to introduce students to basic legal concepts;
- to develop an understanding of the nature and function of law, in
particular the interrelationship of law, business and society;
- to introduce students to important areas of business law including
company, contract, tort and administrative law.
After an introductory topic on the concepts, techniques and institutions
of the Australian legal system, the unit is divided into two major themes.
Two case studies on the role of law in promoting business activity are
undertaken. These are drawn from contract and company law. Case
studies on the role of law in controlling business activity are next
undertaken. These are drawn from tort law and regulatory legislation.
Textbooks
Latimer, P. Australian Business Law. (1991 edn), Sydney: CCH, 1990
or
Vermeesch, R.B. and Lindgren, K.E. Business Law of Australia. 6th
edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1990
BM101 The Marketing Concept
Prerequisite, nil
This unit explores basic business and marketing concepts from a
variety of perspectives. The objective is the understanding of key concepts
upon which to build a framework for the integration of a variety
of ideas on business-customer exchanges and the role of the marketing
function.
Unit objective
The unlt provides common vear students with a series of lectures.
gmup discussions, tutorial exercises and assignments designed to give
them an opportunity to explore bas~c business and marketing concepts
from a varletv of perspectives. Related issues of concern to not-forprofit
organi&lions are also explored.
Particular emphasis is given to the role marketing plays in the organisation's
process of adaption to its environment, relationships between
organisations and their clients, and in the formulation of management
policies that impact on other functions such as accounting, operations,
and research.
At the end of the unit, the successful student will have acquired an
understanding of key concepts upon which to build a framework for
the integration of a variety of ideas on business-customer exchanges
and an understanding of the role of the marketing function. This understanding
of marketing and marketing people will aid in the understanding
of other disciplines in the Bachelor or Business as well as
providing a strong philosophical foundation for the vocational study
of marketing, either as an elective sequence or as part of the Marketing
or Economics-Marketing stream.
Textbooks
McCarthy, E.J. and Perrault. W.D. Jnr., Basic Marketing: A Managerial
Approach. 10th edn, Homewood USA: Irwin, 1990
Students are required to purchase the 'Marketing Concept Book', a
comprehensive guide to the course, tutorials and assignments.
References l~sted overleaf.
157

References
De Bono. E. Opportunities. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1980
Lwitt. T. The Marketina - Imaaination. - 2nd edn. New York: Free Press,
1986 .
Peter, T. and Austin, N. A Passion for Excellence. New York: Random
House, 1985
Other supporting material will be prescribed when appropriate, in
lectures. It is expected that extensive use will be made of the large
collection of relevant material in the library -both texts and current
journals.
BT1U2 lnformation Technology A
An understanding of information technology is essential for a
successful career in business. This unit and its subseauent companion
BT103 deal with the way computers, software, communications, etc.,
are used by businesses today.
The two units (BT102 and BT103) have as their objectives:
1. to give students a broad understanding of information technology
in the business environment;
2. to endow students with computer skills which will be of immediate
practical use in other units and disciplines, and of later use in
students' careers;
3. to provide a firm basis as prerequisites for second and third year
computing units.
The BTl02 unit will cover:
- computers
computer applications
communications
- DOS
- spreadsheets (using Lotus 1-2-3)
- word processing
Textbooks
To be advised.
References
Any current introductory books on computers in business.
Swinburne-produced course guides on spreadsheets, word
processing, and DOS.
BT103 Information Technology B
Prerequisite: BT102 lnformation Technology A
Refer to BTl02 for philosophy and objectives.
The BT103 unit will cover:
- database theory
database practice using dBASE Ill+ or dBASE IV
advanced DOS
structured programming
- programming practice using dBASE Ill+ or dBASE IV
- systems analysis and development
Textbooks
To be advised.
References
Any current introductory books on computers in business.
Swinburne-produced course guides on dBASE III+WBASE IV
SM147 Quantitative Analysis A
SM148 Quantitative Analysis B
First-year subjects in the Faculty of Business common year. For students
without the ap mpriate Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent.
the course, SM147 guantitative Analysis A, is taken and it consists
of three hours per week for two semesters. For students with the appropriate
Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent, the course, SM148 Quantitative
Analysis B, is taken and it consists of three hours per week
for one semester. The content of both courses is the same, but the
time allocation is different.
The primary purpose of this subject is to bring all students up to a
higher level of numeracy and to develop a method of approach which
they will be able to apply in subsequent areas of their courses. In doing
this. the unit will provide students with a knowledge of particular techniques
in mathematics and statistics so that they may achieve a greater
understanding of the quantitative procedures applied in various disciplines
of their business course. Application, interpretation and presentation
of the results of analysis will form an integral part of the course.
Topics covered will include the following: language and notation; functional
relatlonshiDs: differential calculus includina determination of
maxima and minima, partial differentiation; intmd

BC207 Management Accounting 2
Prerequisite: BC206 Management Accounting 1
Management Accounting 2 is a second year semester length unit
which is mandatory for students taking the accounting stream. This
unit replaces BC203 Management Accounting and BC205 Accounting
for Marketing 2.
The emphasis in this unit is on the accounting systems which produce
the information necessary for decision making and planning, and
ultimately for financial reporting. Topics covered include job order
costing, accounting for overhead costs, standard costing, process
costing, joint and by-product costing, performance evaluation and
transfer pricing. The effects of new technologies will be integrated into
material throughout the course.
Textbooks
Hansen, D.R.. Management Accounting. Boston: PWS-Kent, 1990
Homgren, CT. and Foster, G. Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis.
7th edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991
BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
Students who are contemplating major studies in economics should
include thls unit and BE202 Industry and Government in thew courses
The unit shows how economic analysis can be used to assist business
decision-making. Case studies are used to illustrate the concepts
involved. It deals with the following topics: demand analysis (including
empirical demand studies and forecasting); cost estimation and forecasting;
profit and alternative goals of firms; and pricing decisions.
References
Douglas, E.J. Managerial Economics: Analysis and Strategy. 3rd edn,
London: Prentice Hall International, 1987
Pamas. J.L. and Hlrschev. M. Managerial Economics. 6th edn,
chkago: Dryden Press, 1990
Petersen, H.C. and Lewis, W.C., Managerial Economics. 2nd edn, New
York: Macmillan Publishing Co.
BE202 Industry and Government
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This unit builds on the material covered in Economics 1A.
Students who are contemplating major studies in economics should
include this unit and BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis in their
courses.
The unit deals with the performance of industry in contemporary
economies with special reference to Australia and considers the role
of government in these economies.
Performance criteria, the nature of the modern corporation (including
transnational corporations) and specific approaches to industrial policy
and regulation are discussed.
Textbook
Terry, C., Jones, R. and Braddock, R. (eds.) Australian Microeconomic
Pblicies. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1988
Reference
Caves, R., Ward, I., Williams, P. and Wright, C. Australian Industry,
Structure, Conduct and Performance. 2nd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall,
1987
Faculty of Business
- wage determination;
- management and industrial relations.
Specific references will be provided at the beginning of the unit,
however, the following references will provide useful preliminary
reading:
References
Deery, S. and Plowman, D. Australian lndustrial Relations. 3rd edn,
Sydney: McGraw-Hill, 1990
Hill, J., Howard. W.A. and Lansbury, R. lndustrial Relations: An
Australian Introduction. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1982
BE204
Economic Evaluation
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This unit provides students with a sound grasp of basic concepts and
techniques of economic evaluation for application in areas such as:
a revlew of the effectiveness of budgetary programs, evaluation of
maior construction orolects and caoital eauioment acaulsitlon. and
coit-effectiveness stiudiks. ~mphasis in the unit is on the development
of Interpretive skills, through awareness and knowledge of important
factors enterlna into the evaluation orocess and an aooreciation . . of the
elements of uricertain and impredise information.
Textbooks
Sugden, R. and Williams, A. The Principles of Practical Cost-Benefit
Analysis. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1978
Department of Finance. Evaluating Government Programs: Financial
Managementlmprovement Program. Canberra: Australian Government
Publishing Service, 1987
BE205 Economic Techniques for Business
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103 Economics
1B and SM147 or SM148 Quantitative Analysis
for Business (or an approved equivalent)
Objectives
The aim of this unit is to equip students with the techniques and skills
generally used in economic and market research in business. The
course will cover a wide variety of techniques with an emphasis on
analysis and interpretation of information rather than underlying mathematical
theory.
Course outline
Statistical computing
Data analysis
Statistical Analysis
Econometric Modelling
- simple linear regression
- multiple regression
Textbook
Norusis M. J. SPSS/PC+ Studentware. Chicago: SPSS Inc., 1988
BE206
Applied Macroeconomics
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This is a second year unit which builds on the material covered in
Economics 1B. The focus of the unit is macroeconomic policy in an
applied sense.
The main objectives of the unit are to:
1. Broaden students' understanding and appreciation of
macroeconomic principles, current issues and policy.
BE203 Industrial Relations
2. Provide students with the necessary skills to evaluate
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103 macroeconomic policies.
Economics 1B
3. Develop skills in interpreting macroeconomic data, reports and
This unit aims to equip students with an understanding of the Austra- policy statements and to evaluate implications for managerial
lian industrial relations systems, with particular emphasis on the decision making.
Federal and Victorian jurisdictions.
Specific topics include the measurement of macroeconomic
As well as providing a theoretical framework within which the industrial performance, limitations of major aggregate indicators, sources of
relations systems operate, the unit will address a range of fluctuations in economic activity, major macroeconomic problems,
contemporary issues including current Federal and State legislative economic forecasting, macro economic management within an open
orovisions. labour market reforms, trade union issues and the role of ernnnmv ---..-...,
.
;nanagement in industrial relations.
References
Topics to be studied within the unit include:
Parkin, M. Macroeconomics. Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
- industrial conflict; 1990
- the role of the parties - unlons, employers, government;
- Federal and State arbitral systems; References cont. overleaf.

~ ~~~ -
~ ---.
Indecs, 'State of Play 6: The Australian Economic Pblicy Debate. Textbook
Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1990
Khoury, D. and Yamouni. Y.S., Understanding Contract Law. 2nd edn,
Reserve Bank of Australia, The Australian Macro-economy in the 1980s. Bunerworths
Proceedings of a Conference. 1990
nr -.
Latimer, P. Australian Business Law. 1991 edn. North Ryde, N.S.W.:
BH201 Organisational Behaviour 1
CCH Australia Ltd, 1990
or
Prerequisite, BHlOl Or anisationsand Management or Vermeesch, R.B. and Lindgren, K.E. Business Law of Australia. 6th
BS132 Administrative 8tudies 1 edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1990
A second-year unit.
References
This unit builds on and derives from the systems theory of organisa- Greig, L3.W. and Davis, J.L.R. The Law of Contract. Sydney: Law Book
tions introduced in first year. It focuses on the people or psychosocial G., 1987, PIUS supplement
sub-system. The major aims of the unit are to give students sound Sunon, K.CT. Sa1e.S and Con~~mer Law in Australia and New Zealand.
knowledge of the concepts and theories that form the basic building 3rd edn, Sydney: Law Book Co.. 1983
blocks of the subject and through experiential learning methods to be Tarr. A.A. Australian Insurance Law. Law Book Co.. 1987
able to transfer that learning to orgarktional situations. Students gain
insights into the behaviour of people as individuals and as group
members within the organisational context and begin to learn about
themselves.
Topics include: socialization, motivation, learning, problem-solving,
perception, personality, stress management, leadership, managing
conflict, declslon-mak~ng and group dynamics, managing change,
power and politics.
Textbook
To be advised.
- -
BH202 Organisation Design
Acts of Parliament
Goods Act 1958 (Victoria)
Trade Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth)
Insurance Contracts Act 1984 (Commonwealth)
BL202 Law of Business Organisations
Prerequisite, BLlOl Legal Environment Business
This unit is compulsory for students in the accounting
stream; optional for others.
The intention here is to undertake a comparative analysis of the form
of business organisations.
This involves an introduction to partnership and company law.
Textbook
Prerequisite. BS132 Administrative Studies 1 or BHlOl
Organisations and Management
Lipton. P. and Herzberg, A. Understanding Company Law. 4th edn,
It would be referable for students to have also studied Sydney: Law lggl
- - - - - - - -
BH201 ~rginisational ~ehaviour 1 References
A second-Year elective in the degree course in business Ford, H.A.J. Principlesof Company Law. 5th edn. Sydney: Bunerworths,
The aim of the field of study known as organisation design is to create 1990
an understanding of what 'good organisation' is for each of a great Law of Companies in Australia. 2nd edn, North Ryde: CCH, 1986
variety of institutions that are engaged in very different activities on Guidebook to Australian Company Law. 10th edn, North Ryde: CCH,
all kinds of scales within contrasting economic. social, political and 1988
cultural settings.
Within this context, the unit aims to enable students to identify some
of the design choices that can be made and the considerations relevant
to these choices; to understand the main problems that arise in
designing structures and jobs, and to develop skills in the analysis
of practical problems through the use of research and theory of organisation
design and involvement in the investigation of at least one
organisation.
The unit covers five main areas of study:
(1) The contextual dimensions of organisation:
- the external environment;
- goals and effectiveness.
(2) Organisation structure and design;
- the design of jobs and work structures;
- organisation bureaucracy, size and growth;
- organisation technology;
- functional, product and matrix structures.
(3) Desi n influences on dynamic processes:
- intrmation and control;
- organisational change.
14) lntearatina the total svstem
BL203 Marketing and the Law
Prerequisite, BLlOl Legal Environment of Business
The unit involves an examination of the legal controls imposed on the
manufacturing, labelling, packaging, distribution, promotion, pricing,
and retailing of goods and (where applicable) services.
Topics involved in this study are:
- the liability of manufacturers and retailers of goods at common
law and under statute; proprietary interests in products; packaging
and labelling of goods; advertising and promotion of goods and
services; restrictive trade practices.
Textbooks
Collinge, J. and Clarke, B. Law of Marketing in Australia and New
Zealand. 2nd edn. Svdnev: Butterworths. 1989
~oods k t 1958 (vicj .
Goods (Sales and Leases) Act 1981 (Vic)
Consumer Affairs Act 1972 (Vic)
Fair Trading Act 1985 (Vic)
Tmde Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth)
References
Barnes, S. and Blakeney, M. Advertising Regulation. Sydney: Law Book
Co.. 1982
Bedeian, A. Organizations: Theory and Analysis. 2nd edn, Chicago: ~ealey,~. Australian Trade Practices Law. 6th edn, North Ryde: CCH
Dryden Press, 1984 Australia Ltd., 1988
Dessler, G. Organization Theory: Integrating Structure and Behaviour. Healey. D. and Terry, A. Misleading or Deceptive Conduct. North Ryde:
2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1986 CCH Australia Ltd, 1991
Robbins, S.P. and Barnwell, N.S. Organisation Theory in Australia. Taperell, G.O. et. al. Trade Practices andconsumer Pmtection. 3rd edn,
Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1989 Sydney: Butterworths, 1983
BL201
Contract Law
Prerequisite BLlOl Legal Environment of Business
The general aim of this unit is to enable students to gain an understanding
of the law applicable to agreements, and in particular those
negotiated during the course of the establishment, and conduct of businesses.
Particular attention is also given to the legal repercussions
of concluding an agreement (including the impact of statute) and
breaching obligations undertaken.

BL204 Computers and the Law
Prerequisite, BLlOl Legal Environment of Business
Course ob'ectives
The aim of the course is to enable students to explore:
1. The application of existing law to computer development, manufacturing,
acquisition and use.
2. The law in relation to computer abuse.
Course outline
To meet objective (1) above, students will examine the application to
computer technology of existing law and practice, pertaining to:
(a) patents and copyright;
(b) negligent manufacture;
(c) negotiating and concluding
contracts for the acquisition, Acquisition
lease or rental of computer
resources;
(d) performance deficiencies
involving breach of contract,
breach of warranty or
misrepresentations;
(e) output errors or performance Use
malfunctions involving, e.g.
defamation or third party
economic loss.
To meet objective (2) above, students will examine:
(a) 'computer crime', with a view to assessing the adequacy of the
present law to meet the challenge inherent in the successful prosecution
of computer criminals;
and
(b) the issue of 'invasion of privacy', with a view to determining the
appropriate legal response to the dangers of personal data
storage.
Reference
Knight, P. and Fitzsimons, J. The Legal Environment of Computing.
Sydney: Addison Wesley, 1990
Recommended reading
Hughes. G. (ed.) Essays in Computer Law. Melbourne: Longman
Professional, 1990
BL205 Retailing and the Law
prerequisite: BLlOl Legal Environment of Business
This unit aims to orovide a oractical knowledae and awareness of the
laws which impinge upon the function of retdng, concentrating upon
those areas affecting the day-to-day activities of the business.
Topics covered in this unit include the liability of retailers under the
laws of contract and negligence, crime and retailing, establishing a
retail business. franchising, the retailer and credit, the retailer and
safety, trade description and consumer protection laws, and other
general rights and duties owed by retailers.
Textbook
No specific textbook is prescribed.
The following statutes will be required:
Goods Act 1958 (Vic)
Consumer Affairs Act 1972 (Vic)
Fair Trading Act 1985 (Vic)
Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth.)
References
Australia Trade Practices Commission. Advertising and Selling,
Canberra: AGPS, 1981
Australia Trade Practices Commission. Shoppers Rights
A Guidebook on Consumers' Problems. Canberra: AGPS, 1979
Brave, J. Law for Retailers. London: Sweet & Maxwell, 1983
Goldring, J., Maher, L.W. and McKeough, J. Consumer Protection Law
in Australia. 3rd edition, Sydney: Butterworths, 1987
Retailing and the Law. Papers presented by the Continuing Legal
Education Dept. of the College of Law. May 1986, Sydney: Centre for
Legal Information and Publication, 1986
Faculty of Buslness
BM203 Marketing Research
Prerequisites, BM 205 Marketing Behaviour and BQ204
Marketina Data Manaaement or BE205 Economic Techniques
6r ~usiness- Unless students study BM206
Marketing Strategy and BM203 Marketing Research concurrently.
BM206 is a prerequisite for BM203.
Objectives
This unit is designed to extend the knowledge and skills gained from
the orereauisites with oarticular emohasis on the aatherina and
analkis of data to provide information required for markGing decisions.
It is aimed at those individuals who use marketing research as an aid
to better decision-makina bv aivina an insiaht, via hands-on
experience, of how marke6ngie

BM205 Market Behaviour
Prerequisite, BM101 The Marketing Concept
This unit is a mandatory requirement for the Bachelor of Business
(Marketing) and Bachelor of Business (EconomicslMarketing). It can
be taken as an elective in other courses.
Unit objectives
The objective of this unit is to study the process of consumer choice,
its determinants and its implications for marketing strategy. At the
completion of the unit. students should have acquired an
understanding of:
- the process of human decision making, and;
- understand the three main influences on consumer choice:
the individual consumer
environmental influence
market strategy
Method of instruction
In a course of this nature active participation is essential. The
theoretical aspects of consumer behaviour are supplemented by
practical problems through the use of case studies and fieldwork
exercises.
Textbook
Assael. H. Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Action. 3rd edn, Boston:
Kent Publishing Co.. 1987
BM206 Marketing Strategy
Prereauisite. . . BM205 Market Behaviour
Marketing Strategy is a mandatory unit in the economics-marketing,
and marketing streams and an elective unit in the accounting and computing
streams.
Unit objective
The objective of this unit is to examine further marketing concepts at
a more complex level, focussing on the marketing planning process
as a key tool in an organisation's interaction with the environment.
Specific objectives
- to allow students to consolidate and develop upon the concepts
developed in BMlOl and BM205;
- to enhance students' capacity to critically analyse business
situations from a marketing viewpoint;
- to give the students a working understanding of the methods and
concepts of strategy analysis and how these can be applied in
practice;
- to expose the students to a systematic approach to the
development of marketing strategy; and the program decisions
needed to implement the overall marketing strategy;
- to further build students' analytical and communication skills.
Case studies
Case studies form a major part of the course. The emphasis on
business report writing is continued, with more complex reports
required. The major assignment requires the development of a
business report detailing the marketing plan for an organisation using
extensive analytical techniques.
Framework
Introduction to strategic marketing planning.
Experience curve.
Product life cycle.
Portfolio analysis.
PlMS
Marketing Warfare.
Marketing Strategies and programs.
Product decisions.
Pricing decisions.
Advertising and sales promotion.
Distribution.
Marketing planning, controlling marketing programs.
Textbook
Assael. H. Marketing Management: Strategy and Action. Boston: Kent
Publishing Co., 1985
Other supporting material will be prescribed when appropriate. It is
expected that extensive use will be made of library resources.
BQ201 Quantitative Management
Techniques
Prerequisites, SM1471148 Quantitative Analaysis or
equivalent
The unit provides:
- an awareness of a range of quantitative techniques and their application
to a variety of accounting, economic and business
problems;
- an understanding of the interrelationships between quantitative
techniques and the traditional accounting function in an
organisation;
- a basis for a more extensive study of the application of quantitative
analysis in subsequent units.
Emphasis is on the practical solution of specific business problems
and in particular on the recognition, formulation and interpretation
stages of solution. Areas of study will normally include:
- the general problem of resource allocation with emphasis on linear
programming including an introduction to post-optimal analysis;
use of quantitative analysis to plan and control inventory levels;
forecasting, with particular emphasis on short-term product
demand; general approaches to planning and decision-making;
the use of regression analysis in business and economic
forecasting.
Case studies and assignments are an integral part of the course and
are evaluated as part of the overall assessment in the unit. They
include the use of computer packages.
Textbooks
Anderson, M.Q. and Lievano, R.J. Quantitative Management - An
Inhoduction. 2nd edn, Boston U.S.A.: Kent. 1986
Chang, Yih-Long and Sullivan, R.S., QSB+ Quantitative Systems for
Business Plus. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: PrenticeHall International Inc.,
1989
References
To be advised during lectures.
BQ202 Business Forecasting
Prerequisites, SM1471148 Quantitative Analysis AIB
This unit commences by providing participants with an overview of
forecasting techniques and approaches. Following on from this, the
criteria for selection of an appropriate forecasting technique are
examined and detailed consideration is given to the first of the three
main forecasting categories - predictive forecasting, i.e. the sole use
of time to obtain a forecast. These techniques are introduced via case
studies based on a variety of product markets, and include nonadaptive
averaging methods through to the more complex ARlMA and
spectral decomposition techniques. Course participants will, after
successfully completing this unit, be competent users of the main
forecasting techniques dealt with. Considerable use of micro and
mainframe computers will be involved in this unit.
Textbook
Makridakis, S., Wheelwright, S.C. and McGee, V.E. Forecasting
Methods for Management. 4th edn, New York: John Wiley and Sons,
1985
References
A detailed list of texts, journal articles and other reference material
will be made available during the course.
Box. G.E.P. and Jenkins, G.M. Time Series Analysis, Forecasting and
Conhol. Rev. 2nd edn, Oakland, C.A.: Holden-Day, 1976
Firth, M. forecasting Methods in Business and Management. London:
Edward Arnold, 1977
Makridakis, S. and Wheelwright, S.C. Interactive forecasting -
Univarate and Multivariate Methods. 2nd edn, San Francisco: Holden-
Day. 1978
Montgomery, D.C. and Johnson, L.A. forecasting and Time Series
Analysis. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1976
Thomopoulos, N.T. AAppld Forecasting Methods. Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1980

BQ203 Computer Programming and
Packages
Faculty of Business
The unit aims to enable students to understand the development
process for business systems and to apply techniques to the develop
ment of end-user systems The emphasis moves away fmm the 'BT101
Prerequisite, BTlOl Information Technology
Information Technology' aim of understanding the technology, to an
The purpose of this unit is to give students an opportunity to develop
identification and evaluation of the technological solutions which may
to business with microcomputers, using both be applied to business problems. The unit also aims to enhance skills
munication and technical skills in other degree units, in the verbal and written presentation of system studies. The unit is
structured for a study of business computing fmm the user's point of
The unit has both a programming and a packages component. view rather than from the Information Svstems De~artment's.
Programming
Hands-on exercises are used to build upon the practical skills gained
This component is based on using a microcomputer data base pack- in first year, with emphasis on the utllisation and evaluation of business
age such as dBase Ill Plus. Students work in groups to analyse, design packages. Skills previouslv developed with business software packa6d
create a database solution for a smallreal-world requirement. ages will be enhanced a d extended.
Coverage includes:
data gathering;
- analysis techniques;
- data analysis;
- modular design;
- structured programming techniques;
- screen design and handling;
- report design;
- menu driven systems.
Packaaes
~numb=r of microcomputer packages are available for investigation.
Students then use, test and evaluate the packages. The range of soflware
used in the oast includes arwhics, s~readsheets, word processing.
desktop pu'blishing and various accessory packages.
References
Jackson. G.A. Relational Database. Design with Microcomputer
Applications. Englewood Cliffs: Prentlce-Hall, 1988
Robbins, J. and Braly, K. Expert dBase 111Plus. San Francisco: Sybex,
1987
Townsend, C. Mastering dBase Il Plus: A Structured Approach. San
Francisco: Sybex, 1987
BQ204 Marketing Data Management
Prerequisites, SM147 Quantitative Analysis A or SMl48
Quantitative Analysis B and BMlOl The Market~ng
Concept
This unit has been designed to equip students with the techniques
and skills to access and analyse information relevant to the market
research activities of both private and public enterprises.
This unit will:
- introduce students to a number of data archives, public access
databases and videotext tvDe information svstems;
- develop the necessary skilis to access information sources uslng
data management and statistical software on microcomputer, and
in a mainframe comDuter environment;
- extend students' knowledge of statistical methods necessary for
analysis of secondary data.
Textbooks
Norusis. M. J., SPSWfC+ Studentware. Chicago: SPSS Inc., 1988
ISM Users Guide. An Inmduction and Tutorial Guide to ISPE Swinburne
Computer GnGe
CDATA B6, Tutorial Guide
References
Su~erma~ Users Guide and Reference. Melbourne: Space Time
~esearch, 1988
SPSSX User's Guide. 3rd edn. SPSS Inc,. 1988
SAS User's Guide Basics. SAS Institute Inc., 1988
Australian National University Social Science Data Archives. SSDA
Data Catalogue. Canberra: ANU, 1987
Castles, I. The 1986 Census Dictionary. Cat. No. 2174.0 Canberra:
Australian Bureau of Statistics, 1986
BT200
Business Computing
Prerequisite, BTlOl lnformation Technology
This unit is specifically designed for accounting, marketing and
economics-marketing students who want further knowledge of
computer applications but who will not be taking other units from the
computing area.
It is important that students note that this unit does not satisfy the
prerequisite requirements of third-year computing units.
Textbook
To be advised.
References
A detailed reading guide will be issued for each topic and will include
articles from industry purnals and newspapers. Also included will be:
Cushing, B.E. and Romney, M.B. Accounting lnfonnation Systems. 5th
edn, Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1990
Shore, B. Introduction to Computer lnformation Systems. New York:
Holt. Rinehart and Winston, 1988
Wilkinson, J.W. Accounting and lnformation Systems. 2nd edn, New
York: John Wiley, 1986
BT201
lnformation Analysis
Prerequisites, BTl02 lnformation Technology A and
BT103 lnformation Technology B
Models are important tools used by analysts in trying to understand
information systems. This unit examines some of the models
commonly used including:
Dataflow Diagrams
Functional Dependency Diagrams
The Entity Relationship Model
Fact Modelling
They are used to produce pictures which are both simple and effective
in representing either the processes or data required for the
information system.
We can convert these pictures into a form suitable for storing data
in a Relational Database by a process called normalisation.
An introduction to Structural Query Language is given as a means
of extracting data from a Relational Database.
Textbook
To be advised.
References
Howe. D.R. Data Analysis for Database Design. London: Edward
Arnold. 1983
Jackson. G.A. Relational Database Design with Microcomputer
Applications. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1988
McFadden, F. and Hoffer, J. Database Management. 2nd edn, Menlo
Park: Benjamin Cummings, 1988
Nijssen. G. and Halpin. T. Conceptual Schema and Relational
Database Design. N.Y.: Prentice-Hall, 1989
Yourdon, E. Modern Structured Analysis and Design. Prentice-Hall
International. 1989
BT202 Commercial Programming
Prerequisite, BTlOl lnformation Technology or BT102
lnformation Technology A and BT103 lnformation
Technology B
Unit obiectives
To give siudents an understanding of the principles and practice of
commercial programming.
By the end of the course, the student will be able to:
- describe the programming process, from problem definition
through to program testing;
- discuss the principles of structured programming;
- explain the importance and philosophy of testing;
- design a logical structured solution to a problem using various
algorithm techniques;
- read, understand, modify, and debug COBOL programs;
- design, write, test, and document attractive, well-structured
programs in COBOL.

Topics covered include the following:
program structure;
data structure;
algorithm design;
data validation;
arrays and tables;
sequential files;
reporting;
indexed files;
strings;
- testing.
Textbook
Stem. N. and Stern. RA. StructuredCoboI Programming. 6th edn, New
York: Wiley. 1990
References
Grauer, R.' Structured Cobol Programming. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1985
Juliff. I? Program Design. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Topping, A.L. and Gibbons. I.L. Programming Logic: Structured Design.
Chicago: SRA. 1985
BT203 Data Base Management Systems
Prerequisites, BT201 lnformation Analysis and BT202
Commercial Programming
Unit objectives
By the end of this unit the student will be able to:
1. Implement a logical data base design in a selection of DBMSs.
2. Design and program transactions against the data base.
3. Include appropriate security, integrity and recovery functions in
the above.
To~ics
Thrs unit builds upon the lwical design concepts taught in lnformation
Analysis in covedng the implementaiion, consideratbns of a number
of DBMSs. The studem' acauaintance with SOL from that unit is also
built upon in the coverage bf Relational Data Bases.
Textbook
Shepherd, J.C. Database Management: Theory and Application. 1st
edn. NSW: Irwin, 1990
References
Date, C.J. An Introduction to Database Systems. 5th edn, Reading,
Massachussets: Addison-Wesley, 1990
Kroenke, D. Database Pmessing. 3rd edn, Sydney: SRA, 1988
McFadden, F.R. and Hoffer. J.A. Data Base Management. 2nd edn,
Menlo Park, California: Benjamin/Cummings, 1988
BT204 Data Communications
Prerequisites. BT201 lnformation Analysis and BT202
Commercial Programming
Unit objectives
At the completion of this unit, students will be able to:
- demonstrate a sound knowledge of the basic concepts and components
involved in data communications;
- demonstrate an understanding of the various technologies used
in the electronic office and how office automation can increase
the efficiency of knowledge workers;
- demonstrate an understanding of communication protocols and
their relation to system performance;
- demonstrate an understanding of the goals and structure of the
IS0 reference model for computer network protocols;
- show a good knowledge of the data communication services and
facilities provided by the common carriers;
- demonstrate an understanding of how data communications
benefits an organisation and how this function is managed.
Textbook
Housley. T. Data Communications and Teleprocessing Systems. 2nd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Ma'or Reference
Stallings. W Business Data Communications. New York: Macmillan.
1990
Supplementary References
Black. U.D. Data Communications Networks and Distributed
Processing. Virginia. Reston. 1983
Gibson, H.L. and Radernacher, R.A. Automated Office Systems. New
York: Holt Rinehart and Winston, 1986
Halsall. F. Data Communications, Computer Networks and OSI. 2nd
edn, Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, 1988
Stamper, D.A. Business Data Communications. 2nd edn, Redwood:
Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co., 1989
BT205 Knowledge Based Systems
Prerequisite. 81201 lnformation Analysis and experience
in at least one programming language.
A knowledge of LOTUS 1-2-3 and dBASE would also be useful.
In this unit the students develop an understanding of the nature and
uses of expert systems in business. The unit involves practical work
using the expert system building tools, VP-Expert and ESE.
A second-year elective in the degree course in Computing.
Topics covered
- what expert systems are, how they are developed and who is using
them. ..-. ..,
- how expert systems differ from conventional software programs,
human beinas who oerform tasks exoertlv and artificial intelliaence
- . * -
programs;
- various forms of knowledge representation;
principles of frame-based systems;
- basic concepts of artificial intelligence and knowledge engineering
that affect design and implementation;
knowledge base design;
- evolutionary process of knowledge acquisition needed to put
expertise into a machine;
- principles of rule based systems and induction systems;
- handling of uncertainty;
inference;
- VP-Expert (on PC) and ESE (on IBM mainframe);
- comparative strengths and weaknesses of existing knowledge
enaineerina tools for end users and orolessional develo~ers:
- thepitfalls>nd opportunities that arise from the importatit need
to evaluate artificial expertise;
computers and natural language;
- introduction to neural networks.
Textbooks
Harmon, I? and Sawyer, B. Creating Expert Systems for Business and
industry. New York: Wiley, 1990
Harmon, I? and King. D. Expert Systems: Artificial Intelligence in
Business. New York: Wiley, 1985
References
Friederich, S. and Gargano, M. Expert Systems Design and
Development Using VP-Expert. N.Y.: John Wiley, 1989
Gero. J. et al. (University of NSW). Expert Systems and their
Applications, (audio-visual), Sydney: Uni. of N.S.W., 1986
Harrts and Davis. Artificial lntelliaence Enters the Marketplace.
Middlesex: Bantam Books, 1986 -
Manasi, M. Expert Systems for a Rainy Day. Al-Expert (ISSN 74470
19557). February 1990, pp. 13-15
Rauch-Hindin. W.B. A Guide to Commercial Artificial Intelligence.
Enalewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. 1988
silverman, B.GI Expert systems for Business. Massachussetts:
Addison-Wesley, 1987
BC300 Accounting Theory
Although there are no formal prerequisites for accounting theory, it
is preferable that the unit be studied in the final year of the course.
The objectives of this unit are:
- to examine the development of the theory of accounting and the
methodology used by accounting theorists;
- to describe and critically analvse a framework of accountina
concepts including asseis, liabilities and income;
-
- to use the methodoloav and the framework develooed in the unlt
to study some sped6 issues in financial accouritina includina
deferred tax accounting, various inflation accounting system<
intanaibles. accountina standards develooment and foreion

Although the subiect is concerned with theow, considerable use is
made d practical broblems in parts of the course. These are designed
to ~llustrate the alternative techniques available while the theorettcal
framework is used to evaluate and choose between the alternatives.
Textbook
Henderson, S. and Peirson, G. Issues in Financial Accounting. 4th edn.
Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1988
References
Belkaoui, A. Accounting Theoy 2nd edn, San Diego: Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich Inc.. 1981
Henderson, S. and Peirson, G. Fhancial Accounting Theoryl Its Nature
and Development. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1983
Hendriksen. E.S. Accountina - Theow. 4th edn. Homewood. Ill: Richard
D. Irwin, 19k2
Mathews. M.R. and Perera, M. Accounting Theory and Development.
Melbourne: Thomas Nelson. 1991
Whlbred. G. and Zimmsr. I ~~nancial Accounting Incentive Elfects and
Economic Consequences. 2nd edn, Sydney Hdt Rlnehart & Winston.
BC304 Auditing
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit are expected
to have passed BC201 Corporate Accounting
The broad objective of this subject is to familiarise students with the
underlying concepts, objectives and reporting function of the auditor.
The unit deals with both theoretical and practical aspects of auditing.
The aim is to integrate the concepts of auditing with practical
approaches taken by the auditor to ensure students gain a complete
picture of the audit process.
Theoretical toplcs studled Include audltlng methodology and the formulat~on
of aud~tlno standards. aud~t ~ndependence, aud~t ev~dence, the
rights, duties ana legal liability of audiiors; the audit report and the
concept of truth and brness, Internal control The varlous approaches
to the sufflclencv of aud~t ev~dence; computer audits, Internal and management
audits and materiality.
References
Arens, Lwbbecke. Best and Shailer. Auditing in Australia. An Integrated
Approach. Sydney: Prentice-Hall of Australia, 1990
Gill. G.S. and Cosserat, G.W. Modern Auditing in Australia. 2nd edn
Australian, Brisbane: Wiley, 1989
Pound, G., Willingham, J.J. Carmichael, D.R. Australian Auditing. 2nd
edn, Sydney: McGraw-Hill, 1988
BC305 Budgeting
Students enrolled for this unit will be expected to have
passed BC202 Cost Accounting and BC203
Management Accounting, or BC206 Management
Accounting 1 and BC207 Management Accounting 2
This is a final year unit designed to develop and integrate the planning,
control and decision-making techn~ques and skills introduced in cost
accountina. manaaement accounting and financial management.
Budgeting 1s explored uslng a strategic cost analysis framework.
Trad~rional oractice is nuestioned .~~~ and alternative aooroaches
-
evaluated. the ,miact of modern manufacturing technbiogy and
challenging economic and competitive conditions are considered.
Budgetary planning and control in manufacturing, non-manufacturing
and non-profit organisations is covered, with reference to the
application of techniques to particular case studies.
Textbooks
Parker, L.D. Ferris, K.R. and Otley. D.T Accounting for the Human
Factor Sydney: PrenticeHall, 1989
Shank, J.K. and Govlndarajan, V. Strategic Cost Analysis. Prentice-
Hall. 1988 or Boston: Irwin, 1989
References
Dearden. J. Management Accounting. Prentice-Hall, 1988
Welsch, C.A., Hilton, RW and Gorelon, RW Budgeting ProfitPlanning
and Control. 5th edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1988
Faculty of Business
BC306 Taxation
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit are expected
to have passed BC201 Corporate Accounting
The overall course objective is to develop in students an understanding
of the lncome Tax Assessment Act, 1936, as amended, together with
those acts which are complementary to the Assessment Act.
Specifically, the course will:
- familiarise students with recent court and Administrative Appeals
Tribunal decisions in the area of income taxation;
- develop research skills in students in relation to current and
landmark taxation cases;
- introduce students to the complexities of taxation in relation to
various taxable entiiies;
- with the aid of income tax rullngs and the aforementioned tax
cases, develop in students an understanding of the basic concepts
of income, capital, and the rules governing deductions;
- provide for students intending a career in public accounting a basic
grounding in taxation law. It is recommended these students also
complete BC308 Advanced Taxation.
Topics covered include: the nature of assessaMe income, capital gains
tax, fringe benefits tax. allowable deductions and the provisions
relating to companies, partnerships, and individuals.
Textbooks
Austmlran lncome Tax Assessment Acf 1936, 1992 edn. CCH Australia
Ltd .
1992 Australian Master Tax Guide. CCH Australia Ltd.
Lehmann. G. and Coleman, C. Taxation Law in Australia. Sydney:
Bunerworths, 1991
References
Australian Federal Tax Reporte,: CCH Australia Ltd.
O'Grady, G.W. and O'Rouke, K.J. Ryan's Manual ofthe Law of lncome
Tax in Austfaralia. 7th edn, Law Book Company, 1989
Wallschutzk I G Ausiralian Income Tax Law. 2nd edn, Brisbane: John
Wiley and &&is.
1988
BC308 Advanced Taxation
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit will be
expected to have passed BC306 Taxation
This unit is a final year unit designed for students who require
additional experience of taxation issues. The objective of the unit is
to acquaint students with the areas of taxation of practical utility by
concentrating on the taxation implications of various taxable entities,
in particular, companies, unincorporated entities, trusts, superannuation
funds and primary producers. In addition the unit will address
in detail, the capital gains tax and fringe benefits tax. Students will
be expected to develop a research-oriented problem-solving approach
to the unit which includes the following specific topics:
- issues of assessable income and allowable deductions;
- unincorporated entities;
- part IVA and tax avoidance;
-- trusts, beneficiaries and children's income;
- superannuation funds;
primary producers;
current developments in taxation;
capital gains tax;
fringe benefits tax;
- administrative provisions;
- tax planning.
References
CCH Australia. Australian Federal Tax Reporter: Vols. 1-9. CCH Aust.
Ltd.
CCH Australia. Australian Tax Cases. CCH Aust. Ltd.
CCH Australia. Australian Master Tax Guide. CCH Aust. Ltd. 1990
lncome Tax Assessment Act (Latest edn)

BC311 Financial Manaaement 1 The objectives of Financial Accounting are:
"
prereqUisities, enrolled in this unit will be
- to study in depth some of the more advanced issues and problems
expected to have passed BC201 Corporate Accounting, from areas introduced in Corporate Accounting;
~ ~ ~ M~~~~~~~~~ ~ ~ ~ i t ~ and ~ BC206 ~ i - h ~
to make
~
students
~
aware
i
of a selection
~
of contemporary
~ ~
financial
~
Management Accounting 1
accounting issues and to study these issues from both theoretical
and practical viewpoints;
The objectives of this unit are:
- to apply the conceptual framework studied in Accounting Theory
- to provide students with an understanding of the concepts of in evaluation of the abovementioned contem~orarv . . financial
accounting issues.
Course content
The conceptual framework: accounting information and share prices;
aspects of group accounting; accounthg for government enterprises;
debt defeasance, cash flow accountlng, flnanclal forecasts, tax effect
corporate finance;
- to develop in students the skills of analysis and evaluation needed
to apply the concepts of corporate finance to financial
management.
The course is structured from the point of view of orientating the
student to the fundamentals of managing the financial aspects of a
business and covers the following specific topics:
- concepts of valuation;
- evaluation and selection of investment projects;
- cost of capital;
- working capital management;
- sources of finance and financial intermediaries;
- dividend policy;
- financing methods and impact on capital structure;
- financial statement analysis;
- current developments in finance.
Textbook
Peirson, G., Bird. R., Brown, R. and Howard, I? Business Finance. 5th
edn. Sydney: McGraw-Hill, 1991
References
Bishop. S.R., Crapp, H.R. and Twite, G.J. Corpwate Finance. 2nd edn,
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1988
Bruce. R., McKern, B.. Pdlard, I. and Skully, M. Handbookof Aostralian
Corporate Finance. 3rd edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1989
Van Horne. J.. Davis. K.. Nicol. R. and Wright. K. Financial
~anagement and policy in ~ustralia. 3rd edn, ~ejbourne: Prentice-
Hall. 1990
BC312 Financial Management 2
No prerequisites but strongly recommended that
students should have completed or be concurrently
enrolled in BC311 Financial Management 1.
The purpose of this unit is to help participants learn how to manage
their money and develop the skills to be better able to advise others
In managlng thelr Investments To accomplish thls purpose ~t 1s necessarv
to learn about the Investment alternatives available todav and
moreimportant, to develop a way of thinking about investments that
will remain in the years ahead when new investment opportunities
arise as a result of the inevitable changes to our financial system.
More specifically, the course objectives are:
- to acquaint participants with the various avenues for the investment
of funds, including shares, fixed-interest securities and
property;
- to review the impact of taxation on investment planning;
- to consider the fundamental principles of modern portfolio theory;
- to consider the process of portfolio selection and ongoing investment
strategies;
- to review the characteristics of financial futures and options and
how they may be used to modify the risk-return profile of
investment portfolios.
References
Carew, E. Fast Money 3. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1991
Reilly, F.K. Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management. 2nd edn,
Chicago: Dryden Press. 1985
Sharpe, W.F. Investments. 3rd edn, Englewwd Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-
Hall International. 1985
BC313
Financial Accounting
Prerequisites, BC201 Corporate-~ccountin~ and BC300
Accounting Theory
This unit is most relevant to students planning to enter (or already in)
the employment fields of chartered accounting or financial accounting
in industry.
- - -
accountlng, accountlng and ethlcs, and reaulatlon
The syllabus is flexible to allow new financial accounting issues which
gain momentum to replace topics of less relevance.
References
Henderson, M.S. and Peirson, G. Issues in Financial Accounting. 4th
edn, Melbourne: Longman Cheshire. 1988
Leo, K.J., Lambert, C.J. and Sweeting. J.W. Advanced Company
Accounting. Milton: Wiley, 1991
Various current Exposure Drafts and Standards Issued by the
Australian Accounting Research Founaation and the Accounting
Standards Review Board.
BC314 EDP Auditing
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit will be
expected to have passed 80304 Auditing
This unit presumes familiarity with the subject matter of BS304 Auditing.
It should be most useful for those students planning to enter the
profession.
The objective of the unlt IS to provlde students wlth an understanding
of the orlncloles of the aud~t of Comouterlsed Accountlna lnformat~on
systems anb the application of staiistical and analytic; techniques
In the audit context.
The topics to be studied include:
- the study of the principles of auditing with specific reference to
computerised accounting information systems;
- EDP audit techniques;
statistical sampling techniques;
analytical review techniques;
- audit related causes for company failures.
The subiect makes extensive use of audit oriented software . packaqes. -
References
Best, P.J. and Barren, P.G. Auditing Computer Based Accounting
Systems. Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1983, ,
Watne. D.A. anti Turney, P.B.B. Aud~tmg EDP Systems. 2nd edn.
Englewood Cliffs. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Weber, R. (eds.) EDP Auditing Conceptual Foundations and Practice.
2nd edn. McGraw Hill, 1988
Current journals
BE301 Public Finance
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This unit involves an analysis of the economic rationale of government
expenditure and revenue raising. It will cover the following topics:
- an introduction to the welfare economics and public choice paradigms
and their implications for public sector revenue and
exoenditure:
- taktlon analysis, crlterla for evaluating taxes and commonwealth
and - - state ..- - tax svstems analvsls of ~ersonal and corporate Income
~
tax consumptibn andcapital qai& and wealth taxes; subsidies
to producers and consumers;taxes on the factors of production
and proposals for reform of the Australian tax system;
- techniques for evaluating government expenditure programs (with
particular emphasis on cost-benefit analysis).
References
Brown, C.V. and Jackson, P.M. Public Sector Economics. 3rd edn,
Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1986
Groenewegen, P. Public Finance in Australia, Theory and Practice. 3rd
edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Musgrave, R.A. and Musgrave, P.B. Public Finance in Theory and
Practice. 5th edn, New York: McGraw-HIII, 1989

BE302 Economic Research
Prerequisites, BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis or
BE202 lndustry and Government
The intention in this unit is to broaden students' familiarity with the
nature and scope of research undertaken in economics, and to
increase students' abilitv to analvse and canv out economic research
of a practical nature.
Bpics may include: methodology in economic research; data sources;
cdlection, analysis and presentation of de; selected topics in applied
economic research (economic model building, cost-benefit analysis.
industry studies, aspects of industrial relations).
An integral part of this unit is a major research project. Students are
expected to conduct an investigation and write a report on their
research which will constitute a major proportion of the assessment
in this unit.
References
There is no sln le prescribed reference for this course, but extensive
use is made orcurrent journal articles.
BE304
lnternational Economics
Prerequisites. BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
This unit rovides a study of international finance and trade with
special rekrence to Australia. Top~cs covered include:
Australia's External Position
- Balance of Payments - concepts, trends and outlook
- External Debt
Foreign Exchange Markets
Exchange rate determination
- Fixed versus floating exchange rate mechanisms
- Foreign exchange risk management
The lnternational Financial System
Events since 1945
- lnternational financial centres
- Current outlook and problems
The Basis of lntemational Trade
- Gains from trade
- Explanations of trade patterns
- Australia's trade pattern
Trade Restrictions
- Arguments for pmtection
- Costs of pmtection
- Policy instruments
Trade. Growth and Economic Development
- R ional Integration
- G%
- Policies relating to trade and growth
Australia's Trade and lndustry Policies
- Past approaches to industry assistance
- Current issues and problems
- Improving Australia's international competitiveness.
References
Kreinin. M. lnternational Economics - A Micy Approach. 6th edn.
New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991
Lindert, P.H. International Economics. 9th edn, Homewood, Ill: Irwin,
1991
Manuell, G. Floating Down Under - Fomign Exchange in Australia.
Sydney: The Law Book Co. Ltd., 1986
BE305
Urban Economics
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
In this unit, students dye!op an analytical approach to appraising
urban problems and pollcles. While the emphasls IS on economlc
analysis, part of the course is devoted to discussing sociological and
town planning perspectives of urban problems. The unit covers the
following broad areas: urban location decis~ons, government and
private mles in urban development, hous~ng, transport, and human
resource delivery.
References
Beed, C.S. Melbourne's Development and Planning. Melbourne:
Clewara Press, 1981
Neutze. M. Australian Unban Pblicy Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1978
Faculty of Business
BE306 Economics of Social Issues
Prerequisites. BE201 Managerial Economic Analysis or
BE202 lndustry and Government or BE204 Economic
Evaluation
This wurse examines both the uses and limitations of orthodox economic
theory in understanding many of the important social, economic
and political issues that are current in Australia today. In so doing the
course will further students' understanding of the mles of both
business and government in furthering society's objectives.
Issues considered will bedrawn from: the distribution of income, wealth
and poverty, the incidence of unemployment, and the roles of private
enterprise and government in the provision of healthcare, education,
transport. energy and environmental protection.
The unit endeavours to teach students the theory and principles
needed to be able to analyse social issues from an economic
perspective.
Textbaak .-..-- -. Because of the contemporary nature of the unit no textbook is set.
Comprehensive reference lists will be provided.
BE307 lnternational Finance
Prerequisites. BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
The intention in this unit is to provide students with the theoretical and
analytical skills necessarv for the understandina and evaluation of
inteinational financial issues which are of importance to the Australian
business community and government.
Topics covered include:
- The lnternational Financial Environment
- Australia's External Position
Exchange Rate Theories and Systems
- The Operation of Foreign Exchange Markets
- The lnternational Financial System
Global Financial Markets
- lnternational Banking
References
Allan, R., Elstone, R., Lock, G. and Valentine, T. Foreign Exchange
Management. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1990
Juettner. D.J. International Finance and Global Finance Markets.
Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1989
Madura. J. International Financial Management. 2nd dn. St. Paul:
West Publishing $., 1989
Manuell, G. Floatrng Down Under - Foreign Exchange in Australia.
Sydney: The Law Book Co., 1986
BE308 lnternational Trade
Prerequisites. BE102 Economics 1A and BE103
Economics 1B
The objectives of this unit are:
- to provide and understanding of the nature and significance - of
international trade to the Ausralian economy;
- to increase awareness of current international trade issues of
importance to the AusEralian business community and government;
- to equip students to appreciate and evaluate the ways in which
government and business can improve Australia's international
competitiveness.
Topics covered include:
lnternational Trade and the Australian Economy
- balance of payments;
- composition and direction of trade
- Australia's place in world trade.
lnternational Trade and Trade Restrictions
basis of trade and gains fmm trade;
- explanations of trade patterns;
- regional trading blocs.
Improving Australia's lnternational Competitiveness
- trade restrictions - nature, reasons and effects;
- industry policy issues (e.g. level playing field debate,
microeconomic reform)
- the business perspective -obstacles and strategies for success;
- the role of government.
References
Australian Manufacturing Council. The Global Challenge: Australian
Manufacturing in the 1990's. Melbourne: AMC, 1990
Economic Planning Advisor Council. lmproving Australia's
ln@yational Competithmess. & nberra: AGPS, 1991
Krelnln. M. lnternational Economics - A Pblicy Approach. 6th edn,
New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991
Lindert, P.H. lnternational Economics. 9th edn, Illinois. Irwin, 1991

Financial lnstitutions and
Monetary Policy
Prerequisites, BE102 Economics 1A and
BE103 Economics 1B
Objectives
To provide students with:
- an up-to-date view of Australian financial markets in an
international context;
- an appreciation of the nature and workings of the Australian
monetary system and changes in this system.
Course outline
- Deregulated financial markets - causes, nature and implications;
- the Reserve Bank and its policies in a deregulated market;
- monetary policy developments, its applications and an evaluation
of current monetary policy.
Textbooks
Moore, D. Financial Institutions and Markets. 2nd edn, Wamberal:
Serendi~ Publications. 1990
BE303 ~onetary Economics Course Booklet
References
Bruce. R., McKern, B. and Pollard, I. Handbook of Australian Corporate
Finance. 3rd edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1989
Juettner, D.J. and Valentine, T. (eds) The Economics and Management
of Financial Institutions. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1987
Lewis, M.K. and Wallace, R. (eds) Australia's Financial Institutions and
Markets. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1985
Mishkin, F. The Economics of Money Banking and Financial Markets.
2nd edn. Glenview, Ill: Scott Foresman and Co.. 1989
BH301 Organisation Behaviour 2
082 is an elective subject desi ned to extend your knowledge base
and personal skills in the field o?group and organisational behaviour.
The subject departs from traditional formats in that it is studentcentred,
group-based and active. Study will focus primarily on the 082 group
itself, functioning as an organisation in its own right: its composition,
resources, collective skills and patterns of relationships. Apart from
participating in discussions and experiential exercises, students will
be encouraged to take initiative in designing, implementing and
evaluating a personalised learning program through the use of a
Learning Contract.
Textbooks and References
Fisher, R. and Ury, W. Gefring to Yes. London: Hutchinson, 1982
O'Connor, F? Understanding Jung, Understanding Yourseff. North Ryde:
Methuen, 1985
Other readings will be given to participants during the course
BH302 Human Resource Management
Prerequisite, BHlOl Organisations and Management
The human resources of an organisation are one of its major assets
and the focus of th~s unit is on the understanding and management
of those resources through the application of appropriate techniques,
functions and management approaches.
The unlt alms to enable students to understand the nature and Importance
of human resources as an orqanlsat~onal asset and to orovlde
a knowledge of the theories, techn'Gues and approaches to dealing
with people-related problems and issues.
The unit covers:
- the nature and Importance of human resources;
staffing the organisation;
- basic interviewing and counselling skills;
analysing, evaluating and compensating work;
- analysing and improving the work environment;
- training and developing people;
- establishing and maintaining effective employee relations;
- managing change.
This subject may include some class work in the Management
Behaviour Laboratory, where activities may be observed andlor
recorded. The Code of Ethics requires students to sign a consent document
at the beginning of the semester. Any further queries about this
matter should be directed to the subject convener.
References
Flippo. E.B. Personnel Management. 6th edn, New York: McGraw-Hill,
1984
McCarthv. T.E. and Stone. R.J. Personnel Manaaement in Australia.
~risbank Wiley, 1986
Schuler, R.S., Dowling, PJ. and Smart, J.P. PersonnelVHuman Resource
Management in Australia. Sydney: Harper & Row, 1988
BH303 Asian Business
Prerequisite, all first year units completed
Overall objective
The objective of this course is for students to have a thorough
understanding of the culture of a particular country and of the impact
of this on business practices in that country. The country selected may
vary from year to year.
This unit entails students attending lectures at Swinburne Institute of
Technoloqv and travellina to a selected Asian country for a period of
approximately 3 weeks. During their stay they will atiend lectures at
a local universitv on culture and on asoects of management relevant
to that country. in addition, students will visit a number of factories,
representatives of Important local lndustrles, and other workplaces
At the end of the vlslt. students will comolete a reoort on thew vls~t
which will be assessed.
Students should note that it is possible to undertake only one of these
units as part of their degree.
Unit objective
By the end of this unit, students should have:
- acquired knowledge of local customs, values, attitudes and beliefs
of Asian and Western countries in general and the host country
in particular;
- gained at first hand, experience of the host country's business
practices;
- gained a comparative knowledge of business systems and
practices used in the host country and Australia.
1992 Study Tours
In 1992, two units will be offered. Asian Business (Thailand) will involve
a three week trio to Thailand in February 1992 and Asian Business
(Korea) will involve three weeks in ~orea in July 1992
Teaching method
A range of methods will be used, including: lectures, seminars,
industry, and market place visits in the host country. Travel costs to
be borne by students.
Textbook
Because of the nature of the unit no textbook is set
References
Comprehensive reference lists will be provided.
BL301 Advanced Company Law
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit are expected
to have passed BL202 Law of Business Organisations
The unit is designed to acquaint students with various contemporary
issues in company law, especially relevant to a future Dublic practice
In accounting The course examcnes current toplcs In such areas as
the const~tutlonal and ~urlsd~ctlonal framework of comoanv law
company direction and management, company conflict, compaiy mis:
feasance, company finance and company takeover activity. In recent
years the course has focused substantially on company takeovers.
Textbook
CCH Australia Ltd. Australian Corporation & Securities Legislation.
(Latest edn), Sydney: CCH Australia Ltd.
References
Gillies, P The New Company Law Sydney: Federation Press, 1989
Lipton, I? and Herzberg. A. Understanding Company Law. 4th edn,
Sydney: Law Book Co.. 1991
Detailed references to journal articles will be given to students.
BL302 International Marketing and the Law
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit are expected
to have passed BL201 Contract Law or BL203 Marketing
and the Law
The purpose of the unit is to consider the legal aspects of international
trade emphasising the following topics:
- international contracts of sale of goods, including a study of trade
terms, performance of the contract, acceptance and rejection of
goods, and the rlghts of the unpaid seller and buyer;
- the proper law of a contract and jurlsd~ctlon to determine disputes.
- flnanclna and Insurance lnvolved In exoort sales the role of tarlffs
and prokction policies;
- methods of transportation and distribution of goods and the legal
principles relating thereto;
- international conventions for the protection of industrial property;
- international franchising;
- international intellectual property.

Textbook
Starke, J.G. Introduction to lnternational Law. 10th edn, Sydney:
Butterworths. 1989
References
Campbell, D. and Rohwer, C. (eds) Legal Aspects of lnternational
Business Transactions: the Edinburgh Inst. on lnternational Business
Transactions, 1983. Amsterdam: Elsevier Science, 1984
Hoyle, M.S.W. The Law of lnternational 7iade. 2nd edn, Bicester: CCH
Editions, 1985
O'Keefe, PJ. and Tedeschi, M.A. The Law of lnternational Business
in Australia. Sydney: Butterworths, 1980
BL303
Employment Law
Prerequisite, BLlOl Legal Environment of Business
The general objective IS to assess the Impact of law upon the relationshlo
of emolover and em~lovee . . The followlnq matters are analysed
in ihis unii: *
(a) the contract of employment - formation of the contraa of employment
includina discrimination and compulsory unionism, distinguishing
an etiployee from an independent contractor, the terms
of the contract of employment, common law remedies for wrongful
termination;
(b) the arbitration system - the structure of the Australian Arbitration
Svstem. the constitutional context, the svstem in o~eration in
i&iling'disputes and making awards.
(c) industrial conflict - penal powers under the arbitration system,
deregistration, common law liability for industrial action, statutory
liability for industrial action;
(d) occupational health and safety - the role of law in occupational
health and safetv. common law remedies, the Victorian Worker's
Compensation system, the prevention of industrial accidents.
References
Creighton, B. and Stewart, A. Labour Law - An Introduction.
Annandale, N.S.W.: Federation Press, 1990
Macken. J., McCarry, G. and Sappideen, C. The Law of Employment.
3rd edn, Sydney: Law Book Co., 1990
McCallum. R., Pittard, M. and Smith, G. Australian Labour Law.
2nd edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1990
Punch. P Law of Employment in Australia. North Ryde: CCH Australia
Ltd., 1989
BL304
Finance and Credit Law
Prerequisite, students enrolled in this unit will be
expected to have passed BL201 Contract Law
The objective of the unit is to extend and develop the principles of
contract by studying the following areas. The financing of contractual
obligations, the alternative methods of securing financial obligations
and the insuring of property acquired pursuant to contract. By analysing
these areas students will develop an awareness of problems
associated with presently employed credit, security and insurance
practices and any consequent need for reform.
References
No one textbook covers all the relevant areas of study. Reading
materials and reading lists will be made available to students.
Faculty of Business
BM303 Marketing of Services
Prerequisite, BM206 Marketing Strategy
The services business is the fastest growing sector nationally as well
as globally. This unit explores the major differences between the
marketing of services as distinct from product marketing, and aims
at providing students with special skills required to develop marketing
strategies in service businesses.
Framework
Distinctive aspects of service marketing.
Consumer behaviour in the service industry.
Soecial imolementation Droblems in the service industry.
6vestigatlng a servlce industry of your choice (e.g. financial services.
hospltal services, insurance industry, catering services, etc.).
Method of instruction
Refer BM205 Market Behaviour and BM206 Marketing Strategy.
Reference
Lovelock, C.H. Services Marketing. Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice-
Hall, 1984
BM304 Advanced Marketing Research
Prerequisites, BM206 Marketing Strategy;
BM203 Marketing Research; and
BQ204 Marketing Data Management or
BE205 Economic Techniques for Business
Objectives
This unit is designed to provide marketing and economics-marketing
students with a basic preparation for a career in market research, either
as a specialist buyer or a provider.
Framework
Two streams may be offered.
1. Quantitative
Study design.
Applications of attitude measurement to marketing problems.
Factor analysis.
Multi-dimensional scaling.
Cluster analysis.
Automatic interaction detection.
Discriminant analysis.
Conjoint analysis.
New product research.
Data base systems.
Monetary and evaluation of research.
2. Qualitative
Indepth interviews.
Focus groups.
Method of instruction
In addition to standard lectures. extensive use will be made of auest
lecturers drawn from the market research industry. Group assignments,
presentations and log book submission will also be important aspects
of learnina. The aualitative research will use the facilities of the Swinburne
~anagement Laboratory.
BM302 Business Cases
Textbook -
Prerequisite, BM206 Marketing Strategy
Details will be provided at the first session
This unit is concerned with how business and non-business organisations
make and carry out decisions. Business Cases is a challenging
course as students are given an opportunity to apply their knowledge
of marketing, as well as the various other units which make up the
Bachelor of Business, to practical situations.
Objectives
BM305 Retail Marketing
To enable students to interrelate the disciplines taught at the various
Prerequisites, EM206 Marketing Strategy and BM203
stages of their studies; to give students an overview of how an organ-
Marketing Research
isation functions; to give students an o~~ortunity to develop and Prac- Retail Marketing is an elective unit in the marketing stream of the
tice their analytical and communication skills.
Bachelor of Business.
Framework
Unit objectives
The course deals with the planning and implementation of strategy. -rhe unit aims to an overview of retailing from a management
Major topics include: the setting of objectives; analysis of the present wrspective by providing a range of skills not in other
position; strategy formulation; strategy implementation.
units but which are oarticularlv relevant to retailina - in Australia in the
Means of achieving objectives 1990s.
Emphasis is placed on the appreciation of strategy concepts, hence Topics
the analysis of case studies and the Use of fnanCiget'nent games are - the retail environment in Australia;
important aspects of the course. Students may also be given the OPPor-
major changes occurring in retailing overseas;
tunity to investigate a real life businesslnon-business problem. - planning the retail marketing mix;
References
- the role of research in retailing;
To be adv~sed.

location decisions;
the role of the retail buyer;
retail buyer behaviourr
merchandising strategies;
- franchising.
Textbooks
To be advised.
References
To be advised.
81111306 Advertising and Media Planning
Prerequisites, BM206 Marketing Strategy and BM203
Marketing Research
This unit is an elective subject for the degree course in Business.
Unit objectives
This is not a course about how to create advertisements. It is not a
course in headline writing, television direction, typography, radio production
or any of the other wide range of creative skills which contribute
to the success of any advertising company.
This unit is about the underlvina Drocess of advertising; it is about
the principles which are involvd h developing sound advertising strategies
and effective exscutions of these strategies.
Topics
introduction to advertising;
the communication process;
planning the advertising budget;
inside an advertising agency;
advertising media issues;
public relations and publicity;
sales promotion;
direct marketing;
international advertising;
- evaluating advertising effectiveness.
Textbook
Govoni, N., Eng, R. and Galper. M. Promotional Management.
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1986
Reference
Govoni, N., Eng, R. and Galper. M. Promotional Management: Issues
and Perspectives. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1988
BM309 Product Management
Prerequisites, BM203 Marketing Research and BM206
Marketing Strategy
The course 'Product Management' is a third year unit in the Bachelor
of Business undergraduate degree course.
Unit objective
Students enrolling in this subject come prepared with an understanding
of basic marketing concepts, from first year studies, that have in
tum been enriched at second year level with the subjects Market Behaviour
and Marketing Strategy.
The objective of this unit is to enable students to apply their marketing
knowledge to the specific area of Product Management. Within this
bmad unit objective, there are a number of specific objectives. These
specific objectives address the unit from the management approach,
that is to say, with a lesser emphasis on other approaches such as
economic, technical or purely creative. These areas are not ignored
but they are treated as contributory disciplines.
Specific objectives
- to explore the meaning, importance and function of the product
management role In buslness today;
- to examine the ranae of concept-aeneratinq techniques used for
new product development; ' -
to examine the means of evaluating new product ideas;
- to examine the preparation of a product, or product launch plan
and its importance as a marketing control tool for new products.
product maintenance and product 're-launches';
- to understand the ~mpocance of:
product positioning w~thin the target marketing process
brandina
packagi;g
and the importance of successful working relationships with advertisina.
marketing. research. ~romotion aaencies, etc. in the product
- lo understand the importance of successful working relations
within the organisation, particularly with sales, production, supply
and research and development, in the product development
process.
Textbook
Crawford, C. M. New Products Management. 3rd edn, Illinois: Irwin,
1991
BM312 lnternational Marketing
Prerequisite, BM206 Marketing Strategy
The purpose of the unit is to ensure that students are aware of the
basics of international marketing operations - exporting, importing.
licensing, foreign exchange, and marketing functions, and of the
special features of world economic, social and political environment
in which companies function. Even domestic companies with no
lnternational marketlng operations are affected by many developments
In the lnternatlonal environment and should understand them
Innovation and technology are inherent aspects of this unit, and the
integration of knowledge and skills from the other business units is
seen to be useful for understanding lnternational Marketing.
Specific objectives include:
(a) to prov/de a framework for International marketlng and for the role
of the marketer in an international setting:
(b) to raise awareness of the opportunities in international trade
(particularly export) and to examine some of the obstacles;
(c) to examine some of the most unusual aspects of the economic
environment of the international operator;
(d) to enable students to understand the special nature of
international marketing and the social and cultural difference in
the international environment that influences its operations.
References
Cateora, P.R. lnternational Marketing. lnternational edn, Homewood,
Ill: Invin. 1990
Jeannet, J.P. lnternational Marketing Management Strategies and
Cases. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1988
BT301
Systems Development Strategies
Prerequisites, BT203 Data Base Management Systems
and BT204 Data Communications
This unit will build on the technical knowledge gained in earlier units
and pmvide students with an understanding of the various ways in
which the total corporate computing environment can be designed to
meet corporate information needs and support corporate goals.
Ob'ectives
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
- understand the way that managers think and work and the need
for computer systems to Improve thew effectiveness In
decision-making;
- justify the need for careful analysis, risk assessment and control
procedures suitable for different system development approaches;
- describe the methodologies in use in organisations and determine
the correct develowment approach for different systems;
- understand the ne& for diffbient approaches to,mmputer systems
develooment to ensure that corDorate information needs are met
and mhputing pmductlvlty is maximized
Topics covered
- information systems theory;
- decision suppon systems;
traditional life cycle development;
problems with traditional life cycle development;
application packages;
the user interface;
user driven computing;
fourth generation languages;
- prototyping;
- Computer Aided Software Engineering (CASE) tools;
participative design;
- information systems issues for management.
Textbook
To be advised.
-

References
Behan. K. and Holmes. D. How to Pick a fackaae. - Melbourne: The
ultimate Corp., 1987
McNurlin, B.C. and Sprague. R.H. Information Systems Management
in P m h 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1989
Scheiinnan, B. Designing me User Interface - Strategies for Effectivs
H m p u t e r InlEKecbion. U.S.A.: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
1987
Sprague. R. and Carlson. E. Building Effective Decision Support Systems.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: PrenticeHall. 1982
BT302
Systems Software
Prerequisites, completion of second-year computing
units
This unit concentrates on a comparison of the operating systems
MVSlXA and UNlX after aivina students a wneral introduction to the
principles and types of &ding systems:
Both UNlX and MVSlXA are discussed from the perspective of how
they manage computer systems resources and what sorts of software
facilities are provided to users. Students are iven both theoretical
exercises and practical exercises In the use of Re MVS/XA and UNlX
operating systems.
Textbook
Deitel, H. Operating Systems. 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley, 1990
References
Christian, K. The Unix Opefating System. John Wiley and Sons, 1988
Tmmbretta, M. and Finkelstein, S. MVS JCL and Utilities. 2nd edn,
Addison-Wesley. 1989
Manufacturers Manuals
BT304
Programming and Hardware
Prerequisite. BT302 Systems Software
This unit introduces the student to IBM's SmO computer architecture
and assembly language.
The aim is to ive the student a deeper understanding of mainframes
at the level o? machine instructions.
Topics will include:
- S/370 Hardware Architecture
CPU, Channel System. Control and DASD Units
- Assembly Language
Data tyws and formats
Machine instructions
Assembler instructions
Macro instructions
- Writing Programs in Assembler H
- Debugging Techniques
- File o anization and access methods
BPA%. QSAM and VSAM
This is a practical unit and substantial programming exercises will be
given.
Textbook
Kacmar. C.J. ISM/370 Assembly Language. Prentice-Hall, 1988
S1370 XA Reference Summay BM GX2G0157-2
References
A list of appropriate IBM manuals will be given.
BT305
lndustrial Project A
Prerequisites, BT201 Information. Analysis plus one
additional 2nd year computing unlt.
This unit will provide students with the opportunity to work in a formal
project team envimnment on the analysis and design of an automated
lnformation system.
Objectives
By the completion of the unit students should be able to:
1 define the scope and objectives of an information systems project.
identifv the omiect stem to be executed and the deliverable items
to be Grodubd. ~ndektand and use a means of scheduling and
controlling the project;
- apply the techniques of process and data modellin learnt in the
lnformation Analysis unit to the detailed analysis an8specification
of an information system. Define the optimum automation
boundary of the system. Define and specify the user interface style
and content;
Faculty of Bushess
- use a CASE tool to store, maintain and analyse the system
documentation;
- prepare a detailed design specification for the logical data base,
transactions, screens and reports of the information system;
- specify a system acceptance, data conversion and implementation
plan;
- apply the above mentioned skills to the analysis, design and
specification of an automated information system chosen by the
unit teaching panel as a semester case study for the unit. The
chosen information system is to be developed and implemented
as part of the follwing lndustrial Project 8 unit.
Reference
Jordan, E. and Machesky, J. Systems helopment. Boston: PWS-Kent,
1990
BT306 lndustrial Project B
Prerequisites, BT30i lndustrial Project A, BT203 Data
Base Management Systems and BT204 Data Communications.
This unit provides students with the opportunity to work in a formal
project team environment on the development and implementation of
an information system.
Objectives
To implement the system for which planning, analysis and design was
completed durina - BT35 (Industrial Proiect . A). .
To employ the practical skills learned in other units, such as:
- Software engineering techniques;
- Project control;
- Standards development;
- Programming;
Testing;
- Migratlonlchange control.
By so doing, to deepen and broaden the understanding of practical
computing, and to reinforce the theory learned in other units.
Reference
Jordan. E.W. and Machesky, J.J. Systems Darebpment. Boston: PWS-
Kent. 1990
BT307 Advanced Programming
Prerequisite. 81202 Commercial Programming
Unit objectives
This unit lntmduces students to the programming language C in both
the PC and mainframe environments. It mamines the structured
programming paradigm and demonstrates the object-oriented
paradigm using C++.
Syllabus
introduction to C
simple data types
structured programming methodology
algorithms - solting, searching and file processing
recursion vs iteration
structures
data structures - arrays, stacks, queues, lists and trees
the C+ + programming language
objectariented software design
Assessment
2 Programming Assignments 20%
2 Fortnightly Tests 30%
Final Exam (closed book 2hr) 50%
A pass in the final exam AND an overall score of 50% for the tests
and assignments is required to gain a pass in this unit.
Teaching method
Lectures
Lab Sessions
2hrs/week for 13 weeks
Phrslweek for 12 weeks

Graduate Certificate units
BC401 Accounting for Management
This is a one semester unit for students in the Graduate Certificate
in Business Administration.
The objectives of the unit are:
To develop a manager's ability to understand and apply financial
information in making business decisions and assessing the performance
of a business.
The unit will aim to produce a more effective user of accounting
information. A minimum of technical accountina will be used but
emphasis will be placed on understanding sufkieht accounting to be
aware of the appropriate uses and limitations of information produced
by the accounting system.
The unit will require the student to use modelling skills developed in
the unit Business Software for PCs, in the solution of problems and
in assignments.
No prior knowledge of accounting is assumed.
Topics include:
general purpose financial statements;
financial statement analysis;
cash and fund flow statements;
business finance and valuation;
cost - volume - profit analysis;
costing products and services;
information analysis for decision making;
segment performance evaluation;
budgeting and profit planning.
Textbook
Gaffikin, M., Walgenbach, I?, Dittrich, N. and Hanson, E. Principles
ofAccounting. 2nd Australian edn, Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1990
References
Bell, A. (ed) Introductory Accounting and Finance. Melbourne: Nelson,
1990
Hoaaett. J. and Edwards. L. Accountina in Australia. 2nd edn,
~ri&ane: John Wiley & Sons, 1990
Horngren CT. and Foster, G. Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis.
nn ean, N ~ W Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc., 1991
McDonald, R.C., Cooper, R.G. and Astill, B.J. Accounting for the Non
Finance .. - -- Executive. - - - ~ 2nd edn. Auckland. N.Z.: Lonaman Paul. 1983
Smith. E. The Bottom ~ine.' The ~ssential ~uidefor on-~inance
Executives. Ringwood: Penguin, 1989
BM401 Marketing Management
The unit BM401 covers the same body of knowledge and the same
approach as the unit BM501 Marketing Management 1 in the Graduate
Diploma in Business Administration.
The program introduces students to the role of marketing as part of
the overall business function, and consists of a series of lectures
dealing with the fundamentals of marketing, marketing planning,
consumer behaviour and approaches to looking for market
opportunities.
Methods of instruction
Emohasis is shared between theoretical consideration and ~ractical
problems. Throughout the course students are expected to participate
actively through the use of case studies and the presentation of group
and individual assignments.
Course framework
Consumer behaviour - consumption and expenditure patterns, the
buvina Drocess: market seamentation. Pr~du~tl~e~l~e
Doticv - life
cycle ifld adophon procesc planning; differentiation, packadng and
branding. Pricing policy - cost, demand, resources considerat~ons;
com~etition. The cornmun~cations mix - advertisina; promotion;
persbnal selling. Distribution policy - channel seledon; physical
distribution. lntroduction to marketing strategy.
Textbook
Kotler et al. Marketing in Australia. 2nd edn, Sydney: Prentice Hall,
1989
References
Argenti, J. Systematic Corporate Planning. London: Nelson, 1974
Cravens, D.W. and Lamb, C.W. Jnr. Strategic Marketing: Cases and
Applications. 2nd edn, Homewood: Irwin Inc., 1986
De Bono, E. Opportunities: a Handbook. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
1980
Stanton, W.J., Miller, K. E. and Layton, R.A. Fundamentals of
Marketing. Sydney: McGraw Hill. 1985
BT401 Business Software for PCs
The aim of this unit is to:
- introduce students to PC-based information technology concepts
with particular emphasis on decision support systems;
- enable students to appreciate, and galn practlce In the appllcatlon
of a ranae of PGbased analvsls methods as a means of provldlna
informaGon for management decision making;
- orovide students with skills in the use of PCs that thev can utilize
in otherareas of the course.
BH401 Managing People
Throughout the unit, extensive use will be made of computer packages
A unit in the Graduate Certificate of Business Administration. and particular emphasis will be given to current developments in
The aim of the unit is to:
computing that relate to financial management.
- employ behavioural science theory to analyse situations involving coverage includes:
the management of people at work;
Software and Hardware Components of Decision Support Systems,
- make distinctions between the processes of people interactions Spreadsheets, Graphics, Data Bases and Evaluation and Selection
and the content with which they are working;
of Software.
- develop skills of observation, processing and generalising from
personal experience, and apply knowledge gained to practical
work problems of managing;
~~~,"~~~umentation, user manuals and current journal articles
- increase the students9 awareness of self and their im~act on
will provide the Wference werial for the unit.
others.
Textbook
Hellriegel, D. et al. Organizational Behaviour: 5th edn, St. Paul: West BT402
Publishing, 1989
BH402 Managing Organisations
A subject in the Graduate Certificate of Business Administration.
Ob'ectives
To Aelp participants identify their preferred ways of understanding
organisations and to expand their repertoire of 'frames' for analysis
and problem solving in their roles as managers.
Syllabus
Organisations are explored from the perspectives of:
(i) structure
(ii) politics
(iii) culture, and
(iv) human resources.
Reference
Bolman, L. and Deal, T. Modern Approaches to Understanding and
Managing Organisations. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1984
Introduction to Information
Technology
Prerequisites, prior to beginning this unit students are
not expected to have any previous experience with
computers or information technology.
Objectives
At the end of this unit students will be expected to be able to:
- state in general terms what constitutes information technology and
an information system and its applications;
- state the major components of a computer system, how they
operate and interact together;
- state the purpose of an operating system and demonstrate a
knowledge of the elementary functions of the DOS operating
system;
- use a word processing package to prepare documents of a
specified standard which can be handed in for assessment;
- state the functions that computers perform in the business world
and illustrate these functions with practical examples;

- state the problems associated with manual filing systems and
traditional computer systems, illustrate these problems with
practical examples and apply this knowledge to a practical
situation;
- state the main functions of data base management systems,
illustrate these functions using practical examples and apply this
knowledge in analysing a practical situation;
- descr~be how computers are used in large organisations, including
centralised Drocessors. distributed svstems and networked PCs
- understand basic communications terminology and describe some
currently used communication services and products
- describe alternative methods of systems development and means
of obtaining information for anahsis of requirements
- understand the social implications of computerisation
Textbook
To be advised.
Reference
Behan, K. and Holmes, D. Understanding lnformation Technology 2nd
edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
BT404 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
To give students an understanding of the principles and practice of
commercial programming.
By the end of the course, the student will be able to:
- describe the programming process, from problem definition
through to program testing;
- discuss the ~rinci~les of structured ~roqmmming;
- &plain the imporiance and philosophy of testing;
- design a logical structured solution to a problem using varlous
algorithm techniques;
- read, understand, modify, and debug COBOL programs;
- design, write, test, and document attractive, well-structured programs
in COBOL.
Topics covered include the following:
program structure;
- data structure;
- algorithm design;
- data validation;
- arrays and tables;
- sequential files;
- reporting;
- indexed files;
- strings;
- testing.
Textbook
Stern, N. and Stern, R.A. Structured Cobol Programming. 6th edn, New
York: Wiley, 1990
References
Grauer, RT. Structured Cobol Programming. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1985
Juliff, F! Program Design. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Topping, A.L. and Gibbons, I.L. Progmmming Logic: Structured Design.
Chicago: SRA. 1985
Faculty of Business
BT405 lnformation Systems Strategies
Unit Objectives
The aim of this unit is to provide students with a thorough
understanding of the varying information needs of an organisation and
the various methods which are appropriate to meet those needs.
Particular emphasis will be placed on the need to understand the data
available in and to an orqanisation and how it can be used to Drovide
relevant information reli&ly and efficiently.
BT403 Business Computing
Topics Covered.
Types of decis~ons, types of information
Unit objectives
Types of lnformation Systems, Transaction Processing,
This unit gives students an introduction to the use of computers in Management lnformation Systems, Executive lnformation
business. Students will studv manv different hmes of a~~lications Systems, Decision Support Systems. Expert Systems
ranqinq from those used bv shall bisinesses t6iough to ihose used Retrieving Data, processing and presenting it - SOL
by krge corporations. Computer systems discussed will range from Networks - Centralised, decentralised distributed processing
mlcrocomDuters through to ma~nframe comDuters. During the course. Strategic and Tactical issues of networks and E.D.I.
students will solve shple business problems with fie aid of a Developing an Information Strategy including the use of modelling
spreadsheet package on a microcomputer. Students will also be Managing End User Computing
ex~osed to a number of analvsis skills used in building information Internal Controls and Security; Crime, Fraud, Theft, Piracy and
sGtems. The unit concludes with a discussion 07 the social Sabotage
implications of introducing new information technology.
Improving, refurbishing, redeveloping, existing systems
At the end of this unit, students will be able to:
Using technology for operational, tactical and strategic advantage
- describe a variety of applications used by business
References
- identify the type of problems to which spreadsheets should be Cashmore, C. and Lyall. R. Business lnformation Systems and
applied and use such a package to solve simple business Strategies. U.K.: Prentice Hall, 1991
problems
McNurlin, B.C. and Sprague, R.H. Jr. lnformation Systems
Management in Practice. 2nd edn, U.S.: Prentice Hall, 1989
Nelson, R.R. End-User Computing, Concepts, Issues and
Applications. US.: John Wiley, 1989
Panko. R.R. End User Computing Management Applications and
Technology. N.Y.: Wiley, 1988
BT406
Data Base Design and
Implementation
Prerequisite, BT404 Computer Programming
Unit Objectives
This unit is very much a hands-on unit. Students will get the
opportunity of using the relational DBMS, DB2, and associated query
languages.
The major aim is to prepare students to be productive in projects
involving relational database applications.
After completing this unit successfully, students should:
be able to develop a data model for a small application
be able to explain the advantages and disadvantages of the
database as opposed to the traditional file approach of data
processing
be able to distinguish between the 3 major categories of DBMS;
Network, Hierarchical, and Relational
have a good understanding of the terminologies and concepts
associated with relational DBMS
be able to use SQL with confidence to define, load and access
data in relational databases
understand the need for normalisation of data
differentiate between Logical and Physical Data Independence
understand the strategies used in implementing a database
Management System.
References
Date. C.J. An lntroduction to Database Systems. Vol. 1, 4th (1986) or
5th (1990) edn, Addison-Wesley
Dolan, K.A. and Kmenke, D.M. Database Processing. 3rd edn. Science
Research Associates Inc., 1988
Shepherd, J.C. Database Management Theory and Application. Irwin
Inc.. 1990

BT407 Technology and Change
Unit Objectives
The aim of this unit is to enable the student to understand the
significant impact that lnformation Systems may have on an
oraanisation strategically, tactically and operationally. Students will be
able to know the processes by which these changes may be managed.
Topics
Approaches to information systems planning
Understanding corporate culture
Impact of IT. on management
Managing change
Evolving systems development approaches
Planning strategies
Project selection including project estimation and cost benefit
analysis
Project management -
Team building
Training
Change-over
Ergonomic Issues - hardware, software, people
Managing the use of I.T.
Improving Productivity through I.T.
References
Koory, J.L. and Medley, D.B. Management lnformation Systems:
Planning and Decision Making. Ohio: South-Western, 1987
Sager, M. Managing Advanced lnformation Systems. Australia:
Prentice-Hall, 1990
Graduate Diploma units
BC503 Introduction to Financial
Management
Prerequisite, nil
A first-year unit in the graduate diploma course in business
administration.
The objectives of the unit are firstly to develop the student's ability
to understand, interpret and use corporate financial statements as an
lnformatlon source and secondly to develop In the student an understandlna
of the accountlna ~nlormatlon svstem whlch exlsts w~thln an
organisgtion for the purpose of supplyirig relevant and timely information
for management decision making.
No prior knowledge of accounting is assumed.
Applicants who have previously studied accounting at a tertiary level
or are working as accountants are precluded from taking this unit.
Topics include:
- management planning and decision making
accounting models and the reporting system
- basic report analysis and interpretation
- asset valuation and reporting
cost behaviour and classification
- information and decision making - short and long run
- performance reporting and evaluation
References
Bell, A. (ed) Introductory Accounting and Finance. South Melbourne:
Nelson. 1990
Gaffikin et a/.. Princi~les of Accountino. - 2nd edn. . Svdnev: -, ~, Harcourt
Brace ~ovanovitch, i990
Hoggett, J.R. and Edwards, L. Accounting in Australia. Brisbane: Wiley,
."-- roan
Horngren, CT. and Foster, G. Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis.
7th edn. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc., 1991
McDonald. R.C., Cooper, R.G. and Astill, B.J. Accounting for the Non-
Finance Executive. 2nd edn, New Zealand: Longman Paul, 1983
BC504 Corporate Financial Management 1
Objectives
- to develop an understanding of finance theory and its relationship
to the firm;
- to develop an appreciation of the derivation and interpretation of
financial statements;
- to examine the investment and financing decisions of the firm
emphasising the trade-off between risk and return.
Course outline
Understanding financial statements.
Valuation concepts.
Capital structure.
The cost of capital.
Capital asset pricing model.
Investment appraisal.
Risk analysis.
Textbook
Brealey, R. and Myers, S. Principles of Corporate Finance. 3rd edn,
New York: McGraw-Hill. 1988
BC505 Corporate Financial Management 2
Prerequisite, students enrolled In this unlt are expected
to have passed BC504 Corporate Financial Management
1
Objectives
Th16 unlt is designed to develop an understanding of the way in which
flrms plan and manage their l~nancing and Investment strategies.
Course outline
Strategic planning - commitment of resources to profitable activities.
Fund flow analysis; cash flow analysis - testing for cash inadequacy,
cash insolvency.
Financing techniques, managing liabilities.
Control of short-term assets.
Prediction of financial distress and corporate failure.
Analysis of take-overs and mergers.
Determination and evaluation of the firm's financing and investment
strategies, e.g. financial mobility, leasing, project financing,
divestments.

References BE501 Economics
BC554 Auditing and EDP
Prerequisites, BC304 Auditing and BT102 lnformation
Technology 1A and BT103 lnformation Technology lB,
or suitable equivalents
The increasing dependence of all types of organisations on computerbased
systems has brought about a need for new approaches to
auditing. In this double unit it is intended to acquaint students with
some auditing computerised systems.
Topics covered include: revision of basic data processing principles;
the audit role in systems development; the design functions and
development of controls; processing and program controls; the
computer audit trail; auditing packages; appraisal of control
requirements In the various processing options, e.g. bureaux, timesharing,
etc.; auditing advanced systems, e.g. on-line systems, data
base, etc.; Internal control questionnaire for EDP.
The teaching method is by lectures, seminars and practical case work.
A major case study is undertaken.
References
Faculty of Business
Bishop. S.. C~~PP. H. and Twite, G. Corporate Finance. 2nd edn, No prior knowledge of economics is assumed, Applicants who have
Sydney: Holt Rinehart and Winston, 1988
majored in economics at a tertiary level are advised to enrol for another
Brealey, R. and Myers, S. Principles of Corporate Finance. 3rd edn, postgraduate diploma subject. Applicants who have studied economics
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1988
Bruce, R., McKern, V., Pollard, I.. and Skully, M. HandbookofAustralian ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ finished ~ their i l , " ~ $ lime ~ ~ are h o
Corporate Finance. 3rd edn. Sydney: Butterworths. 1989
The first half of the course is concerned with Industry Economics,
coverina " in . oarticular market structure. conduct and oerformance
issues.
In the second half of the course consideration is given to the factors
that determine the general level of economic activity and those
economic concepts and methods of analysis that bear directly on the
management of a firm.
The topics to be covered are drawn from: markets, resource allocation,
efficiency and demand; production and costs; pricing and profit;
industry economics including public policy aspects; aggregate demand
and supply analysis; money and economic activity; employment and
unemployment; inflation; monetary, fiscal, balance of payments and
priceslincomes policies.
References
Caves, R. et a/. Australian Industry: Structure, Conduct, Performance.
2nd edn. Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Indecs. State of Play 6. Allen and Unwin, 1990
Pappas, J. and Hirschey, M. Fundamentals of Managerial Economics.
3rd edn, Chicago: Cryden Press, 1989
Waud, .R.N., Hocking, A., Maxwell, I? and Bonnici, J. Economics.
Specific articles and texts are referred to when completing each topic
area.
BC555 Accounting
Current Issues in Accounting is a mandatory unit in the graduate
dioloma course in accountinq, - it carries a weighting - - of 2 units.
The unit incorporates within ~t the Accounting module of the lnstltute
of Chartered Accountants' Professional Year.
The major emphasis in the course is an in-depth coverage (both practical
and theoretical) of the Accounting Standards. Current exposure
drafts and recent developments in reporting requirements of the
Companies Code are also studied.
Assessment
By one case study and a final exam.
References
The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia, Member's Handbook
Australian National Companies and Securities Legislation, latest
edn.
BC556 Taxation
This unit is compulsory for the graduate diploma course in accounting
(Professional Year Higher Degree Program).
The course covers areas relevant to the Professional Year assianments
and final examination in the Taxation Module set by The lngtitute of
Chartered Accountants. The unit has a weighting of 2 units.
References
Australian Federal Tax Reporte~: North Ryde, N.S.W.: CCH Australia Ltd
Australian Income Tax Assessment Act. 1936 as amended
1992 Australian Master Tax Guide. CCH Australia Ltd
Lehmann. G. and Cdeman, C. Taxation Law in Australia. 2nd edn,
Sydney: Bunenvorths, 1991
. . .
AustralIan edn. Svdnev: Har~er and Row. 1989
A detailed reading guide will be issued at the start of the semester.
BE503 Financial lnstitutions and Markets
Objectives
To provide students with:
(i) an understanding of the structure, functioning and development
of Australian financial institutions and markets; and
(ii) an appreciation of some of the key issues in industry policy,
export markets and labour markets, particularly as they affect
manufacturing industry;
(iii)
the ability to critically appraise Government policies in the above
areas.
Course outline
Financial markets and institutions
- nature and role of financial intermediation
- and description of Australian financial intermediaries
- impact of deregulation on the financial environment and on
Reserve Bank of Australia's role and policies.
Market issues
- industry policy debate - level playing field versus interventionist
approach
- microeconomic reform issues
- factors affecting Australia's export market performance and policy
implications
- key labour market issues.
References
Australian Manufacturing Council (AMC). The Global Challenge -
Austra!ian Manufacturing in the 1990's. PCEK Study, July, 1990
Bruce, R., McKern, B. and Pollard, I., (eds) Handbook of Australian
Corporate Finance. 3rd edn, Sydney: Butterworths, 1989
Carew, E. Fast Money 3 - The Money Market in Australia. Sydney:
Allen and Unwin, 1991
Davis. K. and Lewis. M. Monetarv . Policvin . Australia. Melbourne: Lonq- -
man hes shire, 1981
Lewis, M.K. and Wallace, R.H. (eds.) Australia's Financial lnstitutions
and Markets. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1985
Moore, D. et a/. Financial Institutions and Markets. 2nd edn., Wamberal:
Serendip, 1990

BE504
Nature and Characteristics of
Markets
This is a onesemester unit for students in the graduate diploma course
in market forecasting.
Objectives
The unit will provide an introduction to aspects of microeconomics
which will promote an understanding of the nature and characteristics
of markets. Students will become familiar with the analytical methods
which enable them to evaluate critically the policies of firms and the
policies of government and regulationlderegulation of markets.
Topics include:
(1) the nature of markets dealing with aspects such as:
- problems of definition
- markets and resource allocation
alternate market structures
- structure of the Australian economy
(2) demand analysis
- demand functions and curves
- empirical demand studies
(3) supply analysis
- short-run and long-run production decisions
- short-run and long-run cost analysis
- profit and goals of firms
(4) market regulation
- alternative approaches
- regulation in Australia
References
Caves. R., Ward, I.. Williams, P and Wright, C. Australian Industryc
Sbucture, Conduct, Penbrmance. 2nd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Terry, C.. and Forde, K. Microeconomics: An lnboduction for Australian
Students. 2nd edn. Svdnev: Prentice-Hall. 1988
Waud, R. and H O C ~ 'A. ~ ~ Microeconomics. ,
Australian Edition,
Sydney: Harper and Row, 1989
BH505 The Social Psychology of
Organising
A first year subject in the graduate diploma course in organisation
behaviour.
The subject is concerned with:
- different ways (metaphors) for looking at and thinking about how
we organise;
- the interrelationship between behaviour and structure, both
conscious and unconscious;
- the individual and collective investigation of the strengths and
weaknesses of differing forms of organisation;
- expanding the ability of participants as thinkers and actors within
organisations.
References
Berg, D. and Smith, K. Wradoxes of Group Life. San Francisco: Jossey
Bass. 1987
~olmani L. and Deal, T. Modern Approaches to Understanding and
Managing Organisations. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1984
Morgan, G. lmages of Organisation. Bev. Hills: Sage, 1986
BH506 Group and Interpersonal Psychology
This subject is designed for students taking the graduate diploma
course in organisation behaviour.
The unit comprises:
Three hours per week for two semesters.
The objectives are:
- to introduce psychological concepts and techniques relevant to
personal, interpersonal and group behaviour;
- to help participants understand their own perceptions, values and
attitudes, and to gain insight into how these may influence
behaviour;
- to increase options for behaviour (mainly communications) through
learning appropriate skills. Methods used are largely co-operative
and practical rather than didactic and theoretical. Active group
participation is therefore necessary.
Assessment
Students are required to submit two minor written assignments. There
is no written formal examination. Because of the experiential nature
of this subject, a minimum 80% attendance is required.
Semester 1 will involve students in the study of group processes and
their effects on individual and interpersonal processes and relations.
Students will approach the study of these phenomena through reading,
discussion and experiential learning.
Semester 2 will build on earlier work. In particular, skills involved in
the consultative management of groups and interpersonal relations
will be examined. Students will be encouraged to work on 'real life'
group and organisational issues that emerge in their own workplaces.
References
Extensive reading and resources will be given as appropriate.
BH507 Organisational Psychology
Prerequisite, no prior knowledge of administrative theory
is assumed, but working experience in a business, public
service, or anv other form of oraanisat~on is essential
A first-year unit in the graduate diploma courses in business administration
and management systems.
This unit constitutes an examination of organisational problems in the
implementation of corporate strategy with particular emphasis on the
relationship between strategy, structure. process and people.
The learning experience depends largely on the involvement and
experience of the students, who bring knowledge and skill to the task.
The lecturer's role is to generate a situation in which current attitudes
and ~ractices are challenaed. - . and alternative a~oroaches ..
to manaae- -
meni are evaluated.
Theoretical models are applied to problems in order to permit impartial
analysis of organisational issues.
Experience is also gained in co-operative group preparation of material
and presentation to the class.
Theory is applied to real situations through assignments requiring the
investigation of an organisation to which the student has access.
The value of theory as= means of expanding the range of a manager's
decisions and actions is the basis of thts course.
Textbook
Morgan, G. lmages oforganisation. Beverley Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1986
Reference
Bolman, L. and Deal, T. Modern Approaches to Understanding and
Managing Organisations. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1984
BL501
Secretarial Practice and Procedure
This unit is intended to equip potential company secretaries for their
future careers.
Topics covered include:
- meetings and conferences, duties of chairman, organisation,
standing orders, terms and expessions, etc.;
- board meetings; preparation. agenda and minutes, quorum, voting
rights, powers of members' motions;
- documentation, induding annual return and registers; various ways
of raising finance; winding-up procedures;
- the Board and the Stock Exchange: functions and procedures,
listing requirements and terminology, voluntary and statutory
controls, etc.
Textbooks
A.A.S. E. Listing Requirements
Chappenden, W.J. Joske's Law and Procedure at Meetings in Australia.
7th edn, Law Book Co., 1981, or
Horsley, M.G. Meetingq Procedure, Law andPractice. 4th edn, Sydney:
Butterworths, 1984
Companies Code 1981
Yorston, Fortescue and Brown. Australian Secretarial Practice. 7th edn,
Sydney: Law Book Co., 1983
-

Faculty of Business
- to allow the distinction to be made between he demand for a class,
BL502 Legal Aspects of Finance
type, form and brand by introducing the concepts market size and
Prerequisites. no prerequisite studies in law are required. the physical and behavioural aspects of markets. including target
Students who have not studied law previously are markets and market segmentation;
expected to become familiar with the basic legal institu- - to provide students with an ability to look for market opportunities;
tions and reasoning processes and with basic principles - to introduce students to pricing, product, purchasing, promotion
in contract and company law, prior to embarking upon and distribution decisions;
a study of this unit. Materials are provided and texts - to introduce students to international marketing.
referred to for this purpose.
Course content
Objective,
Both business and non-business organisations must look for and satis-
This unit is intended to promote an in-depth awareness of those areas factorily serve one or more markets to achieve their goals and objectof
law which have an impact upon the Corporate finance function. ives. This subject deals with marketing planning and market analysis
Where appropriate, attention is given to the need for law reform. (the structure and dynamics for specific markets). Marketing planning
is introduced because an understanding of the marketing decision
Course outline
process will assist a manager in the specification of the relevant data
A study will be made of commercial and revenue law applicable to:
required to make decisions. Market analysis is introduced as most
- selected aspects of equity, e.g. redeemable preference shares, torporate
repurchase of shares, corporate financing of acquisitions
markets can be divided into market segments each varying in size and
requiring a different marketing plan and set of resources.
of its own shares;
- selected aspects of debt including convertible notes, negotiable Textbooks
instruments, debentures, receivers, charges, negative pledges, To be advised.
EFT and euro-currency loans;
leasing, factoring and project finance; References
- selected financial institutions, e.g. short-term money market, A large number of references including books, monographs and
futures exchange, second boards of stock exchanges.
journal articles will be utilised during the course. These will be detailed
to participants at the appropriate time.
References
Austin, R. and Vann, R. The Law of Public Company Finance.
Melbourne: Law Book Co, 1986
Ford, H.A.J. Principlesof Company Law. 5th edn, Sydney: Butterworths, BQ502 Database Sources and Methods
1990
This unit will:
Detailed references to journal articles will be given in classes.
(1) introduce students to a number of videotext-type information systems,
public access database systems and data archives;
(2) develop the skills necessary to access the information techno-
BM501 Marketing Management 1
logies in (1) above to enhance research skills;
Prerequisite, nil
(3) provide the training necessary for students to develop their own
The program introduces students to the role of marketing as part of
databases on both micro and mainframe computer systems.
the overall business function, and consists of a series of lectures deal- Topics
ing with the fundamentals of marketing, marketing planning, consumer - videotext: electronically published information for mass public
behaviour and approaches to looking for market opportunities.
audiences; the technology, the cost, the benefits; access to VIATEL
Methods of instruction
and other generally available systems;
- public access databases: retrieval of bibliographic and numeric
Emphasis is shared between theoretical
and practical
problems. Throughout the course students are expected to participate
including ABI"NFORM;
- access issues: the selection of information, the price, copyright,
actively through the use of case studies and the presentation of group
and individual assignments.
security, confidentiality, reliability and quality. Australian Bureau
of Statistics computer based information system and electronic
Coune framework
services including AUSSTATS, TELESTATS and DIRECT;
Consumer behaviour - the buying process; market segmentation. - techniques for analysing and processing secondary data sources
Product policy - life cycle and adoption process, planning; using SAS and SPSSX. Particular attention will be given to the
differentiation, packaging and branding. Pricing policy - cost, access and analysis of census data and other significant sample
demand, resources considerations; competition. The communications survey data collections such as the Household Expenditure
mix - advertising; promotion; personal selling. Distribution policy - Survey.
channel selection; physical distribution. lntroduction to marketing
strategy.
Textbooks
CDATA86. Tutorial Guide.
Textbooks
ISM User's Guide. An Introduction and Tutorial Guide to ISPE
Details will be provided at the first session.
Swinburne Computer Centre
Norusis, M.J. SPSS/PC+ Studentware. Chicago, Ill: SPSS Inc., 1988
Reference
Cravens, D.W., Lamb, CW. Jnr. Strategic Marketing: Cases and Applica- References
tions. 2nd edn. Homewood: Irwin Inc.. 1986
Australian Bureau of Statistics. Information Papec Special Data
Services. 1986 Census of Population and Housing, Cat. no. 2181.0
Australian Bureau of Statistics. The 1986 Census Dictionary. 1986
Census of Population and Housing, Cat. no. 2174.0
~ ~ 5 0selecting 2 and influencing ~ ~ Hakim, ~ C. Secondary k Analysis ~ in Social t Research. ~ London: Allen and
Prerequisites, BE504 The Nature and Characteristics Unwin, 1982
of Markets and BQ502 Database Sources and Methods SAS User's Guide Basics. Version 5, USA: SAS Institute Inc., 1985
SPSSX User's Guide. 3rd edn, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1988
Teaching method
SUPERMAP User's Guide and Reference. Version 3.1, Melbourne:
One three-hour class per week for one semester. Space Time Research, 1990
Fieldwork exercises, case studies, class discussion and exercises will
emphasise the practical nature of the course and enable concepts to
be applied to 'real world' situations.
Extensive use will be made of library and other community-based
resources such as the Australian Bureau of Statistics. Students will
be required to make class presentations, prepare short reports and
present data in an informative fashion.
Objectives
This unit is oriented towards the behavioural and psychological aspects
of individuals in the market place, and lays the foundation for forecasting
activities at this level of aggregation.
- to introduce students to marketing decisions and the specification
of relevant data required;
- to enable students to understand the components of a marketing
plan;
177

BQ504
and
BQ505 Quantitative Methods
No formal prerequisites are specified beyond a previous knowledge
of basic mathematics
This unit is designed to give students an understanding of the role
of quantitative analysis in the decision-making process. The skills
acquired are used in other units of the course as well as giving an
appreciation of quantitative techniques via practical applications. Userfriendly
computer packages are employed throughout the course
wherever possible, reflecting their importance and usefulness.
The topics included are: linear programming. forecasting, inventory
management, basic statistics. decision theory.
Textbook
Chang, Y.L. and Sullivan, R.S. Quantitative Systems for Business Plus.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall lnternational Inc.. 1989
BQ506 Market Forecasting 1
Prerequisite, BE504 The Nature and Characteristics of
Markets and 80502 Data Base Sources and Methods
This unit commences by providing participants with an overview of
forecasting techniques and approaches. Following on from this, the
criteria for selection of an appropriate forecasting technique are examined
and detailed consideration is given to the first of the three main
forecasting categories - predictive forecasting, i.e., the sole use of
time to obtain a forecast. These techniques are introduced via case
studies based on a variety of product markets, and include nonadaptive
averaging methods through to the more complex ARlMA and
spectral decomposition techniques. Course participants will, after successfully
completing this unit, be competent users of the main forecasting
techniques dealt with. Considerable use of micro and mainframe
computers will be involved in this unit.
Textbook
Makridakis, S., Wheelright, S.C. and McGee, V.E. Forecasting Methods
and Applications. 4th edn, New York: Wiley, 1985
References
Box, G.E.P. and Jenkins, G.M. Time Series Analysis, Forecasting and
Control. Rev. 2nd edn, Oakland, C.A.: Holden-Day, 1976
Firth. M. Fbrecastina Methods in Business and Manaaement. London:
~dward Arnold, 1977
Makridakis, S. and Wheelwright, S.C. Interactive Forecasting - Univariate
and Multivariate Methods. 2nd edn. San Francisco: Holden-
Day. 1978
Montgomery, D.C. and Johnson, L.A. Forecasting and Time Series
Analysis. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1976
Thomopoulos, N.T. Applied Forecasting Methods. Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey: Prentice-Hall. 1980
BT502 Current Issues in Systems Design
Prerequisite, BT501 Systems Analysis and Design
Course ,objectives
In this unlt, some of the most recent developments and trends in comouter
aoolications . . and technoloqies are examined to:
- encourage students to appraise critically state of the art developments
and evaluate them for relevance to their own environment;
communicate recent systems design techniques;
- provide an awareness of the anticipated directions within the computer
industry.
Course structure
Topics covered include:
- systems analysis and design for the fourth and fifth generation
systems;
- prototyping strategies;
- integrating personal and corporate computing;
- knowledge based systems.
References
In addition to numerous periodicals and journals, the following texts
will serve as a guide:
Dordick. H. et al. The Innovative Manageniont Usrng Telecommunica-
tions - A Guide to Oooortunities Strateaies and Ao~lications. New
~ork: Wiley, 1986
Firebaugh, M. Artificial Intelligence. A Knowledge Based Approach.
Boston: Bovd and Fraser. 1988
iidon, M: and ~audon, J. Management lnformation Systems: A
Contemporary Perspective. 2nd rev. edn, Maxwell MacMillan, 1990
, . - . .
-
BT503 Software Engineering Strategies
A one-semester subject in the graduate diploma course in management
systems.
The subject is intended to develop a formal awareness of the processes
of analysing and developing systems while at the same time
emphasising the necessary communications skills for success.
The tools, techniques and methodologies for both analysing and
designing an information system are covered to assist students in:
- further understanding the system development process;
- acquiring and understanding of
data modelling,
data analysis,
structured analysis,
use of CASE tools
database pinning: deslgn and ~rnplementatlon,
- develop an understand~nq of lnformatlon conceots wlth a vlew to
efficient software design-
- evaluating the effectiveness of computerised information systems.
The development of techniques for successful communication with
both users and other computing professionals:
- written skills of report writing and essays;
- fact gathering techniques of interviewing, questionnaires,
. sampling, etc.:
- verbal communication skills for various forms of presentations;
- systems documentation techniques of structured analysis.
References
Date, C.J. An lntroduction to Database Systems. 5th edn, Vol. 1,
Massachussets: Addison-Wesley, 1990
Kendall, K.E. and Kendall. J.E. Systems Analysis and Design.
lnternational edn, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1988
Peters, L. Advanced Structured Analysis and Design. lnternational edn,
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1988
BT504 lntroduction to lnformation
Technology
Prerequisites, prior to beginning this unit students are
not expected to have any previous experience with
computers or information technology.
Objectives
At the end of this unit students will be expected to be able to:
- state In general terms what constitutes cnformatlon technology and
an lnformatlon system and ~ts a~~llcatlons.
- state the major components 0f.a computer system, how they
operate and interact together;
- state the purpose of an operating system and demonstrate a
knowledge of the elementary functions of the DOS operating
system;
- use a word processing package to prepare documents of a
specified standard which can be handed in for assessment;
- state the functions that computers perform in the business world
and illustrate these functions with practical examples;
- state the problems associated with manual filing systems and
traditional computer systems, illustrate these problems with
practical examples and apply this knowledge to a practical
situation;
- state the main functions of data base management systems,
illustrate these functions using practical examples and apply this
knowledge in analysing a practical situation.
BT506 Information Analysis
Prerequisite, BT504 lntroduction to lnformation
Technology
Models are important tools used by analysts in trying to understand
information systems. This unit examines some of the models
commonly used including:
Dataflow Diagrams
Functional Dependency Diagrams
The Entity Relationship Model
Fact Modelling
They are used to produce pictures which are both simple and effective
in representing either the processes or data required for the
information system.
We can convert these pictures into a form suitable for storing data
In a Relational Database bv
,
a . Drocess called normalisation.
An introduction to Structural Query Language is given as a means
of extracting data from a Relational Database.

Textbook
To be advised
References
Howe, D.R. Data Analysis for Database Design. London: Edward
Arnold. 1983
~ackson, G.A. Relational Database Design with Micro-computer
Applications. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1988
McFadden. F. and Hoffer, J. Database Management. 2nd edn, Menlo
Park: Benjamin Cummings, 1988
Nijssen, G. and Halpin, T. Conceptual Schema and Relational
Database Design. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1989
Yourdon. E. Modem Sbvctued Analysis and Design. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall International. 1989
BT507 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
To give students an understanding of the principles and practice of
commercial programming.
By the end of the course, the student will be able to:
- describe the programming process, from problem definition
through to program testing;
discuss the principles of structured programming;
- explain the importance and philosophy of testing;
- desian a loaical structured solution to a problem usinq various
algohhm techniques;
read, understand, modify, and debug COBOL programs;
- design, write, test, and document attractive, well-structured progra6s
in COBOL.
Topics covered include the following:
- program structure;
- data structure;
- algorithm design;
- data validation;
- arrays and tables;
- sequential files;
- reporting;
- indexed files;
- strings;
- testing.
Textbook
Stern, N. and Stern, R.A. StructuredCobol Programming. 6th edn. New
York: Wiley, 1990
References
Grauer. R.T. Structured Cobol Proarammina. - Enalewood - Cliffs. N.J.:
renti ice- all, 1985
Juliff, I? Program Design. 3rd edn. Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1990
Topping, A.L. and Gibbons. I.L. Programming Logic: Structured Design.
Chicago: SRA, 1985
BT508 Business Computing
Unit objectives
This unit gives students an introduction to the use of computers in
business. Students will study many different types of applications
ranging from those used by small businesses through to those used
by large corporations. Computer systems discussed will range from
microcomputers through to mainframe computers. During the course,
students will solve simple business problems with the aid of a
spreadsheet package on a microcomputer. Students will also be
exposed to a number of analysis skills used in building information
systems. The unit concludes with a discussion of the social
implications of introducing new information technology.
At the end of this unit, students will be able to:
- describe a variety of applications used by business
- identify the type of problems to which spreadsheets should be
applied and use such a package to solve simple business
nrnhlems
r
- descr~be
how computers are used in large organisations, including
centralised processors, distributed systems and networked PCs
- understand bas~communications terminology and descr~be some
currentlv used communication services and Droducts
- describe alternative methods of systems development and means
of obtaining ~nformat~on
analysis of requirements
- understand the soc~al implicat~ons of computerlsatlon.
Textbook
To be advised.
Reference
Behan, K. and Holmes. D. Understanding Information Technology. 2nd
edn. Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
179
Faculty of Business
BC604 Financial Structures and Policy
Prerequisite, a pass or preclusion from BC503
Introduction to Financial Management
The general objective is to develop an understanding of financial theory
so that the student can evaluate the firm's investment, financing and
dividend decisions in keeping with an objective of maximising shareholder
wealth, together with providing students with the means of
applying analytical techniques to solve a wide variety of problems
involving financial decisions.
In particular, the topic coverage includes:
- financial statement analysis
- working capital management
- concepts of valuation
- cost of capital
- sources of finance
- capital structure and leverage
- business combinations
Textbook
Weston, J.F. and Brigham, E.F. Essentials of Managerial Finance. 9th
edn. Chicago: Dryden Press, 1990
References
Brealey, R.A. and Myers, S.C. Principles of Corporate Finance. 3rd edn.
N.Y.: McGraw-Hill, 1988
Peirson. G.C.. Bird. R.G.. Brown. R. and Howard. P. Business Finance.
5th edn. ~ydney: ~cGraw- ill,. 1991
Van Horne, J.G., Davis, K., Nicol. R.E.G. and Wright, F.K. Financial
Management and Policy in Australia. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall.
1990
BC605 lnvestment Management
Prerequisites, no formal prerequlsctes are spec~fied,
candidates usuallv would have completed the first vear
of the course
Objectives
- to acquaint the student with the various securities and funds available
to corporate investment;
- to introduce the use of financial and other inbrmation in the evaluation
of alternative investment media;
- to consider the selection of an appropriate investment poftfolio and
the management of that portfolio.
Textbook
Sharpe, W.F. Investments. 3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall, 1985
References
Ball, R., Brown, R., Finn, F. and Officer, R. Share Markets - Portfolio
Theory. 2nd edn, St. Lucia, Qld.: Univ. of Old., 1989
Francis, J.C. Investments - Analysis and Management. New York:
McGraw Hill International Editions, 4th edn, 1986
Haugen, R.A. Modern Investment Theow 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Jacob, N.L. and Pettit, R.R. Investments. Homewood, Ill.: Irwin, 1984
BC606 Current Developments in Corporate
Finance
The unlt represents a coverage of contemporary issues in the area
of coroorate finance. Issues are resented bv exoerienced ~rofessionals
working in the area thus it 'is very mudh a pragmatic unit.
The unit is conducted on a seminar basis with ample opportunity given
for interaction with the visiting speakers.
Because of the nature of the unit Issues considered vary from year
to year but the following list indicates topics recently covered:
- borrowing off-shore;
- rating commercial paper;
- foreign exchange management;
- equity raising;
- take-over activity;
- taxation implications for financing;
- requlation;
- competitive advantage;
- financing techniques.
References
A select~on of articles as detailed each session by the session leader.

BC607 Research Project
Prerequisites, usually students would have completed
the first four units of the course before commencing the
research project
Objectives
To enable students to apply the concepts and techniques studied
during the course to a substantial practical problem in corporate
finance.
Specifically, students are required to show they have the ability to
define a corporate finance problem clearly, select and apply appropriate
methodology to solve it and present a clear and concise written
report on the work undertaken.
Course program
This unit is conducted over two semesters. While the work is carried
out bv students it is done to a set . proaram - under the supervision of
staff. '
Seminars are run at the beginning of the semester. They cover the
following topics:
- the objectives of the research project;
the seiection of an appropriate project;
- the selection of suitable methodology for different types of projects;
- organisation and standard of report expected.
Written proposals for projects are submitted by 31 March. These must
include sufficient details for staff to assess the usefulness and feasibility
of a project.
Proposals are then approved and supervisors appointed as soon as
possible after submission, but in any case not later than 30 April.
Students are required to report on at least a monthly basis to supervisors
and to submit drafts of all work undertaken prior to the presentation
of the final written report which must be presented for assessment
by 31 October.
References
No specific references are required for a unit of this nature. General
references on report writing will be used, such as:
Anderson, J. et al. Thesis and Assignment Writing. Sydney: Wiley, 1970
BC612
Forecasting and the Planning
Process
Forecast~ng and the Plann~ng Process prov~des a capstone to the graduate
dloloma course in market forecasting.
The unit deals with the issues of ~trategic~anagement and, in partlcular.
w~th the steps an organlsatlon should take to work out 11s future
d~rect~on Incorporated as a maln part of the unlt are the development
of ~anagemeni Information Systems as well as functional implementation
plans.
Framework
- strategic management;
- corporate objectives;
- resource analysis;
- scenarios, a way of influencing future environments;
- strategy formulation;
- management information systems;
- action plans;
- application development tools;
- security and control.
Textbook
Christensen, C.R. et al. Business Policy: Text and Cases. 6th edn,
Homewood Ill,: Irwin. 1987
Reference
Hofer, C.W. and Schendel, D. Strategy Formulation Analytical Concepts.
St. Paul: West Publishing, 1978
BE603 lnternational Finance and Monetary
Theory
Prerequisite, BE503 Financial Institutions and Markets
should be completed or undertaken concurrently
Objectives
To introduce students to the structure and workings of international
financial centres and markets and to provide a study of issues relating
to international financial transactions, monetary theory and internalexternal
management.
Course outline
The following list should be taken as a guide only:
The lnternational Financial Environment
- Current position
- Major indicators
- Outlook
Australia's External Position
- Balance of Payments
- Terms of Trade
- External debt
Foreign Exchange Markets
- Exchange rate determination
- Fixed versus floating exchange rate mechanisms
Transactions in foreign exchange markets
- Foreign exchange risk management
The lnternational Financial System
Description of events since 1945
- lnternational financial centres and markets
- Current outlook and problems
Textbook .~~--
-
Kane, D.R. Principles of lnternational Finance. Croom Helm, 1988
References
Lindert. PH. lnternational Economics. 9th edn. Homewood. Illinois:
Lin, 1'991
Manuell, G. Floating Own Under - Foreign Exchange in Australia.
Svdnev: The Law Book Co. Ltd.. 1986
BH604 Management, Organisation and
People
This unit is taken in the course for the graduate diplomas in accounting
and management systems.
The course provides a macro-view of organisations as open systems
examining the interfaces and interactions of environment, tasks, technology,
structure and people. It then focuses on the psycho-social subsystem,
studying individual, interpersonal, group and inter-group processes
within the organisational context. The role of the manager in
each of these contexts is a recurring and integrating theme. In
particular, wherever possible learning is applied to the business and
management systems environments hmeiliately relevant to students.
Thev have the o~oortunitv to contribute bv sharina their current and
pasiwork experieilce as ;source of material to en&h class activities.
Experiential learning methods as well as lecture-discussion and case
methods are employed.
Considerable supplementary reading is required outside class time.
Assessment IS progressive and may Include essays, case stud~es and
class oresentatlons
Topics are chosen from the nature of the organisation; the organisation
as an open system; interact~ons between sub-systems and the~r
im~lications for manaoers: oraanlsatlon climate and effect~veness:
organisation change &d cleve'iopment; inter-group competition and
cooperation; managing conflict; group dynamics and team building;
group decision-making, synergy vs. groupthink; inter-personal processes
and communication; the individual; leadership; motivation,
behaviour change and modification; perception; learning; value; personality
and individual differences; models of man - behavioural
science views.
Students are continually encouraged to analyse newly-acquired knowledge
to facilitate transfer of their own work situation.
References
Dessler, G. Organization Theory - Integrating Structure and Behaviour
2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1986
Hellriegel, D., Slocum, J.W. and Woodman, R.W. Organizational
Behaviour: 5th edn, St. Paul. Minn: West Publishing Co., 1989
Kolb, D.A., Rubin, I.M. and Mclntyre, J.M. Organisational Psychology
-an Experiential Approach. 4th edn, Englewood Cliffs: New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall. 1984
BH605 Managing Human Processes
Prerequisite, BH501 Administration of Organisational
Systems
A unit in the graduate diploma course in business administration.
Structure
The contribution of the behavioural sciences in solving the 'people'
problems of management are studied so that the student will be better
able to interpret psycho-social aspects of organisations, and be equipped
for the successful management of people.

Textbook
To be advised.
References
Howe. D.R. Data Analwis for Database Desion. - London: Edward
~rnold. 1983
Jackson, G.A. Relational Database Design with Micro-computer
Applications. Englewwd Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1988
McFadden, F. and Hoffer, J. Database Management. 2nd edn, Menlo
Park: Benjamin Cummings. 1988
Nijssen, G. and Halpin, T. Conceptual Schema and Relational
Database Design. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 1989
Yourdon, E. Modern Structured Analysis and Design. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall International, 1989
BT507 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
To give students an understanding of the principles and practice of
coliimercial programming.
By the end of the course, the student will be able to:
- describe the programming process, from problem definition
through to program testing;
- discuss the principles of structured programming;
- explain the importance and philosophy of testing;
- design a logical structured solution to a problem using various
algorithm techniques;
- read, understand, modify, and debug COBOL programs;
- design, write, test, and document attractive, well-structured programs
in COBOL.
Topics covered include the following:
- program structure;
- data structure;
- algorithm design;
- data validation;
- arrays and tables;
- sequential files;
- reporting;
- indexed files;
- strings;
- testing.
Textbook
Stern, N. and Stern, R.A. StructuredCobol Programming. 6th edn, New
York: Wiley, 1990
References
Grauer, R.T. Structured Cobol Programming. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall. 1985
Juliff, P. Program Design. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1990
Topping, A.L. and Gibbons, I.L. Programming Logic: Structured Design.
Chicago: SRA. 1985
BT508 Business Computing -
Unit objectives
This unit gives students an introduction to the use of computers in
business. Students will study many different types of applications
ranging from those used by small businesses through to those used
by large corporations. Computer systems discussed will range from
microcomputers through to mainframe computers. During the course,
students will solve simple business problems with the aid of a
spreadsheet package on a microcomputer. Students will also be
exposed to a number of analysis skills used in building information
systems. The unit concludes with a discussion of the social
implications of introducing new information technology.
At the end of this unit, students will be able to:
- describe a variety of applications used by business
- identify the type of problems to which spreadsheets should be
applied and use such a package to solve simple business
oroblems
- describe how computers are used in large organisations, includina
centrallsed processors, distributed systems-and networked PC:
- understand basic communications terminoloav and descrlbe some
currently used communication services an?i
products
- describe alternative methods of systems development and means
of obtaining information for analysis of requirements
- understand the social implications of computerisation.
Textbook
To be advised.
Reference
Behan, K. and Holmes, D. Understanding Information Technology. 2nd
edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Faculty of Business
BC604 Financial Structures and Policy
Prerequisite, a pass or preclusion from BC503
Introduction to Financial Management
The general objective is to develop an understanding of financial theory
so that the student can evaluate the firm's investment, financing and
dividend decisions in keeping with an objective of maximising shareholder
wealth, together with providing students with the means of
applying analytical techniques to solve a wide variety of problems
involving financial decisions.
In particular, the topic coverage includes:
- financial statement analysis
- working capital management
- concepts of valuation
- cost of capital
- sources of finance
- capital structure and leverage
- business combinations
Textbook
Weston, J.F. and Brigham, E.F. Essentials of Managerial Finance. 9th
edn. Chicago: Dryden Press, 1990
References
Brealey, R.A. and Myers. S.C. Principles of Corporate Finance. 3rd edn,
N.Y.: McGraw-Hill, 1988
Peirson, G.C., Bird, R.G., Brown, R. and Howard, I? Business Finance,
5th edn, Sydney: McGraw-Hill. 1991
Van Horne, J.G., Davis, K., Nicol, R.E.G. and Wright. F.K. Financial
Management and Policy in Australia. 3rd edn. Sydney: Prentice-Hall,
1990
BC605 lnvestment Management
Prerequisites, no formal prerequisites are specified;
candidates usually would have completed the first year
of the course
Objectives
- to acquaint the student with the various securities and funds available
to corporate investment;
- to introduce the use of financial and other information in the evaluation
of alternative investment media;
- to consider the selection of an appropriate investment portfolio and
the management of that portfolio.
Textbook
Sharpe, W.F. Investments. 3rd edn. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall. 1985
References
Ball, R., Brown, R., Finn, F. and Officer, R. Share Markets - Portfolio
Theow. 2nd edn, St. Lucia. Qld.: Univ. of Qld.. 1989
~rands, J.C. Investments - Analysis and Management. New York:
McGraw Hill International Editions, 4th edn, 1986
Haugen, R.A. Modern lnvestment Theow. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Jacob, N.L. and Pettit, R.R. Investments. Homewood, Ill.: Irwin, 1984
BC606 Current Developments in Corporate
Finance
The unit represents a coverage of contemporary issues in the area
of corporate finance. Issues are presented by experienced professionals
working in the area thus it is very much a pragmatic unit.
The unit is conducted on a seminar basis with ample opportunity given
for interaction with the visiting speakers.
Because of the nature of the unit issues considered vary from year
to year but the following list indicates topics recently covered:
- borrowing off-shore;
- rating commercial paper;
- foreign exchange management;
- equity raising;
- take-over activity;
- taxation implications for financing;
- regulation;
- competitive advantage;
- financing techniques.
References
A selection of articles as detailed each session by the session leader.

- the student is introduced to current ideas of organisation theorists;
- the student is able to use concepts to manage people;
- the development of skills in communication, assertiveness and
self-knowledge are subsidiary aims.
After the course, the candidates will have developed increased awareness
of human organisational problems and of the impact their personal
behaviour has on others.
Class sessions may draw upon lecturediscussions. group experiential
exercises, case studies, tests, student presentations and films.
These are complemented by extensive private reading and practical
assignments out of class.
Topics include interpersonal communications, motivation, perception,
leadership, teamwork, intra and inter-group processes, conflict
management.
Textbooks and references
Details provided at the first session
BH606 Culture and Conflict in
Organisations
A second-year subject in the graduate diploma course in organisation
behaviour.
The subject introduces students to current theory and practice associated
with oraanisation culture as a prelude to managing conflict and
change. It examines the fundamentalelements and dynamics of organisation
culture. Participants are required to analyse an organisation
in terms of its culture and assess, given that culture, how conflict and
change might be more effectively managed. The unit is tightly
sequenced with the following unit Management and Leadership.
Textbooks and References
It is unlikely that a speclflc text will be prescribed. Participants will be
nlvnn extenslve handouts and these will be used as a basis for class
;iscus;it% and accompanying experiential activities
BH607 Leadership and Change in
Organisations
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in organisation
behaviour.
This subject has two specific points of focus:
1. Change
2. Leadership
It is assumed that leaders need to know about the influences which
create change and the processes necessary to produce a
transformation rather than a rearrangement. Models of change,
processes, and change agent skills will be explored. This section will
then flow into leadership and exploration will be made of:
- issues in leadership
- challenging the processes
- inspiring a vision
- enabling others
- creating an energy flow
Textbooks
As a guide:
Kouzes, J.M. and Posner, B.Z. The Leadership Challenge. San
Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1987
Morgan, G. Riding the Waves of Change. San Francisco: Jossey Bass,
1988
BM601 Marketing Management 2
Prerequisites, BM501 Marketing Management 1,
BQ504/BQ505 Quantitative Methods, and BE501
Economics
A second-year subject in the Graduate Diploma in Business
Administration.
This unit builds upon the knowledge that students have gained from
Marketing Management 1, especially in respect to the marketing concept,
the marketing planning process and the elements of the
marketing mix.
The aim of this unit is therefore to study various issues in marketing
with special reference to:
- the fundamentals of marketing research;
- identifying the value of additional information and how this
information can be used;
- the practical and theoretical ,issues of international marketing;
- involving the student in practical Issues through the use of case
studies, assignments and group presentations.
Faculty of Business
Method of instruction
Particular emphasis is placed upon the use of case studies to complement
the lecture material. Students are expected to participate
actively throughout the semester, and are required to present both individual
as well as group assignments.
Course framework
The main topics include:
- marketing research: costs and benefits, marketing research
strategy, evaluation of results;
- international business.
Textbooks
Nil.
References
Topic reference will be given in class for the specific marketing applications
covered.
BM602 Strategic Management
Prerequisite, nil
A fourth semester subject in the graduate diploma in management
systems.
Objective
The course provides students with an understanding of the management
problems involved in developing strategic policies for organisations
in both the public and private sectors.
The student is given a practical understanding of how the strategic
planning process works. how corporate objectives are developed and
how these are translated into strategic - . plans.
Emphasls IS shared between theoretical considerations, the practical
problems of case studies and discussions of DreDared readinas to hel~
students learn how to employ strategy in sel;?cti;lg appropriaie admiiistrative
policies and in securing their effective implementations.
Students are expected to participate actively during the semester and
are required to present individual and group presentations.
Textbooks
Detail will be provided at the first session.
References
Hofer, C.W. and Schendel, D. Strategy Formulation: Analytical ConceDts.
St. Paul. Minn: West Pub. 1978
~teiner, A. strategic Planning. New York: The Free Press, 1979
Steiner, G.A., Miner, J.B. and Gray, E.R. Management Policy and
Strategy. 3rd edn, New York: MacMillan, 1986
BM603 Business Policy
Prerequisites: because of the nature of this unit,
Business Policy is taken in the final semester of the
course.
Candidates must have completed all of Group A units
and two of the Group B units before commencing this.
Aims
This unit is studied in the context of a dynamic global environment
of social and technological change. All basic business skills must be
integrated for strategic planning and the other MBA units will thus be
utilized.
Specific objectives of this unit are:
(a) To introduce the strategic planning process and the range of
techniques used in business planning.
(b) To develop skills in using a variety of frameworks for making
strategic decisions.
(c) To emphasise the importance of the current development phase
of the industry in which an enterprise operates as a basis for
appropriate strategy development.
(d) To develop skills in organising for effective business planning and
for the implementation of the business planning process.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
(i) The nature of corporate objectives, hierarchy and conflict of
objectives, personal dimensions of objectives, management by
objectives.
(ii) Analytical frameworks for business planning and their bearing on
the content of business plans and the process of planning.
(iii) Defining the business, the central strategic issue of 'What
business are we in?'
(iv) The search for opportunity including Scenario Analysis.
(v) Industries and their evolution: competitive advantage.

(vi) Planning for entry into new industries and new markets.
(vii) The Business Plan:
Management expectations of a business plan
Criteria for an effective plan
Preparing for business plan
Defining the business situation
Establishing the value proposition
Defining the business strategy and action programs
Establishing the key processes and tasks
Establishing monitoring procedures
Updating of the business plan.
Texts or References
Bwue Ill. M.C. and Buffa. E.S. Cormte Strateoic Analvsis. New York:
he ~ree Press, 1986
Christensen, C.R. et al. Business Policy: Text and Cases. 6th edn,
Homewood: Irwin. 1987
Kanter, R. The changemasters. London: Unwin, 1985
Ohmae, K. The Mind of the Strategist: The Art of Japanese Business.
Harmondsworth: Penguin. 1983
Peters, T.J. and Waterman, R.H. In Search of Excellence. New York:
Harper and Row, 1982
Porter, M. Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior
Performance. New York: The Free Press, 1985
Porter, M.E. Competitive Strategy. New York: The Free Press, 1980
Quinn, J.B., Mintzberg, H. and James, R.M. The Strategy Process:
Concepts, Contexts, and Cases. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1991
BM604 Data Collection Methods and
Applications
A third-semester subject in the graduate diploma course
in market forecasting
Objective
This unit seeks to explore the options available in the collection and
application of data and survey material. The unit also aims to provide
a working knowledge of practical research methods.
The nature and role of social and marketing research as an aid in business
forecasting and management decision-making is examined, with
attention being paid to the ethics and standards which must be
observed in carrying out research projects.
Research design (including costlbenefit analysis) and the various qualitative
and quantitative data collection methods are studied, together
with survey sampling techniques. Important also is an overview of
sources of survey errors. In addition to data collection methods, techniques
for the analysis of survey data using SPSSX and appropriate
statistical tools are provided. Course participants will be expected to
make both oral and written presentations of survey results.
References
Details will be provided at the first session.
BQ601 Financial Modelling
The aim of this unit is to enable students to appreciate, and gain
practice in the application of, a range of computer based analysis
methods as components of a decision support system.
Throughout the unit, extensive use will be made of computer packages
and particular emphasis will be given to current developments in computing
that relate to finance and financial management.
Topic coverage includes:
Decision support systems, expert systems, micro-computers and
current software developments, financial modelling using languages
(e.g. FORESIGHT) and spreadsheets (e.g. LOTUS 1-24), graphics, use
of expert system shells, public data bases, approaches to risk analysis,
evaluation and selection of computing systems.
References
Software documentation, user manuals and current journal articles
will provide the major reference material for the unit.
Market Forecasting - 2
Prerequisite, 80506 Market Forecasting 1
Market Forecasting 2 concentrates on the area of causal forecasting
and commences by introducing the techniques of simple and multiple
regression. The development of hypotheses, establishment of appropriate
models and their subsequent estimation is considered in the
context of a number of case studies, centred on forecasting market
share and demand at varying levels of aggregation. Additionah, some
of the more common oroblems assoc~ated with these aDDr0acheS are
considered and cures investigated. The difficulties of producing forecasts
per se are also dealt with.
Course participants are also introduced to structural and input-output
models from a users point of view. Again, considerable use will be
made of data bases and computer packages.
Textbook
Makridakis. S.. Wheelwright, S.C. and McGee, V.E. Forecasting
Methods andApplications. 2nd edn, New York: John Wiley and Sons,
1983
References
Bails, D.G. and Peppers, L.C. Business Fluctuations: Forecasting Techniques
and Applications. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall,
19R7
Bowers. D.A. An Introduction to Business Cycles and Forecasting.
Readin Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1985
raper,%. R. and Smith, H. Applied Regression Analysis. 2nd edn, New
York: John Wiley and Sons, 1981
Other reference books plus selected journal articles will be suggested
at appropriate stages in the course.
BQ605 Market Forecasting 3
Prerequisite, 80604 Market Forecasting 2
There are two main areas considered in this section of the course:
the use of Markovian and Demographic methods of forecasting.
Markov~an models are examined in-the context of areas such as branch
switchinq, market share forecast~nq - and for modellina - social Drocesses
and obtaining forecasts.
Demographic analysis techniques will be utilised to describe and forecast
events such as births, deaths, rniqration, entrv or exit from school
or the labour force, together with othe? important socio-economic and
soc~ological processes.
References
Bartholomew, D.J. Stochastic Models for Social Processes. 3rd edn,
London: John Wiley and Sons, 1982
Pollard, A.H., Yusuf, F. and Pollard. G.N. Demographic Techniques.
3rd edn, Sydney: Pergamon Press, 1990
Rowland, D.T. Internal Migration in Australia. Canberra: Australian
Bureau of Statistics, Census Monography Series, 1979
BT601 Systems Project Management
Unit objectives
After completing this unit, students should be able to:
- understand the main reasons for success or failure of data processing
projects;
- co-ordinate the skills of a svstems develo~menteam. users and
operators,
- evaluate both the feas~b~l~ty of suggested projects and the v~ab~l~ty
of suaaested solut~ons.
- apprcsate the problems and principles of project planning and
control;
- plan and control the implementation of new systems.
Unit structure
Topics covered include:
- project teams and their behavioural development
- project leadership
- project planning and control
- project administration
- progress and quality reviews
- systems development productivity techniques
- the implications of changing systems
- implementation of systems projects
No formal prerequlsltes are spec~f~ed However, 11 w~ll be assumed that
cand~dates have a prbor knowledqe of the svstem devel0Dment Drocess
equivalent to that gained from completing BT503 software
Engineering Strategies.

References
Gilb. T. Princi~les of Software Enaineerinq - Manaaement. Wokinqham:
Add/son wesley, 1988
Keen, J.S. Managing Systems Development. 2nd edn, New York: John
Wiley & Sons. 1987
Thomsett. R. People and Project Management. New York: Yourdon,
1980
BT602 lnformation Systems Management
Course objectives
At the completion of this unit, the student should be able to:
- specify the organisation and operation of a modern information
systems division in terms of its functional units;
- define and use performance criteria for the information systems
function;
- introduce and control new developments in information technology
in the organisation;
- negotiate the acquisition of new hardware and software;
hire, fire, control, support and develop information systems staff;
- implement tools and methods for the more efficient operation of
the information systems function.
No formal prerequisites are specified. However, it is assumed that candidates
have a prior knowledae of administrative theorv . and . practice
and of computer systems. -
Course structure
The final selection of topics is made from the following, depending
on the students' interests: the I-S function -objectives, organisation,
performance; operations management; capacity management and
planning; the user interface, end-user computing, office automation;
negotiating; human resources management; productivity tools.
References
Jackson. I.F. Coroorate Information Management. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall, 1986
Lucas, H. Managing lnformation Services. MacMillan, 1990
McNurlin, B.C. and Sprague. R.H. (eds) lnformation Systems Management
in Practice. 2nd edn, London: Prentice Hall International, 1989
BT603 Management Systems
Course obiectives
- -
This unlt cov'ers the theory of management lnformation systems and
their a~olicatlon for decision-rnaklna In oraanlsatlons The student
should'~be able to:
- identify the decision requirements for the management of an
organisation;
- analyse and develop the process of planning for information
systems;
- measure the effectiveness of an orqanisation's - decision support . .
system;
- develop support systems for the management of knowledge work;
- evaluate the social implications and technical feasibility of an information
system.
Candidates usually take this unit in the final semester of the Graduate
Diploma in Management Systems.
Course structure
Management information systems; the development of management
information systems, decision support systems and knowledge based
systems; technical considerations; social considerations.
Students will be required to evaluate management systems and the
supporting infra-structure within their own organisations.
References
No single book covers the full scope of the course. The texts to be
used as references will include:
Cash, J.I. et a/. Corporate lnformation Systems Management.
Homewood: Irwin, 1983
Davis. G.B. and Olson. M.H. Management lnformation Systems. 2nd
edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1985
Hussain, D. and Hussain, K.M. lnformation Processing Systems for
Management. 2nd edn, Homewood: Irwin, 1987
Kanter, J. Management lnformation Systems. 3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey: PrenticeHall, 1984
McNurlin, B.C. and Sprague, R.H. (eds) lnformation Systems
Management in Practice. 2nd edn, London: Prentice Hall International,
1989
183
Faculty of Business
BT606 Data Base Management Strategies
Prerequisites, BT506 lnformation Analysis and
BT507 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
By the end of this unit the student will be able to:
- implement a logical data base design in a selection of DBMSs;
- design and program transactions against the data base;
- include appropriate security, integrity and recovery functions in
the above.
Topics
This unit builds upon the logical design concepts taught in lnformation
Analysis in covering the implementation considerations of a number
of DBMSs. The students' acquaintance with SOL from that unit is also
built upon the coverage of Relational Data Bases.
Textbook
Shepherd, J.C. Database Management: Theory and Application. 1st
edn. Homewood: Irwin, 1990
References
Date, C.J. An Introduction to Database Systems. 5th edn, Reading,
Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1990
Kroenke. D. Database Processing. 3rd edn, Chicago: SRA, 1988
McFadden, F.R. and Hoffer, J.A. Data Base Management. 2nd edn,
Menlo Park, California: BenjaminlCummings, 1988
BT607 Data Communications and Office
Automation
Prerequisite, BT507 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
At the completion of this unit students will be able to:
- demonstrate a sound knowledge of the basic concepts and
components involved in data communications;
- demonstrate an understanding of the various technologies used
in the electronic office and how office automation can increase
the efficiency of knowledge workers;
- demonstrate an understanding of communication protocols and
their relation to system performance;
- demonstrate an understanding of the goals and structure of the
IS0 reference model for computer network protocols;
- show a good knowledge of the data communication services and
facilities provided by the common carriers;
- demonstrate an understanding of how data communications
benefits an organisation and how this function is managed.
Textbook
Housley, T. Data Communications and Teleprocessing Systems. 2nd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Ma'or Reference
Sta/lings. W. Business Data Communications. N.Y.: MacMillan, 1990
Supplementary References
Black, U.D. Data Communications Networks and Distributed
Processing. Reston: Virginia, 1983
Gibson, H.L. and Rademacher, R.A. Automatedoffice Systems. New
York: Holt Rinehart and Winston, 1986
Halsall, F. Data Communications, Computer Networks and OSI. 2nd
edn. Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, 1988
Stamperj D.A. Business Data Communications. 2nd edn, Redwood:
Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co., 1989
BT608 Systems Development Strategies -
Prerequlsltes. BT 606 Data Base Management Systems
and BT607 Data Commun~cations and Offlce Autornatlon
This unit will build on the technical knowledge gained in earlier units
and provide students with an understanding of the various ways in
which the total corporate computing environment can be designed to
meet corporate information needs and support corporate goals.
Objectives
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
- understand the way that managers think and work and the need
for computer systems to improve their effectiveness in
decision-making;
- justify the need for careful analysis, risk assessment and control
procedures sultable for diflerentsystem development approaches;
- descrlbe the methodoloales In use in oraanlsations and determine
the correct developme6t approach for-different systems;
- understand the need for different approaches to computer systems
development to ensure that corporate lnformation needs are met
and computing productivity is maximized.

Topics covered include:
- information systems theory;
- decision support systems;
- traditional life cycle development;
- problems with traditional life cycle development;
- application packages;
- the user interface;
- user driven computing;
- fourth generation languages;
- prototyping;
- Computer Aided Software Engineering (CASE) tools;
- participative design;
- information systems issues for management
Textbook
To be advised.
References
Behan, K. and Holmes. D. How to Pick a Package. Melbourne: The
Ultimate Corp., 1987
McNurlin, B.C. and Sprague, R.H. (eds) lnformation Systems
Management in Practie. 2nd edn, London: Prentice-Hall International,
1989
Schreiderman, B. Designing the User Interface - Strategies for Effective
Human-Computer Interaction. Reading. Mass.: Addison-Wesley
1987
Sprague. R.H. and Carlson, D. Building Effective Decision Support
Systems. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1982
BT609
Knowledge Based Systems
Prerequisite. &506 Information Analysis and experience
in at least one programming language.
A knowledge of LOTUS 1-2-3 and dBASE would also be useful.
In thls unitihe students develop an understanding of the nature and
uses of expert svstems in business. The unit involves ~ractical work
using the experi system building tools, VP-Expert and ESE.
A second-year unit in the graduate diploma business information
technology course.
Topics covered
- what expert systems are. how they are developed and who is using
them;
- how expert systems differ from conventional software programs,
human beings who perform tasks expertly and artificial intelligence
programs;
- various forms of knowledge representation;
- principles of frame-based systems;
- basic concepts of artificial intelligence and knowledge engineering
that affect design and implementation;
- knowledge base design;
- evolutionary process of knowledge acquisition needed to put
expertise into a machine;
- principles of rule based systems and induction systems;
- handling of uncertainty;
- inference;
- VP-Expert (on PC) and ESE (on IBM mainframe);
- comparative strengths and weaknesses of existing knowledge
engineering tools for end users and professional ckevelopersy
- the pitfalls and opportunities that arise from the important need
to evaluate artificial expertise;
- computers and natural language;
- introduction to neural networks.
Text books
Harmon, I? and Sawyer, B. Creating Expert Systems for Business and
Industry. New York: Wiley, 1990
Harmon, P. and King. D. Expert Systems: Artificial Intelligence in
Business. New York: Wiley, 1985
References
Friederich, S. and Gargano, M. Expert Systems Design and
Development using VP-Expert New York: Wiley, 1989
Gem, J. et al. (University of NSW) Expert Systems and Their
Applications. Audio-visual, Kensington, N.S.W.: Continuing Education
Support Unit, 1986
Harris and Davis. A1 Enters the Marketplace. Middlesex: Bantam Books,
1986
Manasi, M. Expert Systems for a Rainy Day. ACExpert (ISSN 74470
19557). February 1990, pp. 13-15
Rauch-Hindin, W.B. A Guide to Commercial Artificial Intelligence.
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1988
Silverman, B.G. Expert System for Business. Massachussetts: Addison-
Wesley, 1987
BT611 Systems Software
Prerequisite, completion of second year data processing
units
This unit concentrates on a comparison of the operating systems
MVSIXA and UNlX after giving students a general introduction to the
principles and types of operating systems.
Both UNlX and MVSIXA are discussed from the perspective of how
they manage computer systems resources, what types of software
facilities are provided to users. Students are given both theoretical
exercises and practical exercises in the use of the MVSIXA and UNlX
operating systems.
Textbook
Deitel, H. An Introduction to Operating Systems. 2nd edn, Reading,
Mass: Addison-Weslev. 1990
References
Trombetta, M. and Finkelstein, S. MVS JCL & Utilities. 2nd edn.
Readina. Mass.: Addison-Weslev. 1989
~anufGturers manuals
BT612 Advanced Programming
Prerequisite. BT507 Computer Programming
Unit objectives
This unit introduces students to the programming language C in both
the PC and mainframe environments. It examines the structured
programming paradigm and demonstrates the object-oriented
paradigm using C+ +.
Syllabus
introduction to C
simple data types
structured programming methodolgy
algorithms - sorting, searching and file processing
recursion vs iteration
structures
data structures - arrays, stacks, queues, lists and trees
the C++ programming language
object-oriented software design
Assessment
2 Programming Assignments 20%
2 Fortnightly Tests 30%
Final Exam (closed book 2hr) 50%
A pass in the final exam AND an overall score of 50% for the tests
and assignments is required to gain a pass in this unit.
Teaching method
Lectures
Lab Sessions
2hrdweek for 13 weeks
2hrdweek for 12 weeks

Masters units
88701 Management 2: (Resources)
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: Normally all units taught in the first term
of the course. This unit is compulsory (conversion
students excepted).
Aims
The basic objective of this unit is to provide a broad understanding
of. and some basic oractical skills for, the effective planning, acquisition
arid control of hunian, financial material and information resources
in an organisation. The technological implications of this unit will be
complemented by study of the place of innovation and internationalism.
Issues addressed will be seen to draw from, and contribute to, other
units in the course.
Specific objectives include:
(a) To provide an introduction to the process of planning an
organisation's needs for all categories of resources.
(b) To provide an introduction to the methods of acquiring the various
resources needed.
(c) To provide an introduction to the key concepts involved in
monitoring, reviewing and controlling the use of resources.
Content
The unit will emphasise the largely integrated nature of resource
management from the point of view of general management.
(i) Planning Resource Requirements.
(ii) Acquiring Resources: lnformation as a corporate resource
Human - the nature and role of the personnel function in
attracting, retaining and motivating competent employees.
Financial - acquiring an appropriate financial mix including short
termllong term funds, debtlequity, local and foreign currency etc.
Mechanics of fund raising, sources of advice etc.
What is happening In financial markets now
Caoital lnvestment - aooroaches to selection of investments in
pla'nt and equipment, buiidings, R&D and other long term assets.
Materials - sourcing materials, parts and other non capital
resources.
Implications of international sourcing of materials, personnel,
information, finance and capital assets both for domestic use and
in overseas operations.
(iii) Controlling Resource Use: Key Concepts in control of human,
financial and materials resources:
Use of financial and non financial indicators.
Accounting and management reporting systems.
Texts or References
Brealey, R.A. and Myers, S.C. Principles of Corporate Finance. 3rd edn,
McGraw-Hill, International Editions, Finance Series, 1988
Earl, M.J. Management Strategies for lnformation Technology. New
York: Prentice-Hall. 1989
Emmanuel, C. and Otley, D. Accounting for Management Control.
Berkshire: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1985
Howell, R.A. and Soucy, S.R. Capital lnvestment in the New
Manufacturing Environment, Management Accounting. November
1987, pp. 26-32
Howell, R.A. and Soucy, S.R. Operating Controls in the New
Manufacturing Environment, Management Accounting. October 1987,
pp. 25-31
Schuler, R.S. et al. krsonnel/Human Resource Management in
Australia. 3rd edn, Sydney: Harper & Row, 1988
Smith, A.N. and Medley, D.B. lnformation Resource Management.
Cinncinnati: South-Western, 1987
Stern. J.M. and Chew, Jr. D.H. (eds) The Revolution in Corporate
Finance. Oxford: Blackwell, 1986
Welsch, G.A. et al. Budgeting, Profit Planning and Control. 5th edn,
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1988
88702 Management 3: (Ideas)
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: Normally all units taught in the first term
of the course. This unit is compulsory for all students.
Aims
The basic objectives of this unit are to develop an attitude towards
business that encourages and supports innovation and creativity as
essential cornponents%f successful business, and to provlde some
basic oractical skills for the manaaement of ideas withln the business.
internationalism and technology Gill be inherent themes, and the unit
will draw on the knowledge gained in other units of the MBA.
185
Faculty of Business
Soecific obiectives include:
(a) To establish a framework that encourages managers to seek out.
encourage and utilise opportunities for creativity and innovation
to aenerate - sustainable competitive advantage.
(b) To examine some of the methods for generating high value-added
products (goods or services) through the application of
ideaslintellectual skillslcreativity.
(c) To develop the skills and knowledge necessaly for managers and
their enterprises to regpond positively and creatively to changes
in their operating environment.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
. li) , The imoortance of innovation in business operations:
encouragement and management of innovation, new product
development, process innovation, and R&D.
(ii) Market driven behaviour: making marketable products rather than
customary or easily-made products; creation of new markets.
(iii) Building ideas into products: product design quality, production
quality control, image, support and service, manufacturing
technologies, productivity.
(iv) Entrepreneurship and intrapreneurship: new ventures, judgement.
risk taking; managing and decision support in an uncertain
environment.
(v) Management of innovation: seeking opportunities in a changing
environment: adaptina manaaement styles and the organisation -
to fit change and'to encourage innoviive ideas.
Textbooks
Foxall. G.R. Cor~orate Innovation: Marketing & Strategy. -. Kent: Croom
Helm '~td., 1984
Twiss. B.C. Managing Technological Innovation. 3rd edn, Essex:
Longman, 1986
Reference
Tushman. M.L. and Moore, W.L. Readings in the Management of
Innovation. Boston: P~tman. 1982
BC701 Accounting for Management
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: None. This unit is compulsory.
Aims
The aim of this unit is to develop the student's ability to effectively
use accounting information in the management of a business.
More specific objectives include:
a) developing a framework of key concepts necessary for the
interpretation and use of accounting information;
b) developing the student's ability to identify and use relevant
information for particular management functions and tasks;
c) developing the student's understanding of how accounting
information reauirements varv wlth the nature of the business.
This unit will be designed and taught so as to incorporate the MBA's
emphasis on the places of innovation, technology and internationalism
in business, and so as to link closely with other units in the MBA.
Content
The outline of content below contains both a general outline of content,
which can be aoolied to anv oraanisation. and an indication of how
this content will'be related t6 orcanisations influenced by the themes
of technology, innovation and internationalism that underly the MBA
program.
a) General Outline of Content
(I) lntroductlon to role of accounting in management and key
conceots needed for an understandina of that role - cash
flow, 'revenue, expenses, income, assets, liabilities.
accounting reports and financial statements.
(ii) Assessing performance - analysing profitability, liquidity and
leverage and their relationship to the nature of the business.
(iii) Cash Flow.
(iv) Costing Systems.
(v) Budgeting.
(vi) Management Reporting Systems.
(vii) Decision Making.
Texts or References
Emmanuel, C. and Otley, D. Accounting for Management Control.
Berkshire: Van Nostrand Reinhold (UK), 1985
Hoggett, H.J.R. and Edwards, L. Accounting in Australia. Brisbane:
John Wiley & Sons, 1987
Texts or References cont. overleaf.

Horngren, CT. and Foster, G. Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis.
6th edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of
Management Accounting. Boston, Mass.: Haward Business School
Press, 1987
Lee, John Y. Managerial Accounting Changes for the 1990's. Reading,
Mass.:Addison Wesley, 1987
McDonald, R.C., Cooper, R.G. and Astill, B.J. Accounting for the Non-
Financial Executive. 2nd edn, Auckland, NZ: Longman Paul, 1983
BE701 Economics for Management
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: None. This unit is compulsory.
Aims
The basic objective of this unit is to provide an understanding of
economic issues relevant to management and the appl i cation of
economic concepts to effective decision making.
Specific objectives include:
(a) To provide an understanding of the economic environment in
which business operates.
(b) To develop skills in interpreting economic reports and policy
statements and in evaluating the implications of government
policies for managerial decisions.
(c) To encourage appreciation of the linkages between different
economies and the impact of changes in the international
economy on specific markets and industries.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
(i) Economics and efficiency
- critical economic concepts for management
(ii) Management, industry and government
- market structure, conduct and performance
- performance indicators
- policies for improved performance
- government and industry policy
- adapting to structural change
(iii) The macroeconomic environment
- key macroeconomic variables
- sources of information on economic performance
- influences on the level of economic activity
- economic fluctuations
(iv) The international environment
trade and capital flows
- the determination of exchange rates
- managing foreign exchange exposure
- international financial markets
- implications of the international economy for managerial
decision making
Texts or References
Drake, P.J. and Nieuwenhuysen, J.P. Economic Growth for Australia.
CEDA Monograph M88, Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 1988
Economic Roundup, The Treasury, Selected Publications
The Economist
Indecs. State of Play 6. Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1990
Keating, M. and Dixon, G. Making Economic hlicy in Australia,
1983-1988. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1989
Re~e~e Bank of Australia (Selected Bulletins and Special Reports)
Terry, C., Jones, R. and Braddock, R. Australian Microeconomic
hlicies. 3rd edn, Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1988
BH701
Career and Life Planning
Participants examine, via reflection, discussion and theory, their personal
development and life stage as a basis for considering the
concept of career development and its implications for management.
References
--.-.-. ---
Greenhaus, J.H. Career Management. Chicago: Dryden Press, 1987
O'Connor, P. Understanding the Mid Life Crisis. Melbourne: Sun Books,
Australia -, 19R7
~chein, E. Career Dynamics. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley Publishing, 1978
BH702 Power and Politics in Organisations
Explores the connections between organising, control and influence,
by introducing various conceptions of personal, organisational and
cultural ideologies related to power, authority and politics. Participants
investigate the links between their practice, beliefs and organisational
experience.
References
Lukes, S. Power: A Radical View. London: Macmillan Press, 1974
Mintzberg. H. Power In and Around Organisations. New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall, 1983
Srivasta, S. and Assoc. Executive Power: San Francisco: Jossey Bass,
1986
BH703 Research in Organisation Behaviour
By attempting to answer the questions "what 1s research and "what
1s the ouroose of research" oarticioants exolore the assumotions
underphning various types of're:earch. The'development of appropriate
research skills through hands-on" experience forms the
balance of the subject.
References
Bateman, T.S. and Ferris, G.R. Method and Analysis in Organisational
Research. Reston, Vir inia Reston Publishing Co: 1984
Bogdan, R. and Taylor, 8. Introduction to Qualitative Research Methods:
The Search for Meaning. 2nd edn, New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1984
Judd, et al. Research Methods in Social Relations. Holt, Rinehart
Wilson, 1991
Morgan, G. Beyond Method: Strategies for Social Research. Beverley
Hills: Sage, 1983
BH704 Current Issues in Organisation
Behaviour
A movable feast designed to reflect the current and emerging interests
of participants, staff, visiting faculty and pertinent organisations.
Topics such as total quality control, cultural change, interorganisational
relations, strategic planning and gender issues might
provide a guide to this course.
References
To be assigned as appropriate to the shifting forms of the subject.
BH705 Management of Strategic Change
Prerequisites
Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Management Systems or
equivalent.
BH604 Management. Organisations and People or equivalent.
BM602 Strategic Management or equivalent.
Objectives
To develop ways of understanding factors to implement change
(especially strategic) effectively within an organisation.
To raise awareness of the need to manage change and conflict, the
complexities and ambiguities associated, and the consequences of
various processes of managing them.
To examine the role of the systems manager as a change agent and
when it is appropriate to use external consultantslfacilitators.
Particular emohasis will be aiven to the manaaement of s~ecific oraanisation
changes such as t6e introduction of hice autoination oythe
impact of financial deregulat~on and to their human, technological and
structural consequences.
Syllabus
Topics will include:
Coplng w~th a changing environment, Resource and Environment
Analvsis. Strateaic Plann~na. Conceots of Manaaina Chanae. An Overviewbf
Organisztion ~evebpment. 'Managers& Changehgents. The
Role of Consultants/facilitators. The Information Collection Phase. The
Diagnostic Phase: From Symptom to Underlying Cause. Implementation
of Change Strategies. Planning, Strategic and Operational. Team
Buildina and Develooment. Develooment of Svstems Proiect Teams.
lntergrSp ~echni~ues for addressing interdepartmental cinflicts. The
relationship with Users. Stabilisation of Change.
Textbooks
Fry, D.N. and Killing, P.J. Strategic Analysis and Action. Englewood
Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1986
Judd et al. Research Methods in Social Relations. Holt. Rinehart
Wilson, 1991
Morgan, G. Images of Organisation. Beverley Hills: Sage, 1986
Smith. K.K. Groum in Conflict: Prisons in Disauise. Iowa: KendalllHunt.

BH706 Management 1: (People and
Organisations)
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: None. This unit is compulsory.
As part of the unit, all candidates must successfully complete an
introductory residential seminar of 4 days concerned with the
behaviour of people in small groups and providing an orientation to
the learning process, the course themes, the staff and expectations
of work and outcomes.
Aims
Strategic management requires the direction and control of means
as well as ends. This unit is concerned with the effective management
of the human and organisational means aspect of a strategic plan.
People, their behaviour in organisations, and their management within
organisations, are fundamental to the success of any business. The
basic objective of this unit is to provide knowledge and practical skills
necessary for managing people and a knowledge of the implications
of organisational design options. The course will examine how to
develop proactive attitudes towards innovation, technology and
internationalism in business and organisational structures for the
articulation of these attitudes.
Specific objectives include:
(a) To provide a conceptual framework for the analysis of the
behaviour and management of people in organisations.
(b) To enable students to analyse and understand behaviour and
problems of people, both in small groups and in whole
organisations.
(c) To consider organisational design options and their impact on the
effective implementation of strategies.
(d) To place the skills and themes of the MBA into a human and
organisational context.
(e) To develop the skills of managing people.
Content
The unit is designed so that the many facets of the behaviour of people
in organisations can be explored without losing sight of the essential
interdependence of the sub parts. Within this framework will be
included topics such as:
(i) The concept of organisation design, and its implications for
structure, job design and the interface between people, technology,
and the organisation.
(ii) The role of management, including: varied leadership styles and
their likely consequences, the management of effective work
groups, working with the communication process, managing
conflict and developing a positive self-image.
(iii) The impact of the local and international environment on Australian
business. Comparisons with the management of people in other
countries and cultures (especially Asian).
(iv) An introduction to the practical role of the personnel function in
organisations.
Texts or References
Adler, N.J. lnternational Dimensions of Organisational Behaviour
Boston: Kent, 1986
Bedeian, A.G. Organisations, Theory and Analysis. 2nd Edition,
Chicago: Dryden Press. 1984
French, W.L. et al. Understanding Human Behaviour in Organisations.
New York: Harper & Row, 1985
Kast, F.E. and Rosenzweig, J.E. Organisation and Management. 4th
Faculty of Business
Specific objectives include:
(a) To examine the development of marketing strategies at the product
(middle management) level which is concerned with developing
and implementing marketing plans in regard to positioning,
product policy, pricing, promoting and distributing the product.
commissioning and undertaking research.
(b) To examine the development of marketing strategies at the
corporate (top management) level which is concerned with the
more general concerns of corporate growth and the flrm's overall
product rnlx as Included In the stratealc - marketlna -. ~lannlna -
process.
(c) To develop marketing plans to exploit opportunities and deal with
the threats before they arise.
(d) To examine the development of international marketing strategies;
to evaluate the pros and cons of customerisation versus
globalisation.
(e) To develop export marketing plans and emphasise the differences
between a domestic and an export marketing plan.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
(i) The marketing vision: the external environment.
(ii) The strategic marketing planning process.
(iii) Market information systems and market research.
(iv) lnternational marketing strategies: global thinking in product,
price, distribution and promotional strategies.
(v) Marketing quality and design.
(vi) Marketing pull and technology push.
Textbooks
Keegan, W. J. Global Marketing Management. 4th edn, Englewood
Cliffs: Prentice-Hall lnternational Editions, 1989
Luck, D.J., Ferrell. O.C. and Lucas, Jr., George. H. Marketing Strategy
and Plans. 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall lnternational Editions, 1989
References
(A) Domestic Marketing:
Aaker, D. A. Strategic Market Management. 2nd edn, New York: Wiley,
1988
Berman, B. and Evans, J.R. Readings in Marketing Management: A
Strategic Perspective. New York: John Wiley, 1984
Cohen, W. A. Developing a Winning Marketing Plan. New York: John
Wiley, 1987
(B) lnternational Marketing:
Cateora, PR. International Marketing. 7th edn, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
Kotler, !? Fahey, L. and Jatusripitak, S. The New Competition: Meeting
the Marketing Challenge from the Far East. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-
Hall. 1985
Quelch, J.A. and Hoff, E.J. 'Custornising Global Marketing', Haward
Business Review. MayJune 1986, pp. 59-68
BQ701
Business Forecasting
Prerequisites
Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Management Systems or
eauivalent.
Objectives
edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1985 (i) identify the appropriate approach to adopt for a forecasting
Mintzberg, H. Structure in Fivest Designing Effective Organisations. problem (i.e., differentiate between the approaches of predictive,
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1983
causal and more importantly (for users and workers in the field
Robbins, S.P. and Barnwell. N.S. Organisation Theory in Australia. of information technology) qualitative forecasting (specifically
Sydney: Prentice-Hall, 1989
Technological Forecasting);
Schuler, R.S. et al. Personnel/Human Resource Management in (ii) for selected situations, choose the appropriate approach for the
Australia. Sydney: Harper 8 Row, 1988
problem and be aware of the caveats associated with that choice;
(iii) be able to carrv out a full scale technoloaical forecastina exercise
. . and then, via the medium of a management report, conhunicate
the findings to the appropriate people;
.(iv) . be competent at carlvina out independent research. and reportina
it in an.appropriate manner. '
BM701 Marketing for Management
References
Course: MBA
sails, D.G., and Peppers, L.C. Business Fluctuations: Forecasting
Prerequisites: Normally Management 1; Economics for Methods and Applications. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-
Management; Accounting for Management; Computing Hall, 1982
for Management. This unit is compulsory (conversion Draper, N.R., and Smith, H. Applied Regression Analysis. 2nd edn,
students excepted). New York. Wiley, 1981
Makridakis, S., Wheelwright, S.C. and McGee, V.E. Forecasting Meth-
Aims
OdS The principal objectives of this unit are to provide a strategic orientation for Management- 4th edn, New Wileys
to the study of marketing management and to ensure that candidates
obtain a flrm foundation In marketing concepts.

BQ702 Computer Aided Management
Prerequisites
Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Management Systems or
equivalent.
Objectives
(i)
Develop skills and knowledge in identifying and modelling real
world problems In different areas of management.
(ii) . . Introduce relevant computer techniques relevant to management
pmblems.
(iii) Enable students to apply these techniques to realistic problems
with focus on business operations, planning and control.
Emphasis will be on the interpretation and impact of the solutions.
Syllabus
Overview and lntroduction
- survev of DroblemS inherent in managing computer based informa- -.
tion iystems;
- focus on operation, planning and control issues of information
systems;
- identify situations where computer based management techniques
can be applied;
- overview of various current computer based management
techniques.
Three topics to be selected from the following according to the needs
and interests of students.
(i) Optimisation techniques.
(ii) Inventory and Manufacturing Management.
(iii) Simulation.
(iv) Computer Peformance and Evaluation.
Case study
- Applying techniques to realistic problems.
- Review solutions and impacts.
References
Boggs. IT. (ed.), Numerical Optimisation 1984. Proceedings of The
SIAM Conference on Numerical Optimisation. Philadelphia: SIAM,
1985
Cook, T.M. and Russell, R.A. lntroduction to Management Science.
3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985
Davis, K.R. and McKeown, P.G. Quantitative Models for Management.
2nd edn, Boston, Massachusetls: Kent, 1984
BT702
Knowledge Based Systems
Prerequisites
BT502 Current Issues in Systems Design or equivalent.
Objectives
(i)
Discuss the position of expert systems in the world of artificial
intelligence, and the objectives and development strategy of
expert systems.
.(ii) , ExDlain the difference between conventional software and expert
syitems, including concepts such as plausible reasoning, reasonina
under uncertaintv. and the aeneration of ex~lanations.
(iii) ~Gco~nise and anal60 comm&rcial pmblems to which expert
systems may prwide a solution.
(iv) Select the appropriate tool to apply to a commercial problem from
a ran e including object oriented languages (e.g.: LISP,
PROL~G), microcomputer based expert system shells (e.g.: VP-
Expert, Guru), mainframe based expert system shells (e.g.: IBM's
ESE, Cullinet's Application Expert), or expert system languages
(e.g.: ISR's XL).
(v) Discuss strategies of supervising the development of expert
systems.
belween Al and expert systems. The relevance
of expert systems to business.
(b) Expert systems:
(i) knowledge acquisition;
(ii) architectures.
(c) The range of tools available to build expert systems.
(d) The selection of suitable problems for expert systems solutions.
(e) Managing expert systems development.
(9 Development areas, e.g., natural language networks.
References
Maus and Huggard. The Cap Gemini Reference to Expert Systems.
New York: McGraw-Hill. 1990
Rolstan. Principles of Artifcia1 Intelligence and Expert Systems Develop
ment New York: McGraw-Hill, 1989
Van Lamsweerde, A. Current Issues in Expert Systems. London:
Academic Press, 1987
BT703 lntroduction to Business Software
Course: MBA
Duration: 20 hours
Prerequisites: None
Aims.
The alm of this unit is to:
- introduce students to information technology concepts with
particular emphasis on decision support systems;
- enable students to appreciate, and gain practice in the application
of a range of PGbased analysis methods as a means of providing
information for management decision making;
- enable students to confidently use a number of key software
packages which can be utilized in other areas of the course.
Content
Software and Hardware Components of Decision Support Systems
- Decision support system concepts
- Recent software developments
- Hardware facilities available
- Specific application software available for decision support
analysis
- Recent developments in decision support software
- Mainframe vs PC based decision analysis
Decision Support Software
Spreadsheets
- An appreciation of the nature and role of modelling in the decision
making process, e.g. financial, forecasting, simulation.
- Choosing the right type of decision analysis tool for a specific
applicatior~.
- Using Lotus 1-2-3 for decision analysis.
Students will be expected to acquire the necessary skills needed
to build their own models.
Graphics
- The presentation of information in a graphic format, including
output from modelling packages.
- Using presentation graphics software for effective communication.
Data Bases
- Using corporate data as source material for micro-based decision
support tools.
- Data base packages as a decision support facility.
Students will be expected to acquire the necessary skills needed
to build and query their own databases.
- Availability and accessing of public data bases.
Textbook
As this unit is primarily concerned with the use of application software
and current developments in using micro-computers, text books form
a minor component of reference material.
Software documentation, user manuals and current journal articles
will provide the major reference material for the unit.
It is required that students have access to a PC for work undertaken
outside formal session times.
BT704
Computing for Management
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: A five day program to equip students with
PC skills, and knowledge of packages for use throughout
the course (conversion students excepted).
This unit is compulsory.
Aims
The basic objective of this unit is to provide a broad understanding
of the way in which computing and basic quantitative methods can
assist an organisation to meet its business objectives. The unit will
incorporate the role of innovation, technology and internationalism in
business as a link with the other units.
Specific objectives include:
(a) To provide an overview of the ways in which information resources
and automated information systems may be used in the
management of organisations.
(b) To provide an overview of the ways in which quantitative analysis
may be used in the management of organisations.
(c) To provide an introduction to the range of available information
technologies and their possible application in modern
organisations.

Content
The unit will emphasise the key role which the information resource
plays in the management of a modern organisation. Specific topics
include:
(i) Introduction to the computer as a management tool.
(ii) Computing in the wider organisation including: management of
corporate data, uses of transaction based systems and
management information systems.
.(iii) . The provision of effective automated information systems.
(iv) The technology omions. Including: a review of types of information
systems, personal vs corporate computing, communlcatlons.
Texts or References
Davis, G.B. and Olsen, M.H. Management lnformation Systems,
Conceptual Foundations Structure and Detelopment 2nd edn, New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1985
Earl, M.J. Management Strategies for lnformation Technology. New
York: Prentice-Hall, 1989
Hussain, D. and Hussain, K. lnformation Processing Systems for
Management. Homewood: Irwin, 1985
Jackson, I. Corporate lnformation Management. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall International, 1986
Wry, J. and Medley, D. Management Information Systems. Cincinatti:
South-Western. 1987
McNurlin, B. and Sprague, R. (eds) lnformation Systems Management
m Practim. 2nd - - edn. -~ Enalewood Cliffs: PrenticeHall International. 1989
Nelson. R. End user ~&puting, . - Concepts, Issues and ~pplications.
New ~ork: Wiley. 1989
88801 lnternational Business
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: Normally all units in the first two terms of
the course. This unit is a compulsory part of the MBA
for all students.
Aims
The purpose of this unit is to ensure that managers and prospective
managers are aware of the basics of international business operations
- exporting, importing, licensing, foreign exchange, and foreign
investments, and of the special features of the world economic, social
and political environment in which companies function.
(a) To provide a framework for international business and for the role
of the manager in an international setting.
(b) To raise awareness of the opportunltles in International trade
foart~cularlv * export) . and Investment, and to examlne some of the
obstacles.
(c) To examine some of the most unusual aspects of the economlc
environment of the lnternational operator - the world monetary
system, foreign exchange markets, multinational organisations,
and balance of payments, particularly as they affect Australian
exporters.
Content
(a) The basis for international trade.
(b) The basis for international factor movements.
(c) Barriers to international business.
(d) The world monetary system and foreign exchange.
(e) Balance of payments.
(f) lnternational reach of trade practices.
(g) Foreign direct investment.
lh) Oraanisation of international operations.
(if ~xiort management.
(j) The role of marketing in economic development.
(k) Trading with the socialist economies.
(lj ~lobarmarketlng management.
fm\ Human resource manaaement.
(nj Ethics in international tiiusiness operations.
(0) Cultural diversity and business operations. Financing lnternational
Trade Risk Management and lnternational Business.
(p) Special problems of international operations fmm Australia.
Texts or References
Selvarajah, CT. and Cutbush-Sabine, K. lnternational Business.
Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1991
Wlder read~ng of other textbooks, journals and magazines are essent~al
In th~s unlt For example. Austral~an F~nanc~al Rev~ew. Austral~an
Business, Far East ~conomic Review, Asia Magazine, Business
Review, Columbia Journal of World Business, lnternational
Management and Journal of lnternational Business Studies.
Faculty of Business
88802 Management 4: (Technology and
Management)
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: None. This unit is compulsory for all
students.
. Aimc .....-
The principal aim of this unit IS to prepare managers for operating in
a business environment In which advanclna technoloav is an
increasingly important part of the process of d:ing busin&.
Specific objectives include:
(a) To examine the increasingly important role of technology in the
global and national economies and the consequences of this for
corporate strategies.
(b) To provide some basic skills of technology assessment to assist
in utilising technology within the organisation and in incorporating
technology into corporate strategies.
(c) To examine the influence of changing technologies on the work
environment and to develop ways of minimising adverse
influences.
(d) To manage Organisational Change.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
(a) The importance of technology in national and global economies:
the increase in this importance throughout the twentieth century;
technological levels of the Australian economy and some of the
reasons for Australia's comparatively poor performance;
government policies for increasing the role of technology in
business; implications of this for individual organisations.
~articularlv smaller ones.
(b) Using technology within the organisation: technology life-cycles;
d~ffefing uses df-technology; technological forecasihg; sources
of technology; strategic place of technology with~n the business.
(c) Stages of growth in the introduction and application of technology
in organisations e.g. Nolan Stages of Growth.
(d) The influence of technology on corporate culture: introducing new
technology into organisations; influence of new information
technologies on business practice, management methods and
organisational structures.
(e) The key characteristics of the principal business-related
(f)
technologies: information technology; micmelectron~cs; materials
technology; biotechnology; manufacturing technology.
Relevance of R&D to business success
Textbooks
Earl. M.J. Management Strateaies for lnformation Technoloav. -. New
~ork: renti ice-H~II, 1989 -
Edgar, H. Schein. Process Consultation. 2 Vol.. Reading: Addison-
Weslev. 1987
~oster,.'~. Innovation: The Attackers' Advantage. New York: Summit,
1986
Mathews, J. Tools of Change. Sydney: Pluto Press, 1989
Morgan, G. Riding the W s of Change. Developing Competences for
a Turbulent World. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1988
Timmons, J.A. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's.
3rd edn. Homewood: Irwin, 1990
88804 Management 5: (Management and
Society)
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: None. This unit is compulsory for all
students.
Aims
This unit focuses on the international, national and community context
in which planning and decision making must take place.
The unit aims to encourage successful and socially . responsible .
management by developing:
. la\ , an understandina of the broader social and environmental context
of management:
(b) an awareness of the importance of social legislation and of the
philosophy and values underlying it;
(c) a critical awareness of the traditional assumptions underlying
organisational values;
(d) sensitivity to other value systems including those of other cultures;
(e) an understanding of the impact of value systems on organisational
processes and decision-making;
(f) an awareness of the moral and ethical dilemmas that confront
practising managers.
189

Content
The unit will draw on the experience of participants to examine the
values implicity in management practice and organisational structure
and to investigate the implications for action of those values. It will
seek to locate these values in the broader social and political context
of management, and to explore the nature and extent of the
responsibilities this creates. Accordingly, the following themes will be
addressed:
(i) Introduction: Identifying values implicity in different management
styles, goals, etc.. and examining their underlying assumptions
and theoretical frameworks.
(ii) The context and structure of organisations: social, political,
environmental. Power and control.
(iii) The rationale for social legislation: conceptual, historical and
practical considerations.
(iv) Technology and the formation of organisational values: e.g. the
impact of information technology, technocratic values, etc.
(v) Cross-cultural value differences and the implications for
international business and trade.
(vi) The challenge of the multi-ethnic work force.
References
Selected articles and extracts will be prescribed.
As background reading, the following texts are recommended:
Deal, T.E. and Kennedy, A.A. Corporate Culture: The Rites & Rituals
of Corporate Life. London: Penguin, 1988
Kilmann. R.H., Saxton, M.J., Serpa, R. and Associates. Gaining Control
of Corporate Culture. San Francisco: Jossey Bass, 1985
Ludeman, K. The Worth Ethic: Hmv to Profit from the Changing Values
of the New Work Force. New York: Dutton, 1989
Mathews, J. Tools of Change. Sydney: Pluto Press, 1989
Morgan, G. Images of Ofganisations. Beverly Hills: Sage Publications.
1986
Roszak. T. The Cult for Information. New York: Pantheon. 1986
BH801 Organisation Research Project
Participants are required to write, under supervision, a minor thesis
which focuses on some aspect of behaviour in organisations. Applied
research is encouraged and emphasis is given to a clearly articulated
mode of inquiry.
BM801 Business Planning
Course: MBA
Prerequisites: Normally all units in Terms 1, 2 and 3 of
the course. This unit is compulsory (conversion students
excepted).
Aims
This unit is studied in the context of a dynamic global environment
of social and technological change. All basic business skills must be
integrated for strategic planning and the other MBA units will thus be
utilized.
Specific objectives of this unit are:
(a) To introduce the strategic planning process and the range of
techniques used in business planning.
(b) To develop skills in using a variety of frameworks for making
strategic decisions.
(c) To emphasise the importance of the current development phase
of the industry in which an enterprise operates as a basis for
appropriate strategy development.
(d) To develop skills in organising for effective business planning and
for the implementation of the business planning process.
Content
Topics to be covered include:
(i) The nature of corporate objectives, hierarchy and conflict of
objectives, personal dimensions of objectives, management by
objectives.
(ii) Analytical frameworks for business planning and their bearing on
the content of business plans and the process of planning.
(iii) Defining the business, the central strategic issue of 'What
business are we in?'
(iv) The search for oppportunity including Scenario Analysis.
(v) Industries and their evolution: competitive advantage.
(vi) Planning for entry into new industries and new markets.
(vii) The Business Plan:
Management expectations of a business plan
Criteria for an effective plan
Preparing the business plan
* Defining the business situation
Establishing the value proposition
Defining the business strategy and action programs
* Establishing the key processes and tasks
Establishing monitoring procedures
* Updating of the business plan.
Texts or References
Bogue Ill, M.C. and Buffa, E.S. Corporate Strategic Analysis. New York:
The Free Press, 1986
Christensen. C.R. et al. Business Policv: Text and Cases. 6th edn.
~omewood:'lrwin, 1987
Kanter, R. (1983) The Changemasters. London: Unwin, 1985
Ohmae, K. The Mind of the Strategist: The Art of Japanese Business.
Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1983
Peters, T.J. and Waterman. R.H. In Search of Excellence. New York:
Har~er and Row. 1982
Porier, M. Com@titive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior
Performance. New York: The Free Press, 1985
Porter, M.E. Competitive Strategy. New York: The Free Press, 1980
Quinn, J.B., Mintzberg. H. and James, R.M. The Strateg Process:
Concepts, Contexts, and Cases. 2nd edn, Englewood lliffs, New
Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1991
BT801 Project and Thesis
Prerequisite
Graduate D~ploma in Management Systems or equivalent
Requirements
Candidates will be required to submit a Research project report on
a topic of their own selection. The topic will be related to computerbased
management systems and, dependent on the specific area
covered, an appropriate supervisor will be appointed. In some instances
students may have more than one supervisor. There will be at least
two examiners.
A preliminary proposal of the project to be undertaken must be submitted
for approval by the convening panel of the Masters Program.
There will be a requirement for formal monthly reporting by candidates,
both oral and written throughout the term of the project. Failure to meet
satisfactory standards of progress on a monthly basis may preclude
final submission for the Masters Degree.
To enable other candidates to share the benefits from the applied
nature of the projects, all students in the masters program shall attend
two or three seminars in second semester (open also to the general
public, interested persons and employers) where final year students
will present the salient results of their research.
The duration of the project will be equivalent to four units of the Masters
Degree. The Project will be normally taken in the final year of the
course. Prior to commencing their project, students shall undertake
a short course of study in research concepts and methodologies.
As a guide, the following may be examples of topics appropriate for
research:
- Performance and implementation issues in database crash
recovery;
- Evaluation of information system planning and its relationship to
information systems performance;
- A systems model for improving human factors of computer
environments;
- A strategic planning methodology for a management information
system;
- Designing dependable information systems;
- The effectiveness of knowledge based systems in a commercial
environment;
Attitudes of office personnel towards advanced office technology;
- Expert systems for design problem solving;
- Decision support systems in a manufacturing environment;
- Distributed knowledge based system for an intelligent manufacturing
system;
- Decision support systems using expert system techniques;
- Organisational structures to support end-user computing.

Academic staff ........................................................
Courses offered ......................................................
Feeder courses .......................................................
Women in engineering ............................................
Cooperative and continuing education ....................
Cooperative education ............................................
Cooperative employers ............................................
Advice to prospective students ................................
Application procedure .............................................
Course requirements ...............................................
Examinations and assessment ................................
Faculty passing scheme ..........................................
Guidelines for part-time study .................................
Enrolment ...............................................................
Publication of results ...............................................
Prizes, scholarships and awards .............................
Short courses .........................................................
Professional recognition ..........................................
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING ..................................
Degree of Bachelor of Technology .......................
SCHOOL OF CIVIL ENGINEERING AND
BUILDING ..............................................................
-Career potential ...................................................
Undergraduate courses
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Civil)............
Diploma of Bulldlng Surveying .............................
Degree of Bachelor of Technology in Building
Surveying ...............................................................
Pbstgraduate courses
Graduate Diploma in Civil Engineering
Construction ..........................................................
Master of Engineering ...........................................
Master of Technology (Construction) ...................
Doctor of Philosophy ............................................
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING ............
-Career potential ...................................................
Undergraduate courses
Degree of Bachelor of Englneering
(Electrical Power. Communication and Electronic.
Computer Systems Engineering) ..........................
hstgraduate courses
Graduate Diploma in Computer Systems
Engineerin .......................................................
Master of t!ngineering (Information
Technology) ...........................................................
Master of Engineering ...........................................
Doctor of Philosophy ............................................
SCHOOL OF INNOVATION AND ENTERPRISE .....
Graduate Diploma in Management .......................
Graduate Diploma in Entrepreneurship and
Innovation ..............................................................
Master of Enterprise Innovation ............................
Doctor of Philosophy ............................................
SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL AND MANUFACTURING
ENGINEERING .......................................................
-Career potential ...................................................
Undergraduate courses
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering
(Manufacturing).....................................................
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Mechanical)
194 Graduate Diploma in Chemical Engineering ......... 214
195 Graduate Diploma in Manufacturing Technology . 214
195 Graduate Diploma in CAD/CAM ............................. 215
195 Graduate Diploma in Computer Integrated .
Manufacture ...........................................................
Graduate Diploma in Maintenance Engineering ...
Graduate Diploma in Air-conditioning ..................
Graduate Diploma in Risk Management ...............
Master of Engineering (by research) ....................
Master of Engineering (Computer integrated
Manufacture) ..........................................................
Master of Technology (Computer lntegrated
Manufacture) ..........................................................
Doctor of Philosophy ............................................
Subject details .......................................................
General lnformation ..............................................
Swinburne Institute Information ...........................

Faculty of Engineering
Dean
Professor L.M. Gillin, BMetE, MEngSc, MEd(Melb),
PhD(Cantab), ASMB(Ball't), FIEAust, FAIM, MACE, AAIP,
MAIMME, MAIM
Deputy Dean (Administration)
N. Zorbas, BE(Hons)(WAust), MEngSc, MEd(Melb), MIEEE,
FlEAust
Associate Dean (Research and Graduate Studies)
Professor J.H. Perry, BSc(Tech)(NSW), PhD(S1tan), MlEAust
Sub-Dean (First Year Studies)
P.J. Roberts, BEng(Melb)
Director, Cooperative Scholarship Programs
J.K. Russell. BE(lnd1. MEnqSc(Melb), FIEAust.
Manager, Continuing Education
S.H. Salem, BScEng(Ains), DipEd(Haw), MEng(VIC),
MIEAust, SME, CMfgE, AlMM
Assistant Registrar (Engineering)
A.L. Dews, BBus(SIT), ARMIT, MAITEA
Administrative Officers
Civil Engineering and Building
B.R. Kidd, MAITEA
Electrical Engineering
J.E. Austin, DipMus(Me1ba)
First Year Studies
H. Kalmus
Innovation and Enterprise
J.E. White, AssocDipPSP(S1T)
Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering
R. Kyprianou
J.C. McMahon
Laboratory Managers
Civil Engineering and Building
S.A. Sciessere
Electrical Engineering
S. Burrows
Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering
V.C. Deeker
J. Georgiou
Academic staff
School of Civil Engineering and Building
Associate Dean of School and Chair of School Executive
R.B. Sandie, BCE, MEngSc(Melb), FIEAust, MASCE, MACE
Leader, Civil Engineering
R.B. Sandie, BCE, MEngSc(Melb), FIEAust, MASCE, MACE
Leader, Construction Engineering & Building
K.J. McManus, AM, RFD, ADC, MCEng, BE, EngSc(Qld),
FlEAust
Leader, Structural Engineering
W.J. Spencer, DipCE, BE(Civll), PhD(Mon), TTTC, MlEAust
Senior Lecturers
F.H. Allen, BE(Civil)(WAust), DipEd, MEngSc(Mon), MIEAust,
MAC1
N.J. Arnott, BE(Civil(Melb), DipEd(SCV), FGS
J. Attard, BSc(Eng)(Lond), MEngSc(Melb), MICE,
MIStructE, CEng
G.B. Frecker, BCE(Melb), PhD(Newcastle), MIEAust, CEng
M. Hatjiandreou, BE(Civil)(Mon), MUP(Melb), MEngSc(NSW)
R.A. Melchiori. BEICivil)IMelb). GradDipT&RP(Melb),
DipEd(HIE), ~ i~~dmin(~i~), ~~ldg(~elb), MIEAUS~'
S.J. Mills, BE(Hons)(Mon), MEngSc(Melb), MlEAust
R.A. Nicholson, BE(Syd), MlEAust
D.I. Phillips, DipCE(SIT), BE(Civil)(Melb), EWS, MlEAust
Lecturers
K.C. Agganval, BScEng(Civil)(Punj),
MTech(Struct~lllT. KanDur). MlEAust
R.M. B'enneti.' ~ ~~~ivhf~elb)
H.J. Calder, BA~~'SC(SUN)(RMIT), ARMIT, MlSAust
B. Chapman, BEn (SIT)
JT. Fowler, ~~ech(guw)(~del), MAURISA, MNUG
D.L. Giles, DipBldg(STC), BE(Adel), MlEAust
A.T.C. Goh, BE(Civil), PhD(Mon), MlEAust
J. Kmita, BSc, MSc, PhD(WROCLAW), MIEAust, ASCE
Part-time Academic Staff
A.H. Boltman, DipCE, DipEd, MlEAust
B.G. Cargill, DipCE(SIT), BComrn(Melb), MEngSc(NSW)
J. Clark, CertTraffEng(NSW), DipCE(SIT), MIEAust, CE
R. d'Argaville, BuildlnspCert, DipTT
D.R. Dendle, Scaffolding Inspectors Cert, DipTT
B. Goold, MBS, FAlBS
A. Kamenev, CertBuildSuw, Reg. Arch.
G.C. Lacey, BCE, MEngSc(Melb), PhDVexas)
J.M. Larnborn, BE(Civil)(SIT), GradDip(Chern)(SIT),
MlEAust .. -
S.J. Mitchell, TechCert, DiplT
J.E. Norrish, BE(Civil)(Hons)(SIT), MIEAust, CPEng
R.M. Souerv. CertArtsfVCC\ICanada). ,.
~~(~ons)(shJ)(~anada)
J.L. Wadsworth, CertBlgSurv, DipBIg(RMIT), DipEd(HIE)
CW -.... Watson. ..- --.., . A. -. m .
P.M. Williams, BA(Qld)
J.E. Wilson, BCE(Melb), MlEAust
School of Electrical Engineering
Associate Dean of School and Chair of School Executive
B.A. Neyland, BEE(Melb), DipEd(FTC), ME(Melb),
llTC(TTC), M l EAust
Leader, Communications & Electronic Engineering
J.F. Larnbert, BE(Hons), MEngSc(Melb), MlEAust
Leader, Computer Systems Engineering
Professor G.K. Egan, BEng, MSc(VIC), PhD(Manc), MIEE,
SMIREEAust, MBCS, MACM
Leader, Electrical Power and Control Engineering
N. Zorbas, BE(Hons)(WAust), MEd, MEngSc(Melb),
MIEEE, FlEAust
Senior Lecturers
B.S. Adcock, DipEE(PTC), BEE(Melb), MEngSc(Mon),
. MIEAud
. -. .--.
J.R.F. Alonso, MSc(WPI), GMIChernE, ARACI, AIChE, ACS,
MIEAust, EIT, PE
I.B. Chapman, BSc(ElecEng)(Durh), MIEE, MIED,
MIEAust. CEna
R. ~luzniak, D~~EE(RMIT), MSc, PhD(Melb), FRMIT, MlEAust
S.T. Fennell, BE(Elec), MEngSc(Melb)
H.A. Irons, BCom, BE(Elec)(Melb), MA(Lanc), MlEAust
W. Lavery, BE(Elec), DipEd(Haw), MEngSc(Melb), MlEAust
C.S. Lee, BEng, MBA, MSc(Elec), MIEE, CEng, PEng, MlES
A. Pitsillides, BSc(Hons)(UMIST), AssMlEE
R. Zurawski, MSc(Elec)(Cracow), PhD(LaTrobe)
Lecturers
R.G. Assadi, AssDipArt(Miami), BScElecEng(Texas), MlEAust
G.P. Banky, BE(Hons), MEngSc(Melb),
GradDipCompStudies(RMIT), MIEAust, MIEEE
A.L. Cricenti, B.Eng(Hons)(Elec)(MeIb), IEAust
H. Gao, BEng(Hons)(ElecEng)(Canton)
I. Hijazin, MSc(Elec)(lll), MIEEE
D. Klimovski, BAppSc(Hons)(Elec)(Melb), IEEE, IEAust
D.V. LaFontaine, DipEE(SIT), BEng(SlT), TTTC(TTC),
MIEAust, GradlRSE
L.H. Neoh, BEng(Elec)(W.A.), PhD(W.A.)
P. O'Donoghue, MAppSc, (Elec)(Melb), MIEE
C. Simpson, BEng(Melb)

Lecturers
G. Bitterfeld, DipEd(lsrael), BScMechEng,
MScMechEng(Monash), MIElsrael, MIEAust, MCMEAust
A. Bodman, BSc, MIProdE, AFAIM, CEng
H.G. Brinkies, DipMet, VDI-lng(Germany),
MEng(SIT), MIEAust, MIMMA, VDI, CEng
V. Bulach, DipMechE, BE(Mech), BEngSc, DipEd,
MEngSc(Me1b). GlMechE
J.S. Chan, BEng, MSc(RMIT)
R. Cummins, ARlC
J.C. Harris, BE(Mech)(Qld), MSc(Mon)
G.R. Hjorth, BE(Mech)(Melb), MlEAust
S.T. Huynh, BE(Chem)(Melb), GradDipCompEng(RMIT),
MEngSc(Melb)
P. lovenitti, FRMIT, MEngSc(Mon), GradlEAust
D.A. Lee, BSc(Eng)Mech, BA, MEd, MIEAust, CPEng
H. Knol, TTTC(Haw), DipProdEng(RMIT), MIProdE,
MIEAust, CEng
R. Mierisch, DipMechEng(SIT), DipEd
J. Mlynek, GradEng(Mech)(Mos), MEng(War), MlEAust
C.L. Peterson, BA(Mon)
A. Sonnenberg, TTTC(Haw), BSc(Melb)
S. Tavrou, BSc(Hons)(UK), MEngCIM(S1T)
D. Toncich, BEElec(Hons)(Melb), MEng(SIT), MIEAust,
CEng, CPEng
J. Wooller, BSc(RAETC), MEngSc(Mon)
J.J. Zagorski, BScEng(London), FIEAust, MIMechE. AFAIM
Part-time Academic Staff
A.L. Hill, DipMechEng(S1T)
J. Huxtable, CertBusSt(OH+S), AssDipAppSc(OH+S), MSIA,
MAlPM
M. Jarman, BEngMech
P.J. de Jonghe, AAll
W.K.R. Johnson, BEMech, GradDipOHM, GradlEAust
H. MacKenzie, BEng(Mech)(SIT)
B.M. McDonald, DipMechEng(CIT), MlEAust
P O'Hannesian, BEngMech, MEngSc
G. Ross, BSc(Hons)(Birm), ChemEng, MEng(Vic),
FIChemE, CEng
J. Roijter, BSc, MSc, MEngSc
K. Singh, Dipl-lng(Germany), BSc(Hons), MScEng
I. Young, BEngMech
Centre for Computer lntegrated
Manufacture
Director
Associate Professor W. Thompson, MEng,
BScEng(Hons)(UK), GradDipEd(Haw), FIEAust,
MIMechEng, MIMfgE, CEng
Education Manaaer
B. Costello, ~~n$~rod)(~ic), GradDipEd(Haw),
CManEng, MSME
Teaching Company Associate
S. Chandler, BEngManuf
Commercial Manaaer
G. Cameron, ~~n~T~anuf), GradDip(Management
Systems), MIEAust, APlCS
Research Manager
D. Toncich, BEElectrical(Hons), MIEAust, CPE
Research Associates
A. Luscombe, BMechEng
S. Pathv. BEnaElect
S. ~ilson, ~~G~,~ech(~ons)
E. Woxvold, BSc
C. Yong, BEng
J. Zhang, BEngMech
T. Cleaw. BEnaMech(Hon.9
D. Flog&&, ~~ng~ech(~on's)
K. Jolic, BEngElect(Hons)
Administration Officer
H. Evans, BBus(Mgt)
Energy Systems Engineering Centre
Director
Professor J.H. Perry, BSc(Tech)(NSW), PhD(S'ton), MlEAust
Courses offered
The Faculty of Engineering includes the schools of Civil Engineering
and Building, Electrical Engineering, lnnovation &
Enterprise, Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering. Professional
courses offered by the Faculty and these schools
are as follows:
Faculty of Engineering
Degree of Bachelor of Technology
School of Civil Engineering and Building
Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Degree of Master of Engineering, by research
Degree of Master of Technology (Construction), by coursework
*Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Civil)
'Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Civi1)lGraduate Diploma
in Managementt
Degree of Bachelor of Technology
Degree of Bachelor of TechnologyIGraduate Diploma in
Managementt
Degree of Bachelor of Technology (Building Surveying)
Fraduate Diploma in Civil Engineering Construction
Diploma of Building Surveying
School of Electrical Engineering
Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Degree of Master of Engineering, by research
Degree of Master of Engineering (Information Technology),
!y coursework
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Electrical Power and
Control, Communication and Electronic, or Computer
Systems)
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Electrical Power and
Control, Communication and Electronic, or Computer
Systems)lGraduate Diploma in Managementt
Degree of Bachelor of TechnologyIGraduate Diploma in
Managementt
Graduate Diploma in Computer Systems Engineering
School of lnnovation & Enterprise
Degree of PhD
Master of Enterprise lnnovation
Graduate Diploma in Entrepreneurship & lnnovation
Graduate Diploma in Management
School of Mechanical and Manufacturing
Engineering
Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Degree of Master of Engineering, by research
Degree of Master of Engineering (Computer lntegrated
Manufacturing), by coursework
Master of Technology (Computer lntegrated Manufacture)
'Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Manufacturing)
'Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Mechanical)
'Degree of Bachelor of Technology
Graduate Diploma in Air Conditioning
Graduate Diploma in CADICAM
Graduate Diploma in Computer lntegrated Manufacture
Graduate Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Graduate Diploma in Maintenance Engineering
Graduate Diploma in Manufacturing Technology
Graduate Diploma in Risk Management
For details of these courses see section for the above school.
* Cooperative courses with periods of industry based learning.
t Combined courses.

Feeder courses
The Faculty of Engineering has an arrangement with the
University of Tasmania at Launceston which enables students
to unde&ke part of a Swinburne engineering degree course
at Launceston. The eauivalent of the first two vears of the
courses in civil, manufacturing and mechanical engineering
and the first year of the electrical course are currently available
at Launceston.
Students who complete these stages successfully are able
to transfer to Swinburne with full credit. There is provision
for students who commence their engineering studies at Launceston
to undertake the two six-month industrial experience
components of their course in Tasmania.
Women in Engineering
Women are still a minority in engineering courses and the
workforce. The Faculty of Engineering actively encourages
women to choose engineering as their career and provides
them with opportunities to form networks with other female
students within the course and female practising engineers.
Many women who become engineers enjoy the variety of
career opportunities that engineering opens to them and
aspects of the work that all engineers share, such as:
- applying science to solve problems;
- working with people;
- helping meet society's needs, such as energy usage; and
environmental issues;
- designing and creating solutions, such as with
manufactured products, structures and community
services.
The alternative entry scheme (described under Admission to
first year degree courses) allows students who have not
chosen the standard maths/science prerequisites in their VCE
to review their career decisions and to enter engineering by
undertaking a more intensive program of mathematics and
science in the first-year of their degree program.
Social and career oriented activities are coordinated with the
Advising Centre for Women and provide opportunities for
women to interact.
Women who would like further information about the engineering
degree program and career opportunities should
contact the Sub-Dean, on 819 8510 or Advising Centre for
Women on 819 8633.
Cooperative and Continuing Education in
the Faculty of Engineering
Manager, Cooperative Placement Service
To be advised.
Administrative Officer
K. Brown
General
Cooperative Education is a development process that combines
the rigour of an accredited academic program with a
period of paid, supervised and relevant experience in the
workplace. This work is an integral part of assessment for the
degree qualification.
A feature of undergraduate courses offered in the Faculty of
Engineering is their cooperative education format. These
courses include components of paid industry based learning
which form an integral part of the education program.
Faculty of Engineering
Cooperative program
Undergraduate courses offered as cooperative education
programs are the engineering and technology degree courses
in civil, electrical power and control, communication and
electronic, computer systems, manufacturing and mechanical
engineering and courses in building surveying. Students are
required to complete twelve months (two semesters) of
approved industry based learning before becoming eligible
for the award of an engineering degree. Six months (one
semester) of approved industry based learning is required for
the award of a building surveying diploma and a technology
degree.
Benefits
Students who undertake a cooperative education course
derive many benefits from their involvement in the . proqram. -
Some of these are:
- academic performance improves following industrial
experience;
- students earn while they learn (recognised rates are paid
during periods of industry based learning);
- students work with professionals on real industrial
problems;
- students are able to sample particular areas of the chosen
branch of their profession before graduation;
- students graduate mid-year when employment opportunities
are more readily available;
- industry based learning gained during the course is an
advantage when graduates are seeking their first jobs.
Placement of students
The Faculty of Engineering is committed to the task of finding
placements for students in cooperative courses. Students may
take initiatives to secure their own iob placements but before
contacting a prospective employer a student must contact the
Manager, Cooperative Placement Service, to determine
wheth'kr ~winb;rne has made an approach to the employer
concerned.
Where all reasonable effort to find a job has been made by
both Swinburne and students, but no placement has been
found, the student may apply to hislher Associate Dean to
reschedule the industry based learning components of the
course.
Students without permanent residence status should be aware
that while the faculty will assist them in finding an industrial
placement, it is frequently impossible to find local employment
for students in this category. These students are advised to
seek placement in their home country and the faculty will provide
information on academic institutions who are able to
provide supervision.
Supervision
While in industry based learning students are supervised by
their employers and a member of the faculty's academic staff
who acts as the student's industrial tutor.

Cooperative employers of
Swinburne engineering students
The following are, or have been recently associated with
courses in civil, electrical, manufacturing, and mechanical
engineering:
Alcoa of Australia Ltd
AMP
APM Ltd
Ar~ec Soanar
ASEA Pty Ltd
Austral Standard Cables Pty Ltd
Australian Iron & Steel Pty Ltd
Australian Portland Cement Ltd
Automation Dynamics
W.E. Bassett and Partners
BHP (Coated Products Division)
BHP (Slab & Plate Product Division)
Burns Bridge Australia Pty Ltd
Caterpillar of Australia
CIG Ltd
ClTRA Constructions Ltd
City of Box Hill
Brighton
Caulfield
Croydon
Doncaster & Templestowe
Essendon
Footscray
Hawthorn
Keilor
Launceston, Tasmania
Melbourne
Mordialloc
Nunawading
Oakleigh
Prahran
South Melbourne
St. Kilda
Waverley
Werribee
Comalco Research
Containers Packaging
Control Data Pty Ltd
Cooldrive lndustries
costain Australia Ltd
CPE Australia
CSlRO
CSR Gyprock
Dandenona Valley Authority
Datacraft pty Ltd-
Department of Housing, Tasmania
Dorf lndustries Pty Ltd
Dow Chemical Australia Ltd
Dunlop Australia Ltd
Eaton Pty Ltd
Enersonics Pty Ltd
Fastron Pty Ltd
J. Gadsden Pty Ltd
Gannon Chrisfield & Associates
Garlick & Stewart
Gas & Fuel Corporation of Victoria
Government Aircraft Factory
Haden Engineering Pty Ltd
Hella Australia Pty Ltd
Henry & Walker Pty Ltd, Darwin
Hoechst Australia Ltd
Holden's Engine & Components Company
Holeproof Ltd
IBM
ICI Australia Ltd
Irwin Johnston & Partners Engineers Pty Ltd
John Connell & Associates
John Holland (Constructions) Pty Ltd
John Scroggie Pty Ltd
Kenworth Trucks
Kodak Pty Ltd
L & L Printed Art
L.M. Ericsson Pty Ltd
Lange Dames & Campbell Pty Ltd
Lectrum Pty Ltd
Lewis Construction Pty Ltd
Lincolne Scott Pty Ltd
LSE Electronics
Magnecon Controls
Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works
Mercedes Benz (Aust) Pty Ltd
Metropolitan Transit Authority
Millar & Merrigan Pty Ltd
Minenco Pty Ltd
Mitford Soil Engineering Pty Ltd
Mobil Oil Aust Ltd
D. Moore & Associates Pty Ltd
Motorola Communications
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
New Zealand Electricty
Newtronics Pty Ltd
Nissan Motor Manufacturing Co (Aust) Ltd
Northern Territory Electricity Commission
O'Connor & Beveridge Pty Ltd
Ogden lndustries Pty Ltd
Parish Engineering Co Ltd
Philip Morris Ltd
Pioneer Concrete Services Ltd
Plastex Corporation Pty Ltd
Port of Melbourne Authority
Preslite Australia Pty Ltd
Professional Australian Systems
Radiant Steel
Raymond Hydraulics
Repco Ltd and its subsidiaries:
- Repco Engine Parts Pty Ltd
- Patons Brake Replacements Pty Ltd
Road Construction Authority
Robert Bosch (Aust) Pty Ltd
Roche Bros Pty Ltd
Rockwell Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd
Roland D.G. Corporation
Ronstan Marine Equipment Pty Ltd
Rural Water Commission of Victoria
Rymer Lighting Pty Ltd
S.R. & R.S. Wales
Selectronic Components
Shell Refining (Australia) Pty Ltd
Shire of Eltham
Healesville
Knox
Lillydale
Sihi Australia
Sontron lnstruments
South Eastern Medical Complex Co
Spurway Cooke lndustries Pty Ltd
State Electricity Commission of Victoria
State Rivers and Water Supply Commission
Stephen Dunn & Associates
K.H. Stramit
Supply Logistics Ltd
Tain Electronics
Telecom Australia (Victoria Division)
TEMCO Pty Ltd
Textron
Tyree Electrical
V.D.O. lnstruments ,(Aust) * Ptv , Ltd
~ic~ail
Victoria Solar Energy Council
Westinahouse Brake & Sianal - Co .(Aust) Ptv Ltd
, <
~illia~s A.J.
Williams G., Warragul
Wilson Transformers
Wood, Bromley, Carruthers & Mitchell Pty Lt d

Zenford-Ziegler Pty Ltd
Organisations who have joined the Coop activities in 1990
A.C.E. Chains
ACL Engines
Aerospace Technologies
Amecon Shipyards
Donald Aitken & Associates
Frankipile Australia Pty. Ltd.
Greer Wire Industries
Hawker de Havilland
Saab Scania
Scope Machinery
Spieth Engineering
T.E.A.C.
Transit Engineering
Vaughan & Associates
Warren & Rowe
Overseas placement
The faculty, co-operates with the following universities in
organising overseas placements:
- Cleveland State University
- Drexel University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
- University of Surrey, Guildford, England
- Northeastern University, Boston, Massachusetts, USA
- University of Cincinnati, USA
- Lawrence lnstitute of Technology, USA
Cooperative graduates offer employers a
competitive edge
Swinburne Institute's cooperative education programs place
students out in industry, in paid work, where they get the
opportunity to look at the realities of their chosen career paths.
Therefore, when they graduate, they join the employer with
the advantage of having had one year of structured work
experience.
This means:
- they are 'results orientated';
- they already understand and accept workplace targets,
relationships and disciplines;
- they are a year older and more mature;
- they have completed a longer course, e.g. engineers have
had three-and-a-half years full-time study with the same
teaching content of a four-year course, plus one year of
supervised paid employment;
- they also bring with them knowledge of the latest technology,
acquired in the course of their studies.
Employers alert to the 'bottom line' advantages will also be
interested in these further benefits:
- by employing a cooperative student for hislher training,
the employer can evaluate a potential graduate's suitability
to the organisation;
- regular and long-term contact between employers and
faculty staff has a beneficial influence on course design
and teaching methods;
- the student promotes the image of the employer's organisation
at Swinburne.
Cooperative graduates bring with them:
- a realistic attitude to work;
- access to professional specialised faculty staff;
- access to Swinburne's high technology facilities including
computer links to international information banks.
For further information, contact the Manager, Cooperative
Placement Service.
Advice to prospective students
Faculty of Engineering
First-year engineering degree
Secondary students considering a professional engineering
course in civil, electrical power and control, communication
and electronic, computer systems, manufacturing, mechanical
engineering or technology, should bear in mind the need to
undertake studies in mathematics and the physical sciences
which will allow them to proceed to a Year 12 course of study
as prescribed in the entrance requirements.
A feature of Swinburne's engineering degree courses is the
common first-year program which enables a student commencing
a course to delay making a final decision on the branch
of engineering to be undertaken until the end of first year.
The subjects comprising first year are intended to form a firm
foundation on which studies in later years are built. Considerable
emphasis is placed on the development of fundamental
scientific principles and an introduction to engineering technology
and techniques.
Another feature of all degree courses is their four-and-a-half
(nine-semester) year cooperative education format. The program
consists of seven semesters of academic tuition in the
Institute plus two semesters of industry based learning. The
course structure for engineering degree courses is shown in
the sections pertaining to the various schools of the Engineering
Faculty.
Second and later years engineering degree
Students who have completed, or partly completed, an engineering
course at another tertiary institution may apply for entry
to an engineering degree course at Swinburne. Applications
in this category are essentially considered on the basis of the
course studied by the applicant and the results obtained.
Enquiries should be directed to the Associate Dean of the
school concerned.
The policy of the Engineering Faculty Board regarding admission
with advanced standing is stated in the section entitled
'Admission with advanced standing'.
Diploma of Building Surveying
secondary students planninito enter the ~ i~6ma of Building
Surveying should bear in mind the necessity for studies in
mathematics and the physical sciences. Eligible appiicants
should have successfully completed a VCE course of study
as prescribed in the entrance requirements.
Students who have completed a Certificate of Technology
course in an appropriate area will be admitted with some
exemptions, as appropriate.
Admission to first-year degree courses
Selection
Applications for first-year are considered by the Engineering
Faculty Selection Officer.
selection is based primarily on academic merit as assessed
bv results achieved in Year 12 subiects, or their eauivalent.
The Selection Officer may also take-into account other factors
such as:
(1) the results of any subsequent tests or examinations
attempted. For example, some applicants may be invited
to undertake a test such as the Australian Scholastic
Aptitude Test, prepared by the Australian Council for
Educational Research;
(2) information obtained from any interviews that the Selection
Officer mav arrange.

Eligibility to apply for entry
'Regular' entry
VCE
To be eligible for consideration for regular entry, you must have
satisfactorily completed your VCE or equivalent in the following
subjects (an average of Grade E or better is required):
English (units 1, 2, 3 and 4)
Physics (units 1, 2, 3 and 4)
8 units of mathematics consisting of the four two semester
blocks:
Space & Number (S&N)
Reasoning & Data (R&D)
Change & Approximation (C&A)
Extensions (Change & Approximation) (Ext. C&A)
The Extensions (C&A) block should be undertaken at units
3 and 4 level and at least one of S&N and R&D should be
undertaken at units 3 and 4 level.
Chemistry (units 1 and 2)
Chemistry (units 3 and 4 is highly recommended)
Approved Study Structures are not normally taken into
account.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation
Program)
VCE(T0P) courses are considered on the basis of an equivalent
course of study to the Year 12 subjects listed above.
Persons who complete satisfactorily, the sciencelengineering
VCE(T0P) course at Swinburne College of TAFE by passing
all of the following subjects are given guaranteed eritry:
English, Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (Science) and Concepts
of Mathematics.
Alternative entry schemes
VCE alternative entry
To be eligible for consideration under Alternative Entry, you
must have satisfactorily completed your VCE or equivalent
(an average of Grade E or better is required), including 6 units
of mathematics consisting of the three two-semester blocks:
Space & Number (S&N)
Reasoning & Data (R&D)
Change & Approximation (C&A)
At least one of the blocks should be undertaken at units 3
and 4 level. The blocks might be undertaken in various
combinations of order and year.
PLUS passes in science subject at units 1 and 2 level.
The first year for students entering under the Alternative Entry
Scheme commences two weeks before the Regular Entry
Scheme with additional work undertaken during the year. In
addition to other engineering subjects, students receive
special attention in mathematics and physics as appropriate.
At the conclusion of the first year program Alternative Entry
students have the same options open to them as do those
entering through the Regular Entry Scheme.
Certificate of Technology
(a) For full-time degree study
Satisfactory completion of a Certificate of Technology in an
engineering field. You may be required to present for an interview.
Students will undertake classes with the students
selected under the VCE alternative entry scheme, but may
be entitled to exemption from some of the engineering
subjects. Eligibility for exemption will be considered on an
individual basis depending upon the particular certificate.
(b) For part-time degree study
Satisfactory completion of a Certificate of Technology in an
engineering field including certificate Mathematics level 2 or
additional satisfactory completion of HSC(VCE or TOP) Mathematics
A or 2 units of VCE Mathematics at units 3 and 4 level.
VCE Physics units 3 and 4 are recommended for students
to have adequate background to successfully undertake the
course.
Mature Age and Trade background
If you have several years of experience andlor a trade background,
you will be considered on your individual merits, however,
you will generally be required to have successfully
completed VCE Mathematics A or 2 units of Mathematics at
units 3 and 4 level. Full-time degree students will undertake
classes with the students selected under the VCE alternative
entry scheme. There is no specific age limit for mature age
in the Faculty of Engineering, but this category is not intended
for persons who have recently completed their secondary
schooling.
Application procedure
In addition to the information given below applicants should
refer to the section entitled, 'Application procedure', in the
general section of the Handbook.
Full-time
With the exception of applicants seeking alternative VCE,
mature-age or other alternative types of entry, applications
for entry to full-time first-year courses must be made through
the Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre, 40 Park Street, South
Melbourne, 3205. The closing date for VTAC applications for
entry is mid-September each year.
Part-time
All engineering courses can be completed on a part-time basis
although not all subjects are available as evening classes.
Application for admission to part-time study in engineering
courses must be made directly to Swinburne and not to VTAC.
Application forms are available from the lnformation Office,
telephone 819 8444.
The closing date is usually the middle of January in the year
of application.
Alternative entry
Applications should be made directly to Swinburne. Application
forms are available from the lnformation Office, telephone
819 8444.
The closing date for applications is usually the middle of January
in the year of application.
Deferment
Applicants offered a place in first year for 1992 may apply
for deferment until 1993. Applications for deferment should
be made in writing and directed to the Assistant Registrar
(Engineering).
Deferment will be virtually automatic for those who apply as
soon as the offer of a place is made. Later applicants may
be asked to give reasons for their request for deferment.
Applicants who are granted a deferment will be notified in
writing by the Assistant Registrar (Engineering).
If a person who has been granted a deferment undertakes
a course in another faculty or another college or university,
the offer of a resewed place will lapse.
Admission to second and later years
Applicants seeking a place in second or later years of an
engineering course as either full-time or part-time students
must apply directly to Swinburne. Application forms are available
from the lnformation Office, telephone 819 8444.
The closing date for applications is usually the middle of
January in the year of application.
Overseas students must also contact the Australian diplomatic
post in their country to make the appropriate visa applications.

Admission to Graduate Diploma and
Masters by coursework courses
Graduate diploma and masters by coursework courses in a
range of specialist areas of importance to engineers are available.
The usual entry requirements are completion of a degree
or diploma in a field of engineering or applied science.
Applicants for these courses must apply directly to Swinburne.
Application forms are available from the Information Office,
telephone 819 8444.
The closing date for applications is usually the middle of
January in the year of application.
Admission to Masters (by Research)
and Doctor of Philosophy
.
courses
-
Applicants for these courses must apply directly to Swinburne.
A letter of application should be written to the Registrar.
Enquiries regarding Masters' programs by research should
be directed to the appropriate school in the first instance.
Admission with advanced standing
A student who has successfully completed, or partly completed,
an acceptable post-secondary course may be admitted
with advanced standing to an engineering course at Swinburne.
The policy of the Engineering Faculty Board with
regard to admission with advanced standing is set out in the
following regulations:
1 General
1.1 The Faculty Board believes that in general students
who have completed satisfactorily, part of an engineering
course at another tertiary institution in Victoria,
or another comparable course, should receive credits
for an equivalent part of the course for which they are
enrolled at Swinburne.
1.2 In the consideration of applications for credit the following
principles will be applied by the Board:
(a) A student should be brought on to a standard
course as soon as possible after entry into the
Institute.
(b) Students should not undertake subjects in
advance of the semester in which thev will enter
the standard course.
(c) Students who have passed a particular level of
a similar course at a different institution may be
admitted to the standard course at the next successive
year's level, either with or without small
amounts of additional course work being
required.
(d) Consideration should be given to the intention of
a series of group of subjects rather than the
details of the content matter of each subject within
such series or group.
(e) A credit may be granted on the basis of relevant
industrial experience.
1.3 For all graduate diploma courses offered by the
Faculty of Engineering, a student must complete at
least sixty per cent of the prescribed total course time
for that particular course at Swinburne.
2 Application
2.1 In applying this policy the Board will follow these
guidelines:
(a) Except in extraordinary circumstances credits are
only approved at the beginning of a course of
study.
(b) Credits are to apply only to a specified course
of study at the Institute.
(c) A credit shall be valid for a particular course and
syllabus and only for the duration of such course
or syllabus.
Faculty of Engineering
(d) In order to qualify for an award in the Faculty of
Engineering a student must complete as a minimum,
an equivalent full-time year in the Faculty.
2.2 In order to request credit, students entering a course
will be required to do as follows:
(a) Register their intention to seek admission with
advanced standing at the time of first enrolment.
(b) Lodge supporting documentation with their
de~artment within six months of reaisterina their
intention.
- -
Course requirements
Class timetables
The syllabus for each of the engineering courses may be
found in the separate sections pertaining to the various
schools of the Engineering Faculty.
Provisional timetables for all years of engineering courses will
be displayed at enrolment. Students should note that these
timetables are provisional only and may be changed depending
on staff and facilities available. Where it is necessary to
change a timetable, details will be posted on the faculty or
school notice-board, as appropriate.
Many subjects are offered as part-time evening classes.
Enquiries regarding subjects available on a part-time basis
should be directed to the Associate Dean of the relevant
school.
Practical work
Practical work forms a significant part of most subjects offered
by the Engineering Faculty.
Students are expected to attend all practical work sessions
(for example, laboratory work, drawing office and field work,
excursions and site visits) and to complete all the practical
work assignments set by the lecturers responsible for a particular
subject. Assignments not submitted by the due dates
may fail to count as practical work completed.
Students should approach their lecturers to find out the details
of practical work requirements in each subject.
Examinations and assessment
Various methods are used to measure student performance
in subjects offered by the Engineering Faculty. These methods
include the use of formal examinations; tests held during, or
at the end of, each semester; project work; assignments; laboratory
exercises, etc. A statement setting out the assessment
and workload requirement for each subject IS issued to
students early in each semester. Each engineering school also
maintains a record of the overall work program for students
in each year group of a full-time course for student and staff
information.
Students are automatically entered as candidates for all
subjects in which they enrol. Students should therefore carefully
check their statement of enrolment which is posted to
them approximately four weeks after the commencement of
each semester.
Students enrolled in subjects spread over both semesters,
for example most subjects in common first-year engineering
degree, should note that mid-year progress reports are displayed
on faculty and school notice-boards by the end of the
first week of second semester. These reports are not formally
published results but are an indication of student progress
at mid-year.
Where a subject is completed in first semester, the assessment
result is published as soon as possible after the end
of semester.
For degree courses with the exception of final year, the
duration of each academic semester will be seventeen weeks
which includes, subject to approved variations:

(a) thirteen weeks of teaching;
(b) an assignment week in each semester; and
(c) formal testslexaminations in the sixteenth and
seventeenth weeks.
The specific weeks devoted to these activities are given in
the Swinburne calendar in the front of this Handbook.
For each subject the total time for formal tests or examinations
per semester will be no longer than 1113th of the formal contact
time per semester.
(Students should also refer to the section entitled 'Regulations
concerning assessment' in the general section of this
Handbook.)
Faculty passing scheme
The revised regulations on passing by years (faculty passing
scheme) are set out below. These regulations have applied
since 1 October, 1990.
1 General
The Faculty of Engineering operates a faculty passing
scheme which ap$ies to: -
(a) full-time undergraduate students;
(b) part-time undergraduate students whose weekly
workload is nine or more contact hours.
A part-time student is one enrolled for subjects which
require a total class, tutorial andlor laboratory contact time
of less than 75% of the full-time course load.
Students who have a full-time workload but who are not
pursuing the course prescribed in the Handbook for the
particular year, must have this course approved by the
Associate Dean of the school concerned before becoming
eligible for consideration under the faculty passing
scheme.
2 Special programs of study
Applicants with 'advanced standing' who are admitted to
full-time studies may be enrolled in special programs of
study as interim measures until they can be enrolled in
the normal groups of subjects. The rules of faculty passing
will apply. Such special programs require approval by the
Associate Dean of the awarding school.
3 Revised faculty passing scheme
This revised has operated since 1 October, 1990 and
applies for all years of undergraduate courses offered by
the Faculty of Engineering, including full-time common
first year engineering or technology.
3.1 Students will enrol only for their individual subjects.
They will not enrol in a Faculty Result code.
3.2 For students to proceed from one full-time year to
another, they must achieve a passing grade (as
defined) in all subjects.
3.3 If, at the end of supplementary assessment, students
do not achieve a passing grade (as defined) in a particular
subject then that subject must be repeated.
3.4 The various grades have been grouped for ease of
understanding.
Passing grades are as follows:
3.4.1 First group
HD High Distinction
D Distinction
C Credit
P Pass
P' Pass (Marginal)
3.4.2 Second group
FP Faculty Pass granted in that subject
SP Passed at Supplementary Assessment
Grades of fail are as follows:
3.4.3 First group
N* Fail (but serious attempt)
N Fail (Outright)
3.4.4 Second group
SN Fail at Supplementary Assessment
3.4.5 Third group
NWD Fail due to late withdrawal
NA Fail no attempt
DNS Fail did not sit
3.5 Students will, prior to publication of results, be
awarded preliminary grades from amongst the first
group (passing or failing) results or the third group
failing results, if applicable.
3.6 Subjects in which a first group passing grade or a third
group failing grade preliminary result, or a deferred
result, has been achieved will be published officially
without further alteration (but without the asterisk, in
the case of P' and N* results).
3.7 The Engineering Courses Committee will consider
special cases recommended by the appropriate
School, or Sub Dean of First Year Studies.
To be eligible to be considered as a special case, a
full-time student should normally have provisional
results of N* in not more than two subjects, where
the total hours per week for these subjects is not more
than seven. For a part-time student to be eligible to
be considered as a special case, the student should
normally have a provisional result of N* in only one
subject, where the total hours per week for that subject
is not more than four.
Students considered in this category will normally
have a positive aggregate rating as calculated by the
Faculty Passing Formula as follows:
where A is aggregate rating,
ni is the number of hourslweek in the ith subject,
z, is the rating in the ith subject.
A student's rating in each subject is determined from
the following table:
Rating
9
D 8
C 7
P 6
P* 5
NU 4
N 1
Where a student recommended as a special case has
been initially granted a failing grade, from the first
group, in one or more subjects, the Committee must
decide, on a subject by subject basis, which of the
following actions will apply:
3.7.1 The grade stands as an "Nu.
3.7.2 The student will be granted a Faculty Pass in
that subject. If so, the grade will be changed
to, and published as, FP. The student will not
be required to repeat a subject for which the
grade of FP has been awarded.
3.7.3 The student will be granted supplementary
assessment in that subject. If so, the grade for
initial publication will be changed to "SUP" to
indicate that the student has been granted
supplementary assessment.
The student will then undertake supplementary
assessment. In the case of first year subjects,
a Summer School system is also available.
Details are set out below.
If the student passe:; the supplementary
assessment, the grade will be changed to "SP"
and the student will nct r~e required to repeat
the subject. If the stuc:-nt fails the supplementary
assessment, the grade will be

changed to "SN" and the student will be
required to repeat the subject.
If a student chooses not to undertake the
supplementary assessment granted in that
subject, the result will revert to the grade
awarded in the initial marking.
The supplementary assessment will not, for the
purposes of exclusion, be regarded as a
complete (i.e. second) attempt at a subject.
4. First Year Summer School Scheme
This revised scheme has operated since 1 October, 1990
and will apply only to full-time common first year
engineering or technology degree students. At the
discretion of Courses Committee, the Summer School
Scheme may be applied in addition to the Faculty Passing
Scheme.
4.1 Students will enrol only for their individual subjects.
They will not enrol in a Faculty Result code.
4.2 For students to proceed from first year to second year,
they must achieve a passing grade (as defined) in all
subjects.
4.3 If, at the end of Summer School (andlor supplementary
assessment, if applicable), students do not
achieve a passing grade (as defined) in a particular
subject then that subject must be repeated.
4.4 The various grades have been grouped for ease of
understanding.
Passing grades are as follows:
4.4.1 First group
HD High Distinction
D Distinction
C Credit
P Pass
P* Pass (Marginal)
4.4.2 Second group
FP
SP
Faculty Pass granted in that subject
Passed at Supplementary Assessment (not
valid for Summer School subjects)
Grades of fail are as follows:
4.4.3 First group
N' Fail (but serious attempt)
N Fail (Outright)
4.4.4 Second group
SN Fail at Supplementary Assessment (not
valid for Summer School result)
SS Fail but student granted Summer School
in this subject
4.4.5 Third group
NWD Fail due to late withdrawal
NA Fail no attempt
DNS Fail did not sit
4.5 Students will, prior to publication of results, be
awarded preliminary grades from amongst the first
group (passing or failing) results or the third group
failing results, if applicable.
4.6 Subjects in which a first group passing grade or a third
group failing grade preliminary results has been
achieved will be published officially without further
alteration (but without the asterisk, if applicable).
4.7 The Engineering Courses Committee will consider
special cases recommended by the Sub Dean (First
Year Studies).
Where a student recommended as special case has
been initially gratned a first group failing grade in one
or more subjects, the Committee must decide:
4.7.1 Whether the student is eligible to be considered
under the provisions of the Faculty Pass~ng
Scheme.
201
Faculty of Engineering
OR
4.7.2 On a subject by subject basis, whether the
student will be granted the opportunity to undertake
Summer School in that subject.
If so, the published result for that subject will
be changed to "SS" indicating that the student
failed the subject but was granted Summer
School in that subject. "SS" is a final grade.
Students will be required to enrol in the
appropriate Summer School subject code(s)
(each of which is the normal subject code with
an "S" suffix).
Students will be awarded results for Summer
School from the first group passing and failing
results.
If, at the end of the Summer School system the
student has a failing grade, the student will be
required to repeat that subject.
If a student enrols in but does not complete the
Summer School granted for that subject, the
result for the Summer School subject will be
awarded from the third group of failing grades.
A student will normally be permitted to
undertake Summer School in a maximum of
three subjects.
The Summer School assessment will not, for
the purposes of exclusion, be regarded as a
complete (i.e. second) attempt at a subject,
however, individual students will be granted the
opportunity to undertake Summer School on
one occasion only.
5 Result categories and percentage scores
The relationship between result categories and normalised
percentage scores is:
Result category Range of scores
HD 85% - 1000/0
D 75 - 84
C 65 - 74
P 50 - 64
N 0 - 49
It should be noted that the above table is used in determining
result categories for all students enrolled in a subject
irrespective of whether the students are eligible for a
Faculty Pass or not.
Additional grades, for which percentage scores are not
applicable, may be awarded as a result of application of the
Faculty Passing Scheme. These are:
FP Faculty Pass
SP Pass at supplementary assessment
SN Fail at supplementary assessment
SUP Supplementary assessment granted for this subject
Guidelines for part-time study
With changes in the courses of study leading to degree qualifications,
some part-time students may be unsure of the
subjects they are required to pass in order to qualify for an
award.
The following guidelines which the Engineering Faculty Board
has established should be used to determine the subiect
requirements for students undertaking courses (including donversion
programs) on a part-time basis:
(a) In general, students who have not at some time discontinued
their course without permission, will follow the course
of study in operation at the time of their initial enrolment
at the Institute and as specified in the engineering section
of the Handbook for that year.
(b) Despite the above, students who are undertaking a course
of study which has been unduly prolonged, or who would
benefit from transfer to a later course of study, may be
transferred by the Engineering Faculty Board on the
advice of the Associate Dean of the student's school.

(c) Students who discontinue study without permission and
who later wish to renew their enrolment at the lnstitute
in that same course will be treated as new students but
will receive such credit for the subjects previously passed
as is determined by the Engineering Faculty Board on
the advice of the Associate Dean of the student's school.
(d) Where subjects have been discontinued since students'
initial enrolment, students will be required to undertake
the presently operating subject equivalent subjects. Information
regarding sup&eded subject equivalents is available
from the Associate Dean of the student's school.
(e) As students will realise, there is often benefit in transferring
from the course of study in operation at the time of
enrolment to a later course of study. With the permission
of the Associate Dean of the student's school, students
may transfer from the course of study for which they are
enrolled to a later course of study but should recognise
that such a transfer may involve the undertaking of some
additional subjects.
Minimum hours for part-time enrolment
The normal load for part-time students is approximately half
that of full-time students, and is typically between 10 and 12
hours of class contact per week.
To enable the Faculty to admit as many students as possible
within its quota limits, a minimum time commitment by parttime
students is necessary. This minimum commitment has
been set at 7 hours per week, unless special circumstances
apply. Such special circumstances include non-availability of
suitable classes, graduate studies, or cases where the
proposed enrolment arrangements lead into a standard fulltime
program. In such special circumstances, the enrolment
requires the specific approval of the head of the awarding
school.
Part-time students who initially enrol for 7 hours per week or
more, and who subsequently withdraw from certain subjects
which reduces their enrolment to below 7 hours per week,
will normally be processed as a total withdrawal from the
course.
Suspension from courses
A student who fails any subject twice will be considered for
exclusion from further study in the course in which that student
is enrolled.
Normally a third attempt at any subject will not be permitted.
A student may repeat full-time studies on a full-time basis once
only during a course, unless special approval is given by the
Engineering Faculty Board.
If an Associate Dean (School) considers that a prima facie
case for exclusion exists, the matter will be referred to the
Engineering Courses Committee sitting as an Exclusions
Sub-committee.
The procedure for considering engineering students recommended
for exclusion is as follows:
1 Based on compliance with the faculty regulations on suspension
from courses, the Associate Dean submits a case
for the possible exclusion of a student to the Engineering
Courses Committee.
2 If the Engineering Courses Committee accepts that a case
exists, the student is advised that hislher status in the
course concerned is to be considered at a subsequent
meeting of the Committee; and that helshe may attend to
present information relevant to the case.
3 The Committee may co-opt representatives when hearing
a case for exclusion.
Enrolment
Although the Swinburne calendar is divided into two teaching
semesters, engineering students need enrol only once for the
subjects they are undertaking in any one year. Where it is necessary
to change the list of subjects entered for at enrolment
a student must complete an Amendment to Enrolment form
available from Student Administration, the Engineering
Faculty Office, or engineering school offices. Students should
note that they must obtain the approval of the Associate Dean
of their awarding school before amending their enrolment.
Applicants offered a place in an engineering course will be
expected to attend for enrolment early in February. Successful
applicants will be notified of enrolment times when they are
offered a place.
Continuing students in engineering courses are required to
present for enrolment during the times set aside for reenrolling
students in December. Students need to check
lnstitute notice-boards for details which are made available
towards the end of second semester.
Enquiries regarding courses to be followed should be directed
to the Associate Dean of the school.
For further information regarding enrolment see the section
entitled 'Enrolment regulations' - in the qeneral - section of this
Handbook.
Leave of absence
Students who have enrolled in a course who wish to take leave
of absence with a view to re-enrolling at the end of a specified
period should apply on an Amendment to Enrolment form.
Leave of absence is granted by the Associate Dean of the
school (or hislher nominee) or Sub Dean for first year or Dean
for faculty courses. Students who have been granted leave
of absence will be notified in writing by the appropriate
Administrative Officer. Enrolment for all subjects for the
duration of the leave will be cancelled automatically.
Full-time students should note that leave of absence is normally
not granted after the completion of first semester.
Applications submitted after first semester are considered on
their merits and student progress reports are taken into
account.
Approval and publication of results
1 General
(a) The Engineering Faculty Board policy is that all engineering
students are informed of their progress as soon
as possible after any prescribed subject has been
completed.
(b) These regulations are normally applied by the Engineering
Courses Committee acting as a sub-committee
of the Engineering Faculty Board.
(c) In special circumstances individual student subject
results may be deferred on medical grounds or other
reasons of hardship. Deferral of faculty results for supplementary
assessment is covered under the 'Faculty
passing scheme'. The period of deferment is determined
in the light of particular circumstances.
2 Programs of study over two semesters
(a) Results for subjects completed in first semester are
approved for publication as soon as possible after the
end of semester.
(b) Where a subject continues over two semesters a midyear
progress report is released by the awarding
school no later than the end of the first week of second
semester.
(c) Results for subjects completed in second semester
are approved for publication as soon as possible after
the end of semester.

3 Pro rams of study over one semester
(a) tecond year undergraduate publication of official
results for first semester may, at the discretion of the
Engineering Courses Committee be held over till the
end of second semester. If so, a provisional result will
be issued by the awarding school at the end of first
semester.
(b) Results for subjects completed in first semester,
~ncluding industrial experience, are approved for publication
as soon as possible after the end of semester.
Awarding of honours degrees
Each year the Engineering Courses Committee will determine
which graduating students should be awarded an Honours
degree.
Four categories of honours will be awarded, viz:
Honours 1
Honours 2A
Honours 28 and
Honours 3
Account will be taken of performance over the whole course,
weighted to the later years. The proportion of final rankings
allocated to each year will be as follows:
5th year 40%
4th year 30%
3rd year 30%
Overall, no more than approximately 40% of completing students
will be awarded honours degrees, with approximately
equal numbers in each category.
Only the first attempt at a subject will be taken into account
in determining the weighted credit point score of a student
for the purposes of the award of the honours degree.
Each school will submit ranking lists to the Courses Committee
for its consideration.
Prizes, scholarships and awards
A complete list of the sources of financial support and the
various awards available to students is given in the general
section of this Handbook. Brief information on awards most
likely to be of interest to engineering students is given below.
Entrance Scholarships
Details of entrance scholarships available may be obtained
from the Administrative Officer, telephone 819 8456.
Co-op Scholarships
The Faculty, in conjunction with industry, offers Cooperative
Scholarships to the value of $8,000 per annum to full time
engineering students in second and later years of their
Engineering Degree course. Interested students should apply
to the Faculty Office by November for the forthcoming year.
W.P. Brown Medal
This is awarded by the lnstitution of Engineers, Australia, to
the best all-round student in the final year of an engineering
course. The award is a medal and a premium of $100.
Esso Prize
A prize of $500 awarded annually to the outstanding finalyear
mechanical engineering student.
F.W. Green Memorial Prize
Books to the value of $50 are awarded to the most outstanding
final-year engineering student graduating each year.
James Smith Memorial Prize
Books to the value of approximately $50 are ~ ~~arded to the
best student in structural design in the final Year of the civil
engineering degree course.
Harold E.R. Steele Prize
A prize of $75 is awarded to the best student in the course
leading to the degree of Bachelor of Engineering with major
studies in electrical power, communication and electronic, or
computer systems engineering.
Faculty of Engineering
Major Furnace and Engineering Prize
This is awarded to the best managed final year project in
Mechanical Engineering. The award consists of $150 and an
engraved pewter mug.
Molyneux Medal
A silver medal and a prize of $30 are awarded to the student
in the final year of the manufacturing engineering degree,
undertaking major studies in chemical engineering, who
submits the best Project Thesis.
Oscar Weigel exhibitions in engineering
Applicants for these awards must be qualified to enter the
second or a later year of an engineering degree course to
be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master. Value
- up to $400 per year and tenable for a period not exceeding
five years.
Post raduate awards
The 8ommonwealth Department of Education provides
awards for full-time research leading to the degree of Master.
The closing date for applications is 31 October in any year.
Some industrial organisations also make available awards for
full-time research leading to the degree of Master. Further
information may be obtained from the Associate Dean of each
engineering school.
Continuing Education
In addition to the accredited courses leading to diploma and
degree qualifications the Engineering Faculty also offers a
wide range of short courses. These are usually of two to three
days' duration and are designed to enable various industrial
personnel to update their skills and knowledge in areas of
specific interest. Typical courses offered recently include:
acoustics, antennas, digital techniques, ergonomics, risk
management, numerical modelling, metrology, manufacturing
technology, micro-processors, residential rafi
slab design, network analysis, construction planning,
urban flood detention and floodways, urban piped drained
systems.
Further enquiries should be directed to the Manager, Cooperative
and Continuing Education on 819 8168.
Professional recognition of courses
lnstitution of Engineers, Australia
The courses for degree of Bachelor of Engineering, in civil,
electrical power and control, communication and electronic,
computer systems, manufacturing, and mechanical engineering,
have all received recognition by The lnstitution of
Engineers, Australia, as satsifying academic requirements for
corporate membership.
Students who are enrolled for engineering courses at Swinburne
and are at least seventeen years of age may apply to
the lnstitution of Engineers, Australia, to become student
members. Application forms are available from engineering
school offices and the Engineering Faculty Office.
Other professional bodies
The course for the Bachelor of Engineering (Manufacturing)
is recognised by the lnstitution of Production Engineers and
the degree in electrical engineering is recognised by the
lnstitution of Radio and Electronics Engineers (Australia) as
sufficient academic qualification for membership.

Faculty of Engineering based courses
YO50 Bachelor of Technology
The Bachelor of Technology offers a new kind of degree in
the exciting areas of technological need, and an entry scheme
to provide access to students who may have otherwise closed
the door to careers in these areas.
Career potential
The course aims to produce graduates equipped to meet the
shortage of professionals in the application of technology
within business and industry and with an appropriate grounding
in management education to prepare them for future roles
in the management of industry and commerce.
Graduates will find employment as technologists in many
areas. The excellent opportunities for management studies
included in and extending onto the course will lead many
graduates into technological management roles.
Duration of course
The course requires three and a half years of full-time study,
or its equivalent part-time, including six months industrial
experience.
Admission requirements
Entry to first year
The first year of studies is common to all areas of the Bachelor
of Technology and the Bachelor of Engineering (except for
minor differences for students admitted under alternative
entry). Admission requirements are listed under "Admission
to first-year degree courses" earlier in the Engineering Faculty
section of this Handbook.
Progress to second year
To be eligible for admission to the second year of the 3.5 year
course a student will be required to have satisfactorily
completed the first (common) year in appropriate prerequisite
subjects.
Conversion
Conversion to a Bachelor of Engineering Degree will be
possible after completion of the BTech. It will require the
equivalent of at least 1 to 1.5 academic years of work.
Combined program with Graduate Diploma
in Management
The Bachelor of Technology course and the Graduate Diploma
in Management may be taken as a 'combined program' in
the same manner as the Bachelor of Engineering and Graduate
Diploma in Management.
Cooperative education
As with all undergraduate courses within the Faculty of Engineering,
this course will be offered on a co-operative education
basis.
Under this strategy of applied learning - a structured program
developed and supervised by an educational institution
in collaboration with an employing organisation -
Industry Based Learning through relevant productive work is
an integral part of a student's regular academic program and
is an essential component of the final assessment.
Professional recognition
It is expected that graduates will be eligible for membership
of the lnstitution of Engineering Associates. Under current
rules, only after conversion to a Bachelor of Engineering
degree would graduates be eligible for membership of the
lnstitution of Engineers, Australia.
Course structure
The course offers a structure radically different from the norm
within technological areas. It comprises:
a common first year of CORE studies
ONE MAJOR STUDY and
TWO MINOR STUDIES
At least one lndustry Based Learning placement (6 months)
First year
This year is essentially the same as for students planning to
undertake the Bachelor of Engineering course providing maximum
course and career potential for students who elect, at
the end of that first year, to proceed to the Bachelor of Engineering
or to the Bachelor of Technology.
Not all first year subjects will be prerequisites for each of the
majors and minors, prerequisites for commencing each will
be separately defined. For each major sequence there will
be specific first-year subject prerequisites.
Major studies
A major is defined as a set of related subjects totalling 40 semester
hours.
Minor studies
A minor study is defined as a set of related subjects totalling
20 semester hours.
Within that overall structure two types of programs will be
offered:
Structured courses
Where students wishing to obtain a qualification designated
to some particular area will be required to complete certain
specified minors with a particular major. The degree carries
the designation appropriate to the particular study area (e.g.
Bachelor of Technology (Construction)).
Non-structured courses
Where students will select majors and accompanying minors
according to their preferences. The degree would carry no
area designation.
The subjects areas comprising the currently defined major
and minor sequences are:
Major studies are offered in the following areas:
Air Conditioning
Chemical Technology
Computer Aided Design and Manufacture
Fire Technology
Manufacturing Technology
Productivity Management
Minor studies supporting the majors will be offered in related
areas.

~ .,
School of Civil Engineering and Building
The school offers a range of tertiary courses in civil engineering,
including a cooperative (sandwich) degree, a graduate
diploma and the degree of Master by research. The school
also conducts cooperative (sandwich) courses in building
surveying.
The underaraduate dearee course leads to a ~rofessional
in civil enGneering which is recognised by the
Institution of Engineers, Australia. The graduate diploma
enables graduate-engineers to undertake further specialised
studies in construction technology. The degree of Master pro-
vides specialist research training in a selected topic in civil
enaineerina. usuallv of im~ortance to. and funded bv industrv.
-~
~ontinuinGducatibn coirses for professional engineers aie
provided from time to time in selected subjects by way of short
courses. The building surveying courses meet the academic
requirements for professional membership of the Australian
Institute of Building Surveyors.
The school operates a mentor scheme to facilitate contact
between staff and students and to provide guidance to
individual students as they progress through the course.
Mentors are all experienced staff members.
The school also undertakes applied research and consulting.
Enquiries should be directed to the Associate Dean or
School Administrative Officer.
Courses offered
C050 Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Civil)
C054 Degree of Bachelor of Technology
(Building Surveying)
C044
C082
Diploma of Building Surveying
Graduate Diploma in Civil Engineering
Construction
C092 Degree of Master of Technology (Construction)
YO96 Degree of Master of Engineering
YO01 Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Career potential
Civil engineering offers a creative career for men and women
in many differing areas of service to the community.
Graduates work as planners, designers, administrators,
research engineers and consultants in a wide range of specialist
fields, including:
structural and bridge engineering
foundation engineering, geology, soil and rock mechanics
water engineering
transportation engineering
construction engineering
municipal engineering
environmental engineering and urban planning
Their work is interesting, rewarding and challenging and offers
opportunities for both indoor and outdoor work, in Australia
and overseas.
Civil engineers qualify professionally by completing a tertiary
course recognised by the Institution of Engineers, Australia,
followed by three years of suitable professional experience.
The twelve months of cooperative work experience is counted
as six months of postgraduate experience for this purpose.
Swinburne civil engineering graduates find employment with
consulting firms, private industry, public authorities, and state
government departments and municipalities.
Other careers
Although most graduates enter the civil engineering profession.
intendina students should realise that a civil enaineering
course al& provides an excellent basis for a suc~essful
career in many other areas of industry and management.
Faculty of Engineering
C050 Bachelor of Engineering (Civil)
This course of study is undertaken by a cooperative
(sandwich) education program extending over four-and-a-half
years and including two semesters spent working with professional
civil engineers in industry.
The course is a general one which gives a good grounding
in civil engineering. Some specialisation occurs in the later
years of the course when students choose electives from a
range of specialist topics available.
Part-time study
The course may be completed by part-time study but not all
subjects are available as evening subjects.
Availability of evening classes naturally depends on enrolment
figures.
Structure of degree course
The degree course consists of seven academic semesters
at Swinburne and two semesters in industry. The total length
of the course is four-and-a-half years.
In the third and fourth years, students spend one semester
of each year at Swinburne and the remainder working in
industry. For cooperative employment arranged by Swinburne,
students receive a salary approximately two-thirds of that of
a graduate engineer. Students benefit greatly from this firsthand
industrial experience and liaison is maintained between
mentor, employer and student.
The fifth year, which consists of only one eighteen week semester,
is spent at Swinburne.
Course structure
Year 1 (1990 SYLLABUS)
CE115
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
Engineering Science - Solid
Mechanics 3 4
EE188 Engineering Science -
Electronics and Computing
MM120 Engineering Science -
5 5
Energy and Processes 7 7
EF199 Engineering Graphics and
Communications 4 4
SM199 Engineering Mathematics 3 3
Year 2
CE211
CE231
CE241
CE255
CE261
CE281
CE295
SM293
Structural Mechanics
Hydraulics
Surveying
Structural Design
Road Engineering
Geomechanics
Engineering Management
Engineering Mathematics
Sem 1 Sem 2
3 3
3 3
4 4
3 3
- 3
3 3
3 -
-
3
--
3
--
22 22
Year 3
CE397 Industry Based Learning
Sem 1 Sem 2
24 weeks
CE301 Engineering Computing 2
CE311 Structural Mechanics 3
CE324 Urban Planning 2
CE331 Water Engineering 3
CE351 Structural Design 4
CE395 Engineering Management 3
SM393 Engineering Mathematics 2
Electives
CE343
or
Surveying . -
CE355 Structural Fngineering

Year 4 Sem 1 Sem 2
CE415 Structural Engineering 5
CE431 Water Engineering 2
CE461 Transport Engineering 3
CE481 Geomechanics 3
CE495 Engineering Management 3
SM493 Engineering Mathematics 2
Electives: one of:
CE406
Water and Transport
Engineering
CE416 Structural Engineering 4
CE476 Construction Engineering -
22
CE494
Industry Based Learning
Year 5 -
tCE505 lnvestigation Project
tCE555
CE596
Design
Engineering Management
Major ~lectives: one of:
CE507 Municipal Transport
Engineering
CE516 Structural Engineering
CE576 Construction Engineering
Minor Electives: one of:
CE533 Water Eng~neering
CE553 Structural Design
CE582
+.
Geomechanics
Approved alternative from
Arts or Business
Sem 1
4
5
5
24 weeks
t Where approved, part-time students may undertake these
subjects over two semesters as syllabus content is identical
to the corresponding full-time subjects, using the following
codes:
Hours
Sem 1 Sem 2
CE506 Investigation Project 55 60
CE556 Civil Design 65 70
C044
Diploma of Building Surveying
The course is intended to prepare students for the profession
of building surveying. It meets the educational requirements
for membership of the Australian Institute of Building
Surveyors and the educational requirements of the Victorian
Building Qualifications Board, which licenses Municipal
Building Surveyors in the State of Victoria.
The course was introduced at the request of the AlBS and
was designed to enable future members of the profession to
cope with anticipated changes in building technology,
materials and statutory regulations.
Although the course is co-ordinated through the School of
Civil Engineering and Building, it is interdisciplinary in nature,
with a teaching input from a number of departments.
C054 Bachelor of Technology in Building
Surveying
A Bachelor of Technology in Building Surveying is being
accredited. It is proposed that this course will be introduced
in 1992 and replace the Diploma of Building Surveying.
Students currently enrolled will have the opportunity to
complete the diploma course, or transfer to the bachelor of
technology course, where approved.
Career potential
At present, about eight of every ten graduates in building surveying
enter the municipal sphere and the others are
absorbed in the building industry.
The building surveyor in a municipality is the council's technical
officer in matters pertaining to buildings. Duties include
the giving of advice to council on various parliamentary acts
and regulations, council bylaws and regulations relevant to
building, together with their administration as required by law
and by council. The building surveying department is responsible
for checking of plans and computations submitted for
council approval and for the carrying out of inspections of
buildings during construction, alteration and demolition.
Career prospects are very good, since there is a continuing
demand for building surveyors in the municipal field, with
more restricted opportunities in the private sector.
Regulations pertaining to the course
Regulations relating to the course are as for other engineering
undergraduate courses and are set out at the beginning of
this book.
Structure of the course
The Diploma of Building Surveying is structured on a cooperative
(sandwich) basis, and consists of six academic
semesters at Swinburne and one semester in industry. The
total length of the full-time course is three-and-a-half years.
First and second years are spent full-time at Swinburne. In
third year, students spend the second semester working in
industry. This cooperative (sandwich) employment is arranged
by Swinburne and students are paid by the employer. Students
benefit greatly from this first-hand experience and a consistent
liaison is maintained between the mentor, the employer, and
the student.
The fourth year, which consists of only one semester, is spent
at Swinburne.
Part-time study
The course can be completed by part-time study but subjects
are not available in the evening. Students should consult with
staff to plan a part-time program of day classes from the
required subjects of the course.
Availability of evening classes depends on enrolment figures,
and currently very few eveninr; classes are available.
Eligibility to apply for entry
Successful completion of VCE or equivalent including a grade
of E or better in English (units 1, 2, 3 and 4) and 6 units of
Mathematics (at least two as units 3 and 4), Physics (units
1 and 2), and Chemistry (units 1 and 2). Bonus points will
be awarded for additional units (3 and 4) in Mathematics,
Physics and Chemistry.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation
Program)
VCE(T0P) courses are considered on the basis of a course
of study equivalent to a Year 12 course. Prerequisite and
recommended subjects are those equivalent to the Year 12
subjects listed above.
Persons who do not hold the qualifications stated above, or
their equivalent, may be required to sit for a special entry test
to determine eligibility. This test is normally held early in
February.
An interview may be required for the persons who do not hold
the qualifications stated above.
Persons who complete satisfactorily, a sciencelengineering
VCE(T0P) course at Swinburne College of TAFE which
includes subjects equivalent to the prerequisite and recommended
Group 1 subjects are given guaranteed entry.

Course structure (1987 syllabus)
First year
BS196
CE114
CE171
CE172
CE191
CE195
ME169
M PI 86
SM191
SP191
Introductory Law
Applied Mechanics
Building Practice
Building Structures 1
Statutory Control 1
Communications 1
Building Services 1
Building Materials 1
Computations
Building Science
Second year
CE242 Land Surveying
CE253 Structural Design 1
CE272 Building Structures 2
CE273 Practical Inspection
CE274 Scaffolding A
CE275 Scaffolding B
CE282 Geomechanics
CE293 Statutory Control 2
CE296 Behavioural Studies
ME269
MP286
Building Services 2
Building Materials 2
Third year
CE398 Industry Based Learning
85389 Financial Management
85399 Administration 1
CE323 Urban Planning 1
CE352 Structural Design 2
CE374 Building Structures 3
CE375 Fire Technology
CE394 Statutory Control 3
CE396 Communications 2
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
- 3
Sern 3 Sern 4
5 -
Sern 5 Sern 6
24 weeks
Fourth year Sem 7
BS400 Administration 2 4
CE403 Professional Projects 2
CE422 Urban Planning 2 2
CE452 Structural Design 3 4
CE474 Building Structures 4 3
CE475 Fire Engineering 3
CE482 Geomechanics 2 3
CE493 Building Law and Contracts - 3
24
C082 Graduate Diploma in Civil
Engineering Construction
This course is designed to provide practising engineers and
architects with a knowledge of the latest developments in construction
engineering and with the capacity to control these
techniques from the financial and technical viewpoints.
The cours6 is usually undertaken as a two-year part-time
course and requiring attendance for two nights of the week.
I! runs over four semesters, each of fourteen teaching weeks.
The use of case studies is emphasised in the learning program
and students are expected to participate in syndicate
discussion activity, especially in civil engineering areas. Parts
of the course will be conducted in short periods of intensive
full-time study to facilitate this syndicate discussion. During
the course students are required to undertake industriallyoriented
projects and are expected to be working in an engineering
environment.
Practising construction engineers assist Institute staff in teaching
selected parts of the course.
Faculty of Englneering
Prerequisites
Students should have a professional qualification in engineering
or architecture and a minimum of two years' experience
following graduation to gain admission.
Course structure (1985 syllabus)
First year
CE670 Construction Technology
CE690 Civil Engineering Project
Control
CE691 Civil Engineering
Management
CE692 Communications
Second year
CE770 Construction Engineering
CE771 Construction Project
CE790 Financial Project Control
Hours
Per
week
4 (1 sem)
4 (1 sem)
4 (1 sem)
4 (1 sem)
8(whole yr)
4 (1 sem)
4 (1 sem)
-
C092 Master of Technology (Construction)
A Master of Technology in Construction has been accredited.
This course will replace the Graduate Diploma in Civil
Engineering Construction over a transit~on period.
YO96 Master of Engineering
YO01 Doctor of Philosophy
Graduates who hold a Bachelors degree and who have shown
a high standard of academic achievement in that course may
be admitted to candidature for the degree of Master of Engineering
or Doctor of Philosophy.
The higher degree programs currently available require the
presentation of a major thesis based on original research,
investigation or development work, carried out either within
Swinburne or externally, providing that adequate facilities and
supervision can be arranged. External work can be carried
out in an approved industrial, governmental, educational or
research organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Master or PhD and
application forms are available from the Registrar's Office.
School of Electrical Engineering
Electrical engineering is concerned with any form of plant,
system or device operated by electrical or electronic means,
and includes specialities, such as electronics, communications,
computer hardware and software, control, electrical
power and machines.
The school offers courses leading to professional
qualifications in electrical power and control engineering,
communication and electronic engineering and computer
systems engineering. In addition, continuing education
courses in selected subjects for professional engineers are
provided from time to time.
Modern laboratory facilities are available for undergraduate
teaching, staff research and consulting. Separate laboratories
are devoted to electric circuits, electronics, advanced electronics,
communications, control systems and computing, electrical
machines, power systems, advanced computing
systems, and student design projects. New computer systems
laboratories provide facilities for the computer systems
engineering stream.
A mentor scheme is operated by the school to facilitate contact
between staff and students and to provide guidance to
individual students, as they progress through the course.
Mentors are all experienced staff members.

The school undertakes applied research and consulting and
staff members are available for consultation individually or
as members of a team on group projects. Enquiries should
be directed to the Associate Dean.
Courses offered
E050 Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Electrical
Power and Control, Communication and
Electronic, computer Systems)
E085 Graduate Diploma in Computer Systems
Engineering
E092 Degree of Master of Engineering
(Information Technology) by coursework
YO97 Degree of Master of Engineering by research
YO01 Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Career potential
Graduates from Swinburne are qualified for appointment to
professional engineering positions in Commonwealth and
State Government departments and instrumentalities, in
private industry, or the armed services.
The tvpes of engineering employment available include the
invesiigation, design, manufacture, testing, development,
installation, maintenance or sales of all types of electrical,
communication, electronic and computer plant and
equipment.
The various fields of electrical engineering activity include
those of electric power supply and utilisation, electrical
machines and appliances, electric traction, illumination
engineering, communication systems, automatic control
systems, electronic equipment, analogue and digital
computers and applications, and medical electronics.
The introduction of the computer systems engineering stream
which commenced in 1986. provides graduates with the software
skills to enable themio be employed in the computer
industry and to apply computer systems and equipment to
engineering applications and industrial processes.
The degree course qualification merits full exemption from
the entrance examinations of The Institution of Engineers,
Australia and the Institute of Radio and Electronic Engineers.
Bachelor of Engineering (Electrical Power
and Control, Communication and Electronic,
Computer Systems)
Year enrolment codes
YO57 Common first year
E050 Later years (unstreamed)
E054 Computer Systems Engineering Stream
E055 Electrical Power and Control Stream
E056 Communication and Electronic Stream
The degree course is a general electrical engineering program
for the first three years with students choosing one of the three
streams offered in year four, these being the Computer
Systems Engineering Stream, Electrical Power Engineering
Stream and the Communication and Electronic Stream. These
are carried on into the fifth year of study.
Course structure (1990 Syllabus)
First year YO57
CE115
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
Engineering Science - Solid
Mechanics 3 4
EE188 Engineering Science -
Electronics and Computing 5 5
MM120 Engineering Science -
Energy and Processes 7 7
EF199 Engineering Graphics and
Communication 4 4
SM199 Engineering Mathematics 3 3
--
--
22 23
Second year E050
EE254
EE258
EE263
EE282
EE283
EE287
SM294
SP294
Electrical Design
Electrical Machines
Computer Systems
Engineering-
Communication Principles
Electrical Circuits
Electronics
Engineering Mathematics
Engineering Physics
Third year E050
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
EE300 Industry Based Learning 24 weeks
EE363 Computer Systems Engin. 4
EE383 Electromagnetic Fields 2
EE384 Electrical Power & Machines 3
EE386 Electronics 3
EE388 Communications 3
EE389 Linear Systems & Control 4
SM394 Engineering Mathematics 3
22
Fourth year
Electrical Power and Contml Stream E055
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
EE456 Electrical Design 3
EE475 Electrical Power and
Machines 5
EE476 Electronics 3
EE402 Management Fundamentals 3 *
EE465 Engineering Systems
Software - 3 *
EE489 Control Systems 3 *
SM494 Engineering Mathematics 2
EE400 Industry Based Learning 24 weeks
EE403
Engineering Project
Management
Communication and Electronic Stream E056
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
EE458 Electrical Design 3
EE482 Communications 4
EE483 Electronics 4
EE402 Management Fundamentals 3
EE465
Engineering Systems
Software 3 *
EE489 Control Systems 3 *
SM494 Engineering Mathematics 2 *
22
-
EE400 lndustry Based Learning 24 weeks
EE403
Engineering Project
Management **

Computer Systems Stream E054
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
EE459 Electrical Design 3
EE467 Computer Communications 3
EE474 Computer Systems
Engineering 5
EE402 Management Fundamentals 3 *
EE465 Engineering Systems
Software 3 *
EE489 Control Systems 3 *
SM494 Enqineerinq Mathematics 2 *
EE400 Industry Based Learning 24 weeks
EE403 Engineering Project
Management
Subjects common to all streams.
"Done externally while on Industry Based Learning.
Fifth Year
Electrical Power and Control Stream E055
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sern 2
EE502 Management Practice 1 3
EE556 Proiect 4 *'
EE559 ~lebtrical Machine Drives 5
EE576 Electronics 3
EE597 Electrical Power Systems 5
EE598 Digital Systems and Control 2
Communication and Electronic Stream E056
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Se~n 2
EE502 Management Practice 1 3
EE556 Project 4 *'
EE544 Electronic Communications
System 3
EE545 Electronics 4
EE548 Communications 6
EE598 Digital Systems and Control 2 *
Computer Systems Stream E054
EE502 Management Practice 1
EE556 Project
EE561 Computer Systems
Engineering
EE562 Computer Electronics
EE563 Advanced Computer
Techniques
EE598 Digital Systems and Control
-
22
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Se~n 2
3
4 "
-
Common to all streams.
**Project time is 4 hourslweek for 14 weeks and 22 hours1
week for 4 weeks.
With the approval of the Associate Dean of the School,
students may be permitted to undertake an additional subject
from the Arts or Business Faculties as an optional nontechnical
elective during the course.
Faculty of Engineering
E085 Graduate Diploma in Computer
Systems Engineering
This part-time course is intended to produce graduates with
a set of computer systems engineering skills, based soundly
on engineering and computer science principles.
There is a demand for continuing professional education in
this field from qualified engineers, who require enhancement
of skills in computer science and from computer professionals
who require skills in disciplines such as electronics, communications
and control.
Some diversity is offered in the common second year by the
opportunity to choose individual design projects.
To gain admission to the course, applicants must have a
degree, diploma or equivalent qualification, together with
relevant experience.
The course will only be available on a part-time basis, over
four semesters.
Course structure (1988 syllabus)
First year
Hours
Semester 1
EE641 Fundamentals of Computing 4
EE642 Data Structure 4
Semester 2
EE643 Computer Systems Software 4
EE644 Computer Systems Design 4
Second year
Semester 1
EE741
EE742
or
EE745
per week
Computer Systems and
Software Engineering 4
Computer Communications
and Control 4
High-Performance Computer
Architectures 4
EE746 Parallel Programming
Techniques 4
Semester 2
EE743 Computer Systems Case
Studies 4
EE744 Design and Project 4
E092 Master of Engineering (Information
Technology) by coursework
- -
The requirements for the first and second years of the course
are met by successful completion of the Graduate Diploma
in Computer Systems Engineering at an acceptable standard.
Third year
Semester 1
Real time processing and control
Voice and image processing
Semester 2
VLSl and application-specific hardware design
Industrial project management
Fourth year
Project and thesis

YO97 Master of Engineering
YO01 Doctor of Philosophy
Graduates who hold a Bachelor's degree and who have
shown a high standard of academic achievement in that
course may be admitted to candidature for the degree of
Master of Engineering or Doctor of Philosophy.
The higher degree programs currently available require the
presentation of a major thesis based on original research,
investigation or development work, carried out either within
Swinburne or externally, providing that adequate facilities and
supervision can be arranged. External work can be carried
out in an approved industrial, governmental, educational or
research organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Master and PhD and
application forms are available from the Registrar's Office.
School of lnnovation & Enterprise
The School of lnnovation & Enterprise was established in 1991
and is the newest School in the Faculty.
The School is designed as a self-contained entity dedicated
to excellence in innovative education. It does not rely on
'service subject' teachers and is not in any way 'in thrall' to
Engineering as a 'mother' discipline: the relationship with the
Faculty of Engineering has its roots in administrative history
- not intellectual predisposition.
The School has built its own pool of full and part-time
professional educators dedicated to teaching the management
of innovation to practising managers. A key feature of all its
programs is the use of 'pracademia' (team teaching between
a practitioner and an academic).
The School has strong affiliations with America's leading
school of entrepreneurial education, Babson College, Boston,
Mass., USA, and has hosted two "Fellows Programs"
(sponsored by BHP) at which Babson Professors taught
practising entrepreneurslmanagers how to impart their
knowledge by becoming good teachers.
There are currently a number of students undertaking PhD's
and Masters by research, and the School has an active
consultancy division.
Courses offered
YO81 Graduate Diploma in Management (by
coursework)
YO82 Graduate Diploma in Entrepreneurship &
Innovation (by coursework)
YO91 Master of Enterprise lnnovation (by
coursework)
YO95 Master of Enterprise
lnnovation (by research)
YO01 Doctor of Philosophy
YO81 Graduate Diploma in Management
Career potential
The course is designed to prepare professionals who, being
more extensively educated in management of enterprise and
innovation, are able to take up management positions more
quickly after graduation, become more innovative in their
leadership of Australian enterprise, have and achieve
heightened goals, are more able to improve their individual
professional practices and hence who are more likely to
contribute significantly to their work, their profession, the
economy and society.
Studies include the environmental and social impacts of
successful professional practice, personal skills such as
speaking, negotiating, communicating, team working and
ieadership as well as the more conventional business,
financial and economic studies.
The course work and the case studies at graduate level relates
manaQement principles and practice particularly to the technology
learnt -during an undergraduate course.
In its combined mode, the course will offer a 'fast-track' to
management education for graduates of the Engineering
Faculty.
Admission requirements
(a) The completion of the Bachelor of Engineering or
Bachelor of Technology degree offered by the Faculty of
Engineering at Swinburne undertaken on a cooperative
education basis incorporating integrated periods of industrial
experience.
(b) The completion of another Bachelor of Engineering
degree together with at least one year of relevant work
experience at a suitable level of responsibility within an
engineering field after completion of the degree.
(c) The completion of any other bachelors degree together
with at least two years' industrial experience.
(d) Students enrolled in either the Bachelor of Engineering
or the Bachelor of Technology course at Swinburne may
be admitted to a combined course program.
(e) A limited number of applicants not meeting the above
criteria may be admitted after interview on the basis of
considerable relevant experience and level of responsibility
in engineering work.
Duration of course
The course is undertaken by one year of full-time study or
three years of part-time study. The course, when combined
with the Bachelor of Engineering, or Bachelor of Technology,
requires only a further six months full-time after the completion
of the 4% year degree.
In the combined course mode, students are required to
undertake 60% of the total course content after completing
the requirements of the Bachelor of Engineering or Bachelor
of Technology. In addition they are required to have completed
subjects equivalent in both-content and philosophy to the
subiects of the first semester of the full-time . program - in their
undergraduate course.
Course structure
Wherever possible session presentations maximise
application of "Pracademia" where subjects are team-taught
by academics and practitioners to ensure focus is squarely
fixed on current management practice.
The course is broken into three distinctive groups: introductory,
extending and integrating. Under normal circumstances,
Swinburne Bachelor of Engineering/Technology graduates are
exempt from the introductory group, but must complete the
extending and integrating groups of subjects.
Introductory group
Hrs per wk
EF611 Management Fundamentals (1 sem) 4
EF614 Management Practice (1 sem)
Plus one of:
4
EF612 Engineering Management (2 sem) 2
EF613 Industrial Engineering (2 sem) 2
Extending group
EF620 Human Aspects (1 sem) 2
EF62i Financial and Legal Aspects (1 sem) 3
EF623 Marketing (1 sem) 3
Two chosen from:
EF625 Computing - Business Applications and Systems
EF626 Computing - Engineering Applications and Systems
EF622 Engineering Management
EF629 Sales Management
EF630 Manufacturing Management
EF631 Physical Distribution Management
EF632 Corporate Communications
EF633 Energy Management

EF634 Civil Engineering Management
EF635 Construction Technology
ME660 Risk Management
ME675 Maintenance Management
ME676 Property and Production Risk Management
ME678 Health & Safety Management
or other approved subject
Each elective runs for 2 hours per week for 1 semester.
Electives can run in either semester and are dependent on
demand.
Integrating group
EF641 Management Practice 1 6
or
EF624 Management Practice 2 3
1 Offered full-time in semester 2 only.
2 Only available to participants with at least three years fulltime
work experience undertaking the course on a parttime
basis.
The course will, essentially, take a problem based approach,
the learning being 'end' rather than 'means' driven.
The extensive use of Australian and relevant international case
studies throughout the course will ensure that subjects are
seen as opportunities to explore in more depth the ana!ysis
of various aspects of management science.
YO82
Graduate Diploma in
Entrepreneurship and lnnovation
This course recognises the need to train specialists in the
skills required to bring an invention, original product or process
from the stage of conception to that of full commercial
utilisation, through innovation and enterprise.
Business and Government initiatives for future technological
development should be enhanced as a result of:
(a) more inventions or service concepts commercialised and
developed in Australia and with export potential;
(b) the training of young technocrats to be proactive in the
search for change; for the seeking out of ideas and the
subsequent development of those which appear promising;
and
(c) the retention of venture capital in Australia.
The main aim is to train graduates from diverse disciplines
in the theoretical and practical aspects of the commercialisation
of an invention beginning with a valid prototype or
adequate conceptual model.
The course should be of interest not only to potential entrepreneurs
but also to "entrepreneurial professionals" and "friends
of entrepreneurs". This includes people with an entrepreneurial
outlook who wish to stay within an organisation and practise
entrepreneurship therein. Students are taught to identify
"what business area they are in" and to evaluate "whether
the opportunity will result in a profitable business". This is
achieved through an integrated program of subjects.
Admission requirements
All applicants should comply with one of the following:
(a) The completion of a degree or diploma in engineering,
sclence or applied science.
(b) The completion of a degree or diploma in business with
experience in new business creation.
(c) A limited number of applicants not meeting the requirements
above may be admitted after interview on the basis
of considerable relevant experience and level of responsibility
in industry or business.
In selecting students for the course, the course convener takes
into consideration the balance of skills required for team participation
and hence attendance at an interview is required.
Faculty of Engineering
Duration of course
The course is designed to be completed after two years of
part-time study.
Classes are held in the evening and the usual requirement
for attendance is 2 nights per week.
Team teaching is used in most subjects as well as extensive
input from specialist industry personnel.
Course structure (1991 syllabus)
First year
EF710
EF711
EF712
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sern 2
Entrepreneurship & New
Ventures 3 3
'Product' Development &
Life Cycles 3
Opportunity 8 Feasibility
Analysis 3
Second year
EF810 New Venture Marketing 3
EF811 New Venture Financial
Planning 3
EF812 Entrepreneurship, Law &
Ethics 3
EF700 The Business Plan 3 3
YO91
Master of Enterprise lnnovation
The call for a new kind of education program for senior management
has been rising in Australia over the past few years.
The Faculty of Engineering has introduced this Master's
Degree by Coursework which provides a fresh approach.
This course is built upon the Faculty of Engineering's pioneering
work in Enterprise lnnovation through its educational
initiatives, its involvement in the Victorian lnnovation Centre
and the Victorian Enterprise Workshop program.
The course aims to prepare students currently engaged in,
or about to embark upon, careers in senior management, with
the skills necessary to take their organisations into new areas
of activity. It will provide the student with an in-depth knowledge
of management, but will have an outward looking
aspect. The graduate will not be the mere administrator of
a business, but will be equipped with the specialist management
and administrative skills necessary to effectively manage
a productive commercial enterprise, and also to lead it into
new fields.
Admission requirements
Applicants should comply with one of the following:
(a) have completed a degree in a professional field at a
recognised University or College at essentially the
Honours 2A level or above;
(b) have completed the Graduate Diploma in
Entrepreneurship & lnnovation or the Graduate Diploma
in Management, at Distinction level or above;
(c) have such other qualifications or experience which, in the
opinion of the Selection Committee, are of a satisfactory
standard and are suitable preparation for entry to the
program.
In selecting students for the course, the course convener will
take into consideration the balance of skills required for team
participation and hence attendance at an interview is required.
Admission with advanced standing
Students who have completed Swinburne's Graduate Diploma
in Entrepreneurship & lnnovation or the Graduate Diploma
in Management will be given full credit for one year of the
program.

Duration of course
The course is designed to be completed after three years of
part-time study. Continuing students from the Graduate
Diploma in Entrepreneurship and lnnovation or the Graduate
Diploma in Management will complete the program with an
additional two years of part-time study.
Course structure
Essentially the course will take a problem-based approach,
the learning being 'end' rather than 'means' driven. The range
of subjects included has been chosen to satisfy the educational
needs of those who will manage for growth. Australian
case studies form a major part of the teaching and learning
techniques as will preparation of Business Plans.
All subjects are conducted on an interdisciplinary, team teaching
basis with heavy input from industry personnel and a
number of units in the later years are block taught.
First year (in conjunction with
Hours
Graduate Diploma in per semester
Entrepreneurship & Sem 1 Sem 2
lnnovation students)
EF810 New Venture Marketing 42
EF8ll New Venture Financial
Planning 42
EF812 Entrepreneurship, Law &
Ethics 42
EF700 The Business Plan 42 42
Second year (all students)
EF920 Managing the Growing
Business 56 -
EF921 Financing Entrepreneurial
Ventures - 56
EF922 Entrepreneurial Project 1 28 28
Third year (all students)
EF930 lnnovation & New Ventures 56 -
EF931 Entrepreneurship in
Corporations - 56
EF932 Entrepreneurial Project II 28 28
YO01 Doctor of Philosophy
By research and thesis. Enquiries should be made to the
Registrar.
School of Mechanical and Manufacturing
Engineering
The school offers courses leading to professional qualifications
in mechanical and manufacturing. The manufacturing
engineering degree program provides major study strands
in production and chemical engineering. The degree courses
provide a thorough education in engineering science
principles and applications. With these principles the course
combines a broad span of studies, such as economics,
psychology,, human engineering, administration, and
communication techniques, important to a professional
engineer.
Students work in modern buildings where the facilities
available include lab6ratories, design rooms, seminar rooms,
library study areas, engineering workshop and digital,
analogue and hybrid computers. There is a strong emphasis
on the teaching approach and use of tutorial laboratory work.
The undergraduate courses in mechanical and manufacturing
engineering are cooperative programs which enable a student
to gain some industrial experience during the course. To
qualify for the degree, each student must complete two
periods of approved industrial experience supervised by both
Swinburne engineering staff and engineers in industry. This
is arranged in the third and fourth years of study. The
experience gained is of considerable value in providing
opportunities to learn from practising engineers and in helping
to consolidate the more formal theoretical work undertaken
at Swinburne. The School of Mechanical and Manufacturing
Engineering gratefully acknowledges the assistance of
engineers in many companies and government departments
whose support has greatly enhanced the value of these
periods of industry based learning.
Master of Engineering degree programs are available by
research in selected areas of study and by coursework in the
area of Computer lntegrated Manufacturing.
Graduate dioloma courses are conducted in Air-Conditionina.
Chemical Engineering, Biochemical Engineering, CADICA~;
CIM, Maintenance Engineering, Manufacturing Technology
and Risk Management.
In addition to the complete courses of study above, the school
is responsible for teaching Energy Sysiems, Engineer~ng
Manaaement, Enaineerina Drawina and Enaineerlna
~aterhls in enaineerina unaeraraduaie courses chductea
by other school:. contiking edGcation courses are provided
from time to timein selected areas.
Courses offered
M050 Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Mechanical)
M081 Graduate Diploma in Maintenance Engineering
M082 Graduate Diploma in Air-Conditioning
M083 Graduate Diploma in Risk Management
PO50 Degree of Bachelor of 'Engineering (Manufacturing)
PO81 Graduate Diploma in Manufacturing Technology
PO83 Graduate Diploma in Chemical Engineering
PO85 Graduate Diploma in CADICAM
PO91 Degree of Master of Engineering (Computer
Integrated Manufacturing) by coursework
and thesis
PO87 Graduate Diploma in CIM
PO93 Degree of Master of Technology (Computer
lntegrated Manufacturing)
YO98 Degree of Master of Engineering (Manufacturing)
by research
YO99 Degree of Master of Engineering (Mechanical)
by research
YO01 Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
Career potential
Mechanical engineering
Mechanical engineering may be defined as a profession in
which a knowledge of mathematical and natural sciences
gained by study, experience and practice is applied, with
judgement and regard for the conservation of natural order,
to develop ways to use the material and energy resources
available, for the benefit of mankind.
Although, in Australia, it is a relatively new area of employment
for women, those entering the field of mechanical engineering
have found it offers excellent career opportunities.
ManufacturinglProductionlChemical engineering
Manufacturing engineers are engaged in a wide variety of
industries and organisations including manufacture of aircraft,
automobiles, appliances, chemicals, food, plastics, ceramics,
textiles and clothing. They are also involved in goods distribution
and retailing organisations.
Their activities are wide-ranging: factory management; operations
and production planning; quality control; design of tooling,
products and processes; materials handling; research
and development.
The undergraduate programs leading to the award of the
degree of Bachelor of Engineering (Manufacturing) are
designed to prepare the student for a professional career in
any field of manufacturing.
Developments in Australian industry, particularly towards
increased productivity and the use of more sophisticated manufacturing
techniques and control systems, including the use
of computer-based systems, indicates that for many years the
demand for manufacturing engineers will exceed the number
available.

PO50 Bachelor of Engineering
(Manufacturing)
The course is a cooperative (sandwich) education program
of four-and-a-half years' duration and is designed to provide
integrated academic and industrial training.
The course is designed to develop student abilities in the fundamental
engineeing sciences and technologies. It provides
manaaement trainina in a broad ranae of disci~lines related
to theplanning and operation of manufacturing enterprises.
The course is accredited by the Institution of Engineers,
Australia. Completion of the course gives full exemption from
the requirements for admission as a graduate member.
In the second and subsequent years of the course students
specialise in either:
Production Engineering and Design
or
Chemical Engineering and Design.
The special study subjects are denoted (P) and (C)
respectively in the details of the course structure.
Course structure (1990 syllabus)
First year
CE115 Engineering Science -
EE188
Solid Mechanics
Engineering Science -
Electronics and Computing
EF199 Engineering Graphics and
Communications
MM120 Engineering Science -
SM199
Energy and Processes
Engineering Mathematics
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
Second year
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
MM220 Energy Systems 4 -
MM230 Engineering Materials 2 2
MM240 Electronics and Measurement
Systems 2 2
MM241 Applied Mechanics 4 -
MM250 Design for Industry 2 2
MM270 ManufacturinglCAD 2 2
MM280 Introduction to Management 2 2
SK297 Professional Computing 1 1
SM299 Mathematics 3 3
Production Option
MM271 Manufacturing Technology
MM272 Manufacturing Practices
- 4
- 4
Chemical Option
MM210 Industrial Processes - 4
MM211 Introduction Chemical Eng'g --- 4
22 22
--
Third year
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
MM309 lndustry Based Learning 24 weeks
Core subjects
MM330 Advanced Materials
MM380 Productivity Management
MM381 Managerial Economics
SK396 Computer Science
SM395 Mathematics
Production Stream
MM340 Applied Mechanics
MM350 Design for Manufacture
MM370 Manufacturing Technology
Chemical Stream
MM315 Heat Transfer
MM312 Unit Operations
MM321 Fluid Mechanics
Fourth Year
Core Subjects
MM441 Control Systems
MM470 Computer Interfacing
MM471 Numerical Engineering
MM480 Facilities Planning and
Design
MM481 Decision Analysis
MM482 Manufacturing Operations
Management
Faculty of Engineering
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
2
2
2
Production Stream
MM450 Design for Manufacture 4
MM472 Manufacturing Technology 5
-
9
Chemical Stream
MM414
MM415
Stagewise Processes
Mass Transfer
5
4
9
MM409 Industry Based Learning 24 weeks
Fifth year (commencing 1993)
Hours
per week
Core Subjects Sem 1
MM500 Project (includes 3 full-time
weeks) 6
MM580 Industrial Relations 4
MM581 Manufacturing - Systems -
Modelling 2
MM582 World Class Manufacturinu - 2
14
Production Stream
MM550 Design for Manufacture 5
MM570 Manufacturing Technology 5
10
Chemical Stream
MM510
Combined Heat and Mass
Transfer 5
MM511 Chemical Engineering Design 5
10
Fifth Year
Note: Students who commenced first
year studies in 1988 (1985 syllabus) and
who would be entering fifth year in
1992 will undertake the fifth year Hours
course set out below:
per week
Sern 1
MP551(P) Design for Manufacture 5
MP553(C) Design for Manufacture 5
MP531 Industrial Engineering 3
MP502 Manufacturing Project 13
MP5II(P) Manufacturing Technology 5
MP513(C) Manufacturing Technology 5
MP521 Industrial Management 3
General Elective 3
P denotes Production stream, C denotes Chemical stream.

PO83
Graduate Diploma in Chemical
Engineering
The purpose of the course is to provide students with a basic
core of chemical engineering knowledge. It is designed to
meet the needs of graduates who are not chemical engineers
but who are working in the chemical industry or some related
field.
Applicants are required to possess either a degree or diploma
in applied science or engineering. However, consideration will
be given to applicants who do not possess the formal
admission requirements, but who, by virtue of an extensive
period of industrial or other experience, can demonstrate they
have the capacity to cope with the study load involved.
The proposed course is planned to be completed in two
years (four semesters) of part time study although timetable
restrictions may mean, on occasions, that five semesters will
be required. It is also possible that the course could be
completed in one year of full time study. Some day time
classes are involved and these are timetabled as blocks to
cause as little inconvenience as possible. Other subjects may
be available as evening classes.
Subjects involved in this course are classified as either
schedule A or schedule B subjects. Schedule A subjects
provide the basic chemical engineering information whilst
schedule B subjects offer topics more peripheral to the
chemical engineering aspects of the course. To obtain the
qualification, a minimum of 448 hours (32 semester hours)
is required. Choice of subjects is restricted so that a minimum
of 280 hours (20 semester hours) of schedule A subjects is
included. The remaining hours can be taken from either
schedule A or schedule B.
Schedule A subjects:
Hours Semester
per week offered
MP713 Chemical Engineering
Design 4 2
MP714 Stagewise Processes 5 1
MP711 Mass Transfer 4 1
ME729 Fluid Mechanics 3 2
MP715 Heat Transfer 5 2
MP712 Unit Operations 4 2
MP751 Design Applications 5 1
MP724 Chemical Engineering
Design 5 1
MM756 Chemical Engineering
Design 2 1
EA411 Non-Newtonian
Technology 6 1 &2
Schedule B subjects:
The subjects offered under schedule B are included to allow
students to follow a particular field of interest related to
chemical engineering. They have been divided into interest
groups and some restrictions apply as shown below. The final
choice of subjects will be made with significant consultation
between the student and the lecturers involved.
Group 1 Risk Engineering Group
Students to choose a maximum of two subjects.
Hours Semester
per week offered
ME762 Risk Engineering 4 2
ME664 Risk Engineering 3 1
ME765 Risk Engineering
ME764
(H&S)
Risk Control Practices
3 1
and Technology 4 2
Group 2 Environmental Studies Group
Students to choose a maximum of two subjects.
MP717 Industrial Processes
and Pollution Control 4 2
MP719 Occupational Health &
Safety 4 2
or
ME742 Health and Hygiene 4 2
EA491 Biochemical
Engineering 6 1 &2
Group 3 Management and Economic Evaluation Group
MM755 Equipment Life Cycle 2 1
Group 4 lnstrumentation & Control
MM740 lnstrumentation &
Measurement Systems 2 2
MM741 Control Engineering 2 2
PO81
Graduate Diploma in Manufacturing
Technology
This course is designed to increase the effectiveness of engineers,
scientists and technologists who, by virtue of their
position in industry or the Public Service, find themselves illequipped
to function in a modern manufacturing operation.
This may be due to the nature of their original training
(qualification), or simply to the rapid changes in technology
and the industrial environment.
Entrance requirements
All applicants should comply with the following:
The completion of a relevant degree or diploma in Engineering,
Science or Applied Science.
Under special circumstances, a limited number of applicants
not meeting the above, may be admitted after interviews on
the basis of considerable relevant experience and level of
responsibility in manufacturing.
Duration
The course is equivalent to one year full-time study and is
normally undertaken by part-time study over two and a half
years. (Students must be able to attend at least one half day
session during normal day time hours.)
Course structure (1990 syllabus)
Semester 1
Hours
per week
MM607 Manufacturing Technology 5
MM608 Manufacturing Technology 5
MM605 Design for Manufacture 4
MM614 Automation and Machining 2
Semester 2
MM606 Manufacturing Technology 5
MM604 Design for Manufacture 4
MM615 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM616 Manufacturing Automation 2
Elective 3
A minimum of 3 semester hours of electives must be taken
from the following list:
MM622 Advanced Computer
Techniques
MM613 Micro CAD
MM617 Introduction to CIM
MM620 Computers and Interfacing 2
MM612 CAD Practices 4

PO85 Graduate Diploma in CADICAM
The aim of the course is to prepare graduates, mainly from
Engineering and the Physical Sciences for future roles in the
application of Computer Aided Design andlor Computer Aided
Manufacture in the Australian manufacturing industry.
Entrance requirements
Candidates for the graduate diploma should:
have completed a degree or diploma in Engineering or
Science at a recognised universitv or college;
have other qualifications or experience which, in the
opinion of the Chairman of the School of Mechanical and
Manufacturing Engineering, are of a satisfactory standard,
and are suitable preparation for the graduate diploma
program.
Duration
The course is equivalent to one year of full-time study.
However, it is usually taken in part-time mode over two years
through evening study or a combination of day and evening.
Course structure (1990 syllabus)
Semester 1
Hours
per week
MM611 Introduction to CAD 2
MM614 Automation and Machining 2
MM617 Introduction to CIM 2
MM620 Computers and Interfacing 2
MM621 Mathematics 2
MM618 Introduction to Robotics 2
MM612 CAD Practice 4
Semester 2
MM613 Micro CAD 2
MM622 Advanced Computer
Techniques 2
MM615 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM623 Computer Based
~anagement Systems 2
MM624 Management of CAD/CAM
Technology 2
MM616 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM619 NC Project 4
PO87 Graduate Diploma in Computer
lntegrated Manufacture
The aim of the course is to prepare graduates from
engineering and the physical sciences for future roles in the
development and application of computer integrated
manufacturing in Australian manufacturing industry. Such
graduates must have proven academic ability.
Computer lntegrated Manufacturing is an important and
effective means of achieving productivity improvements which
must be seriously considered by manufacturing companies
wishing to become and remain competitive, and which should
be encouraged in the national interest so that application of
appropriate technology can improve our ability to compete
on international markets and against cheaper, high quality
imports in the domestic market.
Entrance requirements
(a) Normal entry
Completion of an approved Bachelors Degree in Engineering.
(b) Other applicants
Applicants are considered on their individual merits but must
have qualifications and experience which, in the opinion of
the Engineering Faculty Board, are a suitable preparation for
study in the Graduate Diploma program.
Faculty of Engineering
Duration of course
The Graduate Diploma in CIM is a one year full time program.
Year 1
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
MM617 Introduction to CIM 2
MM620 Computers and Interfacing 2
MM632 Computer Aided Design 2
MM614 Automation and Machining 2
MM625 Machine Systems 2
MM626 Advanced Mathematics 2
MM627 Manuf. Management
Systems 2
MM628 Control Systems and
Devices 2
Total hours per week
-
16
MM629 Computers and Interfacing 2 2
MM615 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM630 Mathematics and
Computing 2
MM633 Advanced CAD 4
MM622 Advanced Computer
Techniques 2
MM631 Machine Systems 2 2
MM623 Computer Based Mgt.
Systems 2
Total hours per week 16
-
YO98
YO01
Master of Engineering
(by research)
Doctor of Philosophy
Graduates who hold a Bachelors degree and who have shown
a high standard of academic achievement in that course may
be admitted to candidature for the degree of Master of Engineering
or Doctor of Philosophy, by research.
The programs currently available require the presentation of
a major thesis based on original research, investigation or
development work, carried out either within Swinburne or
externally, providing that adequate facilities and supervision
can be arranged. External work can be carried out in an
approved industrial, governmental, educational or research
organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Master or PhD and
application forms are available from the Registrar's Office.
PO91 Master of Engineering (Computer
lntegrated Manufacture)
by coursework
The aim of the course is to prepare graduates from
engineering and the physical sciences for future roles in the
development and application of computer integrated
manufacturing in Australian manufacturing industry. Such
graduates must have proven academic ability.
Computer lntegrated Manufacturing is an important and
effective means of achieving productivity improvements which
must be seriously considered by manufacturing companies
wishing to become and remain competitive, and which should
be encouraged in the national interest so that application of
appropriate technology can improve our ability to compete
on international markets and against cheaper, high quality
imports in the domestic market.
Entrance requirements
(a) Normal entry
A four year degree at a good second class honours level in
engineering or equivalent qualification.
(b) Other applicants
Other applicants with a professional qualification, depending
upon their postgraduate experience, will be required to
undertake suitable preliminary studies approved by the
Engineering Faculty Board.
115

Students who have completed the coursework for the
Graduate Diploma in Computer lntegrated Manufacture at an
average grade of 'C' may be admitted to the program with
advanced standing.
A person who has been awarded a Graduate Diploma in
Computer lntegrated Manufacture may not be awarded the
Master of Engineering (CIM) i.e. A person who has been
awarded the Graduate Diploma must relinquish the Graduate
Diploma before being eligible for the award of the Master of
Engineering (CIM).
Duration of course
The course is a two year equivalent full time program
incorporating the academic program for the Graduate Diploma
in Computer lntegrated Manufacture. The minimum period
of enrolment for the Master of Engineering program is three
semesters. The full time program normally extends over four
semesters. Further options include a three and four year part
time format.
Students are not normally permitted to extend their course
enrolment beyond five years, except when leave of absence
has been granted.
Year 1
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
2
2
MM617 lntroduction to CIM
MM620 Computers and lnterfacing
MM632 Computer Aided Design
MM614 Automation and Machining
MM625 Machine Systems
MM626 Advanced Mathematics
MM627 Manuf. Management
Systems
MM628 Control Systems and
Devices
Total hours Der week
-
MM629 Computers and Interfacing 2
MM615 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM630 Mathematics and Computing 2
MM633 Advanced CAD 4
MM622 Advanced Computer
Techniques 2
MM631 Machine Systems 2
MM623
Computer Based Mgt.
Svstems 2
Total hours per week
MM901 Database Technology 3
MM902 Numerical Engineering 2
MM906 Proiect - Part A 8
Total hours per week 13
-
MM903 Numerical Engineering
Project
MM904 Systems Integration
MM905
MM907
Computers and lnterfacing
Proiect - Part B
Total hours per week 19
-
PO93 Master of Technology (Computer
lntegrated Manufacture)
The aim of the course is to prepare graduates from
engineering and the physical sciences for future roles in the
development and application of computer integrated
manufacturing in Australian manufacturing industry. Such
graduates must have proven academic ability.
Computer lntegrated Manufacturing is an important and
effective means of achieving productivity improvements which
must be seriously considered by manufacturing companies
wishing to become and remain competitive, and which should
be encouraged in the national interest so that application of
appropriate technology can improve our ability to compete
on international markets and against cheaper, high quality
imports in the domestic market.
Entrance requirements
(a) Normal entry
A four year degree in engineering or equivalent qualification.
(b) Other applicants
Other applicants with a professional qualification, depending
upon their postgraduate experience, will be required to
undertake suitable preliminary studies approved by the
Engineering Faculty Board.
Students who have completed the coursework for the
Graduate Diploma in Computer lntegrated Manufacture at an
average grade of 'C' may be admitted to the program with
advanced standing.
A person who has been awarded a Graduate Diploma in
Computer lntegrated Manufacture may not be awarded the
Master of Technology (CIM) i.e. A person who has been
awarded the Graduate Diploma must relinquish the Graduate
Diploma before being eligible for the award of the Master of
Technology.
Duration of course
The course is a two year equivalent full time program
incorporating the academic program for the Graduate Diploma
in Computer lntegrated Manufacture. The minimum period
of enrolment for the Master of Engineering program is three
semesters. The full time program normally extends over four
semesters. Further options include a three and four year part
time format.
Students are not normally permitted to extend their course
enrolment beyond five years, except when leave of absence
has been granted.
Course structure
Year 1
Hours
per week
Sem 1 Sem 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MM617
MM620
MM632
MM614
MM625
MM626
MM627
Introduction to CIM
Computers and lnterfacing
Computer Aided Design
Automation and Machining
Machine Systems
Advanced Mathematics
Manuf. Management
Systems
MM628 Control Systems and
Devices
Total hoc vrs Der week
-
MM629 Computers and Interfacing 2
MM615 Manufacturing Automation 2
MM630 Mathematics and Computing 2
MM633 Advanced CAD 4
MM622 Advanced Computer
Techniques 2
MM631 Machine Systems 2
MM623 Computer Based Mgt.
Systems
-
2
Total hours per week
-
16
MM689 Minor Thesis 16

M050
Bachelor of Engineering
(Mechanical)
The degree course program combines a thorough education
in the application of engineering science principles with a
broad span of studies important to a professional engineer.
Streaming in later years of the course is offered through a
system of technical elective subjects which allows students
to select a particular emphasis for their four-and-a-half year
cooperative education program.
Degree course revision
Students entering the first year of the mechanical engineering
course will be enrolled in the common first year, and will follow
the Bachelor of Engineering (Mechanical) 1990 syllabus.
Courses are arranged to allow flexibility so that any student
may transfer from full-time to part-time studies or vice-versa,
at particular points of a course, without loss of credit for
subjects passed.
Course structure (1990 syllabus)
First Year
CE115 Engineering Science -
Solid Mathematics
EE188 Engineering Science -
Electronics and Computing
EF199 Engineering Graphics and
Communications
MM120 Engineering Science -
SM199
Energy and Processes
Engineering Mathematics
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
Hours
per week
Second year Sem 1 Sem 2
MM220 Energy Systems 4
MM221 Energy Systems 3
MM230 Engineering Materials 2 2
MM240
Electronics and Measurement
Systems 2 2
MM241 Applied Mechanics 4
MM242 Applied Mechanics 3
MM250 Engineering Design 2 2
MM260 Ergonomics 2
MM27O Manufacturing Technology
and CAD/CAM 2 2
MM280 Introduction to Management 2 2
SK297 Professional Computing 1 1
SM299 Engineering Mathematics 3 3
22 22
--
---
Plus 36 hours of MM209 Engineering Practises during a break
period,
Hours
per week
Third year Sem 1 Sem 2
MM309 lndustry Based Learning 24 weeks
MM320 Energy Systems 4
MM331 Advanced Materials 2
MM341
Mechanics and Machine
Systems 6
MM351 Design for Industry 4
MM360 Ergonomics 3
SM399 Engineering Mathematics 3
22
Fourth Year
MM420
MM440
Energy Systems
Mechanics and Machine
Systems
MM451 Design for lndustry
MM460
MM483
Ergonomics
Engineering Management
SM499 Engineering Mathematics
MM409
Fifth Year
MM501
MM509
MM520
MM540
MM551
MM580
lndustry Based Learning
Engineering Project
(plus 92 hours)
Engineering Mathematics
Energy and ThermlFluid
Mechanics (2 of 3) (Thermo
Fluids; Energy Systems;
Energy Modelling.)
Mechanics and Machine
Systems (2 of 3) (Mechanics
of Solids; Vibration and
Model Analysis; Control
Engineering; Machines
Systems and Simulation.)
Engineering Technology
(3 of 5) (Engineering
Ergonomics; Engineering
Technologies; Equipment Life
Cycle; Occupational Risk;
Technology Modelling.)
Management Practices
Faculty of Engineering
Hours
per week
Sern 1 Sern 2
4
22
24 weeks
Hours
per week
Sern 1
^'The project is undertaken over an 18 week semester and
involves 148 hours of contact.
M081
Graduate Diploma in
Maintenance Engineering
This part-time course is designed for those who have a qualification
such as a diploma or degree in engineering or applied
science, and who wish to take advanced studies based on
maintenance engineering, maintenance management and its
interaction with industry in general. Course content comprises
common core material with the Graduate Diploma in Risk
Management, emphasising maintenance engineering's place
as a major sub-set of business risk management activity,
complemented by specialist subjects relating to the practice
of maintenance engineering. The course will usually spread
over two years.
Course structure (1989 syllabus)
Hours
per week
First Year Sem 1 Sem 2
ME660 Risk Management 2 1
ME661 Risk Engineering 1 2
ME627
ME629
Risk Psychology
Risk Social Science
1
1
ME651 Risk Philosophy 1
ME652 Occurrence Analysis. . 1
SM741 Statistics and Reliab~l~ty 2
BS625 Health and Safety Law 1
ME675 Maintenance Management --
2
--
8 6

Second Year
ME776 Maintenance Engineering
Science 3
ME774 Maintenance Practices and
Technology 2 2
ME777 Maintenance Management 2 2
ME780 Major Project -- 3
7 7
People who have experience in the maintenance field but not
the prerequisite qualifications may be enrolled if they have
an adequate background and are able to cope with the course.
Assessment is continuous throughout the course.
M082 Graduate Diploma in
Air-conditioning
This part-time course is designed for those who have a qualification
such as a diploma or degree in engineering or applied
science, and who wish to take advanced studies based on
applied thermodynamics and controls. The course consists
of six subjects which are usually taken by evening attendance
over a period of two years.
Course structure (1988 syllabus)
Hours
per week
First Year
Sem 1 Sem 2
ME621 Air-conditioning
4 4
ME622 Refrigeration --
3 3
7 7
Second Year
ME721 Air-conditioning 4
ME722 Refrigeration 3
ME731 Instrumentation and System
Control 3
ME781 Project and Energy
Management 4
--
7 7
--
M083 Graduate Diploma in Risk
Management
This course provides further studies for graduates in all
branches of engineering, applied science and business, to
gain more specialised knowledge in risk management. This
has application in many areas of technical and business
decision-making where proper consideration of risks is
essential to minimise human discomfort and injury; as well
as potential physical and financial losses.
Subject material is arranged to enable studies to be undertaken
in one of three specialised streams, in addition to a
common core of studies. The streams are:
health and safety risks;
plant and property risks;
maintenance (production risks).
This arrangement allows groups with specific interests within
the broad risk management field to specialise.
Core material comprises subjects directed at developing an
understanding of the broad risk management discipline from
the management, insurance, statistical, engineering, psychological,
social and legal aspects.
Streamed material includes expanston of core material in relevant
directions as well as more specialised subjects. Full
subject details are available from the School of Mechanical
and Manufacturing Engineering.
The course will usually spread over two years.
Course structure (1989 syllabus)
Hours
per week
First Year
Sem 1 Sem 2
Core subjects
ME660 Risk Management
ME661 Risk Engineering
ME627 Risk Psychology
ME629 Risk Social Science
ME651 Risk Philosophy
ME652 Occurrence Analysis
SM741 Statistics and Reliability
BS625 Health and Safety Law
Do one of three:
ME678 Health and Safety
Management 2
ME676 Property and Production Risk
Management
ME675 Maintenance Manaaement
- --
7 7
--
Second Year (Do stream of choice)
Health and Safety stream
ME780 Major Project 3
ME641 Ergonomics 3
ME743
Health and Safety Practices
and Technology 1
ME765 Risk Engineering (H&S) 3
ME742 Health and Hvaiene 4
Plant and Property stream
ME780 Major Project
ME664 Risk Engineering
ME762 Risk Engineering
ME764 Risk Control Practices and
Technology
Maintenance (Production Risks) stream
ME780 Major Project
ME776 Maintenance Engineering
Science
ME774 Maintenance Practices and
Technology
ME777 Maintenance Management
YO99 Master of Engineering
YO01 Doctor of Philosophy
Graduates who hold a Bachelors degree and who have shown
a high standard of academic achievement in that course may
be admitted to candidature for the degree of Master of Engineering
or Doctor of Philosophy.
The higher degree programs currently available require the
presentation of a major thesis based on original research,
investigation or development work, carried out either within
Swinburne or externally, providing that adequate facilitites and
supervision can be arranged. External work can be carried
out in the approved industrial, governmental, educational or
research organisation.
Copies of the Statute for the degree of Master or PhD and
application forms are available from the Registrar's Office.

Engineering subject details
This section contains a brief description of the various subjects
in all engineering degree courses, the diploma course in building
surveying, and all graduate diploma courses.
It should be noted that details of subjects taught by engineering
schools to students in other courses (e.g. environmental
health which is offered by the Applied Science Faculty) are
given in the Handbook of the Faculty offering the course.
Subjects in this section are grouped in numerical order within
the following codes:
Code Department, School or Faculty
AB Faculty of Arts
BS Faculty of Business
CE Civil Engineering and Building
E A Manufacturing Engineering
EE Electrical Engineering
EF Faculty of Engineering
MM Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering
ME 'Aechanical Engineering
M P Manufacturing Engineering
SA Applied Science Faculty
SC Chemistry
SK Computer Science
SM Mathematics
SP Physics
Students should note the following definitions with regard to
reading material prescribed for engineering subjects:
Preliminary reading
lntroductory material which students are expected to read
before classes commence.
Textbooks
Materials essential to the subject.
References
Materials that will be referred to throughout the duration of
the subject.
Unless otherwise specified, students are advised not to purchase
textbooks or references until classes commence.
AB757 Archaeology
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment is continuous
A general elective subject in all degree courses in engineering which
introduces students to the techniques and reasons for archaeology
in a stimulatinq - and . practical manner.
The emphasls IS on field-work done In conjunction with the Victorlan
Archaeological Survey and the local Aborlglnal community.
Students learn new skills or enhance their existing skills in photography,
mapping, sketching and surveying; and in the specialist area
of site investigation, site reading and analysis of materials.
Reference
Flood, J. Archaeology of the Dreamtime. Sydney: Collins. 1983
BS196
Introductory Law
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
intended to enable students to understand the origins of law and the
use of law in their personal, civic and business affairs.
The concept of law, sources of law, origin and development of common
law and Australian law, hierarchy of courts, the branches of law and
the place of building law. The doctrine of precedent. Statutory interpretation.
Subordinate legislation. St~dies of relevant case law and
statutory material, applicable to building and construction activities.
Faculty of Engineering
BS294 Managerial Economics
One hour per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering
aimed at introducing the basic concepts and prlnclples of economics
as used in business decision-making.
Among the concepts to be examined are markets and resource allocation.
demand analysis and forecasting, cost and output relationships.
flrms' objectives and prlclng strategies, Investment analysis, Industry
economics. the structure of Australian Industry and the role of ~ndustrv
assistance.
Textbooks
Davies, J. and Hughes. S. Managerial Economics. Plymouth:
McDonald and Evans, 1977
Gwartney, J.D. and Stroup, R. Microeconomics: Public and Private
Choice. 3rd edn, New York: Academic, 1982
Terry, C. and Forde, K. Micro-economics: An Introduction for Australian
Students. 2nd ed. Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1988
References
Caves, R. et al. Australian Industry: Structure, Conduct and
Performance. 2nd edn. Sydney: Prentice-Hall. 1987
Heyne, i? The Economic Way of Thinking. 4th edn, Chicago: SRA, 1983
BS389 Financial Management
Three hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to develop in students an understanding of finance relevant
to the profession of building surveying.
Basic accounting theory and practice as relevant to building works.
Cost accounting and cost control methods for building projects.
Business finance: the role and scope of the finance function, tools
and techniques for planning and decision-making. Feasibility studies:
analysis of the financial practicability of proposed development
projects.
Reference
Bell, A. (ed.) Introductoty Accounting and Finance. Melbourne: Nelson,
1990
BS399 Administration 1
Three hours per week for one semeste!
A third-year subject in the diploma course in buildlng surveying, which
introduces students to organisation and management theory and to
devel0~ their understandinq of management - problems in organisations
and ways of dealing withthem.
Management and its environments.
Current management thought and its origin: scientific management,
traditional organisational principles.
Bureaucracy, human relations management, systems theory.
Contingency theory and problems of management: planning strategy,
organisational design, mechanistic and organic systems of
management.
Reference
Schermerhorn, J.R. Management for Productivity 3rd ed. New York:
Wiley, 1989
BS400 Administration 2
Four hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying, which
further develops students' understanding of administration and management
principles.
Decision-making and planning.
Organisational communication.
Control systems.
Organisational behaviour: motivation, behaviour, modification, group
dynamics, management style, organisational climate, managing planned
change. Staffing and manpower planning. The effective and
efficient organisation.
References
Kolb, D. et al. Organisational Psychology - an Experiential Approach.
5th rev. edn, Hemel Hampstead, Herts: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Schermerhorn, J.R. Management for Productivity 3rd edn, New Jersey:
Wiley, 1989

BS501
Accounting and Finance
Three hours per week for one semester
A general electwe subject in all degree courses In engineering wh~ch
IS desianed to teach students to develop and intearate concepts and
principjes of accounting where they assist management decisionmaking
and policy formulation within the business. No prior knowledge
of accounting is assumed.
Objectives of thls course are to glve students a broad knowledge to
communicate w~th executive buslness staff, understand the concepts
behind any management decision; understand the link between ihe
accounting and decision process.
The topics studied are drawn from the following:
(a) the nature of financial statements,
(b) the analysis of financial statements,
(c) cash management,
(d) cost data and short-run decision analysis,
(e) long-run investment decisions.
Reference
Bell, A. (ed.) Introductory Accounting andFinance. Melbourne: Nelson,
1990
BS502 Legal Studies
Three hours per week for one semester
A general elective subject in all degree courses in engineering. Its
objectives are as follows: firstly, to give students a general insight into
an alternative dlsc~pllne or f~eld of learning, and secondly to prov~de
students w~th an aooreclatlon of Dartlcular areas of law relevant to the
future practice of iheir profession
In the pursult of the ln~t~al objective, toplcs such as the nature of law.
11s historical origins, the institutional setting In whlch 11 IS admlnlstered
and the reasoning processes employed by its practit~oners, are studied.
An aooreclatlon of such matters should enable enalneers to br~dae
the communication gap which often exists between the legal a6d
scientific communities.
In pursuit of the second objective, attention is paid to one or more of
the following matters relevant to practice:
(aj contracts for the provision of engineering services by practices
and employees;
(b) agreements involving resort to arbitration as an alternative to the
courts;
(c) property law concepts relevant to the practice of engineering,
including the so-called 'intellectual property' concepts applicable
to patents, copyright, trademarks and industrial design;
(d) the consequences in civil law (the tort of negligence) for the careless
provision of engineering services or advice;
(e) the comparative advantages and disadvantages of companies,
partnerships, trusts and joint ventures as vehicles or entities for
the practice of engineering.
Materials are provided to students and detailed references are referred
to during tuition in this unit.
BS503 Managerial Economics
Three hours per week for one semester
A general elective subject in all degree courses in engineering except
mechanical engineering. No prior knowledge of economics is
assumed.
Consideration is given to those economic concepts and methods of
analysis that bear directly on the management of a firm.
The topics covered are drawn from: markets and resource allocation;
demand; production and costs; prices and profits; investment
decisions; industry economics.
Text book
Pappas, J.L. and Hirschey, M. Fundamentals of Managerial Economics.
2nd ed, Chicago: Dryden Press. 1985
BS504 Contemporary Macroeconomics
Three hours per week for one semester
A general elective subject in all degree courses in engineering. No
prior knowledge of economics is assumed.
The emphasis of this subject is to examine how the Australian macroeconomy
functions and why problems such as inflation, unemplovment
and external debt occur A general framework of macro-econom~c
analys~s IS established and thls framework IS then aool~ed to current
macroeconomic management of the Australian econ'omy.
All topics are oriented to current economic experience, and students
are expected to master a set of concepts which will help them think
more coherently about the wide range of economic probiems that are
present In the AustralIan economv. Students are encouraaed to seek
solutions to these problems and tocritically evaluate governkent policy
measures.
Textbooks
State of Play 6: The Australian Economic Policy Debate. Sydney: Allen
and Unwin, 1990
Keating, M. and Dixon, G. Making Economic Policy in Australia.
Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1989
BS625 Health and Safety Law
One hour per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Historical outline of the development of health and safety law and
doctrines: common employment, contributary negligence and
voluntary assumption of risk, volenti non fit injuria.
Common law principles in occupational, public and product health and
safety, duty and standard of care, tests of negligence.
Legal relationships involving employers, employees, manufacturers
and suppliers, service providers, consumers and occupiers.
The role of law in the control of health and safety, critical evaluation
of relevant statutes (OH&S Act, Dangerous Goods Act. Accident Compensation
Act. Occupier's Liability Act, Trade Practices Act. 1986). Litigation
practices.
The role and standing of codes of practice and standards.
CE114
Applied Mechanics
Four hours per week for first semester and two hours
per week for second semester
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to develop in students an understanding of the basic
principles of mechanics and their application to the behaviour of
loaded members and simple systems.
Baslc concepts: force and force components, loads, reactions, eauil-
~br~um, Internal forces, determ~nacy, superpos~t~on Appllcat~ons to pln-
~olnted trusses. beams and slm~le frames Shear force and bendlna -
moment diagrams.
Stress and strain: general load-deflection and stress-strain behaviour
including elastic, plastic, strain hardening, brittle, non-linear and
viscous behaviour. Hookes Law. Linear elastic parameters (EG and
Poisson's ratio).
Values for common building materials including metals, timber, rock,
concrete, common plastics. Common tests to measure properties.
Behav~our of slmple structural members stresses and deformat~ons
of tenslon members and short centrlcallv loaded columns, stresses
in beams and simple bolted and welded joints.
Practical work: tests will be carried out on structural models, typical
beams, trusses and columns.
CE115
Engineering Science - Solid
Mechanics
Three hours per week for first semester and four hours
per week for second semester
- -
A first-year subject in all degree courses in engineering, designed to
introduce students to the fundamentals of enaineerino mechanics and
materials behaviour.
Basic concepts: forces and force systems, loads, equations of
equilibrium, reactions for statically determinate beams, frame and truss
systems. Analysis of pin-jointed trusses. Shear force and bending
moment concepts and diagrams.
Stress and Strain: types of stress, general stress-strain relationships,
linear elastic parameters.
Performance of loaded members and simple connections: behaviour
of compound members, short and long columns, circular shafts. Stress
and deflections in statically determinate beams. Deflection by
integration to the elastic line and introduction to the moment-area
theorems. Elementary beam design concepts.
Introduction to Hydrostatics: Hydrostatic pressure, pressure
measurement. Hydrostatic thrust, pressure vessels.

lntroduction to structural behaviour: structural forms and their
behaviour under load, stability, structural failures.
Deformation and Forming: elastic, plastic and viscoelastic deformation.
Effects of manufacturing processes on the properties of the final
product.
Fracture: brittle and ductile behaviour, fracture mechanics creep and
fatigue, environmental effects on properties and failure.
Standard Specifications: material standards in design and
specifications.
CE171
Building Practice
Three hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
designed to provide students with practical experience in the various
trades and practices used in the construction industry.
Practical work in: carpentry and joinery, welding, plumbing, brickwork
and masonry, electrical trades, fabrication and construction techniques
in timber, concrete and steel.
CE172
Building Structures
Four hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying.
intended to develop in students an understanding of the general
principles of construction of single- and doublestorey residential buildings
and to develop students' written and graphic communication skills
and problem-solving abilitites in this area.
The principles of construction of single- and double-storey residential
bulldlnas: basic structural svstems, lntroduction to building trades.
propertTes of materials used-in domestic building (timber, $sin and
reinforced concrete, masonry).
Methods of fixing: mechanical fasteners, adhesives, timber joints.
Domestic construction: details of foundations, footings, floors, walls,
claddlngs and linings, roof plumbing, lolnery, fireplaces and chimneys.
services, t~l~ng, glazing, painting and decorating, builder's hardware.
Regulations and codes governing residential construction. Drawing
practice: sketches and finished drawings for a variety of domestic construction
components and structures.
Written and verbal reports on selected topics relevant to the syllabus.
CE191
Statutory Control
Two hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying.
intended to provide students with an understanding of the role and
duties of a building surveyor and an introduction to acts and
regulations.
Administration and law: structure and operation of local government.
The role of building surveyor and required skills. Statutory functions
related to acts and regulations. Other responsibilities and liabilities.
The building surveyor as Manager including communication skills,
office organisation, staff relationships, environment both physical and
psychological and as educator.
Functions: liaison with other Council departments, public authorities
and private enterprise. Comparison of building surveyor's role as a
Council Building Surveyor and as a consultant in private practice.
Acts and reaulations: basic orincioles of the requlations including interpretation
method, how regulatiolis are separ5ed into parts, diGsions
and auick reference methods. Definitions and basic orincioles of each
Dart hclud~nq recoqnition of major and minor buiding applications.
approvals, coistrucilon and demolit~on. General knowledge of related
acts, regulations, codes and standards and thelr general applications.
CE195 Communications
Two hours per week for two semesters
Assessment is continuous
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying . -
Th~ subject Introduces students to techniques for developing basic
skllls in wrltten and oral communication as well as an understandina -
of social and urban issues relevant to building surveyors.
References
To be advised.
CE211
Structural Mechanics
Three hours per week for two semesters
Faculty of Engineering
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which develops in students an understanding of the principles of mechanics
as applied to structures.
Structural behaviour: modelling of structures, elastic and inelastic
response to load. Statical and Kinematic determinacy, stability of
structural form.
Statically determinate structures: modelling and equilibrium of forces
in beams. frames, arches and cables. A~~licatlon . . to aravitv - , structures
such as retaining walls.
lntroduction to virtual work: deflections due to axial force and bending.
flexibility method of analysis for continuous beams and indeterminate
trusses.
Statically indeterminate structures: development of the slope deflection
eauations and the beam element action-dis~lacement relations hi^.
iniroduction to the matrix stiffness method of analysis for trusses arid
continuous beams, introduction to plastic analysis of continuous
beams.
Computer applications: modelling and analysis of a range of structures
using frame analysis software, with verification by approximate
methods.
Stress analysis: biaxial loading, torsion of circular and thin-walled
closed sections, shear centre, skew bending, analysis of composite
sections.
CE231 Hydraulics
Three hours per week for two semesters
A subject In the second year of the degree course In c~vll englneerlng
which devel0~S In students an understandma - of the . orlncloles . ol fluld
mechanics.
Statics: pressure, thrust, bouyancy, stability of floating vessels.
Fluid concepts: continuity, the one-dimensional energy equation,
orifices, weirs, sluices, differential head meters. Momentum, forces
on fittings, jet impact.
Model analysis: Reynolds and Froude models.
Pipe flow: Darcy-Weisbach and Colebrook-White formulas,
development of the Moody diagram, empirical formulas, shock losses,
analysis of pipe-reservoir systems.
Channel flow: Manning formula, part-full pipes, specific energy, Froude
member, hydraulic jump.
Pumps: classification and principles of operation, pump and system
characteristics.
221
CE241 Surveying
Two hours of theory per week for two
semesters and three hours of practical work
for twenty weeks
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which enables students to use basic surveying and computation
methods and instrumentation in engineering practice.
Introduction: principles and types of surveys, error classification and
sources, detail surveys, plotting procedures and plan layout. Distance
measurement: chaining equipment, procedures and reductions. Principles
and use of electronic distance measurement.
Levelling: construction, use and adjustment of level types, booking
and reduction of levels. Contour properties, plotting and use of contour
plans.
Theodolites: construction, use and adjustments of theodolites, traversing,
- angle - reading methods, settinq out of works.
Computations. computation techniques and electronic calculator use
Com~utations related to traverse reductions. road lntersectlons ~- --- - ., areas - ...
and iolumes of various figures, circular curves, settinq out. lntroduction
to cadastral surveying.
Practical work: exercises related to all aspects of theory, in particular
levelling and theodolite use. Integration of manual drafting with
computer generated plots.
CE242 Land Surveying
Five hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to enable students to understand basic surveying techniques
and legal aspects of surveys as related to building surveying practice.
Principles and types of surveys and plans. Distance measurement,
levelling, angle measurement and setting out.
Cadastral surveying and laws related to surveying: identification and
location of land from titles, check surveys, title amendments, old law,
Subdivision Act 1988, encumbrances, easements, adverse possession.

CE253
Structural Design
Five hours per week for one semester and four hours
per week for second semester
A second-year subject in the diploma of building surveying, designed
to give students an understanding of basic structural analysis and
design methods and of the behaviour of structural components and
assemblies.
Structural analysis: beam deflections, statically indeterminate beams.
beam stresses, columns.
Structural behaviour: tension structures, compression structures, truss
forms, structures transmitting loads by bending action, space
structures composed of continuous flat and curved elements,
combined forms. Structural design: loads on structures, design
methods, design of structural members, design of connections.
Practical work: tests will be carried out on structural models, on typical
beams and connections.
CE255
Structural Design
Three hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which introduces students to the concepts and methods of engineering
design and shows how structural principles are applied to the design
of structural elements and simple civil engineering structures.
Design theories: The design process, load versus strength, limit states
of stability, strength and serviceability, permissible stress design.
deemed to comply provisions.
Concrete technology: characteristics of concrete and components,
design of concrete mixes, additives, factors affecting performance.
Steel technology: deformation and fracture, heat treatment in relation
to welding practice, welding processes, corrosion.
Loads on structures: types of load, loading codes, and building
regulations, load paths in structures, conversion to loads on elements,
modelling of structural forms.
Analysis and design of plain and reinforced concrete elements, limited
to staticallv determinate structures - includina - reauirements .
of
durability and fire resistance.
Design of simple steel welded and bolted connections - axially loaded
single and double angles, beam and cantilever end connections, strut
bases. Design of simple steel elements.
CE261
Road Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which introduces students to highway and traffic engineering.
Design of roads and streets, widths of all elements, cross falls, grades.
Introduction to vertical and horizontal curves.
Construct~on of roads from clearing to bituminous surfacing, including
types and uses of machines.
Drainage structures, erosion control, theory of compaction and
stabilisation. Test on road materials.
Traffic engineering: Basic traffic studies, analysis of speed and travel
time and delay results, traffic control devices.
CE272
Building Structures
Three hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying.
designed to give students an understanding of the general principles
and details of buildings with load-bear~ng walls up to three storeys and
single-storey, wide span structures with framed or load-bearing walls.
Structural systems, basis of design, structural materials used for buildings
up to three storeys. Foundations, footings. Fire protection.
Framed buildings: materials, columns, trusses, portal frames, space
frames
Walls: Masonry, load-bearing, non load-bearing, joints, cladding.
Windows and doors. Roof structures, coverings, parapets, plumbing.
Floors on ground and suspended. Formwork for concrete. Stairs.
Finishes.
Drawing office work: drawings of details and structures relevant to the
above topics.
CE273
Practical lnspection
Three hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
which develops in students an understanding of the aims of site
inspection and a knowledge of inspection methods.
Aims and objectives of site inspection. The organisation of the building
site and areas of responsibility of various inspection authorities.
Methods of inspection of foundations and structures. Prevention of
unsound practices and the processes of acceptance and rejection.
lnspection of remedial work. Students will visit sites and submit
inspection reports.
CE274
CE275
Scaffolding A
Scaffolding B
Two hours per week for two semesters
These are second-year subjects in the diploma course in building surveying,
designed to give students an understanding of the Act and
the regulations pertaining to scaffolding and the use of scaffolding.
Types of scaffolding systems, their erection and use. The Scaffolding
Act 1971 and statutory rules and their interpretation. Practical erection
of scaffolding. Safety in the use of scaffolding.
CE281 Geomechanics
Three hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which aims to develop an understanding of the fundamental principles
of geology and soil mechanics, and apply these to simple engineering
problems.
Geology; Significance of geology in civil engineering. Principles of
mineralogy and petrology. Structural geology including deformed
rocks. Geomorphology including ground water and weathering.
Victorian stratigraphy. Engineering geology including site investigation.
Practical and field work including mineral and rock identification,
geological mapping, excursions.
Soil Mechanics; Soil types and physical properties. Classification and
soil description. Geostatic stresses and the effective stress law. Soil
hydraul~cs including permeability, flow nets, and anisotropic flow. Shear
strength of coarse and fine grained soils including total and effective
stress. Shear strength testing. Earth pressure theory for rigid and
flexible retaining walls. Bearing capacity of shallow foundations.
Practical work including index tests, soil permeability and construction
of flow nets, undrained triaxial test and direct shear test. Field work
including a simple site investigation.
CE282 Geomechanics
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to provide a building surveyor with the necessary knowledge
of geomechanics to enable him to perform his duties of inspection
and approval of foundations and other earth works, properly.
Types of soil and rock.
Stresses in soils: geostatic, load induced, hydrostatic.
Strength of soils: behaviour of clays, sands and mixed soils.
Field and laboratory tests.
Soil water: permeability, effect of moisture content on strength. Foundations:
introduction to bearing capacity, settlement and foundation
design. Approval of foundations.
CE293
Statutory Control
Two hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the Diploma of Bu~ld~ng Survey~ng Intended
to qlve students an understand~na of the malor reaulrements and
undkrlying principles in the ~e~ulat&ns and ~ cts perta/ning to building
control.
Administration and law: the Buildin9 Surveyor's role and legislative
requirements; decision-making processes within hislher area of
responsibility; the Building Surveyor as manager.
Functions: responsibilities, procedures and effective organisation of
duties related to statutory requirements and management principles.
Acts and regulations: understanding of regulations; detailed principles
and application of major regulation parts. Bastc understanding of Building
Control Act, its functions and major areas of control. Application
of individual regulation parts to various building examples.

CE295 Engineering Management
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the second year of the degree course in civil engineering
which introduces students to autonomous learning, problem solving,
communication, and basic management skills.
Students will be encouraged, through active participation, to acquire
and develop the following basic management skills: problem analysis
and problem solving, (independent) learning, time management,
material comprehension and critical assessment of information
including: asking questions, reading drawings, reading technical
information, note taking, listening, library information sources.
Teamwork and individual contributions, written and oral
communications, preparation for and review of lecture material,
interviews.
lntroduction to industrial organisations and organisation management
systems, engineering in conjunction with business management,
people management and personal relations
CE296 Behavioural Studies
Four hours per week for one semester
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying.
This subject is designed to integrate with administration subjects. It
is an experientially-based course which extends and develops earlier
studies in communications by providing a focus on interpersonal skills
relevant to personal development and relations in the workplace.
Textbook
Avery, G and Baker, E. Psychology at Work. Sydney: Prentlce-Hall.
1984.
References
Consult with the lecturer
CE301 Engineering Computing
Two hours per week for one semester
To develop an understanding of the operation and use of
microcomputer systems in an engineering environment.
To introduce students to the BASIC and Fortran languages and to
fourth generation languages.
lntroduction to microcomputers: basic architecture, microprocessors.
microcomputer systems, local area networks.
Operating Systems: role and function, review of MS-DOS, introduction
to OS12 and UNIX, screen editors, graphical user interfaces, writing
batch files using operating system commands.
Languages: programming in BASIC, introduction to Fortran, use of
scientific subroutines. lntroduction to Autolisp and expert system shells.
Microcomputer Hardware: graphics cards, peripheral devices such as
plotters and printers.
Engineering Software: principles of implementing application
packages on mirocomputer systems, device drivers, configuring
application packages.
CE311
Structural Mechanics
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the third year of the degree course in civil engineering
which aims to develop students' understanding of structural behaviour
in skeletal frames with an emphasis on computer methods, balanced
with approximate methods of analysis.
Statically determinate structures: deflections, by virtual work methods,
due to axial force, bending, shear and torsion.
Statically indeterminate structures: flexibility method of analysis,
applied to structures of one and two degrees of statlcal indeterminacy,
moment distribution method applied to continuous beams and no-sway
frames, effects of temperature, support settlement, misfit of members,
approximate analysis, matrix analysis by the general stiffness method.
Plastic analysis of structures: applications to beams and frames.
Elastic stability: fundamentals; stability of members (columns, lateral
buckling of beams, beam-columns); framed structures.
lntroduction to structural dynamics: one degree of freedom systems.
123
CE323 Urban Planning
Two hours per week for one semester
Faculty of Engineering
A thtrd-year subject In the d~ploma course In bulldlng surveylng, whlch
introduces students to problems lnvolvea In plannlnq development In
urban and rural environments.
The planning process: the purpose of planning, historical development
or urban settlements, socioloqical effects of the built environment.
Administration of planning schemes.
Residential planning standards.
Basic surveys of planning, the use of remote sensing In urban
planning.
lntroduction to data bases for planning purposes.
CE324 Urban Planning
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the third year of the degree course in clvil engineering
which introduces students to the role of the engineer in urban planning.
Land use planning: The purpose of planning, history of settlements,
urban and regional structure, land use planning models, housing,
planning schemes, residential planning standards, physical and social
surveys, planning legislation, landscape planning, shopping trends.
inner city development.
Transport planning: Transport pianning models, local area traffic
planning schemes, bicycle planning, parking, public transport, freight
transport, pedestrian traffic management.
CE331
Water Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the third year of the degree course in civil engineering
designed to teach students the application of hydraulic theory to
practice and introduce hydrological concepts.
Steady closed conduit flow: Pipe friction formulae, hydraulic and
energy grade-lines, equivalent pipes to replace pipes in series and
parallel, branching pipe systems, pipe networks, solution by Hardy-
Cross method, surges in pipelines, pump and pipeline systems.
Hydrology: Meteorological phenomena producing precipitation,
measurement and analysis of precipitation, streamflow and stream
gauging, the run-off process in the hydrologic cycle, rainfall intensltyfrequency
- durat~on curves, determination of flood discharge.
Hydraulics of open channel flow: Steady non-uniform flow phenomena,
concepts of specific energy and critical depth of non-rectangular crosssections,
gradually varied flow, control sections and their use, direct
step method of profile computation, numerical integrating method.
classification of surface profiles, transit~ons, venturi flumes.
CE343 Surveying
Three hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the third year of the degree course in civil
engineering which extends basic survey theory and computations
culminating in a practical project involving the following:
Trigonometrical and horizontal control surveys; introduction to map
projections and the Australian Map Grid.
Tacheometric surveys using EDM and total station techniques using
micro computer software for the production of enhanced computer
generated contoured plans of engineering surveys.
CE351
Structural Design
Six hours per week for one semester
A subject in the third year of the degree course in civil engineering
which extends students' knowledge of the principles of structural
analys~s and des~gn In tlmber, concrete, prestressed concrete and steel
and glves them practtce In the appllcatlon of these prlnclples
Des~gn prlnc~ples appropriate to steel, t~mber, retnlorced conrete and
orestressed .-- -- ~
concrete tncludlna t~ere des~an - methods and llve load
Feduction and intensification.
lntroduction to wind load code (AS 1170.2-1989).
Steel: design of beams, requiring detailed des~gn of stiffeners and
lateral restraints.
Steel: design of columns requiring consideration of no-sway and sway
cases and baseplate details.
Timber: des~gn of beams and columns, including their nailed andlor
bolted end-connections.
Retnforced concrete: design of parts of a total structure ~ncluding
beams, two-way slabs, one-way and two-way footings, slender columns
and walls. Reinforcement detailing.
Prestressed concrete: introduction to prestressed concrete, limited to
statically determinate elements.

Exercises in loads on structures and structural steel and concrete
design.
Computer software may be used to assist the design process where
appropriate.
CE352 Structural Design
-
Five hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying.
designed to familiarise the student with the processes of design and
checking of structural computations, with particular emphasis on codes
of practice for metal structures.
The design of steel and timber structures and the principles underlying
the main clauses In the relevant Codes of Practice; checking of
compulations for steel and timber structures.
CE355 Structural Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the third year of the degree course in civil
engineering which aims to develop a high level of competence in the
analysis and design of structures.
Methods of structural analysis: first order linear, second order linear
and non-linear analysis, with particular reference to codes of practice.
Elastic stability of frames, stability functions, geometric element
stiffness matrix.
Design of steel structures: fabrication, erection, corrosion and fire
protection, resistance to lateral loads, bracing systems, action under
non gravity loads.
Design of timber structures: glulam and LVL members, joint
displacements, plate connectors and multi-nail connections.
Design of concrete structures: modelling and analys~s of three
dimensional forms such as stairs, comblned footings and flat slab
systems, reinforcement detailing.
CE374
Building Structures
Three hours per week for one semester
A thlrd-year subject in the D~ploma of Bulldlng Survey.ng, des$gned
to awe students an aoDreclatlon of the qeneral Drlncl~les, st~uctural
dekils and associated services for mu%-storey' buildings.
Multi-storey buildings: structural systems, cladding and roofs, partitions,
walls and ceilings, vertical and horizontal transportation, foundation
systems, construction systems, effects of tall buildings on the
environment.
CE375
Fire Technology
Two hours per week for one semester
A third year subject in the Diploma of Building Surveying dealing with
causes of fire and the behaviour of building materials under fire
conditions.
The combusting process: phases of fire, fire spread, smoke spread
and control.
Material behaviour under fire conditions: combustibility of building
materials.
Early fire hazard indices. Performance of surfaces under fire conditions.
Heat sink effects. Fire loads and fire compartmentation.
Human behaviour in fires. Methods of egress, fire and smoke detection
and control.
CE394 Statutory Control
Four hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the Diploma of Building Surveying, intended
to further develop students' understanding of the principles underlying
the relevant Regulations, Acts, codes and standards and their application
to major projects, and of the functions of a building surveyor.
Administration and law: buildlng Surveyor's duties and hislher legislative
responsibilities. Legislative requirements affecting building
approval and construction. Building Surveyors' legal proceedings.
Functions: consultative role of the Building Surveyor in Council and
prlvate practlce Delegat~on of respons~bil~t~es and monltorlng process
Control of entlte bulldlna -. Drocess. Ilalson, communlcatlon, and recora
functions.
Acts and regulations: analysis of regulations and detailed study of total
regulations and principles. Ability to relate to all relevant codes and
standards. Study of the Building Control Act and procedures.
Anomalies in the Act. Regulations and procedures. Redrafting of
regulations.
CE395
Engineering Management
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the third year of the degree course in civil engineering
which introduces students to some fundamental concepts in
management and construction management.
General introduction to classical management theory.
Organisation: The nature of management, organisation structure,
management structure, management functions, key function areas.
Finance: lntroduction to business finance, sources of funds, financial
accounting, double entry bookkeeping through to trial balance,
management accounting, costing capital investment, working capital.
Human Aspects: Introduction to human aspects and industrial
relations, basic psychology, working groups, informal organisation,
status, motivation, human resources management, industrial
legislation affecting arbitration, employment, working conditions,
introducing change.
Slte organ~sat~on Organ~sat~on, procedures, dut~es and respons~bll~ties
of the cl~ent's and contractor's reDresentat~ves.
Site safety: Regulations and acts, safety precautions, codes of practice.
Operations analysis: Time and motion studies, time lapse techniques.
sampling of operations, queuing theory in determining economic haulserver
systems.
CE396 Communications 2
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment is continuous
A third-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying which
aims to develop:
- further sk~lls In specific areas of communication (including relating
to the public; reports for specific purposes; work diaries);
- critical thinking skills and an understanding of social and political
decision-making processes;
- an awareness of the social responsibilities of professional groups.
References
To be advised.
CE403
Professional Projects
Two hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
designed to consolidate and integrate the various strands of the course
and to develop students' self-education and communication skills
further.
Preparation of a written report on material submitted for a building
permit or alternatively preparation and assembly of documents to be
submitted for a building permit.
Preparation of a written report on an approved project topic relevant
to the course. Students are required to deliver a summary of their
reports to their peers, academic staff and guests as a part of their
assessment.
CE406
Water and Transport Engineering
Four hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil
engineering which extends students' knowledge and skills in the areas
of transport engineering and water engineering.
Road traffic: Flow theories, human performance, vehicle
characteristics. Arterial road traffic management.
Signals: saturation flow of opposed turns, traffic detection, filter turns,
layout of hardware.
Road Materials: Properties of and tests for road building materials.
rheology of bitumens, skid resistance.
Railway Engineering: Conventional railway track, track design and
geometry, track construction. High speed railways. Rubber tyred
railways.
Reservoir yield.
Potable water treatment: methods, theory of sedimentation and
filtration.
Wastewater treatment and disposal: methods and their applications,
loading rates.

CE415
Structural Engineering
Five hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil engineering
which further develops students' understanding of structural
mechanics.
Stress analysis: stress-strain relations and the general equations of
elasticity, plane strain and plane strain problems, yield criteria Vresca,
Von Mises), torsion of open cross sections.
Modelling of structures using finite element packages.
Influence lines.
Prestressed concrete analysis and design, including statically
indeterminate structures and losses of prestress.
Design of steel portal frames: modelling, analysis and design of
elements and connections.
Masonry design: plain and reinforced walls subject to vertical and
lateral loads.
Fire Engineering: fire loads and containment, performance of structural
materials, elements and systems under fire conditions, methods of
providing fire resistance.
Exercises in prestressed concrete, steel portal frame and masonry
design.
Use will be made of computer software where appropriate.
CE416
Structural Engineering
Four hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil
engineering which introduces advanced topics in structural
engineering analysis and deslgn with a particular emphasis on
computer application.
Structural dynamics: free and forced vibrations of single and multideqree
of freedom systems.
lntroductlon to the f~nlte element method: general formulation of an
element stilfness matrix: the constant stratn triangle and higher order
elements.
Plastic analysis and design of multi-storey frames.
Prestressed concrete: advanced topics, end anchorages, partial
prestressing.
Structural des~gn with composite, cold formed steel and aluminium
sections.
CE422 Urban Planning
Two hours per week for one semester
A f~nal-year sublect in the diploma course In bulldlng surveying, which
fllrther develops students' understandtng of the planning process.
Planning law: acts and legislation governing town planning.
Planning appeals: preparation for an appeal and participation in the
appeals system.
Urban landscaping concepts relating to permit applications.
Possible developments of the approval of permits (BADAC and Bains
Reports).
CE431 Water Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil engineering
which enables students to apply principles of hydraulics to the design
of water engineering systems.
Water supplies: Quantity and pressure requirements, supply mains.
balancing storage, reticulation, fire services.
Sewerage reticulation: Estimation of flow rates, hydraulic principles.
des~gn of sewers.
Stormwater drainage: Urban drainage systems, design using the
Rational method and hydraulic grade line, storrnwater detention,
pumped storage systems.
Water quality: Parameters, criteria, types and source of pollution.
Faculty of Engineering
CE452 Structural Design
Four hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to familiarise students with the relevant codes of practlce
for concrete and masonry structures and to highlight important design
requirements by considering selected case histories of structural
failures.
Discussion of the major regulations and the~r underlying principles
for codes and regulations for the following:
Concrete structures, structural brickwork, prestressed concrete.
Structural failures: brief case histories chosen to illustrate design
criteria.
Practical work: checking of selected structural design.
CE461
Transport Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fourth year of the degree course which enables
students to become proficient in the areas of trafflc engineering,
pavement design, and road geometry.
Traffic engineering: Design. analysis and presentation of results for
twelve types of traffic surveys. Design of at-grade intersections.
Pavements: Principles, mechanistic modelling, CIRCLY program, and
structural design of flexible pavements. Design of sprayed seal and
asphalt mixes. Types. joints, reinforcement and thickness design of
concrete road pavements.
Road geometly: Speed parameters, sight distance, horizontal culves.
vertical curves, auxiliary lanes.
CE474
Building Structures
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the diploma of building surveying, designed to
extend students' knowledge of structural behaviour and construction
and demolition techniques, and to give them an appreciation of storm
water drainage.
Structural systems: principles of structural action and methods of construction
for precast and prefabricated structures, shells, folded-plate
structures, cable and membrane structures, air-inflated structures,
highrise post-tensioned structures, etc.
Cranes and lifting devices.
Demolition: regulations, methods, equipment, shorlng, design for
demolition, demolition of prestressed buildings.
Stormwater drainage: hydrology, surface and subsurface drainage,
elements of hydrology, applications to roof and site drainage. Groundwater
Hydraulics of pressure conduits: total energy line. hydraul~c
grade line, energy components, graphical representation, pipe friction
formulae, minor losses, pump select~on.
CE475 Fire Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
A final year subject in the diploma of building surveying, designed to
give students an appreciation of fire engineering.
Performance of structural materials, structural members and structural
systems under fire conditions.
Measures to provide elements and structures with fire resistance.
Australian Fire Test Standards. Overseas tests and Standards.
Site inspection of fire damaged structures. Fire reports.
CE476
Construction Engineering
Four hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil
engineering which introduces students to engineering practice in a
range of construction activities.
Excavation: excavation plant, drilling equipment, blastlng rock, setting
out of open excavations, support of open excavations.
Road construction: operattons in road construction, quality control,
plant out~ut and selection, auarrv operation, stabilisation of subarades,
roller compacted pavement.'blo& pavement, geotextiles, layout'bf road
works, administration of road works.
Concrete: production, delivery and ~nspection, crushed aggragate and
sand plant. concreting plant, delivery systems, site inspection and
quality control, formwork, curing, cold and hot weather concreting,
shotcrete, precast concrete.
Foundation construction: dewatering, ground anchors, underpinning
and shoring, footing and slab construction.
Bridge construction: methods for reinforced and prestressed concrete
bridges, segmental bridge construction, girder launched construction.

CE481 Geomechanics
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil engineering
which enables students to design simple foundations considering both
soil shear strength and settlement characteristics, to estimate the
stability of soil slopes, and to apply the basic principles of slte
~nvestiqation.
Performance of shallow foundatlons fncludlng lmmed~ate and
consol~dat~on settlement. bearlnq caoacltv for lncllned and eccentric
loads, lightly loaded (resident~al) ioundations. Deep foundations
including load capacity and settlement of single piles and pile groups.
Slope stability: slopes in cohesionless soils, cohesive soils, total and
effective stress analysis including frlction circle method, method of
slices, computer analysis, use of stability charts, changes of slope
stability with time, methods of stabilising slopes.
Site investigation including planning, sampling methods, insitu tests.
Slope stability for cohesionless and cohesive soils in terms of total
and effective stresses.
CE482 Geomechanics
Three hours per week for one semester
A f~nal-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
designed to extend students' knowledge further, in the area of
geomechanics.
Compaction: compaction process, compaction plant, control of filled
sites.
Foundation: bearing capacity, settlement, footlng design with particular
emphasis on residential and light industrial foundations.
Excavat~ons and underpinning.
Site ~nvestigat~ons: methods, reports and their interpretat~on.
Approval of foundatlons. Regulations Responsibilitites of various
partles.
CE493 Building Law and Contracts
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying, which
provides building surveyors wlth a suitable legal background for the
proper discharge of thecr duties.
Preparing a case for litigation and courtroom procedure. Property law.
Strata Titles Act 1967 and Cluster Titles Act 1974, Conservation and
preservation legtslat~on Regulat~ons In relat~on to bu~ldlng surveyors
Local Government IHous~nq Buflders Lfab~lfty) Act 1973 Proless~onal
liability for negligence. -
Contracts: types and conditions of contracts and tenders
Specifications.
CE495 Engineering Management
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject In the fourth year of the degree course In clvll englneerlng
whlch develoos In students an understandlnq of some aspects of the
theory and bractice of business management and donstruction
techn~ques.
Setting of objectives, measurement of performance, introduction to the
marketing function, sales, market research, segmentation, etc.
Innovation and entrepreneurial aspects.
Modern theories of management and current practices. For example:
Total Quality Management. Value Adding Management, Just-in-Tlme.
Supervls~on and leadersh~p, practical lndustr~al relations, negotlatlng.
arbltratlon and conc~l~at~on, occupat~onal health and safetv, selection
and training, project teams and'task forces.
Motivation, job enrichment, employee participation.
Time management, effective speaking, writing, read~ng, creative
thinking, lateral thinking, technical commun~cation skills.
Problem analysis, problem solvlng, declsion making.
Construction techniques: industrial and commercial buildings, medtum
and high rise buildings in steel, reinforced and prestressed concrete,
tilt-up construction formwork In tlmber and steel, cllmbing formwork
table and slip forms.
Concrete technology: materials, plant, mix design, high strength
concrete, admixtures, delivery systems, formwork, placing, curing,
testing.
CE505
Investigation Project
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the final year of the degree course in civil engineering
which develops students' init~atlve and self-education skills through
work on an investigation project in an area relevant to the course.
Students will work lndlv~dually or In small groups on selected projects
under stafl supervlston and will be requlred to meet reqularlv w~th thelr
supervisor. In general, projects will be'staff initiated an3 mayarise from
staff research or from proposals put forward by industry or by
cooperative employers. Students may also suggest projects which will
require departmental approval before proceeding.
Each project will requlre a l~terature survey and a theoretical andlor
experimental Investlqatlon Results and conclus~ons wlll be oresented
as' a progress report in the form of a poster paper and an oral
presentation, and a final written report at the conclusion of the project.
CE507
Municipal and Transport Engineering
Five hours per week for one semester
A major elective subject in the final year of the degree course in civil
englneerlng whlch extends students'.knowledge and skllls In the areas
of transoort enqlneerlnq, water enqlneerlnq and munlcloal
engineering, incluaing enGronmental consideratbns.
Fre~ghtransport: shipping, harbours, dredging, cargo contalners.
Inland waterways, belt conveyors, air freight, solids pipelines, ore
handling, freight terminals, capacity, selection of mode, phys~cal
distribution.
Passenger transport: fixed guideway, APT proposals, metro, airports,
airport capacity, air traffic control, ferries, selection of mode.
Road englneerlrig appllcatlon of queuelng theory, freeway geometry.
trafllc law, road h~erarchv road construction, slqnlnq, b~kewavs. trafflc
generation, parking, pedestrianised streets, computer packages for
transport analysis.
Environmental considerations: traffic noise, vehicle emissions.
Transport economics, transport administration, transportation planning.
Powers and dut~es of local government engtneers respons~btllt~es for
new develO~menl~, roads and trafflc. transoort manaaement local
area traffic management, street des~gn, road maintenance, parking
requirements and control, property and equipment, solid waste
management, recreation, including consideration of financial planning
and constraints.
Planning: aspects of planning and building control relevant to local
government. Environmental effects statements.
Surveying: introduct~on to photogrammetry and remote sensing.
CE516
Structural Engineering
Five hours per week for one semester
A major electwe subject in the final year of the degree course In civil
engineering which broadens the students' understanding of the theory
of structural behaviour and considers some advanced topics In
structural engineering.
Energy methods in structural analysis: work and energy, pr~nciple of
virtual work, theorem of minimum potential energy, reciprocal
theorems. Applications to buckling problems.
The behaviour of plates and shells; yield line theory and strip methods.
Advanced topics of structural engineering; structural dynamics,
earthquake loading and analysis, fire engineering, floor systems,
reinforclnq systems, prestressinq systems, foundatton desiqn, soecial
CE533
Water Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the final year of the degree course in civil engineering
which extends students' knowledge into the field of non-steady,
non-uniform flow. On completion, students should be able to apply
the principles to practical problems.
A selection of topics from the following:
Flood estimation, flood routing techniques, flood retarding basin
des~gn, on-site stormwater detention, reservoir yield analysis methods.
ground-water flow, pressure surges in pipe systems, river engineering.
ocean engineering.
Emphasis 1s on the use of computers in analysis of problems.

CE553 ----- Structural - -- -- ----- Desian - --. a -
Tenderina ~rocedures:
Three hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the final year of the degree course in civil engineering
which deVelODS further the des~an skills of students who have
a pascular interest'in structural design.
Students undertake a selection of more advanced structural des~gn
projects, chosen to emphasise intepretation of current des~gn codes
and current design practices.
CE555 Civil Design
Five hours per week for one semester
A subject in the final year of the degree course in civil engineering
which develops students' abilities to apply theoretical knowledge to
a ranae - of . ~ractical desiqn situations.
A range of des~gns will be chosen from structural and clvll englneerlng
areas of the course Asslanments whlch reaulre creatlve solut~ons will
be included. Problem sorutions may be in the form of written reports.
design computations, drawings and models, as appropriate.
In addition students will be given a series of lectures In the design
process aimed at coordinating activities involved. Particular reference
will be made to legal processes and statutory requirements, permits
and regulat~ons.
CE576
Construction Engineering
Five hours per week for one semester
A major elective subject in the final year of the degree course In civil
engineering which develops students' knowledge and skills In the
construction area.
The construction industry: organisation, economy and opportunities,
entrepreneurial construction activities, types of contract, design and
construct contracts, project management, fast track.
Plant: output and performance of bulldozers, tractor scrapers,
excavators, truck cycles.
Road constructlon: quarry operation, selection, performance and
output of road plant, quality control, stabilisation of sub-grades, roller
compacted pavements, block pavements. geotextlles. road dlverslons
and other constructlon reaulrements
Bridge construction: steel, reinforced and prestressed concrete
bridges, segmental and girder launched construction.
Piles: types, selection of precast, insitu, or steel piling, installation
methods, load tests.
Tunnelling: soft ground and rock tunnelling, tunnelling machines,
tunnel Ilnings, removal of excavated material, inlet and outlet
structures.
Pipelines: loads on precast and insitu pipelines due to different
methods of excavation and backfilling, excavation and shoring, joints,
laying techn~ques for precast pipelines.
Dams and embankments: earth, rockfill and mass concrete gravity
dams and embankments, arch dams, outlet works and sprllways.
CE582 Geomechanics
Three hours per week for one semester
A minor elective subject in the final year of the degree course in civil
englneerlng whlch extends students' knowledge of geology and so11
mechanics and introduces them to rock mechan~cs and awes them
an appreciation of the hlgh level of experience and "art" ;equired to
practice in the area of geomechanics.
Earth pressure problems, braced excavations, tie-back walls and soil
anchors; introduction to soil dynam~cs; introduction to rock mechanics;
further selected topics in so11 engineering and engineering geology.
CE596
Engineering Management
Five hours per week for one semester
A subject in the final year of the degree course in civil engineering
which makes students aware of the role of the englneer in society and
of effects of man on the environment.
The role of the engineer in society, professional Institut~ons.
professional ethics.
Global ecology, conservation versus development, sustainable use of
renewable resources, control of use of non-renewable resources,
values of natural systems, wtlderness and landscape, environmental
impact assessment, environmental rehabilitation.
Project management: Initlation of projects, feasib~lity studies.
Contract documentation: conditions of contract, bonds, specifications,
schedule of quantities, contract drawings.
Faculty of Engineering
estimatina, cash flow forecasting
construcilon control: critical ~athmethods, cost control, construction
documentation, cla~ms, partial and final certificates.
Industrial Relations: trade unions, negotiations, arbitration and
,-,,,,.-i~i~+i~,, -.,., . ". ..
Contract disputes: the role of the arbitrator, legal procedures.
procedures for obtaining planning and building approval, permits.
certification.
Formwork: design and certificat~on of formwork.
Budgets: management reporting systems, financial control of projects.
Cost-benefit analysis: discounted cash, flow present worth criteria.
buying or hiring plant, life-cycle costing, project evaluation, profitability,
evaluation of tenders, replacement of plant.
The Australian legal system, commercial law regarding employers.
employer liaibilities. Contracts for the provision of engineering servlces
by practices and employees, agreements involving resort to arbitration,
property law concepts relevant to the practice of engineering, patents.
copyright, trademarks and tndustrial design, the consequences in civil
law for the careless provision of engineering services or advice (the
tort of negligence). Companies, partnerships, trusts and joint ventures
as vehicles or entities for the practice of engineering.
Planning law: Acts and legislation relevant to major projects.
CE670
Construction Technology
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject In the graduate d~ploma course In clv~l englneerlng constructlon
whlch cons~ders technoloalcal resources available In the executlon
of a construction project. -
Planning of constructlon programs, resource allocation, plant and
equipment, soil investigation and data interpretation, construction
materials, trade skills, regulations.
CE690 Civil Engineering Project Control
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in civil engineering construction
which ~ntroduces the techniques for establishing - and maintaining
technical control of a civil eng~neering proiect.
General cond~t~ons of contract, forms of contract, draw~ngs, speclf~catlons
and auantltles. estlmat~na schedullna and Droarammlnq, quallty
control; do'cumentation of worFprogress aid coits; progress payment
procedures; industrial safety.
CE691
Civil Engineering Management
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in civil engineering construction
designed to develop an awareness of efficient site management
techniques.
Responsibilities of a project manager; responsibility of site engineer;
construction slte organisat~on; site office procedures; contractor1
prlnclpal relat~ons, arb~trat~on, company structures, man management
negotlatlons, arb~trat~on and conc~l~at~on
CE692
Communications
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject In the graduate d~ploma course In c~vll englneerlng constructlon
The theow and Dractlce of commun~cattons Students take part
in a program designeb to increase their personal capacities to understand
and communicate well at different levels of oral and written communication,
particularly as project managers in the construction
industry. To this end various techniques are used and evaluated by
the group.
The course also includes a br~ef study of the historical role of the englneer
In the development of human communications, placing the profess~on
In 11s soc~al context The purpose of the course IS to enable
the enalneer to evaluate ~rofess~onal problems more competently and
to conhunicate ideas more effectively.
CE770
Construction Engineering
Four hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the graduate diploma course in civil engineering construction
rev~ewing construction techniques for civil engineering projects.
Construction techn~ques for highways, bridges, railways, airports, tunnels,
pipelines, foundations, buildings, dams, water supply structures,
sewerage.

CE771
Construction Project Control
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in clvil engineering construction
which introduces students to a critical study of all aspects of a
construction project.
Case studies of construction projects by report and discussion.
CE790
Financial Project Control
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in civil engineering construction
which introduces financial concepts that are Important In
evaluating projects, in financing projects; in financial control and In
determining the profitability of projects.
Cost control; financ~al control; determination of profitability; evaluation
of projects; evaluation of sources of finance.
EA411
Non-Newtonian Technology
Three hours per week for two semesters
Assessment: Laboratory work and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To provide the student with a thorough understanding of Non-
Newtonian flow and heat transfer.
A review of Newtonian fluid flow, heat transfer and mixing (up to and
including solutions to relevant equations of motion), precedes the work
on non-Newtonian flow, viscometry, heat transfer and mixing. The final
aspect of the subject is the application of this work to some practical
situations such as heat sterilisation.
References
Coulson, J.M. and Richardson, J.F. ChemicalEngineering. Vol. Ill. 2nd
edn, London: Pergamon. 1979
Skelland, A.H.P. Non-Newtonian Flow and Heat Transfer New York:
Wiley Interscience, 1967
Wilkinson, W.L. Non-Newtonian Fluids: Fluid Mechanics, Mlxing and
Heat Transfer. London: Pergamon. 1960
EA491
Biochemical Engineering
Three hours per week (including practical work) for
two semesters
Assessment: by examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To give students a grounding in the theory and practice of
biological processes used in engineering.
Requirements for growth in biological material; variations in microorganisms,
fermeritatlon pathways Enzyme reactlon klnellcs and
absolute reactlon rate theorv, conllnuous fermentation, aeratlon and
agitation. Mass transfer theories. Bubble and mechanical aeration;
scale up; operational and control. Biological water treatment - BOD,
COD. Mathematical modelling for the design of activated sludge plants,
trickling filter and sludge digesters. Nitrification, eutorphication and
river modelling.
References
Aiba. S. et a/. Biochemical Engineering. 2nd edn, New York: Academic.
1973
Bailey, J.E. and Ollis, D.F. Biochemical Engineering Fundamentals. 2nd
edn, New York: McGraw-Hill. 1986
Metcalf and Eddy Inc. Wastewater Engineering: Collection, Treatment,
Disposal. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972
EE188
Engineering Science, Electronics
and Computing
Five hours per week for two semesters
A first year subject in all engineering degree courses.
Electronics
Semester 1
DC Circuits (Physics): Ohms law, series and parallel circuits, resistivity
conductivity, temperature coefficient of resistance.
ldeal Circuit Elements (Electronics): Resistance, Inductance,
Capacitance, voltage sources, current sources, energy storage and
energy dissipation.
Electricity and Magnetism (Physics): Charge. Coulombs law, Electric
Field. Gauss Theorem. Electric Potential, Potential Difference,
Absolute Potential, Electron Volt, Magnetic Field, forces on a moving
charge and between parallel conductors, Faraday's law, Lenz' law.
Linear Circuit Analysis (Electronics): Kirchoff's Voltage Law (KVL),
Kirchoff's Current Law (KCL). Voltage and current division. Circuit
analysis using mesh and nodal equations. Thevenin and Norton
theorems. Superposition theorem.
Atomic Phys~cs (Physics): Photo electric effect. Atomic model: Bohr
atom, energy levels, light emission and absorption, spectra of
hydrogen. X-rays: production, characteristics, Bremsstrahlung.
Optics (Phys~cs): Interference: superposition, Young's experiment,
phase change on reflection, thin films. Diffraction; single and double
slit resolution, grating by crystals. Instruments; single magnifier,
compound microscope.
Sinusotdal Circuit Analysis - Part 1 (Electronics): Reason for
emphasis upon sinusoidal analysis. Peak, rms, average values.
Response to sinusoidal excitation of resistive, inductive and capacitive
elements. The phasor representation and the phasor diagram.
Digital Electronic Concepts (Electronics): Electrical representations of
numerical data. Binary, octal and hexadecimal number systems.
General number systems conversions. Basic logic gates. Boolean
algebra. De Morgan's theorems. Truth tables. Combinatorial logic
circuits including sum of products (SOP) and product of sums (POS)
realisations. Simple Karnaugh Map. Simple flip-flop.
Semester 2
Sinusoidal Circuit Analysis 2: Review of complex numbers (a+jb,
MeJ',) Concepts of reactance, Impedance adm~ttance, conductance
and susceotance Sertes and oarallel comblnatlon of elements.
application' of linear circuit laws to AC circuit. Resonance, block
diagram approach to linear circuit laws to AC circuit. Resonance, block
d~agram approach to filter characteristics (L.P., H.P., B.P., 6,s.). The
frequency spectrum and its band allocation.
Analog Electronic Circuits: Models for ideal amplifiers. Linear amplifier
circuit analysis using Kirchoff's laws. ldeal operational amplifiers.
Linear applications of op amps. Op amp integrators and differentiators.
Practical circuit connections.
Energy Transfer and Utilisation: Power calculations: instantaneous
average power, reactive power and voltampers, power factor, apparent
power and power triangle. Power, voltage current, and energy
measurement.
Magnetlc Clrcults lntroducl~on to magnetlc flelds Permanent magnets
Slmole maunet~c clrcu~ls Determlnarlon ol self Inductance Relavs
rans sf or me;^.
Electromagnetic Energy Conversion: The elements of a power
generation and distribution system.
Prescribed texts
Carlson. A.B. and Gisser, D.G. Electrical Engineering Concepts and
Applications. 2nd edn. Addison-Wesley. 1990
Bueche, F. Introduction to Physics tor Scientists and Engineers. 4th
edn, N.Y.: McGraw Hill, 1986
Koffman, Turbo Pascal. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1989
Reference texts
Del Toro, V Electrical Engineenng Fundamentals. 2nd edn, Englewood
Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1986
Kepes, J J Foundations 01 Electr~cal Englneenng Prentice Hall. 1990
Bobrow. L S. Fundamcnlals 01 Electrical Eng~neer~ng Holt Saunders
Computing Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
Brief history of computing.
lntroductlon to computer systems including the disk operating system
(DOS) and the Turbo Pascal development environment.
Introductory Pascal including syntax diagrams, fundamental elements
of structured programming, control structures, elementary types,
subrange types, arrays, procedures, functions, variable and value
parameters, predefined functions, identifier scope, enumerated types,
sets, records, with statements, text files.
Elementary inputloutput interfacing techniques using Pascal.
References
Koffman, E.B. Turbo Pascal: Problem Solving and Program Design. 2nd
edn. Addison-Wesley, 1989
Leestma, S.C. and Nyhoff, L.R. Turbo Pascal - Programming and
Problem Solving. N.Y.: MacMillan, 1990
EE254
Electrical Design
Two hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
To introduce the principles of coil design, heating and cooling, D.C.
power supply design, printed circuit board design, amplifier design.
lntroduction to electrical design: electrical, magnetic and physical
properties of materials.
Coil design: series and shunt coils. Winding area, space factor, temperature
rise and power dissipations. Project.
Heating and cooling: heat generation, storage and dissipation. Conduct~on,
convectlon and radiation. General heating equation, cyclic
heating and heatsink design.

DC power supplies: transformers, rectifiers, regulators and IC
regulators. Split Supply Project.
Printed circuit board design: track sizing, standards, construction
methods and software tools.
Amplifier design: BJT amplif~ers, bias conditions and small signal
model. Two stage amplifier design project. Software tools. lntroduction
to programmable Logic Controllers.
TextsIReferences
Electrical Engineering Design Data. Swinburne Press. 1983
Sedra. A.S. and Smith K.C. Microelectronic Circuits. 2nd edn, New
York: Holt. Rinehart and Winston, 1987
EE258
Electrical Machines
Four hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course of electrical engineering.
To introduce the principles of magnetic circuits, electromechanical
energy conversion, transformers, induction machines, synchronous
machines, power electronics, and measurements.
Magnetic circuits: reluctance, permeance, and inductance of magnetic
circutts of series and parallel form. Calculations for non-linear maqnetic
circuits. Properties of magnetic circuit materials.
lntroduction to electromechanical energy conversion: voltage-current,
energy storage and forceltorque expressions for singly and doubly
excited transducers. Means of torque production.
Transformers: uses, types and modes of construction. Ideal transformer
equations for emfs, emf ratlo, mmf balance, current ratios. Phasor
diagram. The practical transformer, equivalent circuit, voltage
reaulat~on, - efficiency. Instrument transformers.
lntroduction to rotating machinery: construction and principles of
operation of three-phase induction machines, direct current machines.
Power electronics: lntroduction to the Thyristor family of devices
including simple trigger circuits. DC machine drives using controlled
converters. Appl~cations of thyristors.
References
Bell, D.A. Electronic lnstrumentation and Measurements. Reston, Va:
Reston Pub. Co.. 1983
Chapman, S.J. Electric Machinery Fundamentals. New York: McGraw-
Hill, 1985
Sen. PC. Princioles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics. New
~ork: wiley, 1989
Slemon, G.R. and Straughen. A. Electric Machines. Reading. Mass.:
Addison-Weslev. 1980
Helfrick, A.D. and Cooper, W.D. Modern Electronics lnstrumentation
& Measurement Techn~ques. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990
EE263 Computer Systems Engineering
Three hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Data structures: Pascal pointer types, lists, stacks, queues, trees.
directed and undirected graphs and algorithms for the manipulation
of these structures, file types and organisations.
Elementary computer organisation using Pascal as the descriptive
language: the Von-Neumann fetch-execute cycle, simple single register
architectures, their constraints and evolution to multiple register
architectures immed~ate, direct, reaister, reqister indirect and indexed
addressing modes). rascal to assembly ianguage mappings for a
multiole-reaister architecture. Informal treatment of oarser constructton
from'a language's syntax using assembly language as an example.
The assembly process. The fetch decode and execution process for
the multiple-reg~ster machine.
Internal representation of data types. Integer and floating point
arithmetic.
References
Nyhoff, L.S. and Leestma, S. Advanced Programming in Pascal with
Data Structures. MacMillan, 1989
Tenenbaum. A.M. and Augustein, M.J. Data Structures Using Pascal
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prent~ce-Hall, 1981
Sedgewick, R. Algorithms. 2nd edn, Reading. Mass.: Addison-Wesley,
iauu ,.,.,"
Egan, G.K. lntroduction to Computer Systems. Hawthorn: Swinburne
Press, 1991
Tanenbaurn. A.S. Structured Computer Organisation. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990
EE282
Faculty of Engineering
Communication Principles
A two semester subject of two hours per week
A second-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
General concepts communlcatlon systems, spectral analys~s, fundamentals
of s~analransmlss~on
-
Analogue Communications: Amplitude modulation/demodulation
methods, angle modulation/demodulation methods, receivers, stereo
broadcast.
Digital Communications: pulse amplitude modulationldemodulation,
pulse coded modulationldemodulation, RF digital
modulation/demodulation methods.
Multiplexing: TDM and FDM.
TextslReferences
Stremlers, FG. lntroduction to Communication Systems. 3rd edn,
Addison Wesley
Stark, H. et a1 Modern Electrical Communications - Analog, Digital
and Optical Systems. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
1988
Stanley, W.D. Electronic Communication Systems. Reston, VA: Reston
PII~ --. Cn --., lqR7 .---
Haykin, S. Communication Systems. 2nd edn, N.Y.: Wiley, 1983
Lathi, B.P Modern Digital and Analog Communications Systems. Holt,
Rinehart & Winston, 1983
Carlson, B. Communication Systems. 3rd edn , McGraw-Hill, 1986
Tomasi, W. Fundamentals of Electronic Communications Systems.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 1988
Taub. Schilling. Principles of Electronic Communications Systems.
2nd edn, N.Y.: McGraw Hill, 1986
Sinnema, W. Digital Analog and Data Communications. 2nd edn.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1986
Roddy, D. et a1 Electronic Communications. 3rd edn. Reston, VA:
Reston Pub. Co., 1984
EE283
Electrical Circuits
Three hours per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
The aim of this subject is to consolidate the circuit theory topics dealt
with in previous subjects and to give students a firm foundation of
circuit analysis techniques used In electrical engineering.
Circuit elements: Review R, L and C as element showing relations
between v and i for each including response to sinusoid (complex
numbers). Dependent sources. Non-linear elements in circuits.
Circuit analysis: Revision of superposition, thevenin, and norton
(includes dependant sources). Tee-pi transformat~ons. Formation of
MESH and NODAL equations (dc and ac circuits) to the stage of writing
equations In matrix form. lntroduction to maxlmum power transfer for
dc and ac circuits. Locus diagrams.
Three phase circuits: lntroduction to 3 phase voltage generation.
Phasor diagrams. 3 phase connections and solution to problems.
Power and power measurement. VAR correction.
Mutual inductance: Concepts of common flux, flux linkages and
induced voltages. Treatment as a circuit element in mesh and nodal
equations.
Two ~ort networks: Parameters used for 2 port networks inc. Z, Y,
cascade and hybr~d, showlng how the lnterconnectlon 01 the networks
will dectde on whlch oarameters are to be usea Def~nlna -. parameters
and calculating theit values.
Non-stnusoidal waveforms: This toptc examines the response of linear
networks to various periodic non-sinusoidal waveforms, and nonperiodic
inputs. The Fourier Series and Integral (Fourier Transform)
1s used as a tool for this analys~s. The Fast Fourier Transform is also
introduced
Electrical transients:
(a) Classical approach The response of f~rst order clrcults (R-L& R-
CI and second order c~rcults lRLC ser~es or parallell lo step and
sinusoidal excitations will be siudied using thediffereritial equation
approach.
(b) Laplace techniques: These techniques will be applied to more
general circuits and excitations by transforming the circult and
writing circuit equations in terms of the Laplace operator "s"
before inverting to the time domain.
Frequency response, resonance, Bode plots, frequency domain, poles
and zeros.
Measurement of clrcult parameters R L C, A.C. bridges. Accuracy,
precis~on and sensitivity.
Texts
Madhu. S. Linear Circuit Analysis. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall,
1988
References l~sted overleaf

References
Benson and Harrison. Electric Circuit Theory 3rd edn, London: Edward
Arnold. 1975
Fitzgerald, Higginbotham and Grabel. Basic Electrical Engineering.
5th edn, Tokyollnternational: McGraw Hill. 1981
Nilsson, J.W. Electric Circuits. 3rd edn. Reading, Mass.: Addison
Wesley, 1989
Scanlan and Levy. Circuit Theory Vol. 1, Edinburgh: Oliver and Boyd,
1970-73 . .
Skilling, Electric Networks. N.Y.: Wiley, 1974
Suggested work book
Edminister, J.A. Schaum's Outine of Theory and Problems of
Electromagnetics. N.Y.: McGraw Hill, 1979
EE287 Electronics
Three hours per week for two semesters
A second-year sublect in the deqree course in electrical enaineerina.
Solid state devices: Non-linear and linear electrical models, and their
use in analysis of switching and analog signal processing applications.
Basic intergrated circuit logic technologies: TTL and CMOS electrical
characteristics, ECL and MOS overview.
Combinational logic: SSI and MSI common functional blocks, standard
symbols and behavioural descriptions. System design techniques
using SSI, MSI, ROMs and PLAs.
Sequential logic: Analysis of bistable and monostable circuits,
behavioural description and timing of latches, master-slave and edge
triggered flip-flops. MSI registers and counters.
Synthesis of system controllers using finite state machine and ASM
behavioural descriptions using MSI and PLDs.
TextlReferences
Sedra. A.S. and Smith, K.C. Microelectronic Circuits. 2nd edn, New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1987
EE363 Computer Systems Engineering
Four hours per week for one semester
A th~rd-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Brief introduction to 'C' as a mapping from Pascal.
lntroduction to software engineering including software life cycle and
the design process using appropriate graphical respresentations.
Computer organ~sation including representative microprocessor
architectures and in particular the Motorola M680xx family, bus
organisation, line driving and receiving, memory interfacing including
address decoding, memory readlwrite cycles, timing diagrams,
inputfoutput interfacing, exception handling including asynchronous
inpuffoutput (interrupt driven, polled); the Intel 180xxx architecture will
be briefly compared with the Motorola architecture. Programming used
In computer organisation studies will emphasise the use of high-level
languages as a first choice. lntroduction of techniques for identification
and selective optimisation of time-critical program regions.
lntroduction to multi-process and time-shared operating systems
including bas~c concepts of scheduling and resource allocation.
References
Kelley, A. and Pohl. I. An lntroduction to programming in C Menlo Park.
CA: BenjaminlCummings. 1991
Wilcox. A.D. 68000 Microcomputer Systems: Designing and Interfacing.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 1987
Uffenbeck, J. The 8086/8088 Family: Design, Programming, and
Interfacing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Eccles, W.J. Microprocessor Systems, A 16-bit Approach. Reading.
Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1985
Stone. H.S. Microcomputer Interfacing. Reading, Mass.: Addlson-
Wesley, 1982
Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organisation. 2nd edn,
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Jones, G. Software Engineering. Wiley. 1990
EE383 Electromagnetic Fields
Two hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineer~ng.
Magnetic flux and flux linkage; magnetlc field intensity, Amperes Law.
Faraday's Law.
Field conditions at material Interfaces.
Poisson's equation; Laplace's Equation.
Solution of Electrostatic Field Problems: Solutions of Laplace's
equation. Application of image and finite d~fference methods. Two
terminal capacitance. Multiple conductor systems; calculat~on of partial
and total capacitances.
Solution of Magnetostatic Field Problems: Magnetic vector potenttal.
Mutual inductance. internal and external self inductance.
Electromagnetic Waves: Time varying fields; magnetic induction,
displacement current. TEM waves in free space. Phase velocity,
Intrinsic impedance.
Transmission Lines: Field and circuit analysis of transmission lines;
propagation constant. characterlstlc Impedance D~scont~nu~l~es In and
termlnatlon of lossless transmisston Ilnes, reflect~ons and standma
waves, input impedance, impedance matching; steps and pulses oii
lines.
Plane Waves in Materials: Dispersive media, group velocity. Reflection
and transmission of waves normally incident on interfaces: between
dielectrics; between dielectric and conductor. Propagation in good
conductors, skin depth. Power flow. Povntina . - vector.
Waveglr~des Reflect~on of waves obl~quely lnc~denl on ,nlerfaces
reflect~on. refraction total Internal reflect~on Gu~ded waves between
dielectric:dielectric and dielectric-conductor interfaces.
References
Hayt, W.H. Engineering Electromagnetics. 4th edn, New York: McGraw
Hill, 1981
Skitek, G.G. and Marshall, S.V. Electromagnetic Concepts and
Applications. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prent~ce-Hall, 1987
Cheng, D.K. Field and Wave Electromagnet~cs. 2nd edn, Reading,
Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1985
Plonus, M.R. Applied Electromagnetics. Tokyo: McGraw-HtII. Kogakusha,
1978
EE384
Electrical Power and Machines
Three hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Power electronics: Power transistor family of devices. Base drives.
Stepper motor and brushless DC motor drives using power transistors.
Electrical machines Three phase lranslormer construction, operallon.
and deslanal~on Parallel operallon Tert~arv wlndlnas. modelllna
~armonic phenomena. ~e~resentation of synchronous machines
having significant resistance, modified Blondel diagram as applied to
hybrid step motors. Operating properties of variable reluctance and
hybrid step motors.
Step motors and brushless d.c. motors: Brushless d.c. motors -
construction. Induction machine: The Induction machine equivalent
circuit, torque equation, reduction to small slip form, variable frequency
operation. Circle diagram. Effects of harmonics. Classification of
induction machines, and choice of machine type. Llnear forms of
induction machine.
References
Say, M.G. Alternating Current Machines. 5th edn, New York: Wiley, 1983
Acarnley, PI? Stepping Motors, A Guide to Modern Theory and Practice.
2nd edn, London: Peregrlnus, 1984
EE386 Electronics
Three hours per week for one semester
A third-vear subiect In the dearee course in electrical enaineerina.
Baslc advantages and disadvantages of negallve leedback The
feedback to~oloo~es w~lh deta~led analvs~s of serles shunt feedback
Frequency ;esponse, and frequency domain techniques for stability
analysis and compensation. Ideal operational amplifier applications
in instrumentation and signal processing applications. Non-ideal
operational amplifiers, errors and noise. Interfacing to digital and
analog systems. AID and DIA converters including flash converter,
successive approximation, dual slope, and tracking converters. Sample
and hold, comparator and Schmitt trigger and applications. Pulse
generators, sine generators and VCOs. Electrical isolation techn~ques
for analog and digital 110 devlces.
Design and analysis and simulation techniques for discrete analog
circuits: worst case design to meet minimum performance
specifications, selection of configuration alternatives for implementing
direct coupled complementary symmetry large signal amplifiers.
TextslReferences
Analog Electrontcs:
Sedra, A.S. and Smtth, K.C. Microelectron~c Circuits. 2nd edn, N.Y.:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston. 1987
Millman, J. and Grabel. A. M~croelectronics 2nd edn, New York:
McGraw Hill, 1987

EE388 Communications
Three hours per week for one semester
A third year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Principles and applications of discrete systems.
- Basic concepts of signals and discrete systems, including the
sampling theorem.
- Discrete models for linear time invariant systems and analysis
techniques.
- Sinusoidal steady state analysis of discrete systems, inclusive of
the frequency response and some fundamentals of digital filtering.
- Applications of the Z-transform to discrete system analysis.
- The discrete Fourier series and its uses.
- Introduction to the Fast Fourier Transform and its uses.
TextslReferences
Strum. R. and Kirk, D. First Principles of Discrete Systems and Digital
Signai Plocessing. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1988
Oppenheim and Schaefer. Discrete Time Signal Processing.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1989
Franklin, Powell, Workman. Digital Control of Dynamic Systems.
Reading Mass.: Addison Wesley, 1990
DeFatk, 'Lucas, Hodgekiss. Digital Signai Processing: A System Design
Approach. N.Y.: Wiley, 1988
EE389 Linear Control Systems
Four hours per week for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
system-concepts: lntroductio" to systems and their representation.
Svstem elements. Bastc . physical . relationships. Formulation of linear
skem equations.
&sic ~naiysis Concepts. Solulion of linear differential equations. The
Ladace transform and transform oairs. The S plane. poles and zems
~irial Value theorem.
Analysis of Linear Systems: The linear single input continuous signal
system. Use of classical time domain, transfer functions and frequenc
response techniques. The second order system. Stability criteria; 8
plane and frequency response. Analogue computer techn~ques.
Analysis of electromechanical systems.
Control Concepts: Control strategies. Open and closed loop systems
and feedback. Classification of control systems.
Control System Representation: Formulation of mathematical models.
Transfer functions and block diagrams.
Graphical representation of systems - the S plane, the root locus plot,
the frequency plot of transfer functions. Stability and steady state
performance.
TextslReferences
Dorf, R.C. Modem ConW Sysmms. 5th edn, Reading, Mass.: Addisonwesky,
1989
Dazzo and Houpis. Linear Control Systems Analysis and Design. 3rd
edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1989
Ogata, K. Modwn ConholEngineering. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall,
1970
EE402 Management Fundamentals
A singlesemester subject of three hours per week
A fourth year core subject in the degree course in electrical
engineering.
To provide students with a satisfactory understanding of the
fundamentals of management practice and accounting.
Supervision, management and the management env~ronment
including planning, organising, controlling, leading and staffing.
Supervisory skills including communications, team building, problem
solving and decision making. Australian industrial relations and
anti-discrimination.
Finance: Introduction to business finance, sources of funds, use of
funds, financial accounting, double entry book-keeping through to trial
balance, management accounting, costing, capital investment,
working capital.
Textbook
Samuelson, M. Supervision and Management. 1st edn, Australia:
Jacaranda Press. 1990
References
Robbins, S.P Oqanisalional Theory 3rd edn. Prentice-Hall, 1990
Brown, J.A.C. Social Psjchology
-
of Industr)! 2nd edn, Harrnondsworth:
~
Penguin, 1980
Byrt. W. and Masters, PR. The Australian Manager: Rev edn,
MacMillan, 1982
I1
Faculty of Englneertng
Lansbury, R.D. and Spillane, R. Organisational Behaviouc the
Australian Context. Melbourne: Lon man Cheshire. 1983
Colditz, BIT. and Gibbons, R.W. ~ustra4an Accounting. 4th edn, Sydney:
McGraw-Hill, 1988
Gola, V.L. Fudmls
of Financial Menagementin Aosbala. 3rd edn.
Sydney: Butterworth, 1981
EE403 Engineering Project Management
A fourth year core subject in the degree course in electrical
engineering.
This subject is to be taken during the students' 2nd industrial period.
There will be no formal lectures for this subject. Students will work
from a text and submit a combination assignment.
The role of the manager in a high technology environment; senior
management expectations, skill requirements of high technology
managers, dealing with priority problems, understanding matrix
oraanisntinns -. = - .-- .- .-.
Working effectively with technical personnel; understanding
fmfessional productivity, leadershtp effectiveness, creatincr stimulalina
work environment, managing innovation and creativity. baling with
. - -
risk and uncertaintv, leadershio exDectations. deleaattna effectivelv.
evaluating technical performa;lce. '
Planning and organising the work, examining the work process.
phased approach io engineering developments, developing schedules
and measurable milestones, manDower wlannina, software for
computer-assisted resource scheduiing and prograk planning.
Control of technical work; available software optimizing resources,
measurement of performance, tools for measurement and reporting.
Project Management Methodology; definition phase, planning phase,
scheduling phase, control phase, advantages of project management.
Textbook
Meredith, J.R. and Mantel S.J. Jr. Project Management: A Managerial
Approach. 2nd edn, J. Wlley & Sons, 1989
EE456 Electrical Design
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the electrical power and control engineering
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Power electronics circuitry: Trigger circuits, for power semi-conductor
devices. EM1 from power switching circuits, regulations.
Illumination: Lighting fundamentals and photometric units.
LigM Sources: Interlor and office lighting.
Floodlighting: Australian Standards and lighting codes.
Electric Machine design procedures: spec:flc magnetic and electric
loading of materials. losses, thermal and mechanical stress limitations.
Similitude and scaling. Basic design procedures. Examples of
transformer or induction motor design.
Electrical materials: Mechanical and electrical properties of conductors
and insulters.
Design topic selection: Each student is to select a topic and gain
wmal of it bv a staff member. The stafl member becomes the desian
supervisor. StGdents are expected to carry out the preliminary design
procedures up to the stage of detailed calculations in the fourth year
of the course, and to complete the construction, testing and evaluation
stages of the process as their final year Design Project. Students are
to be given guidance in the use of computer and manual methods
of literature searching.
References
To be advised.
EE458 Electrical Design
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the communications and electronics stream
of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Digital system design and testing. Formal methods of design for
testability, external access to and control of tnternal states, and
techniques for fault detection from external signals. An introduction
to hardware descrivtion larmuaaes and automated svnthesis Printed
circuit board lavoui wrinciwl~s fo; digital and analw &ems. Students
select a design topic and carry ouia formal design hudy which may
be completed in the fifth year of the course as their design project.
TextlReferences
IEEE Design and Test of Computers (Periodical)
IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits
and Systems (Periodical)
Dillinger, T.E. VLSI Engineering. PrenticeHall. 1988

EE459 Electrical Design
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Aspects of d~g~tal system aeslgn lnclud~ng a formal treatment of des~gn
for testabllltv lncludlna observab~lltv and controllab~l~tv aeneratlon of
test sequences incluaing self tesi and automatic faut isolation to
smallest replaceable component. Redundancy schemes, ECC in
memory systems. Algorithms for, simulation, partitioning, placement
and routing. An introduction to hardware description languages and
automatic synthesis.
Students select a design topic and carry out a formal design study
which may be completed in the fifth year of the course as their design
project.
References
IEEE Design and Test of Computers
IEEE Transactions on Computer Aided Design
IEEE Transactions on Computers
Dillinger, T.E. VLSl Engineering. Prentice-Hall. 1988
Proceedings of Design Automation Conferences
Computer Aided Design (Journal)
EE465
Engineering Systems Software
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Principles of software engineering including requirement analysis,
specification, design, verification and quality assurance.
Operating systems lncludlng the Internal structure and operat~on of
the UNlX operating system uslng MlNlX as a case study
References
Jones, G. Sohare Engineering. N.Y.: Wiley, 1990
IEEE Software (Journal)
Transactions on' software Enqineerinq (Journal)
Tanenbaum, A.S. Operating Sfitems. &glewood'Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-
Hall, 1987
Bath, M.J, The Design of the
System, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prent~ce-Hall, 1986
IEEE Computer Journal
IEEE Transactions on Computers (Journal)
EE474
Computer Systems Engineering
Five hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Comparative computer architecture studies including rationale and
tradeoffs for CISC, and super scalar RlSC and DSP architectures.
Introduction to parallel computer organisations including taxonomy and
communication networks.
Processor organisation: data path and control implementation
(hardw~red and m~cro-programmed), p~pellnlng techn~ques (reservat~on
tables, scoreboards) Memory orqanlsatlon caches, cnterleavlna. disks
(organisation, accessing, aigor;thms), virtual memory. lnputkiutput
devlces: application specific controllers (graphics, commun~cat~ons).
References
Tanenbaum. A.S. Structured Computer Organisation. Englewood Cliffs.
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990
Stone. H.S. High Performance Computer Architecture. Reading,
Mass.:Addison-Wesley, 1990
Brawer, S. lntroduction to Parallel Programming. Boston: Academic
Press, 1989
EE475
Electrical Power and Machines
Five hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the electrical power and control englneerlng
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Part A
Power systems
System modellinq: per unit quantities. Sinqle line diaorams.
Underground cables, transmlsslon line ~nsulat~on-~~mmetr~ca~faults
Svnchronous machlne modelllna Svstem fault levels Node ellmlnat~on
using matrix partitioning. ~oaaflows: Load character~stics, uses of
loadflow studies. Gauss-Siedel and Newton Raphson methods.
Part B
Electrical machines
The commutator machlne: review of construction; properties of the
mechanical commutators; block diagram representation of linearized
equations, transfer functions; transient response of d.c. machines;
matrix representation of equations, application of a.c. series motor
Analysis of non-linear relationships, d.c. series motor.
EE467 Computer Communi~ation~ The synchronous machine: construction, emf equation; space-phasor
representation of armature currents, magnetic behaviour of armature,
Three hours per week for one semester
equivalence of balanced armature a.c. and rotor d.c. Equivalent circuit.
A fourth year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of Physical location of leakage flux. Phasor diagrams, capability diagrams
the degree course in electrical engineering.
for both cylindrical and salient forms. Xd and Xq, meaning and
students to the basic concepts and techniques of data measurement. lntroduction to translent behaviour. Role of field circutt
communications, computer networks and layered protocols.
regulator.
Reiew of basic concepts used in data transmission: POtler reactance. meaning and determination.
Modulationlmultiplex~nglcodecslmodems.
The single phase induction motor, origin of equivalent circuit, operating
characteristics'
Data transmission: Media, waveforms, impairments, intersymbol
interference.
The brushless d.c. machine, construction and applications.
Coding and framing: PCM, source coding, synch. and asynch. Part C
transmission, error checklng and control, interfaces, computer power electronics
transmission. UART.
The d.c. chopper with applications. Partly controlled and fully controlled
Overview of data switching: Circuit switching, message switching, converters for D.C. motor drlves: regenerative braking. lntroduct~on to
packet switching, event timing, network control routing, flow co~trol. the variable frequency inverter and its application VPs's and AC
Networks: Topologles. Point-to-polnt networks, switched exchanges, machine drives.
packet switched services.
References
Local area networks: Low cost networks, linear networks, ring networks.
f~breoptic networks, servers, broadbend networks.
Part A
Stevenson, W.D. Elements of Power System Analysis. 4th edn, New
Protocols: Layering, IS0 standard, communication layers. LAN York: McGraw-HIII. 1982
protocols, IEEE802, transport layer, application layer.
Overview of integration of digital services: ISDN, electronic messaging, Part B
MAP. TOP
Say, M.G. Alternating Current Machines. 5th edn, New York: Wlley, 1980
Say, M.G. and Taylor, E.3. D~rect Current Machines. 2nd edn. London:
TextlReferences
Pitman, 1983
Beauchamp. K.G. Computer Communications. 2nd edn, Van Nostrand
Reinhold
Part C
Mohan. Power Electronics. Canada: John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1989
Halsall, F Data Communicat~ons, Computer Network and OSI. 2nd edn,
Wokingham. Addison Wesley, 1988
General Electric. SCR Manual. 6th edn. New York: 1979
Stalllngs, W. Data and Computer Commun~cat~ons. MacMlllan, 1989
Lander, G.W. Power Electronics 2nd edn. London: McGraw-HIII. 1987
Tanenbaum, A.S. Computer Nehvorks. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice Hall, 1988
Housley. T Data Communications and Teleprocessing Systems. 2nd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1987
Helmers, S.A. Data Communications, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall, 1989
Cole. R Computer Cornrnun~cat~ons 2nd edn. Baslngstoke MacMillan.
1986

EE476 Electronics
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the electrical power and control engineering
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Analog electronics:
Current sources, DC power amplifiers with resistive load, driver thermal
behaviour, Pseudo-dc switching amplifier, smoothing, AC power
amplifier, class A behaviour, single ended resistive load, class A and
B push pull resistive loads, capacitive and transformer coupling. Non
linear behaviour of classical AC power amplifiers, driver non-linearity.
Biasing of AC power amplifiers, effects of device variability and heating.
Microprocessor Electronics:
Interfacing and 110 programming of 808818086 microcomputers.
Hardware and software interrupts peripheral chips: keyboard scanners,
display drivers, UARTs. DMA controllers, disk controllers.
Bus Timing.
Testing techniques.
TextslReferences
Uffenbeck. The 8086/8088 Family; Design, Programming and Interfacmg.
Englewood Cllffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1987
Gibson and Liu. Microcomputer Systems: The 808618088 Family,
Architecture, Programming and Design. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1986
Godfrey. ISM Microcomputer Assembly Language. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1989
Sedra, A.S. and Smith, K.C. Micmelectronic Circuits. 2nd edn, N.Y.:
Holt. Rinehart and Winston, 1987
Gray, P.R. and Meyer, R.G. Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated
Circuits. 2nd edn, N.Y.: Wiley, 1984
EE482 Communications
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the communication and electronics stream
of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Review of transm~ssion line theory for radio frequency sinusoids and
h~gh speed d~g~lal s~gnals. Impedance, reflections. Smith charts and
Beraeron d~aarams. No~se analvsls In communications svstems. Noise
souFces, the effects and control of noise in analog and digital
communication systems.
Data communications, computer networks and protocols. Physical data
transmission - modulation, multiplexing, channel impairments and
capacity, PSTN. Coding and framing, data switching and networks,
routing and flow control. Network topologles and their properties. Local
area networks and public networks. Protocols and standards.
Integration of digital services.
References
Kraus, J. Electromagnetics. 3rd edn, N.Y.: McGraw-Hill, 1984
Ramo, S. Whinnery, J.R. and Van Duzer, T. Fields and Waves in
Communications Electronics. 2nd edn, New York: Wiley, 1984
Thomas, R.L. A Practical lntroduction to Impedance Matching.
Dedham, Mass.: Artech House, 1976
Beauchamp, K.G. Computer Communications. 2nd rev. edn, Chapman
and Hall, 1990
Halsall, F. lntroduction to Data Communications and Computer
Networks. 2nd edn, Wokingham, Addison-Wesley, 1988
EE483 Electronics
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the communication and electronics stream
of the degree course in electrical engineering.
This subject emphasises the implementation of systems using
microprocessors and digital signal processors.
Review of 808618088 architecture and programming model. Software
interrupts and DOS BlOS interrupts. Memory interfacing to 808618088
including ROM, SRAM and DRAM. Inputloutput interfacing including
polling, interrupts and DMA using 8255 programmable peripheral
interface, 8237 DMA controller and 8259A interrupt controller. Serial
inputloutput using 8257 USART.
Non-recursive digital filter design (using the Fourier series method),
recursive digital filter design (using the Bilinear Transform method).
lmplementation of filter functions with DSP's using high level (C) and
low level (assembler) languages. lmplementation of AID and DIA
conversion functions.
Faculty of Engineering
Referaces
Uffenbeck. The 8086/8088 Family: Design, programming, and
interfacing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1987
Gibson and Liu. Microcomputer Systems: The 8086/8088 Family,
Architecture, Programming and Design. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1986
Godfrey. ISM Microcomputer Assembly . Language. - - Englewood - Cliffs:
N.J.: renti ice Hall. 1989
Signal Processing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1988
DeFatta, Lucas, Hodgekiss. Digital Signal Processing: A System Design
Approach. New York: Wiley, 1988
EE489
Control Systems
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Discrete time systems: lntroduction to sampling and discrete data.
Analysis of discrete time feedback control systems using Z-transform
techniques. Stability and the effect of sampling time. A review of
transducers amendable to digital signal measurement.
State variable method of analysis of continuous and discrete time
systems. Multivariable control systems. State models output equation
feedback equations and de-coupling.
Programmable logic controllers and their application to control
systems.
TextslReferences
Hostetter, et al. Design of Feedback Control Systems. 2nd edn, New
York: Saunders, 1989
D'Azzo Houpis. Linear Control Systems Analysis and Design. 3rd edn,
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1988
Ogata. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall,
1970
EE502
Management Practice
Three hours per week for one semester
-
A final vear core subiect of the dearee course in electrical engineering.
Business Strategy; measurement of performance; introduct~on to the
market~ng function; sales, market research. segmentation elc.
Innovation and entrepreneurial aspects.
Theories and Practice: Modern theories of management and current
practices e.g. Total Quality Management, Value Adding Management,
Just-in-Time.
Supervision and leadership; practical industrial relations; negotiating;
occupational health and safety; selection and training. Project teams
and task forces.
Motivation; job enrichment; employee participation.
Time Management; effective speaking, writing, reading; creative
thinking, lateral thinking. Technical communication skills.
A problem solving methodology using a systems approach.
Payment Systems: Industrial awards, payment systems, incentive
schemes, job evaluation, wage and salary structures. Management
development and personnel appraisals.
Legal: Australian legal systems, commercial law regarding employer
liabilities; contract law; sale of goods; common law, criminal law and
torts as they affect manufacturers; negligence defences; industrial
property (patents etc.); principal and agent; company law; workers
compensation insurance. The need to seek expert legal advice on
many matters will be stressed.
Project management: Planning, resourcing, implementation, reviewing
and case studies.
TextslReferences
Checkland, P. Soft Systems Methodology in Action. Wiley, 1990
Mukhi, B. Hampton, P. Barnwell, N. Australian Management. McGraw
Hill, 1990
Nicholas, J.M. Managing Business and Engineering Products. Prentice
Hall, 1990
Samuelson, M. Supervision & Management. Wiley, 1990
Wilson, B. Systems: Concepts, Methodologies and Applications. Wiley,
1984

EE544
Electronic Communication Systems
Three hours per week for one semester
A flnal year subject In the communlcatlons and electron~c stream of
the dearee course In electrical enalneerlna
Toplcs In thls subject will reflect the current Interests and actlvltles of
staff In communlcatlons and electronics Examples of toplcs Include
Mobile communication systems
Network management and control
Digital signal processing applications
Satellite communications
Radar
lntegrated circuit design
Image and speed processing.
References
To be advised by lecturers.
EE545 Electronics
Four hours per week for one semester
A final year subject in the communications and electronics stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Application specific IC design techniques and use of tools for synthesis
and verification of digital and analog functions.
Switched capacitor filters - theory, synthesis and applications.
DSP applications in communication systems.
TextlReferences
Mukherjee, A. Introduction to NMOS and CMOS VLSlSystem Design,
Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1986
Weste, N. and Eshraghian. K. Principles of CMOS VLSl Design - A
Systems Perspective. Reading, Mass.: Addison Wesley, 1985
Allen. PE. and Sanchez-Sinencio. E. Switched Capacitor Circuits. New
York: Van Nostrand, Rinehold. 1984
Oppenheim, AV and Schaefer, R.W. Discrete Time Signal Processing.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prent~ce Hall, 1989
EE548 Communications
Six hours per week for one semester
A final year subject in the communication and electronics stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Traffic descriptions in circuit switched and queueing systems. Overload
behaviour and traffic flow control. Principles of alternate routing.
Traffic routing and flow control strategies and their optimisation.
Telecommunications network design. Network access and security.
Intelligent network services. The management of private and public
networks and critical networks.
TextlReferences
International Teletraffic Congress papers.
EE556
Project
A final year subject to be undertaken by all fifth year students, for one
semester, in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Each student will be required to nominate a project topic and to
negotiate an acceptable specification for the work with a member of
staff who shall be the supervisor of the project.
The topic for the project may either be selected from a list of suitable
topics proposed by staff members, or be nominated by the student,
provided that a staff member is prepared to supervise the topic. It is
expected that the majority of students will continue with the topic
chosen in fourth year.
EE559 Electrical Machine Drives
Five hours per week for one semester
A final year subject in the electrical power and control engineering
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
D.C. drives: Review of the development of variable speed drives -
in oarticular the Ward Leonard system as a closed loop . speed . control.
Semiconductor controlled converters with regenerative braking.
Steadystate operation. Dynamic performance with and without state
feedback. Design of variable speed drives to meet a specification.
Generation of line harmonics, harmonic filters and voltage notching.
Regulations.
A.C. drives: High frequency model of the induction motor. Performance
from a variable frequency supply (inverters and cycloconverters).
Dimensioning of drives for a particular application. Design of closed
loop control systems. Harmonics generated by variable frequency
dr~ves. Slip energy recovery and soft starters.
Design of low power variable speed drives using permanent magnet
d.c. motors and brushless d.c. motors.
A.C. machine transients: Space phasor description of machines. The
synchronous machine - winding, transformations, the d.g.y. model.
Short circuit analysis. Three phase induction motor, starting and
reconnection transients. Fault current contributions.
Machine windings: Characteristics and physical layouts. Fractional
pitch coils and harmonic suppression. Fractional slot windings.
Harmonic content of generated EMF.
Standards: Australian standards for electrical machines. Duty, ratings
and tests.
TextslReferences
Leonard. W. Control of Electrical Drives. Berlin: Springer Verlag. 1985
Lander, C.W. Power Electronics. 2nd edn, London: McGraw-Hill. 1987
AS1359. General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines.
Standards Association of Australia.
EE561 Computer Systems Engineering
Six hours per week for one semester
A fifth-year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Unit 1: Real-time Systems
Unit 2: Advanced Computer Architecture
Unit 3: Performance Modelling of Distributed Systems
References
Stone, H.S. High Performance Computer Architecture. 2nd edn,
Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1990
Bach, M.J. The Design of the UNlX Operating System. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1986
EE562
Computer Electronics
Four hours per week for one semester
A fifth-year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Techniques for high speed digital system design; noise behaviour,
grounding, line driving and receiving, line reflections.
Application specific integrated circuits (ASICs): CMOS and NMOS
circuit characterisation and performance estimation; structured design
and design tools; system design.
Field programmable devices including gate arrays and logic arrays.
TextslReferences
Catt, I. et al. Digital Hardware Design. London: MacMillan, 1979
Coekin, I.A. High Speed Pulse Techniques. Oxford: Pergamon Press,
1975 -
Weste, N. and Eshragian, K. Principles of CMOS VLSl Design: A
Systems Perspective. Readina. Mass.: Addison-Wesley. 1985
Mukherjee. A: Introduction to NMOS and CMOS VLSl System Des~gn.
Enalewood Cliffs. N.J . Prentlce-Hall. 1986
IE~E Design and Test of ~omputers'(Journal)
IEEE Transactions on Computer Aided Design of lntegrated Circuits
and Systems
EE563 Advanced Computer Techniques
Three hours per week for one semester
A fifth-year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
the degree course in electrical engineering.
Material presented in this subject reflects the current research interests
of computer systems engineering lectbrers. Students choose three
units, examples of which include:
- parallel computer systems
- database systems
- hardware description languages
- comparative languages
image processing
- compilation techniques
- digital signal processing architectures
Each unit is allocated one hour per week. Availability of unlts will
depend on student demand and staff.
TextlReferences
IEEE and ACM transactions and magazines.
Other references as advised by unit lecturers.

EE576 Electronics
Three hours per week for one semester
A final-year subject in the electrical power and control engineering
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Part A: Microcontrollers.
The application of single chip microcontrollers to Electrical
Engineering. A/D and DIA conversion. Data communications and
interfacing.
Part B: Power Electronics
Protection of semiconductor devices. Current protection over voltage
protection high speed fuses. Series and parallel operation. Design of
base and gate driver circuits with isolation.
References
lntel Corporation Embedded Controller Handbook, Santa Clara, CA:
Intel, 1987
Krutz. R.L. Interfacing Techniques in Digital Design with Emphasis on
Microprocessors. New York: Wiley, 1988
Peatman, J.B. Design with Microcontrollers. New York: McGraw-Hill,
1988
Williams, B.W. Power Electronics. N.Y.: MacMillan, 1987
Halsall. F. Data Communications, Computer Nehvorks and 0.51. 2nd
edn, Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, 1988
EE641
Faculty of Engineering
Fundamentals of Computing
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A first year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systerns
engineering.
Brief history of computing.
lntroduct~on to computer systems lnclud~ng the d~sk operating system
. IDOS) , and the Turbo Pascal devel0Dment envlronment
Introductory Pascal including syntax diagrams, fundamental elements
of structured programming, control structures, elementary types,
subrange types, arrays, procedures, functions, variable and value
parameters, predefined functions, identifier scope, enumerated types,
sets, records, with statements, text files.
Elementary inputloutput interfacing techniques using Pascal.
References
Koffman, E.B. Turbo Pascal: Problem Solving and Program Design. 2nd
edn, Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1989
Leestma, S.C. and Nyhoff, L.R. Turbo Pascal - Programming and
Problem Solving. New York: MacMillan, 1990
EE642
Data Structures
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A first year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
Electrical Power Systems
engineering.
Five hours per week for one semester
Data structures: Pascal pointer types, lists, stacks, queues, trees,
directed and undirected graphs and algorithms for the manipulation
A final year subject in the electrical power and control engineering of these structures, file types and organisations,
stream of the degree course in electrical engineering.
Elementary computer organisation using Pascal as the descriptive
Power system stability and control: Dynamic and transient stability.
language: the Van-Neumann fetch-execute cycle, simple single register
Simplified models for the synchronous machine, Cylindrical and salient architectures, their constraints and evolution to multiple register
rotors. Direct and quadrature axes components. Transient stability. architectures (immediate, direct, register, register indirect and indexed
Rotor dynamics -the swing equation. Pre-fault and post-fault network
addressing modes). Pascal to assembly language mappings for a
multiple-register architecture. Informal treatment of parser construction
~ , " ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . ~ f ~ ~ ~ t s ~ . ~ o ~ ~ b ~ ~ t c , ~ " Y ~ e , " ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ , ~ " s $ ~ ~ ~
Eigenanalysis. Automatic voltage regulator and governor functions.
Digital computer techniques.
the multiple-register machine.
Protection systems: Definitions. Current transformers. Voltage representation of data types. and floating point
transformers. Overcurrent protection. Instantaneous and inverse time.
arithmetic.
Distance ~rotection. Directional features. Transformer ~rotection.
Winding a;ld oil temperature. Dissolved gas analysis. ~otor'protection. References
Generator protection.
Nyhoff, L.S. and Leestma, S. Advanced Programming in Pascal with
Circuit interruption and circuit breakers: Arc characteristics. Vacuum Data Structures. New MacMillan,
arcs. Principles of circuit interruption. Effects of power factor. Inductive Tenenbaum, A.M. and Augenstein, M.J. Data Structures Using
circuit interruption. Single and double frequency transients Short line EnglewoOd Cliffs: N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
faults. Capacitive circuit interruption. Circuit breaker types. Standard Sedgewick, R. Algorithms. 2nd edn, Reading, Mass.: ~ddison-wesley,
specifications. Circuit breaker testing. 1988
Egan, G.K. lntroduction to Computer Systems. Swinburne Press, 1991
Power systems
Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organisation. Prentice-Hall,
Node elimination using matrix partitioning. Load flows: load 1990
characteristics, uses of load flow studies. Gauss-Siedel and Newton
~~~~~~~~gp",~,",~~h","~~~~~,"~~~~~g,"x",9,",~,","~r,",","
Raphson methods. Economic operation of a system. Unsymmetrical EE643 Computer Systems Software
faults: symmetrical components, and sequence networks.
Eight hours per week for one half semester
References
A first year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
Stevenson, W.D, Elements of Power System Analysis. 4th edn, New
engineering.
York: McGraw-Hill, 1982
Electricity Council. Power System Protection. Vol. I, 11, 111, 2nd edn, Brief 'C' as a from Pascal.
Stevenage: Peter Peregrinus, 1981
Introduction to software engineering including software life cycle and
Flurscheim, C.H. Power Circuit Breaker TheoryandDesign. Stevenage: the design process using appropriate graphical representations.
Peter Peregrinus, 1975
Computer organisation including representative microprocessor
architectures and in particular the Motorola M680xx family, bus
EE598 Digital Systems and Control
organisation, line driving and receiving, memory interfacing including
Two hours per week for one semester
address decoding, memory readlwrite cycles, timing diagrams,
inputloutput interfacing, exception handling including asynchronous
A final year subject in the computer systems engineering stream of
inputloutput (interrupt driven, polled); the lntel 180xxx architecture will
the degree course in electrical engineering.
be briefly compared with the Motorola architecture. Programming used
Design of control systems to meet a set of specifications. Classical in computer organisation studies will emphasise the use of high-level
methods of lead-lag networks and PID controllers from root locus and languages as a first choice. lntroduction of techniques for identification
frequency domain approach. Commercial packages and PLC's. and selective optimisation of time-critical program regions.
Algorithms suitable for compensation using computer based control Introduction to multi-process and time-shared operating systems
systems.
including basic concepts of scheduling and resource allocation.
State variable feedback and design of continuous and discrete time
multivariable control systerns to meet a set of specifications.
Kelley, A. and Pohl, I. An lntroduction to Programming in C. Menlo Park.
Advanced topics of adaptive control and optimisation. CA: BenjaminlCummings, 1991
Texts/References
Wilcox, A.D. 68000 Microcomputer Systems: Designing and Interfacing.
Franklin. Gene. Digital Control of Dynamic Systems. Reading, Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1990
~~~~~,"k)cokql ~~'if~;eN~~8~~8"0"~~;~~~iyI'9~~sign, Programming, and
Kuo. B. DigitalControlSystems. New York: Holt. Rinehart and Winston,
1980
~E",~$J,E~3~~0~2~~>$~~
Reading,
Chase. F. Diagram Sets in Process Control and Computer Interfacing.
E;: ~ d ~ , i s ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ) ~ ~ ~ Reading, ~ n t e rMass.: f a CAddison-
i n g ,
1989
Shinskey, F. Process Control Systems - Application Design and
Tuning. McGraw-Hill, 1988
Wesley,
References cont. overleaf
235

Tanenbaum. A.S. Structured Comouter Oroanisation. - Enalewood - Cliffs.
N.J.: ~rent~ce- all, 1990.
Jones, G.W. Software Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1990
EE644 Computer Systems Design
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A first year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
A directed team based design project exercising the skills developed
in other first year graduate diploma subjects.
References
Kelley, A. and Pohl, I. An Introduction to Programming in C. Menlo Park.
CA: BeniaminlCumminas. 1991
Wilcox. A.D. 68000 ~ic6com~uter Systems: Designing and Interfacing.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Uffenbeck, J. The 8086/8088 Family: Design, Programming, and
Intetfacing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987
Eccles, W.J. Microprocessor Systems, A 16-bit Approach. Reading,
Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1985
Stone, H.S. Microcomputer Interfacing. Reading, Mass.: Addison-
Wesley, 1982
Tanenbaum. A.S. Structured Computer Organisation. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1990.
Jones, G.W. Software Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1990
EE741 Computer Systems and Software
Engineering
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
Principles of software engineering including requirement analysis,
specification, design, verification and quality assurance.
Operating systems including the internal structure and operation of
the UNlX operating system using MlNlX as a case study.
References
M ones, G.G software Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1990
IEEE Software (Journal)
IEEE Transactions on Software Enaineerina (Journal)
Tanenbaum, A.S. Operating System< ~n~leiood ~liffs:~.~.: Prentice-
Hall. 1987
Bach. M.J. The Design of the UNlX Operating System. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1986
IEEE Computers (Journal)
IEEE Transactions on Computers
EE742
Computer Communications and
Control
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
Introduces students to the basic concepts and techniques of data
communications, computer networks and layered protocols.
Review of basic concepts used in data transmission:
Modulationlmultiplexinglcodecs/modems.
Data transmission: Media, waveforms, impairments, intersymbol
interference.
Coding and framing: PCM, source coding, synch. and asynch.
transmission, error checking and control, interfaces, computer
transmission, UART.
Overvlew of data sw~tchlng Clrcu~t swltch~ng, message sw~tchlng,
!Jacket sw~tchlna, - event tlmlna, -. network control routlna, - flow control
Networks: Topologies, point-to-point networks, switched exchanges,
packet switched services.
Local area networks: Low cost networks, linear networks, ring networks,
fibreoptic networks, servers, broadbend networks.
Protocols: Layering, IS0 standard, communication layers, LAN
protocols, IEEE802, transport layer, application layer.
Overview of integration of digital services: ISDN, electronic messaging,
MAP. TOP
TextlReferences
Beauchamp, K.G. Computer Communications. 2nd rev. edn, Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1990
Halsall, F. Data Communications, Computer Network and OSI. 2nd edn,
Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1988
Stallinas. W. Data and Com~uter Communications. Basinastoke: -
~ac~'ilan, 1989
Tanenbaum, A.S. Computer Networks. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice Hall. 1988
Housley, T. Data Communications and Teleprocessing Systems. 2nd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1987
Helmers, S.A. Data Communication. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall. 1989
Cole, R. Computer Communications. 2nd edn, Basingstoke: MacMillan,
1986
EE743
Computer Systems Case Studies
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
In this subject a series of seminars in various aspects of computer
systems engineering are presented by guest lecturers. Students are
expected to produce a written critical appreciation of the seminars.
EE744
Design and Project
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
Students choose or propose an appropriate computer systems
engineering design project subject to the subject convenors approval.
Emphasis is placed on successful completion of the project to the
agreed specification. Group projects are encouraged to expose
students to issues of engineering team management.
EE745
High-Performance Computer
Architectures
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
The topics to be presented in the subject include:
- historical perspective
- taxonomy
- MlMD architectures
- SlMD architectures
- pipelining techniques
- memory organisation
- communication networks
References
Stone, H.S. High Performance Computer Architecture. Reading, Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1990
ACM Transactions on Computer Architecture
IEEE Transactions on Parallel and Distributed Systems
Levesque, J.M. A Guidebook to FORTRAN on Supercomputers. Boston:
Academic Press, 1989
EE746 Parallel Programming Techniques
Eight hours per week for one half semester
A second year subject in the graduate diploma in computer systems
engineering.
The toplcs to be presented in the subject include:
- implicit and explicit parallel programming
- vectorisation
- parallel decomposition
- memory allocation
- communications/computation tradeoffs
- optimising for pipelined scalar processors
- visualisation tools and debugging techniques
References
Stone, H.S. High Performance Computer Architecture. Reading. Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1990
Brawer, S. Introduction to Parallel Programming. Boston: Academic
Press, 1989
ACM Transactions on Computer Architecture
IEEE Transactions on Parallel and Distributed Systems
manufacturers programming manuals
EF199
Engineering Graphics and
Communications
Four hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject for all degree courses in engineering which
provides an introduction to the methods of communication used by
professional engineers.
Students will experience presentation of projects and ideas based on
environmental issues and the engineering workplace, and the use of
engineering drawing and graphlcs to communicate and understand
design concepts.

EF611
Management Fundamentals
Four hours per week for one semester
A first year compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in
management.
An introductow study of industrial development and the growth of man-
ager~al funct~ons leadlng to an understanding of the &mplex~t~es of
manaalna an enterDrlse In the buslness world of todav. ' The ImDortance
of innGv5ion and entrepreneurship is stressed.
As with other core subjects within the course, the study will integrate
key elements - financial, human and organisational and legal - of
management.
It includes a general introduction to classical management theory, to
fundamentals of business finance, to human and organisational
aspects of management and to fundamental, legal concepts of
organisation.
EF612 Engineering Management
Two hours per week for two semesters
A first year elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
Management is a key element in all areas of engineering. This unit
is directed at the elements of managment as they particularly relate
to project, site and plant management. As with other subjects within
the course, the key elements of management - financial, human and
organisational and legal - will be integrated.
An introductory subject addressing core areas of Engineering
Management with focus on project, life cycle and plant management.
Considerations include: project initiation, implementation and
termination, financial and legal requirements, life cycle costing, plant
procurement, operation, reliability maintenance, update and disposal.
Elements of particular significance to projects will include initiation
of projects, feasibility studies, tendering procedures, estimating, CPM,
cost control, construction documentation, building and planning
permits, claims, partial and final certification.
Plant Management aspects will include plant procurement, operation,
reliability, maintenance, updating and disposal of equipment.
Planning law, Acts and legislation relevant to major projects will be
included.
Textbook
Meredith, J.R. and Mantel, S.J. Project Management. 2nd edn, Wiley,
1989
EF613
lndustrial Engineering
Two hours per week for two semesters
A first year elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
An introductory subject addressing the elements of management
germane to production and manufacturing management. Techniques
addressing various issues including: financial analysis, decisionmaking,
inventory, quality, forecasting are considered and computer
software used in related case studies. Modern approaches to
management such as MRPII, JIT, TQM and techniques for method
study, improvement, systematic layout design etc. are discussed.
Heavy class participation and computer interaction is required.
Textbook
Turner, MIZE, Case (TMC). Introduction to lndustrial and Systems
Engineering. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1987
EF614 Management Practice
Four hours per week for one semester
A first year compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in
management.
The core of thls subject will be buslness strategy: setting objectives.
measurement of oerformance, lntroduction to the marketina function.
sales, market research, segmentation, etc. Innovation and-entrepreneurial
aspects are included.
Human aspects will include creative and lateral thinking, technical
communications skills, supervision and leadership, project teams and
task forces, motivation and problem analysis; problem solving and
decision making.
Financial aspects will consider budgets; management reporting
systems. Cost estimating, product costing and pricing.
Legal aspects will concentrate on elements of commercial, criminal
and tort law as they affect manufacturers, and concepts of industrial
property (patents etc.) will be introduced.
EF620
Human Aspects
Two hours per week for one semester
Faculty of Engineering
A compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in management.
This subject is designed to build upon the work of the introductory
work in the first semester and treat the material with more depth and
practicality. Topics covered include:
Theoretical base: interpersonal relationship and individual development;
individual difference, personality theory, value and value
systems, group dynamics, role theory, leadership intergroup competition,
intepersonal communication, perception, thinking processes and
memory. Business politics.
Human Resources Management: recruitment, selection and training.
Aptitude testing. Management development and personnel appraisal
systems. Wage and Salary structures, benefits and financial reward
schemes.
Performance factors: motivation, job satisfaction, morale, management
of conflict, organisation structures and their effects on behaviour, effecting
change in the organisation.
Industrial Relations: practical industrial relations for supervisors and
Managers.
EF621 Financial and Legal Aspects
Three hours per week for one semester
A compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in management.
This subject is designed to build upon the work of the introductory
group. Topics include: financial accounting; management accounting
and reporting; company taxation; financial statement analysis; business
organisations; sources of finance; capital and cash flow; Trade
Practices Legislation, insurance and negotiable instruments.
Textbook
Gaffikin, M. etal. Principles of Accounting. 2ndAustralian edn, Sydney:
Harcourt Brace Jovanwich, 1990
Latime4 P Australian Business Law. North Ryde: CCH, 1991
Van Horne, J. et al. Financial Management & Policy in Australia. 3rd
edn, Sydney: Prentice Hall, 1990
EF622
Engineering Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
This subject addresses wider issues associated with effective
engineering management. Considerations include: executive
~nterfaces; equipment acquisition and procurement strategies;
integrated logistics support management; configuration management;
maintenance strategies; productivity and performance measurement.
EF623 Marketing
Three hours per week for one semester
A compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in management.
The subject will explore general concepts of marketing and its key
place in business strategy.
Marketing function: sales market development, product development,
market research, advertising, etc.
Marketing Practice: environment, types of market, segmentation and
targeting. Buyer behaviour, market measurement and forecasting.
Marketing planning. Competitive strategies; product life-cycle; new
product development. Price decisions, marketing channels, distribution,
sales force, advertising and promotion.
Textbook
Samson. D. Management for Engineers. Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire, 1989

EF624
Management Practice
Three hours per week for two semesters
A compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in management for parttime
students only.
This subject is designed to draw together the topics covered in the
other subjects of the graduate diploma in management with an
industrial emphasis and provide additional material to enable the
student to develop an understanding of the process of management
in business organisations.
Particular emphasis is placed on planning and decision making, management
structure and organisation; leadership, managerial
effectiveness and motivation; financial control. The importance of
entrepreneurial aspects of business, innovation and time management
are emohasised. Extensive use is made of case studies. .- orouo . discussioni,
iect&& and management games.
Present management practices both local and overseas, and likely
future trends are discussed.
Practical aspects of marketing strategy are covered together with
marketing case studies.
Students are required to complete a business plan to commercialise
a chosen opportunity.
Textbooks
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990s. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
Drucker, P. Innovation & Entrepreneurship: Principles & Practice.
London: Pan Books. 1986
Samson, D. ~ana'gement for Engineers. Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire. 1989
EF625
Computing - Business Applications
and Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
The subject addresses management applications of, and the management
of, computing. It will include Financial Packages for Budgeting
and Management Accounting; Administrative applications; Database
Management and applications; Office Automation: Spreadsheets,
Word and Document Processing, Desk Top Publishing, Graphics and
presentation packages. Electronic Office: networks, electronic mail,
facsimile, telex, etc.
Decision support packages - mathematical tools relevant to management
and some packages relevant to the manufacturing process will
be considered.
EF626
Computing - Engineering
Applications and Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
The subject seeks to extend the student's knowledge of engineering
oriented a~~lications DackFiqeS, their manaqement, and thelr management
applications. It also ahs to extend the student's programm'ing
skills.
In particular it addresses: high level languages, data structures and
applications, project engineering and maintenance packages, design
with computers, systems simulation with computers.
EF629
Sales Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subiect in the qraduate - diploma in management.
The Sales Iunctlon: relationships with advertlslng, sales, promollon,
oroduct olannina. ., . market research and distribution. teed back from
market.
The Selling Process: prospecting, presentations, handling objections,
closing, follow up. Buyer behaviour and motivation.
Sales Management functions, Management practices. Leadership and
motivation of the sales force. Salaries and financial rewards. Organising
the sales force. Time and territory management. Sales control
and evaluating sales performance.
EF630
Manufacturing Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
This subject will review integrated manufacturing systems and the
manufacturing management function: production, production planning
and control, maintenance, quality control, etc.
The relationship between manufacturing and other organisational
functions in the company and the application of analytical techniques
relevant to production and related functions such as market forecasting,
scheduling, materials requirement planning will be covered.
EF631
Physical Distribution Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
Topics relating to the design and management of the physical distribution
of products from the point of manufacture to the point of sale.
Organisation of the physical distribution function, warehousing and
storage systems, transportation.
Financial, human and organisational management aspects are
covered.
EF632
Corporate Communications
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
An examination of an organisation's communications needs and
development of cost-effective strategies to meet those needs.
This includes a communications audit, and choice of an appropriate
mix of communications media to minimise the cost of communications
within the organisation and externally.
Both private and public networks will be considered.
EF633
Energy Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
An assessment of an organisation's energy requirements and development
of systems and operational techniques to meet those requirements
at minimum cost.
Energy source selection and life cycle costing, system optimisation.
The study includes techniques for monitoring energy usage in buildings
and larger sites and for developing optimal use strategies.
EF634
Civil Engineering Management
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
This subject is particularly directed towards development of an awareness
of efficient site management techniques.
Responsibilities of Project Manager and Site Engineer, Construction
site organisation, Site Office Procedure: Contractor-Principal Relations,
Arbitration and Conciliation and Negotiation.
EF635
Construction Technology
Two hours per week for one semester
An elective subject in the graduate diploma in management.
The subject considers the management of technological resources
available in the execution of a construction project.
Planning of construction programs: hazards, local factors, works layout,
process dissection, construction program, plant schedule, critical path
analysis, detailed planning, estimate summary.
Plant and Equipment, characteristics of the site and construction
methodologies, and the physical and human resources are considered.
Resource allocation: assignment of plant and equipment to tasks;
allocation of labour to job; estimating likely outputs; smoothing
resource allocation; establishing plant and equipment spread.
EF641
Management Practice
Six hours per week for one semester
A compulsory subject in the graduate diploma in management for full
time students only.
An integrating subject designed to draw together the topics covered
in the other subjects in the program, with an industrial emphasis and
practical application. Central to this subject is project work where
students prepare and present a business plan in teams and complete
an individual research assignment. All class work is tailored to prepare
students for their project work. Emphasis is placed on planning and
decision-making, structure and organisation, leadership and
motivation, effectiveness and control, entrepreneurial aspects,
innovation and time management.
Textbook
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990

~~
EF700
The Business Plan
Three hours per week over two semesters
A subject in the second year of the graduate diploma in
entrepreneurship & innovation and first year of the master of enterprise
innovation.
Normally, students of the Graduate Diploma in Entrepreneurship &
lnnovation undertaking this unit must have satisfactorily completed
all first year subjects and be undertaking the standard second year
program.
This unit aims to provide the entrepreneur with an appreciation of a
business plan in: raising venture capital, defining the potential risk
and problems in a venture, testing and building the entrepreneurial
team and planning the operation of a business.
Self-selected teams wlll choose an lnventlon or product as a basls for
a buslness oooortunltv . . and w~ll develoo . an aDDroDrlate .. . buslness plan
Generally teams will work independently and will be tutored by staff
on specialist areas. Some lectures by external consultants in business
plan evaluation will be held and time will also be scheduled for the
developing of presentation skills.
Textbooks
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
Golis, C. Enterprise & Venture Capital: An Entrepreneurs' & Investors'
Handbook. Sydney: Allen & Unwin. 1989
References
As advised during the course.
Faculty of Engineering
EF810 New Venture Marketing
Three hours per week over one semester
A subject in the second year of the graduate diploma in
entrepreneurship & innovation and first year of the master of enterprise
innovation.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: develop and
improve plans for the marketing of new products and supervise the
implementation of these plans; employ basic marketing principles in
estimating the scale and speed of the probable market response to
the new product and in determining the marketing resources required
to achieve a given revenue profile over the plan period; distinguish
systematic divergence from the plan objectives from statistical
fluctuations in the response of the market, and advise on the
appropriate modifications to the plan.
Textbook
Legge, J.M. Successful Marketing Strategies - into the 1990s.
Melbourne: Information Australia, 1989
EF811
New Venture Financial Planning
Three hours per week over one semester
A subject in the second year of the graduate diploma in
entrepreneurship & innovation and first year of the master of enterprise
innovation.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: understand
the basic financial principals and theory required for competent
financial analysis, planning and management of a small to medium
business; to apply those skills by producing a comprehensive financial
plan for a new venture embodied in an accurateand credible set of
~ ~ 7 1~ 0 ~ t & N~~ ~ Ventures ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Three hours per week over two semesters
A subject in the graduate diploma in entrepreneurship & innovation.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: define and
describe the entrepreneurial process; explain how the entrepreneurial
process is used in the development of a business plan for a new
venture; apply the processes of opportunity screening and risk
assessment to a proposed new venture; use appropriate personnel
and financial oractices in develooino a new business; and to apply
the entrepreneurial process to' d&elopment of opportunities' in
Droiected financial statements suitable for inclusion in a business Dlan
ior ihat venture; to dispassionately and professionally evaluate new
venture financial projections from the point of view of a prospective
investor (venture capitalist).
Textbooks
Levy, H. and Sarnat, M. Principles of Financial Management.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1988
Golis, C.C. Enterprise & Venture Capital: An Entrepreneurs' & Investors'
Handbook. Svdnev: Allen & Unwin. 1989
. .
corporations. EF812 Entrepreneurship, Law and Ethics
Textbooks
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Drucker. Homewood, P.F, Illinois: & Irwin, Entrepreneurship.
1990 London: Pan Books,
Heinemann, 1986
Meredith, G.G. SmaN Business Management in Australia. 3rd edn,
Sydney: McGraw Hill, 1988
~~711 'product' Development & Life Cycles
Three hours ~ er week over one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma in entrepreneurship & innovation.
This .... unit - . aims . to - orovide . ~ the ~ student with the abilitv to: analvse a
~- ~
competitive advantage; choose a technological strategy for a venture;
design and implement product innovations; design and manage
process innovations; overcome barriers to technological innovation;
direct customer driven innovations; and identify international markets
for 'products'.
Textbooks
Porter, M. Competitive Advantage. New York: Free Press, 1985
Smilor, R. (ed.). Customer Driven Marketing. Lexington, Mass.:
Lexington Books, 1989
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
Three hours per week over one semester
A subject in the second year of the graduate diploma in
entrepreneurship & innovation and first year of the master of enterprise
innmr.z%tinn
89 ,,,".",,", ,.
In forming a new venture, the entrepreneur has in general three
choices of legal structure: the enterprise can run as a sole
~roDriet0r~hiD. as a DartnershiD or as a cor~oration. The law also
affects the sieps involved in bhnging an invention, original product
or process from the stage of conception to that of full commercial
utilisation. This unit aims to ~rovide the student with the abilitv to
analyse these issues, together with the ethical issues involved in-the
decisions, and in Particular any ethical implications.
EF920
EF712 Opportunity & Feasibility Analysis Textbooks
Three hours per week over one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma in entrepreneurship & innovation.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: recognise
opportunltles not only In the workplace, but also In everyday Ilvlng,
examlne lnde~th ~ts attractiveness to new buslness creation, and uslnq
a screening &ide to assess a product or service in terms of produfi
or source reliability, market share, financial returns and future business
development.
Textbooks
Drucker, P.F. lnnovation & Entrepreneurship. London: Pan Books,
Heinemann, 1986
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rc!
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
Managing the Growing Business
Fifty-six hours over one semester
A subject in the master of enterprise innovation program.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: identify the
stages of business growth and the problems and opbortunit~es lo be
manaqed; recoanlse the increaslna comolex~ties of the arowino
enterprise; descGbe the functional, planning and control needs-of eacii
stage; identify the tools and techniques-available to manage and
sustain growth; recognise the different leadership styles appropriate
to the stage of business growth; identify the practices bv which
business maintains innovacon; and to plan for business harvest.
Anderson, R.L. et al. Managing Growing Firms. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall, 1987
Drucker, P. lnnovation & Entrepreneurship: Principles & Practice.
London: Pan Books, 1986
Fritz, i? The Possible Dream - TCG: An Australian Business Success
Story. Ringwood: Penguin, 1988
Reference
Davie. R.S. and Stamm, W.J. Australian Case Studies. 1990

EF921
Financing Entrepreneurial Ventures
Fifty-six hours over one semester
A subject in the master enterprise of innovation program.
This unit aims to provide the graduate with a sound understanding
of the methods of, opportunities for and implications of, various forms
of finance for an enterprise. Topics include:
- evaluating opportunities: business plans; franchising;
- seeking, assessing and acquiring resources: searching for financial
resources, valuing existing business; leveraged buyout; legal
forms of organisation; valuation, bidding, partners; securities, law
and private financing; share market options; venture capital;
- managing and harvesting the venture: initial public offering;
partner-investor relations; takeovers; bankruptcy.
Reference
Davie, R.S. and Stamm, W.J. Australian Case Studies. 1990
Textbooks
Levy, H. and Sarnat, M. Principles of Financial Management.
Englewood Cliffs. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1988
Golis, C.C. Enterprise and Venture Capital, An Entrepreneurs and
Investors Handbook. Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1989
Fr~tz, I? The Possible Dream. Ringwood: Penguin Books, 1988
EF922 Entrepreneurial Project I
Sixty hours over two semesters
A subject in the master of enterprise innovation program.
This unit is undertaken with teams developing 'real time' start-up of
a new business. This project will require a very substantial time
commitment outside the formal class contact time indicated.
References
Drucker, I? Innovation and Entrepreneurship. London: Heinemann, 1985
Stevenson, H.H. et a/. New Business Ventures and the Entrepreneu~:
2nd edn, Homewood: Irwin, 1985
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
EF930
lnnovation and New Ventures
Fifty-six hours over one semester
A subject in the master of enterprise innovation program.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: understand
the concepts of innovation and invention; differentiate between product
and process innovation; categorise user, manufacturer or supplier
initiated innovation; identify the requirements and practices to protect
intellectual property; describe the marketing concepts that support
industrial or consumer driven innovation; use appropriate technological
forecasting techniques; and to understand leadership types and
management practices appropriate to supporting innovation in new
ventures.
Textbook
Von Hippel, E. Sources of Innovation. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1988
References
Dukakis, M.S. and Kanter, R.M. Creating the Future: The Massachusetts
Comeback andlts Promise for America. New York: Summit, 1988
Lehnerd, A.I? "Revitalising the Manufacture and Design of Mature
Global Products" in Technology & Global Industry. Washington, D.C.:
National Academy, 1987
Teece, D.J. "Capturing Value from Technological Innovation: Integration,
Strategic Partnering and Licensing Decision's" in Technology &
Global Industry Washington, D.C.: National Academy, 1987
EF931
Entrepreneurship in Corporations
Fifty-six hours over one semester
A subject in the master of enterprise innovation program.
This unit aims to provide the student with the ability to: identify the
strategy concept and oraanisation concept of corporation: recognise
the rerevance of these concepts to the contexts of entrepreneurship,
maturitv. diversification. innovation and ~rofessionalism: recoanise how
entrepieneurial manadement differs from 'professionat ma&gement;
understand the imporlance of culture In an organlsatlon and $s effect
on venture opportunities: des~an new ventures to optimise the odds
for success in a corporate framework.
Textbooks
Quinn, J.B., Mintzberg, H. and James, R.M. Strategy Process:
Concepts, Contrasts, Cases. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice
Hall, 1991
Porter, M. The Competitive Advantage of Nations. London: MacMillan
Press, 1990
EF932
Entrepreneurial Project II
Fifty-six hours over one semester
A subject in the master of innovation program.
This unit is undertaken by teams developing a 'real life' product or
service within a large corporation. The project will require a very substantial
time commitment outside the formal class contact time
indicated.
References
Drucker, I? Innovation and Entrepreneurship. London: Heinemann, 1986
Stevenson, H.H. et al. New Business Ventures and the Entrepreneuc
2nd edn, Homewood: Irwin, 1985
Timmons, J. New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship in the 1990's. 3rd
edn, Homewood, Illinois: Irwin, 1990
ME169
Building Services
Three hours per week for two semesters
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to provide students with an understanding of the basic
principles and practice of various specialist services relevant to
buildings.
Ventilation and heating: general principles, winter heating loads, equipment,
inspection and maintenance, regulations and standard, AS
1668/2.
Fluid flow: introduction to incompressible flow in ducts and pipes,
Bernoulli equation.
Hot water servlces: distr~but~on systems, heaters and boilers, steam
lines. Solar heating. Inspection and maintenance regulations.
Personal movement systems: lifts, escalators, walkways.
Ergonomics: effects of features of building servlces on human performance
and comfort, s~ecial arranaements for the ~hv~l~allv handicapped,
system effects of various services, noise proiection.
Fire protection: human behaviour in fires, cause of fires and the way
fires develop. Design for fire protection. The roles of building surveyor,
engineer, architect, builder and legislative authority. Fire detectors.
monitors, controls, alarms, sprinkler systems.
Electrical services: basic principles of electrical circuits and devices
including generators, transformers, transmission and distribution systems.
Single and three-phase circuits. Motor types, construction and
characteristics. Power and reactive volt-amperes.
References
Anderson, B. The Solar Home Book. New Hampshire: Cheshire Books,
1976
Andrews, M. Building Mechanical Systems. 2nd edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1977
Hall, F. Building Services and Eqiripment. London: Longman, 1976
Hughes, E. Electrical Technology 5th edn, London: Longman, 1977
Relevant Australian and Victorian Standards and Codes
ME269 Building Services
Three hours per week for first semester and two hours
per week for second semester
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
intended to extend students' understanding of the services relevant
to building.
Air-conditioning: basic principles of human comfort requirements and
of equipment used to achieve these. Thermal equipment and human
loads. Insulation. Smoke control, AS1668/1. Speciality services: including
reticulated compressed air, vacuum lines, stand-by generating sets,
fuel services, garbage disposal, security. Provisions for controls,
adjustments, inspections and maintenance.
Electrical services: survey of major components of electrical loads,
industrial and commercial: electrical aspects of heating, lighting, airconditioning,
transport systems (lifts and escalators). Principles of
illumination. Emergency supplies. Principles of protective systems for
personnel and equipment. Electric shock, and safety procedures.
Wirina reaulatlons. resoonsibilitv lor installation of electrical eaulDment.
CommunTcations sysiems. '
References
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers. ASHRAE Handbooks (Fundamentals, Systems, Application
and Equipment). Latest editions
Andrews, m. Building Mechanical Systems. 2nd edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1977
Hall, F. Building Services and Equipment. London: Longman, 1976
Relevant Australian and Victorian Standards and Codes
. .

ME621 Air-conditioning
Four hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the graduate diploma in air-conditioning.
Thermodynamic properties of gaseous mixtures. Psychrometric
properties of steam-air mixtures. Construction of the psychrometric
chart. Operations. Heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying.
mixing. Combined operations.
Analysis of direct contact processes. Dimensional analysis applied to
convective mass transfer. Enthalpy potential. Combined sensible and
latent transfer. Cooling coils, by-pass factor, selection of coils. Cooling
towers. Performance and selection.
Humidifying by steam and water.
Ventilation. Natural and forced. Infiltration and exfiltration. Stack effect.
Human comfort requirements. Metabolic rate, latent and sensible heat
rejection. Air movement, temperatures, moisture content and thermal
radiation relationshi~s for comfort.
Contaminants. ~iltraiion and masking. Minimum fresh and total air for
various situations. AS1668 Pt. 2.
Cooling load estimation. lntroduction to computer methods (CAMEL.
TEMPER, BUNYIP, etc.). Internal heat gains. External heat gains.
Direct solar gain, fenestration, shading, coefficients, shade effects.
Unsteady state conduction in building perimeters, sol-air temperature,
lag and attenuation as a function of zone aspect and construction,
cooling load characteristics for continuous and intermittent plant operation,
instantaneous heat gain, instantaneous cooling load.
Domestic installations.
Heating load estimation. Use of thermal insulation. Economic
effectiveness.
Boilers and heat generation: revise fundamentals, package boiler units,
Rue-gas analysis, regulations regarding boilers and atmospheric
pollution.
References
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers. ASHRAE Handbooks - Fundamentals, Systems, Applications
and Equipment Volumes. Atlanta, GA, USA: Published by this
Society.
Department of Housing and Construction in association with the
Australian lnstitute of Refrigeration, Air Conditioning and Heating.
Mechanical Engineering Services Design Aids. Australian Government
Publishing Service. Canberra, 1980
ME622 Refrigeration
Three hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the graduate diploma course in air-conditioning.
The vapour compression cycle. P-h diagram.
Properties of and selection criteria for primary and secondary
refrigerants.
The chlorine-ozone reaction.
Positive displacement compressors. Descriptive treatment of construction
of rotary vane, screw and reciprocating compressors. Classification
according to duty.
Reciprocating compressor clearance and actual volumetric efficiency.
Volumetric and isentropic efficiencies of all types. Effect of internal
leakage on discharge temperature and efficiency.
Lubrication. Viscibility. Oil trapping and return methods.
Crankcase heaters.
Multipressure systems. Flash intercoders, staged compression and
multiple evaporators. Regenerative cycles.
Evaporators and condensers. Types and applications. Heat transfer
in finned coils and shell and tube exchanges.
Circuit piping layout and sizing. Pipe insulation. Filter dryers.
Liquid-suction line exchangers.
Plant operation. Air purging, charging, pump-down and defrosting.
Food processing. Freezing, storage and distribution. Cold storage cooling
load. Moisture barriers and insulation.
Faculty of Engineering
Threlkeld, J.L. Thermal Environmental Engineering. 2nd edn, Englewood
Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1970
Australian Institute of Refrigeration, Air Conditioning and Heating
(Journal)
ME627 Risk P~y~hology
One hour per week for one semester
A in the graduate diploma course in risk management'
Introduction to necessary principles of PsYchologY.
Skill psychology: principles of skill acquisition and learning, models
of human behaviour in perceptual workload, arousallfatigue effects.
Individual behaviour in a risk situation; perception and understanding
of risk, motivation, cognition, cognitive dissonance.
References
Selected papers and course notes.
ME629 Risk Social Science
One hour per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
lntroduction to necessary principles of social science.
Principles of social and group behaviour; culture, power, group
pressures, dynamics in organisations, group decision-making.
Group perceptions of, and reactions to risk; risky shift, polarisation,
opposing groups.
References
Selected papers and course notes
ME641 Ergonomics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma in risk management.
The person - machine - environment system.
Information processing models of the human being.
Perceptual and mental workload and tasks: sensory processes, motor
activities, environmental factors, design criteria for tasks and displays
capabilities and limitations of the human operator.
Physical workload and tasks: physical workload capacity of humans,
work-rest periods, environment factors affecting physical capability.
Postural strain and over use injuries: types, origins, pathology, task
design criteria, management strategies for risk control.
Overload injuries: types, pathology, task design criteria, management
strategies for risk control.
Hand tool design principles.
Illumination and colour: measurement, design principles, standards.
References
Galer, I. (ed.) Applied Ergonomics Handbook. 2nd edn, London: Butterworths.
1987
Wickens, C.D. Engineering Psychology and Human Performance.
Columbus: C.E. Merrill, 1984
Grandjean, E. Fitting the Task to Man. 4th edn. London: Taylor &
Francis, 1988
Periodicals. Ergonomics, Applied Ergonomics, Human Factors.
ME651 Risk Philosophy
One hour per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Concepts and definitions: pure and speculative risk, the parameters
of risk (probability, exposure and consequence value) and the risk
diagram, scales of measurement for risk parameters, uncertainty,
objective and subjective assessment of risk parameters. The risk
estimation model.
Risk Evaluation: The evaluation process, factors affecting evaluation,
who evaluates?, evaluation methodology, societal perception of risks,
risk references and risk acceptance criteria.
Absorption cycle. Properties of binary mixtures. Analysis of component
operation and characteristics of the system.
References
References
Rescher, N. Risk: A Philosophical Introduction to the Theory of Risk
~~~~i~~~ society of ti^^, ~ ~ and f ~i~ ~ conditioning i ~ ~ EvaluationandManagement. ~ ~ ~ i Washington: ~ University ~ Pressof America,
Engineers. ASHRAE Handbooks (Fundamentals, Systems, Applications
lga3
and Equipment Volumes). Atlanta, GA, USA: Published by th~s Society.
ROwe, W.D. An Of Risk. Malabar: Krieger, 1988
Dossat, R.J. Principles of Refrigemtion. znd edn, New York: Wiley, 1981 Schwing, R.C. and Albers, W.A. Jnr. (ed)Societal Risk ~ssessment.
lnternational lnstitute of Refrigeration. Thermodynamic and Physical safe if safe New Press, Iga0
Properties R12, also for R22. Paris: International lnstitute of
Refrigeration, 1981
Stoecker, W.F. Design of Thermal Systems. 2nd edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1980
Stoecker, W.F. and Jones, J.W. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. 2nd
edn, Tokyo: McGraw-Hill, 1982

ME652 Occurrence Analysis
One hour per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Scientific methodology.
Principles of phenomenology; application to unexpectedlunwanted
occurrences.
Models of occurrences; development and use of models, energy
damage and time models, use with cases appropriate to each stream.
Application to occurrence recording, investigation and information
systems.
References
Kjellen. U. (ed)OccupationalAccident Research. Amsterdam: Elsevier,
1984
vikr, D. Accident Causation, Analysis and Control. Melbourne: Viner
and Robinson, 1988
Skolnick. S.A. et al. Book of Risks. Bethesda: National Press, 1985
ME660 Risk Management
Forty-five hours over two semesters
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma in risk management.
Insurance:
Brief history and concepts of insurance.
Principles of insurance: contents, claims estimates, premium determination,
types of premiums (fixed, burning cost) re-insurance, the role
of brokers.
Liability insurance (product, public, employer and employee), contract
types and administration.
Professional indemnity. contract types and adminlstratlon.
Breakdown Insurance: contract tvDes and admln~stratlon.
Catastrophic loss insurance: coniiact types and administration.
Risk Management:
Concepts and definitions: definition of risk management, organisational
and risk management objectives.
Risk management models (overview) and definition of terms:
the process model;
assets, vulnerabilities, exposure and threats model;
functions and activities models.
Risk control: principles and practices (loss retention, reduction and
transfer, including pre- and post- loss).
Risk control decision-making: principles and practices.
Systematic risk control and risk management systems, organisational
and national structure for risk management.-crlses management.
assessment of oraanlsation effectiveness ("MORT"). '
Risk managemeni practices and case studies.
References
Vaughan, E.J. Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance. 5th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1989
Greene, M.R. Risk and Insurance. South Western, 1981
Williams, C.A. Jr. and Heins, R.M. Risk Management& Insurance. 5th
edn, New York: McGraw-Hill. 1985
Griffiths. R.F. Dealing with Risk: The Planning, Management and
Acceptability of Technological Risk. Manchester: Manchester
University, 1981
Head, G.L. Risk Management Process. New York: Risk Management
Society, 1986
ME661 Risk Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Definitions of and distinction between risk and reliability engineering.
Morphologic analysis principles and applications to risk and reliability
systems: synthesis and analysis techniques (event, fault tree, failure
mode and effect).
Application of reliability mathematics to the assignment of probabilities
of success. Emphasis on qualitative and logical approach.
Sources of failure, probability and reliability data.
Review of Software applications packages.
References
Browning, R.L. The Loss Rate Concept in Safety Engineering. New
York: Dekker, 1980
Hertz, D.B. and Thomas, H. Practical Risk Analysis: An Approach
Through Case Histories. Chichester: Wiley, 1983
Kletz, T.A. Hazop and Hazan - Notes on the Identification and Assessment
of Hazards. 2nd edn, Rugby: I.C.E., 1986
ME664 Risk Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester including
lectures, tutorials and workshops
A subject in the graduate diploma in risk management.
Risk Control Models
Time sequence 'model', particularly for fire.
Occupational Health and Safety; overview of principles of risk assessment
and control - a model.
Application of occurrence ~hen~rnen~l~av. -.
~'isk Control Strategies .
Highly Protected Risk (HPR) concepts, development, criteria and
impact.
Pre-event control and design:
- prevention - control of ignition sources, damaging energy
sources;
design for control (particularly for fire);
- automatic detection and suppression systems; uses and
applications;
- design for control by limiting loss potentials - basic design for
minimisation of loss ~otential. fire walls. . sDace . se~aration.
bunding, etc.
Planning for emergencies, private and public fire brigades.
References
National Fire Protection Association. Fire Protection Handbook. 16th
edn, Quincy: NFPA, 1986
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation. Criteria for Maximum Forseeable
Loss Fire Walls and Space Separation Data Sheet 1-22. 1985
Kletz, T.A. An Engineers Viw of Human Error Rugby: Institute of
Chemical Engineers, 1986
ME675 Maintenance Management
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma courses in risk management and
maintenance engineering.
Maintenance function: relationship of maintenance within and to the
organisation.
Terotechnology: life cycling costing, selection of plant, plant system
design and effectiveness.
RAM engineering: reliability, fundamentals, analysis, prediction and
verification of reliability, maintainability fundamentals and concepts,
applications of RAM engineering.
References
Kelly, A. Maintenance Planning and Control. London: Butterworths,
1984
Corder, A.S. Maintenance Management Techniques. London: McGraw-
Hill, 1976
Cunningham, C.E. and Cox, W. Applied Maintainability Engineering.
New York: Wiley, Inter-Science, 1972
Dhillon, B.S. and Reiche, H. Reliability and Maintainability Management
New York: Van Nostrand Rheinhold. 1985
ME676 Property and Production Risk
Management
Two hours per week for one semester, including lectures,
tutorials, seminars
A subject in the graduate diploma in risk management.
Loss Forecasting:
Loss estimate methods overview - purpose and utility.
Fire and explosion, controlled and uncontrolled loss.
Mapping, insurance criteria, EML, PML, NLE, MFL, etc.
Machinery Breakdown, the role and use of flow charting and criticality
analysis.
Historical and predictive methods; the role of databases and fault tree
analysis.
Threat and vulnerability model.
Miscellaneous perils, flood, windstorm, hail etc.
Property Insurance:
Purpose definitions and concepts.
Brief history e.g. Lloyds, Factory Mutual, Australian experience.
Levels of cover, deductibles, reinsurance, self insurance, limits of cover,
perils, business interruption, construction exclusions.
Role of parties, insured, agent or broker, insurer and reinsurer;
government.
Risk and Maintenance Financing:
Financing Models.
Relationship between risk and maintenance.
Terotechnology; life cycle costing including the cost of risk.

References
Australian lnsurance Institute. lnsurance of Propem-Risk Assessment.
Subject 112. Melbourne: All, 1985
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation. Criteria for Maximum Forseeable
Loss Fire Walls and Space Separation Data Sheet 1-22. 1985
Kelly, A. Maintenance Planning and Control. London: Butterworths,
1RR4
Davis, J.R. Principles of Managerial Economics. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall, 1986
Savage, C. I. and Small, J.R. Introduction to Managerial Economics.
2nd edn, London: Hutchinson, 1975
ME678
Health and Safety Management
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Occupational Health and Safety
Historical precepts in injury control: pre 20th Century, the industrial
revolution, the factory inspectorates, Heinrich, Haddon, Wigglesworth.
H&S program objectives and strategies. The applrcation ofrtsk rnanaaement
principles to H&S management; rlsk ~dentification and auantifkation
(data,'surveys, workgroup input, computerised data bases).
evaluation criteria and methods (standards and regulations, technical
specialists' role, committees and unions), implementation of control
measures and control measure hierarchy.
Rehabilitation and Claims Management.
Review of Application of Victorian Acts: OH&S 1985, Dangerous Goods
and Compensation. The Workcare system. The role of committees,
representatives, inspectorates, ACC, VARC. Union and Employer
policies and resources.
Organlsatlonal deslgn for effectlve lmplementatlon and maintenance
of a program role, respons~b~l~t~es, reporting polnts, program audlt
Sources of information: risk and control information.
Public and Product Health and Safety
Risk assessment for public and product risk; methods, criteria and
program elements, incident reporting, design and disposal screening.
Public health and safety program design and management.
Product guarantees, warranties and usage information, recall procedures,
incident reporting system.
References
Cromoton. K.C. The WorkCare Manual. Melbourne: Information
~ustralia, '1986
Deming, W.E. Quality, Productivity and Competitive Position.
Cambridge: MIT Press, 1982
Mathews, J. Health and Safety at Work, Australian Trade Union Safety
Reoresentatives Handbook. Leichardt: Pluto. 1985
~eindling, P. (ed) The Social History of ~ccu~ational Health. London:
Croom Helm, 1985
ME721 Air-conditioning
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in air-conditioning.
Fluid flow principles: air flow in ducts, water flow in pipes, distribution
systems, duct design philosophies, equal friction, constant velocity,
static regain, index runs, system characteristics, distribution and mixing
of air streams, registers and diffusers, pipe design, system characteristics
and components, cooling and heating coil connections, control
valves.
Fans and pumps: tvpes, characteristics. construction. svstem
matching, energy consumption, part-load fan operation.
Nose and vibration: backaround theorv. NR curves. noise and vibration
sources, effect of duct a

ME731 Instrumentation and System Control
Three hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in air-conditioning.
General concepts. Overview of instrumentation in monitoring, control
and experimental analysis.
Functional concepts. Functional elements of instruments and system
control loops.
Measuring devices. Principles of measuring temperature, pressure,
flow, velocity and humidity. Relevant instruments, measurement
techniques and interpretation.
Interrelation of Plant and control systems, and interpretation of
schematic control drawings.
Control devices and controllers. Broad understanding of pneumatic,
electric and electronic control systems, relative merits, overview of
controller types and a practical understanding of system control.
DDC, Building automation and Monitoring.
System studies. Linking of the above elements into control systems
for air-conditioning, refrigeration and heating and fire services.
Application of control systems within overall energy, management
strategies - link with ME781.
References
Haines, R.W. Control Systems for Heating, Ventilating and
Airconditioning. 2nd edn. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. 1977
Letherman, K.M. Automatic Controls for Heating and Airconditioning:
Principles and Applications.Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1981.
ME742 Health and Hygiene
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: By assignment alone
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Aim: To provide a working knowledge of types of hazards encountered
in the workplace and means of overcoming these.
Toxicology: routes of entry, dose-response relationships. Particular
chemical hazards and their effects: solvents, dusts, welding fumes,
heavy metals. Respiratory protection (dusts, mists and vapours): types
of equipment effectiveness in use. Ventilation system design practices.
Noise and vibration: effects on human beings. Thermal condition:
Thermoregulatory mechanisms, effects on high and low temperatures
on humans. Radiation (ionising and non-ionising): uses and
applications. Biological hazards e.g. legionnaire's disease, AIDS -
principles and controls. Stress (physical, psychological and social
stresses and stress effects) in the workplace.
References
Atherley, G.R.C. (1978). Occupational Health and Safety Concepts -
Chemical and Processing Hazards. London: Applied Science, 1978
Harrington, J.M. and Gill, F.S. Occupational Health. Oxford: Blackwell,
1983
NIOSH. The lndustrial Environment, Its Evaluation & Control. 3rd edn,
Washington: NIOSH. 1973
ME743 Health and Safety Practices
and Technology
One hour per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Technology and practices in the safe operation andlor use of:
machinery and tools (e.g. power presses, woodworking, metalworking,
construction)
grinding wheels
compressed fluids
vehicles (fork lift trucks, mobile equipment, trucks)
cranes, slings, hoists
stairs, steps, ladders, platforms
Personal protective equipment: selection, implementation and use
(eye, face, head, hand, feet).
Emergency equipment and procedures: breathing apparatus use, gas
and smoke detection equipment, procedure design and maintenance.
Particular industry practices (to suit needs of students).
References
McElroy, F.E. Accident Prevention Manual for lndustrial Operations. 9th
edn. Chicago: National Safety Council, 1988
Australian Gandards and codes of practice.
Papers from the literature.
Risk Engineering - -
Four hours per week for one semester including lectures,
tutorials and workshops.
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Risk assessment methods, models and control strategies.
Risk assessment methods - how to use them.
Fault tree analysis.
Threat and Vulnerability Assessments.
Hazop and Hazan.
Flow charting and criticality analysis.
Use of historical databases.
Use of insurance criteria.
References
Brown. D.B. Systems Analysis and Design for Safety Englewood Cliffs.
N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 1976.
Browning, R.L. The Loss Rate Concept in Safety Engineering. New
York: Marcel Dekker, 1980
Kletz, T.A. Hazop and Hazan. Notes on the Identification and
Assessment of Hazards. Rugby: lnstitute of Chemical Engineers, 1986
Kletz. T.A. Myths of the Chemical Industry. or 44 Things a Chemical
Engineer Ought to Know. Rugby: lnstitute of Chemical Engineers, 1984
Kletz, T.A. Cheapes Safer Plants or Wealth and Safety at Work - Notes
on Inherently Safer and Simpler Plants. Rugby: lnstitute of Chemical
Engineers, 1985
Lees, F.f? Loss Prevention in the Process Industries. London:
Butteerorths, 1980.
ME764 Risk Control Practices
and Technology
Four hours per week for one semester Including lectures
and laboratory work.
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Particular skills, hardware and codes with applications to specific
hazards.
Fire: flame-detectioa, heat detection, smoke detection. Extinguishing
systems; water, CO , dry chemical, foam and Halon.
Australia and US standards.
Water sprinklers and hydrants, pumps and tanks. Australian and US
standards.
Explosion: detection and suppression for dusts, boilers and pressure
vessels, gas trains.
Flammable substances: handling and storage.
Other perils.
References
National Fire Protection Association. Fire Protection Handbook. 16th
edn, Boston, U.S.A.: 1986. Plus various codes.
Standards Association of Australia. Various standards, particularly
AS2118, Automatic Sprinkler Code, AS1940 Flammable Liquids Code
and AS1596 LP Gas Code.
Factory Mutual System. Various data sheets.
Risk Engineering (H&S)
Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate d~ploma course in risk management.
Engineering risk control for external and internal energy sources.
Application of event analysis techniques to typical machines or
processes. Principles and practices of priority setting and work
scheduling for risk control tasks. Machinery safeguarding design.
Isolation procedures and work permit systems. Work procedure design:
principles, legal criteria, reliability of behavioural control measures.
Electrical safety. Fire explosion principles and practices. Information
sources.
References
Hammer, W. Occupational Safety Management and Engineering. 3rd
edn, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985
Ridley, J. Safety at Work. 2nd edn, London: Butterworths, 1986
McKinnon, G.P. and Tower, K. (eds.) Fire Protection Handbook. 14th
edn or later, Boston, Mass.: NFPA, 1976

ME774 Maintenance Practices
and Technology
Two hours per week for two semesters
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management and
maintenance engineering.
Diagnostic and analytical methods with applications to plant and
equipment, for condition and system performance monitoring.
Vibration and noise: measurement methods, analysis methods.
Oil analysis methods: interpretation of atomic absorption
spectrographic methods, development of inspection and trend analysis
techniques.
Wear debris: methods of determination and interpretation, ferrography.
Thermography: monitoring devices, interpretation and malfunction
through temperature measurements.
Application of diagnost~c methods to machine health monitoring,
setting up inspection procedures, record keeping, trend monitoring,
life curves.
References
Collacot, T. Mechanical Fault Diagnosis & Condition Monitoring.
London: Chapman Hall, 1977
Meirovitch, L. Elements of Vibration Analysis. New York: McGraw-Hill.
1975
Neale. M. and Associates. A Guide to the Condition Monitorino of
~achinery HMSO, 1978
Steidel, R.F. An lntroduction to Mechanical Vibrations. 3rd edn, New
York: Wlley, 1989
ME776 Maintenance Engineering Science
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma courses in risk management and
maintenance engineering.
Equipment deterioration mechanisms, failure, reclamation and repair
strategies. Corrosion detectlon, treatment and preventative methods.
Mechanisms of wear, wear measurement, desiqn for wear resistance.
lubrication theories. Review and evaluation of miitallic and non-metallic
materials.
References
Stewart, D. & Tulloch, D.S. Principles of Corrosion and Protection.
London: Macmillan. 1968
~arkir, A.D. Wear of Metals. Oxford: Pergamon, 1976
Sarkar, A.D. Friction and Wear: London: Academic, 1980
ME777 Maintenance Management
Two hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma courses in risk management and
maintenance engineering.
Strategies for systems operations and support. Maintenance
strateqies: emergency, corrective, preventative. RAM-D engineering,
fundamentals, concepts and applications
Maintenance operations. selection of malntenance strategies based
on management deos~ons, malntenance planning, work planning.
resource analvs~s and allocation. . . ~lant inventow. malntenance control.
plant records:
Stores and spares inventory: scientific inventory control, inventory
analysis and strategies, stores and spares management policy
assessments.
Work measurement in maintenance: method study, work improvement,
work samolina in maintenance. Just-in-time Droarams.
~nformatidn Ganagement: technical and manlagement database
assessment and management (search, retrieval, assessment and
consolidation).
Computer applications: software for maintenance, evaluation of
commercial packages.
References
Kelly, A. Maintenance Planning & Control. London: Butterworths, 1984
Corder, A.S. Maintenance Management Techniques. London: McGraw-
Hill, 1976
Faculty of Engineering
ME780 Major Project
Forty-five hours over two semesters
Assessment by project, report and seminar.
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Use of library, definition of computer search keywords, sources of data
(databases). Research and project methods and discipline.
Execution of a project aimed at developing skills necessary to select,
integrate, and apply appropriate knowledge, concepts and techniques
to achieve a practical result. Where possible the proiect shall be based
on the students employment experience and.shall address a real
problem in industry.
ME781
Project and Energy ivlanagement
Four hours per week for one semester
Lecture: 20 hours
Project: 40 hours
Assessment: By staff consultation and comprehensive
written report
A subject in the graduate diploma course in air-conditioning.
Project management: Contract law, scheduling, costing, optimlsation,
maintenance program development.
Energy management: Including energy source selection, energy
management, life cycle costing, system optimisation, basics of
contracting and project management, and current state of the art
applications where applicable.
F~eld pmject: The project should be of a pract~cal nature llnklng the
course elements of alr-cond~t~on~nq. refrlqeratlon and svstem control
and involve the application of Groject-and energy ;nanagement
techniques. Where practicable the project should be undertaken by
groups and group size should not exceed 4.
References
Harrison, F.L. Advanced Project Management. 2nd edn, Aldershot:
Gower, 1985
Murphy, W.R. and McKay, G. Energy Management. London:
Buttenvorth, 1982
Smith, C.B. Energy Management Principles. New York: Pergalnon, 1981
Thumann. A. Plant Engineers and Managers Guide to Energy
Conservation. The Role of the Energy Manager 2nd edn, New York:
Van Nostrand-Reinhold, 1983
ME903 Advanced Control Systems and
Devices
Two hours per week for two semesters
Assessment by assignments and examination
A subject in the master of engineering CIM course.
Dynamics of controlled systems: state-space concepts, solutions to
state-space equations, systems stability. Leverrier algorithm and
conversion to Laplace domain, relations of state-space to classical
controls. Discrete state-space theory.
Non-linear and stochastic control: phase plane methods, descr~bing
function technique, system stability, Liapunov stability methods.
Ergodic random processes, auto correlation functions, power spectral
density functions, response of linear systems.
Programmable control of industrial logic (PLC).
Systems simulation. Advanced control systems.
Microprocessors and microcomputers in control systems.
Text books
Cadzow, J. and Martens, H. Discrete-time and Computer Control with
Worked Examples. Oxford: Pergamon, 1981
Newland, D.E. An lntroduction to Random Vibrations and Spectral
Analysis. 2nd edn, Harlow: Longman, 1984
Palm Ill, W.J. Modeling, Analysis and Control of Dynamic Systems. New
York: Wiley, 1983
MM120 Engineering Science - Energy
and Processes
A two semester subject comprising 7 hours per week of
lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
A first year subject in all degree courses in engineering. The subject
is divided into four parts: physics, energy systems, chemistry and
materials and processes.
Physics: Kinetic theory of gases; Linear Dynamics; Rotational
Dynamics; SHM and Wave Motion; Fluid Mechanics.

Energy Systems: Physical and Thermodynamic properties of fluids.
Fluid viscosity and surface tension. Pressure and Temperature
meaasurement. Gases. Equation of state. Specific heats. Polytropic
o~erations. Open and Closed systems. ldeal and actual spark ignition
englnes. ldeal and actual vapour power plant. Heat transfer; steady
state one dimensional conductcon and convection. Heat exchanaers.
Cyclic Fluctuations of speed and energy in rotating machines. ~rztion
clutches. Belt drives. lntroduction to Mechanical Engineering - design
competition.
Chemistry: review of chemical bonding, formulae and periodic table
Energy of chemical bonding; Electrochemistry; Organic and inorganic
chemistry.
Materials and Processes: Metallic, polymeric and ceramic states;
Phase transformations; Deformation in materials; Polymer technology.
Compounding. Extrusionlinjection, compression and blow moulding;
Thermoforming; Machine and near shape forming. Machining
methods. Metal powder technology.
Textbooks
Physics
Bueche, F. lntroduction to Physics for Scientists and Engineers. 4th
edn. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986
Energy Systems
Hannah, J. and Stephens, R.C. Mechanics of Machines: Elementary
Theory and Examples. 4th edn, London: Arnold, 1984
Kinsky, R. Heat Engineering: An lntroduction to Thermodynamics. 3rd
edn. Svdnev: McGraw-Hill. 1989
Roger< G.F.c. and ~a~hew, Y.R. Thermodynamics and Transport
Properties of Fluids. 4th edn. Oxford: Blackwell, 1988
Chemistry
Towns, A.P. et al. The Wheel Reinvented. 3rd edn, Hawthorn: S.I.T., 1989
Materials and Processes
Callister, W. Materials Science and Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1985
MM209 Engineering Practices
(36 hours)
A second year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
This subject provides students with an introduction to current engineering
trade practices and the development of personal elementary
'hands on' skills in these trades.
Students will attend for one week block of full tlme Englneerlng Practlces
In one non-teachma week Drlor to the start of semester 2 The
program will operate for2.5 days per week and will permit students
to complete the three trades within the week. Groups will be arranged
to suit the current Institute calendar.
The syllabus is comprised of lectures, demonstration of specific trade
skills and techniques, and completion of 'hands-on' practical work in
basic TAFE trade areas of:
ElectricallElectronic Systems (12 hours)
Machine Shop (12 hours)
Welding (12 hours)
MM210 Industrial Processes
2 hours per week for two semesters
Assessment: exam, practical work, assignments
Brief hlstory of the development of the chemlcal Industry. The operation
of malor chemlcal and mlneral Drocesslna lndustrles uslna exam~les
of industries employing inorganic, orgasc and natural sources:
Practical work in physical chemistry and thermodynamics in support
of the syllabus for MM211, lntroduction to Chemical Engineering.
Textbooks
As specified by the lecturer.
Reference
Austin, GT. Shreves Chemical Process Industries. 5th edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1984
MM211 lntroduction to Chemical
Engineering
2 hours per week for two semesters
Assessment: exams, assignments
Chemical engineering thermodynamics: Physical equilibrium, bubble
and dewpoint relations, phase diagrams, activity and activity coefficients,
Gibbs Duhem equation, chemical reaction equilibria, heats
-
of reaction and mixina.
Basic Design Techniques: Mass and energy balance calculations; flowsheets;
stoichiometry calculations involving bypass, recycle and purge;
combustion and heat engine calculations.
Textbooks
Smith and Van Ness. lntroduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics.
4th edn, McGraw Hill, 1987
Felder, R.M. and Rousseau, R.W. Elementary Principles of Chemical
Processes. 2nd edn, New York: Wiley, 1986
MM220 Energy Systems
Four hours per week over first semester
This subject is a second year 1st semester subject of mechanical and
manufacturing engineering degree course.
This subject comprises:
1. Thermodynamics two hours per week.
2. Fluid mechanics two hours per week.
Thermodynamics
Revision of non-flow processes with gases.
Revision of steady flow processes with gases and liquids.
Non-steady flow with non-reacting fluids (mechanical engineering
students only).
Second law of thermodynamics.
Reversibility.
Entropy of gases, liquids and vapours, T-S and h-s charts.
Vapour compression refrigeration.
Real gases (manufacturing engineering students only).
Fluid Mechanics:
Fundamental concepts: perfect and real fluids; density, compressibility,
viscosity, Newtonian and nowNewtonian fluids, surface tension.
Fluid statics: Measurement of pressure, laws of fluid pressure,
hydrostatic thrust on submerged surfaces; buoyancy and flotation.
Basic fluid dynamics: Continuity, energy and momentum equations;
application to devices for measuring velocity and flow rate.
lntroduction to boundary layer theory: Qualitative treatment of
boundary layer growth; laminar and turbulent velocity profiles.
MM221 Energy Systems
Three hours per week over second semester
This subject is for all degree students in mechanical engineering.
This subject comprises:
1. Thermodynamics two hours per week.
2. Fluid mechanics one hour per week.
Thermodynamics:
Rankine cycle with reheat and feed water heating
Turbine isentropic efficiency.
Reciprocating gas compressors.
lntroduction to Dower cvcles lncludlnq Caruot, Otto, Dlesel, Rankme.
Joule, Stirling.
Fluid Mechanics:
Viscous fluid flow in pipes and ducts: Head loss due to friction; other
head losses; friction factor for laminar and turbulent steady
incompressible flow.
References
Rogers. C.F.C. and MAYHEW, Y.R. Thermodynamic and Transport
Properties of Fluids. 4th edn, Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988
Rogers, G.F.C. Engineering Thermodynamics - Work and Heat
Transfer. 3rd edn, London: Longmans. 1980
Eastop, T.C. and McConkey, A. Applied Thermodynamics for
Engineering Technologists. 4th edn, London: Longmans, 1986
Daugherty, R.L., Franzini, J.B. and Finnemore, E.J. Fluid Mechanics
with Engineering Applications. SI Metric edn, McGraw-Hill, 1989

MM230 Engineering Materials
Two hours per week for 2 semesters
This subject IS a second year subject of mechanical and manufacturing
enaineerina - - dearee - courses.
It aims to establish a working knowledge of the relationships between
the structure and orooerties of materials as aoolied , . to fields of mechanical
and manuiaciuring engineering.
Subjects covered include:
Fracture mechanics. Fibre composite materials. Polymeric materials.
Ferrous materials. Non-ferrous materials. Processing of electrical
materials. Corrosion and stress corrosion. Tribology. Joining technology.
Material property data bases.
References
Ashby, M. and Jones, D.R.H. Engineering Materials. Volumes 1, 1980,
and 11. 1986. London: Peraamon Press
~allister, W.D. Jnr. ~aterialgscience andEngineering. New York: Wiley,
1985
&ford, R.J. Plastics Engineering. 2nd edn, London: Pergamon
Press, 1987
Askeland, D.R. The Science and Engineering of Materials. S I edn, UK:
Van Nostrand Rheinhold, 1988
Van Vlack, L.H. Materials for Engineering. Reading, Mass.: Addison-
Wesley, 1982
Faculty of Engineering
MM241 Applied Mechanics
Four hours per week for one semester
A common course in the mechanics of materials and machines for
all degree students in the school of manufacturing and mechanical
engineering.
Mechanics of Materials:
Stat~callv Indeterminate svstems: tenslon and comoresslon includlna
thermal'effects. Beam bending: review and extension of bending d
beams and transverse shear stresses. Torsion: torsion and shear of
circular cross sections. Analysis of Stress and Strain: stresses in cylindrical
and spherical thin walled pressure vessels, stress at a point.
plane stress, Mohr's Circle, principal stresses, maximum shear stress,
transformation of axes. Strain at a point, plane strain, Mohr's Circle.
prlnc~pal stralns, rnaxlmum shear straln, transformat~on of axes Straln
measurement for olane stress, straln aaualna. rosettes Hooke's Law
and the 2D linear elastic stresslstrain relation< Applications, combined
bending and torsion and axial loading.
References
Benham, PP and Crawford, R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
London: Longmans Scientific and Technical. 1988
Fenner, R.T. Mechanics of Solids. Blackwell, 1989
Gere. J.M. and Timoshenko, S.P Mechanics of Materials. 2nd S.I. edn,
Boston, Mass.: PWS Engineering, 1987
Dynamics of Machines:
MM240 Electronics and Measurement
Structures, mechanisms and linkages: determinacy and degrees of
Systems
freedom, kinematic pairs, chains and linkages, machines. Gruebler's
Two hours per week over two semesters
criteria for plane mechanisms. Rigid body kinematics: absolute and
relative motion, relative displacement and velocity, instantaneous
This subject is taken in two parts: electronics and instrumentation and centres. Relative velocity by analytical and graphical approaches to
measurement systems, both of which run for two hours per week for problems of mechanisms and linkages. Epicyclic Gearing: gear trains,
one semester, and IS common for all degree students ~n the school epicyclic gearing, kinematics of steady relative motion, torque and
of mechanical and manufacturing engineer~ng
power transmission. Kinetics of Machines: static force analysis of
Electronics
mechanisms (including joint friction). Cams.
Digital Electronics and Microcomputers - introduction to computers; References
Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal numbers; BCD numbers; binary arith- Hannah, J. and Stephens, R.C. Mechanics of Machines: Elementaw
metic; two's complement notation; bit grouping; basic digital devices Theory and Examples. 4th edn. London: Arnold. 1984
- logic gates, combining logic gates; flip flops and latches; Molian, S. Mechanism Design. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1982
multiplexers and demultiplexers; semiconductor memories; Mabie, H.H. and Reinholtz, C.F. Mechanisms and Dynamics of
introduction to microcomputers; simplified microcomputer operation.
Machinery. 4th edn. Wiley, 1987
Llnear amplif~ers - ~ntroduct~on to BJT amplifiers; character~stics of
amplif~ers; cons~deration of functions of comoonents of simole slnale
transient amplifiers; inpuVoutput resistanck; multistageamplifi&s;
bandwidth product; simple Bode plots; operation amplifiers. MM242 Applied Mechanics
Transducers - active and passive transducers; thermocouple, Piezo-
Three hours per week for second semester
electric, photoelectric, optical, resistive, capacitive, inductive.
~ - ~ - amplitude, ~ frequency, ~ pulse code. ~ This subject is ~ taken by degree students i in the mechanical ~ engineering ~ ~
Motors - DC motors, AC motors, ACIDC motors.
course offered by the school of manufacturing and mechanical
engineering.
References
Fitzgerald, A.E., Higginbotham, D.E. and Grabel, A. Basic Electrical
Of
Engineering. 5th edn. Tokyo: McGraw-Hill. 1981
A course of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work which extends the
Del Toro, V. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals. 2nd edn, Englewood treatment Of covered in MM241 and includes advanced
Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 1986
topics in the stressing and deformation of machine members.
Curved bars: stressing of initially curved bars in bending. Strain
lnstrumentation and Measurement systems
energy: strain energy and the deflection of members under combined
Principles and role of sensors for the measurement of displacement,
bending, torsion and shear loading. The minimum work hypotheses
time, velocity, force, pressure, flow-rate, density and temperature.
and Castigliano's first theorem. Complex stress and strain: extension
Transducing elements for conversion among mechanical, thermal and applications to 3D stress systems. Mohr's circles for 3D applications;
electrical quantities, including examples of electro-mechanical. limitations. Extension of linear elastic stress strain relations to 3D.
capacitance, piezo-electric, resistance, inductance, and thermo-electric Stress and strain as tensor quantities. Failure criteria for ductile metals
transducers.
and non-metallic materials. Yieldina. von Mises-Henkv. Tresca criteria.
Analysis of the static and dynamic performance of electro-mechanical Equivalent stress, equivalent st&. Elementary plasticity; plastics
transducers, input-output characteristics of transducer; compatibility bending of beams, plastic torsion of shafts.
of transducers, amplifiers, measuring circuits and recorders in
measuring systems.
References
Benham. PP. and Crawford, R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
Applications of digital measurement techniques, digital type transducers,
digital to analogue and analogue to digital conversions, data
transfer and communications between micro-computers.
Gere, J.M. and Timoshenko, S.P. Mechanics of Materials. 2nd S.I. edn,
References Boston. Mass.: PWS Engineering. 1987
ell, D.A. Electronic lnstrumentation and Measurements. Reston: ~~~~~i~~ of hi^^^:
Reston Pub Co., 1983
A course of lectures, tutorial applications, and laboratory work which
Deltoro, E.O. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals. 2nd edn, Engkwood extends the depth and breadth of the study of engineering dynamics.
Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1981
~ ~ ~ E.O. b ~ M~~~~~~~~~~
l i ~ , systems. pnd edn, ~ ~ ill, k ~ ~ Rigid : body kinematics and kinetics. Translation, rotation, general and
I a7r;
constrained motion. Relative accelerations and Coriollis component.
Analytccal and graphical kinemat~c solutions, and the application of
Newtons Laws. (D'Alembert's orinciple.) Balancina of dvnamic forces.
Rotary, multi plane balancing: Balancing of reciGocadng machines;
in line and radial examples. Rigid body dynamics - alternative solution
methods. Work and Energy, examples of applications. Impulse and
momentum, eccentric impacts, gyroscopic motion.
~~~~~:$~n~~~~~2~onft~~1$
References l~sted overleaf.

References
Beer, F.P and Johnston, E.R. Mechanics for Engineers - Dynamics.
4th edn, McGraw-Hill International edn, 1987
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G. Engineering Mechanics Vol. 2 Dynamics.
New York: Wiley, 1987
MM250 Engineering Design
Two hours per week for two semesters
Thls subject IS common for all degree students In the school ol mechanlcal
and manufacturing englneerlng.
Lecture and tutorial topics are listed below.
lntroduction to the course; lntroduction to design; Design document-
ation; Standards and specifications; Tolerances in design; Geometry
toleranclng, Des~gn crltena, Fallure theor~es for statlc strength. Bolted
and aasketed lolnts: Welded ~olnts. Lubrlcat~on and ~ournal bearlnas.
i3olliGg elemeilt b&rings; chain and belt transmissions; 0ptim;m
drive selection; Stress concentration in design; Design for fatigue and
endurance; Checking Machine elements for fatigue and endurance
limit; Shaft design; Shaft design standards; Estimating shaft
dimesions; Mechanical drives; Couplings; Clutches and brakes;
Electric motors; lntroduction to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.
References
Shigley, J.E. Mechanical Engineering Design. First Metric edn. New
York: McGraw- Hill. 1986
Design Standards for Mechanical Engineering Students. Standards
Association of Australia
Juvinall, R.C. Fundamentals of Machine Component Design. Wiley,
1983
Lewis. W.!? and Samuel, A.E. Fundamentals of Engineering Design.
New York: Prentice-Hall, 1989
MM260 Ergonomics
Two hours per week over second semester
A second year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
The course aims to give students an understanding of the place
humans occupy in the industrial environment and to develop an
awareness of the relationships between humans and the workplace
and to establish a broad understanding of ergonomics with an
introduction to the indentification and assessment of common
industrial ergonomic problems.
Ergonomics systems concepts: lntroduction to ergonomics,
applications and scope of ergonomics, ergonomics modelling. Human
Body. Functional anatony: excitable cells, skeletal muscle, vision,
hearing, tactile senses, CNS aspects, motor behaviour. Work
phvsioloav: limits to work capacity, cardio-respiratory adjustments,
ihermo-regulation response to stress. Engineering psychology:
character~stics of human memorv. short term, lonq term, recoanition
vs recall, forgetting, vigilence and attention concepts appfied to
monitoring and inspection tasks. Physical environment factors:
influence of heat, liaht. noise, acceleration and vibration on human
performance, gross measures of physical factors. Humanenvironment-
workolace interface: soatla1 reauirements and the relationsh~p to
anth;opometric measires, digplay and control characteristics
interactions between the operator and the machine, workplace
assessment methods, checklists. Work organisation: skills analysis,
task analysis, work measurement methods.
References
Sanders, M.S. and McCormick, E.J. Human Factors in Engineering and
Design. 6th edn. New York: McGraw-Hill. 1987
Diffrient, et al. Humanscale 123/456/789. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press,
1974-1 981
Grandjean, E. Fitting the Task to the Man. 4th edn, London: Taylor &
Francis, 1988
MM270 Manufacturing Technology and
CADICAM
Two hours per week for two semesters
This subject is a second year subject in the mechanical and manufacturing
engineering degree courses.
This subject is comprised of a CADICAM section (of theory and hands
on) and a lecture based Manufacturing Technology section, each
occupying one semester.
Assessment of the two sections will be completed on a semester basis,
with the manufacturing technology section being assessed by examination
and assignment and the CADICAM section being assessed
by separate assignments in CAD and CAM and submitted reports on
the CAM hands-on work.
The subject aims to provide students with an understanding of some
of the fundamental technologies employed in manufacturing industry.
Students will develop an appreciation of the principles underlying these
technologies, how they are applied, and how they affect product cost
and quality.
Students will also be introduced to the principles of computer aided
design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM), and through
hands on exercises, begin to develop skills in the application of
CADICAM.
References
Groover, M.!? Automation, Production Systems and Computer
Integrated Manufacturing. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
1987
Kalpakjian, S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials.
Reading, Mass: Addison Wesley, 1984
MM271 Manufacturing Technology
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: examinations and assignments
The subject is taken in conjunction with MM272 (Manufacturing
Practices) and also compliments the subject MM270 taken by all
manufacturing and mechanical engineering students.
As such, it expands upon the fundamentals of those subjects to provide
the manufacturing engineering student with both a wider and more
rigourous treatment of a range of manufacturing technologies. In
addition, students are introduced to concepts and techniques
associated with engineering dimensional metrology which serve as
a bridge between the technologies and quality in manufacture.
Texts
Kalpakjian, S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials.
Reading, Mass: Addison-Wesley, 1984
MM272 Manufacturing Practice
4 hours per week for one semester
Assessment: practical work and assignments
To familiarise the students with the workings and functionality of
manufacturing machines;
To reinforce materials taught in the Manufacturing Technology and
CADICAM subjects of the course;
To develop in the students experimental skills;
To develop the students report writing skills.
MM280 lntroduction to Management
2 hours per week for two semesters OR
4 hours per week for one semester
Topics of each week's lectures and tutorials are listed below:
Self Management; People Management; Industry Management;
Management Functions and Context.
Textbook
Samuelson. M. Supervision in Australia - Concepts and Practice of
Management. Australian edn, Brisbane: Wiley, 1985
Plus selected references.
MM312 Unit Operations
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Practical work and examination
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Aim: To impart understanding of physical phenomena involving
particles, and the importance of these in chemical manufacturing.
Fluidlparticle systems: hydraulic classification, hindered settling.
thickening. Flow through packed beds, sand filters, fluidisation,
pneumatic and hydraulic conveying, filtration and centrifuging.
Handling and transport of powders, powder mixing, crushing, grinding
and screening.
Textbook
Coulson, J.M. Richardson, J.F. and Backhurst, J.R. Chemical
Engineering. Vol. 2, 3rd edn, Pergamon Press, 1983

MM315 Heat Transfer
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Practical work and examination
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Aim: To provide the student with a sound approach to the design and
selection of heat transfer equipment.
Description and characteristics of shell and tube exchangers, and
alternative geometries; boilers, condensers, etc. with examples of their
use.
Review of previous work in heat transfer, namely uni-dimensional
conduction. Newton's Law of cooling, overall heat transfer coefficients.
Prediction of heat transfer coefficients bv the mechanisms of natural
and forced convection, film and dropwise condensat~on; nucleate and
film boiling LMTD, FT and E-NTU methods to determine temperature
drivlnq forces. Thermal ratinq of shell and tube exchanaers: oressure
drop h heat exchangers. -
MM320 Energy Systems
Four hours per week
A third year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
This subject comprises:
Thermodynamics 2.5 hrslweek for one semester.
Fluid mechanics 1.5 hrslweek for one semester.
Thermodynam~cs: Heat transfer. Forced and free convection, the
thermal bounda~ laver in lamlnar and turbulent flow. momentum and
eddy diffusivity, dimensional analysis applied to convective processes.
Boiling and condensation. Types of heat exchangers, NTU, effectiveness.
Combined modes of heat transfer. Combustion. Combustion
equations for stoichiometric, rich and lean mixtures. Solid, liquid and
gas fuels, exhaust and flue gas analysis. Enthalpy of formation and
of reaction, non-flow combustion. Adiabatic flame temperature.
Dissociation.
Fluid Mechanics:
Dimensional analysis and similarity. Methods of dimensional analysis;
dimensionless groups associated with problems occuring in fluid flow
including effects of natural and forced convection; modelling. Solution
of turbulent flow problems; friction factor for laminar and turbulent
steady, incompressible, viscous flow in pipes and ducts; series and
parallel arrangements. Rotodynamic machinery; Classification and
external considerations, powerlflow characteristics, efficiency, similarity
laws, system matching.
References
Roaers. G.F.C. and Mavhew. Y.R. Engineering Thermodynamics. 3rd
edn, London: ~ongmans, 1980 -
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfe~ Sf Metric edn, McGraw-Hill, 1989
Douglas, J.F., Gasiorek, J.M. and Swaffield, J.A. Fluid Mechanics. 2nd
ednrlondon: Longman, 1985
Fluid Mechanics
3 hours per week for one semester
Assessment: examinations and practical work
A third vear subiect in the degree course in manufacturing - engineering. -
Klnetlc and Potent~al Energy, the equivalence of pressure and head
Bernoull~ eauatlon and 11s a~ol~cat~on . . to P~totube. orlflce late and
Venturi, and weir plates.
Momentum and the momentum equation. Viscosity, its measurement
and use. Criteria of similarity; dimensional analysis and its application
to the derivation of the Stanton (Moody) chart. Equivalent length and
diameter. Stanton and von Karman charts. The Hagen-Poiseuille
equation.
Operation and characteristics of centrifugal pumps and fans; means
of output control. The virtual head equation, the dimensionless groups
relating pump head, throughput, power consumption and efficiency
with impeller diameter and speed. Specific speed; cavitation and
NPSH; relationships between frictional head loss in pipework and head
development by pump or fan.
Application of the above concepts to the solution of problems.
Positive displacement pumps and blowers; valves - gate, globe,
diaphragm, pinch, ball, etc.
Textbook
Coulson, J.M., Richardson, J.F. and Bachkurst, J.R. Chemical Engineering.
Vol. 1, 3rd edn, Pergamon Press, 1983
Faculty of Engineering
MM330 Advanced Materials
1 hour per week for 1 semester
Assessment: examinations and assignments
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Fracture Mechanics:
Plane strain fracture toughness testing. Valid test sample, determination
of stress intensity factor, toughness determination for a variety
of materials and configurations.
Fibre Composite Materials:
Fabrication and manufacture of fibre reinforced composites.
Failure modes, analytical design, empirical design.
Laminate composite analysis, examples of laminate analysis using
computer packages.
Surface Engineering:
Nature of wear, quantitative description of wear, testing and evaluation
for wear resistance.
Review of industrial systems for modification of surfaces by infusion
treatments and surface coatlngs
Structure mod~flcat~ons, properties and appllcat~ons resulting from
- Transformation Hardening
Electrochemical Techniques
- Thermochemical Techniques
- Physical and Chemical Vapour Deposition
Selection of surface modification techniques.
Development of expert systems.
References
Ashby, M. and Jones, D.R.H. Engineering Materials. Vols. 1, 1986 and
11, 1988, London: Pergamon Press
Metals Handbook. 9th edn, ASM, Metals Park, Ohio, U.S.A., 1985
Broek. D. Elementarv Enaineerina Fracture Mechanics. 4th edn.
Boston: ~ijhoff, 1987' -
-
Hertzberg, R.W. Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering
Materials. 3rd edn, New York; Wiley, 1989
Tsai, S.W. Composites Desrgn. 4th edn, Dayton, Ohio: Think
Composites, 1988
Mallick, P.K. Fiber-ReinforcedComposites. New York: Marcel Dekker,
1988
McColm. I.J. Ceramic Science for Materials Technologist. London:
Chapman and Hall, 1983
Richardsen, D.W. Modern Ceramics Engineering. Boston: Marcel
Dekker, 1983
MM331 Engineering Materials
Two hours per week for one semester
A third year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Fracture Mechanics: plane strain fracture toughness testing; validity;
examples of KIC analysis. Fatigue: life calculations and analyses. Fibre
composite materials: fabrication and manufacture; metal matrix
composites; high temperatures, high strength composites. Design of
cellular solids, including the facing core, and their adhesion: analytical
design; empirical design; critical failure modes. Laminate composite
analysis; analysis using computer packages. Advanced ceramics:
characterisation of ceramics; surface flaws; statistical distribution;
Webull modulus; strengthening of ceramics; design and selection of
advanced ceramics for structural and high temperature applications.
Surface engineering: nature of wear; testing and evaluation for wear
resistance; quantitative description of wear; review of industrial
systems for modification of surfaces.
References
Ashbv. M.F. and Jones. D.R.H. Enqineering - Materials. Vols. 1 (1986)
and 11'(1988), London: Pergamon Press
Metals Handbook. 9th edn,,ASM, Metals Park, Ohio, U.S.A., 1985
Broek. D. Elementary Eng~neerrng Fracture Mechan~cs. 4th edn,
~oston: Nijhoff, 1987. -
Hertzberg, R.W. Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering
Materials. 3rd edn, New York: Wiley, 1989

MM340 Applied Mechanics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: 1 x 3 hour examination, assignment1
laboratory
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Part A Solid Mechanics:
To extend earlier stud~es of stress, strain and deflection of elastic
systems and introduce the concepts of yielding, failure and deformation
beyond the elastic limit.
Textbook
Benham, P.P. and Crawford. R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
London: Longmans Scientific & Technical 1987
References
Fenner, RT. Mechanics of Solids. Blackwell, 1989
Alexander, J.M. Strength of Materials. Chichester, Ellis Homewood
Series in Engineering Science, 1981
Ford. H. Advanced Mechanics of Materials. London: Longman Green
& Co., 1963
Part B Vibrations:
A basic course in vibrations covering the response of 1, 2 and multi
dearee of freedom discrete linear system (with and without damping)
to free, transient and steady state-harmonic forcing.
Textbook
Thomson, WI Theory of Vibrations with Applications. 3rd edn, London:
Unwin Hyman, 1988
References
Bishop, R.E.D. Vibration. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.
1979
Rao. S.S. Mechanical Vibrations. 2nd edn. Readina. Mass.: Addison
w&ileY,- 1990
Steidel, R.F. An lntroduction to Mechanical Vibration. 3rd edn, New
York: Wiley, 1989 (particularly for tutorial examples)
MM341 Mechanics and Machine Systems
Six hours per week for one semester
This subject consists of three parts:
MM341a Mechanics of Materials
Two hours per week for one semester
A course that concentrates on structural analysis, buckling instability
and complex bending.
Beam deflections. Review of elastic curve equation for flexural loading,
and beam deflect~on Deflect~on of statically determinate beams by
lnteoration. d~scontinu~tv functions and superposition methods.
~efhtion 'and reactiois in statically indeterminate beams by
discontinuity functions and superposition methods. Plane structures.
Deflection and forces in plane structures by strain energy and moment
distribution methods or slope deflection equations. Buckling and
lnstablllty Short, lntermed~ate and long columns, wlth and wlthoul
eccentric load~na buckllna of clrcular rlnas and tubes Tors~on and
shear in thin walred open sections in unsyrknetrical bending and the
shear centre.
References
Benham. P.P. and Crawford, R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
Harlow: Longmans Scientific and Technical. 1988
Hsieh, W. Elementary Theory of Structures. 3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1988
Fenner, RT. Mechanics of Solids. London: Blackwell, 1989
-
method. Matrix representation of the equations of motion; mass, stiffness
and damp~ng matrices. Real and complex elgen values and eigen
vectors. Examples of linear and tors~onal systems. Harmon~c forcing.
References
Rao, S.S. Mechanical Vibrations. 2nd edn, Reading. Mass.: Addison
Wesley, 1990
Steidel, R.F. An lntroduction to Mechanical Vibration. 3rd edn, New
York: Wiley, 1989 (particularly for tutorial examples)
Thomson, WT. Theory of Vibrations. 3rd edn, London: Unwin Hyman,
1988
MM341c Control Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
An introduction to the application of classical methods for the analysis
of the dynamic performance of linear systems.
lntroduction to closed-loop control. Definitions, terminology and
examples. Mathematical modelling of physical systems. Review of
complex variables and functions. Transfer functions. Linearisation.
Block diagrams of closed-loop systems. Block diagram algebra.
Manipulation and derivation of transfer functions for open and closedloop
linear systems. Transient analysis. Revision and application of
the Laplace transform. The inverse transform and the time solution
of linear models. Response of first and second order systems to a unit
impulse and unit step inputs. Response improvement of second order
systems by velocity feedback (proport~onal plus der~vat~ve control).
Stab~litv analvsis. Routh's stabilitv crlterlon for hear control svstems.
~requency response analysis. steady state solution to siiusoidal
inputs and the frequency response function G (jw). Real and imaginary
components; magnitude and phase.
Representation on logarithmic plots - Bode diagrams. Basic factors,
plotting procedure, applications to the analysis of the performance of
linear control systems.
References
Dransfield, P. Systems and Control. Part 1 and 2, Monash University,
1988
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall
International, 1970
Palm, W.J. (Ill) Control Systems Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1986
MM350 Design for Production
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination, assignments and project
work
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Design of Tools for Metalworking: Cutting Tools, High Removal Tools,
Single points, Multipoint and special form tools design.
Design of Diesets for Sheetmetal Work: Blanking, bending, deep
drawing diesets design.
Dies and Fixtures Design: Lolating, clamping and other elements
design. Dimensional analysis: calculation of locating errors.
Kinematics of Non Uniform Motion: Theory and practice - Design
of Cams and Cam followers, Linkages Design.
Automation of Production: Logic Circuits. Pneumatic circuits and
electropneumatic circuits design. Circuits design with P.L.C.S.,
Hydraulics, lntroduction to Robotics.
Major Project: Automation of Manual Tasks. 13 weeks' duration.
Textbook
Shigley, J.E. Mechanical Engineering Design. 1st Metric edn, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1986
References
MM341b Mechanics of Machines
American Society for Metals. Metals Handbook, Vol. 1. Properties and
Two hours per week for one semester
Selection of Metals. Vol. 4, Forming 9th edn, Metals Park, Ohio. The
A basic course in vibrations covering the response of 1, 2 and multi 1978
degree of freedom discrete linear systems (with and without damping) American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (AgME), Tool
to free, transient and steady state harmonic forcing. Engineers Handbook. 3rd edn, New York': McGraw Hill, 1976
American of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASME).
Single DOF systems. Free vibration of single DOF system with linear
Manufacturing Planning and Estimating Handbook. New York: McGraw
viscous
Forced vibrations of single degree of freedom. Hill. 1963
Harmonic excitation - of the mass - of the base. Resonance and
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME),
the effect of damping. Handbook of Fixture Desian. New York. McGraw Hill. 1962
Transmissibil~ty and Dyamic magnlf~cat~on Examples of vibrat~on
sola at ion. Harmonic forc~na. -. Fourier series representation and superposition.
Transient response to impulsive and step inputs, arbitrary
excitation by Duhamel's integral. DOF Systems. Natural frequencies
and mode shapes. Examples - spring coupled systems - mass
coupled systems. Forced harmonic response of systems with damping.
Multi-degree of freedom systems. Equations of motion; system modelling
with examples by Newton's Law, work and energy, and Lagrange's

MM351 Design for Industry
Four hours per week for one semester
A third year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
This subject is designed to develop students in design aspects of
common industrial systems and to consolidate their first industrial
experience into the design process.
Assessment will be by projects and assignments on these topics:
Design process: Advanced aspects of decision-making strategies
within Australian industry. Further consideration of techniques applicable
to divergent idea generation and convergent solution selection
nrncmses r. -------.
Mechanical transmission systems: Hierarchy of useful mechanical
power transmission systems for fixed and variable speed ratios. Design
of spur and helical gear systems. Force analysis and stresses under
dynamic loading conditions. Losses and heat dissipation.
Consideration of fatigue strength and surface durability. Practical
design aspects for shafts, bearings, pinions, wheels and housings.
Machine bases and foundations.
Fluid power systems: Design characteristics of hydraulic and
pneumatic systems. Symbols for circuit components and functions.
Linear actuators, pumps and motors. Control valving for pressure,
directional and flow control. Open loop system analysis, including frictional
losses. Pressure and flow variations during fluid system cycles.
Pressure vessel design: lntroduction to AS1210 Unfired Pressure
Vessels. Design aspects of available materials, vessel features,
cylindrical shells, dished ends and quick-actuation closures. Inspection
openings and bolted connections with gaskets. Computations for
Dressure vessels and submission to local regulatory authorities.
References
- - -
Shialev. J.E. Mechanical Enaineerina Desian: Metric Edition. New York:
MC~~~W-H~II, 1986
Rohner, i? Industrial Hydraulic Control. 3rd edn, Melbourne: A.E. Press,
1988
SAA HB6-1989. Design Standards for Mech. Eng. Students. Nth.
Sydney: Standards Assoc. of Australia, 1988
Dieter, G.E. Engineering Design - First Metric Edition. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1986
MM360 Ergonomics
Three hours per week for one semester
A third year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
This subject is a continuation of MM260 and expands on the material
introduced in the second year subject.
Ergonomics systems concepts. ergonomic systems modelling.
Faculty of Engineering
MM380 Productivity Improvement
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: final examination and assignments
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Productivity: definition, social and economic implications, waste
reduction attitudes.
Work study: Method study, time measurement, (stopwatch,
predetermined methods, work sampling).
Value analysis and engineering.
Ergonomics: Basic ideas related to method study.
Japanese Manufacturing Techniques.
Laboratory exercises will be conducted on relevant issues
References
Imai, Musaaki, Kaizen. The Key to Japan's Competitive Success. New
York: McGraw Hill, 1986
ILO lntroduction to Work Study. 3rd rev. edn, I.L.O.. 1986
Barnes, R. Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work.
6th edn, N.Y.: Wiley, 1968
Appropriate paperslreferences from journals will be given in class.
Class discussions will be supported by videos, etc.
MM381 Managerial Economics
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: assignments and examinations
A third year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Economics and Finance
Topics will be drawn from:
- supply and demand, elasticity, pure competition, monopoly and
oligopoly
- macro economics of cost, profit marginal concepts
- source of finance and cost of capital
- macro-economic fundamentals
- banking system and credit
- national accounts, GDP, government controls
- productivity and international comparisons
- markets, resource allocation
- demand analysis, forecasting
- economic indicators
Accounting
- introduction to accounting
- financial accounting and annual reports, financial ratios
- management accounting, budgeting, standard costing, historical
costing, marginal costing.
An accountinglfinance package will be used in teaching the accounting
section.
aooroaches to oroblem analvsis and desian svnthesis. Human bodv:
Knctional anaiomy: humanskeletal and-muscular system of hand-
T ~ ~ ~ , , ~ ~ ~
arm-shoulder and spinal structures; structure of eye, vision
characteristics and limitations; structure of ear, hearing characteristics E.J. Management Economics. 3rd edn2 Prentice-Hall
and limitations, influence of noise. Biomechanics of work tasks:
International9
aoolication to liftina. oullina. oushina tasks. Enaineerina and References
ps$chology: quantifEatlon 07' human -information brocesshg to Louderback, J.G. Cost Accounting. 2nd edn, Boston, Mass.: Kent
perception, cognition and motor tasks. Vigilance and attention: signal Publishing Company, 1986
detection theory, reaction time, decision making; strategies, concepts Thompson, A.A. Jnr. Economics of the Firm. 4th edn, Englewood Cliffs,
of utilitv. subiective orobabilitv and expected values. Phvsical N.J.: Prentice-Hall International. 1985
environmental. factors. Thermal stress:' measurement lndlces,
alleviation and control technlaues. Illumination: or~ncloles related to MM414 Stagewise Processes
human operators, physical' relationships, definitions, spectral
characteristics and measurement of variables, introduction to
5 hours per week for one semester
standards and codes. Noise: ~hvsical auantities and definitions.
Assessment: examinations and practical work
spectral characteristics and rneasu~ements,'effect on human operators
threshold limits. introduction to standards reaulations and codes of
practlce V~brat~on physical sources and ejiects on human body
structures, measurement techniques, lntroductlon to standards and
codes of practice. Human-Environment-Workplace Interface. dlsplays
and control comoatabilitv. deslan of ooerator interface. Worksoace and
systems evaluatbn, assessmeit mettiods for working environment and
task demands. Workspace design, modelling and synthesis
techniques. Work organisation: application of skills and task analysis
to job design, worker stress, motivation theories, effects of job type
on worker performance, shiftwork.
References
Chaffin, D. and Andersson. Occupational Biomechanics. New York:
Wilev. 1984
Kant6witz and Sorkin. Human Factors: Understanding People -
System Relationships. New York: Wiley, 1983
Sanders, M.S. and McCormack, E.J. Human Factors in Engineering
and Design. 6th edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987
Wickens, C.D. Engineering Psychology and Human Performance.
Columbus: Menill. 1984
A fourth year S U ~ J ~ in C the ~ degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Applications of mass transfer operations such as distillation, gas
absorption, liquid-liquid extraction and leaching, in chemical
manufacturing; descriptions of the equipment in which these
operations are carried out.
Behaviour of plate and packed columns; characteristics of packings;
bubble cap and sieve trays, weirs and downcomers; flooding, holdup
and pressure drop; selection of optimum column diameter.
The concept of the equilibrium stage as applied to distillation, liquidliquid
extraction, leaching and other mass transfer operations.
Graphical and computer-based design techniques employing this
concept: McCable-Thiele, Sorel, and Ponchon-Savarit methods; batch
and continuous operation.
Textbook ~.-~-~.
- - ~
Treybal, R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, (SI Units), New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1983
Reference
Ludwig, E.E. Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petroleum
Plants. Second edn, Gulf Pub. Co., 1979

MM415 Mass Transfer
4 hours per week for one semester
Assessment: examinations, laboratory work,
assignments
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Mass transfer theory: Fick's law of diffusion; steady state diffusion in
single-phase systems; multicornponent and transient diffusion;
determination of diffusion coefficients.
Convective mass transfer; mass transfer coefficients; interphase mass
transfer. Theory and design of continuous differential contactors; mass
transfer with chemical reaction; mass, head and momentum transfer
analogies.
Textbook
Treybal, R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, (SI Units), New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1983
Reference
Perry, R.H. and Green, D. Perry's Chemical Engineering Handbook.
6th edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984
MM420 Energy Systems
Four hours per week
A fourth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
There are two parts:
Thermodynamics - Two hours per week for one semester.
Fluid mechanics - Two hours per week for one semester.
Thermodynamics: Radiation. Interchange and geometric factors,
network analysis for multi-surface interchanges. Reciprocating I.C.
engines; normal and abnormal combustion in S.I. and C.I. enaines,
fua octane and cetane ratlngs, knock and detonat~on, Carburkors
and fuel lnlectlon Tubo exoanders Dearee of reaction. oressure and
velocity cdmpounding. stage efficiencfin terms of blade speed ratio,
losses External charicterlstlcs of turbines, swallowing capaclty as a
funct~on of suoolv temoerature and pressure lsentroo~c efflctencv
Turbo compr&sdrs. pressure ratio as a function of' speed. low
instability in radial and axial compressors.
Fluid Mechanics: Rotodynamic machinery; internal characteristics,
moment of momentum equation, introduction to flow through vane
cascades, cavitation, significance of net positive suction head and fan
total static pressure system matching and analysis. Fluid drag,
boundary layers and wakes. Flow about submerged bodies; pressure
drag; boundary layer theory; Navier-stokes equalion, momentum and
thermal boundary layer equations, effect of transillon, separation and
streamwise pressure gradient; skin friction; wake flows. Compressible
Flow: revision of thermodvnamics conceots. enerav eauation with
variable density, gas and iapour flow through nozzEs ad
diffusers,
critical pressure ratio, chocked flow, metastable flow, normal shock
waves.
References
Rogers, G.F.C. and Mayhew, Y.R. Engineering Thermodynamics. 3rd
edn, London: Longmans, 1980
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfel SI Metric edn, McGraw-Hill. 1989
Douglas, J.F., Gasiorek, J.M. and Swaffield, J.A. Fluid Mechanics. 2nd
edn, London: Longman Scientific and Technical, 1985
Schlichting, H. Boundary-Layer Theory 7th edn, New York: McGraw
Hill, 1979
MM440 Mechanics and Machine Svstems
MM440b Vibration and Noise Control
Two hours per week for one semester
This subject provides basic understanding of acoustic measurements
and noise control techniques; and extends the earlier study of
vibrations to engineering applications.
Topics covered include:
Continuous and branched systems. Vibration measurement. Balancing
of solid rotors -field balancing. Sound measurement and analysis.
Noise control.
References
Buley, M.D. Course Notes on lndustrial Noise Control
Irwin, J.D. and Graf, E.R. lndustrial Noise and Vibration Control.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1979
Thomson. WT. Theoryof Vibrations. 3rd edn, London: Unwin Hyman,
1988
MM440c Control Engineering
One and a half hours per week
This subject provides experience in the analysis and design of control
systems by classical and state-space methods.
TOD~CS covered include:
Transient response and the root locus method; Root loci and constant
aain loci: Construction of root loci: Aoolication of the root locus method
6 the analysis of the transient pe&ormance of closed lwp systems.
Frequency response analysis; Polar plots; Nyquist stability criterion.
Modern control and state space techniques; State variable, state vector,
state space and the representation; of multiple input/multiple output
systems; Solution of the time-invariant state equation.
References
Dransfield, P Systems and Control. Part 1 and 2, Monash University,
1988
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall
International, 1970
Palm, W.J. (Ill) Control Systems Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1986
MM441 Control Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment and examination
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: An introduction to classical methods of analysis for linear control
systems.
Introduction to closed-looo control: Definitions. terminoloav and
examples. Mathematical modelling of physicalsystems: Gnsfer
functions. linearisation. block diaarams of closed-loor, svstems.
Transient analysis: the inverse transf&m and the time soluion6f linear
models, response of first and second order systems to a unit impulse
and unit step inputs. Stability analysis: Routh's stability criterion for
linear control systems. Frequency response analysis: steady state
solution to sinusoidal inputs and the frequency response function G
ow), representation on logarithmic plots - Bode diagrams, nyquist
stability criterion.
Textbooks
Dransfield, P. Systems and Control. Part 1 and 2, Monash University,
1988
Ross. G. Computer Programming Examples for Chemical Enginee~.
Amsterdam: Elsevier, 1987
Five hours per week for one semester
References
Ogata. K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
A fourth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering. prentice-~all, 1970
This subject comprises three parts:
Palm, W.J. Modeling Analysis and Control of Dynamic Systems. New
MM440a Mechanics of Materials
York: Wiley, 1983
Stephanopoulos, G. Chemical Process Control. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
One and a half hours oer week Prentice Hall, 1984
This subject provides experience and understanding of experimental
~ ~ 4 ~~~i~~ 5 0 for ~ ~ ~ ~
methods of stress analysis and extends the student's ability to apply
basic . orincioles . to more complex . . problems in strenath of materials.
Four hours per week for one semester
Topics covered include:
Thin plates and shells. Deformations Symmetrical about an Axis.
Experimental Stress Analysis - applications of techniques to design.
References
Alexander, J.M. Strength of Materials. Chichester: Ellis Horwood Series
in Engineering Science, 1981
Benham, P.P. and Crawford, R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
London: Longman Scientific & Technical, 1987
Dally and Riley. Experimental Stress Analysis. International Student
edn, Japan: McGraw-Hill Kogakusha Ltd., 1978
Assessment: Assignments, project work and examination
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: The subject as the second part of design for manufacture aims
to Prepare students with further knowledge of design of tooling,
machinery and systems for quality production.
Tooling design for metal working: economy and batch quantity,
relationship. Tool design for: cold and hot forging, and diecasting.

,
Quality and reliability: concept of quality, cost of quality. Responsibility
for quality. Statistical quality control, charting by variables and
attributes and sampling. Reliability - principles and applications.
Computer Aided Design: CAD Systems, processing and techniques.
NC programming, kinematics and robotics.
References
American Society for Metals, Metals Handbook, Vol. 1. Properties and
Selection of Metals. Vol. 4, forming 8th edn, Metals Park, Ohio, The
Society, 1961 and 1969
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME). Tool
Engineers Handbook. 2nd edn. New York: McGraw Hill, 1959
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME).
Manufacturing Planning and Estimating Handbook. New York: McGraw
Hill, 1963
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME). Die
Design Handbook. 2nd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1965
Thomas, L.F. The Control of Qualify London: Thames and Hudson,
1965
Donaldson, C. etal. Tool Design. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1973
MM451 Design for Industry
Four hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
This subject is designed to develop students in design aspects of
advanced industrial systems and to provide competence in project
engineering work ready for their second industrial placement.
Assessment will be by projects and assignments on these topics:
Design analysis of thermefluid systems: Design characteristics of fluid
flow equipment. Pumps and fans, compressors and turbines. Vessels,
valves, piping and flanges. Heat exchanger design options,
configurations and insulation.
System flow sheeting.
Design analysis of control systems: Design classification of feedback
control systems. Design procedures, trade-off between accuracy and
stability. Component modelling and sizing for system design. Design
analysis of proportional, integral and derivative control systems. Phase
compensation.
Design optimisation: Modelling and simulation of engineering systems.
Design optimisation techniques and local applications. Risk analysis
and design for mechanical reliability, Failure analysis, quality control
and product liability. Cost models and evaluation, product pricing and
life cycle costing. Integration of design and ergonomic factors in major
engineering projects.
References
Dieter, G.E. Engineering Design - First Metric Edition. New York:
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1986
Shigley, J.E. Mechanical Engineering Design: Metric Edition. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1986
Rohner, P. Industrial Hydraulic Control. Melbourne: A.E. Press, 1984
SAA HB6-1988 Design Standards for Mech. Eng. Students. Nth.
Sydney: Standards Assoc. of Australia, 1988
MM460 Ergonomics
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and laboratory
A fourth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
At the completion of this subject students should be able to
demonstrate competence in ergonomic assessment of workplaces.
The major assignment for this subject will take the form of an
ergonomic design of a workplace.
Ergonomics Systems Concepts: application of modelling processes
to design solutions and problem analysis.
Human body. Kinesiology: lower body elements, locomotion and gait
cycle in walking, running and jogging. Engineering psychology:
memory modelling, mental loading, application to task design, attitude
survey design and administration, assessment of physical quantities
using psychophysics methodology.
Physical Environmental Factors. Illumination: design criteria,
application of lightng standards and codes to various workplace
situations. Noise: application of standards, codes and regulations,
hearing conservation processes and programs. Acceleration: sources
and effects on human body elements, impact loading effects,
alleviation of dynamic loading.
Human-Environment-Workplace Interface. Workplace requirements for
screen based equipment, hand tools, work benches and desks.
seating. Strain injury analysis: application to manual material handling.
sl~pping, tripping and falling incidents, design criteria, relevant
standards. Occupational overuse injury: types, origins, task design
criteria, control measures.
Faculty of Engineering
Occupational Health and Safety Issues. Occurrence analysis:
~ntroduct~on to acc~dent causation philosophy, energy damage model,
qeneral~sed tlme sequence model. Rowe's r~sk estlmatlon model.
application of the models to accident investigations. Safety: health and
safety program design, H. and S. management principles, injury claims
management.
References
Sanders, M.S. and McCormick, E.J. Human Factors in Engineeringand
Design. 6th edn, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987
Department of Labour. Manual Handling: Regulations and Code of
Practice. Melbourne: Dept. of Labour, 1988
Occupational Health & Safety Act. 1985
Accident Compensation Act. 1985
MM470 Computer Interfacing and
Microprocessors
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Project work and examination
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: To provide students with a sound introduction to basic computer
architecture, interfacing and networking principles as they relate to
advanced manufacturing technology.
Boolean algebra, number systems, Karnaugh maps, sequential state
machines and microprocessor architecture. Memory technology and
mapping (addressing). Computer bus structures. Microprocessor
programming levels (assembly and machine code), basic operating
systems and compilers. Computer interfacing techniques, isolation and
buffering devices. PLC's for data acquisition and buffering. Computing
interfacing through serial and parallel communications. IEEE488,
RS232 links and programming ACKlNAK protocols. lntroduction to
networking topologies, OSI network model and common networking
protocols (Ethernet, MAPTTOP).
References
Smith, R.J. Circuits, Devices andsystems. 4th edn, New York: Wiley,
1984
Cripps, M. Computer Interfacing - Connection to the Real World.
Edward Arnold
Cambell, J. The RS232 Solution. Berkeley: Sybex Books. 1984
Gofton, W. Mastering Serial Communications. Berkeley: Sybex, 1986
Halsall, F. Data Communication, Computer Networks and OSI 2nd edn,
Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1988
MM471 Numerical Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Tutorial assignments and examination
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: To develop an understanding of the mathematics of Finite
Element Analysis and the application of FEA to Engineering problems.
lnterpolat~on of data Lagrange polynom~al Inner products and
orthoqonallty P~ecewlse hear and auadratlc Laaranae ~nteroolat~on
~ethod of weighted residuals for ordinary differentiajequations with
homogeneous and non-homogeneous boundary conditions. L~near
and cubic Hermite basis functions, applications including beam
problems. Method of weighted residuals for partial differential
equations Types of elem&nts, triangular. 8-node element, three
d~mens~on brlck elements. dearee of freedom. oDtlm~sat~on Modelllno
technique; two dimension,three dimension, boundary condition, mes6
generation, beam plate and brick elements. Axisyrnmetric analysis.
lntroduction to STRAND 6; zone - based mesh aeneration. linear
analysls, dynam~c analysls, load and reactlon recovery Examples and
asslanments on flnlte element analvsis. , , uslno - a mlcrocomouter based
~~ - - - - ~
finite element program.
Textbooks
STRAND 6 Manual, G + D Computing, Sydney, 1991
Burnett, D. Finite Element Analysis. Reading, Mass.: Addison Wesley,
1987
printer, P.M. Splines and Variational Methods. 3rd edn, N.Y.: Wiley,
1989
References
STRAND 6 Manual, G + D Computing, Sydney, 1991
Cool. R.D. Concepts and Applications for Finite Element Analysis. 3rd
edn, NY: Wiley, 1989
Logan. D.L. A First Course in the Finite Element Method. Boston: PWS-
Kent, 1985

MM472 Manufacturing Technology
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and tests
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Mathematical analysis of forming: equilibrium analysis of common
working processes, e.g. wire drawinglstrip drawinglextrusionltube
drawinglforging. Redundant work, friction and lubrication.
Deformation mechanics: slip line field applied to forming problems -
metal flow.
Polymeric materials - blow moulding - parison production including
parlson programming Closlng, blowlng and electlon Coollng systems
lncludlnq economlc analysls of speclallsed coollna Stretch blowlna
moulding - effects on the materials and produck and production
economics in particular. Injection moulding. lntroduction to moldflow.
Rubber compounding and vulcanisation.
Vibration and noise: revision of theory of vibration for multi-degree of
freedom systems including viscous and hysteretic damping. Vibration
isolation, transmission and measurement. Equivalent systems. Chatter
and stability. Sound transmission, power, intensity sound absorption.
Insulation, resonance, noise rating. Noise control and measurement.
Textbooks
Crawford, R.J. Plastics Engineering. 2nd edn, Oxford: Pergamon Press,
I On7 ."",
Roe. G. Elements of Metalworking Theory. London: Edward Arnold,
1979
MM480 Facilities Planning and Design
Three hours per week for one semester
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: To introduce methods of analysis and planning of facilities layout
considering products, processes, effective material handling facilities,
etc. Relevant quantitative tecniques such as queueing theory, location
models, will be introduced where they are needed for design of
facilities.
Significance and objectives and strategies in facilities design. Product
development: Market research, forecasting, design. Process
development/planning. Capacity planning: schedules, machines,
manpower tools. Material handling requirements; principles, selection.
desian. Storaae and warehousing. Spacing and activity relationship.
~a~cut deslfn, convent~onal aind computer a~ded approaches
Analvtlcal models used aueuelna, - locat~on models Facllltv . deslan - for
JIT; . . . WCM.
Textbook
Tompkins, J. Facilities Planning. New York: Wiley, 1984
References
Sule, D.R. Manufacturing Facilities. Boston, Mass.: PWS-Kent, 1988
White, J.A. Facilities Layout and Location. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice Hall, 1974
Probabilistic Optimisation Spreadsheets. Alwington Press, 1988
Relevant articles and papers from journals.
MM481 Decision Analysis
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Project, assignment and examination
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: The aim of this subject is to introduce the decision making
methodology and techniques available. To emphasise the need for
formal approaches and the gain of structured, formal decisions. To
examine several areas in manufacturing environments where crucial
decisions benefit from the use of these methods.
lntroduction to the DM methodology is followed by details of
techniques. Single criteria decisions: Cost considefation in decisions
(cash flow). Effect of uncertainty, meaning of probability, encoding
probability distributions. Tree structure of problems (a computer
package will be used). Decisionloutcomes under uncertainty. Risk
attitudes, utility functions. Approaching real world problems, a cyclical
approach, strategy tables, influence diagrams. Sensitivity analysis.
Obtaining information from tree analysis. Value of information control.
Presentation of decision results. Multi criteria decisions: Traditional
approaches such as Delphic technique reviewed. The analytical
hierarchy process, methodology, modelling. Structuring the problem,
judgements. Group decisions with AHP, other methods. Sensivitity
analysis and presentation of results. Use of a computer package to
experiment with AHP
References
McNamee, P. Decision Analysis for the Professionals with Supertree.
Redwood City, Calif.: The Scientific Press, 1987
Holtzman, S. Intelligent Decision Systems. Addison Wesley, 1989
Petersen, E.R. PROPS: Probabilistic Optimization System. Computer
File. Kingston, Ont.: Alwington Press, 1988
Additional references will be given in class.
MM482 Manufacturing Operations
Management
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, project and exam
A fourth year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Aim: The aim is to achieve a thorough understanding of all functions
and their relationships in a manufacturing system, how it is planned,
operated and controlled.
Structure of a manufacturing system via models such as SADT, CAM,
IDEF functions and management of an enterprise (productionlservice);
manufacturing function; development function-production function;
support function; data processing; technoloy and manufacturing FMS,
CADICAM . . .); scheduling techniques at shop floor level; inventory
control policies and models; MRP. MRPII, methodology; introduction
to a computer implemented MRPII, hands on experience; requirements
for successful MRP implementations.
References
Harrington, J. Jnr. Understanding the Manufacturing Process - Key
to Successful CAD/CAM Implementation. New York: M. Dekker, 1984
Wight, 0. Manufacturing Resource Planning, MRP 11: Unlocking
America's Productivity Potential. rev. edn, Essex Junction, UT Oliver
Wight, 1984
Wiaht. 0. The Executive's Guide to Successful MRP 11. Williston. UT
0. bight Ltd., 1982
Callerman, T.E. and Heyl, J.E. A Model for Material Requirements
Plannina. IN: International Journal of Operations and Production
~anaggment. Vol. 6 No. 5, 1986
MM483 Engineering Management
Four hours per week for one semester
Thls subject prov~des both an ~ntroduct~on to fundamental of flnanclal
and commerccal enalneerlna manaaement and cons~derat~on of
organisational environment dfects ot engineering outcomes. Such
studies are to be reinforced by students being required to report on
management and organisational aspects related to their work
experience.
Topics covered Include:
Commercial management; Financial Management; People
Management; Project Management.
Textbook
Meredith, J.R. and Mantel, S.J. Project Management, A Managerial
Approach. 2nd edn
Plus supporting references
MM501 Engineering Project
One hundred and thirty seven hours over eighteen weeks
Assessment: Student seminar, technical report and
performance assessment
A fifth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Aim:
1. To allow students to integrate the knowledge and skills they have
gained throughout the course into a targeted engineering
investigation with the aim of producing a report and, if appropriate,
usable equipment.
2. To develop individual initiative in pursuing an engineering
objective.
3. To plan and manage, in conjunction with a staff member, the
progress of an engineering project.
Topics are selected by students from a list prepared by academic staff
or students may suggest their own topic based on an individual's
interest or industrial experience. Projects may be college based or
industry based. The project may take various forms in which
technology, research and development, experimental work, computer
analysis, industry liaison and business acumen vary in relative
significance.

MM509 Engineering Mathematics
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Tutorial assignments, practical work and
examination
A fifth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Aim: To round off the student's knowledge of mathematical methods
required by practicing engineers and to place these methods into
perspective through a study of different mathematics structures used
in the mathematical modelling of engineering systems.
Section A: Mathematical Methods
Numerical Analysis
Classification of partial differential equations. Numerical appoximation
of derivatives - forward, backward and central. Approximate solution
of parabolic equations - heat equation. Euler Method (FTCS),
symmetry, Richardson's Method (CTCS). Crank-Nicolson Method
(CTCS). Stability. Expllclt and implicit. Solution by direct methods and
iterative methods. Derivative boundary conditions. Convergence,
stability and consistency. Perturbation and von Neumann stability
analysis. Convection equation, upwind differencing, Courant-
Friedrichs-Lewy condition. Other methods: Dufort-Frankel, Keller Box.
2D heat equation and the AD1 method. Approximate solution of
hyperbolic equations - wave equation.
Elliptic boundary value problems: Finite difference solution of Laplace
and Poisson equations using the five point formula. Block tri-diagonal
matrices. Existence of optimal relaxation factor.
Parabolic problems: Finite difference schemes for linear equations in
2 and 3 dimensions with applications. Consistency, convergence and
stability. Lax's theorem. Non-linear source terms.
Complex Variable
Differentiation and the Cauchy-Reimann equations. Conformal
mapping. Applications.
References
Smith, G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations. 3rd edn,
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985
Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables. S.I. (metric)
2nd edn. NY: McGraw Hill, 1974
Section B: Mathematical Modelling
The objective of this section of the subject is to develop the students'
perspective in applying the diverse mathematical tools and techniques
that they have learned in their course to real engineering problems.
The focus is on the understanding of the optimum use of analytic
methods rather than on the techniques of numerical modelling
elsewhere.
Introductory lectures will include an overview of mathematical tools
and techniques and their use in mathematically modelling an
engineering problem. The emphasis will be on understanding the
advantages and disadvantages of different mathematical structures
in the solution of engineering problems. For example: Which is the
"best" mathematical structure for describing the kinematics and
dynamics of robot motion? (Robot motion has been modelled in the
literature by at least 10 different mathematical systems.)
In the main part of the section students will be assigned a set of
engineering problems, each of which may be solved by using a variety
of mathematical methods. The objective IS for students to survey the
collection of mathematical tools they have accumulated and learnt to
use over their course, to determine if there is a "best" solution method,
to compare the method with those methods applied by other students,
and to aeneralise their findinas to helo auide future modellina activities.
~tudezs will give a ~eminar-~resen~a$on of their comparacve results.
References
Brind. L. Vector and Tensor Analysis. Wiley. 1947
Crow, M.J. A Histov of Vector Analysis. Repr. edn, Dover, 1985
Milne, E.A. Vectorial Mechanics. Interscience, 1948
Paul, R.f? Robot Manipulators - Mathematics, Programming and
Control. Cambridge, Mass.: M.I.T., 1981
MM520 Engineering Sience
Four hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fifth year of the degree course in mechanical
engineering. Three 26 hour units are offered: Thermolfluid mechanics,
energy systems and energy modelling. Students must take two of the
three alternatives offered.
Faculty of Engineering
MM520A ThermoiFluid Mechanics
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures,
tutorial and laboratory work
Assessment: Laboratory, assignment and examination
Aim: To provide students with an opportunity to peruse a number of
applied thermolfluid areas in depth.
The svllabus includes three topics selected from: Turbulence theorv:
~~uafions of contlnulty and mollon for turbulent mean flow, methods
of solut~on Flow of an Ideal flu~d Clrculat~on. vortlcltv stream funct~on
velocity potential and flow nets, basic flow patterns and combinations
of same; aerofoil theory. Low Reynolds number flows: Steady laminar
flow in pipes and between parallel plates; measurement of viscosity;
fundamentals of the theory of hydrodynamic lubrication. Two-phase
flows: Slurries and particlelcarrier gas flows. Supersonic flow: Oblique
shock waves, subsonic and supersonic combustion ramjets,
supersonic inakes.
Textbooks
Douglas. J.F., Gasiorek, J.M. and Swaffield, J.A. FluidMechanics. 2nd
edn. London: Pitman, 1985
Tennekes, H. and Lumley, J.L. A First Course in Turbulence. Mass.:
MIT Harlow: Longman, 1972
Reynolds, A. Turbulent Flows in Engineering. London: Wiley, 1974
Milne-Thom~son. L.M. Theoretical Hvdrodvnamics. ,
5th edn. London:
MacMillan, i972 '
Cameron. A. Basic Lubrication Theory. 3rd edn, Chichester: Halstead
Press, 1981
MM520b Energy Systems
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures,
tutorial and laboratory work
Assessment: Laboratory, assignment and examination
Aim: To persue advanced areas in energy systems including available
energy, properties of steam-air mixtures and solar energy.
The subject deals with available energy. Exergy and energy of heat,
internal energy and enthalpy. Exergetic effectiveness of processes.
Properties of steam-air mixtures. The psychrometric chart. Heating,
cooling, humidifying and dehumidifying.
Solar radiation. Spectral energy distribution. The solar constant.
Atmospheric absorption and scattering. Use of solar tables. Non
concentrating collectors: materials, construction and thermal
properties thermal transfer processes associated with transient and
steady state operation with one topic selected from: Direct energy
conservation, heat transfer and thermonuclear engineering.
Textbooks
Rogers, G.F.C. and Mayhew, Y.R. Engineering Thermodynamics. 3rd
edn, London: Longmans, 1980
Watson, N. and Janota. M.S. Turbo-charging the Internal combustion
Engine. London: MacMillan, 1982
Wolf, H. Heat Transfe,: New York: Harper and Row. 1983
Todd. J.P. and Ellis, H.B. An lntroduction to Thermodynamics for
Engineering Technologists. New York: Wiley, 1981
Blackmore. D.R. and Thomas. A. Fuel Economy of the Gasoline Engine.
London: MacMillan, 1977
Beghi. G. Performance of Solar Energy Converters: Thermal Collectors
and Photovoltaic Cells. Dordrecht: Reidel, 1983
MM520c Energy Modelling
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures
and tutorials
Assessment: Reports
A fifth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Aim: This subject aims to introduce students to the applicat~on of
numerical methods to the solution of engineering problems. Students
will gain experience in applying finite difference and finite element
techniques to selected problems in thermolfluid mechanics where
alternative solutions are available from physical measurements or
analytical solutions.
Objectives will cover modelling accuracy, degree of difficulty,
computing time, economlc effectiveness in comparison with alternative
solutions and relative accuracy of experimental data.
The program includes: lntroduction to available numerical packages
for thermolfluid modelling. Demonstrate. Select an energy system
problem (heat transfer or boundary layer) amenable to solution by a
Runge-Kutta technique. Write a suitable numerical model, code and
compare to alternative solution. Select an energy system problem
suitable for solution with one of the standard packages (e.g. MSCIPAL,
NASTRAN, FIDAP. INFERNO). Write a report covering both tasks and
addressing the above objectives.
References l~sted overleaf

References
Fletcher, C.A.J. Computational Techniques for Fluid Dynamics, Vols.
1 & 2. Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 1988
Anderson. W.J. MSC NASTRAN - Interactive Training Programme.
New York: Wiley, 1983
MacKenzie, H.J. and Perry, J.H. 'The Numerical Modelling of the
Interaction of Burner Jets in Brown Coal Fired Boilers'. Final Report
NERDDP project No. 8515002. Swinburne Mechanical Engineering
Report ME188102. (1988)
MM540 Mechanics and Machine System
Assessment: Assignment, laboratory and computer
simulation
A subject in the fifth year of the degree course in mechanical
engineering. Four 26 hour units are offered: Mechanics of materials,
vibration and modal analysis, control engineering and machine
systems and simulation. Students must take two of the four alternatives
offered.
Aim: The subjects within this group aim to present more advanced
topics in both the theoretical and applied aspects of the area of study.
MM540a Mechanics of Solids
Two hours per week for one semester
The syllabus covers advanced topics in the analysis and design of
machine components and structures.
Variation of 3D stresslstrain, tensor and matrix notation, eigen valves,
eigen vectors; static and dynamic analysis. Non-linear analysis:
plasticity, creep, fracture, thermal effects. Numerical methods: finite
element methods, formulation and problem solution. Computer
solutions and packages. Finite difference techniques in solid
mechanics.
Textbooks
Timoshenko, S. and Goodier, J.N. Theory of Elasticity 3rd edn, New
York: McGraw Hill, 1970
Logan, D. A First Course in Finite Element Method. Boston: PWS Kent,
1985
References
Benham, PF? and Crawford, R.J. Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
Harlow: Longman Scientific & Technical, 1987
Brown, J. Introductory Solid Mechanics. London: Wiley, 1973
Reddy, N.Y. An lntroduction to the Finite Element Method. New York:
McGraw Hill, 1984
MM540b Vibration and Modal Analysis
Two hours per week for one semester
The syllabus includes advanced topics in the theoretical and
experimental analysis of vibration in machines and structures.
Random vibration; statistical modelling analysis and measurement.
Spectral analysis, analogue and digital methods, filtering, band width,
averaging time and error analysis. Response of linear systems to
random forcing. Modal analysis; experimental evaluation of modal
data, system identification and modification to meet design
specification. Finite element methods, applications packages.
References
Thomson, WT. Theory of Vibration With Applications. 3rd edn, London:
Unwin Hyman, 1988
Meirovitch, L. Elements of Vibration Analysis. New York: McGraw Hill,
1975
Newland, D.E. An lntroduction to Random Vibrations and Spectral
Analysis. 2nd edn, Harlow: Longmans, 1984
MM540c Control Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
The syllabus includes advanced topics in the analysis and design of
engineering control systems.
Topics will be offered from the following:
Design and compensation of control systems. Non-linear system
analysis by describing functions. Application of state-space methods.
Stochastic control processes. Optimal and adaptive control systems.
Textbook
Dransfield, F? Systems andcontrol, fart 1 12. Monash University, 1988
References
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall International, 1970
Palm, W.J. (Ill). Modeling Analysis and Control of Dynamic Systems.
New York: Wilev. 1983
Palm, W.J. (Ill). Eontrol Systems Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1986
MM540d Machine Systems and Simulation
Two hours per week for one semester
The syllabus includes advanced application in the analysis, synthesis
and design of machines and mechanisms.
Topics are selected from:
Synthesis of mechanisms and linkages. Mechanism simulation, single
and multi degree of freedom applications. Kinematics and kinetics of
spatial mechanisms, robotic manipulators. Lubrication and wear of
machines, rollers, bearings, gears and cams elasto-hydrodynamic
lubrication of heavily loaded surfaces. Computer simulation; analogue
and digital dynamic simulation of mechanisms, machines and
engineering systems.
References
Doughty, S. Mechanics of Machines. New York: Wiley, 1988
Mabie, H.H. and Reinholtz, C.F. Mechanisms and Dynamics of
Machinery. J. Wiley, 1988
Cameron, A. Basic Lubrication Theory 3rd edn, Chichester: Halstead.
1981
Dowson, D. and Higginson, G.R. Elasto-hydrodynamic Lubrications.
S.I. 2nd edn, Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1977
Paul, B. Kinematics and Dynamics of Planar Machinery Englewood
Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1979
Fu, K.S.. Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee, C.S.G. Robotics Control, Sensing,
Vision and Intelligence. New York: McGraw Hill, 1987
Groover, M.P., Weiss, M., Nagel, R.N. and Odrey, N.G. Industrial
Robotics: Technology, Programming and Applications. New York:
McGraw Hill, 1986
Engineering Technology
Six hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fifth year of the degree in mechanical engineering.
Five 26 hour units are offered: Engineering Ergonomics, Engineering
Technologies, Equipment Cycle and Occupational Risk. Students must
take three of the five alternatives.
MM551A Engineering Ergonomics
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures
and tutorials
Assessment: Assignments
Aim: To provide further studies in topic areas which will enrich the
student's knowledge and understanding of ergonomics and design.
Students are expected to research in depth one of the topic areas
discussed and to write a technical paper to a standard acceptable for
publication in one of the major professional periodicals.
The syllabus covers postural strain and overuse injuries; types, origins,
pathology, task design criteria, management strategies for risk control.
Overload injuries; types, origins, pathology, task design criteria,
management strategies for risk control. System design and developing
design strategies for socio-technical systems; physiological and socio
factors. Human-computer interaction: Input device characteristics:
screens, keyboards, mice, graphic tablets, balls, gloves, voice
recogniton, touch screens, new techniques. Output; screen displays.
voice synthesis, printers, character based screens versus high
resolution graphics. Computer control versus user control, causes of
user anxiety. Control techniques: windows, menus, buttons, command
keys.
References
Chaffin. D. B. and Anderson. G. Occu~ational Biomechanics.
~~
New
~
York: wiley, 1984
Lutjens, K. and Wells, K.F. Kinesiology: Scientific Basis of Human
Motion. 7th edn, Philadelphia, Sanders College Publishing, 1982
Adams, A.S. et al. Ergonomics International 88., London: Taylor and
Francis, 1989
MM551b Engineering Technologies
- -
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures,
workshop and excursions
Assessment: Assignments and project
Aim: To explore aspects of the design process critical to an industry
maintaining a competitive edge in a rapidly developing technological
society.
Topics will be selected from: Management of emerging technologies.
Strategic planning for future technology advances. Market innovation
and nichemanship. Planning for research and development effort.
Reliability and maintainability achievements. Risk assessment for
designs incorporating advanced aspects of technology. Development
information systems and configuration management. Special emerging
technologies.

Faculty of Engineering
Seminars will be conducted by industrial specialists.
Radiation: ionising and non-ionising, uses and applications, damage-
Site visits will be made to local industry.
risk criteria, control methods.
Biological hazards: Legionaire's diseae, zoonoses, AIDS, bacterial
References
Ang. A. and Tang, W. Probability Concepts in Engineering Planning
infection, principals and control.
and Design Vol. 11-Decision, Risk& Reliability: New York: Wiley, 1984 Engineering risk control for external energy sources, mobil~ty of
Rhodes. E. and Wield D. (Eds.). Implementing New Technologies. energy source and recipient, passive and active control, organisational
Oxford: Blakewell. 1985
requirements for control.
Engineering risk control for internal energy sources, principals or
MM551c Equipment Life Cycle
organisational and technical controls.
Application of event synthesis techniques; machines, processes.
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures,
workshops and project consultations
Application of event analysis technique to a class of events, application
of fault tree analysis, machines, processes capable of experiencing
Aim: To introduce students to engineering aspects of equipment life that class of events.
cycle from conception through definition, realisation, integration,
commissioning, life usage and ultimate decommissioningldisposal.
Machinery safeguarding design: legal principals and requirements,
design methodology.
The syllabus includes: Types of equipment; fixed and mobile
equipment acquisition and procurement cycle; major equipment
Isolation procedures and work permit systems; definitions, isolation
and work permit procedure components, factors influencing design,
acquisition, minor equipment acquisition, forecasts, budgets and
estimates, conception definition and realisation. Design research and
reliability of procedures.
development, FMECA and LSA, adaptive design and off-the-shelf Electrical safety: effects of electricity on the human body, MEN
deslgn optlons Equ~pmentra~llng, testlng and demonstrat~on, user electrical system, earth leakage circuitry breaker and applicat~ons,
reaulrements, enalneerlna reaulrements, rel~abllllv, ma~nta~nab~l~tv. EMR, spectral characteristics, effects on human body elements.
maintenance and logistic support requirements..triais, tests a&
demonstration plans and contracting for reliability.
Maintenance Strategy:
Types and approaches, preventive maintenance, condition monitoring,
on condition maintenance and breakdown maintenance. Maintenance
economics and ORTL.
Integration and Commissioning process:
Sysl&ms management and systems%fject~veness, the operational
system, the malntenance sub-svstem, the tralnlna and documentat~on
package, ISR and inventory siocking levels, a$ warrants period
Maintenance Ooerations:
Maintenance planr;ing and control, work planning, resource analysis
and allocation, plant inventories and records. Repair parts scaling and
spares assessments. Maintenance activities; repair and perf~r~ance
and condition monitoring, replace, diagnose, isolate, test, calibrate,
overhaul, rebuild, rectification, downtime and equipment availability.
Maintenance access and creation of maintenance windows. Measures
of maintenance effectiveness.
Configuration:
Configuration control and modification.
Decommissioning, disposal and system replacement
References
Byrt, W.J. and Masters, PR. The Australian Manage,: 2nd edn,
Melbourne: MacMillan, 1982
Corder, A.S. Maintenance Management Techniques. London: McGraw
. Hill . . , 107fi ,-. -
Cunningham, C.E. and Cox. W. Applied Maintainability Engineering.
NY: Wiley, Inter Science, 1972
Dhillon, B.S. and Reiche, H. Reliability and Maintainability
Management. NY: Van Nostrand Rhelnhold, 1985
Kelly, A. Maintenance Planning & Control. London: Butterworths, 1984
Moss, M.A. Designing for Minimal Maintenance Expense: The practical
application of Reliability and Maintainability N.Y.: M. Dekker, 1985
MM551d Occupational Risk
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures
and tutorials
Assessment: Assignments
Aim: To provide an exposure to topics in occupational hygiene and
associated risk engineering methods for those students interested in
Occupational Health and Safety issues.
Students are expected to research in depth one of the topic areas
discussed and to write a technical paper to a standard acceptable for
publication in one of the major Occupational Health and Safety
periodicals.
The syllabus covers:
Occupational hygiene: methods and limitations of sampling and
Fire and explosion: principles and practices, ignition sources, fuelds,
fire loading computations, detection and control, codes of practice.
References
Atherley, G.R.C. Occupational Health and Safety Concepts - Chemical
and Processing Hazards. London: Applied Science,l978
Brown, D.B. Systems Analysis and Design for Safety Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall International. 1976
Cooper, W.F. Electrical Safety Engineering. 2nd edn, London: Newnes-
Butterworth, 1986
Harrington, J.M. and Gill, F.S. Occupational Health. Oxford: Blackwell
Scientific Publications, 1983
Hertz and Thomas. Risk Analvsis and Its Aoolicat~ons. Chichester:
wiley, 1983
International Study Group on Risk Analysis. Risk Analysis in the
Process Industries Ruabv: I.C.E.. 1985
I CHEM E. ~omenclat&e'for ~azard and Safety Handbook. London:
Newnes-Butterworth, 1979
McElroy, F.E. Accident Prevention Manual for lndustrial Operations. 9th
edn, Chicago: National Safety Council, 1988
Megill, R.E. An Introduction to Risk Analysis. 2nd edn, Tulsa: Pennwell,
1984
NIOSH. The lndustrial Environment, its Evaluation and Control.
Washington, D.C.: NIOSH, 1980
MM551e Technology Modelling
Two hours per week for one semester including lectures.
workshop and project consultations.
Assessment: Project
Aim: To introduce students to the methodology and techniques for
developing computer models in diverse engineering technology
disciplines.
Areas to be covered will be selected from: Engineering software
design, systems effectiveness, risk modelling, and expert systems in
engineering.
The syllabus includes:
Engineering Software Design
Topics: Software design process. Human computer interfaces,
computer generated sound, window, buttons, menus, icons,
navigation, help, hypertext, search techniques, use of colour, screen
layout. Computer manual design. Students will use a high level
software construction kit to generate an ergonomically sound piece
of engineering software. Emphasis will be on high level design
concepts.
Expert Systems in Engineering
Topics: The nature of expert systems. Applications of expert systems
to engineering. Knowledge bases, inferencing, forward and backward
chaining, rule set partitioning. Rule and frame based systems, Lisp
and Prolog. Students will use an expert system shell to generate a
run-time expert system which captures some element of real
engineering expertise.
measurement of contaminants, control aspects of occupational
.-,=.-..-- hvninnn
Toxicology: routes of entry, dose-response relationships, threshold Systems Effectiveness
limit values and other measures applied to chemicals, noise, vibration Topics: The nature of systems effectiveness; systems effectlveness
and radiation.
verses cost effectiveness; systems modelling, model elements and
their inter-relations. Factor affecting system effectiveness;
Chemical hazards and effects: solvents, dusts, welding fumes,
management organisation utilisation, reliability, malntainabllity,
metals, sensitisatlon, cancer, respiratory and other systemic effect; ~onfiguration, environment, logistic support and administrat~on.
respiratory protectlon against dusts, mists and vapours, equipment
Optimisation of systems effectiveness; reliabil~ty growth management,
types, effectlveness and program requirements.
confiauration manaqement, system modification and systems
effec~veness growthmanagement.
257
. .

Risk Modelling
Topics: The nature of risk modelling and simulation. Use of personal
computers and software programs. Transfer of real world data into
computer simulations and models. Types of available simulation,
distributions and optimal choices for specific modelling needs.
Advanced simulations with graphical interpretation of results.
Communication of conclusions to management.
Students will use state-of-the-art simulation software to thoroughly
explore situations taken from current industrial challenges. They will
be responsible for all stages of the project, starting from the basic
definition of the problem, and following right through to the final
managerial report.
References
Apple Computer. Human Interface Guidelines. Addison Wesley, 1987
Gero. J.S. (Ed.) lnternation Conference on Appli~ati~nS of Artificial
lntelligence'in ~ngineering. Amsterdam: Elsevter, 1989
Harmon. P.. Maul. R. and Morrisev. W. Exoert Svstems - Tools and
s -,
~pplications. wiley, 1988
Price, J. How to Write a Computer Manual. Menlo Park, Calif.:
BenjaminlCummings, 1984
MM580 Management Practices
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Examination, assignment and class
participation
A fifth year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Aim: To address the key issues for managing productive and innovative
engineering environments and to provide further elective study in
management practice areas of prime student interest.
This subject lncludes managerial concepts and practices that
engender a co-operative working environment required for 'World
Class' productive and innovative engineering. It consists of a
compulsory core in which the key elements for managing productive
and innovative (typically that assoc~ated with research and
development) environments are studied. Students then select an
elective from one of the following:
Enqineerinq leadership; project management; research and
deielo~men'i management, rtsk managemeni, occupat~onal health and
safetv manaaement. malntenance manaqement. - lnformatlcs
management; production management.
Elements of a productive environment: The working environment;
lactors contrtbut~ng to work performance, structures of control.
alternat~ve soc~al relations of oroductlon, manaqer~al qoals and
organisational structure; impact of technology on work, social
envtronment, occupational hea:th and safety. The engineering
environment; optimisation of a system of technology and people for
maxtmlslng the deslred englneerlng outcomes, new appl~catlons of
technoloav. socto-techn~cal svstems analvsls for spec~flcat~on.
selection-.and implementatioi of total technical and working
environment requirements.
Job design to sustain co-operative and productive engineering
environment; perspectives of the labour process and factors
contr~butlng to the des~gn of jobs needs and pollc~es In the recruitment
and selection of ach~evers, soc~o-techn~cal analvsls and deslqn of
optimum engineering system and people combinations.
Elements of an innovative environment: Relationship between work
design and engineering innovation (e.g. flexible specialisation).
Managing change; understanding the psychology of change,
specifying, designing, planning, negotiatir8g and implementing change.
Managing innovation; social dimensions of creativity, invention and
technology; technological diffusion and economic analysis of
innovation.
References
Rothwell, R. and Zegveld. W. Innovation and the Small and the Medium
Sized Firm: Their Role in Emolovment and in Economic Change.
London: Frances Printer. 1982' '
MacLeod R. (ed.) Technology and the Human Prospect: Essays in
Honour of Christo~her Freeman. Frances Printer. 1986
Wlndolf. P and wood. W Recruitment and Select~on In the Labour
Market A Comparat~ve Study of Brrtarn and West Germany Aldershot
Avebury, 1988
Sarfati. H. and Kobrin, C. (ed.) Labour Market Flexibility: A Comparative
Anthology. Aldershot: Gower, 1988
MM604 Design for Manufacture
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, project work and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in manufacturing technology.
Aim: Design for manufacture aims to provide students with good
knowledge of designing tooling, machinery, equipment and systems
used for quality production.
Design of tools for metalworking: Cutting tools, high removal tools,
single points, multipoint and special form tools design.
Design of diesets for sheetmetal work: Blanking, bending, deep
drawing diesets design.
Dies and fixtures design: Lolating, clamping and other elements
design. Dimensional analysis: calculat~on of locating errors.
Kinematics of non-uniform motion: Theory and practice - design of
cams and cam followers, linkages design.
Automation of production: Logic circuits, pneumatic circuits and
electropneumatic circuits design. Circuits design with P.L.C.S..
hydraulics, introduction to robotics.
Major project: automation of manual tasks. 13 weeks' duration.
Textbook
Shigley, J.E. Mechanical Engineering Design. 1st Metric edn. New York:
McGraw Hill. 1986
References
American Society for Metab (ASM), Metals Handbook, Vol. 1,
Properties and Selection of Metals, Vol 4. Forming 8th and 9th edn,
Metals Park, Ohio: The Society, 1969, 1978
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME). Tool
Engineers Handbook. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1976
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME),
Manufacturing Planning and Estimating Handbook. New York: McGraw
Hill. 1963
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME),
Handbook of Fixture Design. New York: McGraw Hill 1962
MM605 Design for Manufacture
-
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, project work and examinat~on
A subject in the graduate diploma in manufacturing technology.
Aim: The subject as the second part of design for manufacture aims
to prepare students with further knowledge of design of tooling.
machinery and systems for quality production.
Tooling design for metalworking: economy and batch quantity,
relationship. Tool design for: cold and hot forging, and diecasting.
Quality and reliability: concept of quality, cost of quality. Responsibility
for quality. Statistical quality control, charting by variables and
attributes and sampling. Reliability - principles and applications.
Computer Aided Design: CAD Systems, processing and techniques.
NC programming, kinematics and robotics.
References
American Society for Metals, Metals Handbook, Vol. 1. Prope~ies and
Selection of Metals, Vol. 4, Forming 8th and 9th edn, Metals Park, Ohio:
The Societ~ 1969, 1978
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers, (ASTME). Tool
Engineers Handbook. 2nd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1959
American Society of Tool and Manufacturing Engineers (ASTME).
Manufacturing Planning and Estimating Handbook. New York: McGraw
. Hill . . , 1461 ,---
Smith. D.A. ed. Die Design Handbook. 3rd edn. Dearborn: S.M.E., 1990
Thomas, L.F. The Control of Quality. London: Thames and Hudson,
1965
Donaldson, C. etal. Tool Design. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1973
MM606 Manufacturing Technology
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and tests
A subject in the graduate diploma In manufacturing technology.
Sheetmetal work: presses; classification, drive systems and
mechanisms, evaluation of different types, operation, applications,
selection. Press feed mechanisms; types, advantages and
disadvantages, applications. Die cushions. Bending of sheetmetal;
analysis of die types, forces, recoil, springback, blank development.
Deep drawing; planning, force requirements, variables, effects of
clearance, cutting with shear, stripping force. Materials selection for
press forming; general requirements, mechanical tests, tensile test.
analysis of stress-strain curves and parameters, r and n values, tests
to simulate processes, stretch forming tests, deep-drawing tests,
bending tests, forming-limit diagrams, applications. Function and

terminology for die components; blank~ng dies, commercially available
die sets, punches and accessories.
Numerical control; introduction to NC machine tools, comparison with
convent~onal, hardware conf~gurat~ons, software ~mplementat~on.
control svstems. mach~ne control untt, feedback. sensltlvltv NC svstem
components; cbm~arison of actuation systems, electric, hydFaulic,
pneumatic Des~gn cons~derat~ons for NC mach~ne tools, des~gn
differences between convenllonal and NC mach~nes, mechan~cal
design considerations, control system design considerations. System
~npufloutput, types of Input med~a, symbollc codes, tape Input format.
communlcatlon w~th MCU NC Droqrammlnq. Droarammlna methods.
computer assisted NC programming [processor< post; p~ocessors],
part programming languages - APT. Computer Numerical Control
(CNC). Direct Numerical Control (DNC); comparison, management
implications.
Plastics and rubbers; overview of processes. Melt forming, rheology,
mathematical analysis of pseudoplastic, dilatent, newtonian flow, time
dependant flow, thixotropy, viscosity, tractional viscosity. Extrusion
defects; causes and prevention. Extrusion die design. Single and
multiple screw extrusion; hardware and product characteristics.
Injection moulding; mould design, basics of the moldflow philosophy,
cooling systems. Thermoforming die design. Elastomers; C black,
other additives, compounding. Compression and injection moulding.
Textbooks
Crawford, R.J. Plastics Engineering. 2nd edn, Oxford: Pergamon Press,
1987
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems and Computer
Integrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice
Hall, 1987
References
Harris, J.N. Mechanical Working of Metals. Oxford: Pergamon, 1983
Kalpakjlan, S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials.
Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1984
MM607 Manufacturing Technology
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and tests
A subject In the graduate diploma in manufacturing technology.
Mathematical analysis of forming: equilibrium analysis of common
working processes, e.g. wire drawinglstr~p drawing/extrusionltube
drawinglforging. Redundant work, friction and lubrication.
Deformation mechanics: sl~p line field applied to forming problems -
metal flow.
Polymeric materials - blow moulding - parison production including
parison programming. Clos~ng, blowing and ejection. Cooling systems
including economic analysis of specialised cooling. Stretch blowing
moulding - effects on the materials and Droducts and Droduction
econom~cs In part~cular lnject~on mouldlng lntroductlon to moldflow
Rubber comoound~na - and vulcan~sat~on
Vibration and noise: revision of theory of vibration for multi-deqree of
freedom systems lncludlng VISCOUS and hysteretic damplng ~lbrat~on
~solat~on, transmlsslon and measurement Eau~valent svstems Chatter
and stability. Sound transmission, power, iniensity soind absorption.
Insulat~on, resonance, noise rating. Noise control and measurement.
Textbooks
Crawford, R.J. Plastics Engineering. 2nd edn. Oxford: Pergamon Press,
1987
&, G. Elements of Metalworking Theory London: Edward Arnold,
1979
MM608 Manufacturing Technology
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and tests
A subject in the graduate d~ploma in manufactur~ng technology.
Automation and automated assembly: CAM, CAD, manufacturing
systems. NC robots feeding orlentation and placement.
Advanced analysis of forming and cutting: load bounding. Redundant
work. Comparison with SLF. Heat generated. Metal flow. Treatment
of Curved dies and curved fields. Axisymmetric problems.
Hotlwarm working: revision of background metallurgy. Stress, strain
and strain rate rules. Friction and lubrication. Tool materials. Analysis
of processes.
Polymer processing - comparison of techniques of polymer
processing, e.g. extrusion, Injection moulding, thermoforming and blow
moulding for the production of particular components. Selection and
costing with the optimisation of the use of the materials. Comparison
of thermoset versus thermoplastic materials using elastomers and
examples.
Calendering and coating. Manufacture of PVC products. Analysis of
film blowing and printing.
2
Faculty of Engineering
Textbooks
Crawford, R.J. Plastics Engineering. 2nd edn, Oxford: Pergamon Press.
1987
Kalpakjan, S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials.
Reading. Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1984
Roe. G. Elements of Metalworking Theory London: Edward Arnold,
1979
MM611 lntroduction to CAD
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: To introduce the fundamentals of computer graphics, computer
aided des~gn, and geometric modelling systems.
lntroduction to CAD. The design process. Application of CAD. CAD
hardware: input and output devices. CAD software configurations.
Functions of a graphics package. Graphics standards. 2D drafting
techniques. Defining graphics elements. Macros, parametrlcs.
Graphic element data bases: Alternative methods of organisation,
storage and retrieval of graphic elements.
Transformation systems: Windowing, clipping. 2D and 3D
transformations. Translation, scalinq and rotation matrices. Hidden line
algorithms, mass property algorithms, interference detection.
Geometric modelling: Wireframe, surfaces, solid modelling. Complex
surfaces and curves. Kinematic and robotic simulations.
CAD implementation. Review of micro, mini and mainframe CAD
systems: Applications, capabilities and limitations.
CAD and its relationship in a totally integrated manufacturing process.
Design~ng a simple 2D CAD system using fundamental programming
sk~lls.
References
Pao, Y.C. Elements of Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing. New
York: Wiley, 1984
Foley. J.D. and Van Dam, A. Fundamentals of Interactive Computer
Graphics. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1982
Groover, M.P and Zimmers, E.W. CAD/CAM Computer-Aided Design
and Manufacturing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1984
Newman. W.M. and Sproull, R.F. Principles of Interactive Computer
Graphics. 2nd edn. New York: McGraw Hill, 1979
Hern, D. and Baker, M.P. Computer Graphics for the ISM Personal
Computer Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall International. 1983
MM612 CAD Practice
Four hours per ween for one semester
Assessment Assignments and projects
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: To provide hands on experience on computer aided design and
geometric modelling software, its capabilities and applications.
Hands on 2D and 3D geometric modelling. Wireframe modelling,
surface modelling and solid modelling. Complex surfaces, splines,
shading and animation. Kinematic and robotic simulations. NC
programming and postprocess~ng.
References
Groover, M.P. and Zimmers. E.W. CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design
and Manufacturina. Enalewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1984
Pao, Y.C. ~lementgof computer Aided besign and ~anufacturin~. New
York: Wiley, 1984
Rooney, J. and Steadman, P. Principles of Computer Aided Design.
London: Pitman, 1987
Instruction Manuals: CATlA package
MM613 Micro CAD
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: To introduce the students to micro computer aided design, its
capabilities as a designldrafting tool and its limitations.
lntroduction to micro CAD hardware, file maintenance and computer
screen layout. Practical work on 2D and 3D, mainly in the area of
graphic element generation e.g. points, lines, circles, cylinders planes,
etc. Utilities for image manipulation e.g. zooming, panning, copying,
mirroring etc. Generation of packed elements such as symbols,
subparts etc. Other micro CAD facil~ties for comprehensive image
presentation e.g. dimens~oning, hatching etc.
Advance capabilities of miceo CAD systems in parametric design and
CADICAM facilit~es.
References ltsted overleaf

References
Barr, PC. et al., CAD, Principles and Applications. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1985
Goetsch, D.L. Understanding Computer Aided Design and Drafting.
Tulsa: Penwell Pub. Co., 1986
Groover, M.P. and Zimmers, E.W. CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design
and Manufacturing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1984
Wang, P.C.C. Advances in CAD/CAM. Case studies. Boston: Kluwer,
1984
Kuijk, A.A.M., Strasser. W. Advances in Computer Graphics Hardware
11. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. 1988
MM614 Automation and Machining
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Examination and assignments
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM, graduate diploma in
CIM, Master of Engineering CIM and Master of Technology CIM.
Aim: To develop an understanding of machining technology and
conventional automation and also the relationships between these
technologies and advanced manufacturing technology.
Rationales for automation. Review of conventional automation in
machining.
Approaches to conventional automation - pneumatic, hydraulic,
electric, electronic, hybrid systems.
Machining tecbnology: Machine costs and time estimates, economics
of machining, including computer techniques: tool life, effects of
parameters including depth, feed, cutting force, tool geometry,
temperature, cutting fluids; single and multiple cuts. Establishing
cutting conditions and work holding locations.
References
Armarego, E.J.A. and Brown, R.H. The Machining of Metals.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1969
Boothroyd, G. Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools.
London: Edward Arnold. 1965
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems, and Computer
lntegrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall, 1987
MM615 Manufacturing Automation
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment. Exam~nat~on, assignments and lab reports
A subject In the graduate dlploma In CADICAM, graduate diploma In
CIM. Master ol Eng~neerlng CIM and Master of Technology CIM
Aim: To develop an understanding of aspects of numerical control and
its relationships with other advanced manufacturing technologies.
Numerical control - comparisons with conventional automatics in
machining. Types of control - NC. CNC, DNC, DDNC. Open and
closed loop systems. Adaptive control. Multiple axis machine systems,
profile cutting, applications in various industry types.
NC part programming. Manual part programming methods, computer
assisted part programming. Postprocessors. The APT language.
Economics of NC.
lntroduction to automated assembly.
Laboratory sessions: NC milling. NC turning, CATIAINC programming,
postprocessing and link.
Textbook
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems, and Computer
lntegrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall, 1987
MM616 Manufacturing Automation
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Examination, assignments and lab reports
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: The subject is intended to provide an understanding of the use
of automation and expert systems in manufacturing.
Flow l~nes and flow llne balancing Transfer mechanisms, analys~s of
flow Ilnes, flow llne balanc~ng, computer slmulatlon of flow llnes
Flexlble automation Programmable loglc controllers (PL C ), robots
and thelr appllcatlons, automated gulded vehlcles (A G V) Automated
warehousing.
Automated inspection systems - coordinate measurement machines
(C.M.M.).
Expert and knowledge based systems: Discussion of relevance and
characteristics of expertlknowledge based systems.
Laboratory: Practice1 work relating to programming co-ordinate
measurement machines (C.M.M.), programmable logic controllers
(P.L.C.) and industrial robots.
References
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Aided
Manufacturing. 2nd edn. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. 1987
Malcolm, D.R. Robotics - An Introduction. 2nd edn, Boston: PWS Kent
Publishing Co., 1988
Further references will be supplied by the lecturer.
MM617 lntroduction to Computer lntegrated
Manufacture
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM, graduate diploma in
CIM, Master of Engineering CIM and Master of Technology CIM.
Aim: This subject aims to provide the student with an appreciation
of the breadth of computer integrated manufacturing - as such, it
establishes the context for all other subjects taken in completing the
course.
Computer Aided Design (CAD): Application of computers in
engineering design.
Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM): The role of numerical control
(NC) in CAM, CNC, DNC, manufacturing planning and control systems
- MRP, MRPII. CAPP and shop floor control systems.
Group technology and flexible manufacturing: Application of group
technology in cellular type flexible manufacturing, definition of flexible
manufacturing systems (FMS) and discussion of various aspects of
flexibility.
Computer lntegrated Manufacturing (CIM) Deflnltlons, lntegratlon of
elements of CIM vla common data bases, data base manaaement
systems, relationship between FMS and CIM.
-
Reference
Groover. M.P. Automation, Production Systems, and Computer
lntegrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice
Hall, 1987
MM618 lnroduction to Robotics
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment workllab reports and
examination
Aim: The subject is intended to provide an understanding of the use
of robots in increasing manufacturing productivity. The basic
terminology used in robotics is explained and the factors affecting the
implementation of robotics in industry discussed.
Robot definitions, classifications, specifications and characteristics.
Robot hardware elements: Drive systems, controllers.
Robot end effectors: Gripper design, choosing an end effector.
Robot sensor systems: Vision, force and torque sensing systems.
Robot applications: Machine tending, spray painting, glueing, arclspot
welding and assembly.
Technical and financial evaluation of robotic installations.
Organisational effects of 'robotization'.
Robot programming: Walkthrough, leadthrough and offline
programming.
References
Groover, M.P. et a/. Industrial Robotics - Technology, Programming
and Applications. New York: McGraw Hill, 1986
Malcolm, D.R. Robotics -An
Introduction. 2nd edn. Boston, Mass.:
PSW-Kent. 1988
€ngelberger, J.F. Robotics in Practice. London: Kogan Page Ltd., 1986
MM619 NC Project
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, class participation, final
report and presentation
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: To familiarise students with the use of modern NC equipment,
robots and CAD systems for solving practical engineering problems.
Individual or in group project involving co-ordinate measuring
equipment and modelling, NC machining and robotic tasks and
advanced CAD systems for the design of more complex parts and
producing models or dies for net shape manufacturing processes,
injection moulding or other processes.
References
The same as for lntroduction to Computer Aided Design. Micro CAD
and CAD Practice.
260

MM620 Computers and Interfacing
Faculty of Engineering
References
Bedworth, D. and Bailey, J. IntegratedProduction Control Systems. 2nd
Two hours per week for one semester edn, New York: Wiley, 1987
Assessment: work and examination Browne, J., Harhen, J. and Shirnan, J. Production Management
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM, graduate diploma in Systems: a CIM Perspective. Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1988
CIM, Master of Engineering CIM and Master of Technology.
Gunn. T. Computer Applications in Manufacturing. New York Industrial
Aim: To introduce students to the basic principles of digital computer lgE1
architecture, the connection of computers to physical closed loop Micro MRP Inc. MAX Manual
control systems.
Boolean algebra, number systems, Karnaugh mapping techniques,
MM624 Management of CADICAM
state machines and microprocessor based systems. Memory mapping
Technology
(addressing) techniques and computer architecture. Design of
Two hours per week for one semester
buffering and signal conversion circuits for interfacing. Students are
Assessment: Assignment and project , written test
required to provide a major seminar in conjunction with relevant project
work.
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
Aim: Discussion of the new business environment, introduction to
Reference
managerial issues specific to CADICAM environments in adoption.
Cripps, M. Computer Inte,acing - Connection to the Real World,
design, control. Industrial relations concerning people, government.
Edward Arnold
unions. others.
MM621 Mathematics
Introducing technological change related to CADICAM, project
planning, management, maintenance agreements, installation and
Two hours per week for one semester
commissioning.
Assessment: Assignments and examinations
Impact of CADICAM on the organisation, industrial relations
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM.
implications, ergonomics and occupational health and safety issues.
Aim: To develop an understanding of mathematical and statistical
techniques for computer applications.
training for CADICAM; approaches to CAD'CAM, government
initiatives relating to CADICAM, support organisations.
Matrix and matrix algebra - orthogonal matrices, real symmetric References
matrices and applications. Solution of a homogeneous system of linear Kochan, A. and Cowan. D. Implementing CIM. Bedford: IFS
equations. Publications, 1986
Initial value problems: Runge-Kutta.
Mortimer, J. (Ed.) Integrated Manufacture. Kempston: IFS Publications,
lntroduction to finite difference methods of ordinary and partial kt:k Towards the Automatic Factow? The Need for Training.
differential equations.
Bedford: IFS Publications, 1986
Statistics: Frequency distribution, mean, median, mode, measure of Lupton, T. (Ed.) Human Factors, Man Machine and New Technology.
dispersion. Probability and probability distributions: Binomial, normal Kempston: IFS Publications. 1986
and poisson.
Lockyer, K. Critical Path Analysis and Other Project Network
References Techniques. 4th edn, London: Pitman, 1984
Kreyszig, E, Advanced Engineering ~ ~ ~ 6th edn, h Ny.: ~ wiley, ~ ~ In addition ~ ; to the ~ above ~ references, , the student will be referred to
1988 relevant journal articles and papers.
Smith. G.D. Numerical Solution of Parlial Difference Equations with
Exercise and Worked Solutions. 3rd edn, Oxford: Clarendon, 1985 ~ ~ 6 Machine 2 5 Systems
Lapin. L.I. Probability and Statistics for Modern Engineering. 2nd edn,
Monterey: BrookslCole, 1989
MM622 Advanced Computer Techniques
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in CIM. Master of Engineering CIM
and Master of Technology.
Aim: To develop an understanding of conventional and modern
technologies associated with manufacturing automation.
Sensor technology and drive systems for machine tools: Displacement
sensors/transducers - linear, rotary. Velocity and acceleration
transduces. Forceslpressure sensors. Temperature sensors.
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Project and assignment work, examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM, graduate diploma in
CIM, Master of Engineering CIM and Master of Technology CIM.
Aim: To provide students with the skills necessary to undertake
structured program development.
Structured programming in Turbo PASCAL
Characteristics of transducers: Dynamic properties of transducers -
- control structure (sequence, repetition, conditionals) zero, first and second order transducers; NOISE.
- recursion Drive systems and sensors: The stepping motor. The servo motor.
- user-defined data types Analogue and digital transducers: syncro resolver, optical gratings,
- procedures and functions shaft encoders, inductosyn.
- arrays, records Adaptive control: Adaptive control of machine tools, parameters used
- files for adaptive control, block diagrams.
- program documentation
Robotics: lntroduction to robotics - definition, classifications,
dynamic data structures
- development of units for large scale program development
Textbook
Savitch, W. Turbo Pascal 5.5. Benjamin Cummings, 1990
specifications. Hardwarelsoftware components in robots. Design of
robot and effectors. Robot applications an overview.
References
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems and Computer
lntegrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice
Hall. 1980
MM623 Computer Based Management
Systems Doebelin, E.O. Measurement Systems. 4th edn, N.Y.: McGraw Hill, 1990
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment and project work, written test
A subject in the graduate diploma in CADICAM, graduate diploma in
CIM, Master of Engineering CIM and Master of Technology CIM.
Aim: The subject is ~ntended to provide a grounding in the application
of computers to the management and control of a manufacturing
enterprise. Particular emphasis is placed on practical familiarisation
with available software packages and evaluation of their applicability
to particular cases.
A proportion of the subject is devoted to MRPll packages.
Further topics include project management including CPMIPERT and
investment decision, simulation, decision making and total
maintenance system.
26 1
MM626 Advanced Mathematics
Two hours per week for one semester
Assignmentslexamination
A subject in the graduate diploma in CIM, Master of Engineering CIM
and Master of
Aim: To develop an understanding of mathematical and statistical
techniques for computer applicat~ons.
Computational methods: linear algebra with applications to sparse
matrices and three dimensional geometry. Finite differences methods
in ordinary and partial differential equations.
vector transformation, splines and
geometry.
References l~sted overleaf

References
Burden, R.L.. Faires. J.D. and Reynolds, A.C. Numerical Analysis. 2nd
edn, Boston: Prindle, Weber and Schmidt. 1981
Smith, G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations with
Exercise and Worked Solutions. 3rd edn. Oxford: Clarendon. 1985
MM627 Manufacturing Management Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignmentlexam~nation
A subject in the graduate dlploma in CIM, Master of Engineering CIM
and Master of Technology.
Aim: To provide an understanding of the manufacturing management
systems.
An overview of manufacturing management functions, organisation,
data flow, control etc.
Traditional approaches are followed by an overview of the current world
market characteristics leading to needs for flexibility in all aspects. Role
of technology and approaches such as MRPll philosophy, just in time.
OPT are discussed in detail.
References
Harrington, J. Understanding the Manufacturing Process. New York:
Dekker 1984 Schonberger World Class Manufacturing, Free Press,
1986
Bedworth. D. and Barley, J. Integrated Production Control Systems. 2nd
edn, New York: Wiley, 1987
Fogarty, Hoffman. Production and Operations Management. Apics,
1989
MM628 Control Systems and Devices
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Laboratorylexamination
A subject in the graduate diploma In CIM, Master of Englneering in
CIM, Master of Technology.
Aim: To consolidate the students prior learning and experience in the
application of classical closed loop control systems; to prov~de an
understanding of those factors determining stability and dynamic
performance; to provide an appreciat~on of modern adaptive control
theory and application.
Introduction to closed loop control and applications In integrated
manufacturing. Classical treatment of feedback control IS extended
to include the analysis of non hear systems.
Applications include chatter and instability in machine tools and
manufacturing processes.
Masters by coursework students are required to complete a research
assignment in the area of modern control of multivariable processes.
References
Dransfield. P Systems andcontrol. Parts 7 and2. Monash University,
1988
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1970
Palm, W.J. Control Systems Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1986
MM629 Computers and Interfacing
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Projectlseminar work and examinahon
A subject in the graduate diploma in CIM, Master of Engineering CIM
and Master of Technology.
Aim: To provide a sound understanding of computer ~nterfaclng through
data communications techniques as they apply to manufacturing.
Data conversion from internal to external representation. Parallel and
serial external communicat~ons techniques. Dlstance limitations, noise
induction. RS-232 and RS-449 circuits and problems. Network
topologies and protocols. Students are required to provide a major
seminar in conjunction with project work.
References
Campbell. J. The RS232 Solution. Berkeley: Sybex Books, 1984
Gofton, W. Mastering Serial Communications. Berkeley: Sybex Books.
1986
Halsall. F. Data Communication, Computer Networks and OSI 2nd edn,
Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1988
MM630 Mathematics and Computing
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignmentlexam~nat~on
A subject in the graduate diploma in CIM, Master of Eng~neer~ng CIM,
Master of Technology.
Aim: To develop an understanding of mathematical and statistical
techniques for computer applications. To introduce students to
common computer operating systems and their development
environments, and to common end-user software.
Maths
Statistics and Operations Research:
Linear Programming: Simplex method, b~g M method, two phase
method, duality, dual simplex method, sensltlvity, revised simplex
technique, bounded variables, parametlc programmlng,
decomposition, applications, use of computer packages such as
SASIOR, lndustrial applications.
Markw Chains and Queueing Theory: Stochastic processes. Markov
chains, applications in decis~on making. Queueing theory, transient
and steady state, general Markov model. Application of simulation in
queueing systems, practical applications, use of a computer package.
The Analysis of Variance: Revision of inference for two Independent
groups, analysis of variance. Non-parametric methods. Planned and
unplanned comparisons.
Multiple Linear Regression: Review of linear regression with one
predictor.
Computing
- Introduction to computer organisat~on
- DOS - command interpreter; windows environment
- End-User Software - spreadsheets; graphics packages
References
Lapln. L.L. Probability and Statistics for Modern Engineering. 2nd edn,
Monterey: BrookslCole. 1989
Taha, H.A. Operations Research: An Introduction. 4th edn, London:
MacMillan, 1987
MM631 Machine Systems
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment/exam~nat~on
A subject in the graduate diploma In CIM. Master of Englneering CIM
and Master of Technology.
Aim: To develop an understand~ng of software and hardware aspects
of CIM systems.
Development of N.C. and robot programming languages: Onllne and
offllne programming of N.C. machlnes and robots.
Levels of programmlng: Manipulator, object and objective levels of
programming.
Development of a universal programming language: The ~mpl~catlons.
Material handllng systems In FMSICIM: Robos in material handling,
automated guided vehicles (AGV) - control and implementation,
automated warehousing - description of hardware, integration wlth
other elements of automated mater~al handling system.
Expert and knowledge based systems: Descr~ption of elements,
knowledge and problem representation in an expert system, use of
expert system 'shells' and commerlcal systems, development of expert
systems includ~ng prototyplng, role of expert systems In machining.
References
Malcolm, D.R. Robotics an Introduction. 2nd edn, Boston: P.W.S. Kent
Publishing Co., 1988
Groover, M.P. lndustrial Robotics - Technology, Programming and
A~olications. New York: McGraw H~ll Internat~onal. 1986
~uller, Dr. T Automated Guided Vehicles. ~edford: '~~~-~ubl~cattons.
1983
Further references will be supplied by lecturer.
MM632 Computer Aided Design
Two hours per wek for one semester
Assessment Ass~gnmentslproject examlnatlon
A subject ~n the graduate dlploma In CIM Master of Englneerlng CIM
and Master of Technology
Aim To Introduce theoretical foundat~ons of computer graphlcs and
CAD systems and provlde hands on experience In M~cro CAD 3D
systems

Theory section: Graphic element data bases: alternative methods of
organisation, storage and retrieval of graphic elements. Transformation
systems: windowing, clipping, 20 and 3D transformations. Translation,
scaling and rotation matrices. Hidden line algorithms, mass property
algorithms. Designing a simple 2D CAD system using fundamental
programming skills.
Practical section: Further hands on micro-CAD system with 3D
modelling and introduction to micro CADICAM.
References
Foley, J.D. and Van Dam, A. Fundamentals of lnteractive Computer
Graphics. Reading. Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1982
Groover, M.P. and Zimmers. E.W. CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design
and Manufacture. En lewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1984
Newman, W.M. and 8proull. R.F. Principles of lnteractive Computer
Graphics. 2nd edn, New York: McGraw Hill. 1979
Pao, Y.C. Elements of Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing. New
York: Wiley, 1984
MM633 Advanced CAD
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignmentslproject and examination
A subject In the graduate diploma In CIM, Master of Englneerlng CIM
and Master of Technoloav. -.
Aim: To introduce advanced topics of CAD and related theory, review
various CAD systems and provide hands on experience in advanced
30 geometric modelling system.
Geometric modelling: Wireframe, surface and solid modelling.
Complex surfaces and curves, kinematics and robotics simulations.
Finite element applications. 3D representations: polygon surfaces,
curved surfaces. Bezier curves and surfaces, splines. CAD
implementation. Brief review of micro, minio and mainframe CAD
svstems.
Hands on advanced 3D geometric modelling systems. W~reframe.
surface. solid modelllna Comolex surfaces and slines. NC cutter oath
determlnat~on and vei;flcatloi uslng post processor
References
Foley, J.D. and Van Dam, A. Fundamentals of Interactive Computer
Graphics. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1982
Groover, M.P. and Zimmers, E.W. CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design
and Manufacturing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1984
Newman, W.M. and Sproull, R.F. Principles of Interactive Computer
Graphics. 2nd edn.. New York: McGraw Hill. 1979
Pao. W. Elements of Cornouter Aided Desion and Manufacturino. New
~ork: Wiley, 1984
-
MM689 Minor Thesis
Sixteen hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Continuous assessment of work and
participationlfinal report and presentation. (Assessment
will be in accordar~ce with the regulations and marking
scheme handed out to students when projects are
approved.
A subject in the Master of Technology CIM.
This subject aims to give the student the opportunity to apply the
subject matter studied in the other course subject to CIM related
problems in histher specific field of interest. Where possible the
problems should be industry sponsored and have direct relevance to
the student's area of employment.
Students will work on approved problems under staff supervision.
External supervisors may also be appointed. Each project will require
a literature survey, and a theoretical andlor experimental investigation.
Results and concluslons will be presented in a wrltten report and oral
presentations to selected audiences will be requlred to accustom the
student to giving oral progress reports on a major project.
MM740 lnstrumentation and Measurement o c i g
Systems
Faculty of Engineering
Analys~s of the statlc and dynamlc perlormance of electro-mechan~cal
transducers, ~nput-output character~st~cs of transducers: . ~0m~atlbllltv .
of transducers, ampjifiers, measuring circuits and recorders i;
measuring systems.
Applications of digital measurement techniques, digital type
transducers, digital to analogue and analogue to digital conversions,
data transfer and communications between micro computers.
References
Bell, D.A. Electronic lnstrumentation and Measurements. Reston, VA:
Reston Pub. Co., 1983
Del Toro, E.O. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals. 2nd edn,
Engelwood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1986
Doebelin, E.O. Measurement Systems. McGraw Hill, 1975
MM741 Control Engineering
-
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: An introduction to classical methods of analysis for linear control
systems.
Introduction to closed-loop control: Definitions, terminology and
examples. Mathematical modelling of physical systems: Transfer
functions, linearisation, block diagrams of closed-loop systems.
Transient analysis: The inverse transform and the time solution of linear
models, response of first and second order systems to a unit impulse
and unit step inputs. Stability analysis: Routh's stability criterion for
linear control systems. Frequency response analysis: Steady state
solution to sinusoidal inputs and the frequency response function G
(jw), representation on logarithmic plots - Bode diagrams, nyquist
stability criterion.
Textbook
Dransfield, P. Systems and Control, Part 1 and 2. Monash University,
1988
References
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Englewood Cliffs. N.J.:
Prentice-Hall International, 1970
Palm. W.J. Modeling Analysis and Control of Dynamic Systems. New
York: Wiley, 1983
Palm. W.J. (Ill). Control Systems Engineering. New York: Wiley, 1986
MM755 Equipment Life Cycle
Two hours per week for one semestel
Assessment: Project
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To introduce students to engineering aspect of equipment life
cycle; from conception through definition, realisation, integration,
commissioning, life usage and ultimate decommissioning1disposal.
Types of equipment; fixed and mobile: Equipment acquisition and
procurement cycle; design research and development; equipment
trialling, testing and demonstration.
Maintenance strategy: Types and approaches, preventive
maintenance, condition monitoring. Integration and commiss~oning
process.
Maintenance operations: Maintenance planning and control, work
planning, resource analysis and allocation, maintenance activities,
repair and performance and condition monitoring. Maintenance
access and creation of maintenance windows. Measures of
maintenance effectiveness.
Configuration: Configuration control and modificat~on.
Decommissioning, disposal and system replacement.
Textbooks
TO .- he -- nrlv,sprl --..---
References
The Australian Manager 2nd edn.
Corder, AS. Maintenance Management Techniques. London: McGraw
Two hours per week for one semester HIII, 1976
Assessment: Assignment, laboratory and examination Cunningham, C.E. and Cox. W. Applied Maintainability Engineering.
N.Y.: Wiley Inter Science, 1972
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Dhillon, B.S. and Reiche, H. Reliability and Maintainability
Aim: To give a basic foundation in the principles and practice involved Management. N.Y.: Von Nostrand Rheinhold, 1985
in instrumentation and measurement systems used in the chemical Kelly, A. Maintenance Planning and Control. London: Butteworths,
. industw
.---. 19RA
~rincikis and role of sensors for the measurement of displacement, Moss, M.A. Designing for Minimal Maintenance Expense: The Practical
time velocity, force, pressure, flow-rate, density and temperature. Application of Reliability and Maintainability N.Y.: M. Dekker, 1985
Transduclng elements for conversion among mechan~cal, thermal and
electrical auantltles, lncludlnq examples of electro-mechan~cal.
capacitance, piezoelectric, resisiance, inductance, and thermo-electric
transducers.

MM756 Chemical Engineering Design
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To aive students a basic understanding of the principles involved
in the de%ign of batch and continuous reactors, and 1-0 specifically study
the ooeration of small scale batch olant as used In manv Auslralian
in-dui'tries.
Reactor design - a review of chemical reaction kinematics, flow
kinematics of various reactor types including batch, tubular and CSTR.
temperature and pressure effects on reactor performance. Adiabatic
and isothermal operation. Gas and liquid phase reactions.
Heterogeneous operations.
Batch processes - unsteady state operation of chemical plant with
examples including batch distillation, batch drying, batch filtration,
batch reactors and batch leaching and absorption, solvent extraction,
ion exchange, semibatch operation.
Textbooks
Coulson, J.M.. Richardson, J.F. and Backhurst, J.R. Chemical
Engineering, Vol. 2. 2nd edn, Pergamon Press, 1978
Levenspiel, 0. Introduction to Reaction Engineering
Denbigh. K.G. and Turner, J.C.R. Chemical Reactor Theoryc An
Intmduction. 3rd edn, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984
MM901 Database Technology
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignmentslexamination
A subject in the Master of Engineering CIM.
Aim: To provide a conceptual framework of the database concept. The
study will encompass requirements analysis, database design,
implementation and query languages with emphasis being on the
rational paradesign. Applications specific to the manufacturing
environment will be discussed.
Data structures; flat files, hierarchial, relational, network structures.
Rational databases; tables, relational algebra, keys, indexes.
normalisation.
Database design; modelling reality, data dictionaries, entity
relationships. CASE tools.
Implementation; SQL. QBE, 4GL, application software.
Manufacturing applications; modelling manufacturing data, graphical
data, MRP II performance.
Systems requirements analysis; data flow analysis, system life cycle.
Textbook
Date, C.J. Introduction to Data Base Systems. 5th edn, Reading. Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1990
MM902 Numerical Engineering
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: AssignmenVexarnination
A subiect in the Master of Enqineerinq CIM.
Alm To develop an understanding of the mathematccs of flnlte element
analys~s and the appllcat~on of FEA to englneerlng problems
Approximation and interpolation for data, functions and integrals using
polynomials and orthogonal functions.
Lagrange polynomials. Methods of weighted residuals for ordinary
differential equations with homogeneous and non-homogeneous
boundary conditions.
Linear and cubic Hermite basis functions, applications including beam
problems.
Rod elements, beam elements, plate and shell theory, theories and
analysis in structural stability. Applicat~on of finite elements to
manufacturing engineering employing a PC based package -
STRAND 5. Examples of solutions to beam problems. Comparison of
results with elasticity solutions.
Textbooks
Burnett, D. Finite Element Analysis. Reading, Mass.: Addison Wesley,
i om
~rrnter, P.M. Splines and Variational Methods. NY: Wiley, 1975
Strand 5 Manual, G + D Computing. Sydney, 1988
References
Cook, R.D. Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis. 3rd
edn. New York: Wllev. 1989
Logan. D.L. A ~imt Cohse ithe Finite Element Method. Boston, Mass.:
PWS-Kent. 1985
MM903 Numerical Engineering Project
One hour per week for one semester
Assessment: Project
Prerequisite: MM902
A subject in the Master of Engineering CIM.
A project based course on the application of numerical methods in
engineering based on in particular the application of micro computer
FE analysis.
Textbooks
See MM902.
References
See MM902.
MM904 Systems Integration
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: AssignmenVexamination
A subject in the Master of Engineering CIM.
The aim of this subiect is to discuss the issues related to comouter
Integrated manufactbrlng (CIM) system by lntroduclng ~ts elements and
systernat~cally lntegratlng those elements to a un~f~ed, efflc~ent system
Characteristics of integrated, flexible manufacturing systems; CIM.
FMS, peoples attitudes, managerial implications. financial analysis.
decision making.
Computer control: Data bases, types of data, program storage and
distribution, system control, system monitoring, reporting.
Group technology: Background, part families; parts classification and
coding systems; production flow analysis, algorithms. MIC cell design,
types (single, groups) (manual, semi-integrated). FMS; MIC
arrangement in cell (Hollier's algorithms) cell utilisation, benefits of
GT, process planning.
Flexible Manufacturing Systems (FMS): Economics; loading; planning
and design; scheduling; modelling and computer support.
Simulation: In design and study of performance of CIM; modelling
process, use of computer packages.
Managerial aspects of CIM: Training, industrial relation, contribution
to JIT, quality.
References
Lapin, L.L. Probabilify and Statistics for Modern Engineering. 2nd edn,
Monterey: BrooksICole, 1989
Taha, H.A. Operations Research: An Introduction. 4th edn. London:
MacMillan, 1987
Excellence - Repr.: Deseret Books, 1990
Stecke. K.E. and Suri, R. (Ed.) Flexible Manufacturing Systems.
Elsevier, 1989
Gerelle, E.G.R. Integrated Manufacturing. New York: McGraw Hill. 1988
MM905 Computers and Interfacing
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment: ProjecUseminar work and examination
A subject in the Master of Engineering CIM.
Aim. To introduce students to advanced techn~ques in the des~gn of
Interfaces between comouters and lndustr~al eauloment. To orovide
a high level of understanding of the pril;cibles invoived in
communications protocols development. OSI networks.
Designing with AID and DIA converters, control of multiple, servodriven
axes (CNC). PLCs and specialised interfacing hardware.
Selection of communications parameters and systems. Desi n and
implementation of point to point communications protocols. 08llnon-
OSI bus networks and protocols.
References
Campbell, J. The RS232 Solution. Berkeley: Sybex Books, 1984
Cripps, M. Computing Interfacing - Connection to the Real World.
Edward Arnold, 1989
Goflon, W. Mastering Serial Communications. Berkeley: Sybex Books.
1986
Halsall. F. Data Communication, Computer Networks and OSI. 2nd edn.
Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1988

Faculty of Engineering
MM9061 Project A
Textbook
Massie, J.L. Essentials of Management. 3rd edn, Englewood Cliffs,
MM907 Project B
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1979
Project A - Eight hours per week for one semester
Project B - Twelve hours per week for one semester References
Assessment: Continuous assessment/final report and
Brown, J.A.C. Social Psychology of Industry. 2nd edn, Melbourne:
presentation Macmillan, 1982
(Assessment will be in accordance with the regulations
Byrt, W. and Masters, P.R. The Australian Manager: 2nd edn,
and marking scheme handed out to students when
projects are approved)
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ , R, e Organisational : ~ ~ Behaviour: ~ ~ ~ The S ~ ~ 2 n e ,
Australian Context. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire, 1983.
This subject aims to give the student the opportunity to apply the
subject matter studied in the other course subjects to CIM related
problems in hislher specific field of interest.
~ ~ 5 0n,lanufacturing 2
project
Students will work on approved problems under staff supervision.
One hundred and ninety hours over nineteen weeks
External supervisors may also be appointed. Each project will require
Assessment by thesis
a literature survey, and a theoretical andlor experimental investigation. A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Results and conclusions will be presented In a written report and oral This subject IS the major individual research project in the course. At
resenta at ions to selected audiences will be reauired to accustom the the end of the fourth-year academlc per~od, each student is alven.
student to giving oral progress reports on a major project. The project or allowed to select, -a research project related to manufaciuring
is marked in two parts:
engineering.
Part A - Progress is assessed by continuous assessment of research The student is expected to make all preparations, designs, literature
work plus draft submission of "Introduction, literature survey and surveys, during the fourth-year industrial training session. At the
experimental design" parts of thesis.
beginning of the final semester of the course, the student gives short
Part B - Full assessment in accordance with assessment above. oral presentation of the aims, objectives and experimental method to
be followed.
MP186 Building Materials
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and examinations
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
intended to give students an understanding of the behaviour of building
materials so that they can determine whether traditional materials are
being used correctly and appraise new materials.
Phases, solid solutions, metal crystal structures, polymer structures,
silicate structures.
Equilibrium: phase relationships and equilibrium diagrams.
Mechanical properties: deformation and fracture, non-destructive
testing.
Cement and concrete: constituents, setting and hardening, admixtures.
Corrosion and deterioration: causes, prevention and minimisation.
For references and textbook see MP183.
MP286 Building Materials 2
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignment and examination
A second-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying
designed to extend students' knowledge of material behaviour relevant
to building construction.
Detailed treatment of behaviour of selected materials used in building:
steels, high strength weldable steels, aluminium alloys, plastics and
rubbers used for cladding and pipe systems.
Joining methods: principles of behaviour of the different joining
systems including welding, adhesive bonding, soldering, brazing,
mechanical fasteners, comparative costs of various jointing methods.
For textbooks and references see MP183.
MP414
Manufacturing Technology
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessent by tests and assignments
An elective subject in the fourth year of the degree course in
mechanical engineering.
An introduction to CAD. CAM, i.e. numerical control, CNC, DNC, DDNC
use of CADAM and CATIA, complex su,rfaces. Wire frame, solid and
geometric modelling. Robot and NC s~mulation.
Flexible manufacturing systems; integration of manufacturing
technology and systems management. Robots, guided vehicles,
quality, CIM.
MP422 Engineering Administration
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment by test and assignments
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in electrical and electronic
engineering.
Development of modern management theory and practices.
Organisallon of enterprises, the~r needs and strudures Elements of
human behav~our and the fundamentals of leadersh~p and supervision.
MP511 Manufacturing Technology (P)
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by laboratory, assignments and tests
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Automation and automated assembly: CAM, CAD, manufacturing
systems. NC robots feeding orientation and placement.
Advanced analysis of forming and cutting: load bounding. Redundant
work. Comparison with SLF. Heat generated. Metal flow. Treatment
of curved dies and curved fields. Axisymmetric problems.
HoUwarm working: revision of background metallurgy. Stress, strain
and strain rate rules. Friction and lubrication. Tool materials. Analysis
of processes.
Polymer Processing - comparison of techniques of polymer
processing, e.g. extrusion, injection moulding, thermoforming and blow
moulding for the production of particular components. Selection and
costing with the optimisation of the use of the materials. Comparison
of thermoset versus thermoplastic materials using elastomers and
examples.
Calendering and coating. Manufacture of PVC products. Analysis of
film blowing and printing.
Textbooks
As for MP461
MP513 Manufacturing Technology (C)
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturin~ engineering.
Diffusional operations: drying, crystallisation, water cooling and
humidification.
Industrial applications of heat and momentum transfer.
Single and multi-effect evaporator systems, thermal and mechanical
recompression. Operation, control and economics of evaporation
systems.
Text books
Coulson, J.M. and Richardson, J.F. Chemical Engineering. Vol 2.
Pergamon Press, latest edn.
Treybal, R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, New York: McGraw-
Hill, 1980
Norman, W.S. Absorption, Distillation and Cooling Towers. London:
Longmans, 1961

~
MP521 lndustrial Management
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and tests
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Legal: Australian legal systems; commercial law regarding employees,
employer liabilities; contract law; sale of goods; common law, criminal
law and torts as they affect manufacturers; negligence; defences;
industrial property (patents, etc); principal and agent; companies law;
workers' compensation, insurance.
Manaoement performance: modern theories of management;
motiv$ion; job' enrichment; participation in practice; organisation
develo~ment: ~ - , orofessionalism: overseas trends: case studies.
dustri rial re~itidns in Australia; collective bargaining; conciliation and
arbitration; wage and salary administration; case studies.
MP531 lndustrial Engineering
Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment by assignments and test
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Production planning and control. Group technology. Advanced
application of operations research techniques to problem solution. The
inventory model. Resource allocation and cash costing in network
analysis. Engineering economy in equipment selection. Decisions
under uncertainty. Computer aided manufacturing. Process planning,
factory management.
Advanced study of total systems. Making use of computer slmulatlon
technlaues in svstem dvnamlcs Computer alded process planning.
expert knowledge systems, flexible manufacturing.
Textbook
Riggs, J.L. Production Systems. 4th edn, New York: Wlley, 1987
References
Anderson, D.R., Sweeney, D.J. and Williams, T.A. An lntroduction to
Manaaement Science - Ouantitative ADDroacheS to Decision Making.
3rd can. St. Paul: West Publishing. 1982
MP551 Design for Manufacture (P)
Five hours per week for ten weeks plus
a project in industry
Assessment by assignments, projects and examination
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Design of machinery for production
Analysis of performance. Design for stiffness and rigidity - bodies
and bases, slides and bearings, spindles. Modular design, hydrostatic
bearings.
Review of latest developments and trends in the design of machine
tools and presses.
Computer aided design
lntroduction and the use of the latest software related to tooling design,
production sequences, and production equipment design. Packages
for the design and analysis of machine elements.
Industrial robots design
Design criteria: configuration, working range, controls and
programming. Stiffness, tigidity, inertia considerations. Design of
grippers, performance analysis.
Value analysis
Relationship between quality, reliability and cost. Functional design
- basic and secondary functions. Optimum process selection.
Concept of value analysis, methods of appllcatlon, examples.
Project in industry
Approximately 50 hours of effective work. Topics connected with design
for manufacture - improvement of production equipment and production
techniques in local industrial firms.
References
Blake, I? (ed.) Advanced Manufacturing Technology Amsterdam: North
Holland. 1982
Encarnacao, J. and Krause, F.I. (eds.) File Structure and Data Bases
for CAD. Amsterdam: North Holland, 1982
Foley, J.D. and Van Dam, A. Fundamentals of Interactive Computer
Graphics. Reading: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1982
Groover, M.P. Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-
Integrated Manufacturing. 2nd edn, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall,
1987
Koenigsberger, F. Design Principles of Metal Cutting Machine Tools.
Oxford: Pergamon, 1964
Koenigsberger, F. and Tlusty, J. Machine Tool Structures. Oxford:
Pergamon, 1970
Maekelt. H. Mechanical Presses. London: Edward Arnold, 1968
MP553 Design for Manufacture (C)
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination
A fifth-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing engineering.
Computer-aided design: computer graphics including flowsheet and
layout preparation; exercises in preparation of computer solutions to
problems in momentum, heat, and mass transfer.
Examples of solid, liquid and gaseous effluents associated with
chemical manufacturing and other industries: methods of treatment
and disposal; ecological considerat~ons; legal requirements.
MP711
Mass Transfer
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Laboratory work, assignment and
examination
Aim: To provide the student with an insight into the theory, and physical
reality of diffusional mass transfer.
Mass transfer theory: Fick's Law of diffusion; steady state diffusion
in single-phase systems; multicomponent and transient diffusion;
determination of diffusion coefficients.
Convective mass transfer; mass transfer coefficients; interphase mass
transfer. Theory and design of continuous differential contactors; mass
transfer with chemical reactions; mass, heat and momentum transfer
analogies. Gas absorption, liquidll~quid extraction.
Textbook
Treybal, R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, (SI Units), McGraw-
Hill. 1983
References
Perry, R.H. and Green, D. Perry's Chemical Engineering Handbook.
6th edn, New York: McGraw Hill, 1984
MP712
Unit Operations
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Practical work and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To impart understanding of physical phenomena involving
particles, and the importance of these in chemical manufacturing.
Fluidlparticle systems: hydraulic classification, hindered settling,
thickening. Flow through packed beds, sand filters, fluidisation,
pneumatic and hydraulic conveying, filtration and centrifuging.
Handling and transport of powders, powder mixing, crushing, grinding
and screening.
Textbook
Coulson, J.M., R~chardson. J.F. and Backhurst, J.R. Chemical
Engineering, Vol 2. 2nd edn, Pergamon Press, 1978
MP713 Chemical Engineering Design 1
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments an examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To instruct students in the fundamentals of chemical engineering
thermodynamic and the basic principles of mass and energy balances
as a basis for further study in chemical process technology.
Bas~c deslgn techniques: Mass and energy balance calculations;
flowsheets; stoichiometry calculations involving bypass, recycle and
purge; combustion and heat engine calculations.
Chemical engineering thermodynam~cs: Physical equilibrium, bubble
and dewpoint relations, phase diagrams, activity and activity
coefficients, Gibbs Duhem equation, chemlcal reactlon equilibria,
heats of reaction and mixing.
Textbooks
Smith and Van Ness. lntroduction to Chemical Engineering
Thermodynamics. 4th edn, McGraw Hill. 1987
Felder, R.M. and Rousseau, R.W. Elementary Principles of Chemical
Processes. 2nd edn. New York: Wiley, 1986

MP714 Stagewise Processes
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Practical work and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To give students a general understanding of industrial mass
transfer operations, and of stagewise methods for the design of mass
transfer equipment.
Applications of mass transfer operations such as distillation, gas
absorption, liquid-liquid extraction and leaching in chemical
manufacturing; descriptions of the equipment in which these
operations are carried out.
Behaviour of plate and packed columns; characteristics of packings;
bubble cap and sieve trays, weirs and downcomers; flooding, holdup
and pressure drop; selection of optimum column diameter.
The concept of the equilibrium stage as applied to distillation, liquidliquid
extraction, leaching and other mass transfer operations.
Graphical and computer-based design techniques employing this
concept: McCabe-Thiele, Sorel and Ponchon-Savrit methods.
Textbook
Treybal. R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, (SI Units). McGraw
Hill. 1983
Reference
Ludwig, E.E. Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical
Plants. 2nd edn, Houston, Texas: Gulf Pub. Co., 1977
MP715
Heat Transfer
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Practical work and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To provide the student with a sound approach to the design and
selection of heat transfer equipment.
Description and characteristics of shell and tube exchangers, and
alternative aeometries; - boilers, condensers, etc. w~th examples of their
use.
Review of previous work in heat transfer, namely uni-dimensional
conduction. Newton's Law of cooling, overall heat transfer coefficients.
Prediction of heat transfer coeff~cients by the mechanisms of natural
and forced convection. film and droowise condensat~on. nucleate and
film boiling. LMTD, an and E-NTU methods to determine temperature
driving forces. Thermal rating of shell and tube exchangers; pressure
drop in heat exchangers.
Textbooks
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfer. 6th edn, New York: McGraw Hill. 1986
Coulson. J.M.. Richardson. J.F. and Backhurst. J.R. Chemical
~ngineering. VOI. 1, 3rd edn; Pergamon Press, 1977
MP717 Industrial Processes and
Pollution Control
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignment and class participation
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To teach students by the use of case studies and other means
to scientifically assess the possible pollution outcomes of various
processes.
Use of process flow diagram. Simple process calculation stoichiometry,
combustion, heat and mass balances. Disposal and dispersal of
efficient, stack heights, etc. Description of major industries and their
problems (aluminium industry, electroplating, etc.). Major
environmental issues of general concern (acid rain, atomic power,
PCBs, dioxide, dumping of toxic waste).
MP719
Faculty of Engineering
Occupational Health and Safety
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments and examination
A subject in the graduate diploma in chemical engineering.
Aim: To provide a working knowledge of types of hazards encountered
in the workplace and means by which these may be overcome.
Environmental hazards: Accident prevention. Work-related injuries
including tenosynovitis, back and muscle injuries. Noise and vibration.
Physics of sound. Measurement and bio-effects. Heat and ventilation.
Measurement of dusts and fumes, bio-effects. Body temperature
regulation, effects of heat and cold. Radiation. lonising and nonionising
(including ultra-violet).
Toxicology: Toxic substance; mechanisms of action and pathogenic
effects (carcinogenesis, mutagenesis, teratogenesis). Routes of
ingestion toxic substances including heavy metals, benzene, PCB,
solvents, etc.
Safety technology: Machine safety. Hazard identification. Principles
of machine guarding. Boilers and pressure vessels. Safe working
practices. Fire and explosion. Use of flammable and explosive
substances. Chemical safety. Handling, chemical safety, hazard
identification storage and transport of dangerous and toxic chemicals.
MP724 Chemical Engineering Design
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, practical work and
examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To acquaint the student with the responsibilities of the
professional chemical engineer and some of the issues he or she may
have to confront.
A separate segment seeks to consolidate the student's previous work
in computer oro~ramming - by . applying ... - it to problems relevant to his
or her future' career.
Comouter-aided desian: The use of software ~ackaaes for
flows'heeting, flowsheet preparation and layout; 'exersses in
preparation of computer solutions to problems in momentum, heat and
mass transfer.
Textbook
Ross. G. Computer Programming Examples for Chemical Engineers.
Amsterdam: Elsevier, 1987
MP751 Design Applications
Five hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Assignments, practical work and
examination
A subject in the graduate diploma course in chemical engineering.
Aim: To apply the theories of heat and mass transfer studied in the
fourth year of the course, to the design of equipment for the operations
listed below.
Industrial applications of heat and momentum transfer.
Diffusional operations: Drying, crystallisation, water cooling and
humidification.
Single and multi-effect evaporator systems; thermal and mechanical
recompression. Operation, control and economics of evaporation
systems.
Similarity studies - mixing.
Textbook
Treybal. R.E. Mass Transfer Operations. 3rd edn, (SI Units), New York:
McGraw Hill. 1983
Reference
Norman, W.S. Absorption, Distillation and Cooling Towers. London:
Longmans, 1962
SK297
Computer Programming
One hour per week for two semesters
Assessment: Test and assignment
A second-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing and
mechanical engineering.
The subject teaches the development of structured programming
techniques in PASCAL and FORTRAN. Supporting studies in operating
systems, compilers, editors, linkers, etc. are included.
Texts and references will be given by the lecturer at the beginning of
the course.

SK396
Computer Science
Two hours per week for one semester
Assessment: Test and assignment
A subject in the third year of the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
The subject introduces the use of computer systems in the
manufacturing environment. It consists of a selection of topics from
the following areas:
Computer architecture, database management and des~gn (including
relat~onal databases) and specific ~a~kaCleS, such as spreadsheets.
which are of particular value in manufacturing engineering.
Text and references will be given by the lecturer at the commencement
of the course.
SM191 Computations
Three hours per week for first semester and
two hours per week for second semester
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying,
intended to develop manipulative skills in mathematics and computing
techniques for use in later subjects.
Statistics: data presentation and interpretation; regression, correlation;
distributions: statistical inference.
Calculus: functions: qraohs; differentiation; integration methods; partial
differentiation; beatii iheory; centro~ds: second moments 01 area.
Aooroximate intearatlon: Simoson methods. Linear algebra: - matrices.
sohtion of systeh of equations.
Financial mathematics. Network analysis. Applied geometry and
trigonometry.
Elementary digital programming using a procedural language:
language syntax (BASIC or FORTRAN); program and data structure;
programming elementary applications, algorithms and programs for
some of the mathematics material described above, selected exercises
directly relevant to building surveying.
References
Bland, J.A. Statistics for Construction Students. New York: Longman,
1985
Dobinson, J. Mathematics for Technology. Vols. 1 and 2,
Harrnondsworth: Penguin. 1972
Greer, A. and Taylor, G.W. Mathematics for Technicians Level 11: Building
Construction Mathematics. Cheltenham: Thornes, 1980
Jones, M.K. Construction Mathematics. Vols. 1 and 2, London:
Longman, 1972
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM199 Engineering Mathematics
Three hours per week throughout the year
A first-year subject in all degree courses in engineering which covers
the basic mathematical knowledge considered to be minimally
essential for an adequate understanding of the concurrent first-year
studies in engineering.
The subject presents some additional material relevant to later
engineering studies which will enable those students with ability and
interest to develop further their mathematical knowledge and skills.
Functions, differentiation, inteqration methods. aoolications of
differentiation and integration, infinite series, complex nuinbers, hyper-
bolic functions. differential eauations. analvtical aeometrv. functions
of more than one variable, lihear a~~ebra,~num&ical m6thods.
References
Berkey, D. Calculus. 2nd edn, New York: Saunders College, 1988
Shenk. A. Calculus and Analvtic Geometw. 4th edn. Glenview: Scott.
~oresman, 1988
Thomas, G. and Finney, R. Calculus and Analytic Geometry 7th edn,
Reading: Addison-Wesley, 1988.
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM199A Mathematics Alternate
Five hours per week for first semester, four hours per
week for second semester, excluding the first two weeks
of each semester which will be seven hours per week.
A first-year mathematics subiect for the Special Entry program.
The subject covers the basic mathematical~know~ed~e considered to
be minimallv essential for an adeauate understandina of the
concurrent f;r~t-~ear studies in engineering, but also covers extra
mathematical groundwork.
The subject presents some additional material relevant to later
engineering studies which will enable those students with ability and
interest to develop further their mathematical knowledge and skills.
Functions, differentiation, integration methods, applications of
differentiation and integration, infinite series, complex numbers,
hyperbolic functions, differential equations, analytical geometry,
functions of more than one variable, linear algebra, numerical
methods.
Textbook
Watson. R.. Ardley, J., Watson, K. and Trueman, D. Space and Number:
Sydney: McGraw-Hill, 1989
References
Berkey, D. Calculus. 2nd edn, New York: Saunders College, 1988
Shenk, A. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. 4th edn, Glenview: Scott,
Foresman, 1988
Thomas, G. and Finney, R. Calculus and Analytic Geometry 7th edn,
Reading: Addison-Wesley, 1988
Rade. L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM293 Engineering Mathematics
Three hours per week of lectures and practical
workshops practice for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in civil engineering.
Integration-integration methods, plane polar coordinates, double
integrals and applications, cylindrical and spherical coordinates, triple
integrals and applications.
Vector Calculus - scalar and vector fields, gradient of a scalar field,
the potential, surface integrals, flux of a vector field. divergence Gauss'
theorem, continuity of fluid flow, line integrals. curl, Stokes theorem,
introduction to fluid dynamics.
Linear Algebra - Orthogonal Matrices, eigenvalued problems, real
symmetric matrices and applications.
Statistics - review of data analysis, probability distributions for discrete
variates and continuous variates, sampling distributions. The t
distribution, F and Chi-Square hypothesis testing, goodness of fit,
ANOVA (One and Two-way), correlation and simple regression,
experimental design. Minitab package used.
Operations research chosen from queuing theory and linear
programming.
Textbook
Hogg, R.V. and Ledolter, J. Engineering Statistics. NY: MacMillan. 1989
References
Stroud, K.A. Further Engineering Mathematics. London: MacMillan,
19R6 .-""
Thomas, B.T. Jr. and Finney, R.L. Calculus and Analytical Geometry.
7th edn, Addison Wesley, 1988
Bajpai, A.C., Calus, J.M. and Fairley, J.A. Statistical Methods for
Engineers and Scientists. New York: Wiley, 1978
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1988
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. Minitab Handbook. 2nd edn,
Boston: Duxbury Press, 1985
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM294 Engineering Mathematics
Four hours per week of integrated instruction and
practice for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Multiple integration and co-ordinate systems, Laplace transforms.
Fourier series, Fourier transforms, vector fields, special functions.
partial differential equations, probability and statistics.
References
Kreyzig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1988
Rade, L. and Westergren, 0. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990

SM295 Engineering Mathematics
-
Six hours per week for five weeks, seven hours per
week for nine weeks
A subject in the bridging program for engineering students from S.E.
Asia.
Vector geometry, functions of more than one variable, partial
differentiation, differential equations.
Statistics, multiple integration, vector calculus, linear algebra.
References
Hogg, R.V. and Ledolter, J. Engineering Statistics. N.Y.: MacMillan, 1989
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1988
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM299 Engineering Mathematics
Three hours per week of integrated instruction and
practice for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing and
mechanical engineering.
Integration-integration methods, plane polar coordinates, double
integrals and applications, cylindrical and spherical coordinates, triple
integrals and applications.
Vector Calculus - scalar and vector fields, gradient of a scalar field,
the potential, surface integrals, flux of a vector field, divergence Gauss'
theorem, continuity of fluid flow, line integrals, curl, Stokes theorem,
introduction to fluid dynamics, introduction to tensors and tensor
notation.
Linear Algebra - Orthogonal Matrices, eigenvalue problems, real
symmetric matrices and applications.
Statistics - review of data analysis, probability, probability distributions
for discrete variates and continuous variates, sampling distributions.
The t distribution, F and Chi-Square, hypothesis testing, goodness of
fit, ANOVA (One and Two-way), correlation and simple regression,
experimental design. Minitab package used.
Differential Equations - revision of differential equations, Laplace
transforms, solution of differential equations by Laplace transforms,
solution of differential equations by series, applications.
Textbook
Hogg, R.V and Ledolter, J. Engineering Statistics. N.Y.: MacMillan, 1989
References
Stroud, D.A. Engineering Mathematics. 3rd edn, London: MacMillan,
1987
Sriud. K.A. Further Engineering Mathematics. London: MacMillan.
1986
Thomas. G.B. and Finney, R.L. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. 7th
edn. London: Addison Wesley, 1988
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1988
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. Minitab Handbook. 2nd edn,
Boston: Duxbury Press, 1985
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM393 Engineering Mathematics
Two hours per week of integrated instruction and practice
for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in civil engineering.
Numerical solution of linear and non linear algebraic equations,
introduction to finite difference methods for ordinary and partial
differential equations, applications. Fourier Series and partial
differential equations.
References
Smith, G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Finite
Difference Methods. 3rd edn. Oxford: Clarendon. 1985
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wilev. 1988
~reenber~, M.D. Foundations of Applied Mathematics. Englewood
Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice Hall. 1978
Hausler, E.P. Lepack User's Guide and Software. Version 2, Hawthorn:
SIT, 1989
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
Faculty of Englnwrlng
SM394 Engineering Mathematics
Three hours per week of integrated instruction and
practice for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in electrical engineering.
Numerical methods - numerical solution of linear and non linear
algebraic equations, introduction to finite difference methods for
ordinary and partial differential equations, applications.
Z Transforms - An introduction to the Z-transform and its properties.
Discrete mathematics - mathematical logic, counting methods,
recurrence relations, applications.
Prescribed course material
Hausler, E.P. Lepack User's Guide and Software, Version 2, Hawthorn:
SIT. 1989
~tejner, J.M. and Clarke, G.T. Discrete Mathematics, 1991
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM395 Engineering Mathematics
Three hours per week of integrated instruction and
practice for one semester
A third-year subject in the degree course in manufacturing
engineering.
Fourier series and partial differential equations. Numerical solution
of linear and non-linear algebraic equations, introduction to finite
difference methods for ordinary and partial differential equations,
applications.
References
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wiley, 1988
Smith, G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Finite
Difference Methods. 3rd edn, Oxford: Clarendon, 1985
Hauser, E.P. Lepack User's Guide and Software. Version 2, Hawthorn:
SIT -. ., 19RQ .---
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd
Krieger, 1990
SM399 Engineering Mathematics
edn,
~hree hours per-week of integrated instruction and
practice for one semester
A third year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Fourier series and partial differential equations. Numerical solutions
of linear and non-linear algebraic equations. Finite difference method
for ordinary differential equations. Matrix calculus. Linear
programming.
References
Bronson, R. Matrix Methods. 2nd edn, San Diego: Academic Press,
1991
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn, New York:
Wilev ,. 1988
Smith, G.D. Numerical Solution of krtial Differential Equations. 3rd edn,
Oxford: Clarendon, 1985
Hausler, E.P. Lepack User's Guide and Software. Version 2, Hawthorn:
SIT. 1989
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM493 Engineering Mathematics
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the fourth year of the degree course in civil engineering.
Introduction to finite element methods; approximation, basis functions,
quadrature, weighted residual methods, ordinary and partial differential
equations.
References
Davies, A.J. The Finite Element Method: A First Approach. Oxford:
Oxford University, 1980
Easton, A.K., Robb, P.J. and Singh, M. Approximation and the Finite
Element Method. 1991
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990

SM494 Engineering Mathematics
Two hours per week of integrated instruction and practice
for one semester
A fourth-year subject in all streams of the degree course in electrical
engineering.
Orthogonal curvilinear coordinates, linear systems, functions of a
complex variable, applications.
References
Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables with an
Introduction to Conformal MaD~ino and its AD~lications. , . Schaum
Outllne Series. New York: ~c&a;~ill, 1974
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SM499 Engineering Mathematics
Two hours per week of integrated instruction and practice
for one semester
A fourth-year subject in the degree course in mechanical engineering.
Introduction to finite element methods; approximation, basis functions.
quadrature, weighted residual methods, ordinary and partial different~al
equations.
References
Davies, A.J. The Finite Element Method: A First Approach. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1980
Easton. A.K.. Robb. PJ. and Sinah, - M. Approximation . .
and the Finite
~lement ~ethod. 1991
Rade, L. and Westergren, 8. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
Statistics and Reliability
Two hours per week for one semester
A subject in the graduate diploma course in risk management.
Frequency distributions; mean, median, mode, measures of
dispersion. Probability. Probability distributions; Binomial, Normal,
Poisson and Weibull. Tests of hypothesis and significance. Reliability
mathematics; meantime between failures, failure rates, mortality
curves, cumulative probability distributions. Boolean algebra and
introduction to Fault Free applications. Review of applicable
computational techniques.
References
Bajpai, A.C., Calus, J.M., Fairley, J.A. Statistical Methods for Engineers
and Scientists. New York: Wilev. 1978
0'&or. FDT. Practical ~eliab;~ty . Engineering. - 2nd edn, Chichester:
Wiley, 1985
Rade, L. and Westergren, B. Beta Mathematics Handbook. 2nd edn,
Krieger, 1990
SP191
Building Science
Three hours per week for one semester
A first-year subject in the diploma course in building surveying, which
introduces students to basic scientific principles underlying the
behaviour of physical and chemical systems.
Measurement: quantities, units, SI.
Waves: types, propagation, speed, reflection, transmission.
interference, standing waves, forced oscillations, resonance. Thermal
physics: temperature, heat, internal energy, first law of thermodynamics,
thermai conductivity, specific heat, calorimetry, adiabatic
and isothermal processes.
Optics: mirrors, lenses, diffraction, resolution, optical instruments.
Physics of the solid state: crystal structure, lattice parameters, bonding
of ctystals; force-separation and potential energy - separation curves;
equilibrium atomic separation. Structure and subdivisions of matter:
atoms, and molecules; compounds and chemical reactions; acids,
bases, oxidation, reduction principles of corrosion; the chemical
processes involved in: the formation and weathering of soils, the
constituents and treatment of natural water and domestic effluents from
a chemical viewpoint. Simple treatment of air pollution.
The practical work supplements the lectures. Students are placed in
practical situations in order to encourage logical thinking in the simple
treatment of air pollution.
SP294
Engineering Physics
Two hours of lectures per week for two semesters
A second-year subject in the degree course in electr~cal engineering.
Relativity: Inertial frames, covariance, constancy of speed of light,
special relativity, space-time, mass and energy.
Quantum mechanics: Quantum phenomena, wave-particle duality,
probability and wave functions. Schroedinger's equation and
applications. Heisenberg uncertainty principle.
Solid state physics: Many body quantum mechanics, quantum
statistics. Conduction in metals, zone and band theories, intrinsic semiconductors.
Extrinsic semi-conductors and devices.
Optics: Lasers and other light sources, modulators and detectors.
Optical fibres as sensors and in communications. Holography and
holographic devices.
Nuclear physics: Nuclear structure, properties, stability and reactions.
Fission, fusion and nuclear power.
Textbook
Eisberg, R.M. and Resnick, R. Quantum Physics of Atoms, Molecules,
Solids, Nuclei, and Particles. 2nd edn, New York: Wiley, 1985
SP4190 Occupational Hygiene and Safety
Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment by examination and assignments
A subject in the graduate d~ploma course in chemical engineering.
Environmental hazards
Accident prevention. Work-related injuries including tenosynovitis, back
and muscle injuries. Relationship of physical defects to employee
safety. Stress in the workplace, measurement and alleviation.
Noise and vibration. Physics of sound. Measurement and bio-effects.
Hazard recognition, evaluation and control.
Heat and ventilation. Measurement of dusts and fumes, bio-effects.
Body temperature regulation, effects of heat and cold.
Radiation: ionising and non-ionising (including ultra-violet, visible light,
infra-red, radio frequency and lasers). Identification and bio-effects.
Hazard assessment and control.
Toxicology
Toxic substances, mechanisms of action and pathogenic effects
[carcinoaensis, mutaqenesis, teratoqenesis). Use of mammals and
sub-mammalian syst&-ns in predicting and assessing toxic effects in
humans.
Routes of ingestion of toxic substances including heavy metals,
benzene, PCB solvents, organic chemicals, silica, asbestos, allergens
and pesticides.
Evaluation and control measures.
Safety technology
Machine safety. Hazard identificar~on. Principles of machine guarding.
Assessment of dangers and guarding arrangements. Boilers and
pressure vessels. Safety deuces (valves, gauges, alarm systems). Safe
working practices.
Fire and explosion. Use of flammable and explosive substances. Risks
assessment. Fire precautions.
Chemical safety. Handling, chemical safety, hazard indentification.
Storage and transport of dangerous and toxic chemicals.

School of Design
Head
D.G. Murray, BA(Graphic Design)(SIT), llTC
Principal Lecturer
C.J. Austin, BA(Graphic Design)(SIT)
Senior Lecturers
J. Bassani, DipArt B. Design(Prahran), GradDipEd
S. Huxley, DipArt & Design(Bristol), CGLl CertPictGraphics
1 and P(London) GradDipEd
Lecturers
PE. Blair, DipArt(Graphic Design)(RMIT). GradDipEd
D. Bryans, BA(Graphic Design)(SIT), DipEd
C.E. Condell. BAlGra~hic DesionMSIT). DioEd
F.E. lees son; BA~MOI~), ~~d(~slbj '. '
P. Gajree, DipEd(Haw), OAM, FBIPP(England), FPSA(USA).
MFIAP(Belgium), FMPA(Lon), Hon, FRPS(England),
AAIPP(Aust)
R. Jones, BA(ANU)
R.F. Kinnane
~.~~ueckenhausen, GradDip(lndustria1 Design)(RMIT), DipEd
R.A. Newbound, CertPrint
T. Steet, BA(Graphic Design)(SIT), CATD(London)
M.C. Van Geloven, Drs(Amst), MAPsS
D.M. Whitehouse. ALAA. BAHons(LaTrobe). MA
Computer Systems Officer
C.A. Higman
Courses offered
Diploma of Art (Graphic Design)
Bachelor of Arts (Graphic Design)
* At the time of publication it is likely that the courses
in Graphic Design and Industrial Design at present offered
on the Prahran campus of Victoria College may become
part of the Swinburne Institute of Technology as from
January 1,1992. For further informatlon, ring the Prahran
campus on 805 3333.
Assessment
Each year of the course is taken as a whole and in order to
qualify, an overall pass must be achieved on the year's work.
A Faculty Pass may be awarded under exceptional circumstances.
The School Board is the final authority for deciding
passes or failures in any of the examinations for the School
of Design. The Faculty of Arts has responsibility for the processing
of academic awards for the School of Design.
Examinations
Students must enter for all subjects in a particular year of the
course except where an exemption has been approved or
electives offered.
The form of the examination and the content of the project
work (assigned projects) will be determined b the panel of
examiners and moderators appointed by the Jchool Board.
General conditions
Swinburne reselves the right to retain any work executed by
students as part of their course studies. Work not required
may be claimed by the student after it has been assessed.

Diploma of Art (Graphic Design)
~020 First and second years
GO40 Third year
3 years full-time
The aim of the diploma course is to train designers to work
effectively in areas where information is conveyed by visual
means, such as advertising, publishing, publicity, printing,
merchandising, education and some research projects. The
course is planned to produce imaginative designers, who, with
specialisation and experience in industry, should achieve positions
commensurate with their individual talents.
The first two years of the course are common to each of the
diplomddegree streams but in the final diploma year, a
number of special bias studies are offered, including photography
and three-dimensional design.
Entrance requirements
VCE prerequisite studies: English Units 3 and 4 to be included
in the "best four".
Art or art related subjects.
Note: Art studies undertaken subsequent to a satisfactorily
completed VCE qualification should not be regarded as a
prerequisite, however these studies may enhance an
applicant's chance of entry.
Special requirements: All applicants, including those from
interstate and overseas, must participate in a preselection
program and attend an interview and folio presentation in
December if required. This program requires applicants to
submit copies of slides of work and a written response to
questions. Applicants required for interview should bring a
folio of their own work which indicates a preparation and ability
to undertake this course and be able to demonstrate an
awareness of the course content and career opportunities.
All applicants who specify an art course, either graphic design
or film and television at this Institute, must follow carefully
the procedure for enrolment, which is given with dates and
other details in the Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre
publication, Guide to Courses in Colleges and Universities. This
is published in August, and distributed to all secondary
schools, or is available on application to the Victorian Tertiary
Admissions Centre, 40 Park Street, South Melbourne 3205,
telephone 690 7977. Please refer to 'Application procedure',
in the general section of this Handbook.
Mature-age applicants apply direct to Swinburne. All
applicants without resident status must apply direct to
Swinburne.
All overseas applicants, including Australian citizens, must
be able to attend for interview, if required.
Applications for second year and higher must be made direct
to Swinburne and not through VTAC.
Course structure
GO20
First year
~~101- Assigned Projects 1
FIG111 History of Arts 1
RG112 Media (two semesters)
RG140 '~esuli of Studies '
Semester
hours
GO20
Second year
RG201 Assigned Projects 2 320
RG211 History of Arts 2 32
RG223 Fehavioural Studies (two semesters) 32
RG240 Result of Studies
School of Design
GO40
Third year
RG301 Assigned Projects 3 320
RG335 Art and Design Culture (two semesters) 48
RG322 Print Technology (one semester) 32
RG340 'Result of Studies
Note:
Results will be published for each subject and for the year as a whole.
"Result of Studies is not a subject, but is a clear-cut decision on the
student's total success or otherwise in the year's studies (see under
'Assessment').
Bachelor of Arts (Graphic Design)
GO20 First and second years
GO50 Third and fourth years
GO60 Fourth year conversion diplomaldegree
4 years cooperative
The aim of the degree course is to meet the present and future
needs of industry, and to train people with a high degree of
creative ability for positions of administrative responsibility
in the areas of direction and production of printing, publishing,
computer-based production techniques, advertising, education
and information design.
At the completion of the second year, students are selected
for the degree course. They are required to spend the whole
of the third year working in an industrial situation organised
by Swinburne. This arrangement conforms to the Y structure
under the cooperative education system. This third year
enables the student to begin professional practice and is
supervised by senior staff.
During the year in industry, students are required to attend
the Institute for two sessions per week for theoretical subjects:
Print Technology and Art and Design Culture.
In the final year, in addition to Assigned Projects 4, Design
Management is studied at Swinburne.
1 Year Degree Conversion
Diploma students who achieve a high pass are eligible to
apply for degree conversion.
This means they will spend the fourth year in the Swinburne
Design Centre undertaking Professional Commissions from
industry as well as studying Design Management.
Course structure
GO20
First and second year
(common to both diploma and degree)
GO50
Third year
Semester
(4% days in industry) hours
RG303 Industrial Year
RG335t Art and Design Culture (two semesters) 48
RG322t yrint Technology (one semester) 32
RG341 Result of Studies
tsubjects to be taken by part-time study.
GO50
Fourth year
(full-time at the Institute)
RG410 Assigned Projects 4 336
RG490 Fesign Management (one semester) 32
RG441 Result of Studies
GO60
Fourth year conversion diplomaldegree
RG410 Assigned Projects 4 (Professional) 384
RG490 Design Management (one semester) 32
RG303 Industrial Year
RG441 'Result of Studies
Note:
Results will be published for each subject and for the year as a whole.
'Result of Studies is not a subject, but is a clear-cut decision on the
student's total success or otherwise in the year's studies (see under
'Assessment').

Explanation of course structure
vpsr Degree (cooperative) Degree (conversion)
. -".
4
Year -
3
- Year
2
VCE or equivalent
C Full time study at Swinburne
Experience in industry
or professiona1 practice
Distinction between diploma and degree
courses
The diploma stream is for a student with specific abilities, i.e.
as an executant working to specific briefs and producing work
of a unique and individual character.
The degree course requires a student to have a greater ability
in conceptual thinking, together with proven abilities in handling
complex problems in visual communication. Maturity, responsibility,
leadership, planning and organisational skills are
expected but not necessarily "unique' technical skills of a
high order.
1989 GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDENT AWARDS
All years - Maurice Cantlon Memorial
Drawing Prize, $300
1st year - Tomasetti Award, $500
2nd year - Tomasetti Award, $500
Margery Withers Scholarship, $200
3rd year - Emery Vincent Award, $500
Hawthorn Football Club, $600
4th year Conv. - FHA Design Award
4th year Coop . FHA Design Award
Graduating student - PakPacific Paperboard
Packaging, $500
Graphic Design diplomaldegree subject
details
A. this course is subject to restructuring, changes may occur.
First year
RG181 Assigned Projects 1
Twenty hours practical per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
Assigned projects refer to a mrdinated three-year work program with
specific emphasis on an individual creative approach to solving communication
problems principally of a graphic nature. Students are
encouraged to develop their own personal style through soundlyreasoned,
skilfully-executed assignments and to communicate the
solutions in a way most likely to ensure acceptance and successful
implementation. Group assignments also allow students to develop
a broader understanding and-appreciation of other students' particular
abilities.
A sequential program of applied design and communication projects
is directed at developing a general awareness of visual aspects of the
students' environment and facility for ciiical objective analysis.
Specific study areas include:
Desian ---. .-
The o%ject is to equip students with a 'design vocabulary' to allow
creative expression in areas of two and three dimensions. As the year
progresses, design projects increasingly Interact with drawing, photoaraohv
and desian for orint. In this wav students develoo an aoore-
Gafiol; and coGpeten'ce over a broad range of conimunic'ation
problems.
Photography.
A comprehensive introduction to still-photography as a creative
medium aimed at cultivating visual awareness through study of controlled
lighting, spatial relationships, form, product and fashion photography,
photo-journalism, photo-reproduction techniques (e.g. developing
and printing), pictorial editing, various colour processes and
costing.
Design for print
Introduction to a comprehensive study over the three years of the
course, which includes reproduction of lettering. typographic and
symbol design, illustration, and all aspects of p.roduction with particular
emphasis on experimental work In offset lithography and screen
printing.
Drawina -
~r~andi;~ vision through assignments whlch develop control of drawina
as a discipline for research and invention. Subiect matter includes
the figure, perspective, object drawing and natuial forms.
Textbooks
Students are advised not to purchase textbooks or references until
classes commence.
RGlll History of Arts 1
Two hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisites, nil
Assessment is continuous
This subject explores art and design, photography and popular culture
ranaina from Neo-Classicism and the Industrial Revolution throuah
~06aGicism. Arts and Crafts, Post impressionalism, Art Nouveau aid
Modernism to finally Dada and Surrealism and their attacks on the
establishment.
As well as studying the work of individual artists and designers the
course looks at ihemes such as gender and class, and the impact of
wlitical and social theories, especiallv those of Marx and Freud.
The cross-over between Western and non-Western cultures are
considered along with the themes of imperialism, nationalism and
utopia in Australian and Japanese Art.
The assignments are designed to develop conceptual and analytical
skills and consist of a combination of written, visual and oral
components with an emphasis being placed on creativity.
Recommended reading
Rosenblum, R. and Janson, H.W. Art of the Nineteenth Century.
London: Thames and Hudson, 1984
Sparke. I? Design in Context London: Bloornsbury, 1987

*RG112 Media
Two hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
In this subject, the aim is to expand graphic artists' range of communicatlon
media relevant to their orofession. It includes examlnatlon and
discussion on techniques of present-day media; film, N and video,
radio, theatre, newspapers, publishing and other print media.
Both written and practical assignments are required throughout the
year. There is also a major assignment involving consistent monitoring
of current media programs.
Second year
RG201 Assigned Projects 2
Twenty hours practical per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG140 Result of Studies 1
Assessment is continuous
This program constitutes a bridge between the formative studies of
the first year and the closely-applied studies of third year. The aim
of the second year is to bring the student to a professional standard
of competence in the illustrative, typographic, written and oral presentation
of ideas, in the arrangement of sequential information embracing
publishing, advertising, sales promotion, merchandising and public
relations, also for non-commercial areas such as education and com-
munlty organlsatlons. Study areas Include - des~gn, photography.
methods of oroduct~on. tv~09raDhv. hlstorv of arts and ~svcholo~v
Instead of studying these'suGeck in isolatibn, the aim is.toSintegr$e
them into compoGte communication problems wherever possible.
RG211 History of Arts 2
Two hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG140 Result of Studies 1
Assessment is continuous
This subject explores the developments in art and design from the
post World War II era through to Post Modernism and the 1980s.
The first semester concentrates on different theories of symbology and
the manner in which visual imagery; painting, graphics, advertising,
etc., use symbolic language to convey messages about the political.
psychic, social and cultural values of our society. Current issues of
design theory are also explored.
Second semester begins with Abstract Expressionism, moves on to
Assemblage, Performance Art and Earthworks, explores the 1960s
boom in Popular Culture, and looks at Post Modernist themes in art,
design and architecture.
Recommended reading
Fry, T. Design History Australia. Sydney: Hale & Iremonger, 1988
Pollock, G. Vision and Difference. London: Routledge, 1988
*RG223 Behavioural Studies
Two hours per week for two semesters
Assessment is continuous
Apart from specific study of the basic psychology text, class activities
focus on experiential learning. To this end an active participation in
seminar-type discussions is required. These sessions will deal with
self-awareness as a basis to communication, communication skills,
assertiveness training, the use of relevant learning theories in
modifying behaviour and physiological factors relevant to personal
growth and development such as relaxation, nutrition and
stress-reduction.
Textbook
Avery, G. and Baker, E. Psychology at Work. Sydney: Prentice-Hall.
1984
Funding implications may mean that the School might not be able
to offer one or other of these subjects in a given year.
Diploma in Graphic Design
School of Design
Third year
RG301 Assigned Projects 3
Twenty hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
N.B. Additional work required outside scheduled hours.
including evenings and weekends
The final-year student is encouraged to move towards one of the main
studies with the aim of producing solutions to advanced problems of
communication design at a professional level, e.g. advertising des~gn
in various graphic media, publication design, corporate image design
and educational technology. Special bias studies are offered, including
photography, illustration; three-dimensional design, audio-visual and
publication design.
RG335 Art and Design Culture
Three hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
N.B. It is expected that for students to satisfactorily
complete this subject, additional time will be required
to visit galleries, exhibitions and performances
The study aims to facilitate a first-hand experience of art and design
culture and the place it occupies within the functioning of our society.
Various levels of cultural experience, encircling the personal, the
professional and the academic, will be explored. Regular outings to
exhibitions, performances, films, seminars and publ~c forums form a
major component of the program.
As part of the assessment students will create an experiential diary
consisting of a combination of written and visual elements.
RG322 Print Technology
- ~
Two hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
Advanced studies of photo-mechanical and direct-printing procedures.
Photo-engraving, letterpress, offset lithography, roto-gravure, silkscreen,
type identification, indication and specification, the point
system, copy-casting, proof-reading, copy preparation techniques,
practical exercises in direct impression and digitised photo-typesetting,
for book, advertising and display typography. Cost estimating, mechanical
art procedures, production control, paper consideration. Visits
to production houses are arranged.
Degree in Graphic Design
Third year
RG303 Industrial Year
Two semesters industrial experience
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
(See 'Y' chart.)
RG335 Art and Design Culture
Three hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
N.B. It is expected that for students to satisfactorily
complete this subject, additional time will be required
to visit galleries, exhibitions and performances
The study aims to facilitate a first-hand experience of art and design
culture and the place it occupies within the functioning of our society.
Various levels of cultural experience, encircling the personal, the
professional and the academic, will be explored. Regular outings to
exhibitions, performances, films, seminars and public forums form a
major component of the program.
As part of the assessment students will create an experiential diary
consisting of a combination of written and visual elements.

RG322 Print Technology
Two hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, RG240 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
Investigations into the theory and application of modern print tech-
nology. It is not intended that this course will go deeply into the electrc
n~cs, mechanics or chemistry of prlntlng, but rather explore the poss~bt!~t~es
for des~an, product~on and d~strlbutlon created by modern
reproluction mGhods. These include type composition, photomechanical
processes (offset, screen, letterpress and gravure), and
studies of paper and other stocks.
This course will include the economics of production and relate to
sections of the course in business administration.
Fourth year
RG410 Assigned Projects 4
Eighteen hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, RG341 Result of Studies 3
Assessment is continuous
N.B. Additional work required outside scheduled hours,
including evenings and weekends
Working in a professional atmosphere, emphasis is given to developing
the student's special capabilities through assigned professional projects
or self-defined problems, culminating in a major design
assignment.
RG490 Design Management
Two hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite, RG341 Result of Studies 3
Assessment is continuous
The aim of this subject is to give students a general understanding
of the business environment with an emphasis on management in the
visual communication industry.
Specific course objectives are:
To develop an understanding of graphic design management including
s'etting-up and managing a design office, working with clients
and graphic design project management.
To develop skills in presentation and articulation of ideas.
To gain experience in solving design management problems.
To develop skills in written business communication and report
writing.
Aspects of the theory is incorporated in assigned project work of the
cooperative degree stream and the professional practice of the Graphic
Design Centre (degree conversion).
Students are required to submit two major written assignments based
on information presented in the tutorials by the course co-ordinator
and guest lecturers.

Academic staff ......................................................
Courses offered ....................................................
Assessment ..........................................................
Examinations ........................................................
Bachelor of Arts (Film and Television) ...................
Graduate Diploma in Film and Television ..............
Scholarships and Awards ......................................
Subject details
-Bachelor of Arts (Film and Television) ................
-Graduate Diploma of Film and Television ...........
General Information .............................................
Swinburne Institute Information ..........................

Film and Television School
Academic staff
Head
J. Sabine, BA(ANU)
Senior Lecturers
J.E. Bird, DipArt(SIT), TTTC
C. McGill
P. Tammer, BA(Melb)
Lecturers
D. Atkinson, DipArt(S1T)
N. Bell
H. Burton. BEd(MSC)
N. Ghazarian, GradDipArt(AppF&TV)(SIT)
D. Price, BArch(RMIT), GradDipEd(H1E)
Film and Television School
Bachelor of Arts (Film and Television)'
Graduate Diploma in Film and Television'
* From January 1 1992 these courses will be
administered by the Victorian College of the Arts.
Assessment
Each year of the course is taken as a whole and in order to
qualify, an overall pass must be achieved on the year's work.
A Faculty Pass may be awarded in the event of failure in one
theory subject. This allows a student to progress to the next
stagelyear of the course. However, the failed theory subject,
or its equivalent, must subsequently be completed satisfactorily,
in addition to all other subjects, in order to meet the
requirements for the award of a diploma or degree.
If the subject or subjects are not completed successfully within
two years, the complete set of final examinations must be
attempted again.
Examinations
Students must enter for all subjects in a particular year of the
course except where an exemption has been approved or
electives offered.
The form of the examination and the content of the project
work (assigned projects) will be determined by the panel of
examiners and moderators appointed . . by the Film and
Television School.
General conditions
Swinburne reserves the right to retain any work executed by
students as part of their course studies. Work not required
may be claimed by the student after it has been assessed.
The Film and Television School Board is the final authority
for deciding passes or failures in any of the examinations for
the Film and Television School.
F050 Bachelor of Arts (Film and
Television)
3 years full-time
Aims and objectives
1. To provide training to a professional level for creative
people who envisage working in the film and television
program production industry.
2. To facilitate the production by students of short film and
video programs of a high creative, technical and artistic
standard.
3. To provide training in script writing, production management,
directing, sound, lightinglcamera and editing
studies.
Entrance requirements
There are no prerequisite subjects.
Year 12 previously accredited by VISE: Recommended Group
1 subject:English
All Group 2 subjects will be considered.
Victorian Certificate of Education (Tertiary Orientation Program):
All students who have successfully completed a
VCE(T0P) course will be considered.
Applicants are initially required to undertake tests set each
year by the Selection Officer.
1. Write a script for a short film or video program on a
dramatic theme, and
2. Complete a sequence of images illustrating a dramatic
theme by predominantly visual means.
Following the assessment of the tests, selected applicants are
to attend an interview where they are required to:
1. Present examples of their creative work.
2. Demonstrate an awareness of the contents and requirements
of the course.
3. Provide academic reports.
Tests and interviews are conducted from October to December
of each year to qualify for entry. All applicants who specify
film and television at this Institute, must follow carefully the
procedure for enrolment, which is given with dates and other
details in the Victorian Tertiary Admissions Centre publication,
Guide to Courses in Colleges and Universities. This is
published in September, and distributed to all secondary
schools, or is available on application to the Victorian Tertiary
Admissions Centre, 40 Park Street, South Melbourne 3205,
telephone 690 7977. Please refer to 'Application procedure',
in the general section of this Handbook.
All applicants must be in Australia to participate in interviews
if required.
Course structure
First year
Hours
First semester (seventeen weeks)
RF150 Assigned Projects 1 272
RF160 History of Cinema 1 68
RF140 Script Writing 1 68
Second semester (seventeen weeks)
RF150 ?signed projects 1
RF170 Result of Studies 1
Second year
First semester (seventeen weeks)
RF250 Assigned Projects 2
RF260 History of Cinema 2
RF240 Script Writing 2
Second semester (seventeen weeks)
RF250 Assigned Projects 2 408
RF27O 'Result of Studies 2
Third year
First semester (seventeen weeks)
RF350 Assigned Projects 3 272
RF360 History of Cinema 3 68
RF330 Methods of Production 68

Second semester (seventeen weeks)
RF350 Assigned Projects 3
RF370 'Result of Studies 3
Results are published for each subject and for the year as a whole.
.Result of Studies is not a subject but a clear-cut decision on each
student's success or otherwise in the year's studies as a whole.
Film and Television School
Colour television, 16mm film and animation equipment are
408 provided.
Application forms
These are available from the Secretary, Film and Television
School, and must be returned by the date specified thereon.
Telephone 819 8328.
F080 Graduate Diploma in Film and
Television
1 year full-time
This course is offered to graduates who want to make objective
use of film, television or animation production skills.
Aims and objectives
1. To provide practical training in short program production
to a professional level in film or video or animation.
2. To provide training that would aid creative people to gain
employment in the film andlor television industries.
3. To facilitate the production by students of short programs
of a high technical and artistic standard.
Eligibility
Applicants are initially required to undertake tests set each
year by the Selection Officer.
1. Write a script for a short film or video program on a
dramatic theme, and
2. Complete a sequence of images illustrating a dramatic
theme by predominantly visual means.
Following the assessment of the tests, selected applicants are
to attend an interview where they are required to:
1. Present examples of their creative work.
2. Demonstrate an awareness of the contents and requirements
of the course.
3. Provide academic reports.
Selection tests and interviews are conducted from September
to November each year.
Applicants usually will have taken a first degree or diploma
in any discipline; in other words they need not have studied
film or television seriously. They should have, however, developed
some expertise in the field of science, fine art or the
arts, as it is usual to draw upon this knowledge when devising
program content. However, there does not have to be an
absolute connection between what a person has done in the
past and what they propose to do in the future.
A small number of 'mature-age entry' applicants, who are not
graduates, may be admitted if they have had substantial industrial
experience.
Those applying for the animation stream must have proven
graphic ability.
Quotas
Video
Film
Animation
In the three areas of specialisation offered, it is not possible
to transfer from one stream to another.
FILM AND TELEVISION SCHOOL
Scholarships and awards
The AAV Australia Pty. Ltd. J. Robert Fine
Memorial Scholarship of $5,000
DDB Needham Scholarship of $500
Film Victoria John Harrison Script Prize of $1,500
Filmhouse Scholarship of $2,500
Fuji Script Awards to 3 Second Year BA students
Jennifer Hooks $500 Script Award
Richard Bence $500 Script Award
Cinevex Script Awards to the value of $12,000
BASF (Agfa) Script Awards to 2 Third Year BA
students
Sony Script Awards to 2 Graduate Diploma video
students
Kodak Australasia Pty Ltd, $1,000
Best Achievement in Cinematography
Kodak Australasia Pty Ltd, $1,000
Best Achievement in Animation
Victorian Film Laboratories
Best Production in Film
Australian Film Commission, $1,000
Best Achievement in Screenplay
Soundfirm Pty. Ltd., $500
Best Achievement in Sound
Crawford Productions, $500
Best Production in Video
Mike Reed's Post Production, $750
Best Achievement in Editing
Sunrise Picture Company, $500
Most Daring and Outrageous Production
Erwin Radio Memorial Scholarship, $750
Best Achievement for a short film, video or animation in 1989
Hanimex: Stock Valued at $1,000
Best Achievement in Direction, Video
Hanimex: Stock Valued at $1,000
Best Achievement in Film
Course structure
Semester
hours
RF450 tssigned Projects (2 semesters) 408
R F470 Result of studies
Resources
Swinburne provides all usual equipment and assists with production
costs. Budget expenditure is determined by the
individual student subject to departmental approval.

Bachelor of Arts (Film and Television)
Subject details
First year
RF140 Script Writing 1
Sixtyeight hours during first semester
Prerequisites, nil
Assessment is continuous
Through lectures, dlscuss~ons and the screening and analysts of
moving o~ctures. the students examlne the relationshlo of movtna DICtures
tij'the broad spectrum of fine and performing arts in orde;ihat
the Inherent advantages and lim~tattons of the movtng plcture med~a
mav be a~oreclated. The ootentialit~es ava~lable to the screenwrlter
through manipulation of 'image, movement, time and sound are
examhed closely as IS characierisat~on, and the function of conflict.
olot and genre. A series of short wrttlno exercises is undertaken. These
hatters &cupy the first eight classes
Also commencing in week four and contlnutng for the balance of the
first sernester, each student undertakes the wrtting of a script suitable
for production in the second sernester. Progress is monitored at
tutorials.
RF150 Assigned Projects 1
Sixteen hours during first semester
Twenty-four hours per week in second semester
Prerequisites, nil
Assessment is continuous
In the first semester. lectures. demonstrations and tutorials in video
production techniques and technology lead to short practical exercises
lncludlng a product~on undertaken on locat~on. Working In crews and
rotat~na roles. each student exoertences the res~onslbllltles of scrl~t
writing:dire&ng, production management, sound recording and postproduction,
camera operation, lighting, art direction, continuity, videotaoe
. o~eration . and editing. -
In the second semester each student directs and edits a short v~deo
product~on that they have scripted in the first semester. The students
form crews for these D ~o~uc~Io~S.
The aim throughout is to facilitate the production of student programs
of a high artistic and technical standard.
RF160 History of Cinema 1
Sixty-eight hours during first semester
Prerequisites, nil
Assessment is continuous
History of Cinema 1 is an introductory course on the development of
narrative. its codes, conventions and structures from the silent era to
contemporary clnema. The films selected cover a broad and diverse
ranae of cinematic a~oroaches and stvles. and Include examoles of
films that adopt an approach to narraiive which deliberately undermines
or alters the conventional strategies of the cinema. The course
will introduce notions such as realism, the construction of ideology
and the relationship between the viewer and the film, through a
detailed account of cinematic technique. The course aims to provide
students with a cultural and critical overview of the cinema to complement
their work in film and television production.
Second year
RF240 Script Writing 2
Four hours per week in first semester
Prerequisite, AR170 Result of Studies 1
Assessment is continuous
The basic principles of dramatic structure are covered by dealing with
the themeithe story, plot, conflict, character deslgn, dynamic action.
context and busmess, imagery, movement, time and sequence, climax
and resolution. The aim then is for each student at the end of a tenweek
period to have wrltten an innovatwe script which will be the blueorant
for the maior film comoonent of Asslaned Proiects. The scrlot
should be lucid: engaging, i;lcorporate diskctive characters, action
and setting, have a strong narrative based in conflict and be fresh in
form and content.
RF250 Assigned Projects 2
Sixteen hours per week in first semester
Twenty-four hours per week in second semester
Prerequisite, AR170 Result of Studies 1
Assessment is continuous
During the first semester students undertake introductory studies In
film technology and production covering lighting, camera operation,
wild and synchronous sound recording, mixing and laying sound
tracks, editing, titles, continuity, A & B roll, neg matching and laboratory
services, producing, production management and direction.
During the initial short exercises the students gain technical control
of the medium before embarking on more complex group productions.
They change their crewing roles from production to production until
they are familiar with all the major functions of a film crew.
By the end of the second semester each student will have finished
the production of their major project.
During second semester script tutorials will be conducted in preparation
for third year.
RF260 History of Cinema 2
Sixty-eight hours during first semester
Prerequisite, AR170 Result of Studies 1
Assessment is continuous
History of Clnema 2 1s des~gned to foreground certaln aspects of ftlm
~ost oroduct~on. The bulk of the course is focused on the soundtrack.
but ii also takes in aspects of editing and camera movement.
The course is divided into 3 sections: the first looking at how the
soundtrack organises the overall rhythm of a film; the second section
looks at how technical processes determine cinematic styles; and the
third section looks at the role the filmscore plays in modifying other
factors of the film process.
The movies selected are employed to highlight these facets of
soundtrack production so as to aid in the film student's perception
of sound and music in the cinema.
RF330 Methods of Production
Four hours per week in first semester
Prerequisite, AR270 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
Current developments in film and video technology are examined with
particular emphasis on areas in which new production techniques are
evolving.
Subsequently, master classes are conducted by specialists from industry
in subjects such as prosthetics and unconventional make-up, sound
recording, front projection, film editing, lighting and cinematography.
Students select and research a ~roduction area of s~ecial interest to
them. Each student presents a th~rty-mtnute lecture foilowed by a thirtymlnute
discussion on his or her selected tooic. Subseauentlv . . thev . each
refine their information into a 2000-word'essay.
RF350 Assigned Projects 3
Sixteen hours per week in first semester
Twenty-four hours per week in second semester
Prerequisite, AR27O Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
During the first semester technical and conceptual program productton
skills are broadened and deeoened through lectures. discussions.
tutorials, demonstrations, excukions, screehgs and analysis. ~uesi
lecturers from the film and television industry participate in this
process.
Concurrently each student undertakes the scrlpt writing for a program
of not more than twentv minutes durat~on. suitable for ~roduction in
the second sernester. Siudents attend scripi writing tutorials to develop
theme, plot and structure, characterisation and dialogue. The second
semester is devoted entirely to program production with the students
crewing for one another. However students may elect to specialise in
cinematography, sound, production management or editing.

RF360 History of Cinema 3
Sixty-eight hours in first semester
Prerequisite. AR270 Result of Studies 2
Assessment is continuous
While History of Cinema 3 expands on some of the issues raised in
first and second year the choice of film will be derived almost
exclusively from the period of the late 1950's to the present. The focus
will be on one or more of the so called modernist phases of
international ciniema i.e. French New Wave, New German Cinema,
New Japanese Cinema. American Cinema of Post-Hollywood Studio
Period etc.
The aim of the course is to study in some detail the transition period
from the classical style to the modernist style noting changes and
developments on the level of narrative form, mise-on-scene.
imagekound relationship and editing techniques.
Fllm and Television School
Film and Television graduate diploma subject
details
RF450
Assigned Projects
Twenty-four hours per week for two semesters
Prerequisite, nil
Assessment is continuous
Students admitted to the Graduate Dlpbma In Applled Film and Televis~on
- - undertake - - animation. film or v~deo. Droqram production studies.
Each of these strands of study has a sirnear aructure, but only script
writing is taught jointly. In the first semester the students study script
writing and production techniques. In the second semester each
student undertakes the production of a program, assuming responsibility
for the script, direction, and editing thereof. Students are also
expected to crew, where possible, on the productions of their
classmates.
Semester 1
Script writin
Eight four-hourTectures
Sixteen two-hour tutorials
All students anend eight lectures dealing with the advantages and limitations
of script writing. Areas covered include the dramatic potential
of image, movement, time and sound, manipulation, the principles of
characterisation, the benefits of conflict to a narrative, dramatic form.
structure and genre. Students undertake short Fnpt writing exercises.
Subsequently the students undertake the scrtpt writing of a major
project to be producedm the second semester. Dunng this phase of
writing their progress 1s monitored at tutorials.
Production techniques
Twenty hours per week for seventeen weeks
Lectures, demonstrations, screenings, and discussions.
The intent of these sessions is to impart practical program production
skills to animation, film and video students, respectively.
Semester 2
Production
Twenty-four hours per week for seventeen weeks
~uring second semester students work on thew major productions.
Thls involves a considerable amount of work outside of the scheduled
twenty-four hours per week, including evenings and weekends.

INDEX:
Academic Board ...................................................
Academic Statements ...........................................
. Access Education ..................................................
Acddent Insurance ...............................................
Accommodation. Student .....................................
Accounting
Budness lnformation Technology
(Graduate Certificate) ........................................
(Graduate Diploma) ............................................
CADICAM (Graduate Diploma) ..............................
Calendar . Important dates (see inslde front cover)
Campus
Geographic location ............................................
Map (see inside back cover)
Car Parks (see Parklng)
Bachelor of Business ...........................................
Graduate Diploma ............................................... Careers Sewices ...................................................
Administration. Student ........................................
Catering Department .............................................
Admission (see Entrance Requirements)
Aircondltioning (Graduate Diploma) ....................
Application Procedure
(see also Enrolment Regulations)
Undergraduate ....................................................
.......................................................
Postgraduate
Ap lied Colloid Sclence
8raduate Diploma
...............................................
Master of Applied Science ...................................
lled Sclence ....................................................
...............................................................
Faculty ................................................................
Subject Details ....................................................
^P& urses
Arts
Courses ........................................ ., .....................
Faculty ................................................................
Subject details .....................................................
Aslan Studles (Bachelor of Arts) ..........................
Asssssment Regulations .......................................
Assistance Schemes. Student ..............................
Audiovisual Sewlces (see lnformation
Technology Services)
Australian Studies (Bachelor of Arts) ...................
Austudy .................................................................
Awards (see also Scholarships and Awards)
Applications for degrees and diplomas ................
Postgraduate .......................................................
Bachelor ot Busineas/Bachelor of Arts
(Japanese)(Double Degree) ............................. 12
Biomedical instrumentation
Graduate Diploma ...............................................
Masters ...............................................................
Bookshop ..............................................................
Building Surveying
Bachelor of Technology
Diploma
........................................
...............................................................
Buslness
Caurses ...............................................................
Faculty ................................................................
.....................................................
Subject details
Business Administation
-4 raduate Cert~ficate
-4 raduate Diploma
-Masters (MBA)
.........................................
............................................
.................................................
Centres
Childcare ............................................................
Computer ............................................................
Conference ..........................................................
Short Course .......................................................
Centres (Research and Consulting) (see
Swinbume Centres)
Chaplain .................................................................
Chemical Engineering (Graduate Diploma) ..........
Chemistry (sea Com ter-aided;
Computer-aided ~kwmlstry)
Child-care Centre ..................................................
Civil Engineering
Bachelor of Engineering ......................................
Graduate Diploma (Construction).........................
Clubs and Societies ..............................................
Colloid Science (see Applied Colloid Science)
Community Access Programs ...............................
Compensatory Education ......................................
Computer-aided Chemicitly (Bachelor of
Applied Science ........................ . ...................
Computer-aided Biochemistry (Bachelor
of Applied Science) ...........................................
Computer Centre ...................................................
Computer lnt rated Manufacture
Graduate Dip 7 oma
...............................................
Master of Engineering .........................................
Master of Technology ..........................................
Computer Science
Bachelor of Applied Science - double major ......
Bachelor of Applied Science (Computing and
Instrumentation) ................................................
Graduate Diploma ...............................................
Computer Systems Engineerlng (Graduate
Diploma) .............................................................
Computing (Bachelor of Business) .......................
Computing and Instrumentation (Bachelor of
Applied Science) ................................................
Concession Tlckets ...............................................
Conference Centre ................................................
Construction (Master of Technology) ...................

Cooperative Education
Applied Science ..................................................
Engineering .........................................................
Cooperative Employers (Engineering)..................
Corporate Division ................................................
Corporate Finance (Graduate Diploma) ................
Council. Swinburne ...............................................
Counselling. Student .............................................
Course Codes (see appropriate Faculty)
Courses Offered ....................................................
Departments (see specific Faculties)
Design Centre .......................................................
Design. School of (see Graphic Design)
Directorate .............................................................
Disabled Students .................................................
Counselling .........................................................
Equal Opportunity Office .....................................
Parking ................................................................
Doctor of Philosophy
Applied Science ..................................................
Arts .....................................................................
Business .............................................................
Engineering .........................................................
Statute ................................................................
Double Degree of Bachelor of Business1
Bachelor of Arts (Language) ........................... 129
Economics
Bachelor of Arts ..................................................
Bachelor of Business (Economics . Marketing) ..
Electrical Power and Control. Communication
and Electronicr. Computer Systems (Bachelor
of Engineering) ..................................................
Employment. Student
Part-time and vacation .........................................
Graduate placement and full-time ........................
En ineering (see Chemical Engineering. Civil
Rgineering. Electrical Power and Control.
Communication and Electronic. Computer
Systems. Manufacturing Engineering
Mechanical Engineering)
Faculty ................................................................
Subject details .....................................................
Enrolment Regulations (see also Application
Procedure) .........................................................
Enrolments. Numbers
Full-time and part-time ........................................
Entrance Requirements (see also specific
Faculties)
General
Undergraduate .................................................
Postgraduate .......................................................
Enterprise Innovation (Master) .............................
Entrepreneurship and lnnovation
(Graduate Diploma) ............................................
Environmental Health (Bachelor of Applied
Science) ............................................................
Equal Opportunity Administration (Graduate
Diploma) ............................................................. 132
Equal Opportunity Office ...................................... 12
Examinations (results. appeals. etc.) ................... 26
Exemptions. Applications for (see specific
Faculties)
Faculties
Applied Science .................................................. 41
Arts ..................................................................... 99
Business ......................................................... 141
Engineering ......................................................... 191
Fees ....................................................................... 22
Film and Television School .................................. 277
Bachelor of Arts .................................................. 278
Graduate Diploma ............................................... 279
Finance. Corporate (Graduate Diploma) ............... 152
Financial Assistance Schemes. Student (see Loans.
Student; Assistance Schemes. Student)
Fire Technology (Bachelor of Technology) .......... 204
Graduate Diplomas (see appropriate Faculty)
Graphic Design
Bachelor of Arts .................................................. 273
Diploma of Art ..................................................... 273
School of Design ................................................. 271
Health and Welfare. Student ................................ 8
Historical and Philosophical Studies (Bachelor
of Arts) ............................................................... 106
Housing. Student ................................................ 9
Identity Cards ........................................................ 23
Industrial Chemistry (Graduate Diploma) ............. 55
Industrial Microbiology (Graduate Diploma) ......... 55
lnformation Technology
Bachelor of Information Technology ................... 53. 146
Master of Applied Science ................................... 56
Master of Business ............................................. 155
Master of Engineering ......................................... 209
Information Technology Services ......................... 6
Instrumentation (see Medical Biophysics1
Computing)
Instrumentation. Biomedical (Graduate
Diploma) ............................................................. 54
Insurance. Personal Accident ............................... 14
Italian
Bachelor of Arts .................................................. 109
Double degree of Bachelor of ArtslBachelor
of Business .................................................. 129, 145
Japanese
Bachelor of Arts .................................................. 110
Double Degree of Bachelor of ArtslBachelor of
Business ................................................... 129 145
Graduate Diploma ............................................... 133
Graduate Diploma in Japanese for Professionals 134
Korean (Bachelor of Arts) ..................................... 112
Library and Information Technology Services ..... 5

Literature (Bachelor of Arts) ...............................
Loans, Student .....................................................
Maintenance (Graduate Diploma) .........................
Management (Graduate Diploma of
Engineering) .......................................................
Management Systems (Graduate Diploma) ..........
Manufacturing (Bachelor of Engineering) .............
Chemical .............................................................
Production ...........................................................
Manufacturing Technology (Graduate
Diploma) .............................................................
Map of Campus (see inside back cover of
handbook)
Market Forecasting (Graduate Diploma) ...............
Marketing (Bachelor of Business) .........................
Masters Degree (see also appropriate
Faculty)
Statute (by research) ...........................................
Statute (by publication) ........................................
Mathematics and Computer Science (Bachelor
of Applied Science) ...........................................
Mechanical (Bachelor of Engineering) ..................
Media and Telecommunications Centre ...............
Media Studies (Bachelor of Arts) .........................
Medical Computingllnstrumentation
(Bachelor of Applied Science) ...........................
Operations Research (Graduate Diploma) ............
Organisation Behaviour
Graduate Diploma ...............................................
Master of Business ..............................................
Parking
Car parks ............................................................
Enquiries .............................................................
Permits, etc .........................................................
Philosophy (see Historical and Philosophical
Studies)
Political Studies (Bachelor of Arts) ......................
Postgraduate Studies
Awards ................................................................
Courses (see appropriate Faculty)
Press, Swinburne ..................................................
Prizes (see Scholarships and Awards)
Psychology
Bachelor --.-.
of Arts ..................................................
Graduate biploma in Applied Psychology ............
Master of Arts in Counselling Psychology ............
Psychology and Psychophysiology
Bachelor of Applied Science ...............................
Bachelor of Arts ..................................................
Publicity and Information Unit .............................. 12
Registrar ................................................................ 5
Risk Management (Graduate Diploma) ................. 218
Scholarships and Awards (see also specific
Faculties). ...........................................................
Schools
Design.. ...............................................................
Film and Television .............................................
Short Course Centre, Bookings.. ..........................
Social Statistics (Graduate Diploma) ....................
Societies and Clubs ..............................................
Sociology (Bachelor of Arts) ................................
Sports Association ................................................
Staff (see Swinburne Institute)
Student Services
Administration Office ...........................................
Financial Assistance Schemes ............................
Health and Welfare Unit ......................................
Careers and Course Information ......................
Counselling ......................................................
Employment
Graduate placement and full-time .................
Part-time and vacation ..................................
Health ..............................................................
Housing ...........................................................
Loans.. .............................................................
Union (see page 14 for complete list)
Appeals and Advocacy Unit .............................
Cafe.. ...............................................................
Clubs and Societies .........................................
Coffee Shop .....................................................
Contactllnformation Desk .................................
Insurance Personal Accident ............................
Legal Advisor ...................................................
Office ...............................................................
Radio Station ...................................................
Reading Room .................................................
Tool Library ......................................................
Subjects (see appropriate Faculty)
Surveying Building (see Building
Surveying)
Swinburne, George (Founder) ..............................
Swinburne Centres
Applied Colloid and Bio-colloid Science ...............
Applied Neurosciences ........................................
Biomedical Instrumentation .................................
Computer Integrated Manufacture .......................
Com~utinq . - Productivity Institute ..........................
Design Centre .....................................................
Energy Systems Engineering ...............................
Housing and Planning .........................................
Industrial Democracy ...........................................
Laboratory for Concurrent Computing Systems ...
Marketing Strategy ..............................................
Media and Telecommunications ..........................
National Korean Studies ......................................
Psychological Services ........................................
Science Education ...............................................
Science Shop ......................................................
Taxation Research and Advisory Centre ..............
Urban and Social Research .................................
Women's Studies ................................................

Swinburne Institute
Academic Board ..................................................
Coat of Arms .......................................................
Corporate Division ...............................................
Council ................................................................
Directorate ..........................................................
Eastern Campus at Mooroolbark .........................
Faculties (see Faculties above)
Geographical location ..........................................
History .................................................................
Press ...................................................................
Project Offices .....................................................
Services ..............................................................
Short Courses .....................................................
Staff
Academic .........................................................
Administrative ..................................................
Tool Library ...........................................................
Typing Service ......................................................
Union, Student ......................................................
Urban Research and Policy
(Graduate Diploma) ............................................
Welfare ..................................................................
Word Processing Centre .......................................
Workshops. Central Technical ..............................

SWINBURNE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY (SIT)
S\N 1 N B U R N E SWINBURNE COLLEGE OF TAFE (SCT)
----------.-
Careers Services
Central Technical Workshops
Chemistry Building (CH)
OCTOBER 1991

Swinburrne Einslituts of Te~hnology
John Stresr, Hawthorn, Vac. 3122 Australaa!
ACN
054 US7 48s